VSAT PES General Reference Manual

HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
A Hughes Electronics Company

3000367 - DOC. # FOR HNS SAN DIEGO
8020814 - DOC. # FOR HNS GERMANTOWN
3 MARCH 1991
WITH UPDATE PACKAGE 1 - 27 NOVEMBER 1991
WITH UPDATE PACKAGE 2 - 3 APRIL 1992
WITH UPDATE PACKAGE 3 - 14 DECEMBER 1992
WITH UPDATE PACKAGE 4 - 17 MAY 1993
WITH UPDATE PACKAGE 5 - 7 OCTOBER 1993
WITH UPDATE PACKAGE 6 - 20 APRIL 1994
WITH UPDATE PACKAGE 7 - 16 SEPTEMBER 1994
WITH UPDATE PACKAGE 8 - 28 JUNE 1995
Installation and Service Manual
for
Personal Earth Station TM
General Reference
(including PES model X000 series)
Table of Contents
CHAPTER PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION TO MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-1
2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL EARTH STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-1
3 PES DOCUMENT LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-1
4 COMMUNICATIONS SATELLITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-1
5 SITE PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-1
6 ANTENNA MOUNTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-1
7 ANTENNA ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-0-1
8 ANTENNA ANTI-ICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-1
9 PES MODEL X000 SERIES CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-1
10 SITE COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-1
11 ANTENNA AIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1-1
12 VIDEO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1-1
13 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1-1
14 LED DISPLAY LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1-1
15 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1-1
16 SPECIAL OPERATIONS FOR TRS-80, MODEL 102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1-1
APPENDIX A - PES REMOTE ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1-1
APPENDIX B - INSTALLING PES MODEL 4000 (RECEIVE ONLY)

OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1-1
APPENDIX C - C-BAND FOR X000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1-1
APPENDIX D - PES X000+ PRODUCT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1-1
APPENDIX E - PES 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1-1

PROPRIETARY NOTICE
The information and design disclosed herein were originated by and are
the property of Hughes Network Systems, Inc. Hughes Network
Systems, Inc. reserves all proprietary design, whether or not copyrighted
or copyrightable and/or patented or patentable, all manufacturing,
reproduction, use, and sales rights thereto, and to any article disclosed
therein, except to the extent rights are expressly granted to others. The
foregoing does not apply to vendor proprietary parts.
TRADEMARK NOTICE
TM TM TM TM TM TM
Personal Earth Station , PES , PES 5000 , PES 6000 , PES 8000 , PES 9000 ,
TM TM
Quietroute , and Quikpoint are Trademarks of Hughes Network Systems, Inc.
Copyright  1995 Hughes Network Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved Printed in U.S.A.
SAFETY NOTICE
It is the installation subcontractor’s responsibility to develop a specific

safety plan in accordance with all federal, state, and local requirements.
The warning and paragraph below are examples of the type of
information that should be included in this safety plan.
WARNING
Use a safety harness and lanyard when working on a PES antenna that is
mounted far enough above the ground (or roof) that a fall is likely to
cause injury. Restrict people from entering the area below the antenna to
prevent injury from falling tools or equipment.
Connect the safety harness lanyard to the PES antenna. If necessary, use
a safety rope securely attached to an appropriate point on the roof top (or
other area) to preclude personnel falling as they approach the antenna
before connecting the safety lanyard, as well as after the lanyard has
been removed while personnel are departing the antenna. Inspect the
safety harness each time it is used to ensure integrity of the harness, and
to verify that it is not worn or deteriorated.
6-28-95
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION TO MANUAL
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL
This manual provides installation and service information for the Hughes Network Systems (HNS)
Personal Earth Station (PES )1 products installed at remote sites. The emphasis of this manual is the PES
TM
Model X000 series including PES Model 6000, Model 8000 and to a lesser extent Model 9000 and PES
TM TM TM TM TM
5000 (PES 5000 , PES 6000 , PES 8000 , and PES 9000 ).
This manual is divided into chapters and sections.
Chapter 2 section 1 provides a brief introduction to the Personal Earth Station (PES). Chapter 2 section 2
provides a PES remote product identification summary including PES 5000, PES Model X000 series,
PES Type 2, PES C-Band, and PES (Type 1).
Chapter 3 lists PES documents. Chapter 4 provides an introduction to communications satellites.
Installation considerations and procedures are provided in chapters 5 thru 12.
Chapter 13, Operation, provides two sections: normal operation and operational modes/special functions.
Chapters 14 and 15 provide LED display lists and troubleshooting information. Chapter 16 gives special
operation instructions for a particular site commissioning computer (TRS-80) used in conjunction with
PES products.
Appendix E contains detailed information concerning the PES 5000 system.
The letters TBD in the manual mean "to be determined."
1.2 APPLICABILITY
This manual is intended for both installers and customer service representatives and applies principally to
Personal Earth Station model X000 series. Other PES remote products are mentioned and contrasted with
model X000 series with references to the appropriate manuals or field service bulletins.
1.3 UPDATES TO MANUAL

This manual is to be updated on a section by section basis. Each manual section and appendix is dated.
The date appears in the upper right-hand corner of the first page of each section or appendix. Table 1-1 is
a list of effective manual sections and appendices.
1.4 PAGE NUMBERING

The pages are numbered in a three-digit format: Chapter-section-page number within each section. For
example, 1-2-3 means chapter 1, section 2, page 3.
1PES TM TM TM TM TM
, PES 5000 , PES 6000 , PES 8000 , AND PES 9000 are trademarks of Hughes Network Systems, Inc.
1-1-1
PES GENERAL REFERENCE MANUAL
Table 1-1. List of Effective Manual Sections as of June 28, 1995
Date of Latest
Effective Section
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION TO MANUAL
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
CHAPTER 2. INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL EARTH STATION
1 Integrated Satellite Business Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91

2 PES Product Identification Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
3 PES Circuit Card Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16-94
4 RF Unit for Model X000 Series & PES 5000 Outdoor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
CHAPTER 3. PES DOCUMENT LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
CHAPTER 4. COMMUNICATIONS SATELLITES
1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
CHAPTER 5. SITE PREPARATION
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
2 Approvals/Permits and Equipment Location Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
3 Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14-92
4 Antenna Beam Pointing Accuracy and Design Wind Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
CHAPTER 6. ANTENNA MOUNTS
1 Antenna Mount Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91

2 Plate Mast Mount (PMM) and Wall Mount (WM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
3 Attached Roof Mount (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3-92
4 Non-Penetrating Mast Mounts Overview and Ballast Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27-91
5 5.5 ft x 5.5 ft Non-Penetrating Mast Mount (NPMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
6 8 ft x 8 ft Non-Penetrating Mast Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
7 NPMM 10-ft x 10-ft Open Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
8 14-foot Hexagon NPMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
9 Cross Mast Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
10 Ridge Mast Mount (RMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27-91
CHAPTER 7. ANTENNA ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
1 0.75M and 1.0M Rectangular Antenna Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91

2 1.2M Quick Repoint Antenna Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
3 Assembling and Aligning Prodelin 1.8M Quick Repoint Antenna
(Alignment Rod Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
4 Assembling Self-Aligning 1.8M Quick Repoint Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14-92
5 Assembling and Aligning Prodelin 2.44M Quick Repoint Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14-92
6 Maintenance for Antennas and Mounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
1-1-2
CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION TO MANUAL
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION
Table 1-1. List of Effective Manual Sections as of June 28, 1995 (Continued)
Date of Latest
Effective Section
CHAPTER 8. ANTENNA ANTI-ICING
1 Anti-Icing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95

2 Anti-Icing for 1.0M Rectangular Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
3 Anti-Icing for 1.2M Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
4 Prodelin/Raychem 1.8M and 2.44M Half Backshell Anti-Icing System . . . . . . . 6-28-95
CHAPTER 9. PES MODEL X000 SERIES CABLING
1 Cabling Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91

2 IFL Cabling (Standard Run) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
3 IFL Cabling (Extended Run) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
4 RF Unit Earth Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
5 Connecting User Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16-94
6 Cabling Video Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20-94
7 HNS Pre-Fabricated Cables and Related Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16-94
CHAPTER 10. SITE COMMISSIONING
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27-91
2 Determining the Site Commissioning Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
3 Entering the Site Commissioning Parameters - Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
4 Fine-Adjusting the Timing and Power Offsets - Ranging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
CHAPTER 11. ANTENNA AIMING
1 Overview and Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27-91

2 Setting Polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
3 Setting Antenna Elevation to Computer Elevation Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
4 Setting Antenna Azimuth to Computed Azimuth Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
5 Using Install Mode to Refine Antenna Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
CHAPTER 12. VIDEO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TBD
CHAPTER 13. OPERATION
1 Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95

2 Operating Modes and Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
CHAPTER 14. LED DISPLAY LIST
1 Introduction to PES LED Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95

2 IFM LED Code Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
3 Port Card LED List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
4 IF LED Code List - PES 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
1-1-3
Table 1-1. List of Effective Manual Sections as of June 28, 1995 (Continued)
Date of Latest
Effective Section
CHAPTER 15. TROUBLESHOOTING
1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
CHAPTER 16. SPECIAL OPERATIONS FOR TRS-80, MODEL 102 . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91
APPENDIX A - PES REMOTE ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
APPENDIX B - INSTALLING PES MODEL 4000 (RECEIVE ONLY)

OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
APPENDIX C - C-BAND FOR X000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14-92
APPENDIX D - PES X000+ PRODUCT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20-93
APPENDIX E - PES 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95
1-1-4
3-5-91
CHAPTER 2
INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL EARTH STATION
Section 1
INTEGRATED SATELLITE BUSINESS NETWORK
1.1 GENERAL
The Personal Earth Station (PES) is a complete data and voice telecommunications terminal supporting
two-way access via satellite to centralized computer and telephone exchange facilities. In addition, some
models of the PES can also receive video signals when equipped with an optional satellite television
signal receiver.
1.2 INTEGRATED SATELLITE BUSINESS NETWORK SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The HNS Integrated Satellite Business Network (ISBN )2 is a private two-way transmission system for
TM
data and voice traffic between a central site (the Hub) and many remote locations (the Personal Earth
Stations). All ISBN traffic is carried digitally between the Hub and remote PES via one or more
transponders aboard a geostationary satellite. The ISBN can also distribute analog video to remote
television receivers.
A single, large, sophisticated Hub station supports many small PES stations. The Hub-to-PES direction
of transmission is termed the "outroute," while the PES-to-Hub transmission is termed the "inroute."
Since the remote stations have small antennas and low transmit power levels, the inroute signals are
relatively weak. The Hub, with its high power amplifier, transmits a sufficiently strong signal for
reception by the small remote stations, and the large Hub antenna with its large receive gain compensates
for the weak signals transmitted by the remote stations.
The Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) outroute is a 512 or 128 kbps continuous bit stream, consisting of
concatenated (i.e., linked together) variable length packets. The Hub ports are polled regularly, according
to class of service, with each port allowed to transmit some or all of its queued packets before the next
port is permitted to transmit. Each port transmits the packets in a first-in-first-out manner.
The ISBN inroute, from the remote stations to the Hub, consists of multiple, independent Frequency
Division Multiple Access (FDMA)/Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) 128 or 64 kbps bit streams.
Inroute data is packetized and transmitted as bursts. The assignment of time slots in which each user is
permitted to transmit their burst of traffic is centrally controlled at the Hub and can be tailored to the
needs of each user.
2ISBNTM
is a trademark of Hughes Network Systems, Inc.
2-1-1
3-5-91
Section 2
PES PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SUMMARY
2.1 PES MODELS AND TYPES

Use figure 2-1, table 2-1 and the following pages to identify PES remote products in order to select the
appropriate documentation and replacement parts.
Table 2-1. PES Types and Models

Outdoor Radio Interfacility Link Reference,
Type or Model Indoor Unit and Feed (IFL) Cable Page No.
PES Model 4001 Indoor Unit- 1 slot R/O Coax Appendix B
PES Model 4004 Indoor Unit- 4 slots Receive Only
PES 5000 Model 5000 Indoor Unit PES 5000 Coax 2-2-6 and
Height: 4-1/4" Outdoor Unit Appendix E
Integrated Port Card
PES Model 6000 Model 6000 Indoor Unit RF Unit Coax 2-2-8
Height: 4-1/4"
Port Card Slots: 1
Height: 7-1/4"
Port Card Slots: 4
PES X000+ Series Model 6000 or 8000 RF Unit-LS Coax Appendix D
PES X000 Series, High Density Chassis RF Unit, Coax FSB 1138
PES X000+ Series Height: 15.75" RF Unit-LS
PES Model 8013 Port Card Slots: 13
Height: 19-1/2"
Port Card Slots: 2
PES X000 Series PES Model 6000 RF Head Coax 2-2-14 and
C-Band or 8000 Indoor Unit (C-Band for Appendix C,
X000 Series) page C-1-1
PES Type 2 Digital Interface Outdoor Unit Coax 2-2-16
Unit/O (DIU/O) (ODU)
Height: 7-1/4"
Port Card Slots: 3
PES C-Band Digital Interface Outdoor Coax 2-2-18
(Type 2 based) Unit/O (DIU/O) Equipment
Height: 7-1/4" (ODE)
Port Card Slots: 3
PES (Type 1) Digital Interface RF Head 9 twisted pair 2-2-20
Unit (DIU) (box shaped)
Height: 5.2"
Port Card Slots: 4
2-2-1
TYPE 1 RF HEAD
DIU
PORT IOC AEU

CARDS CARD IFL 9 TWISTED PAIR
BOX
BACKPLANE
OUTDOOR
TYPE 2 UNIT
DIU/O (ODU)
PORT IOC IDM RFB COAX IFL

CARDS CARD CARD CARD
BACKPLANE
PES MODEL X000 SERIES

MODEL 8000
RF UNIT
PORT IFM COAX IFL

CARDS CARD
IOC
CHIP
BACKPLANE
PES MODEL X000+ SERIES

MODEL 8000
IFM PLUS RF UNIT-LS

PORT
(IFM+) COAX IFL (RFU-LS)
CARDS
CARD
IOC OR
CHIP
BACKPLANE
ABBREVIATIONS RF UNIT
AEU - AUXILIARY ELECTRONICS UNIT (RFU)
DIU - DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT, PES TYPE 1 INDOOR UNIT
DIU/O - DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT/O, PES TYPE 2 INDOOR UNIT
IDM - INDOOR DEMODULATOR
IFL - INTERFACILITY LINK CABLE
IFM - INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY MODULE
IOC - INROUTE OUTROUTE CONTROLLER
ODU - OUTDOOR UNIT
RF - RADIO FREQUENCY
RFB - RADIO FREQUENCY BOARD
RFU - RADIO FREQUENCY UNIT
PES3-1116
2-2-2 Figure 2-1. PES Types and Models

CHAPTER 2 - INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL EARTH STATION
SECTION 2 - PES PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SUMMARY
PES 5000
PES 5000 INDOOR UNIT
OPTIONAL LAN
PES 5000
INTERFACE OUTDOOR UNIT
IPC TRM COAX IFL
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
PLUG - IN CARD CARD
PLC
BUILT - IN
PLC
PS31832.fh3
Figure 2-1. PES Types and Models (Continued)
As shown in figure 2-1, the physical appearance of the PES outdoor radio differs with PES types and
models. The RF Unit is used for PES Models 6000, 8000, and 9000. Throughout this manual, the term
"PES Model X000 series" is used to refer to PES Models 6000, 8000, and 9000 when a feature, part, or
procedure is common between them. PES model 4000, receive-only, is covered in appendix B. PES 5000
is covered in appendix E.
Each outdoor radio type (RF Head, ODU, RF Unit, and PES 5000 outdoor unit) can only operate when
connected to the proper corresponding PES indoor unit (DIU,DIU/O, PES Model X000 series indoor unit,
and PES 5000 indoor unit, respectively). PES indoor units for the various types and models generally
have a similar physical appearance and generally can accommodate the same types of port cards for data
and voice. The PES 5000 indoor unit differs in the respect that it does not accept the physical port cards
common to other PES X000 series products (other than Port Level Conversion Modules, PLCs).
2.1.1 DISTINGUISHING PES MODEL 8000 AND PES TYPE 2

The PES Model 8000 and PES Type 2, indoor units are very similar in physical appearance. Use the front
panel nameplate, the rear panel appearance, the model and part numbers to distinguish between these two
units, because they will only operate when connected to the proper outdoor equipment. The front panel
nameplate for PES Type 2 has the letters "DIU/O" while PES Model 8000 does not. The PES model
8000 has an LED display in the lowest portion of the window while the DIU/O does not.
PES Model 8000 PES Type 2
TM TM
Front Nameplate Personal Earth Station Personal Earth Station DIU/O
LED Display IFM - LED in lowest slot RFB - no LED in lowest slot
Part No. 1012638-XXXX 3000060-XXXX
Rear Panel Has "USER PORTS" marking only Has "IOC-IDM" marking
Markings Has "DIAG PORTS" markings
Has "USER PORTS" markings
Rear Panel IFM has CONFIG RJ-11 jack IOC has DIAG/NORMAL/COMM
Identifying Feature switch
Outdoor Radio PES X000 series RF Unit - Ku-Band PES Type 2 ODU only
RF Unit-LS - Ku-Band Ku band or C band
or
PES X000 series RF Head - C-Band
2-2-3
PES MODEL 8000 INDOOR UNIT

PERSONAL EARTH STATION 
HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
l
0
PERSONAL EARTH STATION 
USER PORTS
TEST CONFIG
AUTO
COMM
IFL VIDEO
TO RF UNIT
CAUTION: TURN OFF POWER BEFORE CONNECTING/DISCONNECTING IFL CABLE
PES3-1227 CONNECT TO MODEL X000 SERIES RF UNIT ONLY
Figure 2-2. PES Model 8000 Indoor Unit Includes IFM which Connects to RF Unit
2-2-4
PES3-1237
Figure 2-3. PES Type 2 Digital Interface Unit/0 Includes RFB which Connects to PES Type 2 ODU
2-2-5
2.2 PES MODEL 5000

DESCRIPTION: PES 5000 provides data communications, but not voice. The PES 5000 indoor unit has
its own built-in port card functions provided by the integrated port card (IPC). Thus, the PES 5000
indoor does not accept the physical port cards common to other PES X000 series products. The PES
5000 indoor unit has a built-in Port Level Conversion Module (PLC) which provides two RS-232 data
ports (also now designated as EIA-232 ports). In addition, an optional plug-in PLC can be added to
provide two more data ports for a total of four. The PES 5000 is capable of accepting an optional Local
Area Network (LAN) interface circuit card for Ethernet or for Token-Ring. The PES 5000 indoor unit
may operate only in conjunction with the PES 5000 outdoor unit as pictured in 2-4. The PES 5000
system is capable of receiving both analog and digital Television Receive-Only (TVRO) satellite video
broadcast signals.
IDENTIFYING FEATURES: The PES 5000 indoor unit has a distinctive curved front panel which is
marked: "Personal Earth Station 5000". The PES 5000 outdoor unit can be identified by its vertical fins
and by its part number markings. The PES 5000 indoor unit does not have a power switch. Remove the
power cord from rear socket or wall socket to disconnect power.
OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT: PES 5000 Outdoor Unit with appropriately sized PES antenna. The
satellite footprint determines the required antenna size for a given location, with a slightly larger antenna
required if analog video reception is desired.
CONFIGURATION EDITOR VERSION: Requires version 4.0.

MANUALS: PES General Reference Installation and Service, throughout & Appendix E
DATA RATES: Outroute: 512 kbps -compatible with other PES outroutes
Inroute: 64 or 128 kbps

Note: The PES 5000 inroute modulation technique differs from all other PES products. Therefore PES
5000 inroutes must operate on a separate inroute frequency than other PES inroutes and must have the
appropriate burst channel demodulator (BCD) equipment at the Hub. If the proper BCD equipment and
separate inroute frequencies are provided, a PES customer can include a mix of PES 5000 remotes and
other PES X000 series remotes.
Table 2-2. PES 5000 Indoor Unit Standard Configurations

HNS Input Plug-in Option
Chassis Assy Voltage PLC Card
No. (Vac) Socket Slot Comment
1017512-0001 110 <empty> <empty> includes 2 EIA-232
ports, expandable to 4.
See Appendix E.
1017512-0002 110 to 240 <empty> <empty> includes 2 EIA-232
ports, expandable to 4.
See Appendix E.
2-2-6
PS31830.fh3
5/16"-18 MOUNTING
HARDWARE
HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
Subsidiary of
Personal Earth Station 5000
Hughes Aircraft Company
CAUTION: DISCONNET POWER BEFORE

INSTALLING OR REMOVING OPTION CARD
PORT 3 PORT 1
AUTO
COMM PORT 4 MAINTENANCE PORT 2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: UL PES
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference
and (2) this device must accept any interference  5000
received, including interference that may cause LISTED
undersired operation. I.T.E. 4N11 P/N: 1017512-0001 CAUTION: DISCONNET POWER
I N P U T: BEFORE CONNECTING OR
100-120V~  S/N: 0012
47-63Hz 3A DISCONNECTING IFL CABLE
TVRO OUT MADE IN USA LR103668 REV: B IFL
PS31742.FH3
PS31742.FH3
Figure 2-4. PES 5000 Outdoor Unit, Rectangular Feedhorn, and PES 5000 Indoor Unit
2-2-7
2.3 PES MODEL 6000

DESCRIPTION: PES Model 6000 provides data communications. If the PES Model 6000 is equipped
with the VDPC port card, it can provide both data and voice communications with some restrictions as to
the maximum data rate. PES Model 6000 can use the smaller antenna sizes (0.75M and 1.0M) which are
less conspicuous, and are easier to install. These smaller antenna sizes are sufficient because the Model
TM
6000 can be set to receive a 128 kbps spread spectrum outroute signal, called the Quietroute . These
smaller antennas are, in general, insufficient for video reception, even though the RF Unit and PES Model
6000 have the required circuitry for Ku-band video reception. The single port-card indoor unit can be
used in receive-only applications (appendix B), for PES X000 series C-band applications (appendix C), or
TM
for X000+ series applications (appendix D). Quietroute is not available with PES 6000+.
IDENTIFYING FEATURES: The height of PES Model 6000 indoor unit is 4-1/4 inches. The indoor
unit is marked with model number 6000 on the rear panel.
OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT: RF Unit with 0.75M, 1.0M, or 1.2M quick repoint antennas being the most
TM
popular choices for Quietroute . The PES 6000 can operate with any size PES antenna.
CONFIGURATION EDITOR VERSION: Requires version 3.0 or higher.

MANUALS: PES General Reference Installation and Service
PES Model 6000 Indoor Unit Installation and Maintenance Manual, Doc. No. 8020688
TM
DATA RATES: Outroute: 128 kbps w/ outroute spread spectrum (Quietroute ), 128 kbps, or 512 Kbps
Inroute: 64 kbps, 128 kbps, or 256 kbps
Table 2-3. PES Model 6000 Indoor Unit Standard Configurations

HNS HNS Input
Configuration Chassis Assy Voltage Slot 1
No. No. (Vac) (top) Slot 2 Comment
1012639-0002 1011872-0010 110 MP with 384K with IFM
RS-232 PLC 1 qty
and two-port adapter
1012639-0004 1011872-0010 110 MP with RS-422/ IFM
RS-485 PLC 1 qty
1012639-0005 1011872-0010 110 MP with 1M with IFM
RS-232 PLC 1 qty
1012639-0010 1011872-0010 110 X IFM Install port cards/PLCs
per HNS work order.
1017220-0010 1011872-0010 110 X IFM+ See appendix D
1013448-XXXX 1011872-0020 110 to -- IFM Power supply adapts to
240 ac line voltage.
Ku-band only.
1016258-XXXX 1011872-0020 110 to -- IFM Power supply adapts to
240 ac line voltage. C-band
only. See Appendix C.
X means the slot is empty.
2-2-8
PES3-1130
HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

PORT 1 PORT 2 l
0
TEST CONFIG
AUTO
COMM
IFL VIDEO
TO RF UNIT
PES3-1223
Figure 2-5. RF Unit, Rectangular Feedhorn, and PES Model 6000 Indoor Unit with Two-Port Adapter
2-2-9
2.4 PES MODEL 8000

DESCRIPTION: PES Model 8000 provides data communications, and optionally may also provide
voice communications and Ku-band video reception. The PES Model 8000 receives a 512 kbps unspread
outroute signal. In designated strong signal areas, the PES 8000 may have a 1.0M antenna. In other areas
a 1.2M,1.8M, or 2.4M antenna is used, depending upon the "footprint" strength of the received satellite
signal. The four port-card indoor unit can be used in receive-only applications (appendix B), for PES
X000 series C-band applications (appendix C), or for X000+ series applications (appendix D).
IDENTIFYING FEATURES: The 7-1/4" high PES Model 8000 indoor unit has a front panel nameplate
TM
reading: PERSONAL EARTH STATION . Note that the nameplate does not include the letters
"DIU/O." The rear panel is marked with the 8000 model number.
OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT: RF Unit, with 1.0M, 1.2M, 1.8M, or 2.4M quick repoint antenna. For sites
designated for video reception, as a general rule the antenna is 1.8M or larger.
CONFIGURATION EDITOR VERSION: Requires version 3.0. or higher.

PES Model 8000 Indoor Unit Installation and Maintenance Manual, Doc. No. 8020697
DATA RATES: Outroute 512 kbps unspread
Inroute 128 kbps

HNS HNS Input
Configuration Chassis Assy Voltage Slot 1 Slot 5
No. No. (Vac) (top) Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 (bottom) Comment
1012638-0001 1012068-0010 110 X X X DP IFM
1012638-0002 1012068-0010 110 X X X MP with RS-232 IFM
PLC qty 1 and
1 junction box
1012638-0004 1012068-0010 110 X X X MP with RS-422 IFM
PLC qty 1 and
1 junction box
1012638-0010 1012068-0010 110 X X X X IFM Install port cards and
PLCs per HNS work
order.
1017221-0010 1012068-0010 110 X X X X IFM+ See appendix D
1012751-XXXX 1012068-0020 110 to -- -- -- -- IFM Power supply auto-
240 matically adapts to
range of input ac
voltages. Ku-band
only.
1016180-XXXX 1012068-0020 110 to -- -- -- -- IFM Power supply auto-
240 matically adapts to
range of input ac
voltages. C-band
only. See Appendix
C.
X means empty slot.
2-2-10
PES3-1125
HU
NE
TW
ORGH
K
SY
ST
ES
EM
S
PE
RS
ON
AL
EA
RT
HS
TA
TIO
PES3-1239 N
Figure 2-6. RF Unit, Conical Feedhorn, and PES Model 8000 Indoor Unit
2-2-11
2.5 PES MODEL 9000

DESCRIPTION: PES Model 9000 provides data communications and optionally may provide Ku-band
video reception, but does not offer voice communication. The PES Model 9000 indoor unit not only
includes a VSAT section but also has a section for optional communications server (commserver)
electronics.
IDENTIFYING FEATURES: The distinctive PES Model 9000 indoor unit, shown in figure 2-7, has
the model number 9000 marked on the rear panel.
OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT: RF Unit, with 1.0M, 1.2M, 1.8M, or 2.4M quick repoint antenna. For sites
designated for video reception, as a general rule the antenna is 1.8M or larger.

PES Model 9000 Installation and Service, document number 8020624
Inroute 128 kbps
COMMSERVER SECTION VSAT SECTION
Part Number Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3
1012641-0001 X X X X TP with built-in X IFM

RS-232 PLC qty 1,
plug-in RS-232
PLC qty 1, and
1 junction box
-- IFM
-- IFM
-- IFM
-- IFM
-- IFM
1012444-0001 X X X X X X X
X means slot is empty.
2-2-12
HU
NE
N
E
T
W
TW GH
OR
O
R
K
K
SY ES
ST
EM
S
ED
S
PES3-1240
Figure 2-7. PES Model 9000 Can Include Commserver
2-2-13
2.6 PES X000 SERIES C-BAND

DESCRIPTION: PES C-band provides data communications, and optionally may also provide voice
communications and C-band video reception. The PES X000 series C-band equipment employs the same
indoor single-port card chassis and four-port card chassis as PES X000 series for Ku-band (see appendix
C for IFM EEPROM version). The PES X000 series C-band equipment can be recognized by the outdoor
equipment shown in the figures on the facing page.
IDENTIFYING FEATURES: The PES X000 series C-band equipment uses the same 1.8M and 2.4M
antennas, feed systems, feed supports, feed rod and mounts as PES C-band based on PES Type 2. The
PES X000 series differs by having a PES X000 RF Head (also known as an "HPC/DC" - High Power
Converter/Downconverter). This RF Head, figure 2-9, is identified by its part number (1012383-0001)
and by not connecting to an external voltage regulator. The C-band X000 series RF Head must connect
to a PES X000 series indoor unit only.
OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT: Outdoor equipment with 1.8M, or 2.4M quick repoint antenna.

MANUALS: PES General Reference Installation and Service, Appendix C
DATA RATES: Outroute: 512 kbps unspread
Inroute: 128 kbps
Table 2-6. Indoor Units for PES X000 Series C-Band
HNS Input Number of

Configuration Voltage Port Card Chassis
No. (Vac) Slots Type
1016258-XXXX 110 to 240 1 6000
1016180-XXXX 110 to 240 4 8000
2-2-14
CIRCULAR FEED SYSTEM
RF HEAD
("HPC/DC")
OR LNA
LINEAR
FEED SUBSYSTEM
RF HEAD FOR X000 C-BAND

(ALSO DESIGNATED AS "HPC/DC")
S1-10-PES3-1481
Figure 2-8. C-Band for PES Model X000 Series
Nameplate
TVRO RX
Barcode
150 mm
TX
310 mm 190 mm
180 mm
Pointing
IFL
Ground
GND
Screw
Location
114 ±0.8 mm
(4.49″)
56884 PC5
5/16″ -24 THREAD SIZE 10/06/92
Figure 2-9. PES X000 Series C-Band RF Head
2-2-15
2.7 PES TYPE 2

DESCRIPTION: PES Type 2 provides data communications, and optionally may also provide voice
communications and Ku-band video reception. The PES Type 2 receives a 512 kbps unspread outroute
signal. In designated strong signal areas, the PES Type 2 may have a 1.0M antenna. In other areas a
1.2M, 1.8M, or 2.4M antenna is used, depending upon the "footprint" strength of the received satellite
signal. Thus, the capabilities of PES Type 2 and PES Model 8000 are quite similar; however, PES Type
2 has two capabilities that PES Model 8000 does not. First, PES Type 2 can serve as a special Dial Mode
Backup Unit (DMBU) at a Hub. Second, a PES Type 2 DIU/O can be connected to an Expansion Digital
Interface Unit, EDIU (as described in Field Service Bulletin 1090) in order to provide fifteen port card
slots and/or to extend the distance from the antenna.
IDENTIFYING FEATURES: The PES Type 2 indoor unit, designated the Digital Interface Unit/O, is
TM
7-1/4" high and has a front panel nameplate reading: PERSONAL EARTH STATION DIU/O. Note
the presence of the letter "DIU/O." The outdoor radio for PES Type 2, the Outdoor Unit (ODU), has a
somewhat cylindrical shape as shown in figure 2-10.
OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT: ODU with 1.0M, 1.2M, 1.8M, or 2.4M antenna. For sites designated for
video reception, as a general rule the antenna is 1.8M or larger. The 1.8M quick repoint antenna has been
the most frequently installed antenna size for PES Type 2.
CONFIGURATION EDITOR VERSION: Version 2.0 or version 3.0.

MANUALS: Service Manual for Personal Earth Station Type 2, TM 3000127
Installation Manual for Personal Earth Station Type 2, TM 3000126
Inroute 128 kbps
Table 2-7. DIU/O Standard Configurations
Configuration Bottom Top

Assembly Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1
3000060-0010 X X X X X X
3000060-0001 RFB IDM IOC DP X X
3000060-0002 RFB IDM IOC MP+ X X

3000060-0003 RFB IDM IOC MP* DMC X
3000060-0020 RFB IDM IOC X X X
etc.
X means that the slot is empty.
MP+ means a multiport card with one RS-232 PLC and one junction box.
MP* means a multiport card with four RS-232 PLCs and two junction boxes.
2-2-16
HU
NET
W GH
ORK
SY
ST
ES
EM
S
PES3-1242
PE PE
RS RS
ON ON
AL AL
EA EA
RT
HS RT
TA HS
TIO T
N  ATIO
DIU N 
/O DIU
/O
PERSONAL EARTH STATION  DIU/O
Figure 2-10. ODU, Conical Feedhorn, and PES Type 2 DIU/O Indoor Unit
2-2-17
2.8 PES C-BAND (BASED ON PES TYPE 2)

DESCRIPTION: PES C-band provides data communications, and optionally may also provide voice
communications and C-band video reception. These C-band units have an indoor unit that is an adapted
PES Type 2 DIU/O. PES C-band can be easily recognized by the distinctive outdoor equipment shown in
the figure on the facing page.
IDENTIFYING FEATURES: The PES C-band indoor unit, designated the Digital Interface Unit/O, is
TM
7-1/4" high and has a front panel nameplate reading: PERSONAL EARTH STATION DIU/O. The
C-band DIU/O is marked with the number listed below. The outdoor radio for PES C-band, is cabled to
the feedhorn and associated equipment. The PES C-band (based on PES Type 2) outdoor equipment can
be identified by the voltage regulator attached to the feed support as shown in figure 2-11.
OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT: Outdoor equipment with 1.8M, or 2.4M quick repoint antenna.
CONFIGURATION EDITOR VERSION: Version 2.1, which is a special version for C-band.
MANUALS: Service Manual for Personal Earth Station C-Band, 3000232
Installation Manual for Personal Earth Station C-Band, 3000231
Inroute 128 kbps
Table 2-8. DIU/O Standard Configurations for C-Band

Assembly Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1
3000060-0101+ RFB IDM IOC DP X X

3000060-0201* RFB IDM IOC DP X X
etc.
X means that the slot is empty.
3000060-0101+ means 120 Vac C-band receive and transmit.
3000060-0201* means 220 Vac C-band receive and transmit.
2-2-18
PES3-1243
Figure 2-11. PES C-Band (Based on PES Type 2) Outdoor Equipment (Early Units)
2-2-19
2.9 PES (TYPE 1)

DESCRIPTION: PES Type 1 provides data communications, and optionally may also provide voice
communications and Ku-band video reception. PES Type 1 includes a box shaped RF Head, an outdoor
Auxiliary Electronics Unit (AEU), and an indoor Digital Interface Unit (DIU). For most applications, the
PES Type 1 receives a 512 kbps unspread outroute signal. The AEU ordered determines the data rates
(refer to Field Service Bulletin 1042).
The DIU has 4 port card slots. An optionally supplied PES Type 1 Expansion Digital Interface Unit
(EDIU) provides 15 port card slots.
IDENTIFYING FEATURES: The PES Type 1 indoor unit, designated the Digital Interface Unit, is
TM
5.2" high and has a front panel nameplate reading: PERSONAL EARTH STATION DIU. The
outdoor radio for PES Type 1 is the box shaped RF Head. The AEU box mounted on the mast or antenna
cross arm is another identifying feature of PES Type 1.
OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT: RF Head with AEU on 1.8M, or 2.4M antenna. The 1.8M antenna has
been the most frequently installed antenna size for PES Type 1. As a general rule antennas installed for
PES Type 1 do not have the quick repoint feature.
CONFIGURATION EDITOR VERSION: Version 1.5, version 2.0, or version 3.0

MANUAL: Installation and Service Manual for Personal Earth Station, TM 70040B-1
Table 2-9. PES Type 1 DIU Standard Configurations

Assembly Type Slot 5 Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1
200060-1 120 vac RT X X X X IOC

200060-3 120 vac RT X X X X X
200060-2 220 vac RO X X X X IOC
200060-4 220 vac RO X X X X X
RT = receive and transmit

RO = receive only
2-2-20
PES3-1244
Figure 2-12. PES (Type 1) includes RF Head, Auxiliary Electronics Unit (AEU), and DIU
2-2-21
9-16-94
9-16-94
SECTION 3 - PES CIRCUIT CARD IDENTIFICATION
Section 3
PES CIRCUIT CARD IDENTIFICATION
3.1 GENERAL
All PES type I, type II, 4000, 6000 and 8000 indoor units provide port card slots. For example, the PES
Model 6000 indoor unit has one port card slot. The PES EDIU has fifteen port card slots. In most all
cases (except PES 2000), the circuit cards intended for port card slots are compatible with different PES
types and models. Generally, these port cards provide the interface to customer data or voice equipment.
Table 3-1 lists the circuit card types presently available for port card slots.
The PES also includes circuit cards which prepare the data for transmission to the satellite and process
signals received from the satellite. These circuit cards can be specific for a PES model or type. Table 3-5
lists these PES model or type specific circuit cards.
For purposes of this manual, the letters used to designate the circuit cards (for example, DP for data port
card) are the letters printed on the card ejector handle.3 Because the ejector handle is not visible when the
PES indoor unit is assembled, circuit card types can be identified by their rear panel switches and
connectors as listed in the tables and shown in figure 3-1.
3.2 CIRCUIT CARDS FOR PORT CARD SLOTS

All installed PES indoor units have at least one port card (DP, MP, TP, CPC, VDPC or VDP) as listed in
table 3-1. Each port card has user communication and ISBN control/status monitoring functions. The
port card receives outroute data packets from the IFM/IOC for a local user port including port-specific,
group-specific, or global control packets (which it processes internally). Additionally, it receives the
outroute synchronization packet (which contains network state variables required for all control
processing). In the inroute direction, the port card accepts and processes user data, transmitting it to a
unique port address at the Hub, and generates control requests or control/command responses sending
them to common control port addresses at the Hub.
The VP TEL, VP PBX, and DMC circuit cards occupy port card slots but do not perform all the above
functions.
3.2.1 DATA PORT CARDS (DP)

The DP provides the interface to the user’s digital equipment. The DP card provides a single RS-232
serial data port interface. The Hub downloads software to the DP for the specific digital communications
protocol required. Data port cards will support the common user data rates of 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 kbps
with protocol processing, and up to 56 kbps in a "bit transparent" data mode. The exact data rate at a
remote port can be selected by the operator at the Hub.
3Elsewhere in the PES system the data port card, DP, may be referred to as a remote data port card, RDPC. Also, the two-card
voice port set may be referred to as "a remote voice port card, RVPC," even though it is comprised of two cards.
2-3-1
Table 3-1. Circuit Cards for Port Card Slots
Card Type Also

(Ejector Handle Commonly Part Functions Rear Panel
Letters) Called Number(s) Provided Identifying Features
Data Port Card RDPC 29840-8 1 - RS232 port 1 female DB-25

(DP) 71263-8 1 - modem backup port 1 male DB-25
200228-3 (DIAG)nostic port ALT/BYPASS/NORM
switch
Multiport Card MPC 3000038-0001 Up to 8 ports 2 - 78 pin connectors

(MP) 3000038-0002 (for PES Model 6000,
covered by 2 female
DB-25 connectors of
two-port adapter)
Turbo Port Card TPC 1012076-0001 Up to 4 ports 1 - 78 pin connector

(TP) (original style) plus special functions 1 - DB9 connector
1015338-0001 such as Ethernet LAN 1 - RJ-45 connector
(later style) or Token-Ring LAN 1 - BNC connector
Compact -- 3000812-0001 Up to 4 data ports 2 female DB-9

Port Card (original version 1 78-pin connector
(CPC) or factory
rework style)
3001279-0001
(revised version)
Voice Data -- 3000882-0001 1 CELP voice port 1 RJ-11 connector

Port Card (original version) Up to 4 data ports 1 RJ-45 connector
(VDPC) 3001477-0001 1 78-pin connector
(later version)
Voice Data Port VPC, 29840-9 RELP voice functions 1 male DB-25
(VDP) RVPC 71263-9 for associated (DIAG)nostic port which
200228-4 VP TEL or VP PBX is not used in the field
Voice Port, VP TEL 71283-5 Interface to RJ-11 jack

Telephone telephone
(VP TEL)
Voice Port, Private VP PBX 71283-4 Interface to PBX 1 - DB9 connector

Branch Exchange
(VP PBX)
Dual Voice Grade DMC 1011116-0001 Two modems DIP switch

Modem Card 2 - RJ-11 connectors
(DMC) 2 - 10-pin RJ connectors
2-3-2
USER PORT DIAG PORT

(FEMALE) (MALE)
BYPASS
DATA PORT CARD (DP) ALT NORM
(Also Called RDPC)
MULTIPORT CARD (MP)
PORTS 5-8 PORTS 1-4
TURBO PORT CARD (TP)
COMPACT PORT CARD (CPC)

P2 P1 P1 - P4
VOICE DATA PORT CARD (VDPC) J1 J2 J3

(Operates Without VP TEL or VP PBX)
RJ-45
RJ-11 (TELEPHONE)
DIAG PORT
VOICE DATA PORT (VDP)

(Requires VP TEL or VP PBX)
MODULAR TELEPHONE JACK RJ-11
2-WIRE VOICE PORT

CARD (VP TEL)
4-WIRE VOICE PORT

CARD (VP PBX)
12345678
DUAL VOICE GRADE MODEM open
CARD (DMC) J1 J3 J2 J4
SW1 RESET TELCO RS232 TELCO RS232
PS31256.fh3
Figure 3-1. Using the Indoor Unit Rear View to Identify the Circuit Card Type
2-3-3
3.2.2 MULTIPORT CARD (MP)

The MP provides interfaces to the user’s digital equipment. The MP provides two, four, six, or eight
serial data communications links. These data ports may have the following interface standard: RS-232,
modem backup style RS-232, V.35, RS-422 or other standards or capabilities as developed. The number
of MP user data ports and the interface type are determined by daughter boards called Port Level
Conversion (PLC) modules on the MP. Each PLC provides two user ports. Table 3-2 lists PLC types.
The MP supports user data rates of 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 kbps with protocol processing (asynchronous) or
up to 64 kbps in synchronous mode. In certain applications the MP acts as a Packet Assembler/
Disassembler (PAD).
PLC
MP
PS31744.fh3
Figure 3-2. Multiport Card, HNS P/N 3000038-0002
2-3-4
3.2.3 TURBO PORT CARD (TP)

The TP also provides interfaces to the user’s digital equipment. In a manner similar to the MP, the TP
provides two or four serial data communications links. Two of these ports are always RS-232 (built-in
PLC). The next two data ports (plug-in PLC) may have the following interface standard: RS-232,
modem backup style RS-232, V.35, RS-422 or other standards or capabilities as developed. The TP
employs PLCs of two different physical sizes (the smaller size accommodates the same PLC types as the
MP and a larger physical size, called LAN PLC). The larger physical size PLCs provide special interface
functions such as Ethernet Local Area Network or Token-Ring Local Area Network. For detailed
information concerning turbo port card variations, refer to FSB1129A.
PART NUMBER STICKER

ON BOTTOM OF CARD
OP
EN
DIP
SWITCHES
CIRCUIT CARD TRACES VISIBLE
IN AREA UNDER LAN PLC AND
ON BOTTOM OF CIRCUIT CARD
TP
TURBO PORT CARD, ORIGINAL STYLE - HNS P/N 1012076-0001

S5-X-PES3-1601
Figure 3-3. Turbo Port Card, Original Style, HNS P/N 1012076-0001
PART NUMBER STICKER

ON BOTTOM OF CARD
OP
GROUND PLANE IN AREA
EN
UNDER LAN PLC AND ON
DIP BOTTOM OF CIRCUIT CARD
SWITCHES (CIRCUIT TRACES
NOT VISIBLE)
TP
TURBO PORT CARD, LATER STYLE HNS P/N 1015338-0001

S5-X-PES3-1602
Figure 3-4. Turbo Port Card, Later Style, HNS P/N 1015383-0001
2-3-5
Table 3-2. Port Level Conversion (PLC) Modules
Type Part Number Size - Applicable to Comment
RS-232 3000066-0001 Small - MP, TP, Provides two RS-232 ports

CPC, VDPC or OBW
RS-422/RS-485 1012327-0001 Small - MP, TP, Provides two RS-422/

CPC, VDPC or OBW RS-485 ports
Modem Backup 3000206-0001 Small - MP, TP, Provides one RS-232 port A
("Fail Safe PLC") CPC, VDPC or OBW and one metallically connected
backup port B for use during
space link failure.
Can be operated to provide
two RS-232 ports with
special wiring for port B
V.35 1013130-0001 Small - MP, TP, Provides two V.35 ports

CPC, VDPC or OBW
Ethernet Local 1012171-0001 Large LAN PLC Position on board jumpers.

Area Network - TP only Special cabling considerations
Token-Ring Local 1013061-0001 Large LAN PLC Position on board jumpers.

Area Network - TP only Special cabling considerations
(TLAN)
2-3-6
3.2.4 COMPACT PORT CARD (CPC)

The CPC also provides interfaces to the user’s digital equipment. In a manner similar to the MP, the CPC
provides two or four serial data communications links. Two of these ports are always RS-232 (built-in
PLC). The next two data ports (plug-in PLCs) may have the following interface standard: RS-232,
modem backup style RS-232, V.35, RS-422 or other standards or capabilities as developed. Refer to
FSB1127B for detailed information on the compact port card.
DIP SWITCHES REVISED VERSION

CPC HAS ADDED
LOAD RESISTOR
2.5 OHMS 25 WATT
CPC
PS31718.FH3
Figure 3-5. Revised Version Compact Port Card, Factory Rework Style,
HNS P/N 3000812-0001
2
W
DIP SWITCHES
JUMPER
R
42
W2 MUST BE
IN PLACE
CPC
REVISED
PS31719.FH3
CPC HAS
ADDED
LOAD
RESISTOR
Figure 3-6. Revised Version Compact Port Card, HNS P/N 3001279-0001
2-3-7
3.2.5 COMPARING VOICE CARD TYPES

The ISBN now offers a selection between two different voice encoding/decoding methods: the CELP
method implemented by the newer voice data port card (VDPC) and the RELP method implemented by
the older voice data port (VDP, or also occasionally referred to as "VPC" or "RVPC"). Be sure to install
or replace the correct voice circuit card type for a given site. Note that it is possible for a given customer
to have VDPCs at some remote sites and VDPs at other sites if the hub is so configured.
These two card types use different methods of encoding/decoding voice signals and therefore are not
interchangeable in the field. Table 3-3 contrasts these card types. Hub hardware and software
configuration define which card type (VDPC or VDP) is required at a particular remote site. Exercise
care when installing or replacing voice cards, because the names VDPC and VDP are similar. Verify part
numbers.
3.2.6 VOICE DATA PORT CARD (VDPC)

The VDPC, figure 3-7, employs the CELP voice encoding/decoding method to provide a telephone voice
channel while occupying a single port card slot. Table 3-4 lists daughter cards for the VDPC. FSB1128
provides detailed information concerning the VDPC.
PLC Interface
(Option)
Fax Interface Module (FIM)

P/N 1015012-0001
OP
EN
DIP
SWITCHES
Central Office Line Card
600 ohm (COLC)
(2-Wire, RJ-11 configuration)
TEST CONNECTOR P/N 3000888-0002
(FACTORY USE ONLY) Insulating
Material
PART
NUMBER LABEL
OR
VDPC
Tie Trunk Line Card (TTLC)

(4-Wire, RJ-45 configuraton)
P/N 3000885-0001
VOICE/DATA PORT CARD - HNS P/N 3000882-0001

PES3-1605
Figure 3-7. Voice Data Port Card (VDPC)
2-3-8
Table 3-3. Comparing Voice Card Types

Remote Circuit Card Voice/Data Port Card Voice Data Port
Ejector Handle Marking VDPC VDP
Other Names for Card -- "VPC" or "RVPC"
Part Number(s) 3000882-0001 29840-9
3001477-0001 71263-9
200228-4
Year First Introduced 1993 1987
Voice Encoding/Decoding CELP - Code Excited Linear RELP - Residual Exciter
Algorithm - Bandwidth Predictive - 5.6k - EVIM Linear Predictive - 16k - VIM
Required - Companion Hub (aka Low Rate Voice - LRV) .
Circuit Card or or
64k PCM 64K PCM
Additional Item Required for Daughter Card Circuit Card in Adjacent Slot
Voice Port - Tie Trunk Line Card (4-wire) VP PBX (4-wire)
or or
- Central Office Line Card VP TEL (2-wire)
(2-wire)
Number of Ports Provided 1 Voice Port 1 Voice Port
with Additional Items Up to 4 Data Ports 0 Data Ports
1 Diagnostic Port - Factory
Use Only
Dialing Method Touch Tone DTMF or Touch Tone DTMF Only
Rotary Dial
Reference FSB1128 PES General Reference
Manual, Chap. 13, Sec. 1.4
Voice User’s Guide, and Chap. 15, Sec. 1.6,
Doc. # 8017870 Doc. # 8020814
PES Remote Installation and

Service Manual, Appendix F
HNS-W Doc. # TM70040B-1
HNS-E Doc. # 8014272
Bandwidth Required for FAX With FIM, presently can be 64k
set for: 5.6k or 9.6k
Without FIM or bypassing
FIM, 64k
Rear Panel Connectors J1 - RJ-11 1 Male DB-25 for
J2 - RJ-45 (DIAG)nostic Port - Factory
J3 - 78 Pin for Junction Box Use Only
Voice Code Software Downloaded "over-the-air" Stored in ROM
Distribution
2-3-9
Table 3-4. Daughter Cards for VDPC
Required Daughter Cards:

Type Part Number Comment
COLC - Central Office Line 3000888-0002 RJ-11 Enabled, RJ-45 Disabled. This 600 ohm version
Card - 600 ohm is applicable for U.S. telephones and most
international. Check with telephone company of
country in question that telephones are 600 ohm.
COLC - Central Office Line 3000888-0001 RJ-11 Enabled, RJ-45 Disabled. This 900 ohm version
Card - 900 ohm is only required for unusual situations such as 900 ohm
telephones (if any) or some cases of two-wire trunk
interface to a PBX.
TTLC - Tie Trunk Line Card 3000885-0001 RJ-11 Disabled, RJ-45 Enabled. E&M Types 1 thru 5,
either trunking side (PBX) or signaling side (Network),
jumper settable.
Optional Daughter Cards:

FIM - FAX Interface Module 1015012-0001
PLC - Port Level Conver- --
sion Data Cards as follows:
RS-232 3000066-0001 Provides two RS-232 ports.
V.35 1013130-0001 Provides two V.35 ports.
RS-422/RS-485 1012327-0001 Provides two RS-422/RS-485 ports
Modem Backup 3000206-0001 Provides one RS-232 port A and one metallically
("Fail Safe PLC") connected backup port B for use during space link
failure. Can be operated to provide two RS-232 ports
with special wiring for port B. Refer to PES General
Reference Manual, Chapter 9, Section 5.
3.2.7 VOICE PORTS (VDP WITH VP TEL OR VP PBX)

The VDP voice port implements a special method of reducing and reconstructing an analog speech
waveform to/from digital format so that a minimum number of bits may be transmitted between stations.
This method is called the Residual Exciter Linear Predictive (RELP) vocoder algorithm. The RELP
algorithm permits intelligible voice quality at a medium data rate of 8 to 16 kbps, where a data rate of 64
kbps would be required without RELP.
A VDP RELP voice port is a two-card set. The two cards are immediately adjacent and are joined by a
ribbon cable. A voice port may be for a single telephone (VDP card and VP TEL card) or for a private
branch exchange (VDP card and VP PBX card).
2-3-10
3.2.8 DUAL VOICE GRADE MODEM CARD (DMC)

The dual voice grade modem card has two voice grade modems on one circuit card. These modems are
functionally equivalent to a telephone modem that converts RS-232 signals to audio frequency tones (and
vice versa) for transmission over a telephone line. The voice grade modem of this card operates at 300,
1200, or 2400 bps. The DMC can provide a direct modem-to-modem connection to a user’s data
equipment located some distance from the PES indoor unit. For example, an auto dealer may have an
inquiry device in the parts department that is more than an RS-232 limit of fifty feet from the office that
houses the PES indoor unit.
3.3 PES MODEL OR TYPE SPECIFIC CIRCUIT CARDS

The signal the PES receives from the satellite must be downconverted, demodulated, and decoded. In
addition, the PES must achieve receive synchronization with the signal. The PES must determine the
proper timing for the transmit signal and must encode and modulate signal to be transmitted. These
functions are accomplished by the PES model or type specific circuit cards, table 3-5. Figure 1-1 on page
2-2-2 also shows most of these circuit cards in their respective applications.
3.3.1 INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY MODULE (IFM)

The intermediate frequency module (IFM) is applicable to PES Models 6000, 8000, and 9000 and is
compatible with and connects to the PES Model X000 series RF Unit. The IFM accepts the received
mixed outroute and video signals from the RF Unit, tunes to the appropriate receive frequency,
downconverts the signal, if necessary despreads the signal (required for the spread Quietroute signal),
demodulates and decodes the outroute signal, and sends the processed results to the IOC chip on
backplane. The IFM provides transmit filtering and modulation of the transmit signal. The IFM also
provides monitor and control functions for the PES including an interface for the site commissioning
computer (CONFIG connector), storage of commissioning parameters in EEPROM, and LED display of
PES status. The IFM can be identified by the presence of the flat rear panel with a protruding TEST SMB
connector as shown in figure 3-8B.
3.3.2 INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY MODULE PLUS (IFM+)

The intermediate frequency module plus (IFM+) is applicable to PES models 6000 and 8000 and is
compatible and connects with the PES Model X000 series RF Unit or with the PES Model X000+ series
RF Unit-LS. The IFM+ differs from the IFM in the respect that the IFM+ cannot receive a spread
spectrum signal (Quietroute signal). Appendix D provides information on the IFM+ and X000+ series.
The IFM+ can be identified by the presence of notches above the IFL "N" connector and the VIDEO "F"
connector and by the presence of a recessed SMB TEST connector, figure 3-8C.
3.3.3 BACKPLANE CONTAINING IOC ASIC

PES Model 6000, 8000, and 9000 indoor units include a backplane which contains an inroute/outroute
controller application specific integrated circuit (IOC ASIC or also called "IOC chip"). For PES Model
X000 series, the backplane is a field replaceable part. The IOC ASIC includes the following functions:
• Descramble the outroute bit stream
• Detect CRC error in the outroute
• Acquire and maintain received superframe header synchronization
• Generate system clocks and data packet timing
• Address filter serial outroute data packets and convert to parallel for port cards
• Accept parallel inroute data packets from port card and convert to serial
2-3-11
Table 3-5. PES Model or Type Specific Circuit Cards
Rear Panel
Card Type Part Number(s) Applicable To: Identifying Features
Intermediate 3000290-0001 PES Model 6000 FLAT PANEL

Frequency Module PES Model 8000 IFL N-type connector
(IFM) PES Model 9000 VIDEO "F" connector
(Connects to PES X000 Protruding TEST SMB
series RF Unit only) connector
CONFIG RJ-11 jack
AUTO COMM recessed
switch
Intermediate 1016174-0001 PES Model 6000 NOTCHED PANEL

Frequency Module PES Model 8000 IFL N-type connector
Plus (Connects PES X000+ VIDEO "F" connector
(IFM+) series to RF Unit Recessed TEST SMB
or to RF Unit-LS) connector
CONFIG RJ-11 jack
AUTO COMM recessed
switch
Backplane for 1011998-0001 PES Model 6000 --

PES 6000 (includes
IOC ASIC)

PES 8000 (includes
IOC ASIC)

PES 9000 (includes
IOC ASIC)
Inroute/Outroute 29836-3 PES Type 2 DIAG/NORM/COMM

Controller Card 71261-3 (jumpered to IDM), switch
(IOC) 200260-3 PES Type 1 RFT I/O port female DB-25
200260-4 (cabled to AEU) DIAG port male DB-25
Indoor 1010111-0001 PES Type 2 - Ku band INSTL/NORM/LPBK

Demodulator switch
(IDM) 1010111-0001 PES Type 2 - C-band IDM-IOC port female DB-25
(Revision N or higher) DIAG port male DB-25
RF Board 1009847-0056 PES Type 2 - Ku band IFL N-type connector

(RFB) (connects to PES VIDEO "F" connector
Type 2 ODU only) MOD TEST SMB
connector
1011506-0004 PES Type 2 - C-band
(no video converter)
1011506-0005
(with video converter)
2-3-12
• Scramble inroute data and provide Forward Error Correction encoding

• Generate and insert a preamble sequence for the inroute packet.
The IOC ASIC, in contrast to the IOC circuit card, does not include a programmable microprocessor and
does not provide the general monitor and control functions for the PES. For PES Model X000 series, the
general monitor and control functions are handled by the IFM.
The PES Model X000 series backplane accepts port cards and the IFM card. It is incompatible with and
does not accept the RFB, IDM, and IOC circuit cards.
3.3.4 RADIO FREQUENCY BOARD (RFB)

The radio frequency board (RFB) is applicable to PES Type 2 Ku-band (or if the proper part is specified
to PES Type 2 C-band) and is compatible with and connects to the PES Type 2 outdoor unit - ODU (or to
PES Type 2 C-band outdoor equipment). Figure 2-3 on page 2-2-5 shows the rear view of the RFB.
Refer to the appropriate PES Type 2 manual.
3.3.5 INDOOR DEMODULATOR (IDM)

The indoor demodulator (IDM) is applicable to PES Type 2 Ku-band (or if the proper part is specified to
PES Type 2 C-band). The IDM connects to the RFB and to the IOC circuit cards. Refer to the
appropriate PES Type 2 manual.
3.3.6 INROUTE OUTROUTE CONTROLLER CIRCUIT CARD (IOC)

The IOC circuit card is applicable to PES Type 1 and PES Type 2 (both Ku-band and C-band). For PES
Type 1 applications, the IOC circuit card connects to the outdoor auxiliary electronics unit (AEU). For
PES Type 2 applications, the IOC circuit card connects to the IDM via a rear panel jumper. The IOC
circuit card provides general monitor and control functions and numerous other functions in PES Type 1
and Type 2 indoor units. Refer to the appropriate PES Type 1 or 2 manual. From the indoor unit rear
view, an IOC is identified by the presence of a DIAG/NORMAL/COMM switch as shown in figure 3-8A.
2-3-13
NORMAL
NORMAL
DIAG COMM DIAG COMM IOC
A) IOC INDICATES PES TYPE 1/TYPE 2
PROTRUDING SMB
CONNECTOR
TEST
CONFIG
P/N 3000290-0001
AUTO
IFM
VIDEO COMM
IFL
CONNECT TO RF UNIT (RFU) ONLY
B) IFM INDICATES MODEL X000 SERIES
RECESSED SMB
CONNECTOR
TEST
IFL P/N 1016174-0001 VIDEO CONFIG IFM+

AUTO
COMM
CONNECT TO RF UNIT (RFU) OR RF UNIT-LS (RFU-LS)
C) IFM+ FOR MODEL X000+ SERIES

PES3-1271
Figure 3-8. Indoor Unit Rear Views Identify Type 1/Type 2 and Model X000 Series
2-3-14
6-28-95
Section 4
RF UNIT FOR MODEL X000 SERIES
& PES 5000 OUTDOOR UNIT
4.1 GENERAL - KU-BAND

Figure 4-1 shows the Ku-band RF Unit for PES Model X000 series other than PES 5000. This RF Unit is
used with PES Model 6000, Model 8000, and Model 9000. Table 4-1 lists part numbers for various
versions of this RF Unit. The figure shows a conical feedhorn for a circular antenna. The RF Unit is
shipped without the feedhorn. The appropriate feedhorn is included with the antenna. For PES 5000, the
radio is designated the PES 5000 Outdoor Unit, figure 4-5 and table 4-2.
LOW NOISE CONVERTER (LNC)
100
90
80
C
LN
70
60
IF
50
+
100
40
G NG
TI
0
90
IN
PO 20
80
10
70
60
50
40 20
10
0
ING ER ble
DO NOT USE
30 RN W g ca
WA IN PO
MA ne
ve con
cti
n
CABLE AS A
mo dis
Refore
be ES
S HANDLE
GH
EM
ST
SY
HU
K
OR l
NE
TW na n
rso tio
Pe Sta
rth
Ea
NAME PLATE
P/N 1011836-0001
S/N
BAR CODE REV
UNDER BRACKET 0.5W
PES3-1269
Figure 4-1. PES Model X000 Series Other Than PES 5000, RF Unit
(0.5 and 1.0 Watt Units) for Ku-Band
2-4-1
4.2 IDENTIFICATION AND DESCRIPTION - KU-BAND RF UNIT

As shown in figure 4-1, a nameplate with HNS part number, serial number, revision level, and transmit
power is located on the front of the RF Unit. This information is also given in bar code format on the
bottom of RF Unit bracket.
As shown in figure 4-2, the RF Unit consists of a Low Noise Converter (LNC) and a High Power
Converter (HPC) with an Orthomode Transducer (OMT). The LNC provides the receive functions, while
the HPC provides the transmit functions including upconversions and solid state power amplification.
The OMT separates/combines the receive and transmit signals based on their polarizations which are
ninety degrees apart.
APPROX.
LNC 12 GHz
(Receive)
OMT
PES MODEL X000
SERIES INDOOR UNIT APPROX.
14 GHz
IFL CABLE HPC
IFM RX: 950 - 1450 MHz (Transmit)
TX: 170 - 190 MHz
Monitor and Control FEEDHORN
PES3-1270 RF UNIT
Figure 4-2. Ku-Band RF Unit Major Functions
The HPC determines the maximum transmit power of the RF Unit. The RF Unit may have a maximum
transmit power level of 0.5 watt, 1 watt, or 2 watts, depending on the unit ordered. The physical
appearance of the 0.5-watt and 1-watt units is shown in figure 4-1. The 2-watt unit is similar but has a
longer profile. The PES X000 or X000+ RF Unit or RF Unit-LS transmit power is adjustable under
software control.
For the PES Model X000 RF Unit, the Low Noise Converter (LNC)4 is a separate integrated unit located
on the top of the RF Unit. The LNC amplifies and downconverts the received Ku-band downlink signals
to the standard L-band video frequency range of 950-1450 MHz for use on the IFL cable. This eliminates
the need for a video converter/translator in the indoor unit. (This differs from the PES Type 2 ODU
which uses frequencies of 500-1000 MHz for the received information on the IFL.) The LNC used on the
RF Unit determines the receive frequencies as listed in table 4-1.
Because the IFL frequencies differ for the Model X000 series and PES Type 2 ODU, the PES Model
X000 series RF Unit can only operate when the IFL connects to a PES Model X000 series indoor unit
containing an intermediate frequency module (IFM or IFM+). (Note: PES 5000 indoor units do not
contain an IFM or IFM+.) Likewise the PES Type 2 ODU can only connect to an RFB.
As shown in figure 3-11 on page 7-3-17, the RF Unit bracket is shipped with two sets of mounting
hardware: screws with nuts in the slotted holes and M8 metric screws. The two sets are included to
accommodate different antennas. On a given antenna, only one set is used. As shown in figure 4-6,
mounting hardware for the PES 5000 outdoor unit differs. Instead of M8 hardware, 5/16" diameter 18
4Elsewhere in the PES system, the LNC may be referred to as a low noise amplifier and block downconverter (LNB). For
purposes of PES, LNC and LNB mean the same thing.
2-4-2
SECTION 4 - RF UNIT FOR MODEL X000 SERIES
threads-per-inch bolts fit into threaded holes in the PES 5000 outdoor unit mounting bracket. Exercise
care. Although these two screws sizes are similar, they are not compatible. Forcing the incorrect size
could cause stripped threads.
Table 4-1. Ku-Band RF Units for PES Model X000 and Model X000+ Series
(Other Than PES 5000)
Downlink
Radio HNS Receive Transmit Comment/ Connects
Type Part Number Frequency Power Notes to
RFU 1011836-0001 11.70-12.20 GHz 0.5 Watt U.S. Ku band IFM or IFM+
RFU 1011836-0003 12.25-12.75 GHz 0.5 Watt European Intl IFM or IFM+
RFU 1011836-0005 10.95-11.70 GHz 0.5 Watt Asian Intl IFM only
RFU-LS 1011836-0002 11.70-12.20 GHz 0.5 Watt U.S. Ku band1 IFM+ only
RFU-LS 1011836-0004 12.25-12.75 GHz 0.5 Watt European Intl1 IFM+ only
R/O 1011836-0017 11.70-12.20 GHz Receive Only U.S. Ku band IFM or IFM+
R/O 1011836-0018 12.25-12.75 GHz Receive Only European Intl IFM or IFM+
R/O 1011836-0019 10.95-11.70 GHz Receive Only Asian Intl IFM only
R/O 1011836-0020 11.45-11.70 GHz Receive Only Asian Intl IFM only
R/O-LS TBD TBD Receive Only IFM+ only
RFU 1011836-0025 11.70-12.20 GHz 2.0 Watts U.S. Ku band IFM or IFM+
RFU 1011836-0027 12.25-12.75 GHz 2.0 Watts European Intl IFM or IFM+
RFU 1011836-0029 10.95-11.70 GHz 2.0 Watts Asian Intl IFM only
RFU 1011836-0031 11.45-11.70 GHz 2.0 Watts Asian Intl IFM only
NOTE 1. RFU-LS is unable to receive spread spectrum outroute. For spread spectrum
outroute, use RFU with IFM.
RFU-LS is unable to receive 128 Kbps outroute. For 128 Kbps outroute, use RFU.
4.3 RF HEAD FOR C-BAND FOR X000 SERIES

Refer to appendix C for information concerning the RF Head for C-band for X000 series.
2-4-3
4.4 RF UNIT-LS FOR KU-BAND X000+ SERIES

As shown in figure 4-3, the RF Unit-LS (RFU-LS) can be identified by its smaller size LNC. Refer to
appendix D for application information concerning the RFU-LS.
5.5 IN.
LNC
A) RF UNIT (RFU) HAS LARGER SIZE LNC
3.75 IN.
LNC
PES3-1642 B) RF UNIT-LS (RFU-LS) HAS SMALLER SIZE LNC
Figure 4-3. Using LNC Sizes for RFU-LS Visual Identification
2-4-4
SECTION 4 - RF UNIT FOR MODEL X000 SERIES
4.5 PES 5000 OUTDOOR UNIT

The PES 5000 outdoor unit, figures 4-4 thru 4-6, connects to the PES 5000 indoor unit only. The PES
5000 outdoor unit can be distinguished by its vertical cooling fins. As listed in table 4-2, the PES 5000
outdoor unit is available in 0.5 watt and 1.0 watt versions. The transmit power of the PES 5000 outdoor
unit is not adjustable. Appendix E provides additional information.
As shown in figure 4-4, the PES 5000 outdoor unit part number is marked on a metal label on the rear of
the unit. Ignore other part number markings which refer to component parts of the unit.
Table 4-2. PES 5000 Outdoor Units (PES 5000 ODU)
Downlink
PES 5000 ODU 1017668-0001 11.70-12.20 GHz 0.5 Watt U.S. Ku band PES 5000 TRM
PES 5000 ODU 1017668-0004 12.25-12.75 GHz 0.5 Watt European Intl PES 5000 TRM
PES 5000 ODU 1017668-0007 10.95-11.70 GHz 0.5 Watt Asian Intl PES 5000 TRM
CLAMPING SCREW
(+)
90 10 0
100 90
80
80 7
70
0
60
60
50
50
40
40
30
20 30
10 20
10
PART NUMBER IDENTIFICATION

FOR PES5000 OUTDOOR UNIT
(IGNORE OTHER P/N MARKINGS)
PES31864.DRW
Figure 4-4. PES 5000 Outdoor Unit, Rear View
2-4-5
PS31820.FH3
Figure 4-5. PES 5000 Outdoor Unit, Side View
PS31830.fh3
5/16"-18 MOUNTING
HARDWARE
Figure 4-6. PES 5000 Outdoor Unit, Perspective View
2-4-6
6-28-95
CHAPTER 3
PES DOCUMENT LIST
Section 1
GENERAL
The following table provides a summary of ISBN and Personal Earth Station documents. Manuals and
bulletins that apply to a specific PES are noted in the title or are clearly designated. The source of the
document number is listed in the "assigned by" column. In cases where the same document has been
assigned different numbers by HNS-E (Germantown - GT) and HNS-W (San Diego - SD), both numbers
are listed where known.
Table 1-1. PES Document List
Document Assigned End

Manual or Document Number By User*
PES Remote Installation and Service Manual (Type 1) TM70040B-1 SD R

8019204 GT
PES User’s Guide (Type 1) E-204 -- R
PES Type 2 Installation Manual TM3000126 SD R
8015888 GT
PES Type 2 Service Manual TM3000127 SD R
8016119 GT
PES Type 2 User’s Guide 3000142 SD R
PES C-Band Installation Manual 3000231 SD R
8016673 GT
PES C-Band Service Manual 3000232 SD R
8018383 GT
PES Series X000 General Reference Manual 3000367 SD R
8020814 GT
Personal Earth Station Series X000 User’s Guide 8018891 GT R
User’s Guide, Personal Earth Station 5000 8050420 GT R
PES Model 6000 Indoor Unit Installation and Maintenance Manual 8020688 GT R
PES Field Service Bulletins -- SD R
ISBN Traffic Engineering Guide 80019081 GT H
Geographic Hub Redundancy O&M Manual 3000309 SD H
8017177 GT
GT = Germantown, SD = San Diego, *H = Hub, R = PES Remote
3-1-1
Table 1-1. PES Document List (Continued)
Document Assigned End

Manual or Document Number By User*
IllumiNET Operator’s Manual 8017083 GT H

IllumiNET Software Installation Procedure for ISBN R7.X 8017278 GT H
ISBN Data Port Cluster O&M (DPC) 8014386 GT H
ISBN Event Messages 8014767 GT H
ISBN IFSS Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manual 8014342 GT H
ISBN PES Netview/PC User’s Guide 8016336 GT H
ISBN Network Control Cluster (NCC) O&M Manual 8014995 GT H
ISBN Network Sizing Manual 8015573 GT H, R
ISBN Operator Console Screens 8017849 GT H
ISBN Problem Notification/Workaround as of mm-dd-yy 8017689 GT H
ISBN Quick Reference Guide 8015029 GT H
ISBN Remote Troubleshooting Guide 8017850 GT H
ISBN Response Time Program User Manual 8015322 GT R
ISBN SCC Operator’s Guide 8013934 GT H
ISBN Software Installation and Upgrade Procedures 8017585 GT H
ISBN Statistics Reports and Database Description 8017069 GT H
ISBN System Interface Cluster (SIC) O&M Manual 8014754 GT H
ISBN System Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manual 8014993 GT H
ISBN System Operator Console Screens Reference Guide 8017760 GT H
ISBN System Theory of Operation, Release 7.2, Nov. 91 8016986 GT H, R
ISBN Terrestrial Modem Backup User’s Guide 8017893 GT H
ISBN Voice User’s Guide 8017870 GT H
O&M Manual for 4046 QPSK BPSK Modem 8014758 GT H
PES IF Subsystem O&M 8014342 GT H
PES Integrated Asynchronous PAD Operator’s Manual 8016152 GT H, R
GT = Germantown, SD = San Diego, *H = Hub, R = PES Remote
3-1-2
3-5-91
CHAPTER 4
COMMUNICATIONS SATELLITES
Section 1
OVERVIEW
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides basic information about satellites and satellite communications.
1.2 SATELLITES
A communications satellite is a microwave "relay" in the sky. It receives microwave signals at a given
frequency (uplink) and retransmits them at a different frequency (downlink) as shown in figure 1-1. A
satellite must use a different frequency for downlink retransmission; otherwise, a powerful downlink
signal would interfere with the weak uplink or incoming signal. The equipment on a satellite which
receives the signal, amplifies it, changes its frequency, and retransmits the signal is called a transponder.
1.3 SATELLITE TRANSPONDER

Each communications satellite has at least one transponder; however, most modern satellites have many
more (up to 24). The transponder is considered the active component on a communications satellite
because of the various functions it provides in a communications link. It receives, amplifies, changes, and
retransmits each signal within a given bandwidth. Most contemporary transponders handle a frequency
bandwidth between 36 to 50 MHz. The use of a given bandwidth is determined by the earth station
equipment. A PES system operates within the Ku-band (bandwidth) which is between 12 to 14 GHz (12
GHz downlink, 14 GHz uplink).
Figure 1-2 shows the uplink and downlink frequencies associated with the transponders on a SBS satellite
operating in the Ku-band.
1.4 TRANSPONDER POWER

A satellite transponder uses a Travelling Wave Tube Amplifier (TWTA) to amplify its downlink signal.
The TWTA has a limited amount of transmit power at its disposal which is utilized on a frequency
band-by-frequency band basis.
The output (transmit) power from a transponder is directly related to the input (receive) power from a
given earth station. This provides a balanced signal (with regard to signal strength) to each individual
earth station. Therefore, if a received signal frequency band (uplink) has excessive power, the transponder
will increase the power of the corresponding transmitted signal frequency band (downlink). The transmit
signal strength will correspond to the signal strength received at the expense of the other frequency bands.
This would seriously affect the quality of the downlink signal for the given earth station as well as
interfere with other earth stations using the same transponder. The earth station signals with low power
are the first to be lost when the power from another earth station is increased. This phenomenon is called
small signal suppression and requires that every PES’s transmitted signal strength is correctly set so as
not to interfere with other PES stations.
4-1-1
PES-026
Figure 1-1. Example of PES Frequencies
1.4.1 TRANSPONDER FUNCTIONS

A typical satellite transponder may be used to carry any of the following:
1. Telephone Information - up to 24,000 circuits which can be voice or low-speed data.
2. Moderate-Speed Data - a transponder channel capacity can be structured for the following
data rates:
• 16 channels of 1.544 Megabits per second (Mbps)
• 400 channels of 64,000 bps
• 600 channels of 40,000 bps
4-1-2
CHAPTER 4 - COMMUNICATIONS SATELLITES
SECTION 1 - OVERVIEW
TYPICAL SBS SATELLITE FREQUENCY PLAN
SATELLITE BANDWIDTH
500 MHz
KU BAND UPLINK CENTER FREQUENCY, GHz

TRANSPONDER NUMBER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
14.025 14.074 14.123 14.172 14.221 14.270 14.319 14.368 14.417 14.466
KU BAND DOWNLINK CENTER FREQUENCY, GHz

43
MHz 6 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11.725 11.774 11.823 11.872 11.921 11.970 12.019 12.068 12.117 12.166
M-PES-027B
Figure 1-2. SBS Frequencies
3. High-Speed Data - data rates of 50 Mbps.
4. Dedicated Networks - networks which use one of the following access methods:
• Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA)
• Single Channel Per Carrier (SCPC)
• Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
5. Video Conference - digital voice and analog video signals.
6. TV Broadcast - one color television channel and multiple audio subcarriers.
7. Radio Broadcast - analog and digital signals.
1.5 COMMUNICATION SATELLITE FREQUENCIES

In the United States, the Federal Communication Commission (FCC) has the responsibility of assigning
and managing the frequencies used in satellite communications.
Table 1-1 lists the frequency allocations assigned to each bandwidth.
4-1-3
Table 1-1. Frequency Allocations in GHz
Use Downlinks Uplinks

COMMUNICATIONS SATELLITES
Commercial (C band) 3.700-4.200 5.925-6.425
Military (X band) 7.250-7.750 7.900-8.400
Commercial (K band):
Domestic (Ku band) 11.700-12.200 14.000-14.500
International 10.950-11.200 27.500-31.000
11.450-11.700
17.700-21.200
OTHER ALLOCATIONS
Broadcast 2.500-2.535 2.655-2.690
Maritime 1.535-1.542.5 1.635-1.644
Aeronautical 1.543.5-1.558.5 1.645-1.660
TELEMETRY, TRACKING, AND COMMAND
137.0-138.0, 401.0-402.0, 1.525-1.540
Some commercial communications satellites operate within the C-band, using 6 GHz for uplink
transmission and 4 GHz for downlink transmission. This frequency band is shared with many analog and
digital "line-of-sight" microwave systems; therefore, finding an interference-free location for an earth
station using this bandwidth near a metropolitan area is very difficult. Hence, many satellite
communications systems use the Ku-band frequency allocation.
The Ku-band (14 GHz for uplink transmission and 12 GHz for downlink transmission) is reserved for
domestic and international satellite communications. This ensures satellite users that their satellite
communications will be free of interference from terrestrial line-of-site microwave systems.
A portion of the K-band (17 GHz uplink and 21 GHz downlink) is reserved for Direct Broadcast Systems
(DBS) and experimental systems. Table 1-2 provides a summary.
Table 1-2. Satellite Frequency Summary

Orbital
Uplink Downlink Separation
C-Band 6 GHz 4 GHz 4° US, 5° Canada
Ku-Band 14 GHz 12 GHz 2°

K-Band (DBS) 17 GHz 21 GHz Not yet assigned
4-1-4
1.6 GEOSYNCHRONOUS ORBITS

The first communications satellites used an elliptical orbit between 600 to 6200 miles above the earth’s
surface. They traveled around the earth within a few hours; hence, their disadvantage to telecom-
munications. They were within the line-of-sight of the tracking stations for only a brief period of time.
Figure 1-3 plots the time a satellite takes to travel around the earth versus its height. The orbit of 22,300
miles (40,000 km) is special in that a satellite in that particular orbit takes exactly 24 hours to travel
around the earth (the earth’s rotation time). If it orbits directly above the equator and travels in the same
direction as the earth’s rotation, the satellite appears to be stationary over one point on the earth. This
type of orbit is called a geosynchronous orbit and allows the maximum amount of time in which the
satellite and tracking stations remain within the line-of-sight. This apparently stationary satellite is called
a geosynchronous satellite.
ROTATION TIMES OF EARTH SATELLITES IN CIRCULAR ORBITS
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Synchronous satellite
23
22
21
DURATION OF ORBIT (hours)
20
19
18
17
Rotation time of
16
earth satellites
15 in circular orbits
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
5000 10,000 15,000 20,000 25,000
22,300
HEIGHT ABOVE EARTH (miles)
M-PES-025
Figure 1-3. Duration vs. Orbit for Geosynchronous Satellites
4-1-5
1.6.1 ORBITAL INTERFERENCE

In a geosynchronous orbit, there is a limited number of satellites which can be stationed above the the
equator because of the limited number of positions within a 360° circle. If the satellites are positioned too
closely, there is a possibility of "power" or signal strength interference between adjacent satellites in a
geosynchronous orbit. Therefore, satellites must have sufficient angular separation to avoid such
interference.
In figure 1-4 the earth station is transmitting a signal to satellite 2 (SAT2). However, because the earth
station’s antenna beam diverges, a certain portion of the signal will also reach SAT1 and SAT3. This
type of interference requires that the angular separation between satellites (as measured from the earth’s
center) is between 2° and 6° as shown in figure 1-4.
6114
Figure 1-4. Spatial Separation of Satellites
4-1-6
1.6.2 ANTENNA SIZE

The beam width of an antenna is inversely related to antenna size. The larger the antenna, the narrower or
more concentrated the beam. The large Hub antenna in a PES system sends a stronger, more concentrated
signal to the desired satellite without interference to other satellites, while the smaller remote PES antenna
transmits a weak signal to the desired satellite so that other satellites do not receive interference.
Another reason for a large antenna at the Hub earth station is because of the power limitations within a
transponder. A transponder amplifies the weak signal from the PES and sends it to the Hub antenna.
However, the transponder has a fixed gain (signal strength) even after amplification. This means that the
Hub antenna must also be large for sufficient receive sensitivity.
In order to permit the use of a smallest antenna possible at the remote sites, the outroute signal from the
Hub may be spread over a wide band of frequencies within the transponder. This technique, called
spectral spreading, allows the energy of the signal to be distributed over different frequencies and still
remain under a regulatory limit of signal strength per unit bandwidth. If a given outroute is transmitted
with spectral spreading, all of the remote sites that are to receive this spread spectrum outroute should
have their receivers set accordingly.
1.6.3 ANTENNA SIDELOBE POWER LIMITATIONS

!! To provide for the maximum number of satellites, the angular separation between any two adjacent
Ku-band satellites is set (by law) at 2° (degrees) which makes it easy for earth station transmissions to
interfere with satellites adjacent to the one they are currently using. This interference is caused by either
inaccurate antenna pointing or excessive power transmitted in directions other than the main antenna axis.
This power interference in off-axis is called transmit pattern sidelobes (see figure 1-4). PES antennas
must be accurately pointed and transmit power must be limited to keep antenna sidelobe power to within
the limits prescribed by the FCC.
1.7 SATELLITE MOTION

A satellite cannot maintain the exact circular orbit required for an absolutely geosynchronous orbit. Also,
the orbit cannot be maintained exactly in the plane of the equator. These irregularities cause small
apparent motions that are evident throughout the period of a day (see figure 1-5).
The lack of circularity makes the satellite sometimes orbit closer to the earth and sometimes farther from
the earth’s surface. This in turn, causes the satellite to orbit faster and slower around the earth. The
appearance from the earth is that the satellite moves to the east, then to the west, and back to the east
again. This motion takes the satellite approximately ±0.1° east and west from its nominal position.
The fact that the orbit is not exactly parallel to the plane of the equator causes the satellite to appear (from
the earth’s surface) to drift north, then south, and then north again. This motion takes the satellite
approximately ±0.1° north and south from its nominal position.
The combined effect of these two motions is that of a figure-eight path around the satellite’s nominal
position as shown in figure 1-5. The satellite passes through the nominal position twice a day
approximately 12 hours apart. In order for the Hub antennas to operate efficiently, the large (9 meter)
antennas track the satellite motion to keep their narrow beams centered in the satellite’s actual position.
The smaller antennas used by PES remotes have wider beams and do not need to track such
comparatively tiny angular motions.
4-1-7
APPARENT MOTION
OF SATELLITE
(NOT TO SCALE)
S
A) SIDE VIEW
TYPICAL
LONGITUDE
CHANGE
0.1°
TYPICAL
INCLINATION
CHANGE
0.1°
HUB
ANTENNA
0.1°
PES
REMOTE
ANTENNA
1.5°
B) APPARENT MOTION AND RF BEAM DIAMETER
M-PES-032
Figure 1-5. Apparent Satellite Motion
4-1-8
1.8 SATELLITE FOOTPRINT

The angular distribution of a satellite receive gain and transmit power is not uniform, but designed to
provide the greatest gain and power in those areas of the Continental United States (CONUS) that have
the greatest population densities, and therefore have the greatest need for satellite services. The area
covered by the satellite signal is similar to the area illuminated by a light source with the intensity of
illumination not uniform (see figure 1-6).
The major effect of non-uniform gain and power distribution is that stations in a certain area (which have
lower gain and power coverage) will have smaller weather margins, meaning that the signals associated
with these stations will be more susceptible to weather interference and signal loss, while stations with a
higher receive gain and transmit power will not be affected by the same amount of signal loss. A larger
antenna size in the areas of lower gain and power coverage can compensate for lower signal intensity and
therefore improve service.
PES-031
Figure 1-6. Satellite Footprint
4-1-9
1.9 SOLAR EFFECTS

A communications satellite must rely on solar power to perform the various functions required for
telecommunications. Therefore, a satellite may be prone to transmission outages due to a solar eclipse or
solar interference.
1.9.1 ECLIPSE
A satellite is prone to two types of eclipses. The most common eclipse for a satellite is when the satellite
(in a geosynchronous orbit) occasionally falls within the earth’s shadow. While in the earth’s shadow, the
sun is blocked from the satellites solar array. During this time, storage batteries on the satellite will
discharge to provide the power needed for the various loads. Once the eclipse is over, the batteries will
recharge from the satellite’s solar array. This type of an eclipse takes place during spring and fall
equinoxes and can last between 10 to 72 minutes. The least common type of eclipse for a satellite occurs
when the moon’s shadow passes across the satellite similar to a solar eclipse on the earth’s surface.
Service is not affected by this event.
1.9.2 SOLAR INTERFERENCE

A form of outage that does affect service occurs when the sun passes directly behind the satellite. The
sun, being of such a high temperature, is an extremely powerful noise source which can overpower
transmission from the satellite. This type of outage lasts up to 10 minutes on 5 consecutive days, twice a
year, on days near the equinox (March 21 and September 21).
The geometry of this situation means that the actual date and time that solar outages occur will vary with
an earth station’s geographical location. Earth stations further north experience outages a few days earlier
than earth stations further south. Also, earth stations further west experience outages earlier in the day
compared to earth stations further east.
1.10 WEATHER EFFECTS

The water in rain and clouds affects transmission and reception between the satellite and the earth station
by decreasing the signal strength. The Hub station automatically compensates for the attenuation (loss) of
its transmissions by adjusting its transmitted power. However, the PES remote stations have fixed power
outputs. Therefore, as atmospheric attenuation increases (i.e., as rain gets heavier and the clouds denser)
the signal strength reaching the satellite from remotes decreases. This is also true for the received signal
strength from the satellite to the Hub.
1.11 ICE EFFECTS

Ice buildup on the antenna reflector affects transmission and reception between the satellite and the earth
station by decreasing signal strength. Antennas in localities where there is likely to be ice buildup require
anti-icing equipment.
1.12 SIGNAL DELAY

A disadvantage of satellite transmission is that a delay of approximately 270 milliseconds (varies with
each earth station location) occurs when the signal travels to the satellite and then back to the earth
station. This signal delay or propagation may effect the service provided by the satellite and earth station.
A telephone user may wait for the reply of the person on the other end of the link for an extra 540
milliseconds in both directions if the call goes via satellite.
4-1-10
In data transmissions via a satellite terminal, the user will experience a constant increase in response time
of about 540 milliseconds making computer "polling" an inefficient protocol over a satellite link. Polling
is only effective when the propagation and turnaround time is low; therefore, a procedure which requires
protocol signals to travel over a satellite link before the data message is transmitted should be avoided.
1.13 CHANNEL QUALITY

The transmission of digital data over a communications satellite link is subject to the noise and random
errors inherent in the space link portion of the system. The performance of a digital communications link
is measured in terms of the "average bit error rate" at the digital output of the system. Thus, the average
bit error rate can be considered a measure of the overall end-to-end performance of the system including
error correction schemes built into the system.
A specially defined signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) represents the quality of spacelink and the quality of a
signal received at a PES before the signal enters the error correcting circuits and processes.
1.13.1 AVERAGE BIT ERROR RATE

The average bit error rate is determined by dividing the number of bit errors within a given sample by the
number of bits in the sample. For example, if 40 bit errors have occurred in a total of 10,000 bits, the
average bit error rate or probability is 40/10,000 or 4 x 10-3. This particular example bit error rate,
depending upon the data rate for the example link, may render this link nonfunctional.
A bit error "probability" is a function of the data rate, the signal-to-noise ratio present at the earth station
receiver input, and the performance of error correcting schemes built into the system. Therefore, when
the probability of bit error is higher (at higher data rates), a greater signal power is required at the
transmitter to achieve the same bit error rate at the receiver (as at the slower data rates).
1.13.2 SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO

The dependence of bit error probability on data rate for a given signal-to-noise ratio may be removed by
redefining signal-to-noise as
Eb/No = signal power to noise power in bandwidth equal to data rate.
Alternately, this ratio can be viewed as the ratio of the signal energy in one bit (Eb) to noise power in one
cycle of bandwidth (No) termed noise density.
For the PES, this signal-to-noise ratio or Eb/No is given in the decimal range of 5.0 to 12.0 db. This
theoretical Eb/No ratio represents the strength of the transmitted downlink signal as received by the PES
remote relative to the background noise, independent of data rate. A high Eb/No ratio is desirable (e.g., a
ratio of 12 db) and represents a very strong clear signal. An Eb/No ratio of 8 db indicates a satisfactory
signal while operation at an Eb/No ratio of 5 db or below may become marginal.
4-1-11
1.14 SATELLITE ACCESS METHODS

A primary consideration for any communications satellite is to be able to support several transmission
paths simultaneously through the same satellite transponder without confusing the data exchanges.
There are two methods for accomplishing this task in the PES network.
• Frequency-Division Multiple Access (FDMA) allows multiple users to share a transponder
by assigning a particular "narrowband" frequency to each PES remote.
• Time-Division Multiple Access (TDMA) allows multiple users to share a transponder by

restricting each PES remote to transmit in short periodic time slots.
4-1-12
1.14.1 FREQUENCY-DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS (FDMA)

FDMA is a method of using frequency-division multiplexing to provide multiple and simultaneous
transmission to a single satellite transponder (see figure 1-7). In FDMA, the available transponder
frequency bandwidth is divided into non-overlapping frequency bands for each channel (or PES remote)
as shown in figure 1-8. Depending upon the application for the individual PES system, FDMA can be a
very effective method of accessing a transponder within a satellite. The lower section of figure 1-8 shows
that the frequency bandwidth of a given transponder can be divided. In this case, two PES outroutes, each
with up to 31 inroutes, are shown sharing the same transponder by using different frequencies. A
customer may elect to use different outroute data rates for two outroutes. A slower outroute data rate with
spectral spreading allows a smaller antenna to be used at the remote site. Refer to the PES Network Sizing
Manual (document number 5573) when planning how to use the bandwidth of a given transponder.
22.3K MILES
ABOVE EARTH IN
STATIONARY ORBIT.
f3
f1
f2
FDMA TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS
M-PES-028
Figure 1-7. FDMA Transmission
4-1-13
11206
Figure 1-8. Transponder Frequency Allocation
4-1-14
1.14.2 TIME-DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS (TDMA)

TDMA is a method of using time-division multiplexing to provide multiple, but not simultaneous
transmission to a single satellite transponder (see figure 1-9). In TDMA, each PES remote or channel
sends information to the satellite within a specified time slot or burst. However, only one "packet" of
information reaches the satellite at any instant in time. To the transponder, the information appears to be
a continuous stream of transmissions at one frequency from the PES remotes. Depending upon the
application for the individual PES system, TDMA can be a very effective method of accessing a
transponder within a satellite.
In a TDMA network, each station has a buffer that stores its data to be transmitted. With control from a
designated master station (Hub), individual buffers of each transmitter (PES) in the network deliver in
turn stored data in bursts to the satellite. The satellite actually sees these data bits (bursts) as a virtually
continuous transmission stream even though some stations are farther from the satellite than others.
These differences have to be taken into account in calculating transmit and propagation timing
adjustments (ranging).
PES-029
Figure 1-9. TDMA Transmission
4-1-15
1.14.2.1 ALOHA Time-Division Multiple Access - The ALOHA or random access TDMA is another
method of using TDMA to transmit to a satellite transponder (see figure 1-10). Earth stations that use the
ALOHA method fill a transmit buffer and then transmit the contents randomly to the satellite transponder.
Occasionally, some buffer contents reach the transponder at the same time as another buffer’s contents
which causes a "collision" of the data. If this occurs, the transmitted buffer data is lost. However, the
earth stations can compensate for this problem by waiting for an acknowledgement from the receiving
earth station. If the receive station does not acknowledge the reception of the information (within a
specified time period) the transmitting earth station will retransmit the data. NOTE: "Slotted" ALOHA
does permit the transmission of data only at specified time periods.
*
SATELLITE
BUFFER LOADS
1
4
3
2
THE ALOHA SYSTEM SENDS FILLED BUFFERS RANDOMLY
M-PES-030
Figure 1-10. ALOHA Transmission
4-1-16
3-5-91
CHAPTER 5
SITE PREPARATION SPECIFICATION
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 PURPOSE OF THE PERSONAL EARTH STATION TERMINAL

The purpose of the Personal Earth Station terminal is to provide both one- and two-way data and/or
two-way voice communications between a central (Hub) site and many remote locations over a satellite
communications network. Additionally, television signals can be transmitted one way from the Customer
Hub to the remote locations. Each remote location requires a Personal Earth Station terminal
installation.5
1.2 PURPOSE OF THIS SITE PREPARATION SPECIFICATION

The purpose of this document is to provide Customer architects and engineers with the essential
information to prepare the site for basic (or normal) installation of the Personal Earth Station remote
terminals. The information provided includes the following requirements:
• Electrical power
• Environmental conditions
• Physical location and space
• Antenna orientation
• Mounting provisions for the antenna and associated equipment
o Design Wind Loading Data
o Beam Pointing Accuracy
• Field service access
Site preparation tasks should be performed by qualified personnel who are familiar with local codes and
capable of properly applying the data presented in this specification. In some cases, retention of licensed
professionals may be required to provide appropriate evaluation and design services. Due to the loads
placed upon the Personal Earth Station antenna during high-wind conditions, it is absolutely essential that
antenna attaching points and mountings comply with the Design Wind Loading data provided in this
specification, as well as local codes and regulations. The information provided in this document applies
only to HNS Personal Earth Station systems with 0.75-, 1.0-, 1.2-, 1.8- and 2.4-meter antennas. The
antenna size and look angles required for each specific site must be determined, with the assistance of the
assigned HNS Project Engineer, prior to the commencement of site preparation work.
1.3 EFFECTIVITY
This document is effective on the date released and is applicable to the specific products mentioned
within this document. Site preparation requirements for previously offered products may differ
(especially in the case of anti-icing). Site preparation requirements are subject to change.
5Personal Earth Station is a trademark of Hughes Network Systems, Inc.
5-1-1
1.4 PERSONAL EARTH STATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

The Personal Earth Station consists of two groups of components - one group consists of the antenna
(including the RF Unit), and the other adjacent to the office equipment. These indoor and outdoor
components are shown in figure 1-1 and are described below.
SATELLITE
QUICK-REPOINT
ANTENNA
RF UNIT
USER PORTS
HUB UPLINK
TEST CONFIG
AUTO
COMM
IFL VIDEO
TO RF UNIT
MODEL 8000 INDOOR UNIT

(REAR VIEW)
OPTIONAL VIDEO
SATELLITE RECEIVER
EQUIPMENT
(IRD) VIDEO MONITOR
IFL CABLE
JUNCTION
BOX
MODEM TERMINAL MINICOMPUTER MAINFRAME
USER EQUIPMENT
PES3-1295
Figure 1-1. Indoor and Outdoor Components
5-1-2
CHAPTER 5 - SITE PREPARATION SPECIFICATION
1.5 DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT
1.5.1 PES INDOOR UNIT

The freestanding PES indoor unit interfaces the Customer’s data and voice equipment to the RF Unit.
The indoor unit contains the control and monitoring functions for a given remote site. A coaxial
Interfacility Link (IFL) cable runs from the PES indoor unit to the RF Unit providing communications
between the two. An example outline drawing of the PES Model 6000 indoor unit is shown in figure 1-2.
Table 1-1 lists the dimensions of the various PES indoor units. When planning shelf space, floor space,
or mounting brackets for the PES indoor unit, allow nine inches behind the unit for attaching cables
(without violating minimum bend radius requirement). The front grill and rear cooling fan of the indoor
unit must be free of obstructions so that cooling air circulation is not blocked.
17.25 in.
(approx.)
HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
MODEL 6000 1.5 in.

(approx.)
Weight (approx): 22.4 lbs
4.37 in.
(approx.)
17.25 in.
(approx.)
18.75 in.
(approx.)
PES3-1296
Figure 1-2. PES Model 6000 Indoor Unit Outline Drawing
5-1-3
1.5.2 ANTENNAS
Five sizes of Ku-band antennas are available for use at a given Personal Earth Station site - 0.75M, 1.0M,
1.2M, 1.8M, and 2.44M; the size used being determined by the strength of the received satellite signal,
system availability requirements and television capability requirements. Figures 1-3 through 1-8 show
the outlines of these antennas. Dimensions are in inches. The outline drawings may show the radio
differing from the RF Unit supplied.
Various types of antenna mountings are available depending on the installation site. In general, either a
roof, wall or ground mounting can be used. The selection varies by site and depends upon such factors as
the look angle to the satellite, security requirements, physical characteristics of the site, etc. The
configuration selected must provide adequate structural support and rigidity as specified elsewhere in this
document.
1.5.3 RF UNIT
The RF Unit is located on the feed arm assembly in front of the antenna. It provides analog receive and
transmit functions, communicating at IF frequencies with the PES indoor unit. Figure 1-9 provides an
outline drawing of the RF Unit with the rectangular feedhorn as used on the 0.75M and 1.0M antennas.
For the 1.2M, 1.8M, and 2.44M antennas, the RF Unit is fitted with a conical feedhorn.
5-1-4
Figure 1-3. 0.75M Antenna Outline Drawing
PES3-1289
5-1-5
5-1-6

PES3-1290

PES3-1291
5-1-7
5-1-8

PES3-1292

PES3-1306

5-1-9
Figure 1-7. 1.8M Antenna Outline Drawing (Self-Aligning Version)

5-1-10

PES3-1293

RF UNIT with RECTANGULAR FEEDHORN
19.25 in.
(approx.)
10.5 in.
(approx.)
3.5 in.
(approx.) 5.75 in.
(approx.)
Weights (approx)
RF Unit (without Feedhorn): 10 lbs 8 oz
Rectangular Feedhorn: 10 oz
RF Unit (with Feedhorn): 11 lbs 2 oz
8.15 in.
(approx.)
5.0 in.
PES3-1294 (approx.)
Figure 1-9. RF Unit Outline Drawing

5-1-11
1.5.4 OPTIONAL SATELLITE VIDEO INTEGRATED RECEIVER/DECODER

The television (VIDEO) output of the PES indoor unit, when utilized, is connected via a 75-ohm coaxial
cable to an appropriate Satellite Integrated Receiver/Descrambler (IRD) such as the General Instrument
model 2400R or Scientific Atlanta. The IRD receives and descrambles both the video and audio signals
which are scrambled prior to transmission by the customers Hub Earth Station. The Satellite IRD is tuned
to the appropriate satellite transponder channel and converts the input signal to a video signal which is
compatible with a television set. In the event that the signal is not scrambled, the descrambler function is
automatically bypassed internally within the descrambler unit and the signal is routed directly to the
television set. A typical IRD is depicted in figure 1-10. The satellite receiver must be located in close
physical proximity to the television set to allow for operator control.
The output of the IRD is a normal VHF television signal which is selectable for input to the television set
on either Channel 3 or 4. An additional output is also provided for a baseband video monitor. The IRD is
compatible with properly connected video cassette recorder (VCR) units.
PES-180
Figure 1-10. Typical Satellite Integrated Receiver/Descrambler (IRD)
5-1-12
1.6 OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT MECHANICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
MECHANICAL - ANTENNA AND RF UNIT
Assembled Size (approximate) 4’H x 4’D x 3.5’W (0.75M)

4.5’H x 5’D x 4.5’W (1.0M)
5’H x 5’D x 4’W (1.2M dia)
7’H x 8’D x 6’W (1.8M dia)
9.5’H x 6’D x 8’W (2.44M dia)
Weight, pounds (approximate without RF Unit, without antenna mount)
Antenna Size Without Anti-icing With Anti-icing
0.75M 51.5 lbs 71.5 lbs

1.0M 64.5 lbs 94.5 lbs
1.2M 67 lbs 97 lbs
1.8M 204 lbs 264 lbs
1.8M (self-aligning) 184 lbs 244 lbs
2.44M 349 lbs 449 lbs
ENVIRONMENTAL - ANTENNA AND RF UNIT
Operating Wind Velocity < 0.5 dB loss at 45 MPH
Survival Wind Velocity 125 MPH maximum (when installed

upon a proper mounting/foundation)
Operating Temperature -30° to +55°C
Storage and Shipment Temp -50° to +75°C
Cooling Convection
5-1-13
1.7 INDOOR EQUIPMENT MECHANICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

Table 1-1 lists the physical characteristics of the PES indoor units.
Table 1-1. PES Indoor Units - Physical Characteristics
(Depth +
Space for Max. Female
Indoor Unit Height Width Depth Cables) Weight Mounting Connector
PES Model 6000 4.37" 17.25" 18.75" (27.75") 23 lbs Standalone 2 qty,
DB-25,
RS-232C
PES Model 8000* 7.25" 17.25" 17.25" (26.75") Standalone +
PES Model 9000* 19.5" 11.75" 18.0" (27") Standalone +
PES Type 2 Digital 7.25" 17.25" 17.25" (26.75") Standalone +
Interface Unit
(DIU/O)*
Expanded Digital 15.75" 17.75" 17" 100 lbs Standalone +
Interface Unit or rack mount
(EDIU)
Junction Box 8" 4" 2.5" Standalone 4 qty,
with 6-ft cable or wall mount DB-25,
RS-232C
+ = Connectors depend on options ordered - includes at least 1 qty, DB-25 female, RS-232C
* = Unit may include junction box
The environmental* characteristics of the PES indoor equipment are:
Operating Temperature +10 to +40°C
Storage and Shipment Temperature -30° to +50°C
Relative Humidity 10-90%, noncondensing
Cooling Self-contained fans
*Whenever possible, the indoor equipment should be placed in a "dust free" area.
1.8 HNS-PROVIDED EQUIPMENT

The system, as supplied by Hughes Network Systems, will consist of one satellite antenna, one RF Unit,
one PES indoor unit, and mating connectors for the Interfacility Link (IFL) cable. The IFL coaxial cable
will be provided by the HNS installer. An optional video integrated receiver/descrambler (IRD) can be
provided for television reception of Customer network television transmission. Normal antenna
installation utilizes a Customer-provided mast. Paragraph 4.3 provides detailed information about
antenna interface mounting. Optional antenna mounts are listed in table 1-2. Requirements for mounting
rigidity and load data are provided in section 4 of this chapter. Table 1-2 is the parts list for
HNS-provided equipment.
5-1-14
The PES indoor unit is shipped in standard configurations as designated by the -XXXX suffix following
the part number. When a custom configuration is required for a specific site, port cards (data port cards,
multiport cards, turbo port cards, dual modem cards, and/or voice port card sets) and port level conversion
(PLC) modules can be installed in the field when necessary to meet site requirements.
Table 1-2. HNS-Provided Equipment per Remote Site
Part Number Description
INDOOR UNIT (one of the following)
1012639-XXXX PES Model 6000 Indoor Unit

3000060-XXXX PES Type 2 DIU/O
-- NOTE: XXXX denotes a four-digit
designation of standard configuration
circuit cards/interfaces ordered.
RF UNIT WITHOUT FEEDHORN (one of the following)
1011836-0001 Receive/Transmit 0.5W U.S. Ku-band

1011836-0009 Receive/Transmit 1.0W U.S. Ku-band
1011836-XXXX NOTE: XXXX denotes a designation of
various receive/transmit or receive only,
receive frequency, and transmit power options.
ANTENNA WITH CORRESPONDING FEEDHORN

(one of the following)
TM
3000179-0001 0.75M Rectangular Quikpoint
TM
3000172-0001 1.0M Rectangular Quikpoint
TM
3000173-0001 1.2M Circular Quikpoint
TM
TM
3000361-0001 1.8M Circular Quikpoint Self-aligning
TM
5-1-15
Table 1-3. Optional HNS-Provided Antenna Mounts and Adapters
Part Number Description Mast Diameter
ANTENNA MOUNTS (if ordered)
3000354-0001 Attached Roof Mount 2.88"

3000355-0001 Plate Mast Mount 2.88"
3000358-0001 Wall Mount 2.88"
3000357-0001 Universal Mast Mount 2.88"
-- Wall Mount 4"
-- Universal Tripod Mount 4"
-- Wall Mount 6.6"
NON-PENETRATING MAST MOUNTS (if ordered)
3000353-0001 5.5’ x 5.5’ Square 2.88"

3000129-0001 8’ x 8’ Square 4"
3000220-0001 10’ x 10’ Square 4"
3000364-0001 Cross Mast Mount 4"
-- 14-ft Hexagon 6.6"
MAST ADAPTERS (if ordered)
3000356-0001 4" to 2.88" 2.88"

3000356-0002 6.625" to 4" 4"
1.9 INSTALLER-PROVIDED EQUIPMENT

PVC IFL cable and the attaching HNS-supplied connectors between the RF Unit and PES indoor unit are
provided as part of the standard HNS installation service. The cable, with a diameter of up to 0.50 inches,
is a single coaxial cable. For PVC IFL cable, a standard IFL cable type may be used for run lengths up to
530 feet. The terms of the customer contract define the length at which IFL cable becomes an extra cost
item. Plenum style cable is available at extra cost. For plenum style cable, a standard plenum IFL cable
may be used for run lengths up to 350 feet.
NOTE
Although the same cable types are used for both PES Model X000 series
and PES Type 2, the run lengths are different. The run lengths given
here apply to PES Model X000 series only. Refer to Field Service
Bulletin 1062A for PES Type 2 only IFL run lengths.
The installer also supplies 75-ohm coaxial cable and connectors between the PES indoor unit and the
satellite video integrated receiver/descrambler (IRD) in order to provide Customer network television
reception, when these options have been specified.
The installer provides the miscellaneous attaching hardware required to perform the installation.
5-1-16
1.10 CUSTOMER-PROVIDED EQUIPMENT

The customer will provide the cables at the PES indoor unit that connect the Customer equipment to the
PES indoor unit. The PES indoor unit resembles traditional Data Communications Equipment (DCE)
equipment. The PES indoor unit provides one or more data ports depending on the PES indoor unit
ordered, the standard configuration selected, and optional circuit card added in the field. The PES indoor
unit hardware and software must be appropriately configured to accommodate the user’s data and voice
connectors.
The PES indoor unit user port connectors are RS-232-C female connectors allowing connections to many
devices, including those listed in table 1-4, that operate under IBM’s Synchronous Data Link Control
(SDLC) protocol. HNS also offers numerous other protocols. User data rates of 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6
Kbps are supported with protocol processing, and up to 56 Kbps in a transparent data mode.
Table 1-4. PES Indoor Unit Connections to Popular DTE
Controllers Terminals Printers Other
3274-X 3777 3767 Series/1

Series/38
3276-X 6670 System/36
3651 Gilbarco GCAT-2 3650
4680 IBM PC
3705
3725
Voice ports connect to PBX equipment via four-wire E&M signalling, specifically Transmission Interface
Type III, E/M Lead Signalling Interface Type I, where the 4-wire terminal transmits signal battery on the
M Lead, per Bell System Standards. Also supported by the interface is E/M Lead Signalling Interface
Type II, where the 4-wire terminal transmits signal battery via contact closure to the M Lead. (The latter
is most common, and preferred due to better noise immunity.) This allows direct connection to standard
PBX equipment. For detailed installation procedures and specification for 4-wire circuits, please refer to
the HNS Project Engineer and the appropriate PES field service bulletin or technical manual.
A standard telephone may also be connected to the PES indoor unit equipped with the proper voice cards.
This is commonly referred to as two-wire local loop signalling. The Personal Earth Station satellite
network call connection requires Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) signaling using a standard DTMF
telephone. A user can pick up a telephone attached to a remote satellite terminal, obtain a dial tone, and
directly dial an extension on the central PBX at the Hub. Similarly, an extension attached to the Hub can
call a phone attached to the remote satellite terminal. Rotary dial pulse signalling can not be used.
For systems incorporating television transmission, the Customer will provide a video monitor or a
standard television set for use in conjunction with the IRD receiver. The Customer also can provide a
video cassette recorder (VCR) and cabling, if desired, for use in conjunction with this television
equipment.
5-1-17
3-5-91
Section 2
APPROVALS/PERMITS AND EQUIPMENT LOCATION REQUIREMENTS
2.1 APPROVALS AND PERMITS

It is the responsibility of the Customer to obtain all permits, inspections, and approvals required for the
installation of each of the Personal Earth Station remote terminals unless other arrangements are
incorporated into their contract.
This process should begin well in advance of construction to avoid delay of installation and subsequent
operation of the remote terminal.
In addition to standards and regulations referenced elsewhere in this document, each site should conform
to the following standards and regulations in effect at the time of obtaining permits:
• Applicable Local Building Code/Uniform Building Code
• National Electric Code6
• National Fire Codes by the National Fire Protection Association
• Life Safety Code, NFPA 101
2.2 EQUIPMENT LOCATION REQUIREMENTS

The following paragraphs provide the information required by the customer to select appropriate locations
and perform site preparation for the antenna and the PES indoor unit with consideration to such factors as
antenna alignment, security, service access, etc. When selecting potential locations for the PES outdoor
and indoor equipment, consider that the maximum standard type IFL cable run length is 530 feet for PVC,
350 feet for plenum. For cable run length over 50 feet, minimizing cable run length may reduce customer
installation costs.
2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

The Personal Earth Station is designed to operate in most weather conditions, however, snow or ice
accumulation on the antenna reflector can interfere with the dish’s ability to receive and transmit satellite
signals. In climates where ice can form, an anti-icing option is advisable. This anti-icing is obtained by
adding a heater for the reflector.
Other environmental requirements are listed in paragraphs chapter 5, section 1.6 and
chapter 5, section 1.7.
2.4 PHYSICAL SPACE AND SECURITY

It is important that the outdoor equipment not be tampered with and that the antenna have a present and
future free field of view to the satellite. Consider the local conditions. As long as sufficient working
space can be maintained around the antenna, a ground installation often offers the easiest installation, the
6National Electric Code is a Registered Trademark of National Fire Protection Association Incorporated.
5-2-1
best service access, the most protection from winds, the most optimum personnel safety and the most
stable mount. Where ground installations are utilized, a fence constructed to prevent unauthorized access
to the antenna (that does not interfere with the reception/transmission field of view) and trenching for
underground conduit may be required. The Customer should provide security lighting, when appropriate.
When local conditions and requirements dictate the use of a roof or wall mount, it is also essential to
consider such factors as personnel safety, maintenance working space, security, mount stability, etc.
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has adopted the latest guidelines from the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) revising Radio Frequency (RF) radiation exposure levels. See ANSI
specification C95.1-1982. In order to comply with FCC requirements, unqualified personnel are not to be
permitted access to the RF Unit while the equipment has power applied. The location of the antenna
should be in an area which cannot be accessed by unqualified personnel. If this is not possible, other
appropriate security provisions should be taken to preclude unauthorized access such as the construction
of a chain link fence to insure that ANSI specification C95.1-1982 levels are not exceeded when
following proper operating procedures. The customer is to establish proper operating procedures to
preclude direct violation of reasonable safety precautions by authorized or unauthorized personnel. The
customer is to provide security precautions as required to prevent unauthorized personnel from access to
the roof of the building with roof or wall mount antennas.
2.5 ANTENNA INTERFACE MOUNTINGS

The part of the quick repoint antenna Azimuth/Elevation Positioning Assembly which attaches to the
Customer-provided mast or to the antenna mount mast, is identified as the Az/El Assembly and is shown
in figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 shows the Az/El positioner for the 0.75M, 1.0M, and 1.2M antennas. The Az/El
position for the 1.8M antenna is similar in design but is built on a larger scale. The 2.44M Az/El
positioner is likewise larger than the 1.8M. Correspondingly, different mast pipe sizes are required as
listed in table 2-1.
Mast dimensions are given as the outer ("outside") diameter (O.D.) for purposes of PES. Antenna mounts
can be constructed from welded and seamless wrought-iron pipe. The nominal pipe size (used when
purchasing pipe) refers to an approximate inner diameter. Table 2-1 lists nominal pipe sizes and
corresponding actual outside diameters. Pipe schedule refers to a standard for pipe strength. Mast height
must be sufficient for the radio support arm (and any other parts of the antenna) to clear any potential
obstructions as the antenna is rotated 360° in azimuth. The mast must be vertical or be within 5° of
vertical.
If Operational and Survival Design Wind Loads, building design, and/or the particular configuration of
the specific installation dictate a mast or pole of larger O.D., the customer may purchase a standard mast
adapter as listed in table 1-3 or will be responsible for providing a sizing adapter assembly as required to
ensure compatibility between the pole and the antenna canister assembly. If desired and local codes
permit, the adapter may be designed to allow cable access to the inside of the building.
5-2-2
SECTION 2 - APPROVALS/PERMITS AND EQUIPMENT LOCATION REQUIREMENTS
PES3-1288
Figure 2-1. Az/El Positioner Assembly for 0.75M, 1.0M, and 1.2M Antennas
Table 2-1. Antenna Size and Mast Dimensions

Nominal Actual Minimum Maximum Canister
Antenna Pipe Outside Mast Mast Height, Seating
Size Size Diameter Height Pipe Schedule* Depth
0.75M 2-1/2" 2.88" 20" 30" Schedule 40 5"
1.0M 2-1/2" 2.88" 24" 30" Schedule 40 5"
1.2M 2-1/2" 2.88" 20" 30" Schedule 40 5"
1.8M 3-1/2" 4.0" 36" 42" Schedule 40 10"
2.44M 6" 6.625" 48" 72" Schedule 80 12"
* Masts exceeding maximum height may require a heavier schedule pipe or a larger
pipe size for adequate strength. Masts exceeding maximum height must be
approved/designed by a licensed professional engineer. Refer to chapter 5, section
4, Antenna Beam Pointing Accuracy and Design Wind Loading.
5-2-3
2.6 ANTENNA ALIGNMENT
2.6.1 GEOSYNCHRONOUS ORBIT

Communications satellites are positioned in a geostationary orbit 22,300 miles over the equator at a given
longitude. This makes it easy for anyone within the satellite footprint trying to orient an antenna towards
the satellite to find it, given the coordinates. The geosynchronous orbit also allows the antenna, once
pointed, to remain fixed. For an antenna directly on the equator, the satellite will appear overhead
varying from due east to due west. For locations north of the equator, the satellite is progressively
"lower" and nearer to the southern horizon as the viewer progresses north.
2.6.2 LINE OF SIGHT

There must be a direct line of sight from the antenna to the satellite. Trees, fences, walls, buildings and
hills will block the signal. Consider not only present conditions, but future possibilities, e.g., trees grow
and a vacant lot can have a new building in a few years.
2.6.3 ALIGNMENT
A Personal Earth Station antenna receives and transmits signals to and from a satellite in a very narrow
beam width. It is very critical that the PES antenna be pointed and remain pointed exactly at the satellite
to obtain good reception. Not only must the antenna be initially aligned correctly, the antenna must stay
aligned during all operational conditions. Specific antenna beam pointing requirements are provided in
chapter 5, section 4 of this document and must be strictly adhered to in all cases.
2.7 SERVICE ACCESS

All Personal Earth Station equipment should be installed in locations which allow normal field service
access without utilizing special equipment, such as hoist trucks, ladders, etc. Dish alignment and location
should be positioned such that service can be performed on the RF Unit. Safe access must also be
available to the azimuth, elevation, and polarization adjustments. The customer should avoid locating the
antenna in an area that would hinder servicing of the antenna. For extended pole or wall mounts,
consideration should be given to locations that permit the RF Unit to be positioned parallel to the building
without interference to a free field of view to the satellite, and allows a 360-degree turning radius by the
antenna.
With roof, wall, or extended pole mounts, the mast should be no higher than needed to allow the dish to
clear the building structure for 360 degrees. Safety of service and installation personnel is also an
important requirement. Sites which are unsafe to access will not qualify for Field Service coverage until
corrective action is taken by the customer to correct the unsafe condition. Installations which may be
considered hazardous should receive Hughes Network Systems, Inc. review and approval prior to
commencement of site preparation work.
In cases where the use of special equipment to access the Personal Earth Station equipment is
unavoidable, additional expense may be incurred for both installation and field service. As an example,
wall mounted units positioned above the normal reach of a service technician may require special service
equipment to gain the necessary access. Additionally, extended (tall) pole mounts which are located more
than 18 (eighteen) inches away from the building wall may require modification and/or special equipment
for adequate service access and/or safety considerations.
5-2-4
12-14-92
12-14-92
SECTION 3 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 3
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 ELECTRICAL POWER

Primary power requirements for all U.S. domestic PES indoor units are 120 volts alternating current
(Vac) ± 10%, 60 Hertz (Hz) ± 5%. The RF Unit obtains direct current power from the PES indoor unit
via the coaxial IFL cable.
3.1.1 STANDARD CONVENIENCE OUTLETS

The power requirements for the U.S. domestic PES indoor units are satisfied by a standard 120-Vac,
60-Hz, three-wire convenience receptacle wired in accordance with the current National Electrical Code
or approved local electrical code. The convenience receptacle should be located within four feet of the
equipment locations. In all cases, the branch circuit must have appropriate overcurrent protection and
separate power, neutral and ground wires. The power requirement for each unit is listed in table 3-1.
The international PES indoor units listed in table 3-1 contain a power supply that automatically adjusts to
the ac input voltage within the range of 110 to 240 Vac.
Table 3-1. PES AC Power Requirements
115 Vac 230 Vac

Maximum Maximum Maximum
HNS P/N Nominal Maximum AC Input AC Input BTUs
Chassis AC Input AC Input Current Current Generated
PES Indoor Unit Number Voltage Watts Used Amperes Amperes per Hour
Domestic 6000 1011872-0010 115 233 2.59 N/A 794

Domestic 8000 1012068-0010 115 457 5.08 N/A 1560
Domestic 9000 1012444-0001 115 489 5.43 N/A 1667
Domestic Type 2 DIU/O 3000060-XXXX 115 434 4.82 N/A 1482
International 6000 1011872-0020 115/230 266 2.96 1.33 907
International 8000 1012068-0020 115/230 473 5.26 2.37 1614
International Type 2 DIU/O 3000060-0201 115/230 433 4.81 2.17 1477
NOTE: These figures represent the worst case loading of the power supply. Typically the wattage used
will be less than stated above depending upon the actual configuration of the PES system. These
figures are applicable to Ku-band and C-band equipment.
3.1.2 ANTI-ICING
As listed in table 3-2, the anti-icing power and connection requirements depend on the antenna size. All
anti-icing systems listed require 120-Vac, 60-Hz current. All anti-icing systems listed include a
temperature sensor or moisture/temperatures sensor so that the anti-icing heaters energize only when ice
or snow could be present.
5-3-1
Table 3-2. Anti-Icing Power Requirements
Maximum
Power
Anti-Icing System Part Number (nominal) Connection Requirements
0.75M rectangular (Anti-icing presently -- --

full backshell not available)
1.0M rectangular 3000180-0001 375 watts Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI)

full backshell (Raychem receptacle located within
RAD-P10RF-T) 25 feet of antenna*
(15A or larger circuit)
1.2M full backshell (Raychem 840 watts Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI)
RAD-P12F-1-T-53) receptacle located within
25 feet of antenna*
1.8M half backshell -- 1200 watts Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI)

(Raychem receptacle located within
RAD-P18H-1-S-53V) 25 feet of antenna*
2.44M half backshell -- 2400 watts Switch or circuit breaker

(Raychem within 6 feet of antenna
RAD-P24H-1-S-53V) (Separate 30A circuit with
no other devices attached)
*Unless local codes require a separate circuit.
3.1.3 CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR 0.75M, 1.0M, 1.2M, AND 1.8M

ANTI-ICING SYSTEMS
The 0.75M, 1.0M, 1.2M and 1.8M anti-icing systems are supplied with a 30-foot SJO-WA power cord
with a 3-prong plug. The customer must provide a ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacle or receptacle
on a GFI circuit breaker with 25 feet of the antenna, figure 3-1A. The receptacle shall be installed in a
location protected from the weather or be in a weatherproof enclosure, and shall be weatherproof when
the anti-icing system electrical plug is installed. A ground fault protection device (GFPD) is required.
If the local electrical code requires that the anti-icing system be on a separate circuit with no other devices
attached, the customer must provide a separate circuit to a circuit breaker or to a switch inside a
weather-tight junction box within six feet of the antenna (instead of providing a receptacle). See figure
3-1B. The circuit must be on a GFI circuit breaker. In this situation, the installer removes the anti-icing
system SJO-WA cord and connects the anti-icing system to the switch or circuit breaker through
liquid-tight flexible conduit.
5-3-2
REFLECTOR HEATER
FEEDHORN
PROTECTIVE BOX
HEATER
GFI RECEPTACLE
25 feet max.
TO 120 VAC 15 AMP
CKT BREAKER-GFI
A ) TYPICAL INSTALLATION
FEEDHORN
HEATER
LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
SWITCH OR CKT BRKR (GFI)
TO 120 VAC 15 AMP

CKT BREAKER
6 ft. max (GFI)
B ) SPECIAL CASE INSTALLATION

PES3-1263
Figure 3-1. Connection Requirements for 0.75M, 1.0M, and 1.2M Anti-Icing Systems
5-3-3
3.1.4 CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR 2.44M ANTI-ICING SYSTEM

In order to meet safety requirements and comply with the National Electric Code, the electric heaters of
the 2.44M half-backshell anti-icing system must be on a circuit with no other appliances attached.
Separate power wiring must be provided for the 2.44M half-backshell anti-icing system. This separate
power wiring is not included with the PES as delivered. Depending upon the terms of the contract, it is
the responsibility of the customer to provide (or contract for the provision of) the power wiring to the
anti-icing system in accordance with any governing electrical codes.
PES3-1297
Figure 3-2. Connection Requirements for 2.44M Half-Backshell Anti-Icing System
5-3-4
Use a licensed electrician to provide the electrical connection to the anti-icing system in compliance with
local codes and ordinances. Generally, conduit should be provided from the power source. It is
recommended that liquidtight flexible conduit be used for the final portion of conduit attached to the
heater controller box. Liquidtight flexible conduit provides a range of motion required when the antenna
is pointed or repointed. As shown in figure 3-2, the customer must provide a junction box and switch or
circuit breaker within six feet of the antenna.
3.2 INTERCONNECTING CABLES

Interconnecting cables are fabricated and installed (pulled) during the installation of the Personal Earth
Station terminal. In the event of a ground mount installation or other configuration which requires
electrical conduit for the power and interconnecting cables, conduit is to be provided by the Customer
during Site Preparation for the following sized cable:
• Interfacility Link (IFL) Cable - 0.50 inches O.D. maximum
Conduit terminations at the antenna are to be within four (4) feet of the antenna mounting point. A six
(6)-inch minimum bend radius is required for IFL cables.
3.3 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
3.3.1 INDOOR EQUIPMENT

The U.S. domestic PES indoor units utilize standard 3-prong, 120 Vac convenience outlets for primary
electrical power. These equipments obtain an electrical ground from the third wire (green) which
originates at the electrical distribution box ground and is connected internally to the equipment chassis. It
is essential that convenience outlets which are utilized be wired in conformance with the National
Electrical Code and applicable local electrical regulations, in order to ensure proper electrical grounding
of the PES indoor unit.
3.3.2 OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT

The RF Unit is grounded to the antenna support structure by a ground wire to a 1/4-20 grounding bolt on
the Az/El positioner as shown in figure 2-1. Additionally, the installer will run a #10 gauge or larger
ground wire from a ground origination point to the canister grounding bolt up to the distance stipulated in
the contract without additional customer cost.
As part of the site preparation work, the Customer is to provide an appropriate origination point for this
ground (a grounded structural steel building member, a metallic cold water pipe, source side of metallic
power service race way, source side of equipment enclosure, or a driven ground rod). Depending upon
the terms of a particular contract, an installer may be required to drive a ground rod at additional customer
cost if a satisfactory grounding point is not available at the time of installation.
5-3-5
3-5-91
Section 4
ANTENNA BEAM POINTING ACCURACY AND DESIGN WIND LOADING
In order to remain operational, the Personal Earth Station antenna must remain within its beam pointing
budget; that is, its elevation and azimuth settings cannot vary excessively. For Personal Earth Station
antennas, the maximum allowable deflections at the Elevation/Azimuth Mounting and Operational and
Survival Design Wind Loads are provided in table 4-3 for the 0.75-meter, 1.0-meter, 1.2-meter, 1.8-meter
and 2.44-meter antennas, respectively.
4.1 ANTENNA BEAM POINTING ERROR

For the purpose of this application, the beam pointing error can be defined as that angle subtended by the
antenna’s target (i.e., satellite) and the antenna’s boresight axis. From this definition, it can be stated that
the antenna has zero pointing error when its boresight axis is perfectly aligned with the satellite. In order
to remain operational, the Personal Earth Station antenna must remain within its beam pointing budget,
that is, its elevation and azimuth settings cannot vary excessively. Deflection can be caused by high wind
or gusting wind conditions, settlement of the mounting assembly, flexing of a supporting structure, and so
on. In general, the amount of allowable deflection varies inversely with the size of the antenna reflector;
e.g., the larger the reflector, the smaller the allowable deflection.
4.2 ANTENNA BEAM POINTING ERROR DETERMINATION

The information necessary for determination of antenna beam pointing error requirements is provided in
the remainder of this section for the appropriate antenna size.
4.3 OPERATION AND SURVIVAL DESIGN WIND LOAD DATA

The Operational and Survival Design Wind Load Data for the Personal Earth Station antennas are
provided in the remainder of this section. It is essential that mountings (i.e., masts, poles, pedestals,
foundations, etc.) comply with the requirements provided in the remainder of this section. The data in
the remainder of this section provide maximum wind loads with respect to any antenna elevation angle or
wind direction. More detailed information is available from Hughes Network Systems, Inc. upon request.
4.4 FOUNDATION DESIGN - GENERAL

The design of the antenna interface support system presents significant design challenges to meet
operational beam pointing error allowance and to ensure structural integrity under survival conditions.
The data in this report provides the necessary information to design a suitable foundation system for both
operational and survival design wind loading criteria for the 0.75, 1.0, 1.2, 1.8, and 2.44 meter Personal
Earth Station antenna systems.
4.5 DESIGN WIND LOAD DATA

All possible antenna orientations with respect to the wind loading direction should be considered to
ensure that maximum wind-force reactions are calculated for operational and survival criteria. Prodelin
has developed a computer program (WIND) that calculates the forces and moments acting on the
reflector. The loads can be calculated referenced to any point at the antenna support structure for any
wind speed and all possible reflector and wind angles. These forces and moments are calculated based on
the Jet Propulsion Laboratory Publication 78-16 entitled "Compilation of Wind Tunnel Coefficients for
Parabolic Reflectors." Axial and lateral force and moment coefficients present this data in graphical form
5-4-1
in figures 4-1 and 4-2, respectively. These coefficients were determined from actual wind tunnel test data
conducted on parabolic reflectors. The basic equation necessary to use this data are as follows:
Axial Force, FA = CA qA
Lateral Force, FL = CL qA
Moment, M = CM qA D
Where:
D = Reflector Diameter, Feet

A = Reflector Projected Area, sq.-ft.
q = Wind Dynamic Pressure, lbs./sq.-ft.
The forces FA and FL will be in pounds and the moment M will be in foot-pounds.
The maximum operational and survival wind load data for the Personal Earth Station antenna system are
provided in paragraphs 4.5.1 and 4.5.2, respectively. The values presented represent the maximum
absolute loadings expected for the given wind velocity. These loadings occur at different elevation and
azimuth orientations with respect to wind direction. The wind loadings must be combined so as to
produce the worst case deflections for operational criteria and stresses for survival criteria conditions.
The wind loadings are referenced to the elevation axis point of the antenna system (see figures 1-3 thru
1-8 for antenna geometry). This will ease the application of the loads to the interface support system.
The sign convention to be used for the wind loading data is illustrated in figure 4-3. While this report
summarizes the operational and survival design wind loading, additional information which considers
elevation and azimuth antenna orientations with respect to wind loading direction can be provided upon
request.
4.5.1 OPERATIONAL DESIGN WIND LOADS

Maximum absolute operational design wind loads are provided for 45 and 60 MPH for each PES antenna
system in table 4-1. In use of this data, consideration must be given to the orientation between the
antenna and the interface support system so that maximum deflections are obtained. In order to remain
operational, the PES antenna system must stay within its beam pointing budget, that is, its elevation and
azimuth settings cannot vary excessively. The definition and determination of antenna beam pointing
error is provided in paragraph 4.6.
4.5.2 SURVIVAL DESIGN WIND LOADS

Maximum absolute survival design wind loads are provided for 70, 85, 100, and 125 MPH in tables 4-2
for the 0.75, 1.0, 1.2, 1.8, and 2.44 meter Personal Earth Station antenna systems. As with the operation
design wind loads, consideration must be given to the orientation between the antenna and the interface
support system to ensure that maximum stresses are found. Engineering judgment must be used to select
cases that produce maximum stresses.
It should be noted that wind loads and moments can be adjusted to any new velocity "V" by using a
multiplication factor of (V2/1252) times the values in table 4-2 while wind velocity is in MPH.
5-4-2
SECTION 4 - ANTENNA BEAM POINTING ACCURACY AND DESIGN WIND LOADING
PES3-1299
Figure 4-1. Axial and Lateral Force Coefficients
PES3-1300
Figure 4-2. Moment Coefficients, Cm
5-4-3
PES3-1301
Figure 4-3. Positive Sign Conventions for Wind Load Data
5-4-4
Table 4-1. PES Maximum Absolute Operational Design Wind Loading Data at Top of Mast
Force Force Force Moment Moment Moment
Antenna Wind (lbs) (lbs) (lbs) (ft-lbs) (ft-lbs) (ft-lbs)
System Velocity Fx Fy Fz Mx My Mz
Size MPH Axial Lateral Lift Roll Pitch Yaw
0.75M 45 38 20 18 16 10 38
60 68 35 32 26 19 69
1.0M 50 84 29 45 49 30 87
60 121 40 64 68 41 125
1.2M 45 102 13 92 41 47 47
60 182 24 164 74 84 84
1.8M 45 237 32 213 141 227 153
60 422 56 378 252 404 272
2.44M 45 411 55 369 316 555 345
60 731 98 656 561 986 614
Table 4-2. PES Maximum Absolute Survival Design Wind Loading Data at Top of Mast
Force Force Force Moment Moment Moment
Antenna Wind (lbs) (lbs) (lbs) (ft-lbs) (ft-lbs) (ft-lbs)
System Velocity Fx Fy Fz Mx My Mz
Size MPH Axial Lateral Lift Roll Pitch Yaw
0.75M 70 93 48 45 39 25 93
85 136 71 66 57 37 137
100 189 98 91 79 51 190
125 294 153 142 124 80 297
1.0M 70 165 57 88 95 59 170
80 197 74 115 125 74 222
100 336 116 179 195 121 347
125 525 181 226 304 189 542
1.2M 70 248 33 223 100 115 115
85 367 49 329 149 170 170
100 508 68 455 184 236 235
125 793 107 711 322 368 369
1.8M 70 575 77 515 304 551 371
85 848 114 760 448 812 547
100 1173 158 1052 701 1124 758
125 1834 247 1644 1096 1757 1184
2.44M 70 995 134 892 765 1341 836
85 1468 197 1316 1128 1978 1232
100 2032 273 1822 1562 2738 1706
125 3175 428 2847 2441 4280 2668
5-4-5
4.6 ANTENNA BEAM POINTING ERROR DETERMINATION

For the purpose of this application, the beam pointing error can be defined as that angle subtended by the
antenna’s target (i.e., satellite) and the antenna’s boresight axis. From this definition, it can be stated that
the antenna has zero pointing error when its boresight axis is perfectly aligned with the satellite.
Deflection can be caused by high wind or gusting wind conditions, settlement of the mounting assembly,
flexing of a supporting structure, and so on. In general, the amount of allowable deflection varies
inversely with the size of the antenna reflector.
The antenna beam pointing error is a function of the interface support system rotations and the elevation
angle of the reflector. The interface support system is defined as the pedestal (i.e., mast pipe, etc.) and
foundation structure (i.e., concrete pad, building wall or roof) combined. The determination of the beam
pointing error contribution of the interface support system requires several steps which follow. Figure 4-4
provides an illustration of the axes system for beam pointing error determination.
STEP 1. The rotations about the x, y, and z axes can be determined for the interface support system
due to the application of the operational design wind forces and moments provided in
paragraph 4.4.
STEP 2. The rotations that are necessary to determine the beam pointing error contribution are about
the axes perpendicular to the RF Axis. Therefore, axes rotation must be performed to find the
rotations about the Elevation, Cross Elevation, and RF axes.
θEL = θY = Elevation Axis Rotation
θX-EL = θZ cos α + θX sin α = Cross Elevation Axis Rotation
θRF = θX cos α + θZ sin α = RF (boresight) Axis Rotation
STEP 3. The rotation about θRF has no effect on beam pointing error.7 Therefore, the total beam
pointing error contribution of the interface support system is then the vector sum of the
elevation and the cross-elevation axis rotations.
θPE = (θEL2 + θX-EL2)1/2
In order for the Personal Earth Station antenna systems to remain within their associated
beam pointing budget, the maximum allowable total rotational deflection (θPE) contribution
of the interface support system must be equal to or less than that provided in table 4-3.
7NOTE: Rotation about θRF may affect polarization in certain cases.
5-4-6
PES3-1302
Figure 4-4. Illustration of Axes System for Beam Pointing Error Determination
5-4-7
Table 4-3. Maximum Allowable Rotational Deflections

Antenna System Maximum Allowable Rotational
Size Deflections θPE (degrees)
0.75M 0.60
1.0M 0.40
1.2M 0.30
1.8M 0.20
2.44M 0.15
4.7 ANTENNA SYSTEM GEOMETRY

The antenna system geometry provides the dimensional relationship between the reflector center and
mount elevation axis point, as well as, the overall clearance and space requirements to appropriately size
the antenna interface support system. Figures 1-3 thru 1-8 provide the Personal Earth Station antenna
geometry for the 0.75, 1.0, 1.2, 1.8, and 2.44 meter systems, respectively.
5-4-8
3-5-91
CHAPTER 6
ANTENNA MOUNTS
Section 1
ANTENNA MOUNT OVERVIEW
1.1 BASIC MOUNT TYPES

There are three basic methods for mounting the antenna:
• Roof Mount (including Non-Penetrating Mast Mount)
• Wall Mount
• Ground Mount (also called pole mount)
Each option has a number of variations and an optimal mounting solution is available for a wide variety
of installation scenarios. The preferable mounting option depends on local conditions and is discussed in
the following subsections. All mounts except the non-penetration mast mounts (NPMMs) are attached to
an existing building or structure or are anchored in concrete in the ground. Table 1-1 lists standard
product attached mast mounts. (The NPMMs are listed in chapter 6, section 4 on page 6-4-4.) Specific
sites or applications may require custom engineered mounts.
Table 1-1. Standard Product Attached Mast Mounts
HNS Part Number Weight

Mount Type (Mfg. Part Number) (lbs) Reference
ARM attached (Prodelin) 3000354-0001 54 This manual

Mast O.D. = 2.88" (0800-114) Chapter 6 Section 3
Plate Mast Mount - PMM 3000355-0001 40 This manual

(Prodelin) (0800-110) Chapter 6 Section 2
Mast O.D. = 2.88"
Wall Mount - WM 3000358-0001 45 This manual

(Prodelin) (0800-116) Chapter 6 Section 2
Mast O.D. = 2.88"
Universal Tripod Mount -- TBD TM 70040B-1

- UTM (Prodelin) (0800-095) Chapter 2 Section 5
Mast O.D. = 4"
Pole Mount -- Varies TBD - (Planned for

Mast O.D. 2.88", 4" or 6.6" Site Preparation Manual)
Wall Mount -- Varies

Mast O.D. 4" or 6"
6-1-1
Table 1-2. Antenna Size and Attached Mast Mounts

Antenna ARM PMM WM UTM
Size Mast O.D. 2.88" Mast O.D. 2.88" Mast O.D. 2.88" Mast O.D. 4"
0.75M Recommended Recommended Recommended Recommended
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
1.8M N/A N/A N/A Recommended
2.4M N/A N/A N/A N/A
Key
N/A = Not Applicable

ARM = Attached Roof Mount
PMM = Plate Mast Mount
UTM = Universal Tripod Mount
WM = Wall Mount
NOTE:
1. Requires use of HNS 3000356-0001 (Prodelin P/N 0800-101) 4" to 2.88" mast
adapter.
1.1.1 MAST DIAMETER

All PES Model X000 series antennas are designed to fit on a mast (also called a pole or pipe). The PES
antenna canister fits loosely over the mast and is securely clamped in place with square head screws as
shown in figure 1-2 on page 7-1-5.
This arrangement allows the antenna canister to be adjusted to be level if mast is within 5° of vertical.
Three sizes of mast are used:
Antenna Mast
Size (outside diameter)
0.75 Meter 2.88-inch

1.0 Meter 2.88-inch
1.2 Meter 2.88-inch
1.8 Meter 4.0-inch
2.44 Meter 6.6-inch
As indicated, the larger antennas require a larger mast. Mast dimensions are given as the outer
("outside") diameter (O.D.) for purposes of PES. Antenna mounts can be constructed from welded and
seamless wrought-iron pipe.
The nominal pipe size (used when purchasing pipe) refers to an approximate inner diameter. Table 1-3
lists nominal pipe sizes and corresponding actual outside diameters for the types of pipe listed.
6-1-2
CHAPTER 6 - ANTENNA MOUNTS
SECTION 1 - ANTENNA MOUNT OVERVIEW
Table 1-3. Dimensions of Welded and Seamless Wrought-Iron Pipe
Actual
Nominal Outside Wall
Pipe Diameter Identification Identification Thickness
Size (inches) Schedule No. Other (inches)
2-1/2" 2.88 40 STD - Standard 0.203

3-1/2" 4.000 40 STD - Standard 0.231
3-1/2" 4.000 80 XS - Extra Strong 0.325
3-1/2" 4.000 120 XXS - Double Extra Strong 0.651
6" 6.625 80 XS - Extra Strong
6" 6.625 40 STD - Standard
1.1.2 MAST DIAMETER ADAPTERS

Two standard product mast adapters are:
HNS P/N Prodelin P/N Weight
4" to 2.88" 3000356-0001 0800-101 10 lbs

6.625" to 4" 3000356-0002 -- 33 lbs
Place these mast adapters on the top of a larger size mast to provide a short mast section for a smaller size
antenna canister. Tall pole mounts may require a 6.625" mast for strength. Selected PES customers
construct their new buildings with a 6.625" O.D. mast built as part of the building. To mount a 0.75M,
1.0M, or 1.2M antenna on a 6.625" diameter mast, first use a 3000356-0002 mast adapter, then use a
3000356-0001 mast adapter.
1.2 ROOF INSTALLATION OF THE OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT

The roof-top installation enhances security by limiting access to the outdoor equipment to authorized
personnel and provides the height to clear local obstructions for the signal path. The roof mount option
can be either penetrating or non-penetrating in design.
1.2.1 PENETRATING ROOF MOUNT

Penetrating roof mounting can be accomplished using a Universal Tripod Mount shown in figure 1-1.
This type of mounting can be either welded or bolted to suitable structural members of the building. The
roof is then sealed using the universally accepted "pitch pocket" method, or another standard roofing
technique.
Another option is to attach the antenna to a suitable roof mounted pole which has been provided by the
customer. This option is typically used when installations are associated with a newly constructed
building.
6-1-3
VERTICAL SURFACE
FLAT SURFACE SLOPING SURFACE
PES3-1304
Figure 1-1. Universal Tripod Mounting Options
1.2.2 NON-PENETRATING MAST MOUNT

The non-penetrating mast mount (NPMM) provides a method for an antenna to be mounted on the roof
(or other flat surface) when penetration of the roof barrier is not feasible. This non-penetrating mast
mount is easy to assemble, offers low uniform load distribution, minimum settlement into the roof barrier,
and is compatible with many types of flat roof construction.
As listed in chapter 6, section 4, Hughes Network Systems offers a variety of types and sizes of
Non-Penetrating Mast Mounts (NPMMs) to meet customer needs. The NPMMs use the weight of ballast
(such as concrete blocks or block caps) and specially designed braces to hold the mast vertical.
Generally, the NPMMs are not physically attached to the building.
1.3 WALL INSTALLATION OF OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT

Wall mounting the antenna offers limited access to the equipment while avoiding placement on the roof
and is useful in a variety of situations. The wall mounting system can either be the Universal Tripod
mounting (UTM shown in figure 1-1), a wall mount (WM), or a custom designed installation.
Generally, wall mountings are only approved for use on solid concrete walls or concrete block walls that
are filled with concrete. When mounting bolts pass through the walls, backup plates are required.
Alternately, the mount may be attached to a vertical steel beam. For the antenna quick repoint feature to
be usable, the mount must permit the antenna to move through the required range of azimuth without
being limited by the antenna reflector striking the wall. One option is to attach the wall mount so that the
reflector is above the roof line. The antenna must be mounted to allow for service access.
6-1-4
SECTION 1 - ANTENNA MOUNT OVERVIEW
1.4 GROUND MOUNTS FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT

A ground mount (or pole mount) consists of a mast anchored in the ground by a concrete pier or pad and
pier. The design requirements depend upon the height of the mast and the antenna size. The HNS PES
Site Preparation Manual specifies (will specify) the design of ground mounts (soil compaction, depth of
hole, placement of reinforcing bar, dimensions and volume of concrete required, etc.).
Ground mounting can be utilized for any size antenna and is useful in many conditions. One such
condition is when the 2.44M antenna will be used in an area that is subject to high winds. Such a
mounting would isolate the wind loads on the antenna from the building structure.
Typically, a ground mount system would require either a single pier foundation or a pad and pier
foundation. Security fencing is recommended unless the selected location restricts access to authorized
personnel, or an extended pole is used to place the equipment above the reach of unauthorized personnel.
1.4.1 GROUND INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS

The soil under the pier foundation must consist of undisturbed or compacted material of a greater than
minimum bearing capacity to support the PES antenna with at least the required safety factor. The pier
foundation requires ground excavation. Select a site for the PES pier foundation that does not interfere
with buried water, sewer, gas, electric, or telephone lines. Certain gasoline stations have buried cables for
a cathodic protection system. If the PES is being installed in such a gasoline station, avoid the cathodic
protection system cables also (refer to field service bulletin 1011).
1.5 ANTENNA MOUNT STABILITY

The following subsections describe the factors and errors involved in pointing the antenna reflector at the
PES remote site. These factors/errors should also be taken into consideration when deciding on the type
and location of the antenna mounting.
1.5.1 FACTORS
In order to be operational, the PES antenna must remain within certain beam pointing tolerances; that is,
the elevation and azimuth settings cannot vary excessively. It is for this reason that the mountings (i.e.,
masts, poles, pedestals, foundations, etc.) comply with the "wind load" requirements. The maximum
allowable deflections for the Elevation/Azimuth Mounting Specification as well as the Operational and
Survival Design Wind Loads Specification for 0.75M, 1.0M, 1.2M, 1.8M and 2.44M antennas are
available on request from HNS.
1.5.2 ERRORS
For the PES system, the "beam pointing error" can be defined as the angle subtended by the antenna’s
target (satellite) and the antenna’s boresight axis as shown in figure 1-2. From this definition, the antenna
has zero pointing error when it’s boresight axis is perfectly aligned with the satellite.
6-1-5
The most common causes for antenna deflection and resulting beam pointing errors are high winds or
gusting wind conditions, settling of the antenna mounting, loosening of the assembly due to weather and
wind conditions, flexing of the supporting structure, and satellite movement. In general, the amount of
allowable deflection varies inversely with the size of the antenna reflector. For example, the 2.44M
antenna has less allowable deflection compared to the 1.8M antenna as shown in table 1-4.
Table 1-4. Maximum Allowable Rotational Deflections

Antenna System Maximum Allowable Rotational
Size Deflections in Degrees
0.75M 0.60
1.0M 0.40
1.2M 0.30
1.8M 0.20
2.44M 0.15
SATELLITE
XIS T AX
IS
TA TARG
E
SIGH BEAM POINTING
ANTENNA RE
BO ERROR ANGLE
NOTE:
When BORESIGHT AXIS is aligned with the TARGET AXIS,
the antenna has "zero pointing error"
PES-11319
Figure 1-2. Antenna Beam Pointing Error
6-1-6
3-5-91
3-5-91
SECTION 2 - PLATE MAST MOUNT (PMM) AND WALL MOUNT (WM)
Section 2
PLATE MAST MOUNT (PMM) AND WALL MOUNT (WM)
The Plate Mast Mount (PMM) is designed for use at facilities where an exposed horizontal I-beam is
available. The Wall Mount (WM) is designed to attach to a solid concrete wall, to a concrete block wall
that has been filled with cement, or to a vertical I-beam. Both the PMM and the WM have a 2.88" outside
diameter mast and can accommodate the 0.75M, 1.0M, and the 1.2M antennas.
2.1 PLATE MAST MOUNT SHIPPING CONFIGURATION

The plate mast mount (PMM) (HNS P/N 3000355-0001, Prodelin P/N 800-110) is shipped in one carton.
The shipping weight is 43 lbs and the carton dimensions are 13 1/2" x 12 1/2" x 31".
The contents of the carton are:

Prodelin P/N Description
0156-607 Plate, Mast Mounting

0180-209 Rod, 1/2-13 x 18" (qty 4)
0200-511 Kit, HDWE, 1.0M WM/PMM
0490-225 Weldment, Mast 1.0M PMM
2.2 PLATE MAST MOUNT ASSEMBLY

Assemble the PMM according to figure 2-1. Place washers, lockwashers, and nuts on the threaded rods
above all four holes in the flat square area of the mast pipe assembly (item 1). Optionally, a second nut
may be placed above the first. Place washers and nuts below these holes in the mast pipe assembly.
Place washers, lockwashers, and nuts on the threaded rods below the mast mounting plate (item 2). Do
not place nuts immediately above and in close proximity to the mast mounting plate, because nuts in this
location could restrict the clamping action. Sufficiently tighten all nuts to securely clamp the PMM to the
I-beam.
The Plate Mast Mount can also be attached to a concrete slab by using the HILTI Fastening System
described in paragraph 2.4. It can also be attached to a wide beam or a metal plate by drilling to match
the holes in the mounting plate and using cut-off threaded rods as bolts.
2.3 WALL MOUNT SHIPPING CONFIGURATION

The wall mount (WM) (HNS P/N 3000358-0001, Prodelin P/N 800-116) is shipped in one carton. The
shipping weight is 46 lbs and the carton dimensions are 13 1/2" x 12 1/2" x 31".
The contents of the carton are:

0156-607 Plate, Mast Mounting

0180-209 Rod, 1/2-13 x 18" (qty 4)
0200-511 Kit, HDWE, 1.0M PMM
0490-240 Mast Pipe
6-2-1
PES3-957
Item No. Note Part No. Description Quantity

1 - 0490-225 Mast Pipe 1
2 - 0156-607 Mast Mounting Plate 1
3 - 0180-209 1/2-13 x 18" Threaded Rod 4
4 Note 1 8201-043 1/2" Flatwasher 16
5 Note 1 8202-043 1/2" Lockwasher 8
6 Note 1 8104-007 1/2-13" Hex Nut 16
Note 1. Items 4 thru 6 shipped as 0200-511 Kit, HDWE 1.0M WM/PMM
Figure 2-1. Plate Mast Mount Assembly on Pre-Existing I Beam
6-2-2
SECTION 2 - PLATE MAST MOUNT (PMM) AND WALL MOUNT (WM)
2.4 WALL MOUNT ATTACHMENT

To attach the wall mount to a vertical I-beam, assemble the wall mount as shown in figure 2-2.
To attach the wall mount to a concrete wall or a concrete block wall filled with cement, refer to figure
2-3. Mark the hole locations carefully and drill the holes straight so that the mast mounting plate will fit.
The mast mounting plate (back plate on the inside of the wall) must be used when the threaded rods are
employed.
An alternative to the thru-the-wall threaded rods, that can be used on solid concrete walls, is the HILTI
Fastening Systems HVA Adhesive Anchor System using the HVA 1/2" Anchor. This consists of the
HILTI item number 000668046 HEA 1/2" x 4-1/4" HEA Adhesive Cartridge and the HILTI Item number
000686675 HAS 12-612 Anchor Rod Assembly. Refer to the detailed installation instructions provided
by HILTI.
PES3-1203

1 - 0490-240 Mast Pipe 1
2 - 0156-607 Mast Mounting Plate 1
3 - 0180-209 1/2-13 x 18" Threaded Rod 4
4 Note 1 8201-043 1/2" Flatwasher 16
6 Note 1 8104-007 1/2-13" Hex Nut 16
Note 1. Items 4 thru 6 shipped as 0200-511 Kit, HDWE 1.0M WM/PMM
Figure 2-2. Attaching WM to Vertical I-Beam
6-2-3
PES3-1204
Figure 2-3. Attaching WM to Concrete Wall (Or Filled Concrete Block Wall)
6-2-4
4-3-93
Section 3
ATTACHED ROOF MOUNT (ARM)
3.1 GENERAL
The attached roof mount (ARM) when bolted in place is engineered to support a 0.75M, 1.0M or 1.2M
antenna. The ARM contains some of the same parts as the 5.5’ x 5.5’ NPMM (mast and frame). The
ARM frame is the same part as one of 5.5’ x 5.5’ NPMM frames. The mast pipe is the same for both.
3.2 SHIPPING CONFIGURATION

The attached roof mount (ARM) (HNS P/N 300354-001, Prodelin P/N 800-114) is shipped as one carton
and a frame shipped without a carton as follows:
Prodelin P/N Description Weight Dimensions
• 0800-112 1.0M Attached Roof Mount 36 lbs 5" x 5" x 50"

• 0490-224 Weldment, Frame 1.0M ARM/NPMM 17 lbs 33-1/2" x 33-1/2" x 3"
The contents of the carton (0800-112) are:
0200-510 Kit, HDWE, 1.0M ARM/NPMM

0225-371 Angle, Brace - short 1.0M ARM (qty 2)
0225-372 Angle, Brace - long
0490-223 Weldment, Mast 1.0M NPMM
5005-151 0800-112 Checklist
3.2.1 ASSEMBLY
Assemble the ARM according to figure 3-1. As shown in the figure, attach the long angle brace to the
mast pipe before attaching the short angle braces. Securely tighten all hardware after the assembly is
complete.
NOTE
Newer mount kits have been redesigned. Part of the redesign included
drilling holes in the same location on all sides. To compensate for the
change in hole locations, the short angle brace (Prodelin P/N 225-371) is
now even shorter than previous units (old brace is 37 inches with squared
ends, new brace is 35 5/8 inches with diagonal ends). It is important that
the new kits and previous kits remain segregated while in storage to
avoid assembly problems. If a site has the incorrect short angle brace for
the mount kit, new holes may be drilled, then a zinc rich paint applied to
the drilled surfaces to avoid corrosion, and the brace may be used.
6-3-1
PES3-958

1 - 0490-224 Frame 1
2 - 0490-223 Mast Pipe 1
3 - 0225-371 Angle Brace - Short 2
4 - 0225-372 Angle Brace - Long 1
5 Note 1 8032-010 3/8-16 x 1.25" Bolt 12
6 Note 1 8032-032 3/8-16 x 4.00" Bolt 3
7 Note 1 8201-042 3/8" Flatwasher 28
8 Note 1 8202-042 3/8" Lockwasher 14
9 Note 1 8102-007 3/8-16 Hex Nut 14
10 Note 1 0156-912 Plate, Washer 6
11 - 5003-009 Rubber Pad 1
Note 1. Items 4 Thru 8 Shipped as 0200-510 Kit, HDWE 1.0M ARM/NPMM
Figure 3-1. Attached Roof Mount (ARM) Assembly
6-3-2
SECTION 3 - ATTACHED ROOF MOUNT (ARM)
3.2.2 INSTALLATION - BOLTING TO ROOF FLANGES

The attached roof mount (ARM) is designed to be fastened to steel roofing which has flanges on 16"
centers or to other appropriate surfaces. Select a location for the ARM over the strongest part of the roof
(spanning the center beam, or near a wall.)
Use the frame as a template to mark and center punch the hole locations in the roof flanges. As shown in
figure 3-2, the ARM may be attached with its edge parallel to the roof flanges (eight bolt locations) or at a
45 degree angle to the flanges (six bolt locations.) NOTE: Use at least six bolts (minimum) to attach the
ARM.
Drill the holes and then attach the ARM using 3/8-16 x 1.25" bolts, washers, plate, and nuts. When
installing the bolts thru the roof flanges, apply a liberal amount of caulking/sealant on the bolt, under the
bolt head, and under the washer in order to prevent leaks. When the ARM is bolted in place, do not apply
ballast.
NOTE
If a protective rubber pad is required under the ARM, it can be ordered
separately (Prodelin P/N 5003-009).
6-3-3
STEEL ROOFING FLANGES

ON 16" CENTERS
TOP VIEW
STEEL ROOFING
FLANGES TOP VIEW
SIDE VIEW
ARM BOLTS TO
FLANGES
SIDE VIEW
PART OF CAULKING
ARM MATERIAL
WASHER
WASHER STEEL
PLATE ROOF
FLANGES
FLAT
WASHER LOCKWASHER
PES3-959
Figure 3-2. ARM Attachment Configurations
6-3-4
11-27-91
Section 4
NON-PENETRATING MAST MOUNTS OVERVIEW
AND BALLAST CALCULATION
4.1 GENERAL
A non-penetration mast mount (NPMM) provides a timely installation for the PES antenna without
having to dig holes, pour concrete, or attach steel beams to a building. This can be an important
consideration to meet the needs of a PES customer who is a tenant in a building. An NPMM can be
installed on any flat or nearly flat surface (roof, parking lot, etc.) that has sufficient strength. The surface
must be level or must not cause the mast to slope more than 5 degrees from vertical. If the slope is more
than 5 degrees, the ballast calculations are no longer correct because the sliding friction is reduced. Also,
if the slope is more than 5 degrees, the Quick Repoint feature will not work correctly.
There is a variety of NPMM types and sizes for use at PES installations as indicated in figures 4-1, 4-2,
and 4-3 and table 4-1. In general, a larger antenna requires a larger NPMM. Table 4-2 lists the antenna
sizes and the applicable NPMM types and sizes. There are three NPMM mast outside diameter sizes:
• 2.88" for the 0.75M, 1.0M and 1.2M antennas
• 4.0" for the 1.8M antenna
• 6.6" for the 2.44M antenna.
The HNS 3000356-0001 (Prodelin 0800-101) mast adapter may be used on a 4.0" O.D. mast to provide a
2.88" O.D. short mast section for the 0.75M, 1.0M, or 1.2M antenna.
PES3-1163
Figure 4-1. NPMM Types with 2.88" O.D. Mast
6-4-1
PES3-1519
6-4-2
SECTION 4 - NON-PENETRATING MAST MOUNTS OVERVIEW
PES3-1520
6-4-3
Table 4-1. NPMM Types

Figure NPMM Type HNS Part Number Ballast Comment
Ref. (Manufacturer) (Mfg P/N) Calculation (reference)
4-1 Ridge Mast Mount 3000351-0001 This manual Suitable for peaked
(Prodelin) (4096-195) Chapter 6 Section 10 roofs. This manual
Mast O.D. = 2.88" (fixed ballast) Chapter 6 Section 10
4-1 5.5’ x 5.5’ NPMM 3000353-0001 DIU Configuration This manual
(Prodelin) (800-113) Editor v3.0 Chapter 6 Section 5
Mast O.D. = 2.88"
4-2 Square 8’ x 8’ 3000129-0001 DIU Configuration This manual
(Prodelin) (0850-024) Editor v3.0 Chapter 6 Section 6
Mast O.D. = 4.0" (or v2.0 or v1.75)
4-2 Square 10’ x 10’ 1008595-2221 DIU Configuration No longer available.
(Prodelin) or Editor v3.0 Panel style
Mast O.D. = 4.0" 3000128-0001 (or v2.0 or v1.75) (TM 3000126
(0850-023) Chapter 2 Section 4)
4-2 Square 10’ x 10’ 3000220-0001 DIU Configuration Open Frame Style
(Prodelin) (0800-381) Editor v3.0 This manual
Mast O.D. = 4.0" (or v2.0 or v1.75) Chapter 6 Section 7
Not Square 12’ x 12’ -- DIU Configuration No longer available.
shown (Prodelin) (0850-013) Editor v1.51 (TM 70040B-1
Mast O.D. = 4.0" or earlier Chapter 2 Section 4)
4-2 Cross Mast Mount CMM 3000364-0001 This manual This manual
(Videostar) (20-1292) Chapter 6 Section 9 Chapter 6 Section 9
Mast O.D. = 4.0" (fixed ballast)
Not Hexagon 13’9" -- DIU Configuration Has ballast pans
shown (Rohn) (AGM-40 and Editor v3.0 (base channels) for
Mast O.D. = 4.0" AGMC) (or v2.0 or v1.75) ballast in sacks
(TM 3000126
Chapter 2 Section 4)
4-2 Universal Ridge 3000950-0001 Structural Suggested for
Mount 10 (URM-10) (BMK1000) Engineering peaked roofs only
(Baird) Study (FSB 1119)
Mast O.D. = 4.0"
4-3 Hexagon 14’3" 3000221-0001 DIU Configuration For 2.44M antenna.
Mast O.D. = 6.6" Editor v3.0 This manual
(Prodelin) (0800-377) (or v2.0 or v1.75) Chapter 6 Section 8
(Rohn) (AAGM-6560)
4-3 Rectangle 13.5’ x 13.5’ 3000375-0001 Structural For flat roofs only
Mast O.D. = 6.6" Engineering (FSB 1111)
(Baird) (PS-10) Study
4-3 Universal Ridge 3000950-0006 Structural For flat or
Mount 10 (URM-10) Engineering peaked roofs
10’ x 10’8" (BMK1005) Study (FSB 1119)
(Baird)
Mast O.D. = 6.6"
6-4-4
Table 4-2. Antenna Size and NPMM Size (Unattached Mounts)
NPMM
NPMM NPMM 10’ X 10’ NPMM
RMM 5.5’ X 5.5’ 8’ X 8’ Open Frame CMM 14’ Hex
Antenna Mast O.D. 2.88" Mast O.D. 2.88" Mast O.D. 4" Mast O.D. 4" Mast O.D. 4" Mast O.D. 6.6"
Size Weight 550 lbs Weight 121 lbs Weight 280 lbs Weight 250 lbs Weight 1190 lbs Weight 825 lbs
0.75M Recommended Recommended Recommended Recommended Recommended N/A

Weight 51.5 lbs Note 1 Note 2 Note 2 Note 3

Weight 64.5 lbs Note 1 Note 2 Note 2 Note 3

Weight 67 lbs Note 1 Note 2 Note 2 Note 3
1.8M N/A N/A Recommended Recommended Recommended N/A

Weight 204 lbs
2.4M N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Note 4

Weight 349 lbs
Key
N/A = Not Applicable

CMM = Cross Mast Mount
NPMM = Non-Penetrating Mast Mount
Hex = Hexagon
RMM = Ridge Mast Mount
NOTES:
1. The Ridge Mast Mount has a fixed amount of ballast that is an integral part of the
mount. Therefore, the ballast program is not used to calculate the amount of ballast
for the RMM. Chapter 6 section 10 provides a wind speed map and tables to
determine where the RMM is applicable for the 0.75M, 1.0M, and 1.2M antennas.
2. Requires use of HNS 3000356-0001 (Prodelin P/N 0800-101) 2.88" to 4" mast
adapter. When using these smaller size antennas (0.75M, 1.0M, 1.2M) on a larger
NPMM, use the amount of ballast calculated by the ballast program for the 5.5’ x
5.5’ NPMM for whichever size antenna is being installed on the larger mount.
3. Requires use of HNS 3000356-0001 (Prodelin P/N 0800-101) 2.88" to 4" mast
adapter. The Cross Mast Mount has a fixed amount of ballast that is an integral part
of the mount. Therefore, the ballast program is not used to calculate the amount of
ballast for the CMM. Chapter 6 section 9 provides a wind speed map and table to
determine where the CMM is applicable for the 1.8M antenna. Smaller antennas are
applicable to the same locations.
4. The 2.44M can be used with the 14’ hexagon NPMM for special applications only
with structural engineer approval of building loads.
6-4-5
4.2 ROOF PREPARATION AND PADDING

When an NPMM is installed on a roof, padding material (such as Trafbloc* or Verigard Walkway Pad**)
can be installed between the roof and the NPMM. For certain NPMMs the padding material is supplied
with the NPMM or can be ordered with the NPMM.
Sweep away loose rocks present on the roof structure before placing the NPMM pad on the roof in order
to prevent puncturing the roof membrane causing roof damage and/or weather leaks. The only exceptions
to this practice are:
1. Rocks are an integral part of the roof structure and are imbedded into the roof.
2. Customer specifies that the rocks are not to be swept away from the area of NPMM
placement. This should be documented on the Customer Acceptance Report.
3. Installation personnel determine that rocks must be present due to incompatibility of pad
material with roof membrane material. You may need to enlist the expertise of a certified
roofer to determine this.
If the NPMM is to be installed on a corrugated roof, special considerations and techniques apply. Refer
to Field Service Bulletin 1074A.
4.3 BALLAST WEIGHT - GENERAL CONSIDERATION

The ballast weight for an NPMM mount should be engineered to meet the required design load and wind
sheer specifications for the individual PES remote. The purpose of ballast is to prevent the antenna from
being overturned or moved. The amount of ballast provided must be sufficient to hold the antenna in
position while exposed to the maximum expected winds at that location, yet the total
antenna/mount/ballast load must be less than the load bearing capacity of the roof by an adequate safety
factor. Factors which determine the required ballast include: the wind zone in which antenna is located,
the height of the antenna above the ground, the exposure to the wind, the type of the antenna, the size and
weight of the antenna, the type and weight of non-penetration roof mount, and the elevation angle at
which the antenna will be pointed. The HNS ballast program of DIU Configuration Editor version v3.0
uses these factors to compute the ballast weight.
The ballast program of v3.0 is similar to the ballast program of v2.0. The ballast program of v3.0
includes one NPMM (5’ x 5’ NPMM) which the v2.0 does not have. The ballast program of v3.0 also
includes the 0.75M and 1.0M rectangular antennas. [The ballast program is not applicable to the cross
mast mount (CMM) or to the roof mast mount (RMM).]
Normally, the amount of ballast required must be calculated before an NPMM can be approved. At the
time of installation, use the precalculated and approved amount of ballast. (Do not exceed this
amount by more than 25 pounds.) Record the amount and type of ballast used on the Finished
Installation Report (FIR).
____________________
* Trafbloc, c/o SIPLAST, 1-800-922-8800
** Versigard Walkway Pad

c/o Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, Roofing Systems
(216) 796-4421
Factory Telephone numbers. Call for location of nearest sales office.
6-4-6
If the antenna at a given location is repointed so that its elevation is lowered, it may be necessary to add
ballast. If the backup satellite is known at the time of installation, calculate the elevation to both the
primary and backup satellites. Use both elevations to determine the ballast required for the primary and
backup satellites. Install the heavier ballast if approved for this site.
The ballast program calculates the required weight of ballast. A given NPMM type may require concrete
blocks (or concrete cap blocks) to be used as ballast. The weight of these blocks varies in different parts
of the country depending on the materials used to construct the blocks. Use a scale to weigh sample
concrete blocks to determine the weight per block you will be using (often near 25 pounds for cap
blocks). Divide the ballast weight by the weight per block to determine the number of blocks required.
4.4 ROOF LOADING CONSIDERATIONS

The ballast program also calculates the "Engineering Roof Load" in pounds. The engineering roof load
includes the weight of the antenna, the weight of the NPMM, the ballast weight, and the force of the
maximal expected wind which would be transferred to the roof. Divide the "Engineering Roof Load" by
the roof area covered by the NPMM to get the roof loading per unit area in pounds per square foot.
The effective roof area for the PES antenna mount types is given in table 4-3.
Table 4-3. Effective Area of NPMM Types

NPMM Type Effective Area
Square 5.5’ x 5.5’ 31 sq. ft
Square 8’ x 8’ 64 sq. ft.
Square 10’ x 10’ panel style 100 sq. ft.
Square 10’ x 10’ open frame style 100 sq. ft.
Hexagon 13’9" or 14’3" 166 sq. ft.
Cross Mast Mount 98 sq. ft.
The square 8’ x 8’ NPMM is one choice for a NPMM for PES sites where applicable. However, if the
roof loading per unit area exceeds 20 pounds per square foot*, verify that the roof can withstand the load
as outlined below. If the roof construction is not adequate to withstand the load, a different mount is
required.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
If the roof loading exceeds 20 pounds per square foot* for the mount
chosen, consult with a registered structural engineer or other qualified
professional concerning the roof construction before installing the
NPMM. Building permit departments may require a written analysis and
justification of roof loads exceeding 20 pounds per square foot*
depending on the type of roof construction.
____________________
* Some states or localities have a roof loading limit greater than 20 lb/ft2 (for example, 30 lb/ft2 or 55 lb/ft2).
In such a case the higher value can be used, but it must be derated for expected snow load.
6-4-7
4.5 NPMM AND THE QUICK REPOINT ANTENNA

For Quick Repoint installation, the surface (roof, parking lot, etc.) where the NPMM is installed must be
level or must not slope more than five degrees. If the slope is more than five degrees, the Quick Repoint
feature will not work correctly because elevation would change as the antenna azimuth is changed. Use
the inclinometer to help you determine the slope of a given surface.
In addition, for Quick Repoint installation, calculate the ballast for both the primary and backup satellites,
if known. Use the LATLONG function to get the elevation angle for each satellite. Use the elevation
angle, wind zone, exposure factor, and height above ground to determine the ballast for each satellite.
Use the heavier ballast. If approval cannot be obtained for the heavier ballast, then a different type mount
must be selected in order to make the Quick Repoint feature usable.
NOTE
If the backup satellite is not known, use SBS-5 (longitude = 123°W) as
the backup satellite if SBS-5 is not the primary satellite, or use SBS-4
(longitude = 91°W) if SBS-4 is not the primary satellite.
4.6 HNS BALLAST PROGRAM INPUTS

Figure 4-4 lists the HNS ballast program input prompts.
Mount Shape
The NPMM types are now identified by the mount shape and size.
If the square shape is selected, the program requests the dimensions of the square. Enter the appropriate
code.
HNS Ballast Program
ENTER Mount Shape, Square or Hexagon >?

ENTER Square Dimen., 5.5x5.5=1, 8x8=2, 10x10=3 >?
ENTER Wind Zone A, B, or C ?
Is 125 MPH Ballast required Y/N ?
ENTER Elevation Angle in degrees ?
ENTER Exposure Factor per manual: 1, 2, 3
or 4 ?
ENTER Height above ground in feet ?
Is Antenna Rectangular YES=1, NO=2 ?
ENTER Antenna Diameter in meters ?
Figure 4-4. Ballast Program Input Prompts
6-4-8
Wind Zone
EIA Standard RS-222C, Structural Standards for Steel Antenna Towers and Antenna Supporting
Structures, provides wind loading zone data which is applicable to the PES non-penetrating mast mount
(NPMM) installations. A copy (figure 4-7 and table 4-5) of the contiguous continental United States
wind loading zones by county is attached for convenient reference. The wind loading zones are divided
into zones A, B, and C, where A has the lowest wind loading and C has the highest wind loading.
The wind loading velocities projected for the three basic wind zones measured at 33 feet above the
ground are:
Zone A - 85 mph
Zone B - 100 mph
Zone C - 110 mph
Find the state and county of your site on the attached EIA Standard RS-222C from table 4-5 on page
6-3-14. For states and counties not listed and the District of Columbia, use zone A. Enter the wind zone
for your site.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Table 4-5 lists counties alphabetically by wind zone, so it is essential
to check the entire listing for a particular state. For example, Dade
County, Florida is near the end of Florida state listings because it is
Wind Zone C.
The square 8’x8’ NPMM with a 1.8M antenna is not authorized for use in wind zone C.
125 mph Ballast Required?
If this question is answered with a "Y" for yes, the program assumes at least a 125 mph wind. The
program still prompts for wind zone elevation angle, exposure factor, and antenna height above ground if
the question is answered with a "Y."
State, county or local ordinances or regulations may specify a design wind load of 120 or 125 mph. The
square 8’ x 8’ NPMM with a 1.8M antenna is not authorized for use in locations which must meet the 125
mph wind requirement.
Elevation Angle
Enter the elevation angle from the LATLONG program. As explained previously, run the ballast
calculation twice. First, for the elevation to the primary satellite. Second, for the elevation to the backup
satellite.
6-4-9
Exposure Factor
Enter the appropriate exposure factor from table 4-4.
Table 4-4. Exposure Factors

Exposure 1 Large city centers with at least 50% of the buildings having a height in excess of
70 feet. Use of this exposure category shall be limited to those areas for which
terrain representative of Exposure 1 prevails in the upwind direction for a
distance of at least one-half mile or 10 times the height of the building or
structure, whichever is greater. Possible channeling effects or increased velocity
pressures due to the adjacent building or structure being located in the wake of
adjacent buildings shall be taken into account.
Example: Downtown large city centers, etc.

Exposure 2 Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other terrain with numerous closely
spaced obstructions having the size of single family dwellings or larger. Use of
this exposure category shall be limited to those areas for which terrain
representative of Exposure 2 prevails in the upwind direction for a distance of at
least 1500 feet or 10 times the height of the building or structure, whichever is
greater.
Example: Shopping malls in suburban or commercial building areas, etc.

Exposure 3 Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights generally less than 30
feet. This category includes flat open country and grasslands.
Example: Midwestern towns, Great Plains areas, etc.

Exposure 4 Flat, unobstructed coastal areas directly exposed to wind flowing over large
bodies of water. This exposure shall be used for those areas representative of
Exposure 4 extending inland from the shoreland a distance of 1500 feet or 10
times the height of the building or structure, whichever is greater.
Example: Ocean coastal areas, Great Lakes areas, etc.
Antenna Height
Enter the antenna height above ground. If the antenna is placed on a roof, include the height of the
building.
Rectangular Antenna
If your site has a rectangular antenna, enter 1 for yes. The program will prompt for the 0.75M or 1.0M
size.
Antenna Diameter in Meters
For PES circular antennas, the correct entry will almost always be 1.2, 1.8, or 2.4. However, the program
will accept other values.
6-4-10
Only the hexagon NPMM may be used to mount a 2.44 meter antenna, and only in locations not more
than 100 feet above the ground in wind zone A. The hexagon NPMM has 6.6-inch outside diameter mast
for the 2.44 meter antenna.
Input Verification
The program provides an input summary to allow you to check that the proper inputs have been entered
correctly. Figure 4-5 gives an example.
HNS Ballast Program
Square 10x10 Non-Pen Mount

Zone = A Elev = 20 Deg
Height = 20 Ft Dia = 1.8M
Exposure Factor = 2
CORRECT ? Yes, No, Quit >?
Figure 4-5. Example Input Summary
4.7 HNS BALLAST PROGRAM OUTPUT

Figure 4-6 is an example ballast program output display.
HNS Ballast Program
Square Mount Ballast = 556 Lbs

Do you need roof load for engineer Y/N ?
Engineering Roof Load = 1087 Lbs.
Hit ENTER to continue
Figure 4-6. Ballast Program Example Output
Ballast
The ballast weight is given in pounds. Divide the ballast weight by the weight per concrete block (or
block cap) to determine the number of blocks required.
Engineering Roof Load
The engineering roof load is given in pounds. As explained under roof loading considerations, divide this
number by the NPMM effective roof area shown in table 4-3 to get the roof loading per unit area.
6-4-11
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
If the roof loading exceeds 20 pounds per square foot* for the mount
chosen, consult with a registered structural engineer or other qualified
professional concerning the roof construction before installing the
NPMM. Building permit departments may require a written analysis and
justification of roof loads exceeding 20 pounds per square foot*
depending on the type of roof construction.
Limits Exceeded Message
If the display shows the following message:

INSTALLATION PARAMETERS EXCEED LIMITS.
it means that the design limits or HNS policies for that particular mount have been exceeded. The
NPMM chosen cannot be properly installed at the selected location. Possible solutions include: choosing
a larger NPMM, selecting a location with a lower exposure factor, placing the NPMM closer to the
ground, or choosing a pole, ground, or wall mount rather than an NPMM.
4.8 BEFORE INSTALLING NPMM

Verify that there are no state, county, or local laws, ordinances, or regulations that conflict with this
section. In the event of conflict, the state, county, or local requirements supersede this section.
WARNING
In special locations such as on promontories, in gorges or other areas

where experience or records indicates extreme high probable wind
speeds, a more detailed investigation should be performed by a qualified
professional. In all locations, local building codes must be complied
with.
____________________
* Some states or localities have a roof loading limit greater than 20 lb/ft2 (for example, 30 lb/ft2 or 55 lb/ft2).
In such a case the higher value can be used, but it must be derated for expected snow load.
6-4-12
Figure 4-7. Wind Zone Map of Continental United States
PES3-1164
6-4-13
Table 4-5. Design Wind Loading Zones for States and Counties (for Continental United States only)
(Tabulation by counties of zone boundaries for Chart I)
NOTE: States not listed and District of Columbia occur entirely within Zone A.
State and County Zone State and County Zone State and County Zone
ALABAMA Bradford B St. Johns B

Counties not listed A Brevard B St. Lucie B
Baldwin B Calhoun B Santa Rosa B
Clarke B Charlotte B Sarasota B
Escambia B Citrus B Seminole B
Mobile B Clay B Sumter B
Washington B Collier B Suwannee B
Columbia B Taylor B
CALIFORNIA DeSoto B Union B
Counties not listed A Dixie B Volusia B
Amador B Duval B Wakulla B
Butte B Escambia B Walton B
Calaveras B Flagler B Washington B
Colusa B Franklin B Broward C
Contra Costa B Glades B Dade C
Eldorado B Gilchrist B Monroe C
Glenn B Gulf B Palm Beach C
Napa B Hamilton B
Nevada B Hardee B GEORGIA
Placer B Hendry B Counties not listed A
Sacramento B Hernando B Appling B
San Joaquin B Highlands B Atkinson B
Solano B Hillsborough B Bacon B
Sutter B Indian River B Ben Hill B
Tehama B Jefferson B Berrien B
Yolo B Lafayette B Bibb B
Yuba B Lake B Bleckley B
Lee B Brantley B
COLORADO Leon B Brooks B
Counties not listed A Levy B Bryan B
Logan B Liberty B Bulloch B
Phillips B Madison B Camden B
Sedgwick B Manatee B Candler B
Weld B Marion B Charlton B
Martin B Chatham B
DELAWARE Nassau B Clinch B
Counties not listed A Okaloosa B Coffee B
Sussex B Okeechobee B Colquitt B
Orange B Cook B
FLORIDA Osceola B Crisp B
Counties not listed A Pasco B Dodge B
Alachua B Pinellas B Dooly B
Baker B Polk B Dougherty B
Bay B Putnam B Echols B
6-4-14
Table 4-5. Design Wind Loading Zones for States and Counties (Continued)
Effingham B Hancock B Washington B
Emanuel B Henderson B Winneshiek B
Evans B Henry B
Glynn B Jo Daviess B LOUISIANA
Houston B Kane B Counties not listed A
Irwin B Knox B Acadia B
Jeff Davis B Lake B Allen B
Johnson B Lee B Ascension B
Lanier B McDonough B Assumption B
Laurens B McHenry B Avoyelles B
Lee B Mercer B Beauregard B
Liberty B Ogle B Calcasieu B
Long B Rock Island B Cameron B
Lowndes B Stark B Catahoula B
Macon B Stephenson B Concordia B
McIntosh B Warren B East Baton Rouge B
Mitchell B Whiteside B East Feliciana B
Montgomery B Winnebago B Evangeline B
Peach B Grant B
Pierce B IOWA Iberia B
Pulaski B Counties not listed A Iberville B
Screven B Allamakee B Jefferson B
Sumter B Benton B Jefferson Davis B
Tattnall B Black Hawk B Lafayette B
Telfair B Buchanan B La Fourche B
Thomas B Cedar B La Salle B
Tift B Clayton B Livingston B
Toombs B Clinton B Orleans B
Treutlen B Davis B Plaquemines B
Turner B Delaware B Pointe Coupee B
Twiggs B Des Moines B Rapides B
Ware B Dubuque B St. Bernard B
Wayne B Fayette B St. Charles B
Wheeler B Henry B St. Helena B
Wilcox B Iowa B St. James B
Wilkinson B Jackson B St. John the Baptist B
Worth B Jefferson B St. Landry B
Johnson B St. Martin B
ILLINOIS Jones B St. Mary B
Counties not listed A Keokuk B St. Tammany B
Boone B Lee B Tangipahoa B
Bureau B Linn B Tensas B
Carroll B Louisa B Terrebonne B
Cook B Muscatine B Vermilion B
De Kalb B Scott B Vernon B
Du Page B Van Buren B Washington B
Fulton B Wapello B West Baton Rouge B
West Feliciana B
6-4-15
MAINE Jefferson Davis B Cherry B

Counties not listed A Jones B Cheyenne B
Cumberland B Lamar B Dawes B
Hancock B Lawrence B Deuel B
Knox B Lincoln B Garden B
Lincoln B Marion B Grant B
Penobscot B Pearl River B Holt B
Sagadahoc B Perry B Hooker B
Waldo B Pike B Keith B
Washington B Rankin B Keyapaha B
York B Simpson B Kimball B
Smith B Knox B
MARYLAND Stone B Logan B
Counties not listed A Walthall B Loup B
Worcester B Wayne B McPherson B
Wilkinson B Morrill B
MASSACHUSETTS Pierce B
Counties not listed A MISSOURI Rock B
Barnstable B Counties not listed A Scotts Bluff B
Bristol B Clark B Sheridan B
Dukes B Knox B Sioux B
Essex B Lewis B Thomas B
Middlesex B Scotland B
Nantucket B NEW JERSEY
Norfolk B MONTANA Counties not listed A
Plymouth B Counties not listed A Atlantic B
Suffolk B Big Horn B Bergen B
Carbon B Cape May B
MISSISSIPPI Carter B Hudson B
Counties not listed A Custer B Monmouth B
Adams B Fallon B Ocean B
Amite B Powder River B
Claiborne B Rosebud B NORTH CAROLINA
Clarke B Treasure B Counties not listed A
Copiah B Yellowstone B Beaufort B
Covington B Bertie B
Forrest B NEBRASKA Bladen B
Franklin B Counties not listed A Camden B
George B Antelope B Chowan B
Greene B Arthur B Columbus B
Hancock B Banner B Cumberland B
Harrison B Blaine B Currituck B
Hinds B Boyd B Duplin B
Jackson B Box Butte B Greene B
Jasper B Brown B Lenoir B
Jefferson B Cedar B Martin B
6-4-16
Pasquotank B Bennett B Yankton B
Perquimans B Bon Homme B Ziebach B
Pitt B Brule B Lake B
Robeson B Buffalo B
Sampson B Butte B TEXAS
Tyrrell B Charles Mix B Counties not listed A
Washington B Clay B Angelina B
Wayne B Corson B Brazoria B
Brunswick C Custer B Calhoun B
Carteret C Davison B Cameron B
Craven C Dewey B Chambers B
Dare C Douglas B Fort Bend B
Hyde C Fall River B Galveston B
Jones C Faulk B Hardin B
New Hanover C Gregory B Harris B
Onslow C Haakon B Jasper B
Pamlico C Hand B Jefferson B
Pender C Hanson B Kenedy B
Harding B Kleburg B
RHODE ISLAND Hughes B Liberty B
Counties not listed A Hutchinson B Matagorda B
Newport B Hyde B Montgomery B
Washington B Jackson B Newton B
Jerauld B Orange B
SOUTH CAROLINA Jones B Polk B
Counties not listed A Kingsbury B Sabine B
Beaufort B Lawrence B San Augustine B
Berkeley B Lincoln B San Jacinto B
Charleston B Lyman B Tyler B
Clarendon B McCook B Wharton B
Colleton B Meade B Willacy B
Dillon B Mellette B
Dorchester B Miner B VIRGINIA
Florence B Minnehaha B Counties not listed A
Georgetown B Pennington B Accomack B
Hampton B Perkins B Norfolk B
Horry B Potter B Northampton B
Jasper B Sanborn B Virginia Beach B
Marion B Shannon B
Orangeburg B Stanley B WASHINGTON
Williamsburg B Sully B Counties not listed A
Todd B Clallam B
SOUTH DAKOTA Tripp B Grays Harbor B
Counties not listed A Turner B Jefferson B
Aurora B Union B Pacific B
Beadle B Washabaugh B San Juan B
6-4-17
Skagit B Kewaunee B Waupaca B
Wahkiakum B La Crosse B Waushara B
Whatcom B Lafayette B Winnebago B
Manitowoc B Wood B
WISCONSIN Marathon B
Counties not listed A Marinette B WYOMING
Adams B Marquette B Counties not listed A
Brown B Milwaukee B Albany B
Calumet B Monroe B Big Horn B
Clark B Oconto B Campbell B
Columbia B Outagamie B Converse B
Crawford B Ozaukee B Crook B
Dane B Portage B Goshen B
Dodge B Racine B Hot Springs B
Door B Richland B Johnson B
Fond du Lac B Rock B Laramie B
Grant B Sauk B Natrona B
Green B Shawano B Niobrara B
Green Lake B Sheboygan B Park B
Iowa B Vernon B Platte B
Jackson B Walworth B Sheridan B
Jefferson B Washington B Washakie B
Juneau B Waukesha B Weston B
Kenosha B
6-4-18
3-5-91
3-5-91
SECTION 5 - 5.5 FT X 5.5 FT NON-PENETRATING MAST MOUNT (NPMM)
Section 5
5.5 FT X 5.5 FT NON-PENETRATING MAST MOUNT (NPMM)

The 5.5’ x 5.5’ NPMM (HNS P/N 3000353-0001, Prodelin P/N 800-113) is shipped as one carton, and
four frames banded together and shipped without a carton as follows:
• 0800-111 1.0M Non-Penetrating Mast Mount 50 lbs 6" x 6" x 58"
• 0490-224 Weldment, Frame 1.0M ARM/NPMM Qty 4 58 lbs approx. 33.5"

x 33.5" x 7.5"
The contents of the carton (0800-111) are:

0200-510 Kit, HWDE. 1.0M ARM/NPMM

0225-372 Angle, Brace 1.0M NPMM
0490-223 Weldment, Mast 1.0M NPMM
4091-216 Carton, 1.0M NPMM
5003-008 Pad, Neoprene Rubber 1/16 x 33.5 x 67
5005-150 0800-111 Checklist
5.2 BALLAST
For the 0.75M, 1.0M, and 1.2M antennas, there is no minimum ballast amount for the 5.5-ft x 5.5-ft
NPMM. Use the ballast program of DIU Configuration Editor v3.0 to calculate the actual ballast
required.
6-5-1
Refer to figure 5-1 and perform the following steps:

STEP 1. Select a site for the NPMM over a strong area of the roof (over a beam, support column, or
near a wall.) Check that the surface level is or within 5 degrees of level. Clear the roof area
(or installation area) where the NPMM will sit of debris or rocks (per chapter 6, section 4.2
on page 6-4-6). The 5.5 x 5.5 NPMM is not suitable for use on a roof which has steel
flanges on 16" centers; use the ARM instead.
STEP 2. Install any roof sealant material if required.
STEP 3. Place the included rubber mats over the installation surface.
STEP 4. Place the four frames on the rubber mats. Orient each frame so that the tab for the angle
brace (shown in detail D of figure 5-2) is at the outside corner. Loosely bolt the frames
together near the outer edges as shown in detail B of figure 5-2.
STEP 5. As shown in detail A, figure 5-3, attach the mast pipe to the four frames. Use four 3/8-16 x
1.25" bolts, eight flatwashers, four lockwashers, and four nuts as shown. Do not tighten this
hardware yet.
STEP 6. Install the four angle braces as shown in details D and C of figure 5-2. Note that one 4-inch
bolt attaches two angle braces to the mast pipe.
STEP 7. Tighten all hardware.
STEP 8. Apply the concrete block cap ballast. If the number of concrete block caps required is
insufficient to cover entire NPMM area, make sure that the outer corners have ballast.
STEP 9. Continue with the appropriate antenna assembly instructions located in chapter 7.
Table 5-1. Parts List for Figure 5-1

1 - 0490-224 Frame 4
2 - 0490-223 Mast Pipe 1
3 - 0225-372 Angle Brace 4
4 Note 1 8032-010 3/8-16 x 1.25" Bolt 12
5 Note 1 8032-032 3/8-16 x 4.00" Bolt 2
6 Note 1 8201-042 3/8" Flatwasher 28
7 Note 1 8202-042 3/8" Lockwasher 14
8 Note 1 8102-007 3/8-16 Hex Nut 14
Note 1. Items 4 thru 8 Shipped as 0200-510 Kit, HDWE, 1.0M ARM/NPMM
6-5-2
PES3-960
Figure 5-1. 5.5-ft x 5.5-ft NPMM Assembly
6-5-3
PES3-961
Figure 5-2. NPMM Assembly Details B, C, and D
6-5-4
PES3-962
Figure 5-3. NPMM Assembly Detail A
6-5-5
3-5-91
3-5-91
SECTION 6 - 8 FT X 8 FT NON-PENETRATING MAST MOUNT
Section 6
8 FT X 8 FT NON-PENETRATING MAST MOUNT
6.1 INTRODUCTION
This section covers the assembly and installation of Prodelin’s 8 ft x 8 ft Non-Penetrating Mast Mount
(NPMM), figure 6-1, for use with 1.8M or smaller VSAT antenna systems.
PES3-1160
Figure 6-1. 8 ft x 8 ft NPMM with 1.8M Quick Repoint Antenna
6-6-1
The NPMM allows for a low cost installation of 1.8M or smaller antennas on stable, flat (within 5° of
level) structurally sound surfaces such as concrete slabs and flat building roofs. The mount is designed to
allow for the antenna to be operational in steady winds up to 50 mph and capable of nonoperational
survival in winds up to 125 mph.
6.2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION

The shipping containers should be unpacked and inspected as soon as possible to ensure that all materials
have been received and are in good condition. Check all materials against the parts list in chapter 6,
section 6, paragraph 6.8.
6.3 DAMAGED OR MISSING MATERIALS

Occasionally, material is damaged in transit. If this happens, contact the freight carrier for damaged
freight procedures.
Any questions regarding missing or damaged material that is not due to shipping should be directed to
Prodelin’s Customer Service Department:
Prodelin Corporation
P.O. Box 368
Conover, North Carolina 28613
(704) 464-4141
6.4 TOOLS REQUIRED

All of the hardware is of one common size. The only tools required are two 9/16" wrenches of any
combination.
6.5 SITE SELECTION

The following guidelines should be observed when selecting a site for the installation.
1. The line of site to the satellite should be clear of any obstructions such as trees or buildings.
2. All local building codes should be observed (i.e., grounding, zoning rules, setbacks, etc.).
3. The site should be clear of any obstructions over a 64-square-foot area to allow for the 8’ by
8’ base.
Refer to chapter 6, section 4 to determine your site’s wind zone and exposure factor. The wind zones are:
Wind Zone A - 85 mph
Wind Zone B - 100 mph
Wind Zone C - Do not use 8’ x 8’ NPMM with 1.8M or larger antenna in Wind Zone C
The square 8’ x 8’ NPMM with a 1.8M antenna is not authorized for use in wind zone C or for
locations required to withstand 125 mph wind. For a 1.2M size antenna, the 8’ x 8’ NPMM may be
used in wind zone C.
6-6-2
6.6 BALLAST REQUIREMENTS

The preferred ballast material is concrete cap blocks, available from most building supply companies.
These blocks measure approximately 4" x 8" x 16" and weigh about 25 pounds each. The weight of these
block caps varies in different parts of the country depending on the materials used. Use a scale to weigh
sample concrete block caps to determine the weight per block cap you will be using (often near 25 pounds
per block cap). Divide the ballast weight by the weight per block cap to determine the number of block
caps required. Refer to chapter 6, section 4 for the recommended ballast for particular design wind
speeds.
Place the blocks in the order shown in figure 6-2. For example, at a 100-mph wind speed, 56 blocks
would be needed in positions 1-56 of figure 6-2. For installations requiring more than 72 blocks, start a
second layer in the same order as the first layer. IMPORTANT: THE MINIMUM DESIGN WIND
SPEED FOR ANY SITE IS 70 MPH.
NOTE
Prodelin Corporation will not be responsible for damages caused by
improper installation of the NPMM.
6-6-3
PES3-1161
Figure 6-2. Placement Order of Ballast
6-6-4
6.7 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

Refer to table 6-1 and figure 6-3 and assemble the NPMM in the following order:
STEP 1. Clear the area of debris, gravel or any other loose material. If installing the NPMM on a roof,
install a pad of suitable outdoor material (rubber pad, Trafbloc, or Versigard walkway pad)
over the area where the NPMM will be placed.
STEP 2. Place the four base frames (#1) in a square pattern. The mounting tabs at the corner of the
frames should be at the outside perimeter and the centering intersection should have matching
slots. Refer to figure 6-3.
STEP 3. Slide the mast (#2) between the four frames at the center intersection so that the holes in the
base of the mast align with the slots in the frames. Attach the mast to the four frames with
four 3/8-16 x 1.25" bolts, eight flatwashers, four lockwashers, and four 3/8-16 hex nuts (#5,
6, 7, and 8). At this point, only hand tighten all hardware.
STEP 4. Secure the outer corners of the frames with the same hardware as above.
STEP 5. Attach a long brace (#3) from the mast to each of the four frame tabs at the outer corners.
STEP 6. Attach a short brace (#4) from the mast to each of the four frame tabs at the mid-point of each
side.
STEP 7. Securely tighten all hardware.
Table 6-1. 8’ x 8’ NPMM Parts List

Prodelin
Item Number Part Number Description Quantity
1 0490-174 Base Frame 4
2 0490-173 Mast 1
3 0225-353 Long Angle Brace 4
4 0225-352 Short Angle Brace 4
5 8025-001 3/8-16 x 1.25" Bolt 28
6 8201-042 3/8" Flatwasher 56
7 8202-042 3/8" Lockwasher 28
8 8102-007 3/8-16 Hex Nut 28
6-6-5
PES3-1162
Figure 6-3. 8 ft x 8 ft NPMM Assembly
6-6-6
6.8 MAINTENANCE
After installation, the NPMM requires only periodic inspection. It is anticipated that maintenance, if
required, will be minimal and easily handled by a local or in-house maintenance staff. The materials used
in the construction of the NPMM virtually eliminate any maintenance repairs.
6.8.1 PERIODIC INSPECTIONS

It is suggested that a periodic inspection be performed at least every six months.
NOTE
After any very severe weather conditions, inspection of the NPMM
should be performed to determine if foreign objects have caused damage
or if survival specifications have been exceeded.
This inspection should include the following:
1. Check all bolting locations - All bolts should be tight.
2. Check all structural members - Repair or replace if damaged.
3. Check for corrosion - Any corrosion on steel members may be repaired with a cold,
zinc-rich galvanizing paint. See table 6-1 on page 7-6-2.
6-6-7
3-5-91
Section 7
NPMM 10-FT X 10-FT OPEN FRAME
7.1 GENERAL
The 10’ x 10’ NPMM, figure 7-1, has a 4.0-inch outside diameter mast to accommodate the 1.8M Quick
Repoint Antenna. If a mast adapter is installed, the 0.75M, 1.0M, or 1.2M antenna may be installed on
10’ x 10’ NPMM.

The 10’ x 10’ NPMM is shipped as Prodelin part number 0800-381, which corresponds to HNS
3000220-0001.
7.3 INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY

Refer to figure 7-1 and perform the following steps:
STEP 1. Check that the surface is within 5 degrees of level. Clear the roof area (or installation area)
where the NPMM will sit of debris or rocks (per chapter 6, section 4.2 on page 6-3-6).
STEP 2. Install any roof sealant material if required.
STEP 3. Place the rubber mats (if applicable) over the installation surface, in the pattern(s) shown in
figure 7-3.
STEP 4. Position the base diagonals (item 2) on the installation surface.
STEP 5. Attach the base angle center (item 3) to two of the base angles.
STEP 6. Loosely attach inner base girts (item 4) and outer base girts (item 5) to the base diagonals.
STEP 7. Attach the antenna mast support (item 1) to the base diagonals.
STEP 8. Attach the knee brace angles (item 6) between the antenna mast support and the base
diagonals.
STEP 9. Securely tighten all hardware.
STEP 10. Apply the ballast weight.
6-7-1
PES-775
Figure 7-1. Open Frame Style Square 10-ft x 10-ft NPMM Assembly
6-7-2
SECTION 7 - NPMM 10-FT X 10-FT OPEN FRAME
7.4 BALLAST
Use the ballast program provided in DIU Configuration Editor version v3.0 to calculate the ballast
correctly for the open frame style square 10’ x 10’ NPMM. Refer to chapter 6, section 4.
For the open frame style 10’ x 10’ NPMM, concrete blocks (nominal dimensions 8" x 8" x 16" each) are
to be used as ballast. The weight of these blocks varies in different parts of the country depending on the
materials used to construct the blocks. Use a scale to weigh sample concrete blocks to determine the
weight per block you will be using (often near 35 pounds per block). Divide the ballast weight by the
weight per block to determine the number of blocks required.
6-7-3
7.5 INCREASED AREA KIT

Where necessary, the ballast blocks may be stacked.
Where desired (or where necessary to obtain the proper permit), an optional increased area kit may be
ordered (figure 7-2). The increased area kit includes the parts needed to hold an extra row of concrete
blocks within the existing ring of concrete blocks.
PES-776
Figure 7-2. Increased Area Kit
6-7-4
SECTION 7 - NPMM 10-FT X 10-FT OPEN FRAME
7.6 RUBBER MAT KITS

As shown in figure 7-3, rubber mat kits are available for the standard open frame style square 10’ x 10’
NPMM and for the increased area kit. The purposes of the mat kits are to provide increased roof
protection and a more uniform coefficient of friction between the NPMM and the roof.
7.7 PART NUMBERS

Table 7-1 provides HNS part numbers for the open frame square 10’ x 10’ NPMM and associated items.
Table 7-1. Part Numbers
Description HNS Part Number Prodelin Part Number
BASIC CONFIGURATION (10-ft x 10-ft NPMM) 3000220-0001
Consists of:
(1) Antenna Mast Support

(4) Base Diagonal
(1) Base Angle Center
(4) Base Girt Inner
(4) Base Girt Outer
(4) Knee Brace Angle
(1) Hardware Kit (Basic)
ACCESSORIES:
INCREASED AREA KIT 3000220-0002
Consists of:
(4) Base Girt Inner (Kit)

(4) Base Girt Outer (Kit)
(1) Hardware Kit (Increased Area)
RUBBER MAT KIT (BASIC) 3000220-0003
RUBBER MAT KIT (INCREASED AREA) 3000220-0004
SPARES
Hardware Kit (Basic) 3000220-0008

Hardware Kit (Increased Area) 3000220-0009
6-7-5
PES-777
Figure 7-3. Rubber Mat Kits
6-7-6
3-5-91
Section 8
14-FOOT HEXAGON NPMM
8.1 GENERAL
This section describes the procedures to assemble the 14-foot Hexagon non-penetrating roof mount as
well as installation considerations for the PES remote site. The 14-foot Hexagon Antenna mount is
identified by the following numbers:
Hughes Network Systems 3000221-0001
Prodelin 0800-377
Rohn AAGM-6560
The mount, which covers a 14’3" hexagon pattern on the roof, has a 6.6" outside diameter mast to
accommodate the 2.44M antenna. The 14-foot hexagon mount is designed to use concrete blocks as
ballast.
8.2 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

Prior to the installation of the non-penetrating mount, it is necessary to verify that the building structure
and local zoning codes will allow for this type of equipment. The installation of the 14-foot hexagon
NPMM and 2.44M antenna can only be authorized after a site study and approval of the building
loads by a structural engineer. The surface of the roof should be flat and free of any objects or debris
which could cause damage to the base panels or interfere with the installation. The roof may also have to
be treated with roof cement, tar, or roof mat material to fill and/or seal all voids between the mounting
equipment and the roof.
8.3 ASSEMBLY
Loosely assemble the hexagon sections but do not tighten any bolts until the entire mount is put together.
6-8-1
3-5-91
Section 9
CROSS MAST MOUNT
This section covers the following topics:
Description Page No.
Concrete Block Quantity and Type, Shipping Information, Tool List 6-9-2, 6-9-4
Part Numbers and Descriptions 6-9-3
Application Instructions (where can the CMM be used?) 6-9-4
Roof Structure Considerations 6-9-6
Installation Instructions 6-9-7
Nut Tightening Sequence 6-9-16
9.1 INTRODUCTION
The Cross Mast Mount (CMM), HNS P/N 3000364-0001 (Videostar P/N 20-1292) is pictured in figure
9-1. The CMM has a 4" outside diameter mast and, therefore, is applicable for the 1.8M antenna and the
0.75M, 1.0M, and 1.2M antennas if a mast adapter (P/N 3000356-0001) is used.
PES3-1183
Figure 9-1. Cross Mast Mount (CMM)
6-9-1
The Cross Mast Mount is a unique non-penetrating system that permits concrete blocks to function as an
integral part of the mounting system as well as ballast to prevent antenna movement. The mounting
system contains few parts and because of the small size, is UPS shippable to the site and fits through a
standard roof hatch.
The system can be used on 95% of all one and two story buildings, meets building code requirements, and
because of the "X" shape can be installed around obstacles. Weight distribution is less than 20 psf.
For Quick Repoint installation, the mounting surface (roof, parking lot, etc.) must be level or must not
slope more than 5 degrees.
NOTE
The wind zone map, exposure factor, and height limitations for CMM are
defined on pages 6-9-4 and 6-9-5. The factors (which differ from the
methods of chapter 6, section 4) are used to determine if CMM is
suitable for a given location. The DIU Configuration Editor BALLAST
program is not applicable to the CMM.
9.2 CONCRETE BLOCK (BALLAST) DESCRIPTION

Quantity: 35
Size: 8" x 8" x 16"
Type: 2 or 3 cell concrete block
Weight: Approximately 30 pounds each
The number of concrete blocks required may vary if the block dimensions differ. Enough blocks must be
used to match the length of the threaded rods. Therefore, the ballast used for the CMM is fixed by the
weight and number of blocks. This fixed ballast weight is on the order of 1,190 lbs.
9.3 SHIPPING/RECEIVING INFORMATION

The Cross Mast Mount (CMM) is shipped in the following two (2) boxes:
Quantity Size Weight Part Number Contents

1 4" x 4" x 69" 69 lbs. 20-1269 8 threaded rods, 4 angle braces,
1 mast, 1 hardware bag
1 20" x 10.5" x 8" 69 lbs. 20-1270 2 rolls of rubber pad (4 pieces),
4 end plates, 4 angle brace
plates, 1 flat plate, 1 mast
support plate, 1 hardware bag
Figure 9-2 presents a sketch of each part and defines the total quantity required of each.
6-9-2
SECTION 9 - CROSS MAST MOUNT
PES3-1184
Figure 9-2. CMM Parts
6-9-3
9.4 RECOMMENDED TOOL LIST

Quantity Tool Name
2 3/4 wrenches
1 11/16 open end wrench
1 Pliers
1 Rake or shovel - to remove rocks
1 Broom - to sweep away dirt and small rocks
9.5 CMM APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

1. Locate your installation site on the Wind Speed Map (10-1008) on page 6-9-5.
2. Determine the design wind speed from the map for your location.
3. Select the proper exposure factor (B or C) as described below.
Exposure B: Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other terrain with numerous
closely spaced obstructions having the size of single family dwellings or larger.
Obstructions must extend 1500 feet in all directions from the building.
Exposure C: Open terrain with widely scattered obstructions having heights generally less
than 30 feet. Includes flat, open country and grasslands.
4. Using the design wind speed and the exposure factor, determine the maximum building
height from the table below. If the actual building height is taller than the height given in
the table, then the CMM cannot be installed at this site.
Design Wind Exposure B Exposure C
Speed Maximum Building Maximum Building
(mph) Height (feet) Height (feet)
70* 200 40
75 100 N/A
80 100 N/A
85 60 N/A
90 40 N/A
95** 20 N/A
100 N/A N/A
105 N/A N/A
110 N/A N/A
115 N/A N/A
120 N/A N/A
125 N/A N/A
* Maximum wind speed for exposure C

** Maximum wind speed for exposure B
6-9-4
Figure 9-3. Videostar Wind Speed Map
PES3-1185
6-9-5
9.6 CMM ROOF STRUCTURE CONSIDERATIONS

The CMM is designed to be mounted on roofs with a design live load specification of 20 psf or greater.
NOTE
In snow regions the CMM must be mounted over a roof support column
or main roof support beam (not just a bar joist). If this is not possible,
then snow loads must be considered for this installation. Contact your
HNS district installation manager immediately.
Figure 9-4 shows the preferred orientation for the mount relative to the building structure. The preferred
orientation has the legs of the X installed crosswise to the roof structure. Also shown is an acceptable
orientation with the legs parallel to the roof structure.
PES3-1186
Figure 9-4. Mount Orientations
6-9-6
9.7 CMM INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

STEP 1. Select the installation area. Locate South and plan to direct the longest CMM leg in a
southerly direction. This will allow the widest azimuth travel for the satellite dish.
NOTE
In snow regions the CMM must be mounted over a roof support column
or main roof support beam (not just a bar joist). If this is not possible,
then snow loads must be considered for this installation. Contact your
HNS district installation manager immediately.
STEP 2. Clean the installation area by removing all loose materials in the area of the "X" shape,
including all loose roof stones.
STEP 3. Lay the four rubber roof pads in the cleaned area to create the "X" shape. One pad of the
longest leg should point generally south.
PES3-1187
Figure 9-5. Point Longest Leg Generally South
6-9-7
STEP 4. Attach two threaded rods together by:

A. Run one nut 3/4" onto the end of two threaded rods.
B. Fasten these two rods by threading a coupling against the nuts.
C. Fully tighten each nut against the coupling.
STEP 5. Repeat step 4. You now have two rods, 11-1/2 feet long.
PES3-1188
Figure 9-6. Installing Coupling
STEP 6. Place one concrete block in the center of the "X" as shown below. Note the orientation of
the block. Run one 11-1/2’ threaded rod assembly through each cell of the concrete block
(through the outer cells for a 3-cell block).
PES3-1189
Figure 9-7. Place Block in Center
6-9-8
STEP 7. Skewer the flat plate and the mast support plate onto the threaded rods on opposite sides of
the block. Note direction of angle on mast support plate. Center the plates on the block.
PES3-1190
Figure 9-8. Installing Plates
STEP 8. Skewer concrete blocks and two angle brace plates on the threaded rods as shown. Snug
blocks close together and keep in a straight line.
PES3-1191
Figure 9-9. Installing Blocks and Angle Plates
6-9-9
NOTE
Nuts should be hand tightened only until specific instructions are given
for full tightening.
STEP 9. Skewer an end plate onto the threaded rods against each end block. Note that the "dimples"
and lower flange protrude outward, away from the block. Install flat washers and nuts.
Hand tighten only.
PES3-1192
Figure 9-10. Installing End Plates
STEP 10. Screw a nut about 3/4-inch onto one end of each of the four remaining threaded rods. Screw
a clevis down to each nut and fully tighten the nut against the clevis.
PES3-1193
Figure 9-11. Threaded Rod and Clevis
6-9-10
STEP 11. Attach each clevis to the "ears" of the flat plate and mast support plate using clevis pins and
cotter pins. Bend the cotter pins to ensure they cannot fall out during assembly.
PES3-1194
Figure 9-12. Attaching Clevis to Flat Plate
6-9-11
STEP 12. Skewer concrete blocks and two angle brace plates on the threaded rods as shown. Snug
close together and keep in a straight line. Install end plates, flatwashers and nuts as shown in
figure 9-10. Hand tighten only.
PES3-1195
Figure 9-13. Adding Blocks
6-9-12
STEP 13. Determine the top end of the mast as shown. Stand the mast on the center block against the
mast support plate. Install U-bolt, flatwashers and nuts. Hand tighten only.
PES3-1196
Figure 9-14. Installing Mast
6-9-13
STEP 14. Select the longest angle brace of the four provided. Rotate the mast to get the top hole into
the proper position as shown.
Install one end of the angle brace at the top hole of the mast using a long bolt (5"), two
flatwashers, a lockwasher and a nut. Hand tighten only.
Install the other end under the angle brace bracket using a short bolt (1"), two flatwashers, a
lockwasher and a nut. Hand tighten only.
PES3-1197
Figure 9-15. Installing Long Angle Brace
6-9-14
STEP 15. Install the remaining angle braces as shown. Hand tighten only.
PES3-1198
Figure 9-16. Installing Remaining Angle Braces
6-9-15
STEP 16. IMPORTANT - Snug and tighten nuts on the threaded rods with the following procedure:
A. "Snug" nut 1 while holding nut 3.
NOTE: When a nut is "snug," any slack in the system (including space between
blocks) is removed. The nut should not be fully tightened.
B. "Snug" nut 2 while holding nut 4.
C. "Resnug" nut 1 while holding nut 3.
D. Tighten nuts 1 and 2 three (3) full turns (or six half turns). Remember to hold
nuts 3 and 4 on the opposite ends.
E. "Snug" nut 5.
F. "Snug" nut 6.
G. "Resnug" nut 5.
H. Tighten nuts 5 and 6 three (3) full turns (or six half turns).
I. Repeat steps E through H for nuts 7 and 8. This can be done simultaneously
with nuts 5 and 6 when two installers are available.
PES3-1202
Figure 9-17. Tightening Sequence
6-9-16
J. Add a second "jam" nut to positions 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and tighten against the

first nut.
PES3-1200
Figure 9-18. Adding Jam Nuts
PES3-1201
Figure 9-19. Positioning a Wrench Against Roof
STEP 17. Tighten the two U-bolt nuts and add a second nut to each. Tighten the second nuts.
STEP 18. Tighten the bolts at both ends of the four angle braces (8 places).
STEP 19. Apply cold galvanizing spray to the exposed ends of the eight (8) threaded rods.
STEP 20. Install the 1.8M antenna assembly.
6-9-17
NOTE
For the Prodelin 1.8M antenna, use the lowest mounting hole pattern on
the "reflector support tube." This will lift the antenna to its highest point
above the CMM.
6-9-18
11-27-91
11-27-91
SECTION 10 - RIDGE MAST MOUNT (RMM)
Section 10
RIDGE MAST MOUNT (RMM)
10.1 INTRODUCTION
The Ridge Mast Mount (RMM) (HNS P/N 3000351-0001) is designed for use as a non-penetrating mast
mount for the 0.75M, 1.0M and 1.2M Prodelin antennas.
10.1.1 FEATURES
The RMM has several unique features as given below:
1. It can be used on flat roofs (with up to 5-degree slopes) as well as peaked roofs up to a
30-degree pitch as shown in figure 10-1.
2. The ballast is fixed and held captive by the tension rods and is integral to the mount
structure.
3. The design incorporates Belville washers stamped into the end plates that allow for the
expansion and contraction of the blocks during thermal changes while still maintaining a
rigid structure.
4. As shown in tables 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3, the smaller the antenna, the higher the wind
speeds, exposure factor and height above ground that can be tolerated. The smaller antenna
presents less area and hence has less wind force than a larger antenna.
5. Note that this mount can also be used on flat roofs and therefore substitute for the 5-1/2 x
5-1/2 NPMM.
6. The mount requires the use of a tether (especially when used on a peaked roof or where a
sliding mount could leave the roof). Those installations where a natural barrier exist, like a
parapet, do not require the tether. This tether is 3/16 steel cable and attached to the mast
and tether point with three cable clamps on each end.
7. Note that the diagonal braces can be temporarily used in the peaked roof application to help
hold the concrete blocks in place until they can be skewered by the rods.
8. The mount is light and compact and can be easily and economically shipped. The shipping
configuration permits the unassembled mount to fit through roof hatches.
9. Because the mount requires 16 concrete blocks, the installer cannot put too few ballast
blocks on the mount.
10. Because the ballast is held captive, it is more difficult to later remove the blocks for some
other purpose and hence risk the mount moving.
11. Rubber pads are provided to protect the roof as well as to provide a uniform coefficient of
friction to prevent sliding. The pad is made of Butyl rubber and is designed to be
compatible with most roof surfaces (asphalt, tile, membrane, tar, etc.) and to be resistant to
deterioration due to weather (e.g., rain, snow and ice), most chemicals and ultraviolet light
from the sun. It is not known to react with or be harmful to any roof material.
6-10-1
10.1.2 TOOLS REQUIRED
Maximum
Hardware Size Recommended
Tool Required Used On Torque (ft/lbs)
7/16" Socket or Wrench 1/4-20 6

1/2" Socket and Wrench 5/16-18 11
9/16" Socket and Wrench 3/8-16 19
3/4" Wrench (2 required) 1/2-13 --
ADDITIONAL TOOLS REQUIRED:
1 Rake or Shovel (to remove rocks)

1 Broom (to sweep away dirt and small rocks)
1 Inclinometer or Level
1 Carpenter’s Square
10.1.3 SHIPPING CONFIGURATION

The RMM is shipped as one carton. The RMM is shipped without the concrete block ballast.
-- Ridge Mast Mount 97 lbs 8" x 3" x 72"
10.1.4 INSTALLED SIZE AND WEIGHT

Mount (less pads and safety cable) 70 lbs
Concrete Blocks (16 x 30 lbs) 480 lbs
________
Total Mount: 550 lbs
Total weight in lbs. with various antennas:
0.75M 1.0M 1.2M
Antenna 52 65 67
RF Unit 12 12 12
Ridge Mast Mount (RMM) 550 550 550
____ ____ ____
Total Installed Weight: 614 627 629
The RMM occupies a roof area 76" x 67" for an effective load-bearing area of 35.3 square feet. The
rubber pads extend slightly beyond the RMM to cover an area of the roof approximately 80" x 70". The
mast height above the roof is 31".
6-10-2
PES3-1320
Figure 10-1. Ridge Mast Mount
6-10-3
10.2 RMM APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

The RMM assembly requires a fixed amount of ballast (16 concrete blocks). Because the ballast is an
integral part of the mount, the ballast calculation of the DIU Configuration Editor is not used. Instead,
use the maps and tables of the steps below to determine where the ridge mast mount is applicable.
STEP 1. Locate your installation site on the Wind Speed Map in figure 10-2.
STEP 2. Determine the design wind speed from the map for your location.
STEP 3. Select the proper exposure factor (B or C) as described below:

Exposure B: Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other terrain with
numerous closely spaced obstructions having the size of single-family dwellings
or larger. Obstructions must extend 1500 feet in all directions from the building.
Exposure C: Open terrain with widely scattered obstructions having heights

generally less than 30 feet. Includes flat, open country and grass lands.
STEP 4. Using the design wind speed and the exposure factor, determine the maximum building
height from table 10-1 for 0.75M, table 10-2 for 1.0M, and table 10-3 for 1.2M. If the actual
building is taller than the height given in the table, the RIDGE MAST MOUNT cannot be
installed at this site.
STEP 5. Maximum pitch of roof for use on peaked roof is 30 degrees. The RMM will adjust to fit on
peaked roofs steeper than 30 degrees; however, the wind ratings are based on 30 degrees
maximum. Do not install the RMM on a peaked roof with a pitch greater than 30 degrees.
STEP 6. If used on corrugated roof, fill in between corrugations with weather-treated lumber.
STEP 7. The 8" x 8" x 16" concrete blocks must be manufactured in accordance with ASTM8 C90,
Grade N-1. The concrete blocks shall average at least 28 lbs each. If not, add weight by
breaking additional blocks into small pieces and inserting the pieces in the cavity of the
blocks (one additional block per side). The pieces will be captured at final assembly.
8American Society for Testing and Materials, 1619 Race Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103.
6-10-4
Table 10-1. 0.75-Meter Rectangular Antenna (Peaked or Flat Roofs)

70 800 486
75 540 267
80 375 151
85 264 88
90 189 53
95 137 32
100 101 20
105 75 N/A
110 57 N/A
115 43 N/A
120 33 N/A
125 25 N/A
Table 10-2. 1.0-Meter Rectangular Antenna (Peaked or Flat Roofs)

70 154 38
75 102 20
80 69 N/A
85 48 N/A
90 33 N/A
95 24 N/A
100 18 N/A
Table 10-3. 1.2-Meter Offset Antenna (Peaked or Flat Roofs)

70 20 N/A
6-10-5
6-10-6

PES3-1185
Figure 10-2. U.S. Wind Speed Map (American National Standard A58.1-1982)
10.3 RMM ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
NOTE
The Ridge Mast Mount can be installed on peaked roofs or flat roofs.
The following instructions have been generalized for either type of
installation.
STEP 1. See figures 10-7 and 10-8 and table 10-4 for identification of the parts. Figure 10-7 calls out
most RMM parts by item number. In the following instructions, numbers in parentheses refer
to item numbers from table 10-4 and figures 10-7 and 10-8.
STEP 2. Select the installation area. Locate South and plan to direct the mount generally South. For
peaked roofs select the direction closest to the direction of the satellite of interest. (See
figures 10-1 and 10-7 for the definition of mount direction.)
STEP 3. Assemble an end plate with full flanges (1) to an end plate with cut-off flanges (2) using three
3/8-16 x 3/4" long bolts, six flatwashers, three lockwashers and nuts. Hand tighten only.
NOTE
On peaked roofs position end plates so the same amount of slot, X,
shows above the tops of the end plates.
PES3-1319
Figure 10-3. Adjusting End Plates
6-10-7
STEP 4. As shown in figure 10-4, assemble the remaining two end plates using only one 3/8-16 x 3/4"
long bolt, and the large U-bolt (6), U-bolt channel (5), and notched end plate angle (7), 3/8"
flatwashers, lockwashers and nuts. Bend the notched angle as required to match the angle of
the roof peak. Hand tighten the bolt but leave the U-bolt loose. NOTE: On peaked roofs
position end plates so the same amount of slot shows above the tops of the end plates. (Same
as figure 10-3.)
5 23
28
19
16
1
7
Notched End Plate Angle
23 28 19
A) Flat Roofs
7 Notched End Plate Angle

Bent To Match Roof Angle
B) Peaked Roofs
PES3-1321
Figure 10-4. Installing Large U-bolt
6-10-8
STEP 5. Place rubber pads (12 and 13) on roof using end plates to locate position. Flanges on end
plates point out, away from mount.
PES3-1322
Figure 10-5. Installing Rubber Pads
6-10-9
STEP 6. Place 16 concrete blocks on rubber pads (8 each side). Use a carpenter’s square in all four
corners to make sure the blocks and end plates are perpendicular.
NOTE
If concrete blocks slide on roof, they can be temporarily held in place
using diagonal angle braces (8) as shown.
PES3-1323
Figure 10-6. Placing Concrete Blocks
6-10-10
STEP 7. Skewer threaded rods (4) through concrete blocks and plates. Fasten using flatwashers and
nut (4 places). Fully tighten nuts. Then add a second nut and fully tighten. (See figure
10-7.)
STEP 8. Fully tighten the straight bolts that join the end plates. Do not tighten U-bolt at this time (4,
3/8-16 x 3/4" bolts).
NOTE: Check to be sure the same amount of slot shows above the end plates as set in steps 2
and 3.
STEP 9. Attach diagonal angle braces (8) to end plates using 5/16-18 x 3/4" long bolts, nuts and
flatwashers (4 places). Note that the diagonal angle braces (8) have an extra set of holes
approximately seven inches from one end. Attach that end to the more outboard holes in the
set of end plates (1 and 2) that will be away from the mast. Attach the other ends of the
diagonal angle braces (8) to the more inboard holes of the end plates (1 and 2) that will hold
the mast. At this mast end, the bolts also pass thru the notched end plate angle (7). Finger
tight only. (See figure 10-7.)
STEP 10. Slide mast pipe (10) down through U-bolt until the bottom touches the lower bolt thru the end
plates. (See figure 10-7.)
STEP 11. Attach diagonal tube braces (11) to the angle braces (8) using 5/16-18 x 3/4" bolts, nuts and
flatwashers. If you are installing the RMM on a flat roof, use the holes nearest the end of the
diagonal angle braces (8). If you are installing the RMM on a peaked roof, you may need to
use the holes approximately seven inches from the end of the diagonal angle braces (8).
Finger tight only.
STEP 12. Attach channel brace clamps (9) to mast pipe using 5/16-18 x 3-1/2" bolts, nuts and
flatwashers. Finger tight only.
NOTE: The head of the bolt must be on the opposite side of the pipe from the channel it is
holding.
STEP 13. Fasten diagonal tube braces (11) to the channel brace clamps (9) using two small U-bolts (25)
and mounting plate brackets (3). Position first U-bolt to within 1" of end of diagonal tube
brace. Refer to detail A on figure 10-7. Finger tight only.
STEP 14. Fully tighten diagonal angle braces (8) to the end plates (1 and 2) (4 places).
STEP 15. Fully tighten diagonal tube braces (11) to the angle braces (8) (2 places).
STEP 16. Fully tighten channel brace clamps (9) to the mast pipe (10) (2 places).
STEP 17. Use an inclinometer or level to adjust the mast pipe to a straight vertical position and fully
tighten small U-bolts (25).
STEP 18. Fully tighten large U-bolt (6).
STEP 19. If this site does not have a barrier (such as a parapet) to limit mount sliding in the event of
very extreme weather conditions, attach the safety cable (29) to a suitable anchoring point
and to the RMM mast. Use three 3/16" cable clamps (30) on each end.
6-10-11
PES3-1324
Figure 10-7. Ridge Mast Mount Assembly
6-10-12
Full Flange Cut-off Flange
1 L. H. End Plate 2 R.H. End Plate

40.5" x 7.6" 40.5" x 7.6"
0156-905 0156-906
4 Compression
3 Mounting Plate Bracket Rod 7 End Plate Angle
6.3" x 2" 72" 11" x 1.2" x 1.2"
0156-907 0180-228 0225-402
8 Diagonal Angle Brace

69.2" x 1.2" x 1.2"
0225-403
9 Channel Brace Clamp 10 Mast Pipe

12" x 1.1" 28.8" x 2.88" O.D.
0247-122 0250-412
11 Diagonal Tube Brace

69" x 7/8" O.D.
0250-413
12 1/16 x 18 x 70" Rubber Pad 13 1/16 x 18 x 6" Rubber Pad

5003-015 5003-016
PES3-1325
Figure 10-8. RMM Parts Identification
6-10-13
Table 10-4. Ridge Mast Mount Parts List and Weight
Total
Item # Part # Description Qty. Weight
1 0156-905 L.H. End Plate 2 16

2 0156-906 R.H. End Plate 2 15
3 0156-907 Mounting Plate Bracket 2 1
4 0180-228 Compression Rod 2 14
5 0247-121 U-bolt Channel 1 *
6 8402-009 3/8-16 x 3" U-bolt 1 *
7 0225-402 End Plate Angle 1 0.3
8 0225-403 Diagonal Angle Brace 2 7.2
9 0247-122 Channel Brace Clamp 2 1.3
10 0250-412 Mast Pipe 1 8.8
11 0250-413 Diagonal Tube Brace 2 2.8
12 5003-015 1/16 x 18 x 70" Rubber Pad 2 0.8
13 5003-016 1/16 x 18 x 6" Rubber Pad 2 8.8
14 8031-006 5/16-18 x .75" Bolt 6 *
15 8031-030 5/16-18 x 3.75" Bolt 2 *
16 8032-006 3/8-16 x .75" Bolt 4 *
17 8100-007 1/4-20 Hex Nut 8 *
18 8101-009 5/16-18 Hex Nut 8 *
19 8102-007 3/8-16 Hex Nut 6 *
20 8104-007 1/2-13 Hex Nut 8 *
21 8201-040 1/4" Flatwasher 8 *
22 8201-041 5/16" Flatwasher 14 *
23 8201-042 3/8" Flatwasher 10 *
24 8201-043 1/2" Flatwasher 4 *
25 8400-001 1/4-20 x 1" U-bolt 4 *
26 8202-040 1/4" Lockwasher 4 *
27 8202-041 5/16" Lockwasher 8 *
28 8202-042 3/8" Lockwasher 6 *
29 8500-062 3/16" x 50’ Safety Cable 1 12
30 8500-063 3/16" Cable Clamp Assembly 6 *
* * Misc Nuts & Bolt Weight -- 4
TOTAL MOUNT WEIGHT 92
6-10-14
6-28-95
CHAPTER 7
ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
Table 0-1 lists references for the antenna assembly instructions for the antennas used with the PES Model
X000 series units. For certain antennas, a different part number must be ordered if anti-icing is required.
For those antennas, the anti-icing system is included as part of the antenna (as opposed to being an
add-on). Light weight version of the 1.0 M and 1.2 M have been added with assembly instructions
provided in FSBs.
Table 0-1. Antenna Assembly Summary
Part Number - HNS Frequency

Antenna Name (Prodelin) Band Reference
0.75M Quick Repoint Rectangular 3000179-0001 Ku PES Gen Ref Ch 7 Sec 1
(1752-132)
Regular 1.0M Quick Repoint Rectangular 3000172-0001 Ku PES Gen Ref Ch 7 Sec 1
(without Anti-Icing) (1102-132)
Regular 1.0M Quick Repoint Rectangular 3000172-0003 Ku PES Gen Ref Ch 7 Sec 1
(with Integral Anti-Icing) (1102-134) and FSB 1142
Light Weight 1.0M Quick Repoint Rectangular 3000172-0002 Ku FSB 1094B
Regular "Early Style" 1.2M Quick Repoint 3000173-0001 Ku PES Gen Ref Ch 7 Sec 2
Regular "Early Style" 1.2M Quick Repoint 3000173-0003 Ku PES Gen Ref Ch 7 Sec 2
(with Integral Anti-Icing) (1123-136) and FSB 1146
Light Weight 1.2M Quick Repoint 3000173-0002 Ku FSB 1095A
(1123-139)
1.8M Quick Repoint (Alignment Rod Version) 3000063-0001 Ku PES Gen Ref Ch 7 Sec 3
(1184-132)
Self-Aligning 1.8M Quick Repoint 3000361-0001 Ku PES Gen Ref Ch 7 Sec 4
(1184-133)
Self-Aligning 1.8M Quick Repoint See Reference C PES Gen Ref Ch 7 Sec 4
(See Reference)
2.44M Quick Repoint 3000362-0001 Ku PES Gen Ref Ch 7 Sec 5
(1245-133)
2.44M Quick Repoint See Reference C PES Gen Ref Ch 7 Sec 5
(See Reference)
Because each antenna requires a specific mast diameter and feedhorn, refer to the table 0-2 to identify the
configuration required for your installation. The appropriate type feedhorn as shown in figure 0-1 is
shipped with the antenna. The RF Unit arrives without the feedhorn which is then installed in the field.
There are two versions of the 1.8M antenna for use with PES Model X000 series: a version that requires
portable alignment rods and a self-aligning version with built-in alignment struts. Refer to the
appropriate section. All antennas for PES Model X000 series have the quick repoint feature, which is
7-1-1
marketed under the tradename Quikpoint .9

TM
FOR 0.75M & 1.0M ANTENNAS, FOR 1.2M, 1.8M, & 2.4M ANTENNAS,
RECTANGULAR FEEDHORN CONICAL FEEDHORN
PS31844.FH3
Figure 0-1. Antenna Size/Style Determines Feedhorn Types
Table 0-2. Antenna Sizes, Mast Sizes, and Feedhorn Types

Antenna Size Mast (Outside Diameter) Feedhorn Type
0.75 Meter 2.88-inch Rectangular
1.0 Meter 2.88-inch Rectangular
1.2 Meter 2.88-inch Conical
9Quikpoint is a trademark of Hughes Network Systems.
7-2
CHAPTER 7 - ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
3-5-91
Section 1
0.75M AND 1.0M RECTANGULAR ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
This section is written for both the 0.75M and the 1.0M Rectangular Antenna Assemblies. When the two
antennas differ, the antennas will be cited individually.

The complete 0.75M Rectangular Antenna System (HNS P/N 3000179-0001, Prodelin P/N 1752-132) is
shipped in two cartons:
• 0800-066 0.75M Rectangular Reflector 27 lbs 9.5" x 25-3/8" x 53-3/8"

with Feed System
• 0800-118 0.75M/1.0M Rectangular Az/El Mount 40 lbs 18.5" x 19.25" x 10"
The 0.75M rectangular reflector with feed system carton (0800-066) includes:
Prodelin P/N Description Quantity
0176-048 Feed Rod, 0.75M Rectangular 2

0179-131 Reflector, 0.75M Rectangular 1
0200-507 Kit, HDWE. Feed System 0.75M Rectangular 1
0600-021 Support, Radio 0.75M Rectangular 1
0800-107 Rectangular Feedhorn Kit 1
5005-147 0800-066 Checklist 1
The complete 1.0M Rectangular Antenna System (HNS P/N 3000172-0001, Prodelin P/N 1102-132) is
• 0800-108 1.0M Rectangular Reflector 38 lbs 9.5" x 25-3/8" x 53-3/8"

with Feed System
• 0800-118 0.75M/1.0M Rectangular Az/El Mount 40 lbs 18.5" x 19.25" x 10"
The 1.0M rectangular reflector with feed system carton (0800-108) includes:
0176-050 Feed Rod, 1.0M Rectangular 2

0179-132 Reflector, 1.0M Rectangular 1
0200-507 Kit, HDWE. Feed System 1.0M Rectangular 1
0600-018 Support, Radio 1.0M Rectangular 1
0800-107 Rectangular Feedhorn Kit 1
5005-148 0800-108 Checklist 1
7-1-1
The 0.75M/1.0M rectangular Az/El mount carton (0800-118) includes:

0181-256 Assembly, Elevation Adjustment Rod 1.0M Rectangular 1

0181-257 Assembly, Reflector Support 1.0M Rectangular 1
0181-258 Assembly, Az/El Positioner 1.0M Rectangular 1
0200-512 Kit, Elevation Indicator 1
5005-149 0800-118 Checklist 1
The antenna containers should be unpacked and inspected at the earliest date to ensure that all material
has been received and is in good condition. Any damage to materials while in transit should be
immediately directed to the freight carrier. He will instruct you on matters regarding any freight damage
claims. Any questions regarding missing or damaged materials that are not due to the freight carrier
should be directed to Prodelin’s Customer Service Department at: Prodelin Corporation, 1700 NE Cable
Drive, P.O. Box 368, Conover, North Carolina 28613, Phone (704) 464-4141.
1.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION TOOLS (0.75M, 1.0M, 1.2M)

The following tools are recommended for use when installing the antenna.
1 Ratchet, 1/2" drive 1 Wrench, Combination 1/2"
1 Socket, 9/16" deep well, 1/2" drive 1 Wrench, Combination 9/16"
1 Socket, 5/16", 1/2" drive 1 Wrench, Combination 3/4"
1 Socket, 1/2", 1/2" drive 1 Screwdriver, standard blade
1 Wrench, Combination 5/16" 1 10" adjustable Crescent Wrench
1 Wrench, Combination 3/8" 1 Screwdriver, Phillips No. 3
1 Wrench, Combination 7/16"
1.3 ASSEMBLY
STEP 1. Refer to figure 1-1. Unpack the reflector support assembly (item 1), which is shipped in
folded position (rotated as far as possible in polarization). Carefully straighten (unfold) it to
the zero polarization position shown in figure 1-1 making sure that the polarization
indicator does not wedge underneath the riveted-in-place polarization scale (early
units), figure 1-4. If anti-icing is required, refer to chapter 8, section 2 before proceeding. If
anti-icing is not required, locate the reflector and the four special self-tapping 27/64-13 x
1.38" screws (shown as item 3). These screws can be identified by their special double
threads (high and low threads).
STEP 2. Attach the reflector support assembly (item 2) to the rectangular reflector (item 1). Orient the
reflector support assembly so that its forked end is nearest the bottom of the reflector as
shown in figure 1-1. The bottom of the reflector has three support ribs and a hole in the edge
(the top does not have a hole). Using the special screws from step 1, carefully start the
special screws so that they are straight. If a hole has previously had a screw inserted into it,
make certain that the screw is re-threaded into the previously cut threads or stripped threads
will result.
For the 1.0M Antenna Assembly, attach the reflector support assembly to a 1.0M Rectangular
Reflector using the outermost holes provided on the reflector support assembly.
For the 0.75M Antenna Assembly, attach the reflector support assembly to a 0.75M
Rectangular Reflector using the innermost holes provided on the reflector support assembly.
7-1-2
SECTION 1 - 0.75M AND 1.0M RECTANGULAR ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
Tighten the screws securely, but do not overtighten. If a hole is stripped, it can usually be
repaired by filling the hole with 2-part Epoxy (e.g. Epoxy-Patch, Hysul Division of Dexter
Corp, Orlean, N.Y. 14760 or equivalent) and immediately inserting the screw and allowing
the epoxy to harden.
PES3-951
Item No. Part No. Description Quantity

____* 0179-131 0.75M Rectangular Reflector 1
1 0179-132 1.0M Rectangular Reflector 1
2 0181-257 Reflector Support Assembly 1
3 8319-006 27/64-13 x 1.38" Screw 4
* Not shown
Figure 1-1. Mating Reflector to Reflector Support Assembly
7-1-3
NOTE
The Az/El positioner assembly is placed on the mast in the next step.
Alternately, the entire antenna may be assembled first and placed on the
mast at one time.
STEP 3. Refer to figure 1-2. Loosen the square head canister set screws (item 2) and the screw for
grounding so that the Az/El positioner assembly will fit over the mast. Make a pencil mark
on the mast 4.5 inches from the top. Place the Az/El positioner assembly on the mast. It
should cover the pencil mark. If it does not, check that the top canister set screws have been
sufficiently loosened.
The Az/El positioner assembly must be oriented correctly in relation to the satellite orbital arc
to allow the azimuth Quick Repoint feature to sight on both the primary and backup satellites.
NOTE
The quick repoint antenna has a range of 90 degrees in azimuth at a
given setting of canister position. By properly positioning the Az/El
positioner assembly on the mast, you will make sure that any backup
satellite is within the azimuth range without having to change canister
position.
Note the arrow in figure 1-2 showing the canister orientation ("TO
CENTER OF SATELLITE ORBITAL ARC"). Adjust the Az/El
Positioner Assembly so the top rotating part of the Az/El Positioner
Assembly is oriented approximately as shown in figure 1-2 with respect
to the bottom half [i.e., so that the azimuth adjust is in the middle (can go
±45 degrees) and can adjust to the primary and the backup satellite
without unbolting the positioner from the mast]. If this is not done
properly, it will not be possible to later use the "quick repoint" feature to
switch to the backup satellite.
If the primary and backup satellites are both known, use the site
commissioning computer LATLONG function to calculate the azimuth
from your site to each. In almost all cases the azimuth difference is less
than 90° between the two satellites. Position the Az/El Positioner
Assembly on the mast so that it points midway in azimuth between the
two satellites.
If the backup satellite is not known, for North America, select a

satellite at longitude 103 degrees West for aiming "TO CENTER OF
SATELLITE ARC," the Az/El positioner assembly. This selection
permits the most sites to view both their primary and backup satellites
without having to change the canister position. Use the LATLONG
function to calculate the azimuth from your site to a satellite located at
103 degrees West. Correct the azimuth for magnetic declination and aim
the Az/El positioner assembly accordingly.
7-1-4
PES3-952

1 0181-258 Az/El Positioner Assembly 1
2 8317-008 1/4-20 x 2.00" Square Head Screw 1
3 8100-007 1/4-20 Hex Nut 2
4 8200-018 1/4" Int. Tooth Lockwasher 2
Note: Items 2, 3 & 4 are removed from Item 1 for Assembly.
Figure 1-2. Az/El Positioner Assembly
7-1-5
STEP 4. Alternately tighten the eight set screws (item 2 of figure 1-2) while watching the bubble level
on the top canister plate to be sure that the Az/El positioner assembly is level. It is
important to make sure the canister is level. Otherwise, the quick repoint feature will not
work correctly because the elevation will not be correct as the antenna is changed in azimuth.
STEP 5. With all set screws snug, check again to be sure that the Az/El positioner assembly is level
and securely tighten the set screws. Tighten the lock nuts against the canister. Use terminal
lugs to attach the ground wires (from RF Unit and to building ground) to the square head
screw (see items 2, 3, and 4 of figure 1-2). NOTE: Terminal lugs are required on with the 1.0
M antenna even though the 1.8 M antenna may not have permitted terminal lugs.
STEP 6. Refer to figure 1-3. Remove the the 5/8-11 x 5.00 " elevation pivot bolt (item 9 in figure 1-3)
from the reflector support assembly. Place one washer on the elevation pivot bolt (item 9),
then locate the bolt where it can be easily reached (for example, on top of the Az/El
positioner assembly). Lift the reflector support assembly with reflector to the Az/El
positioner assembly and feed the elevation pivot bolt thru the indicated tube. Attach the
indicated washers and nut (items 10, 11, and 12).
STEP 7. Locate the elevation adjustment rod assembly (Prodelin part number 0181-256) and attach the
elevation adjustment rod (item 1 in figure 1-3) to the Az/El positioner assembly and to the
reflector support assembly using the indicated hardware (items 2 thru 8). As shown in figure
1-3 the elevation rod passes through a hole in a pivoting bracket on the Az/El positioner. If
necessary, slightly loosen the pivoting bracket bolts so that it pivots freely. Apply a weather
protective lubricant (such as "LPS3" manufactured by Holt Lloyd Corp. and available at
distributors in your area, whose address can be obtained by calling 1-800-241-8334) to the
elevation adjustment rod and to the azimuth adjustment rod. Move the adjustment locations
and reapply so that the entire rods are covered. The lubricant is used to inhibit corrosion and
to make it easier to repoint or adjust the antenna at a later date.
Table 1-1. Item Numbers for Figure 1-3

1 Note 1 0181-256 Elevation Adj. Rod Assembly 1
2 Note 1 0159-227 Elevation Adj. Spacer 1
3 Note 1 8201-030 1/2" Flatwasher 2
4 Note 1 8104-007 1/2-13 Hex Nut 2
5 Note 1 8032-008 3/8-16 x 1.00" Bolt 1
8 Note 1 8102-007 3/8-16 Hex Nut 1
9 Note 2 8034-040 5/8-11 x 5.00" Bolt 1
10 Note 2 8201-044 5/8" Flatwasher 2
11 Note 2 8202-044 5/8" Lockwasher 1
12 Note 2 8105-007 5/8-11 Hex Nut 1
Note 1. Items 2 thru 8 are removed from Item 1 for assembly.

Items 1 thru 8 included as part of 0181-256 Elevation Adjustment Rod Assembly.
Note 2. Items 9 thru 12 are removed from the Reflector Support Assembly.
7-1-6
PES3-953
Figure 1-3. Mating Az/El Positioner Assembly to Reflector Support Assembly
7-1-7
STEP 8. Refer to figure 1-4. Locate the elevation indicator kit (Prodelin part number 0200-512).
Attach the elevation scale (item 1) to the reflector support assembly using the spacers (item
3), 1" long screws (item 4), flatwashers (item 6), and lockwashers (item 7).
Attach the elevation indicator (item 2) to Az/El positioner assembly using 1/2" long screws
(item 5), flatwashers (item 6), and lockwashers (item 7).
PES3-954

1 Note 1 4090-030 Elevation Scale 1
2 Note 1 0211-427 Elevation Indicator 1
3 Note 1 0159-220 Spacer 2
4 Note 1 8321-006 #10-24 x 1.00" Tapping Screw 2
5 Note 1 8321-007 #10-24 x .50" Tapping Screw 2
6 Note 1 8201-037 #10 Flatwasher 4
7 Note 1 8201-032 #10 Lockwasher 4
Note 1. Items 1 thru 7 supplied as 0200-512, Kit Elevation Indicator.
Figure 1-4. Installing Elevation Scale/Indicator
7-1-8
STEP 9. Loosely attach the ends of the feed rods (item 2 or 2A) that have the longer flattened area to
the sides of the reflector (figure 1-5). Details of this connection are shown in detail B of
figure 1-6 for the 1.0M antenna. Detail B of figure 1-7 is similar for the 0.75M antenna.
PES3-1136
Figure 1-5. Installation of Radio Support and Feed Rods
7-1-9
STEP 10. Loosely attach the radio support (item 1 or 1A) to the feed rods (item 2 or 2A) using bolts,
washers, and nuts (items 10 thru 13). Details of this connection are shown in detail C of
figure 1-6 for the 1.0M antenna or figure 1-7 for the 0.75M antenna.
STEP 11. Loosely attach the radio support (item 1 or 1A) to the reflector support assembly using bolts,
washers, and nuts (items 10 thru 13). For the 1.0M antenna, use the lower slots in the
reflector support as shown in detail A of figure 1-6. For the 0.75M antenna, use the upper
slots in the reflector support as shown in detail A of figure 1-7.
STEP 12. Attach the bolt, washers, and nut (items 10 thru 13) between the radio support and the
reflector. Details of this connection are shown in detail A of figure 1-6 or 1-7. Tighten this
bolt between the feed support and the reflector first while allowing the loosened bolts in the
reflector support slots to adjust to their proper positions. Then, tighten the other hardware
installed in steps 9 thru 12 (details A, B, and C of figure 1-6 or 1-7).
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Failure to install and tighten the bolt (item 10) between the radio support
and the reflector could allow a misalignment of the RF Unit to the
reflector causing signal degredation or failure.
STEP 13. Spray or brush touch-up zinc enriched paint on the antenna galvanized metal surfaces on the
antenna and mount in any areas that may have been scratched or where bare metal has been
exposed.
Table 1-2. Item Numbers for Figures 1-6 and 1-7

1 - 0600-018 Radio Support, 1.0M 1
1A - 0600-021 Radio Support, 0.75M 1
2 - 0176-050 Feed Rod, 1.0M 2
2A - 0176-048 Feed Rod, 0.75M 2
3 Note 1 0183-318 Feedhorn 1
4 Note 1 0198-120 O-Ring 1
5 Note 1 8300-002 #6-32 x .50" Socket Head Screw 6
- Note 1 - Silicon Grease Capsule 1
- Note 1 - Allen Wrench 7/64" 1
7 Note 2 8308-019 M8 x 16MM Pan Head Screw 2
8 Note 2 8201-034 Flatwasher, 5/16 Stainless Steel Std. 2
9 Note 2 8202-028 Lockwasher 2
10 Note 2 8030-008 1/4-20 x 1.00" Bolt 7
11 Note 2 8201-040 1/4" Flatwasher 14
12 Note 2 8202-040 1/4" Lockwasher 7
13 Note 2 8100-007 1/4-20 Hex Nut 7
Note 1. Items 3 thru 6 are shipped as 0800-107 Rectangular Feedhorn Kit.
Note 2. Items 7 thru 13 are shipped as 0200-507 Kit, Hdwe, Feed System 1.0M Rectangular.
7-1-10
PES3-1137
Figure 1-6. Radio Support and Feed Rods Installation Details for 1.0M Antenna
7-1-11
PES3-1139
Figure 1-7. Radio Support and Feed Rods Installation Details for 0.75M Antenna
7-1-12
NOTE
On frequency reuse satellites, like SBS-6, there are both vertically and horizontally
polarized satellite transponders. For the rectangular antenna the two polarizations are
accommodated by attaching the feedhorn to the radio in two different orientations and
then properly orienting the radio/feedhorn combination with respect to the rectangular
reflector. Looking at this from the point of view of the antenna reflector, the feedhorn is
always in the same physical orientation with respect to the reflector as shown in figure
1-8A. The radio is then attached to this fixed position feedhorn in either a 0-degree
(horizontal polarized downlink - step 14) or 90-degree (vertical polarized downlink - step
15) position. Failure to get these two orientations (feedhorn with respect to reflector and
radio with respect to feedhorn) correct will prevent receiving the outroute and finding the
satellite. To find out whether you are operating with a vertical or horizontal polarized
outroute transponder, on a particular satellite, refer to the "Installation Specification" for
that particular customer. Table 2-1 on page 11-2-1 in chapter 11, Antenna Aiming, lists
the downlink transponder polarizations for satellites used for PES at the time of this
writing. If you are still not sure of the downlink polarization for your site, contact your
designated "HNS Installation Manager."
Radio Outline
Reflector,
Short Side
Feedhorn, Long Side
A) FEEDHORN ORIENTATION FOR BOTH HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL

DOWNLINK
B) ENTIRE REFLECTOR ROTATES FOR POLARIZATION ADJUSTMENT
PES3-1241
Figure 1-8. Feedhorn to Reflector Orientation
7-1-13
STEP 14. If your site is designated for a horizontally polarized downlink (outroute/remote PES
receive) transponder, attach the rectangular feedhorn to the RF Unit as shown in figure 1-9.
First, set the RF Unit polarization to zero degrees. Then, attach the feedhorn so that the long
side is vertical. The double ridge marks on the feedhorn flange align with the parting groove
in the plastic weather shield on the RF Unit.
+ —
100
100
IF LNC
90
90
80
80
70
70
G
60
60
POINTING
50
50
40
40
30 30
20 20
10 0 10
WARNING
Remove MAIN POWER
SET RF UNIT before disconnecting cable
POLARIZATION TO 0°
HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
ATTACH
Personal RECTANGULAR
Earth Station FEEDHORN
WITH LONG
SIDE VERTICAL
PES3-1127A REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW
GROOVE IN WEATHER
SHIELD
DOUBLE RIDGE ON
FEEDHORN FLANGE
PES3-1127B
Figure 1-9. Proper Orientation of Rectangular Feedhorn on RF Unit

for a Horizontal Downlink Transponder
7-1-14
NOTE
The rectangular feedhorn kit (Prodelin part number 200-507) provides the proper
feedhorn, the O-ring, screws, and lockwashers (shown as items 3, 4, 5, and 6 in detail D
of figure 1-6 or 1-7). The kit also includes the proper allen wrench for the feedhorn
screws and some silicon grease for the O-ring. For the rectangular antennas, polarization
is set by rotating the entire reflector and RF Unit together (figure 1-8B). There is a
polarization scale and adjustment on the rear of the reflector. The long side of the
feedhorn should be vertical when the RF Unit is on a level horizontal surface. When the
orientation is correct, the long side of the rectangular feedhorn window will be parallel to
the short side of the antenna reflector.
STEP 15. If your site is designated for a vertically polarized downlink (outroute/remote PES receive)
transponder, attach the rectangular feedhorn to the RF Unit as shown in figure 1-10. First, set
the RF Unit polarization to 90 degrees. (Plus 90 and minus 90 are equilvalent.) Then, attach
the feedhorn so that the long side is vertical. In this situation, the single ridge mark on the
feedhorn flange aligns with the parting groove in the plastic weather shield on the RF Unit.
FOR VERTICAL DOWNLINK

TRANSPONDER, SET RF UNIT
POLARIZATION TO 90°
LNC
+ —
POINTING
100
100
90
90
80
80
G
IF
70
70
60
60
50
50
40
40
30 30
20 20
10 0 10
WARNING
Remove MAIN POWER
before disconnecting cable
HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
Personal
Earth Station
REAR VIEW
ATTACH RECTANGULAR
FEEDHORN WITH LONG
SIDE VERTICAL
FRONT VIEW
PES3-1231
Figure 1-10. Orientation of Rectangular Feedhorn for a Vertical Downlink Transponder
7-1-15
STEP 16. Attach the RF Unit to the radio support using the the metric M8 bolts, lockwashers, and
flatwashers (items 7, 9, and 8 shown in detail D of figure 1-6 or 1-7). Remove the screws
from the slotted holes in the RF Unit bracket (figure 3-11 on page 7-3-17.) These screws thru
the slotted holes are not used for this antenna.
STEP 17. Calculate the antenna pointing angles by using LATLONG function on the site
commissioning computer. In the steps below, perform an intial alignment of the antenna in
elevation, polarization, and azimuth.
STEP 18. Place an inclinometer (which is correctly assembled in the vertical position) on the special
tabs on the reflector support assembly shown in figure 1-1. On the inclinometer, turn the
adjusting knob until the computed elevation angle on the movable scale lines up with the
center 0°mark on the fixed scale. The grating may show a crossing pattern or a pattern of
arrows at this time.
STEP 19. Turn the elevation adjust nuts (item 4 on figure 1-3) until the grating on the inclinometer
shows a pattern of parallel lines. When the grating begins to show arrows, you are getting
close to the desired value. Each arrow represents 0.5°. If the present antenna elevation is
lower than the computed elevation, the antenna needs to be pointed higher. Turn the bottom
elevation adjust nut tighter to raise the antenna while loosening the top elevation nut.
STEP 20. When the inclinometer grating shows parallel lines with the computed elevation angle on the
movable scale aligned with the fixed scale 0°index mark, the antenna is set to the computed
elevation angle. The elevation scale and indicator (items 1 and 2 in figure 1-4) should agree
with the inclinometer.
STEP 21. Loosen the polarization locking bolt (figures 1-4 and 1-11) and rotate the reflector to the
computed polarization value. Observe the proper plus (+) or minus (-) value. Tighten the
polarization locking bolt with its hold down bracket positioned as shown in figure 1-11. The
polarization setting of the rectangular reflector is the value from the LATLONG for both a
horizontal downlink transponder and a vertical downlink transponder because the orientation
of the feedhorn on the RF Unit is set for each case. The polarization setting on the rear of the
RF Unit should be left at its current value: (0° or 90°).
STEP 22. Point the antenna in azimuth as a first approximation. If necessary, use a magnetic compass
for general orientation. Some searching may be required during antenna aiming. For the
time being, ignore the reading on the azimuth scale ring.
STEP 23. Tighten the elevation and azimuth adjustment nuts after the site commissioning parameters
have been entered into the indoor unit, the correct satellite signal has been acquired, and
antenna pointing has been refined for the best signal reception. Then, loosen the azimuth
scale ring locking screws (figure 1-2). Rotate the azimuth scale ring to indicate the exact
calculated azimuth (true azimuth - not magnetic azimuth) from the site commissioning
computer. Tighten the azimuth scale ring locking screws. A correct setting of the azimuth
scale ring is essential for future repointing.
STEP 24. Check that the elevation scale (figure 1-4) agrees with the exact calculated values from the
site commissioning computer. If there is a small difference, do not move the antenna.
Instead, loosen the screws on the indicator (pointer), adjust the indicator position to read the
correct value, and retighten the screws.
7-1-16
PART OF REFLECTOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
FLATWASHER, 3/8" BEVEL (8201-001)

FLATWASHER, 3/8"
POLARIZATION
LOCKING BOLT
POLARIZATION
SCALE
-10
PES3-1287
Figure 1-11. Polarization Locking Bolt
STEP 25. Locate the Az/El information label affixed to the rear of the reflector, figure 1-12. Write the
following information on the label: site longitude, site latitude, primary satellite designation,
designations for backup satellites, satellite longitudes, antenna pointing elevations, azimuth,
polarizations for the primary and backup satellites, and the install date. If the SBS satellites
are used for primary and backup, then mark all three (SBS-4, SBS-5, and SBS-6) as shown in
figure 1-12. Locate the envelope taped to the rear of the reflector and the clear plastic
material enclosed. Peel off the protective paper and apply the clear plastic self stick material
(P/N 4090-034) over the completed Az/El information label. (Note: The envelope also
contains an extra Az/El information label to be used if anti-icing is added and an extra bar
code label with HNS serial number for the antenna.) If anti-icing is added, affix a completed
Az/El information label on the rear of the anti-icing panel and cover with clear plastic.
7-1-17
PES3-1138
Figure 1-12. Recording Site Latitude, Longitude, and Primary and Backup Satellite
Pointing Angles on the Rear of Reflector
7-1-18
6-28-95
Section 2
1.2M QUICK REPOINT ANTENNA ASSEMBLY

The complete 1.2M Quick Repoint Antenna System (HNS P/N 3000173-0001, Prodelin P/N 1132-132) is
• 0800-109 1.2M Offset Reflector 40 lbs 48 1/2" x 53" x 6"
• 0800-127 1.2M Az/El Mount 40 lbs 9 1/2" x 42" x 13 3/4"

with Feed System
The 1.2M offset reflector carton (0800-109) includes:
0179-234 Reflector, 1.2M Offset 1
The 1.2M Az/El mount carton with feed system (0800-127) includes:
0176-195 Feed Rod, 1.2M 2

0181-256 Assembly, Elevation Adjustment Rod 1
0181-259 Assembly, Reflector Support 1.2M 1
0181-258 Assembly, Az/El Positioner 1.2M 1
0200-005 Kit, Feed Support Hardware 1
0200-512 Kit, Elevation Indicator 1
0600-022 Support, Radio 1.2M 1
has been received and is in good condition.
Any damage to materials while in transit should be immediately directed to the freight carrier. He will
instruct you on matters regarding any freight damage claims.
Any questions regarding missing or damaged materials that are not due to the freight carrier should be
directed to Prodelin’s Customer Service Department at:
1700 NE Cable Drive
P.O. Box 368
(704) 464-4141
7-2-1
2.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION TOOLS (0.75M, 1.0M, 1.2M)

1 Ratchet, 1/2" drive 1 Wrench, Combination 1/2"
1 Socket, 9/16" deep well, 1/2" drive 1 Wrench, Combination 9/16"
1 Socket, 5/16", 1/2" drive 1 Wrench, Combination 3/4"
1 Socket, 1/2", 1/2" drive 1 Screwdriver, standard blade
1 Wrench, Combination 5/16" 1 10" adjustable Crescent Wrench
1 Wrench, Combination 3/8" 1 Screwdriver, Phillips No. 3
1 Wrench, Combination 7/16"
2.3 ASSEMBLY
STEP 1. Refer to figure 2-1. Locate the 1.2M reflector and the four special self-tapping 27/64-13 x
1.38" screws (shown as item 3 in figure 2-1). These screws can be identified by their special
double threads (high and low threads).
STEP 2. Attach the reflector support assembly (item 2) to the 1.2M reflector (item 1). Using the
special screws from step 1, carefully start the special screws so that they are straight. If a
hole has previously had a screw inserted into it, make certain that the screw is re-threaded
into the previously cut threads or stripped threads will result. Orient the reflector support
assembly so that the forked end is nearest the bottom of the reflector as shown in figure 2-1.
The bottom of the reflector can be identified by a hole in the edge. The top does not have a
hole.
Tighten the screws securely, but do not overtighten. If a hole is stripped, it can usually be
repaired by filling the hole with 2-part Epoxy (e.g., Epoxy-Patch, Hysul Division of Dexter
Corp, Orlean, New York 14760 or equivalent) and immediately inserting the screw and
allowing the epoxy to harden.
NOTE
The Az/El positioner assembly is placed on the mast in the next step.
Alternately, the entire antenna may be assembled first and the entire
antenna placed on the mast at one time.
7-2-2
SECTION 2 - 1.2M QUICK REPOINT ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
PES3-1108

1 0179-234 1.2M Offset Reflector 1
2 0181-259 Reflector Support Assembly 1
3 8319-007 27/64-13 x 1.38" Screw 4
Figure 2-1. Mating 1.2M Reflector to Reflector Support Assembly
7-2-3
STEP 3. Refer to figure 1-2. Loosen the canister set screws (item 2) so that the Az/El positioner
assembly will fit over the mast. Make a pencil mark on the mast five inches from the top.
Place the Az/El positioner assembly on the mast. It should cover the pencil mark. If it does
not, check that the top canister set screws have been sufficiently loosened.
The Az/El positioner assembly must be oriented correctly in relation to the satellite orbital arc
to allow the azimuth Quick Repoint feature to sight on both the primary and backup satellite.
NOTE
position.
If the primary and backup satellites are both known, use the site
commissioning computer LATLONG function to calculate the azimuth
from your site to each. In almost all cases the azimuth difference is less
than 90° between the two satellites. Position the canister so that it points
midway in azimuth between the two satellites.

satellite at longitude 103° West for aiming ("TO CENTER OF
SATELLITE ORBITAL ARC") the Az/El positioner assembly. This
selection permits the most sites to view both their primary and backup
satellites without having to change the canister position. Use the
LATLONG function to calculate the azimuth from your site to a satellite
located at 103 degrees West. Correct the azimuth for magnetic
declination and aim the Az/El positioner assembly accordingly.
STEP 4. Alternately tighten the eight set screws (item 2) while watching the bubble level on the top
canister plate to be sure that the Az/El positioner assembly is level. It is important to make
sure the canister is level. Otherwise, the quick repoint feature will not work correctly because
the elevation will not be correct as the antenna is changed in azimuth.
STEP 5. With all eight set screws snug, check again to be sure that the Az/El positioner assembly is
level and securely tighten the set screws. Tighten the lock nuts against the canister. Use
terminal lugs to attach the ground wires (from the radio and to building ground) to the square
head screw (see items 2, 3, and 4 of figure 2-2).
7-2-4
PES3-952xyz

1 0181-258 Az/El Positioner Assembly 1
2 8317-008 1/4-20 x 2.00" Square Head Screw 1
3 8100-007 1/4-20 Hex Nut 2
4 8200-018 1/4" Int. Tooth Lockwasher 2
Note: Items 2, 3 & 4 are removed from Item 1 for Assembly.
Figure 2-2. Az/El Positioner Assembly
7-2-5
STEP 6. Refer to figure 2-3. Remove the 5/8-11 x 5.00" elevation pivot bolt (item 9) from the
reflector support assembly. Place one washer (item 10) on the elevation pivot bolt, then
locate the bolt where it can be easily reached (for example, on top of the Az/El positioner
assembly). Lift the reflector support assembly with reflector to the Az/El positioner assembly
and feed the elevation pivot bolt thru the indicated tube. Attach the indicated washers and nut
(items 10, 11, and 12).
STEP 7. Locate the elevation adjustment rod assembly (Prodelin part number 0181-256) and attach the
elevation adjustment rod (item 1 in figure 2-3) to the reflector support assembly and to the
Az/El positioner assembly using the indicated hardware (items 2 thru 8). Apply a weather
protective lubricant (such as "LPS3" manufactured by Holt Lloyd Corp. and available at
distributors in your area, whose address can be obtained by calling 1-800-241-8334) to the
elevation adjustment rod and to the azimuth adjustment rod. Move the adjustment locations
and reapply so that the entire rods are covered. The lubricant inhibits corrosion and makes it
easier to repoint the antenna and make adjustments at a later time.

1 Note 1 0181-256 Elevation Adj. Rod Assembly 1
2 Note 1 0159-220 Elevation Adj. Spacer 1
4 Note 1 8104-007 1/2-13 Hex Nut 2
5 Note 1 8032-008 3/8-16 x 1.00" Bolt 1
8 Note 1 8102-007 3/8-16 Hex Nut 1
9 Note 2 8034-040 5/8-11 x 5.00" Bolt 1
10 Note 2 8201-044 5/8" Flatwasher 2
11 Note 2 8202-044 5/8" Lockwasher 1
12 Note 2 8105-007 5/8-11 Hex Nut 1
Note 1. Items 2 thru 8 are removed from Item 1 for assembly.
Items 1 thru 8 included as part of 0181-256 Elevation Adjustment Rod Assembly.
Note 2. Items 9 thru 12 are removed from the Reflector Support Assembly.
7-2-6
PES3-1110
Figure 2-3. Mating Az/El Positioner Assembly to Reflector Support Assembly
7-2-7
STEP 8. Refer to figure 2-4. Locate the elevation indicator kit (Prodelin part number 0211-427).
Attach the elevation scale (item 1 in figure 2-4) to the reflector support assembly using the
spacers (item 3), 1" long screws (item 4), flatwashers (item 6), and lockwashers (item 7).
Attach the elevation indicator (item 2) to Az/El positioner assembly using 1/2" long screws
(item 5), flatwashers (item 6), and lockwashers (items 7).
PES3-1109

1 Note 1 4090-030 Elevation Scale 1
2 Note 1 0211-427 Elevation Indicator 1
3 Note 1 0159-220 Spacer 2
4 Note 1 8321-006 #10-24 x 1.00" Tapping Screw 2
5 Note 1 8321-007 #10-24 x .50" Tapping Screw 2
6 Note 1 8201-037 #10 Flatwasher 4
Note 1. Items 1 thru 7 supplied as 0200-512, Kit Elevation Indicator.
Figure 2-4. Installing Elevation Scale/Indicator
7-2-8
STEP 9. Loosely attach the feed rods (item 2) to the sides of the reflector (figure 2-5). Details of this
connection are shown in detail B of figure 2-5. Use the end of the feed rod that has the longer
flattened area. Use the special self-tapping screws (item 12 of figure 2-6).
B
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
INCLINOMETER
PS31232e.FH3
Figure 2-5. Installation of Radio Support and Feed Rods
7-2-9
STEP 10. Loosely attach the radio support (item 1) to the feed rods (item 2) using bolts, washers, and
nuts (items 8 thru 11). Details of this connection are shown in detail C of figure 2-6.
STEP 11. Loosely attach the radio support (item 1) to the reflector support assembly using bolts,
washers, and nuts (items 8 thru 11). See detail A of figure 2-6.
STEP 12. Attach a special self-tapping screw (item 12) between the radio support and the reflector.
Carefully start the special screw so that it is straight. If a hole has previously had a screw
driven into it, make certain that the screw is re-threaded into the previously cut threads or
stripped threads will result. Details of this connection are shown in detail A of figure 2-6.
Tighten this screw between the radio support and the reflector first while allowing the
loosened bolts in the reflector support slots to adjust to their proper positions. Then, tighten
the other hardware installed in steps 9 thru 12 (details A, B, and C of figure 2-6).
If a hole is stripped in the reflector, use the 2-part epoxy repair procedure of step 2.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Failure to install and tighten the self-tapping screw (item 12) between the
radio support and the reflector could allow a misalignment of the RF
Unit to the reflector causing signal degredation or failure.
exposed.
STEP 14. Attach the conical 51-degree feedhorn (item 3) to the RF Unit. Use the screws and O-ring
provided. Attach the RF Unit to the radio support using the the metric M8 bolts,
lockwashers, and flatwashers (items 7, 9, and 8 shown in detail D of figure 2-6). Remove the
screws from the slotted holes in the RF Unit bracket (figure 3-11 on page 7-3-17.) These
screws thru the slotted holes are not used for this antenna.

1 - 0600-022 Radio Support 1
2 - 0176-195 Feed Rod 2
3 Note 1 0183-265 Feed Horn 1
4 Note 1 0198-120 O-Ring 1
5 Note 1 8300-017 #6-32 x 7/8" Socket Head Screw 6
- Note 1 0432-036 Silicon Grease Capsule 1
- Note 1 0268-003 Allen Wrench 7/64" 1
8 Note 2 8201-034 Flatwasher, 5/16 Stainless Steel Std. 2
10 Note 2 8030-008 1/4-20 x 1.00" Bolt 7
11 Note 2 8201-040 1/4" Flatwasher 14
12 Note 2 8202-040 1/4" Lockwasher 7
13 Note 2 8100-007 1/4-20 Hex Nut 7
Note 1. Items 3 thru 6 are shipped as 0800-309, 51°Feed Horn Kit, circular feed horn.
Note 2. Items 7 thru 13 are shipped as a Kit, Hdwe.
7-2-10
PES3-1112
Figure 2-6. Radio Support and Feed Rods Installation Details
7-2-11
STEP 15. Calculate the antenna pointing angles by using LATLONG function on the site
commissioning computer. In the steps below, perform an intial alignment of the antenna in
polarization, elevation, and azimuth.
STEP 16. Loosen the polarization clamping screw on the RF Unit shown in figure 2-7. If your site is
designated for a horizontally polarized downlink (outroute/remote PES receive) transponder,
rotate the RF Unit to the polarization value computed by the LATLONG program. Observe
the proper plus (+) or minus (-) value for polarization. Tighten the polarization clamping
screw.
NOTE
The LATLONG program calculates polarization assuming a horizontal downlink
transponder (which corresponds to a vertical uplink.) In some cases, the PES site may be
designated to receive an outroute signal on a vertical downlink transponder of a
frequency reuse satellite. In such a situation, add (or subtract to stay on scale - both are
correct) 90 degrees to (from) the polariztion value given by the LATLONG program. Set
the RF Unit to a polarization value 90 degrees away from the value given by LATLONG.
To find out whether you are operating with a horizontal or vertical polarized outroute
transponder on a particular satellite, refer to the "Installation Specification" for that
particular customer. Also, refer to table 2-1 on page 11-2-1. If you are still not sure,
contact your designated "HNS Installation Manager".
STEP 17. Place an inclinometer (which is correctly assembled in the vertical position) on the reflector
support assembly as indicated in figure 2-5. On the inclinometer, turn the adjusting knob
until the computed elevation angle on the movable scale lines up with the center 0° mark on
the fixed scale. The grating may show a crossing pattern or a pattern of arrows at this time.
STEP 18. Turn the elevation adjust nuts (item 4 on figure 2-3) until the grating on the inclinometer
shows a pattern of parallel lines. When the grating begins to show arrows, you are getting
close to the desired value. Each arrow represents 0.5°. If the present antenna elevation is
lower than the computed elevation, the antenna needs to be pointed higher. Turn the bottom
elevation adjust nut tighter to raise the antenna while loosening the top elevation nut.
STEP 19. When the inclinometer grating shows parallel lines with the computed elevation angle on the
movable scale aligned with the fixed scale 0° index mark, the antenna is set to the computed
elevation angle. The elevation scale and indicator (items 1 and 2 in figure 2-4) should agree
with the inclinometer.
STEP 20. Use a magnetic compass to point the antenna in azimuth as a first approximation. Some
searching may be required during antenna aiming. For the time being, ignore the reading on
the azimuth scale ring.
STEP 21. Tighten the elevation and azimuth adjustment nuts after the site commissioning parameters
have been entered into the indoor unit, the correct satellite signal has been acquired, and
antenna pointing has been refined for the best signal reception. Then, loosen the azimuth
scale ring locking screw (figure 2-2). Rotate the azimuth scale ring to indicate the exact
calculated azimuth (true azimuth - not magnetic azimuth) from the site commissioning
computer. Tighten the azimuth scale ring locking screw. A correct setting of the azimuth
scale ring is essential for future repointing.
7-2-12
PES3-1144
Figure 2-7. RF Unit Polarization Adjustment
7-2-13
STEP 22. Check that the elevation scale (figure 2-4) agrees with the exact calculated values from the
site commissioning computer. If there is a small difference, do not move the antenna.
Instead, loosen the screws on the indicator (pointer), adjust the indicator position to read the
correct value, and retighten the screws.
STEP 23. Locate the Az/El information label affixed to the rear of the reflector, figure 2-8. Write the
following information on the label: site longitude, site latitude, primary satellite designation,
are used for primary and backup, then mark all three (SBS-4, SBS-5, and SBS-6) as shown in
figure 2-8. Locate the envelope taped to the rear of the reflector and the clear plastic material
enclosed. Peel off the protective paper and apply the clear plastic self stick material (P/N
4090-034) over the completed Az/El information label. (Note: The envelope also contains
an extra Az/El information label and an extra bar code label with HNS serial number for the
antenna.)
PES3-1115
Figure 2-8. Location on 1.2M for Writing Antenna Pointing Angles
7-2-14
3-5-91
3-5-91
SECTION 3 - ASSEMBLING AND ALIGNING PRODELIN 1.8M QUICK
REPOINT ANTENNA (ALIGNMENT ROD VERSION)
Section 3
ASSEMBLING AND ALIGNING PRODELIN 1.8M QUICK
3.1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes the assembly of the alignment rod version of the 1.8M quick repoint antenna
(figure 3-1), HNS part number 3000063-0001 1.8M, (Prodelin P/N 1184-132). This version requires a
portable alignment rod tool set (Prodelin P/N 0800-216) to adjust the RF Unit position during installation.
This version uses a radio adapter kit (Z and C brackets) and slotted holes in the RF Unit to properly
position the RF Unit. The part numbers given in the tables in this section are Prodelin part numbers.
Refer to section 4 of this chapter for the self-aligning version of 1.8M quick repoint antenna.

The antenna containers (see figure 3-2) should be unpacked and inspected at the earliest date to ensure
that all material has been received and is in good condition. A complete packing list for each major
component is supplied.
3.3 FREIGHT DAMAGE

3.4 MATERIAL - MISSING OR DAMAGED

1700 NE Cable Drive
P.O. Box 368
(704) 464-4141
3.5 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION TOOLS

1 Ratchet, 1/2" drive 1 Wrench, combination 3/4
1 Socket, 9/16" deep well, 1/2" drive 1 Wrench, combination 1-1/8
1 Socket, 3/4" deep well, 1/2" drive 1 Wrench, combination 1-1/2
1 Wrench, combination 5/16 1 Screwdriver, standard blade
1 Wrench, combination 3/8 1 10" adjustable Crescent Wrench
1 Wrench, combination 1/2 1 Allen Wrench, 1/8"
1 Wrench, combination 9/16
7-3-1
PES-662
Figure 3-1. Prodelin 1.8M Quick Repoint Antenna

(Separate Alignment Rod Tool Required Version)
7-3-2
PRODELIN 1184-132 1.8M RX/TX ANTENNA SYSTEM QUICK REPOINT
800-452 1.8M QUICK REPOINT Az/EL POSITIONER
CONTAINS:
Az/EI POSITIONER ASSEMBLY

Az/EI INDICATOR KIT
55 lbs 19"
9"
24"
CONTAINS:
800-252 1.8M QR REFLECTOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY REFLECTOR SUPPORT TUBE

FEED SUPPORT TUBE
MOUNT HARDWARE KIT
Rx/Tx BRACKET
CROSS ARM (2)
NEC RETROFIT KIT
95 lbs 19 1/2"
10"
65 1/2"
800-208 1.8M OFFSET REFLECTOR
77"
110 lbs
8"
72"
PES3-1140
Figure 3-2. 1.8M Antenna System Shipping Containers

(Alignment Rod Required Version)
7-3-3
3.6 MECHANICAL ALIGNMENT TOOLS

The following tools are recommended for use when making the initial alignment to the satellite.
Compass
Inclinometer
Carpenter’s Square (18" minimum)
Feed Alignment Tool (Prodelin P/N 0800-216)
3.7 ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
During the assembly procedure, the instructions must be followed in the
sequence listed. Apply a weather protective lubricant (such as "LP3"
manufactured by HOLT LLOYD CORP. and available at distributors in
your area whose address can be obtained by calling 1-800-241-8334) on
all threaded bolts and moving parts to aid in initial installation and
provide for later protection against corrosion. DO NOT TIGHTEN ANY
HARDWARE UNTIL INSTRUCTED.
The 1.8 meter antenna system consists of four major components:

1. Reflector
2. Reflector Support Assembly (reflector support tube and reflector mounting arms)
3. Az/El Positioner
4. Feed Support Structure
The interface from the ground foundation to the antenna is a 4.0" O.D. pipe, vertical within 5°. It is
assumed that the foundation and pipe have been properly installed and that the correct ballast has been
applied to an NPMM, if applicable.
3.7.1 AZ/EL POSITIONER ASSEMBLY

The canister shown in Figure 3-3 is factory assembled and becomes a part of the factory assembled Az/El
Positioner shown in Figure 3-4.
STEP 1. Check to make sure that the azimuth collar (2, figure 3-3) is oriented so that the set of
numbers needed on the azimuth scale is at the bottom of the label (for example, so that South
180° can be read for sites in the Northern Hemisphere including the U.S.).
STEP 2. Attach the factory assembled azimuth adjustment rod (2), azimuth tube (3), 1/2" nuts (12),
flatwashers (10), lockwashers (11), bolt (9) and sleeves (7 and 8) to the positioner (1) and
canister as shown in Figure 3-4. Be sure to include the sleeves (7 and 8 ) in the proper
location and tighten securely.
STEP 3. Adjust the nuts (14) on the azimuth adjust rod to locate the Az/El positioner, with respect to
the canister, to approximately the middle of the adjustment range.
7-3-4
STEP 4. Place the Az/El Positioner Assembly on the mast pipe and orient so that the antenna points to
the approximate center of the satellite orbital arc. (See figure 3-3.)
NOTE
position.
If the primary and backup satellites are both known, use the DIU
configuration editor LATLONG function to calculate the azimuth from
your site to each. In almost all cases the azimuth difference is less than
90° between the two satellites. Position the Az/El Positioner Assembly
on the mast so that it points midway in azimuth between the two
satellites.

satellite at longitude 103 degrees West for aiming "TO CENTER OF
SATELLITE ARC," the Az/El positioner assembly. This selection
permits the most sites to view both their primary and backup satellites
without having to change the canister position. Use the LATLONG
function to calculate the azimuth from your site to a satellite located at
103 degrees West. Correct the azimuth for magnetic declination and aim
the Az/El positioner assembly accordingly.
STEP 5. Alternately tighten the set screws (3) while watching the bubble level on the top canister plate
to be sure that the canister plate is level. It is important to make sure the canister (1) is
level. Otherwise, the quick repoint feature will not work correctly because elevation will not
be correct as the antenna is changed in azimuth.
STEP 6. With all set screws snug, check again to be sure that the canister is level and securely tighten
the set screws. Tighten the lock nuts (6) against the canister.
7-3-5
PES-663

1 0164-082 Canister Assembly 1
2 0181-234 Azimuth Collar 1
3 8307-006 1/4-20 x .25" Set Screw 3
4 8317-003 1/2-13 x 1.75" Sq. Hd. Screw 8
5 8317-004 1/2-13 x 3.00" Sq. Hd. Screw 1
6 8104-007 1/2-13 Hex Nut 9
7 8200-017 1/2 Int. Tooth Lockwasher 2
Figure 3-3. Canister Assembly (1.8M)
7-3-6
PES-664

1 0490-141 Az/El Positioner 1
2 0490-143 Azimuth Adjustment Rod 1
3 0490-142 Azimuth Tube 1
4 8036-048 1-8 x 6.00" bolt 1
5 8201-046 1" Flatwasher 1
6 8202-046 1" Lockwasher 1
7 0162-166 .40" Long Sleeve 1
8 0162-167 .55" Long Sleeve 1
9 8033-010 1/2-13 x 1.25" Bolt 1
10 8201-043 1/2" Flatwasher 4
11 8202-043 1/2" Lockwasher 2
12 8104-007 1/2-13 Hex Nut 2
13 8201-045 3/4" Flatwasher 2
14 8106-007 3/4-10 Hex Nut 2
Figure 3-4. Az/El Positioner Assembly (1.8M)
7-3-7
3.7.2 REFLECTOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

As shown in figure 3-5, assemble the following items in the listed sequence.
STEP 1. Attach the reflector support tube (1) to the Az/El positioner (1, figure 3-4) with a 1-8 x 7"
bolt (6, figure 3-5), two flatwashers (7), lockwasher (8) and nut (9).
STEP 2. Attach the factory assembled elevation adjust assembly to the positioner by attaching the
elevation block (5) to the Az/El positioner with a 1/2-13 x 2.75" bolt (13), two flatwashers
(14), lockwasher (15), nut (16) and 1.6" sleeve (11). Be sure to include sleeve (11). Tighten
and check that the block pivots freely.
STEP 3. Attach the end of the elevation rod to the reflector support tube (1) with a 1/2-13 x 1.25" bolt
(12), two flatwashers (14), lockwasher (15), nut (16) and .55" sleeve (10). Be sure to
include sleeve (10). Tighten securely.
STEP 4. Tighten the 1" bolt (6) from step 1 at this time.
STEP 5. Attach the two reflector mounting arms (2) to the reflector support tube (1) with a 1/2-13 x
2.75" bolt (13), two flatwashers (14), lockwasher (15) and nut (16) at each of the four
locations. NOTE: Be sure that the reflector mounting bolt holes in the ends of the mounting
arms are oriented as shown in figure 3-5.
STEP 6. Lift, position and attach the reflector to the reflector mounting arms with the 3/8" hardware.
Use a 3/8-16 x 5" bolt (20), flatwasher (21), lockwasher (22) and nut (23) at each of the four
mounting locations at the top of the reflector and a 3/8-16 x 4.5" bolt (19), flatwasher (21),
lockwasher (22) and nut (23) at each of the four mounting locations at the bottom of the
reflector. The top of the reflector may be identified by the Prodelin logo. Tighten the eight
bolts (19, 20) at this time.
STEP 7. Tighten the four 1/2" bolts (13) in the mounting arms from step 5 at this time.
7-3-8
PES-665
Figure 3-5. Reflector Support Assembly (1.8M)
7-3-9
Table 3-1. Reflector Support Assembly

1 0490-140 Reflector Support Tube 1
2 0211-417 Reflector Mounting Arm 2
3 0179-189-17 1.8M Velloxed Reflector 1
4 0490-144 Elevation Adjustment Rod 1
5 0168-112 Elevation Block 1
6 8036-056 1-8 x 7.00" Bolt 1
7 8201-046 1" Flatwasher 2
8 8202-046 1" Lockwasher 1
9 8107-007 1-8 Hex Nut 1
10 0162-167 .55" Long Sleeve 1
11 0162-168 1.60" Long Sleeve 1
12 8033-010 1/2-13 x 1.25" Bolt 1
13 8033-022 1/2-13 x 2.75" Bolt 1
14 8201-043 1/2" Flatwasher 12
15 8202-043 1/2" Lockwasher 6
16 8104-007 1/2-13 Hex Nut 6
17 8201-045 3/4" Flatwasher 2
18 8106-007 3/4-10 Hex Nut 2
19 8032-036 3/8-16 x 4.50" Bolt 4
20 8032-040 3/8-16 x 5.00" Bolt 4
21 8201-042 3/8" Flatwasher 8
22 8202-042 3/8" Lockwasher 8
23 8102-007 3/8-16 Hex Nut 8
24 8043-012 1/2-13 x 1.50" Bolt 4
7-3-10
3.7.3 ELEVATION AND AZIMUTH INDICATORS ASSEMBLY

As shown in figures 3-6 and 3-7, assemble the following items in the listed sequence.
STEP 1. Attach the azimuth indicator plate (1) to the bottom of the Az/El positioner tube with a
#10-24 x 1.25" screw (5), spacer (3), two flatwashers (6), lockwasher (7) and nut (8) in two
places.
STEP 2. Attach the azimuth indicator (2) to the end of the azimuth indicator plate (1) with a #10-24 x
.50" screw (4), flatwasher (6) and lockwasher (7) in the two tapped holes.
STEP 3. Tighten the four screws (4, 5) holding the azimuth indicator (2).
PES-666

1 0156-705 Azimuth Indicator Plate 1
2 0211-396 Azimuth Indicator 1
3 0159-220 Spacer 2
4 8302-006 #10-24 x .50" Screw 2
5 8302-007 #10-24 x 1.25" Screw 2
6 8201-037 #10 Flatwasher 6
7 8202-032 #10 Lockwasher 4
8 8111-005 #10-24 Hex Nut 2
Figure 3-6. Azimuth Indicator Assembly (1.8M)
7-3-11
STEP 4. Attach the elevation plate (1, figure 3-7) to the reflector support tube (1, figure 3-5) with a
#10-24 x 1.25" screw (5, figure 3-6), flatwasher (6), lockwasher (7) and spacer (3) in two
places. Tighten securely.
STEP 5. Attach the elevation indicator (2) to the side of the Az/El positioner with a #10-24 x .50"
screw (4), flatwasher (6) and lockwasher (7) in two places.
PES-667

1 0156-700 Elevation Plate 1
2 0211-395 Elevation Indicator 1
3 0159-220 Spacer 2
4 8302-006 #10-24 x .50" Screw 2
5 8302-007 #10-24 x 1.25" Screw 2
6 8201-037 #10 Flatwasher 4
7 8202-032 #10 Lockwasher 4
Figure 3-7. Elevation Indicator Assembly (1.8M)
7-3-12
3.7.4 FEED SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

STEP 1. Place the feed support tube (1, figure 3-8) between the two plates at the bottom of the
reflector support tube and loosely attach using the two nut plates (3) on the inside of the tube
and a 1/2-13 x 1" bolt (4), flatwasher (5) and lockwasher (6) in four places on the outside.
Note the direction of the slot at the end of the feed support tube.
Figure 3-9 shows a convenient way to align the nut plates inside the feed support tube. First,
lower the feed support tube so that the RF Unit end rests on the ground, giving access to the
reflector end of the feed support tube as it rests within the lower part of the reflector support
tube. You can now easily hold the nut plates in place while loosely installing the two
outboard bolts. Now swing the feed support tube up into the proper position and install the
two inboard bolts.
STEP 2. The Rx/Tx bracket (2) has been factory assembled over the end of the feed support tube (1)
and attached with a 5/16-18 x .75" carriage bolt (7), flatwasher (8), lockwasher (9) and nut
(10) in the four slots of the bracket. The carriage bolts are installed from the inside of the
tube with the threads protruding out. Tighten snugly enough to support the RF Unit.
STEP 3. Align the feed support tube and tighten the four 1/2" bolts (5, 6) at the bottom of the tube.
7-3-13
PES-668

1 0250-248 Feed Support Tube 1
2 0211-342 Rx/Tx Bracket 1
3 0156-763 Nut Plate 2
4 8033-008 1/2-13 x 1.00" Bolt 4
5 8201-043 1/2" Flatwasher 4
6 8202-043 1/2" Lockwasher 4
7 8038-006 5/16-18 x 3/4" Carriage Bolt 4
8 8201-041 5/16" Flatwasher 4
9 8202-041 5/16" Lockwasher 4
10 8101-009 5/16-18 Hex Nut 4
Figure 3-8. Feed Support Assembly (1.8M)
7-3-14
PES2-557
Figure 3-9. Installing Nut Plates (1.8M)
7-3-15
3.7.5 RADIO ADAPTER KIT FOR PES MODEL X000 SERIES AND TYPE 2
STEP 1. For this version 1.8M antenna only, attach the front and back adapter brackets (Z and C
brackets) (1, 2, figure 3-10) to the Rx/Tx bracket (2, figure 3-8) with the #10-24 x .50" screw
(3, figure 3-10), flatwasher (4), lockwasher (5) and hex nut (6) as shown in figure 3-10.
STEP 2. For PES model X000 series, attach the RF Unit radio to the adapter brackets (1, 2) with the
hardware provided in the slotted holes of the RF Unit bracket (figure 3-11). Remove from
the RF Unit, the metric M8 screws which are not used with this version of the 1.8M antenna.
PES3-1134

1 0211-363 Adapter - Front "Z bracket" 1
2 0211-364 Adapter - Back "C bracket" 1
3 8302-006 #10-24 x .50" Screw 4
4 8201-037 #10 Flatwasher 8
5 8202-032 #10 Lockwasher 4
6 8111-005 #10-24 Hex Nut 4
Figure 3-10. Installing RF Unit on Adapter Brackets (1.8M)
7-3-16
RF UNIT FOR
PES X000 SERIES
(OTHER THAN PES 5000)
SCREWS IN METRIC
SLOTTED HOLES M8 SCREWS
SLOTTED HOLES
RF UNIT FOR
PES X000 SERIES
(OTHER THAN PES 5000),
BOTTOM VIEW
OUTDOOR UNIT
FOR PES 5000
PS31135.FH3 5/16" - 18 MOUNTING

HARDWARE
Figure 3-11. Mounting Hardware Differs - PES 5000 and Other X000 Series
7-3-17
3.7.6 FEED ALIGNMENT

In order to align the RF optics of the antenna system (feed horn to reflector), a feed alignment tool
(Prodelin P/N 0800-216) is required as shown in figure 3-12.
STEP 1. Attach the feed alignment tool to the reflector. The short rod is installed at the bottom of the
reflector. The angled ends of the alignment rods are inserted into holes provided at the edge
of the reflector, while the other ends are attached to the RF Unit alignment tool (smooth side
toward reflector and raised rim toward the RF Unit).
NOTE
The RF Unit is available with the Prodelin feedhorn only. Therefore, an
adapter plate is not used.
NOTE
Some modified alignment tools for the Prodelin feedhorn have a
4.85-inch diameter hole. This modification allows complete checkout
and site commissioning (including ranging and transmitting) prior to
removal of the alignment tool and rods. This method assures that the site
is completely operational and that the RF Unit is positioned at the proper
focal point.
STEP 2. With the RF Unit radio attached to the Rx/Tx bracket, position and seat the feedhorn into the
raised rim of the tool. Slots in the bottom of the RF Unit bracket permit side to side
adjustment. The four bolts attaching the Tx/Rx bracket to the feed support tube permit
up-down and in-out adjustment.
STEP 3. With the feedhorn seated and the RF Unit secured to the bracket, securely tighten the four
5/16" nuts attaching the Rx/Tx bracket to the feed support tube. Tighten the nuts on the
bottom of the RF Unit bracket.
STEP 4. Remove the feed alignment tool if it does not have a 4.85" hole. The antenna system’s optics
are now aligned and the antenna is ready to be aligned to the satellite after cabling, indoor
equipment installation, and site commissioning are completed.
7-3-18
PES-670
Figure 3-12. Feed Alignment (1.8M)
7-3-19
3.7.7 RECORDING POSITION DATA ON REFLECTOR

Locate the Az/El information label affixed to the rear of the reflector, figure 3-13. Write the following
information on the label: site longitude, site latitude, primary satellite designation, designations for
backup satellites, satellite longitudes, antenna pointing elevations, azimuth, polarizations for the primary
and backup satellites, and the install date. If the SBS satellites are used for primary and backup, then
mark all three (SBS-4, SBS-5, and SBS-6) as shown in figure 3-13. Locate the envelope taped to the rear
of the reflector and the clear plastic material enclosed. Peel off the protective paper and apply the clear
plastic self stick material (P/N 4090-034) over the completed Az/El information label. (Note: The
envelope also contains an extra Az/El information label and an extra bar code label with HNS serial
number for the antenna.)
PES2-784
Figure 3-13. Positions Data Recorded on Rear of Antenna
7-3-20
12-14-92
12-14-92
SECTION 4 - ASSEMBLING SELF-ALIGNING 1.8M QUICK REPOINT ANTENNA
Section 4
ASSEMBLING SELF-ALIGNING 1.8M QUICK REPOINT ANTENNA
4.1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes the assembly of the self-aligning version of the 1.8M quick repoint antenna (figure
4-1), HNS part number 3000361-0001 (Prodelin P/N 1184-133) for Ku-band. This version antenna is
also identified by Prodelin as "1.8M QR ANTENNA SYSTEM W/FIXED FEED ALIGNMENT." This
version antenna can be identified by the two feed rods (struts) that attach to the holes near the sides of the
reflector and connect to the feed support near the RF Unit. These feed rods and other improvements
eliminate the use of a portable alignment rod tool set. The part numbers given in this section are prodelin
part numbers.
This section also describes assembly of the following antenna part numbers for use with C-band for X000
series (appendix C):
HNS Prodelin
Part Number Part Number Application
1011822-0001 1184-263 C-band Linear Co-polarized

1011823-0001 1184-273 C-band Linear Cross-polarized
1011200-0001 1184-283-R C-band Circular Tx-Right at Feed System
1011200-0003 1184-283-L C-band Circular Tx-Left at Feed System
The above C-band versions of the antenna differ from the Ku-band version by using different length feed
rods and a different length and style feed support (figure 4-1).

As shown in figure 4-2, the Ku-band 1.8M self-aligning quick repoint antenna (HNS P/N 3000361-0001,
Prodelin P/N 1184-133) is shipped in three cartons:
• 800-209 1.8M Quick Repoint 45 lbs 24" x 9" x 13"
Az/El Positioner
• 800-210 1.8M QR Reflector 80 lbs 65 1/2" x 10" x 11 1/2"
Support Assembly
- Ku-band
• 800-208 1.8M Offset Reflector 110 lbs 72" x 77" x 8"
The 1.8M quick repoint Az/El positioner carton (800-209) contains:
0181-245 Az/El Positioner Assembly 1

0200-512 Elevation Indicator Kit 1
7-4-1
KU-BAND C-BAND
S5-05-PES3-1447
Figure 4-1. Self-Aligning 1.8M Quick Repoint Antenna (Ku-band and C-band)
The 1.8M QR reflector support assembly carton for Ku-band (800-210) contains:
Prodelin P/N Description Quantity Note
0181-246 Reflector Support Tube Assembly 1 1

0490-253 Feed Support 1
0200-036 Mount Hardware Kit 1
0176-173 Feed Rod - R.H. 1
0176-174 Feed Rod - L.H. 1
0211-417 Reflector Cross-arm 2
0800-309 51-Degree Feedhorn Kit 1 2
NOTE 1. Includes Reflector Support (P/N 490-251), the elevation

adjustment rod with associated parts, and hardware.
7-4-2
NOTE 2. Includes the following items:

51-Degree Feedhorn Kit (0800-309)
Part No. Description Quantity
0183-256 Feedhorn 1
0198-120 O-Ring 1
8300-017 #6-32 x 7/8" Socket Head Screw 6
8200-010 #6 Lockwasher 6
0432-036 Silicon Grease Capsule 1
0268-003 Allen Wrench 7/64" 1
The 1.8M offset reflector carton (800-208) contains:

0179-189-17 1.8M Offset Reflector w/SHC 1

4090-034 Label, Satellite Location 1
4090-035 Cover, Protective Label 1
4090-041 Label, Bar Code HNS 1.8M 1
has been received and is in good condition. Verify that the proper feed support (P/N 0490-253) has been
included. Refer to figure 4-14 on page 18 for feed support identification.
1700 NE Cable Drive
P.O. Box 368
(704) 464-4141
7-4-3
PRODELIN 1184-133 1.8M QR ANTENNA SYSTEM

W/FIXED FEED ALIGNMENT
800-209 1.8M QUICK REPOINT Az/El POSITIONER

CONTAINS:
Az/EI POSITIONER ASSEMBLY

ELEVATION INDICATOR KIT
45 lbs 13"
9"
24"
CONTAINS:
800-210 1.8M QR REFLECTOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY REFLECTOR SUPPORT TUBE

FEED SUPPORT
MOUNT HARDWARE KIT
CROSS ARM (2)
FEEDHORN KIT
80 lbs 11 1/2"
10"
65 1/2"
800-208 1.8M OFFSET REFLECTOR
77"
110 lbs
8"
72"
PES3-1338
Figure 4-2. 1.8M Antenna System Shipping Containers - Ku-band (Self-Aligning Version)
7-4-4
4.3 SHIPPING CONFIGURATION - C-BAND

The four versions of the C-band 1.8M self-aligning quick repoint antenna are each shipped in four cartons
as listed in table 4-1. The most commonly stocked versions are identified with an asterisk. As described
in appendix C, the linear cross-pol can be field converted to/from linear co-pol. Likewise, circular
Tx-Left can be field converted to/from circular Tx-Right.
Table 4-1. C-Band 1.8M Antenna Shipping Configurations

Linear Co-Pol Linear Cross-Pol* Circular Tx-Right Circular Tx-Left*
1011822-0001 1011823-0001 1011200-0001 1011200-0003
1184-263 1184-273 1184-283-R 1184-283-L
Reflector 800-208 800-208 800-208 800-208
Fig. 4-2 bottom Fig. 4-2 bottom Fig. 4-2 bottom Fig. 4-2 bottom
110 lbs 110 lbs 110 lbs 110 lbs
Az/El 800-209 800-209 800-209 800-209
Positioner Fig. 4-2 top Fig. 4-2 top Fig. 4-2 top Fig. 4-2 top
45 lbs 45 lbs 45 lbs 45 lbs
Reflector 800-536 800-536 800-537 800-537
Support, C-Band Fig. 4-3 top Fig. 4-3 top Fig. 4-4 top Fig. 4-4 top
Feed Support 74 lbs linear 74 lbs linear 77 lbs circular 77 lbs circular
Feed 800-226 800-227 800-229 800-228
Assembly Fig. 4-3 bottom Fig. 4-3 bottom Fig. 4-4 bottom Fig. 4-4 bottom
11 lbs co-pol 11 lbs cross-pol 13 lbs right 13 lbs left
800-536 1.8M REFLECTOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY - & C-BAND FEED SUPPORT - LINEAR
CONTAINS:
REFLECTOR SUPPORT TUBE

C-BAND FEED SUPPORT
74 lbs 12" FEED ROD (2)
11" MOUNT HARDWARE KIT
CROSS ARM (2)
64" TRANSMITTER MTG BRACKET
800-226 C-BAND CO-POL. FEED ASSEMBLY

OR
800-227 C-BAND CROSS-POL. FEED ASSEMBLY
800-226 CONTAINS:
CO-POL. LINEAR FEED ASSEMBLY

HARDWARE KIT
11 lbs 11" 800-227 CONTAINS:
12" CROSS-POL. LINEAR FEED ASSEMBLY

HARDWARE KIT
26"
S5-04-PES3-1552
Figure 4-3. C-band 1.8M Antenna, Linear Polarization, 2 of 4 Cartons
7-4-5
800-537 1.8M REFLECTOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY - & C-BAND FEED SUPPORT - CIRCULAR
CONTAINS:

C-BAND FEED SUPPORT
CROSS ARM (2)
64" CIRC. POL. BRACKET
CIRC. POL. HARDWARE
800-228 C-BAND L.H. CIR-POL. FEED ASSEMBLY

OR
800-229 C-BAND R.H. CIRC-POL. FEED ASSEMBLY
800-228 CONTAINS:
L.H. CIRC-POL. FEED ASSEMBLY

HARDWARE KIT
13 lbs 11" 800-229 CONTAINS:
12" R.H. CIRC-POL. FEED ASSEMBLY

HARDWARE KIT
26"
S5-04-PES3-1549
Figure 4-4. C-band 1.8M Antenna, Circular Polarization, 2 of 4 Cartons
4.4 ASSEMBLY OVERVIEW

The boxes on figure 4-5 emphasize the assembly/tightening sequence. In general terms, assembly of the
self-aligning 1.8M antenna consists of:
• Installing the canister with reflector support on the mast.
• Loosely attaching cross-arms to the reflector support.
• With the unattached reflector on the ground, constructing a rigid undistorted tripod between
the reflector, feed rods and feed support 1 → 2 → 3 .
• Attaching this rigid tripod to the cross-arms/reflector support while adjusting the cross-arms
side-to-side to the proper reflector position before tightening
→ 4 → 5 .
• And, finally, tightening the cross-arms to the reflector support → 6 .
Note that for the antenna for Ku-band, the RF Unit attaches directly to the feed support using M8 metric
screws. (An adapter kit with Z and C brackets is not used, nor are the slotted holes in the RF Unit bracket
used.)
For C-band for X000 series, the outdoor equipment (ODE) attaches to the antenna as described in
appendix C.
7-4-6
PES3-1339
Figure 4-5. Assembly Overview Self-Aligning 1.8M Antenna
7-4-7
4.5 ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE

Table 4-2 lists parts of the 1.8M self-aligning quick repoint antenna with corresponding item numbers. In
text in the steps below, item numbers are given in parentheses ( ). On the figures, items numbers are
shown inside of small circles.
Table 4-2. Partial List of Self-Aligning 1.8M Parts

Figure Item Prodelin
Reference No. Part No. Description Qty. Notes
Figures 4-9 1 0490-253 Feed Support for X000 RF Unit 1
and 4-14A and PES Type 2 ODU - Ku-band
Figure 4-14D 1A 0490-302 Feed Support Tube for C-band 1
Figure 4-10 2 0176-174 Left-Hand Feed Rod - Ku-band 1
Figure 4-10 2A 0176-212 Left-Hand Feed Rod - C-band 1
Figure 4-10 3 0176-173 Right-Hand Feed Rod - Ku-band 1
Figure 4-10 3A 0176-211 Right-Hand Feed Rod - C-band 1
Figure 4-9 4 8031-030 5/16-18 x 3/75" Bolt 3
Figure 4-12 5 8038-006 5/16-18 x .75 Carriage Bolt 2
6 8201-041 5/16" Flatwasher 12
7 8202-041 5/16" Lockwasher 8
8 8101-009 5/16-18 Hex Nut 6
Figure 4-9 9 8031-026 5/16-18 x 3.25" Bolt 1
Figure 4-7 10 8321-007 #10-24 x .50 Self-Tapping Screw* 2 3
Figure 4-7 11 8321-006 #10-24 x 1.00 Self-Tapping Screw* 2 3
Figure 4-7 12 0159-220 Spacer, Rigid PVC 2
Figure 4-7 13 8201-037 #10 Flatwasher 4
Figure 4-7 14 8202-032 #10 Lockwasher 4
-- -- -- -- --
Figure 4-7 16 0211-427 Indicator, Elevation 1
Figure 4-7 17 4090-030 Plate, Elevation Adjustment 1
-- -- -- -- --
Figure 4-8 27 8043-012 1/2-13 x 1.50 Carriage Bolt 4
Figure 4-8 28 8201-043 1/2" Flatwasher 4
Figure 4-8 29 8202-043 1/2" Lockwasher 4
Figure 4-8 30 8104-007 1/2-13 Hex Nut 4
-- -- -- -- --
Figure 4-8 33 0211-417 Cross-Arm 2
-- -- 0181-246 Reflector Support Assembly 1 1
-- -- -- -- --
-- -- 0800-044 Kit for PES Type 1 RF Head
(includes 490-304) (optional)
Figure 4-14B -- 0490-304 Feed Support for PES Type 1
RF Head (optional)
-- -- 0800-309 51-degree Feedhorn Kit 1 2
*See Note 3 on page 7-4-17.
7-4-8
Perform the following steps to assemble the self-aligning 1.8M antenna:

STEP 1. Assemble and level the canister as shown in figure 4-6. Place the canister on the mast so the
antenna will point to the approximate center of the orbital arc. Tighten and lock the canister
bolts to the mast such that the bubble is as near to the outer of the bubble level ring as
possible. This is necessary to ensure that the elevation angle remains the same when the
antenna is moved in azimuth during a later antenna repoint to the backup satellite.
PES3-1328
Figure 4-6. Canister and Reflector Support with Cross-Arms Loosely Attached
7-4-9
STEP 2. Apply a weather protective lubricant (such as "LPS3" manufactured by Holt Lloyd Corp. and
available at distributors in your area, whose address can be obtained by calling
1-800-241-8334) to the elevation adjustment rod and to the azimuth adjustment rod. Move
the adjustment locations and reapply so that the entire rods are covered. The lubricant
inhibits corrosion and makes it easier to repoint the antenna and make adjustments at a later
time.
STEP 3. Attach the reflector support to the Az/El positioner (parts above canister) as shown in figure
4-6. Attach the elevation adjustment rod to the reflector support. Install the elevation scale
(17) and indicator (16) as shown in figure 4-7. See Note 3 on page 7-4-17.
PES3-1335
Figure 4-7. Attaching Elevation Indicator
7-4-10
STEP 4. Attach the cross-arms (35) to the reflector support as shown in figure 4-8 and in detail A of
figure 4-6. Install the carriage bolts (27) pointing to the rear thru cross-arms and the slots in
the reflector support. At this time, only hand tighten the nuts (30) on the carriage bolts so that
cross-arms can be adjusted side-to-side by the length of the slots in the reflector support.
PES3-1334
Figure 4-8. Loosely Attaching Cross-Arms to Reflector Support
7-4-11
STEP 5. With the reflector still unattached and on the ground or roof, construct a rigid undistorted
tripod between the reflector, feed rods, and feed supports as shown in figure 4-9. Use the
appropriate Ku-band (1, 2, 3) or C-band (1A, 2A, 3A) parts. First, loosely attach the feed
rods to the reflector, figure 4-10. Note that the right (3 or 3A) and left (2 or 2A) feed rods are
different parts. Next, loosely attach the feed rods to the feed support as shown in detail A of
figure 4-9. Finally, as shown in detail B, use the 5/16-18 x 3.75" bolt (4) to attach the feed
support (1) to the reflector, passing the bolt thru the tab in feed support and the center hole
near the bottom of the reflector. Tighten hardware at the four locations above (3 reflector
holes and detail A) to form a rigid tripod. Unless the rest of the procedure disturbs this
tripod, the RF Unit (Ku-band) or feed system (C-band) installation will put the feedhorn at
the proper place to achieve optimum performance.
PES3-1329
Figure 4-9. Constructing a Rigid Tripod of Reflector, Feed Rods, and Feed Support
7-4-12
Reflector
Reflector
Feed Rod
6 7 8 4 6
3
2
Left Hand Right Hand

2 Facing Reflector Facing Reflector
Feed Rod
Front View
Side View
To
To Feed Support
Reflector 2 Left Hand Feed Rod - Ku Band
55 1/2"
To
Reflector 3 Right Hand Feed Rod - Ku Band To
Feed Support
To To
Reflector Feed Support
2A Left Hand Feed Rod - C Band
54.93"
To
Reflector 3A Right Hand Feed Rod - C Band To
Feed Support
S-09-PES3-1331
Figure 4-10. Attaching Feed Rods to Reflector
7-4-13
NOTE
If the feed support and feed rods were installed after the reflector is
bolted down to the cross-arms and the cross-arms are bolted to the
reflector support, distortion is likely to occur because the side-to-side
adjustment of the reflector in the reflector support slotted holes would be
restrained. If one feed rod appears shorter than the other during such an
assembly sequence, distortion is imminent. If force bolted into place, the
bottom of the feed support may twist and distort the feed location from
the proper focal point.
STEP 6. Loosely install this completed reflector/tripod assembly on the cross-arms and the reflector
support. As shown in figure 4-21 on page 7-4-24, place the flatwashers on the 3/8" bolts
before inserting the bolts in the reflector. The flatwashers will then be on the front side of the
reflector. Also note that there are two lengths of 3/8" bolts (5.00" and 4.50"). Place the four
longer 3/8" bolts (5.00", item number 36 in figure 4-21) in the upper four holes of the
reflector. The shorter 3/8" bolts (4.50", item number 35 in figure 4-21) go through the lower
four holes of the reflector. Adjust the cross-arms side-to-side so that feed support fits
smoothly between the fork on the lower part of the reflector support. When the adjustment is
correct, the hole near the bottom of the reflector is centered side-to-side in the fork of the
reflector support, figure 4-11. Tighten the bolts attaching the reflector to the cross-arms.
Bottom of
Reflector
Reflector
Support
PES3-1332
X X
Figure 4-11. Reflector Side-to-Side Adjustment
7-4-14
STEP 7. Next, install and tighten the two carriage bolts (5) that attach the reflector support to the feed
support as shown in figure 4-12. Ensure that this operation does not distort the tripod
combination (i.e., the feed support arm or feed rods).
NOTE
If the reflector support, feed rods or feed support have been bent or
damaged in shipment to cause distortion, they must either be repaired or
replaced.
PES3-1333
Figure 4-12. Attaching Feed Support to Reflector Support
STEP 8. Tighten the hex nuts on the four carriage bolts (27) shown in figure 4-8 which attach the
cross-arms to reflector support. Ensure that when the eight reflector to cross-arm or four
cross-arm to reflector support bolts are tightened, the feed support tripod (combination of left
and right feed rods and feed support) is not altered. If it is distorted, then the four bolts on the
cross-arm to reflector support should be loosened, the reflector re-positioned, and the
tightening process repeated until any distortion is eliminated.
STEP 9. If installing C-band for X000 series, refer to appendix C, section 2.3 for outdoor equipment
installation at this point. Do not continue here in chapter 7, section 4.
If installing an X000 series RF Unit for Ku-band, attach the conical 51-degree feedhorn to the
RF Unit. Use the screws and O-ring provided in the kit. If installing the PES Type 2 ODU
for Ku-band, the ODU may already have the proper conical 51-degree feedhorn in place.
7-4-15
STEP 10. Next, install the Ku-band RF Unit (PES X000 series) or Ku-band ODU (PES Type 2) on the
feed support using the M8 bolts inserted into the tapped holes in the radio (figure 3-11). Note
that "C" and "Z" brackets are not used with this antenna. Figure 4-13 provides reference feed
alignment measurements for all Prodelin Ku band 1.8M antennas. When all parts are
properly installed and all bolts tightened, the correctness of the feed position can be checked
by measuring from the reflector to the feedhorn and comparing to this figure. The actual
measurements should be within 1/4-inch of the values given in the figure. Also, measure the
distance from each side of the feedhorn to the corresponding side of the reflector at the height
of the feed rod attachment. These side-to-side dimensions should be within 1/4-inch of each
other to be acceptable. If the measurements are out of tolerance, repeat the above procedure.
1.8 METER, 51 DEGREE KU-BAND RECEIVE/TRANSMIT

FEED LOCATION
AFTER INSTALLING FEED,

THE ALIGNMENT MAY BE CHECKED
BY VERIFYING THESE DIMENSIONS.
A = 40.1"
B = 44.1"
C = 72.0"
D = 69.3"
D
B A
PES3-1326
Figure 4-13. Reflector to Feedhorn Measurement for 1.8M Antennas for Ku-band Only
7-4-16
STEP 11. Locate the Az/El information label affixed to the rear of the reflector. Write the following
information on the label: site longitude, site latitude, primary satellite designation,
are used for primary and backup, then mark all three (SBS-4, SBS-5, and SBS-6). Locate the
envelope taped to the rear of the reflector and the clear plastic material enclosed. Peel off the
protective paper and apply the clear plastic self-stick material (P/N 4090-035) over the
completed Az/El information label. (Note: The envelope also contains an extra Az/El
information label to be used if anti-icing is added and an extra bar code label with HNS serial
number for the antenna.) If anti-icing is added, affix a completed Az/El information label on
the rear of the anti-icing panel and cover with clear plastic.
NOTE 3. In the future, the 1.8M self-aligning quick repoint antenna will be supplied with 10-32
machine screws to hold the elevation scale and indicator rather than the self-tapping screws
(10, 11) presently used (figure 4-7). The reflector support will have corresponding pretapped
holes.
The self-tapping screws presently used have a tendency to strip the holes and their own
threads. If you encounter stripped threads, make a repair either by using "Loctite
Form-A-Thread" repair kit or by drilling out the holes in the reflector support and tapping
holes for a larger machine screw (size: 12-24 thread per inch).
To make a repair using the "Loctite Form-A-Thread" method, obtain either Loctite item
number 81668 (tool box size kit) or item number 81669 (shop size kit) and follow the
enclosed instructions. For the name and number of the nearest Loctite distributor or marketing
representative, telephone (800) 323-5106.
To make a repair by drilling out the holes, tapping, and using #12-24 machine screws, you
must obtain the replacement screws locally.
4.6 OPTION FOR PES TYPE 1 - SEE FSB 1107

The self aligning version of the 1.8M quick repoint antenna normally has the proper feed support for the
PES Model X000 Series RF Unit (or the PES Type 2 ODU). If you need to use this antenna with a PES
Type 1 RF Head, order a special feed support for that purpose (Prodelin P/N 0800-044). Refer to FSB
1107 for more information.
7-4-17
5.91" 49.10"
2.57"
Hole Pattern for Regulator Underneath

1
A) X000 RF Unit and Type 2 ODU-Ku Band

(Prodelin P/N 0490-253)
6.00"
47.56"
2.75"
No Hole Pattern Underneath
B) PES Type I RF Head-Ku Band

(Prodelin P/N 0490-304, Included in P/N 0800-044)
5.91" 48.67"
3.95"
No Hole Pattern Underneath
C) Incorrect for HNS Use

48.09"
1.06"
1A
Hole Pattern Underneath
D) C-Band for X000 Series - C Band

S1-09-PES3-1330
Figure 4-14. Feed Support Identification
7-4-18
4.7 OPTIONAL INVERT KIT - SEE FSB 1109

The normal configuration of the antenna is shown in figure 4-5. In order to meet local codes, ordinances,
zoning restrictions, or the requirements of a landlord, a customer may require that the antenna have a
lower visual profile or be screened from view. The optional invert kit (Prodelin P/N 0800-046) provides
the parts required to assemble the antenna with a lower profile as shown in figure 4-15. Refer to FSB
1109 for invert kit information. This configuration is sometimes called the "bird bath" antenna or the
"zenith" configuration. A disadvantage of this inverted configuration is that the antenna is more likely to
retain moisture, water, ice, or snow possibly increasing the occurances of signal outage. Even with a few
holes drilled in the antenna the water accumulation on the reflector while trying to run off or through the
holes can still be a severe problem compared to the near vertical orientation of the normal configuration
offset antenna. Therefore, the optional invert kit is restricted to the drier regions of the country. Do not
install the invert kit unless you have received prior approval from your HNS installation manager.
With the invert kit, the 1.8M antenna reflector is rotated 180 degrees at the elevation pivot point and the
elevation adjustment rod reversed by use of "clamp-on" elevation rod attach point. The invert kit causes
the antenna offset of 22.5 degrees to set the antenna to a more horizontal position (rather than to the more
vertical position as in normal configuration).
PES3-1254
Figure 4-15. Optional Invert Kit Permits Low Profile Installation
7-4-19
4.8 PARTS LIST DETAIL - 1.8M AZ/EL

Table 4-3 and figures 4-16 thru 4-21 provide parts list details for the Az/El portion of self-aligning 1.8M
quick repoint antenna. The item numbers shown in the circles on figures 4-16 thru 4-21 correspond to the
item numbers in the "Item" column of table 4-3. The Prodelin part number is required to replace a
missing or damaged part.
Table 4-3. 1.8 Meter Az/El Parts List

Figure Part
Reference Item Description Number Qty.
Fig. 4-16 1 Canister 0164-086 1
Fig. 4-16 2 1/2-13 x 1.75 Sq. Hd. Cup Point Screw 8317-003 8
Fig. 4-16 3 1/2-13 Hex Nut 8104-007 15
Fig. 4-16 4 Positioner 0490-252 1
Fig. 4-16 5 1-8 x 5.0" Bolt 8036-040 1
Fig. 4-20 6 1-8 x 7.0" Bolt 8036-056 1
Figs. 4-16, 4-20 7 1" Flatwasher 8201-049 3
Figs. 4-16, 4-20 8 1" Lockwasher 8202-046 2
Figs. 4-16, 4-20 9 1-8 Hex Nut 8107-007 1
Fig. 4-20 10 #10 x .50" Self-tapping Screw 8321-007 2
Fig. 4-7 11 #10 x 1.00" Self-tapping Screw 8321-006 4
Fig. 4-7 12 #10 Spacer 0159-220 2
Figs. 4-20, 4-7 13 #10 Flatwasher 8201-037 8
Figs. 4-20, 4-7 14 #10 Lockwasher 8202-032 8
Fig. 4-20 15 Azimuth Indicator 0211-426 1
Fig. 4-7 16 Elevation Indicator 0211-427 1
Fig. 4-7 17 Elevation Scale 4090-030 1
Fig. 4-18 18 Elevation Rod 0490-144 1
Fig. 4-18 19 Elevation Block 0168-112 1
Fig. 4-17 20 Azimuth Rod 0490-143 1
Fig. 4-17 21 Azimuth Tube 0211-453 1
Figs. 4-17, 4-18 22 3/4-14 Hex Nut 8106-007 4
Fig. 4-18 23 3/4" Flatwasher 8201-047 2
Fig. 4-19 24 1/2-13 x 1.00" Bolt 8033-008 1
Figs. 4-19, 4-20 25 1/2-13 x 1.50" Bolt 8033-012 2
Fig. 4-20 26 1/2-13 x 2.75" Bolt 8033-022 1
Fig. 4-8 27 1/2-13 x 1.50" Carriage Bolt 8043-012 4
Figs. 4-19, 4-20, 4-8 28 1/2" Flatwasher 8201-043 11
Figs. 4-19, 4-20, 4-8 29 1/2" Lockwasher 8202-043 8
Fig. 4-16 30 Azimuth Scale 4090-036 1
Fig. 4-20 31 Spacer, Elevation, 1.60" Long 0162-168 1
Fig. 4-19 32 Spacer, Elevation, .525" Long 0162-167 2
Fig. 4-8 33 Reflector Cross Arms 0211-417 2
Fig. 4-20 34 Reflector Support Tube 0490-251 1
35 3/6-16 x 4.50" Bolt 8032-036 4
Fig. 4-21 36 3/8-16 x 5.00" Bolt 8032-040 4
Fig. 4-21 37 3/8" Flatwasher 8201-042 8
Fig. 4-21 38 3/8" Lockwasher 8202-042 8
Fig. 4-21 39 3/8-16 Hex Nut 8102-007 8
Fig. 4-16 40 #10-24 x 1.00" Screw 8111-005 2
Fig. 4-16 41 #10 Wide Flatwasher 8201-054 2
Fig. 4-16 42 #10-24 Hex Nut 8302-011 2
7-4-20
PES3-1461
Figure 4-16. Canister Parts (See Table 4-3 for Part Numbers)
7-4-21
PES3-1462
Figure 4-17. Azimuth Rod Assembly Parts (See Table 4-3 for Part Numbers)
PES3-1463
Figure 4-18. Elevation Rod Assembly Parts (See Table 4-3 for Part Numbers)
PES3-1464
Figure 4-19. Azimuth Rod Installation Parts (See Table 4-3 for Part Numbers)
7-4-22
PES3-1465
Figure 4-20. Azimuth Indicator and Reflector Support Parts (See Table 4-3 for Part Numbers)
7-4-23
PES3-1466
Figure 4-21. Reflector Mounting Parts (See Table 4-3 for Part Numbers)
7-4-24
12-14-92
12-14-92
SECTION 5 - ASSEMBLING AND ALIGNING PRODELIN
2.44M QUICK REPOINT ANTENNA
Section 5
ASSEMBLING AND ALIGNING PRODELIN
5.1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes the assembly and installation of Prodelin’s 2.44 meter Rx/Tx offset antenna system
with Quick Repoint Az/El mount (figure 5-1). For Ku-band, the HNS part number for this antenna is
3000362-0001, and the Prodelin part number is 1245-133. The part numbers given in the tables in this
section are Prodelin part numbers.
This section also describes assembly of the following antenna part numbers for use with C-band for X000
series (appendix C):
HNS Prodelin
Part Number Part Number Application
1011822-0002 1245-263 C-band Linear Co-polarized
1011823-0002 1245-273 C-band Linear Cross-polarized
1011200-0002 1245-283-R C-band Circular Tx-Right at Feed System
1011200-0004 1245-283-L C-band Circular Tx-Left at Feed System
The above C-band versions of the antenna differ from the Ku-band version by using different length feed
rods and a different length and style feed support

has been received and is in good condition. A complete packing list for each major component is
supplied.
The 2.4M antenna for Ku-band is shipped in three containers as shown in figure 5-2. The four versions of
the C-band 2.4M antenna are each shipped in four containers as listed in table 5-1. The most commonly
stocked versions are identified with an asterisk. As described in appendix C, the linear cross-pol can be
field converted to/from linear co-pol. Likewise, circular Tx-left can be field converted to/from circular
Tx-Right.
5.3 FREIGHT DAMAGE

5.4 MATERIAL - MISSING OR DAMAGED

Any questions regarding missing or damaged materials that is not due to the freight carrier should be
1700 NE Cable Drive
P.O. Box 368
Conover, NC 28613
(704) 464-4141
7-5-1
PES3-1207
Figure 5-1. Prodelin 2.44M Quick Repoint Antenna (Ku-band version)
7-5-2
PRODELIN 1245-133 2.4M RX/TX ANTENNA SYSTEM QUICK REPOINT
800-254 2.4M QUICK REPOINT Az/EL ASSEMBLY
20" 130 lbs 12"
26"
800-250 2.4M QR REFLECTOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
11 1/2" 80 lbs 8 1/2"
84"
800-223 2.4M OFFSET REFLECTOR WITH VELLOX
265 lbs
102"
18"
110"
PES3-1143 f
Figure 5-2. 2.44M Antenna System Shipping Containers (Ku-band)
7-5-3
Table 5-1. C-Band 2.4M Antenna Shipping Configurations

Linear Co-Pol Linear Cross-Pol* Circular Tx-Right Circular Tx-Left*
1011822-0002 1011823-0002 1011200-0002 1011200-0004
1245-263 1245-273 1245-283-R 1245-283-L
Reflector 800-223 800-223 800-223 800-223
265 lbs 265 lbs 265 lbs 265 lbs
Az/El Assembly 800-254 800-254 800-254 800-254
Fig. 5-2 top Fig. 5-2 top Fig. 5-2 top Fig. 5-2 top
130 lbs 130 lbs 130 lbs 130 lbs
Reflector 800-538 800-538 800-539 800-539
Support, C-Band Fig. 5-3 top Fig. 5-3 top Fig. 5-4 top Fig. 5-4 top
Feed Support 75 lbs linear 75 lbs linear 78 lbs circular 78 lbs circular
Feed Assembly 800-226 800-227 800-229 800-228
11 lbs co-pol 11 lbs cross-pol 13 lbs right 13 lbs left
800-538 2.4M REFLECTOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY - & C-BAND FEED SUPPORT - LINEAR
CONTAINS:

C-BAND FEED SUPPORT
ELEVATION BRACKET
84" TRANSMITTER MTG BRACKET
800-226 C-BAND CO-POL. FEED ASSEMBLY

OR
800-227 C-BAND CROSS-POL. FEED ASSEMBLY
800-226 CONTAINS:
CO-POL. LINEAR FEED ASSEMBLY

HARDWARE KIT
11 lbs 11" 800-227 CONTAINS:
12" CROSS-POL. LINEAR FEED ASSEMBLY

HARDWARE KIT
26"
S5-04-PES3-1550
Figure 5-3. C-band 2.4M Antenna, Linear Polarization, 2 of 4 Cartons
7-5-4
800-539 2.4M REFLECTOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY - & C-BAND FEED SUPPORT - CIRCULAR
CONTAINS:

C-BAND FEED SUPPORT
CROSS ARM (2)
84" CIRC. POL. BRACKET
CIRC. POL. HARDWARE
ELEVATION BRACKET
800-228 C-BAND L.H. CIR-POL. FEED ASSEMBLY

OR
800-229 C-BAND R.H. CIRC-POL. FEED ASSEMBLY
800-228 CONTAINS:
L.H. CIRC-POL. FEED ASSEMBLY

HARDWARE KIT
13 lbs 11" 800-229 CONTAINS:
12" R.H. CIRC-POL. FEED ASSEMBLY

HARDWARE KIT
26"
S5-04-PES3-1551
Figure 5-4. C-band 2.4M Antenna, Circular Polarization, 2 of 4 Cartons
5.5 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION TOOLS

1 ratchet, 1/2" drive 1 wrench, combination 15/16
1 socket, 9/16" deep well, 1/2" drive 1 wrench, combination 1-1/8
1 socket, 3/4" deep well, 1/2" drive 1 wrench, combination 1-1/2
1 socket, 1-1/8" deep well, 1/2" drive 1 screwdriver, standard blade
1 wrench, combination 5/16 1 screwdriver, cross blade
1 wrench, combination 1/2 1 10" adjustable crescent wrench
1 wrench, combination 9/16 1 Allen wrench, 5/32"
1 wrench, combination 3/4 1 3" wrench (socket, crescent or pipe)
for 2-4.5 bolt
5.6 MECHANICAL ALIGNMENT TOOLS

The following tools are recommended for use when making the initial alignment to the satellite.
Compass
Inclinometer
7-5-5
5.7 ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
During the assembly procedure, the instructions must be followed in the
sequence listed. DO NOT TIGHTEN ANY HARDWARE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED. Apply a weather protective lubricant (such as "LPS3"
manufactured by Holt Lloyd Corp. and available at distributors in your
area whose address can be obtained by calling 1-800-241-8334) on all
threaded bolts and moving parts to aid in initial installation and provide
for later protection against corrosion.
The 2.44M antenna system consists of four major components:

1. Reflector
2. Reflector Support Assembly
3. Az/El Positioner
4. Feed Support Structure
The interface from the ground foundation to the antenna is a 6.63" O.D. pipe, vertical within 5°. It is
assumed that the foundation and pipe have been properly installed, and that the correct ballast has been
applied to an NPMM, if applicable.
5.7.1 AZ/EL POSITIONER ASSEMBLY

The canister shown in figure 5-5 is factory assembled and becomes a part of the factory assembled Az/El
positioner shown in figure 5-6.
STEP 1. Check to make sure that the azimuth collar (2, figure 5-5) is oriented so that the set of
numbers needed on the azimuth scale is at the bottom of the label (so that south, 180°, can be
read for sites in the Northern Hemisphere including the U.S.).
STEP 2. Attach the factory assembled azimuth adjustment rod (2), azimuth tube (3), 3/4" nuts (12),
flatwashers (10), lockwasher (11), bolt (9), and sleeves (7 and 8) to the positioner (1) and
canister as shown in figure 5-6. Be sure to include the sleeves (7 and 8) in the proper location
and tighten securely.
STEP 3. Adjust the nuts (14) on the azimuth adjustment rod to locate the Az/El positioner, with
respect to the canister, to approximately the middle of the adjustment range.
STEP 4. Place the Az/El positioner assembly on the mast pipe and orient so that the antenna points to
the approximate center of the satellite orbital arc. (See figure 5-5.)
7-5-6
NOTE
position.
Assembly is orientated so that the azimuth adjust is in the middle (can go
without unbolting the positioner from the mast. If this is not done
If the primary and backup satellites are both known, use the LATLONG
function to calculate the azimuth from your site to each. In almost all
cases the azimuth difference is less than 90° between the two satellites.
Position the Az/El Positioner Assembly on the mast so that it points
centered between the two satellites.

satellite at longitude 103 degrees West for aiming ("TO CENTER OF
ORBITAL ARC") the Az/El positioner assembly. This selection permits
the most sites to view both their primary and backup satellites without
having to change the canister position. Use the LATLONG function to
calculate the azimuth from your site to a satellite located at 103 degrees
West. Correct the azimuth for magnetic declination and aim the Az/El
positioner assembly accordingly.
STEP 5. Alternately tighten the set screws (3) while watching the bubble level on the top canister plate
to be sure that the canister plate is level. It is important to make sure the canister (1) is
level. Otherwise, the quick repoint feature will not work correctly because elevation will not
be correct as the antenna is changed in azimuth.
STEP 6. With all set screws snug, check again to be sure that the canister is level and securely tighten
the set screws. Tighten the lock nuts (6) against the canister.
STEP 7. Tighten the 1" bolt (4) at this time.
7-5-7
PES2-628

1 0164-084 Canister Assembly 1
2 0181-235 Azimuth Collar 1
3 8307-007 5/16-18 x 0.50" Set Screw 3
4 8317-005 5/8-11 x 2.00" Sq. Hd. Screw 8
5 8105-007 5/8-11 Hex Nut 8
6 8317-004 1/2-13 x 3.00" Sq. Hd. Screw 1
7 8104-007 1/2-13 Hex Nut 2
8 8200-017 1/2 Int. Tooth Lockwasher 2
Figure 5-5. Canister Assembly (2.44M)
7-5-8
PES2-629

1 0490-167 Az/El Positioner 1
2 0490-175 Azimuth Adjustment Rod 1
3 0490-177 Azimuth Tube 1
4 8037-056 2-4.5 x 7.00" bolt 1
5 8201-050 2" Flatwasher 1
6 8202-050 2" Lockwasher 1
7 0162-177 0.53" Long Sleeve 1
8 0162-178 0.80" Long Sleeve 1
9 8035-016 3/4-10 x 2.00" Bolt 1
10 8201-045 3/4" Flatwasher 4
11 8202-045 3/4" Lockwasher 2
12 8106-007 3/4-10 Hex Nut 2
13 8201-049 1" Flatwasher 2
14 8107-007 1-8 Hex Nut 2
Figure 5-6. Az/El Positioner Assembly (2.44M)
7-5-9
5.7.2 REFLECTOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

STEP 1. Attach the reflector support angle (2) to the back of the reflector. Fasten four 1/2-13 x 1.75"
bolts (13), flatwashers (15), and lockwashers (16) to the reflector insert-nuts. Tighten
securely.
STEP 2. Attach the elevation bracket (4) to the back of the reflector. Fasten two 1/2-13 x 1.75" bolts
(13), flatwashers (15), and lockwashers (16) to the reflector insert-nuts. Tighten securely.
STEP 3. Lift the reflector and position the reflector support angle (2) onto the Az/El positioner and
insert the 1-8 x 9.00" bolt (6) and flatwasher (8) (figure 5-7) from the right side of the
reflector support angle (2) to allow for mounting the elevation adjustment plate (1, figure
5-8).
STEP 4. To attach the elevation adjustment plate (1, figure 5-8), remove the 1" nut (10, figure 5-7),
lockwasher (9), and flatwasher (8) from the reflector support angle (2) and place the elevation
adjustment plate (1, figure 5-8) onto the 1-8 x 9.00" bolt (6, figure 5-7). Align the small
holes in the plate with the holes in the reflector support angle and secure with two #10-24 x
0.38" self-tapping screws (4, figure 5-8). Install the flatwasher (8, figure 5-7), lockwasher
(9), and nut (10) on the 1" bolt (6) and snug.
STEP 5. Attach the elevation indicator (2, figure 5-8) to the side of the Az/El positioner with a #10-24
x 0.75" self-tapping screw (5) and spacer (3) in two places.
STEP 6. Attach the elevation tube (3, figure 5-7) to the back of the Az/El positioner with two 1-8 x
2.00" bolts (7), flatwashers (8), lockwashers (9), and 0.28" sleeves (11). Tighten securely.
The elevation tube should rotate freely after being tightened.
STEP 7. Attach the elevation adjustment rod to the elevation bracket (4) at the top of the back reflector
ring with a 3/4-10 x 2.00" bolt (14), two flatwashers (17), lockwasher (18), nut (19), and
0.80" sleeve (12). Tighten securely.
Table 5-2. Reflector Support Assembly

1 0179-224 2.4M Reflector 1
2 0490-165 Reflector Support Angle 2
3 0490-168 Elevation Tube 1
4 0490-169 Elevation Bracket 1
5 0490-176 Elevation Adjustment Rod 1
6 8036-072 1-8 x 9.00" Bolt 1
7 8036-016 1-8 x 2.00" Bolt 2
8 8201-049 1" Flatwasher 6
9 8202-046 1" Lockwasher 3
10 8107-007 1-8 Hex Nut 3
11 0162-176 0.28" Long Sleeve 2
12 0162-178 0.80" Long Sleeve 1
13 8033-014 1/2-13 x 1.75" Bolt 6
14 8035-016 3/4-10 x 2.00" Bolt 1
15 8201-043 1/2" Flatwasher 6
16 8202-043 1/2" Lockwasher 6
17 8201-045 3/4" Flatwasher 2
18 8202-045 3/4" Lockwasher 1
19 8106-007 3/4-10 Hex Nut 1
7-5-10
PES2-630
Figure 5-7. Reflector Support Assembly (2.44M)
7-5-11
PES2-632

1 0156-707 Elevation Plate 1
2 0211-395 Elevation Indicator 1
3 0159-216 Spacer 2
4 8321-002 #10-24 x 0.38" Tapping Screw 2
5 8321-003 #10-24 x 0.75" Tapping Screw 2
Figure 5-8. Elevation Indicator Assembly (2.44M)
7-5-12
5.7.3 AZIMUTH INDICATOR ASSEMBLY

As shown in figure 5-9, assemble the following items in the listed sequence.
STEP 1. Attach the azimuth indicator plate (1) to the bottom of the Az/El positioner tube (3, figure
5-6) with a #10-24 x 2.00" screw (5, figure 5-9), spacer (3), two flatwashers (6), lockwasher
(7), and nut (8) in two places.
STEP 2. Attach the azimuth indicator (2) to the end of the azimuth indicator plate (1) with #10-24 x
0.38" screw (4), flatwasher (6), and lockwasher (7) in the two tapped holes.
STEP 3. Tighten the four screws holding the azimuth indicator.
PES2-631

1 0156-705 Azimuth Indicator Plate 1
2 0211-396 Azimuth Indicator 1
3 0159-222 Steel Spacer 2
4 8302-008 #10-24 x 0.38" Screw 2
5 8302-009 #10-24 x 2.00" Screw 2
6 8201-037 #10 Flatwasher 6
7 8202-032 #10 Lockwasher 4
8 8111-005 #10-24 Hex Nut 2
Figure 5-9. Azimuth Indicator Assembly (2.44M)
7-5-13
5.7.4 FEED SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

Refer to figures 5-10 and 5-11 to complete the feed support assembly. Figures 5-12 and 5-13 identify the
feed support and feed rods for Ku-band and C-band.
STEP 1. Loosely attach the ends of feed rods (2 or 2A) with the longer flattened area to the sides of
the reflector using 3/8-16 x 1.25" bolts (3), flatwashers (5), lockwashers (6), and hex nuts (7),
detail A of figure 5-10.
STEP 2. Loosely attach the feed support (1 or 1A) to the ends of the feed rods that have the shorter
flattened area. Use the 3/8-16 x 3" bolt (4), flatwashers (5), lockwashers (6), and a hex nut
(7), detail B of figure 5-10.
STEP 3. Swing the lower end of the feed support (1 or 1A) to the reflector and attach it using 3/8"
hardware, detail C of figure 5-10. Securely tighten all hardware installed in steps 1, 2, and 3.
exposed.
If installing C-band for X000 series, refer to appendix C, section 2.3 for outdoor equipment
installation at this point.
PES3-1518
Figure 5-10. Feed Support Assembly Details
7-5-14
PES3-1206

1 - 0490-106 Feed Support for X000 RF Unit - Ku-band 1
1A Note 3 0490-303 Feed Support for X000 RF Head - C-band (1)
Not Shown Optional 0800-045 Feed Support for Type 1 RF Head -
2 - 0176-065 Feed Rod - Ku-band 2
2A Note 3 0176-047 Feed Rod - C-band (2)
3 Note 1 8032-010 3/8-16 x 1.25" Bolt 4
4 Note 1 8032-024 3/8-16 x 3.00" Bolt 1
5 Note 1 8201-042 3/8" Flatwasher 10
7 Note 1 8102-007 3/8-16 Hex Nut 5
9 Note 1 8201-034 Flatwasher 2
11 Note 1, 2 8320-001 #8-18 x .50" Tapping Screw 4
Note 1. Items 3 thru 11 are shipped as 200-650 Kit, HDWE 2.44M Feed Support
Note 2. Not used for PES Model X000 series.
Note 3. For C-band, refer to figures 5-12 and 5-13 and Appendix C.
Figure 5-11. 2.44M Feed Support Assembly
7-5-15
61.00"
A) X000 RF Unit - Ku Band

60.14"
B) PES Type I RF Head-Ku Band

(Prodelin P/N 0490-305, Included in P/N 0800-045)
57.65"

1A
C) X000 RF Head - C-Band

S1-09-PES3-1486
Figure 5-12. Feed Support Identification
STEP 5. If installing an X000 series RF Unit for Ku-band, attach the conical 51-degree Ku-band
feedhorn to the RF Unit. Use the screws and O-ring provided.
STEP 6. Remove the screws from the slotted holes in the RF Unit bracket (figure 3-11 on page 7-3-
17). These screws through the slotted holes are not used for this antenna. Attach the RF Unit
to the feed support (1) using the metric M8 bolts, lockwashers, and flatwashers (items 8, 9,
and 10).
7-5-16
80.25 "
A) X000 RF Unit and PES Type 1 RF Head-Ku Band

STAMPED
2A
INTO
METAL
04
7
75.06 "
B) X000 C-Band RF Head-C Band

S-09-PES3-1487
Figure 5-13. Feed Rod Identification
7-5-17
5.7.5 FEED ALIGNMENT

The feed system for the 2.44M Rx/Tx Antenna System is such that the RF optics (feedhorn to reflector)
are self-aligning and require no adjustment when properly installed. To ensure that the RF optics are
correct, the dimensions shown in figure 5-14 may be checked. The measurements of figure 5-14 apply to
Ku-band only; refer to appendix C for the measurements for C-band.
The antenna system is now ready to be aligned to the satellite.
2.4 METER, 51 DEGREE KU-BAND FEED LOCATION

A = 56"
B = 60"
C = 97 7/8"
D = 95 1/2"
C
D
B
A
S-09-PES3-399A
Figure 5-14. Checking RF Unit Alignment (Ku-Band Only)
7-5-18
5.8 ANTENNA POINTING
5.8.1 CHECKING RF UNIT ALIGNMENT

Check the RF Unit alignment by verifying the dimensions shown in figure 5-14, a side cross section view
of the reflector and a Prodelin feedhorn. The dimensions are measured without the optional feedhorn
heater and should be within 1/4 inch. Also, measure the distance from each side of the feedhorn to the
corresponding side of the reflector at the height of the clevis. These two side-to-side dimensions should
be within 1/4 inch of each other, indicating that the RF Unit is centered. The side-to-side alignment can
be adjusted with the bolts and slotted holes on the bottom of the RF Unit bracket.
After the alignment is verified, attach the optional feedhorn anti-ice heater, if present, to the feedhorn on
the RF Unit.
5.8.2 CHECKING ANTENNA ALIGNMENT TO SATELLITE

Prodelin’s 2.44M Quick Repoint Az/El mount requires that the antenna be positioned to the satellite
orbital arc initially by a trained installer, after which any future repointing to any other satellite can be
accomplished quickly and easily by anyone with a minimum of tools and instruction.
5.8.3 INITIAL ALIGNMENT
5.8.3.1 Setting Antenna Elevation on Prodelin 2.44M Quick Repoint Antenna (Preferred Method) -
This antenna does not have a special inclinometer surface; therefore, you must correct elevation for
antenna offset.
To set the elevation on the Prodelin 2.44M quick repoint antenna, take the elevation angle from the
LATLONG program and subtract 22.3° from this value. The difference is the desired inclinometer
reading.
Elevation from LATLONG __________°
Minus Correction for Offset Antenna -22.3°

____________________
= Desired Inclinometer Reading __________°
Place the inclinometer on the flat front rim of the antenna as shown in figure 5-15. Position the
inclinometer so that it is oriented vertically as the antenna is viewed from the front. Set the inclinometer
to the desired value. Adjust the fine elevation adjustment assembly until the inclinometer grating shows a
pattern of parallel lines.
7-5-19
PES3-1205
Figure 5-15. Setting Antenna Elevation (Preferred Method)
7-5-20
NOTE
Because the reflector surface is made of fiberglass, the inclinometer
magnets do not hold the inclinometer against the reflector. You may find
it more convenient to hold the inclinometer on the rear of the reflector in
the "alternate inclinometer position" shown in figure 5-15. This is
acceptable if the final reading is checked against the front surface
reading and correcting adjustments are made to the antenna, if necessary.
(The rear surface can vary from the front surface.) (Refer to alternate
method below.)
5.8.3.2 Setting Antenna Elevation on Prodelin 2.44M Quick Repoint Antenna (Alternate Method) -
The 2.44M offset reflector contains a 22.3° elevation offset look angle. Therefore, when the reflector
aperture is perpendicular to the ground, the antenna is actually looking 22.3° in elevation.
STEP 1. Place an inclinometer on the back reflector ring to read the initial rough elevation as shown in
figure 5-15. Note that the look angle of the reflector is the reading on the inclinometer plus
22.3°.
STEP 2. Raise or lower the antenna to find the desired elevation by turning the 1" nuts located at the
elevation block. Position the top nut so that it will not interfere with adjustment. Turn the
bottom nut clockwise to increase elevation and counterclockwise to decrease elevation.
STEP 3. After the correct elevation angle is set, rotate the antenna in azimuth by turning the 1" nuts
located at the azimuth adjustment tube. Turn the front (near reflector) nut to decrease
azimuth angle and the back nut to increase azimuth angle. Rotate azimuth until a signal is
reached.
STEP 4. If your site is designated for a horizontally polarized downlink (outroute/remote PES
receive) transponder,set the RF Unit to the proper plus (+) or minus (-) polarization value by
loosening the clamping screw, rotating the RF Unit and then tightening the clamping screw.
NOTE
The LATLONG program calculates polarization assuming a horizontal
downlink transponder (which corresponds to a vertical uplink.) In some
cases, the PES site may be designated to receive an outroute signal on a
vertical downlink transponder of a frequency reuse satellite. In such a
situation, add (or subtract to stay on scale - both are corrected) 90
degrees to (from) the polarization value given by the LATLONG
program. Set the RF Unit to a polarization value 90 degrees away from
the value given by LATLONG. To find out whether you are operating
with a horizontal or vertical polarized outroute transponder on a
particular satellite, refer to the "Installation Specification" for that
particular customer. Also, refer to table 2-1 on page 11-2-1. If you are
still not sure, contact your designated "HNS" Installation Manager."
STEP 5. Peak the antenna signal by fine adjustments made in both azimuth and elevation.
STEP 6. Tighten the four 1" nuts used for adjustments.
STEP 7. Adjust the elevation pointer and azimuth collar to read the exact calculated angles derived
from the satellite programs on the site commissioning computer.
7-5-21
NOTE
It is important that the correct angles be read and recorded so that any
future repointing can be easily accomplished.
STEP 8. Locate the Az/El information label affixed to the rear of the reflector. Write the following
information on the label: site longitude, site latitude, primary satellite designation,
are used for primary and backup, then mark all three (SBS-4, SBS-5, and SBS-6). Locate the
envelope taped to the rear of the reflector and the clear plastic material enclosed. Peel off the
protective paper and apply the clear plastic self stick material (P/N 4090-034) over the
completed Az/El information label. (Note: The envelope also contains an extra Az/El
information label and an extra bar code label with HNS serial number for the antenna.)
5.8.4 REPOINTING
NOTE
Repointing can only be accomplished if step 7 of the initial alignment
has been performed properly.
STEP 1. Use the latitude and longitude of the site (marked on back of dish) to calculate the azimuth,
elevation, and polarization to the new backup satellite. Adjust elevation up or down by
turning the 1" nuts as above in step 2. Adjust until new elevation angle is read at elevation
pointer. See figure 5-16.
STEP 2. Adjust azimuth by turning the 1" nuts as above in step 3. Adjust until new azimuth angle is
read at azimuth pointer.
STEP 3. Tighten the four 1" nuts.
STEP 4. Adjust to the new polarization by rotating the RF Unit.
7-5-22
PES2-637
Figure 5-16. Repointing Indicators
7-5-23
3-5-91
3-5-91
SECTION 6 - MAINTENANCE FOR ANTENNAS AND MOUNTS
Section 6
MAINTENANCE FOR ANTENNAS AND MOUNTS
6.1 MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW

After installation, the PES antenna requires only periodic inspection. It is anticipated that maintenance, if
required, will be minimal and easily handled by a local or in-house maintenance staff. The materials used
in the construction of this Earth Station Antenna virtually eliminate any maintenance repairs.
6.1.1 PERIODIC INSPECTION

Periodic inspection should be performed at least every six months.
NOTE
After any very severe weather conditions, inspection of the antenna
should be performed to determine if foreign objects have caused damage
or if survival specifications have been exceeded.
This inspection should include the following:

STEP 1. Check all bolting locations - All bolts should be tight.
STEP 2. Check all structural members - Repair or replace if damaged.
STEP 3. Check the foundation anchor bolts - They must be secure and with no failure signs in
foundation.
STEP 4. Check for corrosion - On the reflector structure and the mount.
6.1.1.1 Reflector - Prodelin’s basic reflector does not require any maintenance. The composite
construction of the reflector is virtually impervious to any damages that could be caused by weather or
other atmospheric conditions.
It is only necessary to inspect for any physical damage done by vandalism or very severe weather
conditions.
Should any damage be detected to a portion of the reflector, contact the Customer Service Department at
Prodelin for recommendations involving reflector repair.
6.1.1.2 Mount and Reflector Support Structure - The mount and reflector support structure supplied
with this antenna is of steel construction and has a hot-dipped galvanized finish with mechanical
galvanized hardware.
If inspection shows any signs of structural failure, the mount members that are damaged should be
repaired or replaced.
Corrosion: Any corrosion on steel members may be repaired with a cold, zinc-rich galvanizing paint.
(See table 6-1.)
7-6-1
Table 6-1. Zinc-rich Paint Sources
All-State Welding Products All-State Galvover Spray Brown Galvanizing Corporation Galvanizing Spray
Box 600 4104 South Creek Road East
Tanytown, MD 21787 Chattanooga, TN 37406
(800) 638-1647 (615) 698-2451
A.W. Chesterton Co. Chesterton Cold A.W. Chesterton Ltd Chesterton Cold
Middlesex Industrial Park Galvanizing Compound Burlington, Ontario, Canada Galvanizing Compound
Route 93 (416) 632-4974
Stoneham, MA 02180
(617) 438-7000 Carboline-Subox Division Galvanox Type I
40 Burlews Circle (for water Immersion Services)
CRC Distributors/Twin Zinc-It Hackensack, NJ 07601 Galvanox Type III
Specialties Corp. Zinc Re-Nu (201) 343-6533 (For Touch-Up Applications)
111 Presidential Blvd.
Bala Cynwyd, PA 19004 Crown Industrial Products Co. Cold Galvanizing
(215) 667-8965 50 State Line Road Compound
Hebron, IL 60034
Devcon Corp. Devcon Z Cold (800) 892-6122 (IL)
59 Endicott Street Galvanizing Compound (800) 435-4411 (Outside IL)
Danvers, MA 01923
(508) 777-1100 Duncan Galvanizing Corp. ZIRP
69 Norman Street
E.I. DuPont DeNemours & Co. Ganicin 347-Y 937 Everett, MA
Maintenance Finishes Division (617) 389-8440
Wilson Building-Concord Plaza
Wilmington, DE 19898 Lilly Industrial Coatings, Inc. Zincilate 810C
(800) 346-4748 P.O. Box 946 Epoxy Ester
Indianapolis, IN 46206
ORB Industries, Inc. Cold Galvanizing (317) 634-8512
2 Race Street Aerosol Spray
P.O. Box 1067 Perfect Paint and Wall Covering Aquapon 97-670
Upland, PA 19015 1435 Glendale Milford Road
(215) 874-2537 Cincinnati, OH 45215
(513) 771-2060
Z.R.C. Products Company Z.R.C
21 Newport Avenue Sentry Chemical Company Galvanic
Quincy, MA 02171 1481 Rock Mountain Blvd
(617) 328-6700 Stone Mountain, GA 30086
FAX (617)328-5304 (404) 934-4242
Seymore of Sycamore, Inc. Cold Galvanizing Sprayon Products Sprayon - 00740

917 Crosby Avenue Compound 26300 Fargo Avenue
Sycamore, IL Bedford Heights, OH 44146
(815) 895-9101 (216) 292-7400
Southern Coatings, Inc. Galvicon

Kenco Division
Sumter, SC 29151
(800) 845-0487
7-6-2
SECTION 6 - MAINTENANCE FOR ANTENNAS AND MOUNTS
6.1.1.3 Feed and Feed Support - The feed support tube and feed rods should be inspected to ensure that
all hardware is secure. The feed/radio mounting bolts should be tight.
The feedhorn window should be inspected to ensure that it is intact so that no moisture can collect inside
the feedhorn. Replace RF Unit, if damaged.
6.1.1.4 Nuts, Bolts, and Az/El Adjustment Corrosion Protection - All hardware may be subject to
corrosion and rust over prolonged exposure to the weather and corrosive elements in the air. To help
prolong the useful life of the antenna system and make a satellite repoint more feasible, the nuts, bolts,
and threaded rods must be periodically coated with a protective material. Apply a weather protective
lubricant (such as "LPS3" manufactured by Holt Lloyd Corp. and available at distributors in your area
whose address can be obtained by calling 1-800-241-8334).
7-6-3
6-28-95
CHAPTER 8
ANTENNA ANTI-ICING
As listed in table 1-1, PES anti-icing systems have been supplied by RayChem in the past and by Prodelin
currently. For RayChem the anti-icing system is an add-on option to the antenna. For Prodelin, the
anti-icing system and the complete antenna can be supplied as one part number. This chapter provides
some installation and service information for some of the RayChem optional anti-icing systems for the
antennas of PES model X000 series. This chapter is divided into four section:
Section 1 - Anti-icing Overview
Section 2 - Anti-icing for 1.0M Rectangular Antennas (RayChem)
Section 3 - Anti-icing for 1.2M Antenna (Reference Information)
Section 4 - Raychem 1.8M and 2.44M Half Backshell Anti-icing System (RayChem)
Section 1
ANTI-ICING OVERVIEW
Table 1-1. Anti-Icing Summary
Antenna
Description HNS P/N MFG P/N Comment References
0.75M Antenna 3000179-0001 1752-132 Anti-icing not available for PES General
without (Prodelin) this antenna. Reference Manual
Anti-Icing chapter 7, section 1
Universal 1.0M 3002001-0003 1102-142 Antenna and anti-icing FSB 1149 and FSB
Antenna with (Prodelin) together as one unit. 1142B
Integral Current Product.
Prodelin Applicable for all wind
Anti-Icing zones.
Regular 1.0M 3000172-0003 1102-134 Antenna and anti-icing PES General
Antenna with (Prodelin) together as one unit. Being Reference Manual
Integral phased in for new sites. chapter 7, section 1
Prodelin Applicable for all wind and FSB 1142B
Anti-Icing zones.
Prodelin 3000172-0004 TBD Can be ordered separately FSB 1142B
Regular 1.0M (Prodelin) and be used to retrofit
Anti-Icing existing regular 1.0M sites,
Reflector but requires throwing away
existing reflector.
Lightweight 3000172-0002 0800-889 Not available with anti-icing. FSB 1094B
1.0M without (Prodelin) Cannot be retrofitted with
Anti-Icing anti-icing. Applicable for
wind zones below 90 mph.
If anti-icing required, order
Regular 1.0M with anti-icing
instead.
8-1-1
Table 1-1 Anti-Icing Summary (Continued)

Antenna
Description HNS P/N MFG P/N Comment References
RayChem 1.0M 3000180-0001 Model P10RF Being phased out for new PES General
Anti-Icing P/N 663141 sites. Can be retrofitted to Reference Manual,
(RayChem) existing regular 1.0M sites. chapter 8, section 2
Temperature sensor only. and FSB 1110
Regular 1.2M 3000173-0003 1123-136 Antenna and anti-icing PES General
Antenna with (Prodelin) together as one unit. Reference Manual
Integral Current Product. chapter 7, section 2
Prodelin Applicable for all wind and FSB 1146A
Anti-Icing zones.
Prodelin 1.2M 3000173-0004 0800-936 Can be ordered separately FSB 1146A
Anti-Icing (Prodelin) and be used to retrofit
Reflector existing 1.2M sites, but
requires throwing away
existing reflector.
Light Weight 3000172-0002 1123-139 Not available with anti-icing. FSB 1095A and FSB
1.2M without (Prodelin) Can be retrofitted with 1146A
Anti-Icing anti-icing.
RayChem 1.2M 3000360-0001 - Full backshell. Being phased VSAT info bulletin
Anti-Icing (RayChem) out for new sites. 055
Temperature sensor only.
RayChem 1.8M 3000132-0001 RAD-P18H-1-S-53V Half backshell. Being PES General
Anti-Icing (RayChem) phased out for new sites. Reference Manual,
Can be retrofitted onto chapter 8, section 4.
existing sites.
1.8M Antenna 3000361-0003 1184-138 Ku- band antenna and half PES General
with Integral (Prodelin) backshell anti-icing together Reference Manual,
Prodelin as one unit. Current chapter 7, section 4
Anti-Icing Product. and FSB 1153.
RayChem 2.4M 3000131-0001 RAD-P24H-1-S-53V Half backshell. Can be PES General
Anti-Icing (RayChem) retrofitted onto existing sites. Reference Manual,
chapter 8, section 4.
2.4M Antenna - - Antenna and anti-icing
with Integral (Prodelin) together as one unit.
Prodelin
Anti-Icing
8-1-2
3-5-91
3-5-91
CHAPTER 8 - ANTENNA ANTI-ICING
SECTION 2 - ANTI-ICING FOR 1.0M RECTANGULAR ANTENNAS
Section 2
ANTI-ICING FOR 1.0M RECTANGULAR ANTENNAS
2.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides installation instructions for the 1.0M rectangular antenna anti-icing system, HNS
P/N 3000180-0001 (Raychem model P10RF P/N 663141 for 120 Vac, 60 Hz). This optional anti-icing
system, which includes a full backshell heater and a feedhorn heater, can be installed at the same time as
the antenna (as described here) or can be retrofitted on existing pre-installed 1.0M antennas. The 1.0M
anti-icing does not need to be wired on a separate circuit. As shown in figure 2-1A, the 1.0M anti-icing
system must be plugged into a ground fault interrupter (GFI) electrical receptacle or receptacle on a GFI
circuit breaker. To minimize the danger of fire from sustained electrical arcing if the heating cable
system is damaged or misinstalled, use a ground fault protection device (GFPD). Arcing may not be
stopped by conventional circuit breakers or fuses. When an anti-icing system is installed on 1.0M
antenna, the antenna assembly sequence is altered.
WARNING
Failure to observe the warnings in this procedure may result in electrical
shock or electrocution.
Danger of electrical shock hazard; do not energize the anti-icing system

until it is securely fastened to the reflector back surface.
The black anti-icing heater panels are not suitable for handling while
energized. Danger of shock or burn exists.
Installation of this anti-icing system requires the connection of 120 Vac

at the antenna site. Follow all local codes and practices for safe handling
of 120 Vac.
Before installation, inspect the anti-icing system heating elements

fastened to the shell inner surface. If any damage to a heater element is
observed, do not use the anti-icing system; replace with a new unit.
Damage to a heater element may constitute a risk of electrical shock or
fire and may cause the anti-icing system to not operate.
If the circuit breaker powering the anti-icing system repeatedly resets

("trips"), do not continue to attempt to apply power. Instead, locate and
repair or replace the short circuit or faulty equipment. Do not, however,
attempt to repair the anti-icing system; if it is faulty, replace with a new
unit.
8-2-1
REFLECTOR HEATER
FEEDHORN
PROTECTIVE BOX
HEATER
GFI RECEPTACLE
25 feet max.
TO 120 VAC 15 AMP
CKT BREAKER-GFI
A ) TYPICAL INSTALLATION
FEEDHORN
HEATER
LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
SWITCH OR CKT BRKR (GFI)
TO 120 VAC 15 AMP

CKT BREAKER
6 ft. max (GFI)
B ) SPECIAL CASE INSTALLATION

PES3-1263
Figure 2-1. Installing 1.0M Anti-Icing System
8-2-2
2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

To install the 1.0M anti-icing system at the same time the 1.0M antenna is being installed, perform the
following steps:
STEP 1. Make sure that the antenna site is within 25 feet of a proper electrical receptacle (GFI
receptacle or receptacle on a GFI circuit breaker). The receptacle shall be installed in a
location protected from the weather or be in a weatherproof enclosure, and shall be
weatherproof when the electrical plug is installed.
STEP 2. Open the 1.0M rectangular reflector with feed system carton (Prodelin P/N 0800-108.) As
shown in figure 2-2, attach the feed rods and radio support to the reflector. Then attach the
feed rods to the radio support. Details of these connection are shown in details A, B, and C of
figure 1-6 on page 7-1-11. Do not attach the reflector support (part of detail A) or RF Unit
(detail D) during this step.
PES3-1264
Figure 2-2. Attach Radio Support and Feed Rods Before Backshell
8-2-3
WARNING
Make sure that the anti-icing system is disconnected from electrical
power before handling. If you need to wire electrical connections, make
sure that the power is turned off and tagged at the main service panel
(circuit breaker panel.)
NOTE
If this site (or local electrical code) requires the special case installation
of figure 2-1B, remove the 30 foot power cord and 3-prong plug
provided with the backshell and connect the required type of electrical
cable (fed through liquid-tight flexible conduit) to the control box portion
of the backshell. Figure 2-5 shows the wiring for the anti-icing system.
Observe the locations for wiring the hot, neutral, and ground leads. To
gain access:
A) Before starting be sure to unplug the anti-icing system before any

work is done. Use wire cutters to cut the five shaft retainer rings from
the standoffs and lift them with a screwdriver. Refer to figure 2-3A. Be
sure to save the felt washers for replacing the radiator.
B) Carefully lift out the radiator, making sure not to damage the brown
heater jacket or pull on the green ground wire. Fold over the insulation
covering the wiring enclosure. Refer to figure 2-3B.
C) Use a heat gun to apply heat to the bead of glue around the enclosure
lid. When the glue softens (3 to 4 minutes), use a screwdriver to pry the
lid open and access the wiring. Refer to figure 2-3B.
D) Remove 12-3 SJO-WA cord and rewire with type THHN 12awg wire.
Be sure to replace SJO feedthru with a liquid-tight fitting.
E) To re-seal the enclosure, use the heat gun to ensure that the remaining
glue on the backshell and enclosure lid are fluid and tacky.
F) Hold the lid down firmly and use a glue gun with 3M Jet-Melt clear
hot melt adhesive part #3792-TC to form a bead around the enclosure lid.
Keep pressure on the lid until the glue dries (4 to 5 minutes). A heat gun
blowing cool air on the glue bead will help speed drying time.
G) Fold the insulation back down over the wiring enclosure and return
the radiator to the backshell.
H) Secure the radiator to the standoffs by replacing the felt washers and
firmly pushing down the new shaft retainer rings.
8-2-4
PES3-1275
Figure 2-3. Gain Access to Internal Wiring for Special Case Installation
8-2-5
STEP 3. Inspect the anti-icing system heating elements fastened to the backshell inner surface and
inspect the feedhorn heater. If all is in order, attach the backshell to the rear of the reflector.
Orient the backshell so that the control box portion of the backshell is at the lower left portion
of the reflector as viewed from the rear. For the early 1.0M anti-icing systems, attach the
backshell to the reflector with self-tapping screws. Later systems use clips (Raychem part
number 353593). For installation of self-tapping screws: When reflector and backshell are
completely assembled, match drill 8 (eight) holes as indicated in figure 2-4. Use the drill bit
included in the anti-icing package as well as the 1/4-20UNC-3/4"L self-tapping screws.
STEP 4. Locate the four special self-tapping 27/64-13 x 2.38" screws supplied with the anti-icing
installation kit. These screws can be identified by their special double threads (high and low
threads) and their length. They are longer than the similar 1.38" long screws provided for
antennas without anti-icing. The Raychem part number for the special HiLo bolts is 984625.
The length of these bolts is 2 7/8 inches (including the head).
STEP 5. Refer to figure 2-6. Attach the reflector support assembly to the previously joined
reflector/anti-icing backshell. Orient the reflector support assembly so that its forked end is
nearest the bottom of the reflector. Using the special screws from step 4, carefully start the
special screws so that they are straight.
STEP 6. Refer to detail A of figure 1-6 on page 7-1-11. Use bolts, washers, and nuts (items 10 thru
13) to attach the radio support (item 1) to the reflector support assembly. Note that because
the anti-icing backshell is present the bolts pass through the slot in the radio support near the
end rather than near the center as shown.
STEP 7. Complete the antenna assembly according to chapter 7, section 1 starting with step 3. Skip
steps 9 thru 12 because they have already been accomplished. After the RF Unit is installed
(step 16), attach the feedhorn heater to the rectangular feedhorn by using the screws to clamp
the two halves of the heater to the feedhorn. Use the ty-wraps included in the anti-icing
system to attach the feedhorn heater cable to the feed rod.
STEP 8. Check that the anti-icing control switch on the rear of the backshell is in the center (OFF)
position. For the typical installation of figure 2-1A, locate the GFI receptacle or GFI circuit
breaker. Test the receptacle GFI function by pressing the button marked "T." The "R" or
reset button should pop out and the outlet will go dead. Press the "R" button to lock it in and
restore power to the receptacle. Plug the anti-icing system power cord into the GFI
receptacle. Neatly coil and ty-wrap any excess power cord. For the special case installation
of figure 2-1B, apply electrical power to the anti-icing circuit at the main service panel
(circuit breaker panel).
STEP 9. Test the anti-icing system. First feel the warmth of the reflector front surface and the
rectangular feedhorn near the heater. Then, hold the spring loaded anti-icing control switch
in the left (BYPASS) position. The heaters on neon indicator should glow. Continue to hold
the switch in the left (BYPASS) position until you can feel the reflector surface and the
feedhorn become warmer within approximately 15 minutes in a 60°F environment. In 60°F
temperatures the surface temperature will only change about 5°.
STEP 10. Place the anti-icing control switch in the right (AUTO) position. Failure to position the
switch to AUTO may cause a loss of satellite communications during cold weather. Write
the antenna aiming values on the rear of the anti-icing backshell. (NOTE: The "auto"
function can be checked by surrounding the bulb in a 0°C ice bath. This can be difficult. The
capillary/bulb assembly must never be removed from the bracket because of potential damage
to the bulb and cable. An alternative to the ice bath is aerosol CO2, or equivalent, sprayed on
the bulb.)
8-2-6
PES3-1276

8-2-7
Figure 2-4. Attaching Anti-Icing Backshell to Reflector (Using Self-tapping Screws)

PES3-1265
Figure 2-5. Wiring Diagram - 1.0M Antenna Anti-Icing System
8-2-8
PES3-1266
Figure 2-6. Attaching Reflecting Support to Anti-Icing Backshell/Reflector
8-2-9
HEATERS ON NEON
INDICATOR
. .
TO
FEEDHORN
HEATER
. .
THERMOSTATIC TEMPERATURE SENSOR

BULB
TO SITE POWER
AUTO = HEATERS ON WHEN

TEMPERATURE IS NEAR OR
BELOW FREEZING
AUTO
BYPASS
(return spring position) OFF = HEATERS OFF
OFF
PES3-1267 BYPASS = HEATERS ON,

CONTROLLER BYPASSED
Figure 2-7. Control Switch for 1.0M Anti-Icing System
8-2-10
6-28-95
6-28-95
SECTION 3 - ANTI-ICING FOR 1.2M
Section 3
ANTI-ICING FOR 1.2M
3.1 RAYCHEM, REFERENCE - VSAT INFO BULLETIN 055

Refer to VSAT Information bulletin number 055 for interim information about installing the RayChem
full backshell 1.2 M anti-icing system.
3.2 PRODELIN, REFERENCE - FSB 1146

Refer to PES Field Service Bulletin number 1146 for information about installing the Prodelin 1.2 M
antenna with integral full backshell anti-icing system.
8-3-1
6-28-95
Section 4
RAYCHEM 1.8M AND 2.44M
HALF BACKSHELL ANTI-ICING SYSTEM
4.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides information on both the RayChem 1.8M and the 2.44M softheat radiant anti-icing
systems that can be added onto Prodelin antennas of the respective size. Review all applicable paragraphs
of this section prior to the actual installation of the system to become familiar with the assembly
requirements. This section applies only to Raychem half backshell anti-icing systems. It does not apply
to full backshell anti-icing systems previously used by HNS, nor to half backshell integral anti-icing
supplied by Prodelin.
WARNING
Failure to observe the warnings in this procedure may result in electrical
shock or electrocution.
Danger of electrical shock hazard; do not energize the anti-icing system

until it is securely fastened to the reflector back surface.
The black anti-icing heater panels are not suitable for handling while
energized. Danger of shock or burn exists.
Installation of this anti-icing system requires the connection of 120 Vac

at the antenna site. Follow all local codes and practices for safe handling
of 120 Vac.
Before installation, inspect the anti-icing system heating elements

fastened to the shell inner surface. If any damage to a heater element is
observed, do not use the anti-icing system; substitute another similar
system in its place. Damage to a heater element may constitute a risk of
electrical shock or fire and may cause the anti-icing system to not
operate.
If the circuit breaker powering the anti-icing system repeatedly resets

("trips"), do not continue to attempt to apply power. Instead, locate and
repair or replace the short circuit or faulty equipment.
NOTE
Although the illustrations in this section show the installation of the
anti-icing system on a different radio and somewhat different antenna
configurations than the PES model X000 series uses, for all practical
purposes, anti-icing system installation is identical.
8-4-1
4.2 DESCRIPTION
The Raychem anti-icing system radiates heat to the reflector rear surface from the lower half backshell.
Table 4-1 summarizes the anti-icing power requirements and corresponding circuit breaker and wire
gauge sizes for 120 Vac. Table 4-2 lists the major components of the Raychem anti-icing systems for
both the offset fed and quick repoint antennas.
As shown in figures 4-1, 4-2, and 4-3, self-regulating electric heaters within the lower half backshell and
center module (2.44M) radiate heat throughout the enclosed insulated backshell and against the reflector
rear surface, as well as to the heater on the feedhorn. The anti-icing system is rated to melt the equivalent
of 0.16-inch of water per hour at ambient conditions to 10°F with a 15-mph wind.
A self-regulating temperature sensor within the sensor head activates the system when the ambient
temperature falls below a fixed set point of 38°F (4°C) in the presence of moisture, and deactivates the
system when the ambient temperature falls below 10°F (-12°C). This temperature range ensures that the
heater system is operational when snow, sleet, or ice forms at approximately 32°F (0°C).
Power source connections provided by the customer are shown in figure 4-4 for the 1.8M antenna and
figure 4-5 for the 2.44M antenna. The RayChem 1.8 M anti-ice system now supplied may differ from
figure 4-4 in that a power cord with plug is supplied that may plugged into a Ground Fault Interrupter
(GFI) receptacle located within 25 feet of the antenna (20A or larger circuit).
In order to meet safety requirements and comply with the National Electric Code, the electric heaters of
the 2.44 M anti-icing system must be on a circuit with no other appliances attached. Separate power
wiring must be provided for the 2.44 M anti-icing system. This separate power wiring is not included
with the PES as delivered. Depending upon the HNS installation specification, it may be the
responsibility of the INSTALLER to provide (or contract for the provision of) the power wiring to the
anti-icing system in accordance with any governing electrical codes and the guidelines given below.
Use a licensed electrician to provide the electrical connection to the anti-icing system in compliance with
local codes and ordinances. Generally, conduit should be provided from the power source. It is
recommended that liquidtight flexible conduit be used for the final portion of conduit attached to the
heater controller box. Liquidtight flexible conduit provides a range of motion required when the antenna
is pointed or repointed (see figures 4-4 and 4-5).
WARNING
Make certain that the ac power to the anti-icing system is turned off or
disconnected at the distribution panel before working on the cable and
connections. The ac voltage on the power cable could be lethal. Tag the
distribution panel so that no one applies power while you are working on
the cable.
8-4-2
SECTION 4 - RAYCHEM 1.8M AND 2.44M
Table 4-1. Summary of Prodelin/Raychem Anti-Icing Systems Power Requirements
General Purpose Circuit Breaker

Antenna Type - Size Power Requirements
(Anti-Icing System) Watts (Nominal) Capacity Qty AWG
Prodelin 1.8M 1200 20 amps 1 12
(Raychem half backshell
with feedhorn heater)
Prodelin 2.44M 2400 30 amps 1 10
(Raychem half backshell
with feedhorn heater)
Table 4-2. Major Components of Prodelin/Raychem Anti-Icing Systems
1.8M 2.44M
Description Part Number Description Part Number
Complete 1.8M RAD-P18H-1-S-53V Complete 2.44M RAD-P24H-1-S-53V
Anti-Icing System Anti-Icing System
Solid State SOFTHTR-18-S Heater System SOFTHTR-24-CM-W
Controller (center module
w/ heater elements)
Feedhorn Heater SOFTHTR-RAD-18- (Quick Repoint and
Assembly FH53-PC Offset Fed)
(Prodelin Feedhorn)
Center Module
Feedhorn Heater SOFTHTR-RAD-18- (w/o heater element)
Assembly FH53-VC Quick Repoint: SOFTHTR-24-CM-
(Vertex Feedhorn) W/O
Offset Fed: SOFTHTR-24-
RETRO-CM
Solid State SOFTHTR-24-S

Controller
Feedhorn Heater SOFTHTR-RAD-24-

Assembly FH53-PC
(Prodelin Feedhorn)
Feedhorn Heater SOFTHTR-RAD-24-

Assembly FH53-VC
(Vertex Feedhorn)
*NOTE: The Moisture Sensor alone is Environmental Technologies part number 14795.
8-4-3
8-4-4

PES2-763
Figure 4-1. 1.8M Prodelin/Raychem Anti-Icing System Components

PES2-638
Figure 4-2. 2.44M Prodelin/Raychem Anti-Icing System Components (Quick Repoint)
PES2-639
Figure 4-3. 2.44M Prodelin/Raychem Anti-Icing System Components

(Offset Fed Non-Quick Repoint)
8-4-5
8-4-6

PES2-584
Figure 4-4. Power Source Requirements for the 1.8M Prodelin

Anti-Icing System (Offset Fed)
Figure 4-5. Prodelin 2.44M Anti-Icing System Power Source Connections
PES2-651
8-4-7
4.3 TOOLS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION

Table 4-3 lists the tools required for installation of the Prodelin 1.8M and 2.44M anti-icing systems.
Table 4-3. Tools and Supplies Required to Install the Prodelin Anti-Icing System
Item Qty Description
Tools
1 1 Crimping Tool
2 1 Wire Cutter
3 1 Wooden Block (1" x 8" x 6")
4 1 6 ft Step Ladder
5 1 Flat Screwdriver (6" long, 1/4" wide blade)
6 1 6 ft Tape Measure
7 1 Threaded Rod, 3/8" x 12" long or 3/8-16 x 10" bolts and nuts
8 1 Electric Drill
9 1 set Alignment Rods for Prodelin 1.8M
10 1 PES Standard Tool Kit
Supplies
1 As req. Liquid Tight Conduit, 1/2" diameter
8-4-8
4.4 INSTALLING RAYCHEM SOFTHEAT RADIANT ANTI-ICING SYSTEM ON PRODELIN

1.8M ANTENNA
This section contains instructions for installation of the 1.8M radiant anti-icing system. Included are
instructions on preparing the reflector, as well as attaching the heater system backshell, the sensor head,
and the feedhorn heater. Connecting power to the site and the system is described. Refer to section 4.7
on page 8-4-37 for a system test checkout procedure to ensure that installation is complete and correct.
The 1.8M half backshell anti-icing system may be installed at the time of PES site installation or may be
retrofitted on existing PES sites. The 1.8M half backshell anti-icing system may be installed on either the
Prodelin 1.8M quick repoint antenna or the earlier Prodelin 1.8M non-quick repoint antenna.
a. Preparing the Reflector

STEP 1. Make arrangements with the site operator or manager to remove the antenna system from
active service.
STEP 2. Write down any antenna position data marked on the reflector rear surface, if the heater
system backshell will block this information from view.
STEP 3. On the upper reflector mounting arm, remove the 3/8 x 5-inch long retention bolts, one on
each end of the arm; retain the nuts, washers, and bolts (see figure 4-6).
STEP 4. Install two 3/8-inch x 10-inch long threaded reflector support rods through the reflector and
frame from the rear (the same holes from which the two 3/8-inch x 5-inch bolts were
removed). Using hex nuts, secure the support rods in place at the rear of the frame (figure
4-7). Install hex nuts on the extended portion of the support rods protruding through the
reflector.
STEP 5. On the upper reflector mounting arm, remove the remaining retention bolts, washers, and
nuts. On the lower reflector mounting arm, remove the retention bolts, washers, and nuts.
STEP 6. Move the reflector forward on the support rods toward the radio (RF Unit, ODU, or RF Head)
(figure 4-7). Extend the reflector as far forward as possible, then brace the reflector in place
using a wooden block.
8-4-9
PES2-640
Figure 4-6. Removing Retention Bolts from 1.8M Reflector
8-4-10
PES2-641
Figure 4-7. Installing Threaded Support Rods in Reflector
8-4-11
b. Attaching the Reflector Heater System Backshell
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Use care while handling the heater system shell to avoid damage to the
controller unit and junction box. Make provisions to support these
components while moving the system shell. As a recommendation,
loosely attach the moisture sensor to the feedhorn support arm as shown
in figure 4-8.
PES2-767
Figure 4-8. Attachment of Moisture Sensor Head During Backshell Installation
8-4-12
STEP 1. Hold the reflector away from the frame and pass the heater system backshell between the
frame and the reflector. Position heater system so that the backshell outer seating groove
rests against the reflector rim surface. The top edge of the heater system should just fit over
and against the horizontal radial ribs of the reflector (figure 4-7). The backshell should be
positioned so there is no interference with the alignment holes on the outer rim of the
reflector.
STEP 2. Slide the reflector and heater assembly back onto the frame along the reflector support rods.
Re-install the lower retention bolts, washers, and nuts and loosely tighten.
STEP 3. Remove the reflector support rods from the top mounting location. Insert an aluminum
spacer between the reflector and the frame. Re-install the upper retention bolts, washers, and
nuts and loosely tighten. After the reflector and heater system backshell are properly
positioned, tighten the lower and upper retention bolts to 20 ft-lbs. Install the three clips
(edge fasteners) at the outer edge of the antenna in the 3:00, near 6:00, and 9:00 position,
with the flat edge of the clip (edge fastener) on the antenna reflector face. (See figure 4-9.)
STEP 4. Use an indelible marker to record antenna position data on the exposed surface of the heater
system backshell. Record site latitude, site longitude, azimuth, elevation, and polarization to
both the primary and backup satellite. To minimize system downtime, return the earth station
to service at this point. Realign the feedhorn and verify the alignment and peak performance
of the earth station with regard to satellite reception.
PES2-642
Figure 4-9. Attaching Heater System Backshell to Rear of Reflector
8-4-13
c. Attaching the Sensor Head

STEP 1. Using the provided clamp assembly, fasten the sensor head to the feedhorn support arm
which extends in front of the antenna reflector in the position shown in figures 4-4 and 4-10.
When properly attached, the sensor head will be mounted so that the small circular element
on the upper surface will retain moisture.
STEP 2. At the junction box located on the rear of the heater system backshell, loosen the four
junction box cover retaining screws and remove the cover.
NOTE
Junction box and sensor head are all one assembly (refer to table 4-2).
d. Attaching the Feedhorn Heater

STEP 1. Select the appropriate feedhorn heater strap according to the type of feedhorn in use at the
site (3-inch diameter Vertex feedhorn or 5 1/4-inch diameter Prodelin feedhorn).
NOTE
All PES Type 2 sites have the Prodelin 5 1/4-inch diameter feedhorn
only.
STEP 2. Place the feedhorn heater over the leading edge of the feedhorn as shown in figure 4-11.
Tighten the adjustable clamp with a 7/16-inch wrench until the heater cannot be rotated freely
on the horn. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN the clamp. The power cord should be in the 6:00
position.
STEP 3. Feed the power cord down the inside of the radio support arm and out the lower edge near the
bottom of the reflector. Secure the cord to the sensor assembly conduit with ty-wraps.
STEP 4. Connect a ground wire (installer supplied) from the feedhorn heater clamp adjustment screw
(figure 4-11) to the canister ground set screw (figure 4-12). Use terminal lugs on both ends.
Allow adequate slack for changes in azimuth and elevation.
STEP 5. For PES Type 1 sites, fasten the unused feedhorn heater strap to the conduit as shown in
figure 4-8. This unused feedhorn heater is thus available if the RF Head is changed to a unit
with the different feedhorn.
e. Connecting the Feedhorn Heater Wiring

STEP 1. Strip approximately eight inches of the black outer jacket from the end of the feedhorn heater
SJO cord (figure 4-11). Feed the loose wire end into the feedhorn heater port on the heater
system controller. Tighten the fitting on the heater system controller feedhorn port to seize
and seal the feedhorn heater SJO cord jacket.
STEP 2. Crimp the provided #14 AWG fork connectors onto the stripped ends of the SJO cord wires.
Attach the black and white feedhorn heater lead wires to the terminal strip where indicated on
the wiring diagram, figure 4-13.
8-4-14
Figure 4-10. Sensor Head Orientation on Support Arm
PES2-643
8-4-15
PES2-764
Figure 4-11. Installing Feedhorn Heater
8-4-16
PES2-916
Figure 4-12. Attaching Feedhorn Heater Clamp Ground Wire

to Canister Ground Set Screw
8-4-17
8-4-18

PES2-644
Figure 4-13. Prodelin/Raychem Anti-Icing System Wiring Diagram for 1.8M Antenna
f. Connecting Power to the Raychem Anti-Icing System

STEP 1. Fasten 0.5-inch diameter liquidtight flexible conduit (not supplied) to the heater system
controller power connection port, using standard fittings for liquidtight conduit.
WARNING
To avoid danger of electrocution do not connect the power lines to the
site power panel until all wiring is complete in the heater system
controller box (step 3, below). If the power lines are already attached to
the site power panel, turn off and tag the circuit breaker.
STEP 2. Pull two #12 AWG stranded copper power service wires, type THWN or THHN, from the
site anti-icing power junction box into the heater system controller box, for phase and neutral
connections (one each) (figure 4-14). Crimp the #10-12 AWG fork connectors onto the site
service wires.
STEP 3. Pull one #12 AWG stranded copper ground wire from the anti-icing junction box into the
heater system controller box. Attach a #10-12 AWG fork connector to the ground wire and
secure the fork to one of the system controller box backplane attachment screws.
STEP 4. Attach the site service wires to the terminal strip where indicated on the wiring diagram,
figure 4-13. Close the junction box cover and tighten the four screws.
STEP 5. Place the heater system external switch (located under the sensor head) in the "OFF" position.
STEP 6. Connect site wiring at the main service panel in compliance with local codes and practices.
Select and install a 20-amp circuit breaker.
g. Testing the Raychem Anti-Icing System
Refer to section 4.7 for the operational checkout procedure for the 1.8M anti-icing system.
8-4-19
8-4-20

PES2-581
Figure 4-14. Schematic Diagram for Prodelin 1.8M Half Backshell

Anti-Icing Electrical Heating System
4.5 INSTALLING RAYCHEM SOFTHEAT RADIANT ANTI-ICING SYSTEM ON PRODELIN

2.44M ANTENNA
This section contains instructions for installation of the 2.44M radiant anti-icing system. Included are
instructions on preparing the reflector, attaching the heater system backshell, mounting the sensor head,
and installing the feedhorn heater. Connecting electrical power to both the site and the system is
described. Refer to section 4.7. A system test checkout procedure is provided to ensure that installation is
complete and correct.
The 2.44M half backshell radiant anti-icing system is applicable to either the Prodelin offset-fed 2.44M
antenna or to the newer Prodelin quick repoint 2.44M antenna. Figure 4-15 identifies these two antenna
types. The installation procedures which follow differ somewhat for these two antennas.
PES-762
Figure 4-15. Prodelin 2.44M Antenna Types
8-4-21
a. Drilling Holes in Reflector Heater System Lower/Center Shells

STEP 1. Make arrangements with the site operator or manager to remove the antenna system from
active service. Write down any antenna position data marked on the rear of the reflector if
the heater system will block this information from view.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Use care while handling the heater system lower shell to avoid damage to
the sensor head and conduit. Make provisions to support these
components while moving the system shell. As a recommendation,
loosely tape the moisture sensor to the heater system lower backshell
until it is attached to the feedhorn support arm (see figure 4-8).
NOTE
The earlier (offset-fed) version of the center module shell for the 2.44M
anti-icing system is shown in figure 4-16. The later and current (quick
repoint) version is shown in figure 4-17. Note that the offset-fed version
is reversed 180 degrees and requires additional holes for drainage on the
center module shell, but is otherwise identical to the quick repoint
version.
STEP 2. Place the heater system lower backshell on the back of the reflector, so that there is no
interference with the alignment holes in the antenna outer rim, and the backshell outer seating
groove and weather seal rests against the reflector rim surface. (See figure 4-17.)
STEP 3. With the lower backshell serving as a template, mark, then using the provided #2 drill bit,
drill ten pilot holes for #14 screws into the reflector rib spokes as shown in figure 4-17. The
holes may be drilled either with the lower backshell in place or removed.
STEP 4. Place the heater system center module shell (with the heater element) flush against the main
circular rib molded into the reflector back, with the lower edge of the shell positioned and
resting against the top edge (Quick Repoint Antenna) of the horizontal mounting angle iron at
the rear of the reflector (see figure 4-17, 4-18).
NOTE
For the offset - fed antenna (figure 4-16), a notch, shown in figure 4-19
must be cut in the lower right-hand corner of the module shell prior to
installation. The shell (with the heater element) is then mounted in the
lower portion of the central reflector region, and covers the horizontal
mounting angle iron (see figure 4-20).
First mark the center module flat edge location on the main circular rib. Then mark, and
using the provided #2 drill bit, drill the three pilot holes for #14 screws.
8-4-22
Figure 4-16. Raychem 2.44M Anti-Icing System Installation (Offset-Fed Version)
PES2-646
8-4-23
8-4-24

PES2-645
Figure 4-17. Raychem 2.44M Anti-Icing System Installation (Quick Repoint Version)
PES-681
Figure 4-18. Installing the Quick Repoint Center Module Shell (with Heater Element)
8-4-25
STEP 5. Place the smaller center module insulated shell (without the heater element) against the larger
center module (with the heater element) so that the straight edge of the smaller module aligns
with the straight edge of the larger module (figure 4-20A for the quick repoint version; figure
4-20B for the offset-fed version). Note for the offset-fed version, the smaller center module
must be special ordered separately (part number: SOFTHTR-24-RETRO-CM). Use a center
punch to mark the three hole locations on the main circular rib.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Do not overtighten the screws in steps 6 and 7. Plastic backshell can be
damaged if excessive pressure is applied.
STEP 6. Attach the heater system lower backshell to the reflector with the ten #14-1.75 stainless steel
screws and washers, tightening only enough to seat the weather seal.
STEP 7. Secure the two center modules to the main circular rib with the seven #14-1.75 screws and
washers, tightening only enough to ensure a good fit.
STEP 8. At approximately the 3:30, 6:30, and 8:30 o’clock positions around the outer rim of the lower
backshell, install (snap) the three metal clips in place. (See figure 4-21.) Drill the reflector
face at the locations of the holes in the clips, using the drill bit provided. Install the #8-1.25
stainless steel screws through the metal clips and into the reflector face to retain the clips.
STEP 9. Use an indelible marker to record antenna position data on the exposed surface of the heater
system lower backshell. Record site latitude, site longitude, azimuth, elevation, and
polarization to both the primary and backup satellite.
PES-682
Figure 4-19. Installing the Center Module Shell (with Heater Element)
(Offset-Fed Non-Quick Repoint)
8-4-26
PES-765
Figure 4-20. Installing the Smaller Center Module Shell (Without Heater Element)
8-4-27
PES2-647
Figure 4-21. Location of Retaining Clips

(Typical - Offset-Fed and Quick Repoint Versions)
8-4-28
b. Attaching the Sensor Head to the Radio Support Arm
Remove the U-bolt, nuts, washers, and retaining plate from the accessories bag. Mount the sensor head
and bracket assembly on the radio support arm approximately one-third the distance away from the
reflector toward the radio. Re-orient the sensor head so that the small sensor cup is vertically oriented.
Tighten the nuts on the sensor head bracket assembly. (See figure 4-22.)
c. Attaching the Feedhorn Heater

STEP 1. Slip the feedhorn heater and adjustable clamp assembly over the leading edge of the feedhorn
as shown in figure 4-11. Use a 7/16-inch wrench to tighten the adjustable clamp until the
heater will not rotate freely on the feedhorn. When fully tightened, the power cord (SJO)
should be near the 6:00 position.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
In step 1, do not overtighten the clamp on the heater. Overtightening
will tend to crush the heater wire.
STEP 2. Feed the power cord (SJO) along the lower edge of the feedhorn support arm and secure with
ty-wraps (figure 4-23).
STEP 3. Connect a ground wire (installer supplied) from the feedhorn heater clamp adjustment screw
(figure 4-11) to the canister ground set screw (similar to figure 4-12). Use terminal lugs on
both ends. Allow adequate slack for changes in azimuth and elevation.
STEP 4. At the upper junction box located on the heater system lower backshell (figure 4-17), remove
the four cover screws and remove the cover (figure 4-24).
STEP 5. Strip approximately eight inches from the end of the black outer jacket of the SJO cord.
Insert the exposed insulated wire through the feedhorn heater port on the heater system
controller (see figure 4-25). Tighten the fitting on the controller port to seize and seal the
feedhorn heater SJO cord.
STEP 6. Use wire nuts to connect the feedhorn heater and the center module in parallel with the lower
module. Refer to figures 4-25 and 4-26. Use one wire nut to connect the black wire from the
feedhorn heater to the red wire from the center module and the red wire from lower junction
box. Use another wire nut to connect the white wire from the feedhorn heater to the white
wire from center module and the white wire from the lower junction box.
d. Connecting the Center Module to Site Power
WARNING
Do not connect the power lines to the site power panel until all wiring is
connected and complete in the heater system controller box. The
possibility of electrocution exists until all internal connections are made.
8-4-29
PES2-683
Figure 4-22. Installing Moisture Sensor on Radio Support Arm
8-4-30
PES2-648
Figure 4-23. Securing Heater Cord to Support Arm
8-4-31
HEATER
UPPER WIRE FROM SYSTEM
JUNCTION CENTER MODULE CENTER MODULE
BOX HEATER ELEMENT SHELL
FEEDHORN
HEATER
(SJO) CORD
MAIN CIRCULAR
RIB
LOWER
JUNCTION
BOX
HOLD DOWN COVER

SCREW (4 Places)
PES2-649
Figure 4-24. Removing Junction Box Holddown Screws
8-4-32
Figure 4-25. Junction Box/Controller Internal Wiring
PES2-650
8-4-33
8-4-34

PES2-753
Figure 4-26. Schematic Diagram for Prodelin 2.44M Half Backshell Anti-Icing Electrical Heating System
STEP 1. Inside the controller upper junction box, use the screw terminal to connect the green ground
wire from the center module to the green ground wire from the lower junction box.
STEP 2. Using 0.5-inch liquidtight flexible conduit, connect the conduit to the junction box power
connection port (at the bottom of the lower junction box) using standard fittings for
liquidtight conduit.
STEP 3. Pull two #10 AWG stranded copper power service wires, type THWN or THHN, from the
site power distribution panel into the heater system junction box for phase and neutral
connections (one each). Crimp #10-12 AWG fork connectors onto the site service wires.
STEP 4. Pull one #10 AWG stranded copper ground wire from the panel into the heater system
controller box. Attach a #10-12 AWG fork connector to the ground wire and secure the fork
to one of the system controller box backplane attachment screws (see figure 4-25).
STEP 5. Connect the site service wires to the terminal strip where indicated on the junction
box/controller wiring diagram (figure 4-25). Close the cover on the junction box and tighten
the four screws.
STEP 6. Place the heater system sensor head external switch in the "OFF" position.
STEP 7. Connect site wiring at the main service panel in compliance with local codes and practices.
Select and install a 30-amp circuit breaker.
e. Testing the 2.44M Raychem Anti-Icing System
Refer to section 4.7 for the operational checkout procedure for the 2.44M anti-icing system.
4.6 GENERAL OPERATION

The anti-icing system consists of a self-regulating heater assembly attached to the back and lower half of
the main reflector of the antenna system and the feedhorn assembly. The component heaters, their means
of attachment, and their control equipment constitute a complete system which is field retrofittable with
common tools. The system prevents snow or ice accumulation on the heated critical surfaces under most
environmental conditions to such an extent that effective communications by the earth station are not
impaired. The system is capable of automatic ON/OFF operation with a manual override, using a
temperature/moisture sensing system. The anti-icing system is electrical, and is designed to limit initial
turn-on surge currents, eliminating the need for extra heavy duty or Slow Blow type circuit breakers.
Instead, the system accommodates a 30-amp (or smaller) normal circuit breaker.
4.6.1 DETAILED OPERATION

The Prodelin 1.8M and 2.44M antennas use the Raychem Soft Heat Anti-icing System to prevent snow
and ice buildup. The Soft Heat system operates electrically, radiating heat through a heater element
contained within the heater system backshell covering the center and bottom half of the antenna reflector.
8-4-35
The anti-icing heater comes on (activates) when the moisture sensor detects the presence of water and the
temperature sensor detects a temperature below 38° Fahrenheit (4° centigrade). (Only about five drops of
water are required to short out the grid and activate the sensor.) This ensures that the heater will be on
and operating when snow, sleet, or ice begins to form around 32°F (0°C). The vellox coating used on the
reflector also helps reduce buildup.
The heater remains on and operational for approximately one hour after the absence of water in the sensor
or the temperature rises above 38°F (4°C).
When the temperature drops below 10°F (-12°C) in the presence of moisture, the heating system turns off.
This prevents the heater from remaining on at very low temperatures and turning snow to slush. The high
water content of moist snow, slush, or melting ice is the major cause of RF signal losses.
Figures 4-4, 4-2, and 4-3 are views of the anti-icing system when fully installed. Figure 4-10 shows
sensor head orientation.
Table 4-4. Operational Switches/Controls

Component Description
Switch, 3-way OFF/AUTO/BYPASS switch located on moisture sensor head on
radio support arm.
OFF - Anti-icing system does not heat antenna.
AUTO (center position) - Anti-icing system heats antenna when the

temperature is between +10°F and +38°F and when precipitation has
been detected within the past hour (approximately).
BYPASS - Anti-icing system heats antenna regardless of temperature

or the presence/absence of precipitation. Used for testing.
Switch, Junction Box Turns on or off anti-icing system at the antenna for installation and
(on-site, within maintenance purposes.*
six feet of antenna)
Switch, Main Junction The anti-icing system is installed on one circuit breaker at the service
Box (main power) entrance panel with no other appliances/circuits attached. Turns on
and off the anti-icing system for maintenance and installation
purposes.*
* Repeated resetting of the circuit breaker or junction box switch could permanently damage the
anti-icing system. The circuit breaker or junction box switch should not be used as a routine
system switch. Use the 3-way switch on the sensor head as the last switch to turn the system on
and as the first switch to turn the system off.
NOTE
For normal operation, leave the 3-way switch in the AUTO position and
the circuit breaker and junction box switches in the on position. All three
switches must be correctly positioned for the anti-icing system to heat
the antenna.
8-4-36
4.7 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT PROCEDURE

Perform the following steps after completing the installation procedures in sections 4.4 and 4.5, or if for
any reason the anti-icing system has been shut down and is to be restarted.
STEP 1. Ensure that the circuit breaker at the main service panel is in the "OFF" position.
STEP 2. Place the heater system OFF/AUTO/BYPASS switch (located under the sensor head) in the
"BYPASS" or "on" position. Allow a 30-second delay to follow before attempting to turn to
"off," then back to "BYPASS" again.
STEP 3. Place the circuit breakers in the "on" position at the main service panel junction box and the
junction box located within six feet of the antenna.
STEP 4. After several minutes, feel the exterior front surface of the reflector for the presence of heat
on all heated surfaces. Also, feel for the presence of heat at the heated center module (2.44M
only) and at the feedhorn heater.
STEP 5. If heat cannot be sensed, place the circuit breaker in the "off" position at the main service
panel. Consult section 4.8, Troubleshooting.
STEP 6. If the circuit breaker is not the problem and there are no faults detected in the system, contact
Raychem Corporation at (415) 361-2288. Do not attempt to service any other part of the
system.
STEP 7. IMPORTANT. If the system now functions properly, place the OFF/AUTO/ BYPASS
switch in the "AUTO" position. Place the circuit breaker at the main service panel in
the "on" position.
NOTE
This system is equipped with a solid state sensor which, when set in the
"AUTO" mode, operates the anti-icing system only between the
temperatures of +10°F (-12°C) and +38°F (+4°C) and when precipitation
is present. The sensor logic circuitry is designed to leave the anti-icing
system energized for a period of approximately one hour after
precipitation is no longer sensed. The thermal contactor in the junction
box has a delay of approximately 30-90 seconds before closing after the
sensor enables system operation. Gradual warming of the heated
surfaces occurs over a period of 20 minutes.
8-4-37
4.8 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.8.1 TROUBLESHOOTING THE RAYCHEM 1.8M AND 2.44M ANTENNA ANTI-ICING

SYSTEM
The troubleshooting table in this section is designed to enable you to quickly determine the cause of
common troubles which can occur in the anti-icing system.
Figure 4-27 is a schematic diagram of the anti-icing system.
NOTE
Electrical power supplied to the anti-icing system is separate from the
power supplied to operate the PES. The PES system does not have to be
shut down during the troubleshooting procedures in this section.
8-4-38
Table 4-5. Troubleshooting Raychem Anti-Icing Systems

Trouble Probable Cause Remedy
System will not operate. 1. System switch not in 1. Test system by placing
(Antenna surfaces do not "AUTO" or "BYPASS" switch in "BYPASS" position
warm.) position. and verifying system operates,
then switch to "AUTO."
2. Incorrect wiring. (See 2. Check wiring connections

figures 4-27, 4-14, and 4-26.) for loose or open connections;
repair as necessary.
3. AC power not available. 3. Check for presence of ac

power at terminal block across
black and white wires.
Moisture/temperature sensor not 1. Check for physical blockage 1. Clean with soap and water.
operating properly. (Check by of sensor head moisture cup.
repeating installation checkout
procedure.) (System does not 2. Sensor assembly miswired. 2. Verify proper wiring per
turn on during precipitation with wiring diagram.
cold weather.)
3. Sensor assembly defective. 3. Replace solid state controller
with new unit by removing
sensor head and bracket and
installing new controller.
Feedhorn heater not effective. 1. Heater not positioned on 1. Center as necessary. Tighten
(Check by repeating installation feedhorn rim properly. clamp.
checkout procedure.) (Feedhorn
heater clamp does not warm.) 2. Feedhorn heater not wired 2. Check for loose or open
properly. connections; repair as
necessary.
Feedhorn heater always on. Feedhorn heater miswired. Check for connection to proper
(Warm on warm days.) terminals in junction box.
Contactor does not click on Defective sensor head or Replace sensor assembly as
when placed in "BYPASS" contactor. directed above.
mode. (Note: 30- to 90-second
delay is normal.)
Contactor energizes when Heater lead wire broken. Measure resistance of heaters:
powered, but heater(s) does not (after cooling 24 hours)
warm.
Feedhorn heater:
1 to 5 ohms
Reflector heater:
1 to 4 ohms
(Replace if higher or lower)
Feedhorn clamp too large. Wrong clamp. Obtain proper clamp (see
replacement parts list).
8-4-39
BLK BLK BLK RED

PHASE BLK D C
BLK B CRI SWITCHED
CRI BLK
(FDHN)
MOISTURE & RED A
LINE TEMPERATURE
SENSOR LOAD
WHT WHT
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
WHT WHT
PES-684
Figure 4-27. Anti-Icing System Circuit Diagram
8-4-40
4.9 REPLACEMENT PARTS

Table 4-6 lists replacement part numbers for components of the Raychem anti-icing system.
Table 4-6. Raychem Replacement Part Numbers

Description 1.8M 2.44M
Feedhorn Heater SOFTHTR-RAD-18-FH53-PC SOFTHTR-RAD-24-FH53-PC
(with Prodelin clamp)
Feedhorn Heater SOFTHTR-RAD-18-FH53-VC SOFTHTR-RAD-24-FH53-VC
(with Vertex clamp)
Vertex Clamp SOFTHTR-VC SOFTHTR-VC
Prodelin Clamp SOFTHTR-PC SOFTHTR-PC
Solid State Controller SOFTHTR-18-S SOFTHTR-24-S
Center Module (with N/A SOFTHTR-24-CM-W/
heater element)
Center Module (without N/A SOFTHTR-24-CM-W/O
heater element, quick
repoint mount)
Center Module (without N/A SOFTHTR-24-RETRO-CM
heater element, special
for older offset-fed systems)
Thermostatic Controller SOFTHTR-18-T N/A
Accessory Kit SOFTHTR-18KIT-S SOFTHTR-24KIT-S
(misc. loose parts,
solid state sensor)
Accessory Kit SOFTHTR-18KIT-T SOFTHTR-24KIT-T
(misc. loose parts,
thermostatic contr.)
8-4-41
3-5-91
CHAPTER 9
PES MODEL X000 SERIES CABLING
This chapter describes the cabling and cable types used in a Personal Earth Station (PES) Model X000
series remote site as well as the procedures used when interconnecting the equipment. This chapter is
divided into the following sections:
Section 1. Cabling Overview
Section 2. IFL Cabling (Standard Run)
Section 3. Extended IFL Cable Run
Section 4. RF Unit Earth Ground
Section 5. Connecting User Devices
Section 6. Cabling Video Equipment
Section 7. HNS Prefabricated Cables and Related Items
Section 1
CABLING OVERVIEW
An example PES remote installation as configured for PES Model 8000 is shown in figure 1-1, with the
corresponding reference notes given in figure 1-2. These diagrams show the cable types used, the part
numbers (either HNS’s or the manufacturer’s), and the standard lengths of the cable (if applicable).
As shown in figure 1-1, an example PES Model 8000’s top four slots allow for one to four remote port
cards which provide interfaces to user data and voice equipment. The required cabling will depend on the
card types selected for these four slots. Figure 1-1 shows example cabling for a Model 8000 containing
one data port card (DP) and one multiport card (MP). The multiport card may have one or two junction
boxes with four port connectors each.
Figure 1-3 shows example voice port configurations. A voice port is a two-card set. The two cards are
immediately adjacent and are joined by a ribbon cable. A voice port may be for a single telephone (VDP
card and VP TEL card) or for a private branch exchange (VDP card and VP PBX card).
Figure 1-4 is an example of connections for a dual voice grade modem card (DMC). The card can
provide a direct wire connection ("direct modem-to-modem") to data devices, a PBX, or public phone
system. In addition, the maximum distance between the device and the PES indoor unit is increased if the
DMC card is used instead of an RS-232 system.
Figure 1-5 show an example PES model 6000 with a two-port adapter attached the the multiport cart.
Table 1-1 also lists the notes (triangles) from figures 1-1 through 1-4, provides parts numbers, and
references the appropriate pages in this manual.
1.1 RF UNIT TO PES INDOOR UNIT (IFL) CABLING

The PES Model X000 series interfacility link (IFL) cable (referenced as note 1 in figure 1-1) connects the
RF Unit to the PES Indoor Unit. The IFL cable type must be correctly selected according to: 1) the cable
run length, and 2) the use of either plenum or non-plenum cable. Refer to table 2-1 on page 9-2-1 in
chapter 9, section 2 for standard run lengths.
9-1-1
9-1-2

PES INDOOR UNIT
MODEL 8000
4
TOP SLOT
SLOT 1
4
10
SLOT 2
DATA USER PORTS

PORT DCE/FEMALE
11 BACK UP
(DP) TELEPHONE
DIAG PORTS MODEM
4 DTE/MALE (optional-
Customer Supplied)
MULTIPORT
CARD (MP)
USER PORTS
8
4
8
LNC
SLOT 4
2
1 INTERMEDIATE PORT 5 PORT 1

POINTING FREQUENCY CONFIG
MODULE PORT 6 PORT 2
(IFM) 5
TEST PORT 7 PORT 3
IF I FL
PORT 8 PORT 4
3 VIDEO
RF UNIT
BOTTOM SLOT
G
TO RF UNIT
120 VAC
6
OPTIONAL CUSTOMER
SATELLITE SUPPLIED
VIDEO RECEIVER TELEVISION,
DECODER VCR, OR
REFLECTOR MONITOR
OPTIONAL ANTI-ICING
SYSTEM
SWITCH,
CIRCUIT BREAKER,
or RECEPTACLE 7 120 VAC
SITE POWER
CIRCUIT BREAKER
FOR OPTIONAL
ANTI-ICING
SYSTEM
PES3-1166
Figure 1-1. Example PES Model 8000 Cabling

COAX INTERFACILITY LINK FOR CONNECTION TO OPTIONAL 10 DATA PORT CARD USER PORTS: 25 PIN 'D' TYPE
1 (IFL). CABLE TYPE DEPENDS 5 SATELLITE RECEIVER CONNECTOR FOR RS-232 USER INTERFACE.
ON LENGTH, SEE TEXT. F TYPE SHIELDED CABLE REQUIRED.
MAX LENGTH 900 FT. COMM SCOPE
PART NUMBER 0136 OR 5730
(200 ft, with in-line amplifier)
11 STRAIGHT THRU CABLE - 25 PIN 'D' TO 25 SOCKET
A SPECIAL RS-232 PORT USED DATA PORT CARDS ARE RS-232 (DTE) PORTS. CAN
2 DURING SITE COMMISSIONING. COAXIAL CABLE RG59 75 OHM TYPE
6 BE USED TO PROVIDE CONNECTION TO A BACK-
DURING COMMISSIONING, CONNECTOR. SEE TEXT. UP LAND LINE MODEM.
A CABLE
IS CONNECTED TO A SITE COM-
MISSIONING COMPUTER.
7 120VAC
POWER WIRING FOR OPTIONAL
3 EARTH GROUND ANTI-ICING SYSTEM
4 TOP FOUR SLOTS MAY HAVE: 8 MULTIPORT CABLE WITH

DATA PORT CARDS (DP) JUNCTION BOX
2 WIRE VOICE PORT (VDP and VP TEL) HNS P/N 3000140-0001
4 WIRE VOICE PORT (VDP and VP PBX)
MULTIPORT CARDS (MP)
OR,
DUAL VOICE GRADE MODEM (DMC)
CABLING DEPENDS ON CARDS
SELECTED, SEE EXAMPLES.
Figure 1-2. Reference Notes for Example Model 8000 Cabling
CHAPTER 9 - PES MODEL X000 SERIES CABLING

SECTION 1 - CABLING OVERVIEW
PES3-1167
9-1-3
OR
MODEL 8000 MODEL 8000
12
VOICE DATA PORT VOICE DATA PORT
(VDP) (VDP)
DIAG PORTS DIAG PORT
DTE/MALE SLOT 1 DTE/MALE SLOT 1
14 13
2 WIRE VOICE 4 WIRE VOICE
VP TEL (VP PBX)
MODULAR TO
USER PORT
JACK - RJ11 PBX
9 PIN
SLOT 2 15 SLOT 2
REMOVE RIBBON
DIU/O POWER CABLE
BEFORE P/N 70329-1
CONNECTING OR
DISCONNECTING SLOT 3 SLOT 3
TELEPHONE
MULTIPORT CARD MULTIPORT CARD
(MP) (MP)
USER PORTS USER PORTS
SLOT 4 SLOT 4
INTERMEDIATE INTERMEDIATE
FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
MODULE (IFM) MODULE (IFM)
TEST CONFIG TEST CONFIG
VIDEO VIDEO
I FL I FL
BOTTOM SLOT BOTTOM SLOT
TO RF UNIT TO RF UNIT
120 VAC 120 VAC
POINTING
IF RF
UNIT
G
VOICE DATA PORT (VDP) CARD DIAG PORTS POINTING

12 ARE
RS-232 (DTE) PORTS USED TO PROVIDE IF RF
A CONNECTION FOR FACTORY USE UNIT
13 G
VP PBX CARDS-
9 PIN "D" TYPE CONNECTOR
FOR TELEPHONE PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
(PBX) SEE APPENDIX F OF PES TYPE 1 MANUAL
14
VP TEL CARDS - MODULAR
TELEPHONE JACK - RJ11
FOR CONNECTING UP TO THREE DTMF PHONES
15
RIBBON CABLE
PS31168.FH3
Figure 1-3. Example Voice Port Connections
9-1-4
MODEL 8000
TOP SLOT
SLOT 1
CUSTOMER
SUPPLIED INQUIRY
DEVICE
(SUCH AS TI-707) SLOT 2
18 DUAL VOICE GRADE

SWITCHES SET
MODEM CARD (DMC)
INTERNAL ............................ FOR "DIRECT MODEM-TO-MODEM"
MODEM RJ-11
RJ-10 PIN MODEM 1

17 ............................
SWITCHES SET
PBX OR FOR "DIAL UP"
CUSTOMER
PUBLIC PHONE RJ-11
DEVICE
SYSTEM MODEM 2
RJ-10 PIN
............................
MULTIPORT CARD (MP)

8
16 USER PORTS
8
SLOT 4
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY
PORT 5 PORT 1
MODULE (IFM)
PORT 6 PORT 2 TEST CONFIG POINTING
PORT 7 PORT 3 VIDEO IF

IFL RF
BOTTOM SLOT
PORT 8 PORT 4 UNIT
G
TO RF UNIT
120 VAC
MULTIPORT CABLE WITH JUNCTION BOX TELEPHONE LINE OR EXTENSION

8 17 DMC SWITCHES SET FOR
HNS P/N 3000140-0001
DIAL-UP
CABLE DB25 TO RJ10
16 18 4 CONDUCTOR CABLE
HNS P/N 1011279-0001
DMC SWITCHES SET FOR
PES3-1169 DIRECT MODEM-TO-MODEM
Figure 1-4. Example Cabling for PES Model 8000 Containing a Multiport Card (MP)
and Dual Voice Grade Modem Card (DMC)
MODEL 6000
9 MULTIPORT CARD (MP)

USER PORTS
PORT 2
DB-25
DB-25
PORT 1
ENHANCED USER
INTERFACE
MODULE (IFM)
TEST CONFIG POINTING
VIDEO IF
IFL RF
BOTTOM SLOT
UNIT
G
TO RF UNIT
120 VAC
TWO PORT ADAPTER, ENHANCED USER INTERFACE

9
HNS P/N
PES3-1268
Figure 1-5. PES Model 6000 Can Include Enhanced User Interface Attached to MP
9-1-5
Table 1-1. PES Model X000 Series Cabling Part Numbers and References
Figs. 1-1
thru 1-4
Notes
(Triangle) Part Number Mfg. Comment/Reference
1 1010807-0001 HNS IFL Standard Run
thru Description -
1010812-0001 Procedure - chapter 9, section 2.2 on page 9-2-2
1 LDF4-50A Andrew IFL Extended Run
or Description -
LDF4RN-50A Procedure - chapter 9, section 3 on page 9-3-1
2 -- -- IFM CONFIG Port Cable - see chapter 10,
figure 1-1 on page 10-1-3
3 -- -- RF Unit Earth Ground
Description - chapter 9, section 4 on page 9-4-1
Procedure - chapter 9, section 4.2 on page 9-4-1
5 0136 or 5730 Comm IFM to Video IRD Equipment Cable
Scope Description -
Procedure -
6 Coaxial Cable RG59 75 ohm
Procedure -
7 120 Vac Power Wiring for Optional Anti-Icing
Procedure - chapter 8
8 3000140-0001 HNS Multiport Card Cable with Junction Box
Description -
9 -- HNS Enhanced User Interface
Description -
10 Data Port Card User Port
Description -
11 -- -- Data Port Card Diag Port
Description - chapter 9, section 1.2.1 on page 9-1-7
Procedure - figure 5-2
12 -- -- Voice Data Port Card (VDP) Diag Port for factory use
13 -- -- VP PBX Card 9-pin "D" Type Connector
for telephone private branch exchange.
See appendix F of PES Type 1 Manual, TM 70040B-1
14 VP TEL Card Modular Telephone Jack RJ11
for connecting telephones
Procedure -
15 70329-1 HNS VDP to VP TEL or VP PBX Ribbon Cable - figure 1-3
16 1011279-0001 HNS Cable MP Junction Box DB-25 to DMC RJ-10 Pin
9-1-6
For IFL lengths exceeding the standard run, the heavier, thicker, Andrews cable may be used. Use of this
extended run cable should be evaluated on a case by case basis for special situations and applications. Do
not use the extended run cable unless you have received prior approval from your HNS installation
coordinator. Alternate antenna locations may be considered before extended run cable is approved.
For procedures, see

• Standard Run - chapter 9, section 2, page 9-2-1
• Extended Run - chapter 9, section 3, page 9-3-1
NOTE
Exercise care when determining cable types based on cable run length.
Although the same cable types are used for both PES Model X000 series
and PES Type 2, the run lengths are different. The run lengths given
here apply to PES Model X000 series only. Refer to Field Service
Bulletin 1062A for PES Type 2 only IFL run lengths.
1.2 PES INDOOR UNIT USER PORTS AND DEVICES CABLING OVERVIEW
The PES Indoor Unit cables used in the PES installation are the various types of RS-232 cables used to
interface the User and Diagnostic ports. The RS-232, RS-422, and other cables are connected from the
PES Indoor Unit to user equipment such as modems, terminals, computers, telephones, and Private
Automated Branch Exchanges (PBX).
NOTE
To meet FCC radiation emission requirements, user device cables must
be shielded with copper braid and must have shielded connector
backshells. The backshell must be secured to the PES Indoor Unit with
retaining screws.
1.2.1 IFM CONFIG PORT CABLE

The Intermediate Frequency Module (IFM) card has a port that is used during site commissioning. A
special cable is connected from the IFM CONFIG port to the site commissioning computer which runs
the DIU Configuration Editor program) and is referenced in figure 1-1 as note 2.
NOTE
The procedure for connecting and using the site commissioning
computer is described in chapter 10, figure 1-1 of this manual.
1.2.2 DATA PORT CARD CABLES

Each Data Port card has a USER port and a DIAG port. The USER port is an RS-232 (DCE with female
connector) port that can be used to support standard RS-232 equipment such as terminals and computers.
This cable is shown in figure 1-1 as note 10.
9-1-7
The DIAG port is an RS-232 (DTE with a male connector) port that can be used to connect a "backup"
phone modem (to be used in the event of impaired satellite transmission). This cable is referenced in
figure 1-1 as note 11. When wiring this cable, be sure to include any modem control signals that may be
planned for future use. The use of the DIAG port is explained in chapter 13, section 2.5, page 13-2-3, and
in figure 1-3 on page 10-1-10.
1.2.3 VOICE PORT CARD CABLES

A Voice Port card configuration consists of two cards (installed in adjacent indoor unit slots). The upper
card (VDP) has an RS-232 DIAG port (DTE with male connector) that can be used to run factory
diagnostics with a separate computer. This cable is referenced in figure 1-3 as note 12.
The lower card will have either a modular telephone jack type RJ11 connector (2-wire) for a standard
modularized telephone connection to a DTMF telephone instrument, or a 9-pin connector (4-wire plus E
and M signaling) to connect to a PBX. These cables are referenced in figure 1-3 as notes 13 and 14.
Refer to appendix F of the PES Type 1 Manual, TM 70040B-1, for information on connecting a voice
port to a PBX.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Always remove power from the PES Indoor Unit before connecting or
disconnecting a telephone to or from PES Indoor Unit. Failure to
remove power could cause a fuse on the voice card (VP TEL) to open.
9-1-8
6-28-95
6-28-95
SECTION 2 - IFL CABLING (STANDARD RUN)
Section 2
IFL CABLING (STANDARD RUN)

The PES Model X000 series interfacility link (IFL) cable (referenced as note 1 in figure 1-1, chapter 9,
section 1) is a two-conductor coaxial cable with male N-type connectors on both ends and connects the
RF Unit to the PES Indoor Unit. Through multiplexing, the IFL carries DC power and a 10 MHz
reference signal to the RF Unit and handles modulated uplink and downlink, monitoring and control
signals. The IFL cable type must be correctly selected according to: 1) PES product, 2) the cable run
length, and 3) the use of either plenum or non-plenum cable. Refer to table 2-1. The correct cable type
must be used for the PES to operate properly. Note that the cable run lengths for Ku-Band X000 series
other than PES 5000 have changed since the last version of this section.
Use only HNS-approved cable for the IFL standard run. Do not substitute. Plenum cable provides better
fire resistance than non-plenum but is more expensive. Certain applications, local codes, or customer
contracts may require plenum-type cable.
Table 2-1. PES Model X000 Series IFL Cable Types - Run Lengths - Standard Run
IFL HNS Part Cable Outside
Cable Run Number for Diameter
PES Product Length Cable Type (inches - max) Cable Type
Non-Plenum
Ku-Band X000 Series 30 ft to 145 ft 1010810-0001 .220 Type I
other than PES 5000 110 ft to 345 ft 1010812-0001 .412 Type III
Ku-Band PES 5000 30 to 180 ft 1010810-0001 .220 Type I
105 to 860 ft 1010812-0001 .412 Type III
C-Band X000 Series 30 ft to 120 ft 1010810-0001 .220 Type I
115 ft to 325 ft 1010812-0001 .412 Type III
Plenum
Ku-Band X000 Series 30 ft to 145 ft 1010807-0001 .202 Type I
other than PES 5000 80 ft to 315 ft 1010809-0001 .362 Type III
Ku-Band PES 5000 25 to 180 ft 1010807-0001 .202 Type I
75 to 635 ft 1010809-0001 .362 Type III
C-Band X000 Series 30 ft to 120 ft 1010807-0001 .202 Type I
85 ft to 295 ft 1010809-0001 .362 Type III
NOTE
Exercise care when determining cable types based on cable run length. Although the
same cable types are used for both PES Model X000 series and PES Type 2, the run
lengths are different. The run lengths given here apply to PES Model X000 series only.
Refer to Field Service Bulletin 1062A for PES Type 2 only IFL run lengths.
The type 1 cable listed above is coaxial cable, not twisted pair cable used with PES type
1. Do not confuse cable type with PES type.
9-2-1
2.2 RF UNIT TO PES INDOOR UNIT (IFL) CABLING (STANDARD RUN)

To install the IFL cabling, perform the following steps:
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
TURN OFF AC POWER TO PES EQUIPMENT BEFORE
DISCONNECTING OR CONNECTING CABLES OR INSTALLING
OR REMOVING CIRCUIT CARDS.
Specifically, always place the PES Indoor Unit power switch in the
OFF position before disconnecting or connecting the IFL cable from
the PES Indoor Unit or the RF Unit. If your indoor unit does not have
a power switch, remove its power cord from the wall socket. Failure to
remove power may damage the IFM, the IFL connectors, and cause
illegal RF transmissions.
When returning an IFM for repair, make a note on the equipment failure
report if you know or suspect that the IFL cable has been disconnected
while power was applied.
As a general policy, always remove power from PES equipment before

disconnecting cables, connecting cables, installing circuit cards, or
removing circuit cards.
2.2.1 RF UNIT TO PES INDOOR UNIT CABLING PROCEDURES (STANDARD RUN)

STEP 1. Make sure that power is removed from the PES Indoor Unit. Tag the unit to make sure that
no one applies power while you are working on the cable.
STEP 2. Measure the cable run length from the RF Unit to the PES Indoor Unit, allowing for lengths
around obstacles, and sufficient length for antenna repointing and moving the PES Indoor
Unit for access. A rope supplied with distance markers may be placed along the proposed
cable route to quickly determine the necessary length. If the run length is less than 30 feet,
cut the cable at 30 feet and coil the excess at an inconspicuous indoor location.
NOTE
The cable will be marked every two feet with footing markers. Cable
runs start from 0 and go to 9998 feet, repeating. Your 1000-foot cable
spool may begin at 9800 feet and end at 800 feet. When recording the
actual cable run length, be sure to use the formulas in figure 2-1.
9-2-2
PES2-731
Figure 2-1. Using Cable Marks to Determine Run Length
9-2-3
STEP 3. Route the selected IFL cable outside and along the feed support tube as shown in figure 2-2.
This figure shows the Prodelin 1.2M Quick Repoint Antenna. For other antennas, route the
cable in a similar fashion. At the RF Unit, allow a loop to avoid strain on the connector.
Near the bottom of the antenna allow adequate slack for changes in elevation and azimuth.
Dress the cable neatly and secure it properly with TYWRAPS.
STEP 4. Refer to table 2-2 to select the proper N-type connector kit and crimp tool for the IFL cable
type that you are using. The HCT-231 crimp tool, figure 2-4, can be used on all four IFL
cables presently in use. Figure 2-5 shows the older alternate type crimp tools.
STEP 5. Prepare the RF Unit end of the cable and attach the proper connector type according to table
2-2 and the IFL connector attachment procedure located in chapter 9, section 2.2.2. Do not
connect the IFL cable to the RF Unit at the present time.
NOTE
The bend radius of IFL cable 1010809 and 1010812 is six inches or
greater. The bend radius of IFL cable 1010807 and 1010810 is four
inches or greater. Bending more sharply may permanently damage
the cable by creating an impedance discontinuity which may not be
corrected by straightening the cable.
STEP 6. Route the IFL cable to the indoor equipment using the established site requirements. If the
cable run length is less than the minimum for the cable type, cut the cable to the minimum
specified in table 2-2 and coil the excess.
STEP 7. Prepare the PES Indoor Unit end of the cable and attach the proper connector type according
to table 2-2 and the connector attachment procedure, located in chapter 9, section 2.2.2.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
It is important that the procedure be carefully followed. If incorrect or
poor connections are made, the PES may not operate, may not operate
properly, or may sustain premature failure.
STEP 8. Use an ohmmeter to measure the resistance from the center conductor to the outer conductor
of the N connector just attached to the PES Indoor Unit end of the cable (the RF Unit end of
the cable should not be connected to the RF Unit at this time). Hold the meter probes so that
your hands are not touching the conductors. The resistance should be maximum (DVM) or
infinity (analog meter). If the resistance is a low value, locate and correct the problem:
faulty connector or cable.
STEP 9. Perform a continuity test by attaching an adapter (or clip leads) to the connector on the indoor
end of the cable to connect (short) the center conductor to the outer conductor. CAUTION:
Do not short the IFL cable at the RF Unit end. At the connector on the RF Unit end (outdoor)
of the cable, measure the resistance between the center outer conductors. The resistance
should be less than 10 ohms.
If the cable measures a much higher resistance or "open" with the indoor end shorted, find
and correct the problem.
9-2-4
PES3-1171
Figure 2-2. Prodelin 1.2M Quick Repoint Antenna Cable Routing

(Standard Run IFL Type)
9-2-5
PES3-1283
Figure 2-3. Spin Stripping Tool for IFL Cable
9-2-6
PES2-730
Figure 2-4. Crimp Tool HCT-231 Has Four Crimp Sizes
9-2-7
PES2-491
Figure 2-5. Alternate Type Crimp Tools for IFL Cable
9-2-8
Table 2-2. Connectors, Crimp Tools, and Stripping Tools for PES Model X000 Series IFL Cable
IFL Ben
Cable Run Gilbert Hughes
Length HNS Part Part No. Gilbert Crimp Excelta
(X000 other Number for Connector Part No. Tool Stripping Tool
than PES 5000) Cable Type Kit Connector Part No. (Tube Color)
Non-Plenum
30 to 145 ft 1010810-0001 NS 5875-31 NS 5848-31 HCT-231 CX 1-39-1 (Black)
(new) (new) or
or or (HCT-211
NS 5875-9 NS 5848-9 and
HCT-659)
110 to 345 ft 1010812-0001 NS 5875-29 NS 5848-29 HCT-231 CX 1-78-1 (Gold)
(new) (new) or
or or HCT-480
NS 5875-11 NS 5848-11
Plenum
30 to 145 ft 1010807-0001 NS 5875-31 NS 5848-31 HCT-231 CX 1-36-1 (Red)
(new) (new) or
or or (HCT-211
NS 5875-9 NS 5848-9 and
HCT-659)
80 to 315 ft 1010809-0001 NS 5875-27 NS 5848-27 HCT-231 CX 1-78-2 (Blue)
(new) (new) or
or or HCT-480
NS 5875-13 NS 5848-13
NOTE
HNS will soon be supplying the newer style connector kits (NS 5875-31,
-29, -27) and connectors (NS 5848-31, -29, -27). For some time you
may receive either the newer style, figure 2-7A, or the older style, figure
2-7B. The newer style requires different procedural steps (follow the A
steps) than the older style (follow the B steps).
9-2-9
STEP 10. Remove the adapter (or clip leads) from the PES Indoor Unit end of the cable. Route the
cable so that it does not bend within 3 inches of the connector and attach the cable connector
to the IFL connector on the PES Indoor Unit IFM. If the space behind the PES Indoor Unit is
too confined to allow 3 inches before the cable must be bent, or if the cable must be run
through a confined wall opening, an HNS approved type "N" elbow should be used. Do not
install an elbow on the outdoor unit; they are not approved for outdoor installation because of
the susceptibility to moisture/corrosion intrusion.
STEP 11. Make sure that the PES indoor unit is plugged into a properly wired ac receptacle and that the
PES indoor unit power is off. Leave the "NO POWER" tag previously attached to the PES
indoor unit in place. Return to the RF unit end of the cable and measure the ac voltage and
resistance between the IFL shield and the antenna earth ground as described in chapter 9,
section 4, page 9-4-1.
STEP 12. Attach the RF Unit end of the IFL cable to the RF Unit. Route the cable so that it does not
bend within 3 inches of the connector. Do not apply weatherproofing protection to the
connection until the PES has been site commissioned and properly ranged (unless you will
not be able to reach the connection after ranging is completed).
STEP 13. After site commissioning, antenna aiming and ranging have been successfully completed,
apply weatherproofing protection to the RF Unit end of the cable by wrapping the connector
with a sealing material such as "Vaporwrap" as shown in figure 2-6.
—
100
90
80
C
LN
70
60
IF
50
+
100
40
G
G IN
0
90
NT
3
I VAPOR WRAP
PO 20 TAPE
80
10
70
60 0
50
ING ER ble
10
40 20
30 RN W g ca
WA IN POtin
M A nec
ve con
mo dis
Refore
be
SES
GH
M
TE S
SY
HU
K
OR l
TW
NE na n
rso tio
Pe Sta
rth
Ea
PES3-1172
Figure 2-6. Applying Vaporwrap Tape
9-2-10
2.2.2 IFL CONNECTOR ATTACHMENT PROCEDURE (STANDARD RUN)

Refer to figure 2-7 for connector terminology used in the procedure.
NOTE: If you have the newer style connector, do not remove the plastic guide bullet until instructed to
do so. For the newer style connector, if the center contact is installed in the connector body without the
plastic guide bullet, the center contact will damage the dielectric material inside the connector body.
TORLON
WASHER JAM NUT
CENTER PLASTIC
CONTACT GUIDE SUPPORT
FERRULE BULLET SHOULDER CONNECTOR
BODY
A) NEWER STYLE CONNECTOR
JAM NUT
CENTER
CONTACT SUPPORT
FERRULE
SHOULDER CONNECTOR
BODY
B) OLDER STYLE CONNECTOR
JACKET
BRAID (Strand Copper-Sometimes)
CENTER CONDUCTOR
(Solid or Strand Copper)
7/32"
X (5.5mm)
X=3/4" (Shortest cable length) DIELECTRIC

or (Foam or Teflon - Sometimes
5/8" (Medium or long cable length) Foil Covered)
C) CABLE TERMINOLOGY
S5-XX-PESX-1582
Figure 2-7. Connector Terminology
9-2-11
Perform the following steps:

STEP 1. Select the appropriate "spin stripper" tool for the cable type you are using. Refer to table 2-2
and figure 2-3. After pulling the cable, carefully inspect each end for damage from handling
and, if damaged, trim off the damaged portions prior to stripping. Cut the cable as cleanly
and squarely as possible. Open the stripper jaws to allow the cable end to enter the cable
barrel fully. Hold the cable firmly in the tool and tight against cable stop. Simultaneously
squeeze the stripper jaws and rotate the tool around the cable two or three times until the
outer jacket and dielectric are completely cut. Rotate the tool in the direction indicated in
figure 2-3.
BUTT CUT CABLE END
CABLE STOP
CABLE BARREL
STRIPPER JAWS
PES2-705
STEP 2. Place the ferrule and heat shrink tubing on the cable. Using the proper spin stripping tool
for the selected cable type (figure 2-3 on page 9-2-6), carefully remove the cable jacket and
dielectric (A) to expose center conductor (B). Slit the jacket using a razor, knife or similar
tool. Cut down to the braid but DO NOT CUT INTO BRAID.
HEAT SHRINK
TUBING
HEAT SHRINK FERRULE

TUBING
SLIT
JACKET
S5-XX-PES3-706
9-2-12
STEP 3. Using a razor knife or wire cutters, carefully lift the jacket and peel away as shown below to
expose braid.
PES2-707
STEP 4. Check braid for nicked or broken strands, the dielectric end for a flush cut, and the center
conductor for nicks and straightness.
PES2-708
NOTE
The braid must be intact. Visible braid damage, dielectric damage, or
conductor nicks require cutting the cable again and restripping. A bent
center conductor can be carefully straightened with smooth-jaw needle
nose pliers prior to crimping the center contact.
9-2-13
STEP 5. Prepare the cable braid to accept the connector body according to the size of cable in
question. For the smaller diameter cables (types 1010807 and 1010810) flare the braid
slightly. For the larger diameter cables (types 1010809 and 1010812), comb out the braid and
trim the strands. (Refer to tables 2-1 and 2-2 on pages 9-2-1 and 9-2-9) If the cable has foil,
leave the foil attached to the dielectric.
For the smaller diameter cables, (types 1010807 and 1010810), insert a pick or scribe
between dielectric and braid and rotate outward to achieve flaring.
FLAIR BRAID
ON SMALLER
DIAMETER CABLE
PES3-709
For the larger diameter cables (types 1010809 and 1010812), insert a pick or scribe into the
braid and comb the strands carefully. Always start from the cut end and work backward
toward the jacket (comb the entire perimeter as working backward).
COMB ACTION
DIRECTION OF TRAVEL
PES2-710
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Comb braid all the way back to the jacket. If a portion of the braid is
uncombed at the jacket end, "stretching" will cause the jacket and center
pin to become loose. Although the cable will pass continuity (step 10)
when unattached, incomplete combing may cause the center pin to be
pushed back into the cable and not make complete connection with the
female "N" side of the connector.
Cut approximately 1/4 inch of the excess braid so that the completed connector will have all
braids under the ferrule.
9-2-14
STEP 6. Select the appropriate crimp tool and crimp location on the tool for crimping the center
contact. Refer to table 2-2, figures 2-4 and 2-5, and the list below.
Crimp
Cable Size Crimp Tool or Crimp Tool
1010810-0001 0.100 HCT-231 - smallest crimp HCT-211 - smallest

1010812-0001 0.108 HCT-231 - next to smallest HCT-480 - smallest
1010807-0001 0.100 HCT-231 - smallest HCT-211 - smallest
1010809-0001 0.108 HCT-231 - next to smallest HCT-480 - smallest
STEP 6A. If you have the newer style connector, push the torlon washer, center contact, and guide
bullet over the cable center conductor. For the larger size cables, the torlon washer is a flat
disk. Crimp the center contact flush with the torlon washer. Exercise care not to crimp the
torlon washer itself. Proceed immediately to step 7 on page 9-2-16.
CENTER
CONTACT
CRIMP
GUIDE
NEWER STYLE
BULLET
CONNECTOR
SMALLER
DIAMETER
CABLE CRIMP FLUSH
TORLON WITH TORLON
WASHER WASHER
CRIMP
CENTER
NEWER STYLE
CONTACT
CONNECTOR
LARGER GUIDE
DIAMETER BULLET
CABLE CRIMP FLUSH
WITH
TORLON
S5-XX-PES3-1577 WASHER
TORLON
WASHER
NOTE: If the center contact is bent after crimping, cut the cable, restrip and begin the
connector attachment procedure again.
STEP 6B. If you have the older style connector, push the center contact over the cable center conductor.
Crimp the center contact flush with the cable dielectric.
CRIMP
OLDER STYLE CENTER

CONNECTOR CONTACT
LARGER
DIAMETER
CABLE CRIMP FLUSH
WITH CABLE
DIELECTRIC
PES3-711
If the center contact is bent after crimping, cut the cable, restrip and begin the connector
attachment procedure again. (NOTE: The IFL Procedures videotape incorrectly states that a
bent center contact may be straightened with pliers. The results of straightening are
unsatisfactory. Cut the cable and replace the connector.)
9-2-15
STEP 7. Install connector body onto the cable end (over the foil but under the braid).
STEP 7A. If you have the newer style connector, insert the guide pin/center contact through the
connector body until the center pin snaps into place locking the center pin in the connector
body. Dress braid evenly over the support shoulder of connector body. Proceed immediately
to step 8 on page 9-2-17.
CONNECTOR BODY
FERRULE
CENTER PIN
GUIDE BULLET
GROUND SKT.
S-10-PES3-1578
STEP 7B. If you have the older style connector, insert center contact until the dielectric bottoms in
connector body. At this point the center contact will align flush to or within 1/64" from
the ground socket edge.
Dress braid evenly over support shoulder of connector body.

CONNECTOR BODY
FERRULE
CENTER PIN
GROUND SKT.
PES2-712
1/64" MAX
9-2-16
STEP 8. Dress braid evenly over support shoulder of connector body.
NOTE
If you have the larger diameter cable (types 1010809 and 1010812),
ensure braid is combed out completely from jacket to end of braid.
Slide the ferrule toward the connector body over the shoulder braid and into the recess. The
ferrule should be flush with the body.
STEP 8A. If you have the newer style connector, remove the plastic guide bullet from the center contact.
Verify the center contact aligns flush or within 1/64" from the ground socket edge.
PULL OUT
GUIDE BULLET
S-10-PES3-1579
STEP 8B. If you have the older style connector, verify that the center contact is still flush to or within
1/64" of the ground socket edge.
STEP 9. Select the appropriate crimp tool and crimp as listed below:
Crimp
Cable Size Crimp Tool or Crimp Tool
1010810-0001 0.262 HCT-231 - next to largest HCT-659 - largest

1010812-0001 0.475 HCT-231 - largest HCT-480 - largest
1010807-0001 0.262 HCT-231 - next to largest HCT-659 - largest
1010809-0001 0.475 HCT-231 - largest HCT-480 - largest
While holding the connector assembly together snugly, position the crimp tool and securely
crimp ferrule into place.
*
RECESS
CRIMP
CAUTION
* USE CAUTION WHEN ALIGNING AND CRIMPING FERRULE.
IF THE CRIMP TOOL BODY IS NOT CLEARED SUFFICIENTLY, IT
WILL CONTACT AND DAMAGE THE CONNECTOR JAM NUT DURING CRIMPING.
PES2-714
9-2-17
NOTE
If the ferrule slips as shown below or if the center contact is mislocated
as referenced in step 7, reject the connection. Cut off the connector and
start over.
BRAID EXPOSED
.030" MAX GAP ALLOWABLE
S-10-PES3-1580
STEP 10. Position and shrink the heat-shrink tubing using a heat gun. Locate tubing such that it
encapsulates the ferrule and a portion of the connector body. Two sizes of heat shrink tubing
are used with the smallest cable types (1010810-0001 and 1010807-0001). The smallest size
is used to build up the cable diameter near the connector before using the larger size.
STEP 10A. For the newer style connector, keep the connector end of the heat shrink within the ridged
area of the connector body. Do not overheat the cable jacket and dielectric.
HEAT SHRINK TUBING
IDEAL TUBING POSITION

S-10-PES3-1581
9-2-18
STEP 10B. For the older style connector, begin the heat shrink at the connector end and work towards the
cable while pointing the connector up. This helps to flow adhesive away from the jam nut.
HEAT SHRINK TUBING
IDEAL TUBING POSITION

PES2-716
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
During heating the tubing will move and the adhesive lining will bleed.
Bleeding adhesive could encapsulate and seal the jam nut, damaging the
connector.
Do not overheat the cable jacket and dielectric.
STEP 11. Use an ohmmeter (or continuity checker) to check for continuity (a short circuit) between the
center conductor and the connector body. A low resistance value (or continuity) means that
the connector or cable is defective and must be replaced.
9-2-19
6-28-95
Section 3
IFL CABLING (EXTENDED RUN)
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
TURN OFF AC POWER TO PES EQUIPMENT BEFORE DISCONNECTING OR
CONNECTING CABLES OR INSTALLING OR REMOVING CIRCUIT CARDS.
Specifically, always place the PES Indoor Unit power switch in the OFF position
before disconnecting or connecting the IFL cable from the PES Indoor Unit or the
RF Unit. Failure to remove power may damage the IFM, the IFL connectors, and cause
illegal RF transmissions.
When returning an IFM for repair, make a note on the equipment failure report if you
know or suspect that the IFL cable has been disconnected while power was applied.
As a general policy, always remove power from PES equipment before disconnecting
cables, connecting cables, installing circuit cards, or removing circuit cards.
3.1.1 RF UNIT TO PES INDOOR UNIT CABLING PROCEDURES (EXTENDED RUN)

The HNS extended-run IFL installation instructions have been revised. Four sizes of HELIAX
extended-run cable are now available instead of just one size. As shown in figure 3-1, flexible links of
less than 10 feet of standard-run type III non-plenum cable are now required on both ends of the
semi-rigid extended-run HELIAX cable (instead of at just one end).
FLEXIBLE LINK SEMI-RIGID LINK FLEXIBLE LINK

STANDARD RUN EXTENDED RUN STANDARD RUN
TYPE III - HELIAX FOAM-DIELECTRIC CABLE TYPE III -
NON-PLENUM NON-PLENUM
PES
INDOOR
UNIT < 10' UP TO 4370' DEPENDING UPON < 10'
CABLE SIZE & APPLICATION
PES
OUTDOOR
UNIT
IFL
FEMALE "N" CONNECTOR
(CABLE SIZE ...........ANDREW P/N
MALE "N" CONNECTOR 1/2"...........................L44PN MALE "N" CONNECTOR
(GILBERT 7/8"...........................L45N (GILBERT
CONNECTOR P/N NS 5848-29, 1-1/4"........................L46PN CONNECTOR P/N NS 5848-29,
CONNECTOR KIT P/N 5875-29) 1-5/8"........................L47PN) CONNECTOR KIT P/N 5875-29)
PS31284A.FH3
Figure 3-1. Installation of Flexible Links at Both Ends of Extended-Run Cable
9-3-1
The extended run Heliax cable is available in various sizes as listed in tables 3-1 and 3-2. The larger size
Heliax cables permit longer run lengths. Note that the acceptable run lengths differ for PES 5000 (table
3-2) and for other PES X000 series products (table 3-1). Table 3-3 lists the part numbers for various size
Heliax cables and connectors. This section details the connector procedures for 1/2" Heliax connectors.
For sizes other than 1/2", refer to information provided by connector manufacturer, Andrew Corporation.
Table 3-1. IFL Cable Types, Run Lengths, and Attenuation

(PES X000 Series Other Than PES 5000)
Part Number Min. Max.
HNS Length Length TX Atten RX Atten
Cable Type (Andrew) (ft) (ft) (dB/ft) (dB/ft)
Non-Plenum - Type I 1010810-0001 30 145 0.06952 N/A
Non-Plenum - Type III 1010812-0001 110 345 0.02893 N/A
Plenum - Type I 1010807-0001 30 145 0.06897 N/A
Plenum - Type III 1010809-0001 80 315 0.03179 N/A
3/8" Heliax Non-Plenum (LDF2-50) 130 600 0.01650 0.04840
3/8" Heliax Riser-Rated (LDF2RN-50) 130 600 0.01650 0.04840
1/2" Heliax Non-Plenum 9001684-0016 200 925 0.010813 0.03223
1/2" Heliax Riser-Rated 9001684-0017 200 925 0.010813 0.03223
1/2" Heliax Plenum 9001684-0005 120 675 0.013860 0.05489
7/8" Heliax Non-Plenum (LDF5-50A) 340 1700 0.005885 0.01826
7/8" Heliax Riser-Rated 9001684-0002 340 1700 0.005885 0.01826
7/8" Heliax Plenum 9001684-0006 220 1205 0.007502 0.03069
1 1/4" Heliax Non-Plenum (LDF6-50) 460 2290 0.004367 0.01342
1 1/4" Heliax Riser-Rated 9001684-0003 460 2290 0.004367 0.01342
1 5/8" Heliax Non-Plenum (LDF7-50A)
1 5/8" Heliax Riser-Rated 9001684-0004
NOTE 1. Prior approval by HNS district installation manager is required for Heliax installation.
NOTE 2. Combined IFL runs of Heliax and non-Heliax cable are possible if attenuation limits are not
exceeded and other guidelines are met. Contact HNS district installation manager.
9-3-2
SECTION 3 - IFL CABLING (EXTENDED RUN)
Table 3-2. PES 5000 IFL Cable Run Lengths

Min. Max.
HNS Andrew TX Atten Length Length
Cable Type Part Number Part Number (dB/ft) (ft) (ft)
Non-Plenum - Type I 1010810-0001 -- .1935 30 180
Non-Plenum - Type III 1010812-0001 -- .0475 105 860
Plenum - Type I 1010807-0001 -- .2053 25 180
Plenum - Type III 1010809-0001 -- .0690 75 635
3/8" Heliax Non-Plenum -- LDF2-50 .0420 61 980
3/8" Heliax Riser-Rated -- LDF2RN-50 .0420 61 980
1/2" Heliax, Non-Plenum 9001684-0016 LDF4-50A .0282 180 1560
1/2" Heliax, Riser-Rated 9001684-0017 LDF4RN-50A .0282 180 1560
1/2" Heliax, MIL-SPEC -- 202071-1 .0282 180 1560
1/2" Heliax, Unjacketed -- FT4-50 .0472 110 930
1/2" Heliax, Plenum 9001684-0005 FT4-50T .0472 110 930
7/8" Heliax -- LDF5-50 -- -- --
7/8" Heliax, Non-Plenum -- LDF5-50A .0159 315 2770
7/8" Heliax, Riser-Rated 9001684-0002 LDRF5RN-50A .0159 315 2770
1 1/4" Heliax, Non-Plenum -- LDF6-50 .0117 430 3710
1 1/4" Heliax, Riser-Rated 9001684-0003 LDF6RN-50 .0117 430 3710
1 5/8" Heliax, Non-Plenum -- LDF7-50A .0101 500 4370
1 5/8" Heliax, Riser-Rated 9001684-0004 LDF7RN-50A .0101 500 4370
HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
Subsidiary of
PS31739.FH3
Figure 3-2. PES 5000 Indoor Unit - Extended-Run IFL Cable Lengths Differ
from other PES X000 Series Products
9-3-3
Table 3-3. Part Numbers - Heliax Cable and Connectors
HNS Andrew
Part Number Part Number Description
Heliax Cable, 3/8"
No HNS number LDF2-50 Non-plenum coax 3/8"

No HNS number LDF2RN-50 Riser-rated coax 3/8"
No HNS number L42N Connector male N for 3/8"
No HNS number L42W Connector female N for 3/8"
Heliax Cable, 1/2"
9001684-0016 LDF4-50A Non-plenum coax 1/2"

9001684-0017 LDF4RN-50A Riser-rated coax 1/2"
9001684-0005 FT4-50T Plenum coax 1/2"
9001683-0003 L44AW Connector male N for 1/2"
9001683-0001 L44PW Connector male N for 1/2" - silver plated body,
gold plated inner connector
9001683-0004 L44N Connector female N for 1/2"
9001683-0002 L44PN Connector female N for 1/2" - silver plated body,
9001683-0005 43716-7 Connector right-angle male N for 1/2"
9001683-0010 L44W Connector
Heliax Cable, 7/8"

9001684-0006 FT5-5-T Plenum coax 7/8"
9001683-0006 L45W Connector male N for 7/8"
Heliax Cable, 1 1/4"
No HNS number LDF6-50 Non-plenum coax 1 1/4"

9001684-0003 LDF6RN-50 Riser-rated coax 1 1/4"
9001683-0008 L46PW Connector male N for 1 1/4" - silver plated body,
9001683-0009 L46PN Connector female N for 1 1/4" - silver plated body,
No HNS number LDF7-50A Non-plenum coax 1 5/8"

9001684-0004 LDF7RN-50A Riser-rated coax 1 5/8"
9001683-0011 L47PN Connector female N for 1 5/8" - silver plated body,
9-3-4
The extended run cables feature a solid copper outer conductor and a foam dielectric, and have an
impedance of 50 ohms. The information that follows contains the procedures to install the extended run
1/2-inch Coaxial Cable and L44PN (Female) type N connectors.
TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED - 1/2" Heliax
Scale Spacing Gauge (supplied with connector)

Knife Solder, 63/37 RMA flux core
Pliers Garnet cloth, 240 grit or finer
Flat file Three wrenches: two 13/16", one 1"
Wire brush Solvent, comothene, vythene, or other nonflammable
cleaning fluid
Damp cloth Soldering iron, min. 150 W: a resistance-type iron is recom-
mended when soldering in low-temperature environments
Jeweler’s saw or HNS P/N 1010812-0001 (qty 4) Gilbert NS 5848-29 & NS 5875-29, bullet
fine-toothed hacksaw connector and connector kit for Type lll non-plenum IFL cable
EASIAX Cable Prep Tool
*Andrew P/N 207866
*Andrew Corporation, 10500 West 153rd Street, Orlando Park, Illinois 60462, 800-255-1479
Table 3-4. PES Model X000 Series Other Than PES 5000 IFL Cable Extended Run 1/2" Heliax
(for lengths 500 ft to 925 ft, Ku-band) (for lengths 190 ft to 925 ft, C-band)
IFL
Cable Run
Length HNS Part Cable Outside
(Other Than Number for Diameter
PES 5000) Cable Type (Inches - Max) Cable Type Description Comment
Ku-band 9001684-0017 0.640 Andrew Fire-Retardant, HNS presently

500 to 925 ft LDF4RN-50A Non-Halogenated supplying this cable
or Jacket (Riser-Rated) type for HNS U.S.
C-band extended run
190 to 925 ft installations
Ku-band 9001684-0016 0.640 Andrew Standard Jacket Less expensive.

500 to 925 ft LDF4-50A (non-plenum) Satisfactory for PES
or use where
C-band fire-retardant not
190 to 925 ft required
Ku-band 9001684-0005 0.60 Andrew Fire-Retardant,

120 to 675 ft FT4-50T High Temperature
(plenum)
Ku-band -- 0.640 Andrew MIL-SPEC version Formerly used by

500 to 925 ft 202071-1 (qualified to HNS for PES, but no
or MIL-C-28830/3) longer required
C-band
190 to 925 ft
9-3-5
To install the extended run IFL cable for PES Model X000 series, perform the following:
STEP 1. Ensure power is removed from the PES Indoor Unit. Tag the unit to make sure that power is
not accidentally applied during cable installation.
STEP 2. Measure the cable run length from the RF Unit to the PES Indoor Unit, allowing for lengths
around obstacles, and sufficient length for antenna repointing and moving the PES Indoor
Unit for access. A rope supplied with distance markers may be placed along the proposed
cable route to quickly determine the necessary length.
STEP 3. Install a flexible link of less than 10 feet of standard run type III IFL cable between the RF
Unit and the outdoor termination point of the Heliax cable as shown in figures 3-3 and 3-1.
Use Gilbert male connector and connector kits (see table 2-2 on page 9-2-9) on both ends of
the flexible link.
STEP 4. Route the selected IFL cable along the feed support tube as shown in figure 3-3. This figure
shows the Prodelin 1.8M Quick Repoint Antenna. For other antennas, route the cable in a
similar fashion. At the RF Unit, allow a loop to avoid strain on the connector, and provide
adequate slack near the bottom of the antenna for changes in elevation and azimuth. Dress
the cable neatly and secure it properly.
STEP 5. Prepare the outdoor end of the Heliax cable and attach the proper Heliax female connector
type according to the IFL connector installation procedures contained in chapter 9, section
3.1.2 on page 9-3-9 for 1/2" Heliax. Connect the Heliax female connector to the male
connector of the flexible link. Do not connect the flexible link cable to the RF Unit at this
time.
NOTE
The bend radius of the Heliax 1/2" extended run IFL cable is five (5)
inches or greater. BENDING IN A SMALLER RADIUS MAY
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE CABLE.
STEP 6. Route the extended run Heliax IFL cable to the indoor equipment using the established site
requirements. If the cable run length is less than the minimum for the RF Unit and cable
type, cut the cable to the minimum specified length and coil the excess. Do not bend the
Heliax extended-run cable more sharply than the minimum bend radius as listed in figure 3-3.
STEP 7. Prepare the PES Indoor Unit end of the Heliax cable and attach the proper female connector
type according to the IFL connector installation procedures, chapter 9, section 3.1.2 on page
9-3-9 for 1/2" Heliax. Do not connect the Heliax IFL cable to the PES Indoor Unit.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Follow connector installation procedures carefully. If incorrect or poor
connections are made, the PES may not operate, may not operate
properly, or may sustain premature failure.
STEP 8. Use an ohmmeter to measure the resistance from the center conductor to the outer conductor
of the N connector installed at the PES Indoor Unit cable end (cable is not connected to either
the PES Indoor Unit or the RF Unit). Hold the meter probes to ensure that there is no body
9-3-6
ALLOW ADEQUATE SLACK FOR

AZIMUTH/ELEVATION CHANGES
TIE-WRAPS
HELIAX MINIMUM
CABLE BEND
SIZE RADIUS, R
1/2"...........................5"
7/8".........................10"
1-1/4"......................15" FLEXIBLE LINK, STANDARD RUN,
1-5/8"......................20" TYPE III, NON-PLENUM CABLE
MALE "N" CONNECTOR
FEMALE "N" CONNECTOR
SEAL WITH VAPOR WRAP
AFTER SITE COMMISSIONING
COMPLETED
R
EXTENDED-RUN SEMI-RIGID
HELIAX CABLE
PS31839.FH3
Figure 3-3. Prodelin 1.8M Quick Repoint Antenna Cable Routing

(Extended Run IFL Cable with Standard Run Flexible Link)
9-3-7
contact with the conductors. The resistance should be maximum (DVM) or infinity (analog
meter). If the resistance is low, locate and correct the fault condition (connector or cable).
STEP 9. Perform a continuity test by attaching an adapter (or clip leads) between the connector inner
and outer conductors (short) at the PES Indoor Unit cable end. CAUTION: Do not short the
IFL cable at the RF Unit end. At the RF Unit end, measure the resistance between the center
and outer conductors. The total dc resistance (inner conductor to outer conductor) should be
approximately 1.1 ohms per 1000 feet for 1/2" Heliax (less for larger sizes). If measurement
indicates a high resistance (greater than 10 ohms) or an "open," locate and correct the fault
condition (connector or cable).
STEP 10. Connect the flexible link cable to the RF Unit. Do not apply weatherproofing protection to
the RF Unit connection until the PES has been site commissioned and successfully ranged,
unless connection is not available after completion of ranging.
STEP 11. Remove the adapter (or clip leads) from the PES Indoor Unit cable end. Route the Heliax
cable so there are no bends within three (3) inches of the connector. Install a flexible link of
less than 10 feet of standard run type III IFL cable between the PES Indoor Unit and the
indoor termination point of the Heliax cable in accordance with the instructions contained in
figure 3-1. Use Gilbert male connector and connector kits (see table 2-2 on page 9-2-9) on
both ends of the flexible link. Attach the female connector on the indoor end of the Heliax
cable to the male connector on the flexible link. Tighten connection securely. Tape
connection with black electrical tape to ensure connection will not work loose. If the
connection can be concealed in a weatherproof location inside a wall, push back thru the wall
in an inconspicuous place. Attach the flexible link cable to the IFL connector on the rear of
the PES Indoor Unit. Remove the "NO POWER" tag placed on the PES Indoor Unit earlier.
STEP 12. After site commissioning, antenna aiming and ranging have been successfully completed,
apply weatherproofing protection to the outdoor end of the Heliax cable where it joins the
outdoor flexible link and where the flexible link joins the RF Unit.
9-3-8
3.1.2 IFL CONNECTOR INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (EXTENDED RUN - 1/2" HELIAX)
3.1.2.1 Description - This section applies to N type connectors for 1/2" Heliax. For other connector
types or other sizes of Heliax, refer to the appropriate Andrew Corporation instructions. The connectors
used with the extended run IFL cable are designed for self-flaring of the outer conductor and soldering the
inner connector to the inner conductor. Cable preparation may be accomplished by either using the
EASIAX Cable Preparation tool (immediately below), or by manual means (page 9-3-11).
3.1.2.2 EASIAX Cable Preparation - The EASIAX cable preparation tool cuts the cable jacket and
outer conductor to the necessary dimensions in one operation.
REVERSIBLE, OFF-CENTER
CUTTING BLADES
CORRUGATION
GUIDE
PS2-814.FH3
9-3-9
STEP 1. Remove about 1 inch of jacketing. Position the tool so that the guide is about 1/2 inch from
the cable end.
PES2-815
STEP 2. Lightly squeeze the tool halves together and rotate the tool clockwise three or four
revolutions.
PES2816.FH3
STEP 3. Pull off the cut section of outer conductor. Slit and peel the scored section of jacketing and
proceed to step 3 of chapter 9, section 3.1.2.3, page 9-3-11.
PS2817.FH3
9-3-10
3.1.2.3 Manual Cable Preparation

STEP 1. Prepare the cable. Straighten the cable end for at least 10 inches and remove two inches of
the jacket using a knife as shown to expose the outer conductor. Deburr the sharp end of the
outer conductor.
Corrugated
Outer Jacket
Conductor
2"
PS2818.FH3 (51 mm)
STEP 2. Mark conductor and remove jacket. Scribe a cutting line with a knife on the top of the crest
of the exposed, corrugated outer conductor. Use a straight-edged piece of heavy paper
wrapped around the cable as a guide to cut an even edge around the outer jacket.
PES2-819
STEP 3. Clean conductor and add O-ring. Clean the outer conductor with solvent. Add the thick
O-ring to the second, fully exposed conductor groove from the jacket. Apply a thin coating
of silicone grease to the outer surface of the O-ring and to the gasket lead chamfer in the
clamping nut. Use the tube to spread the grease on the O-ring. Do not use your finger to
spread the grease. NOTE: Clamping nut threads must be free of grease.
PES2-820
9-3-11
STEP 4. Add clamping nut and cut cable. Push the clamping nut on the cable fully using a smooth
twisting motion, so that the spring contacts snap into the conductor groove, and the O-ring
seats properly against the inside surface of the clamping nut. If you used the EASIAX tool,
an outer conductor section has already been removed. If using manual preparation, check
that the conductor cut line is aligned with the edge of the clamping nut. For manual
preparation, tightly grip the clamping nut and carefully cut through the outer conductor with
the fine-toothed saw. The cut must be flush with the end of the clamping nut and not deep
enough to touch or damage the inner conductor. Pull the outer conductor off using pliers.
Carefully clean all foam from the inner conductor with a knife. Cut the inner conductor to
the length, X, to 7/32" (5mm), then deburr the cut end with a knife.
PES2-821
STEP 5. Separate foam from outer conductor. Insert the tip of a knife to a depth of 1/16th inch
between the foam and the outer conductor of the cable and separate them so that the outer
conductor can be flared. Move the knife around the entire circumference of the outer
conductor. Scrape away any foam clinging to the outer conductor and remove any burrs from
the inside edge. Remove copper particles from the foam with a wire brush.
PES2-822
9-3-12
STEP 6. Flare outer conductor. Thread the connector outer body onto the clamping nut and tighten the
connection with wrenches. Hold the clamping nut and turn only the outer body. The flaring
surface of the outer body will flatten the outer conductor against the clamping nut ring.
Disassemble the connection and inspect the flare to ensure good metal-to-metal contact on
final assembly.
PES2-823
STEP 7. Install inner connector and outer body. Clean the inner conductor with solvent and slide the
inner connector onto the conductor. Insert the spacing gauge to properly position the inner
connector for soldering.
Solder the inner connector in place using the solder hole provided. Cool the connection with
a damp cloth and clean the surface with garnet cloth. Make sure the connector is aligned with
the axis of the cable.
Add the large O-ring to the connector clamping nut. Apply a thin coating of silicone grease
to the outer surface of the O-ring. Keep all connector threads free of grease. Thread the
outer body onto the clamping nut and tighten the connection with wrenches. Hold the
clamping nut and turn only the outer body.
PES2-824
9-3-13
3-5-91
Section 4
RF UNIT EARTH GROUND
4.1 GENERAL
External ground connection points are provided on the RF Unit and quick repoint antenna canister, figures
4-2 and 4-1. An appropriate ground wire of #10 gauge (AWG) or larger must be provided for connection
to these ground studs at the outdoor equipment site (see figure 1-1, note 3 and figure 2-2) A suitable
origination point for this ground is a connection to the building ground, a grounded structural steel
building member, a metallic cold water pipe, or if none of the above exists, a driven ground rod.
4.2 PROCEDURE
STEP 1. Verify the IFL is connected to the PES Indoor Unit, and the indoor unit is connected to a
pre-tested ac receptacle. (A pre-tested ac receptacle is one that has a good ground and no
polarity reversals. This may be checked with a standard ac receptacle checker.)
STEP 2. With the IFL cable disconnected from the RF Unit, measure the ac voltage between the shield
of the IFL cable and the proposed ground wire (refer to figure 4-2).
STEP 3. If no ac voltage is present, change the meter to read resistance and measure the resistance
from the IFL shield (still not connected to RF Unit) to the ground wire.
STEP 4. If the resistance is 25 ohms or less, connect the ground wire to the canister assembly. If the
resistance is greater than 25 ohms, identify and eliminate the cause of high resistance or
select another building ground source.
STEP 5. Run a minimum #10 gauge wire from the canister assembly to the RF Unit terminal "G".
Refer to figures 4-2 and 4-1.
GROUNDING POINT GAUGE WIRE
Metallic cold water pipe 10 gauge or greater diameter

Grounded structural steel member 10 gauge or greater diameter
Metallic power service raceway(source side) 10 gauge or greater diameter
Service equipment enclosure(source side) 10 gauge or greater diameter
Driven ground rod 6 gauge or greater diameter
NOTE
(1) Do not ground to any branch circuit conduit or any conduit on the
load (or output) side of the service equipment enclosure (power
distribution panel). The metallic power service raceway is defined as the
input power service conduit which is on the input side of the service
equipment enclosure.
(2) Do not ground the PES antenna to an air conditioning unit. To do so

may void the PES warranty. Grounding to an air conditioner mounting
frame is not recommended because the frame may not be connected to
building steel, and may provide a ground loop condition. Ohmmeter
measurement will not detect a ground loop condition, since the IFL is
connected to ground via the third wire of the indoor unit power cord, and
9-4-1
the air conditioner metal frame is connected to ground via the air
conditioner third wire. A low resistance value will be measured even
though the metal frame is floating. The ground wire should be routed
securely to prevent a possible tripping hazard. If possible, route the
ground wire along the IFL cable to the point of entry.
(3) It should be noted that the next greater diameter gauge wire from
number 10 gauge is number 8 gauge, that is, a larger diameter wire has a
smaller gauge number.
PES3-1176
Figure 4-1. Connecting Earth Ground Wire on Prodelin Quick Repoint Antenna
9-4-2
SECTION 4 - RF UNIT EARTH GROUND
RF UNIT
100
90
80
C
LN
70
60
IF
50
+
100
40
G NG
TI
0
90
3
IN
PO 20
"N" TYPE
80
10
CONNECTOR
70
0
60
50
ING ER ble
10
40 20
30 RN W g ca
WA IN POtin
A nec
v e Mcon
mo dis
Refore
ES
TERMINAL e S
b
GH
M
TES
SY
HU
K
OR l
"G" NET
W
Pe Sta
na n
rso tio
r t h
Ea
GROUND
WIRE
IFL CABLE
VOM
PES3-1175
Figure 4-2. Verifying Ground
9-4-3
9-16-94
9-16-94
SECTION 5 - CONNECTING USER DEVICES
Section 5
CONNECTING USER DEVICES
OVERVIEW
This section has been expanded and now includes the following topics:
5.1 CONNECTING USER DEVICES - GENERAL TABLE, page 9-5-1
5.2 CONNECTING TELEPHONES TO THE VP TEL (2-WIRE) CARD, page 9-5-8
5.3 CONNECTING A PBX TO THE VP PBX USER PORT, page 9-5-9
5.4 CONNECTING USER DEVICES TO THE MULTIPORT CARD USER PORTS, page 9-5-9
5.5 CONNECTING USER DEVICES TO COMPACT PORT CARD (CPC) PORTS, page 9-5-21
5.6 CONNECTING USER DEVICES TO TURBO PORT (TP) USER PORTS, page 9-5-24
5.6.1 ETHERNET LAN PLC, page 9-5-25
5.6.2 TOKEN-RING LAN PLC, page 9-5-34
5.7 CONNECTING DEVICES TO THE DUAL VOICE GRADE MODEM CARD (DMC),
page 9-5-43
See chapter 9 section 7 for HNS standard cables. Most are intended to connect to user devices.
5.1 CONNECTING USER DEVICES - GENERAL TABLE

For connecting user devices to the various USER/DIAG ports on the rear of the PES Model X000 series
indoor unit, use table 5-1 to determine the appropriate wiring diagram or reference to be used with the
connecting device.
NOTE
To meet FCC radiation emission requirements, RS-232, RS-422 user
device cables must be shielded with copper braid and must have shielded
connector backshells. The backshell must be secured to the indoor unit
with retaining screws.
The cables to/from RS-232 user devices must have shielding, must have shielded connector backshells,
and must be secured to the indoor unit with retaining screws.
5.1.1 CONNECTING A V.35 USER DEVICE TO THE INDOOR UNIT

At this time, connecting a V.35 device to the indoor unit Data Port (DP) card requires an RS-232 to V.35
Interface Converter, such as the model IC221 by Black Box Corporation, Box 12800, Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania 15241. A straight-thru RS-232 cable is also required. Refer to figure 5-5.
The multiport card (MP) may be configured to connect directly to V.35 without the interface converter,
when the proper V.35 PLC modules are installed on the multiport card.
The cables to/from the V.35 device must have shielding and must have shielded connector backshells.
9-5-1
Table 5-1. Connecting User Devices
Indoor Unit Port Connecting Device Refer To
IFM CONFIG Port (DTE) Site Commissioning Figure 1-1, page 10-1-3
Computer
DP USER Port (DCE) Terminal (DTE) Figure 5-1, page 9-5-3
DP USER Port (DCE) Computer (DTE) Figure 5-1, page 9-5-3
DP USER Port (DCE) Modem (DCE)4 Figure 5-4, page 9-5-6
DP USER Port (DCE) Computer (DCE)1,4 Figure 5-4, page 9-5-6
DP USER Port (DCE) V.35 Device2 Figure 5-5, page 9-5-7
MP User Port (DCE)
RS-232 PLC Port A or B Terminal (DTE) Figure 5-1, page 9-5-3
RS-232 PLC Port A or B Computer (DTE) Figure 5-1, page 9-5-3
Modem Backup PLC Port A Terminal (DTE) Figure 5-1, page 9-5-3
Modem Backup PLC Port A Computer (DTE) Figure 5-1, page 9-5-3
Modem Backup PLC Port B Terminal (DTE) Figure 5-10, page 9-5-18
Modem Backup PLC Port B Computer (DTE) Figure 5-10, page 9-5-18
RS-422 PLC Port A or B Device (DTE) Figure 5-11, page 9-5-19
RS-232 PLC Port A or B Modem (DCE)4 Figure 5-7, page 9-5-14
RS-232 PLC Port A or B Computer (DCE)4 Figure 5-7, page 9-5-14
Modem Backup PLC Port A Modem (DCE)4 Figure 5-7, page 9-5-14
Modem Backup PLC Port A Computer (DCE)1,4 Figure 5-7, page 9-5-14
Modem Backup PLC Port B Modem (DCE)4 Figure 5-9, page 9-5-17
Modem Backup PLC Port B Computer (DCE)1,4 Figure 5-9, page 9-5-17
RS-422 PLC Port A or B Device (DCE)4 Figure 5-12, page 9-5-20
CPC User Ports -- Section 5.5, page 9-5-21
TP User Port
Ethernet Ethernet Device(s) Page 9-5-25
Token-Ring Token-Ring Device(s) Page 9-5-34
DMC Telephone Port
DMC Data Port (DCE) Page 9-5-43
DP or VDP DIAG Port (DTE) Modem (DCE) Figure 5-2, page 9-5-4
DP or VDP DIAG Port (DTE) Terminal (DTE) Figure 5-3, page 9-5-5
DP or VDP DIAG Port (DTE) Computer (DTE) Figure 5-3, page 9-5-5
VDPC Telephone or PBX FSB 1128
VP TEL Telephone Jack Telephone Table 5-2, page 9-5-8
VP PBX USER Port Private Branch Exchange3 Appendix F of TM 70040B-1
Notes for Table 5-1:

1. HP-3000 computers function as DCE devices.
2. Connecting a V.35 device to the indoor unit DP requires an RS-232 to V.35 Interface
Converter such as the model IC221 by Black Box Corporation, Box 12800, Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania 15241.
3. For purposes of the PES and in general common usage, the term PBX means a Private
Automated Branch Exchange.
4. Notify the Hub operator that a DCE device is connected to the indicated port.
9-5-2
RETAINING SCREW
CONNECTOR
SHIELDED
BACKSHELL
PES INDOOR UNIT
DATA PORT CARD PROTECTIVE GROUND 2

1 1 COMPUTER PORT
USER PORT OR
SIGNAL GROUND
OR 2 2 TERMINAL DEVICE
MULTIPORT CARD TRANSMIT DATA 1
JUNCTION BOX
SIGNAL GROUND
FEMALE 3 3 MALE
25 PIN 'D' RECEIVE DATA 1 25 PIN 'D'
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
7 7
REQUEST TO SEND
4 4
CLEAR TO SEND
(DCE DEVICE) 5 5 (DTE DEVICE)
DATA SET READY
6 6
CARRIER DETECT
8 8
TRANSMIT TIMING
15 15
RECEIVE TIMING
DRIVEN SIGNALS: 17 17
RECEIVED DATA - PIN 3 DATA TERMINAL READY DRIVEN SIGNALS:
CLEAR TO SEND - PIN 5 20 20 TRANSMIT DATA - PIN 2
DATA SET READY - PIN 6 RING INDICATOR REQUEST TO SEND - PIN 4
22 22
CARRIER DETECT - PIN 8 DATA TERMINAL READY - PIN 20
TRANSMIT TIMING TRANSMIT TIMING - PIN 24
TRANSMIT TIMING - PIN 15 24 24
RECEIVE TIMING - PIN 17
RING INDICATOR - PIN 22 FEMALE
MALE
25 PIN 'D' 25 SOCKET 'D'
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
1 TRANSMIT DATA AND RECEIVE DATA ARE

PAIRED AND TWISTED WITH SIGNAL GROUND
2 THE SHIELD IN THE CABLE IS

ATTACHED TO PROTECTIVE GROUND (PIN 1)
AND TO THE CONNECTOR SHIELDED BACKSHELL.
PES2-544
Figure 5-1. RS-232 Cabling (Straight Thru DCE-DTE) (for RS-232 PLC Port A or Port B)
(for Modem Backup PLC Port A only)
9-5-3
RETAINING SCREW
CONNECTOR
SHIELDED
BACKSHELL
BACKUP
PES INDOOR UNIT PHONE
DATA PORT CARD PROTECTIVE GROUND 2 MODEM
11 1
DIAG PORT SIGNAL GROUND 1
2 2
TRANSMIT DATA
SIGNAL GROUND 3 FEMALE
3
1 25 PIN "D"
RECEIVE DATA
CONNECTOR
MALE 7
7
25 PIN "D"
REQUEST TO SEND
CONNECTOR 4 4
CLEAR TO SEND*
5 5 (DCE DEVICE)
DATA SET READY*
(DTE DEVICE) 6 6
CARRIER DETECT* 8
8
TRANSMIT TIMING 15
15
RECEIVE TIMING
17 17
DATA TERMINAL READY
20 20
DRIVEN SIGNALS:
22 RING INDICATOR*
22 RECEIVED DATA - PIN 3
TRANSMIT TIMING CLEAR TO SEND - PIN 5*
24 24
DATA SET READY - PIN 6*
CARRIER DETECT - PIN 8*
DRIVEN SIGNALS: TRANSMIT TIMING - PIN 15
TRANSMIT DATA - PIN 2 RECEIVE TIMING - PIN 17
REQUEST TO SEND - PIN 4 RING INDICATOR - PIN 22*
DATA TERMINAL READY - PIN 20
TRANSMIT TIMING - PIN 24
FEMALE FEMALE
25 PIN "D" 25 PIN "D"
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
TRANSMIT DATA AND RECEIVE DATA

1
ARE PAIRED AND TWISTED WITH SIGNAL GROUND.
THE SHIELD IN THE CABLE

2
IS ATTACHED TO PROTECTIVE GROUND
(PIN 1)
AND TO THE CONNECTOR
SHIELDED BACKSHELL
* THESE MODEM CONTROL SIGNALS CAN BE CONFIGURED

TO CONTROL THE FUNCTION (BYPASS/NORM) OF A
MINIMUM BOOT FROM DATA PORT CARD.
PES2-545
Figure 5-2. Connecting a Backup Phone Modem to a

Data Port Card DIAG Port (DTE-DCE)
9-5-4
PES INDOOR UNIT

PROTECTIVE GROUND 1 1
1
SIGNAL GROUND 2
2 2
TRANSMIT DATA
SIGNAL GROUND COMPUTER PORT

DIAG PORT 3 3 OR
RECEIVE DATA 2 TERMINAL DEVICE
MALE
7 7
25 PIN "D" MALE 25 PIN
REQUEST TO SEND
CONNECTOR 4 "D" CONNECTOR
CLEAR TO SEND CARRIER DETECT
5 8
REQUEST TO SEND
(DTE DEVICE) 4 (DTE DEVICE)
CARRIER DETECT CLEAR TO SEND
8 5
TRANSMIT TIMING TRANSMIT TIMING
15 24
RECEIVE TIMING TRANSMIT TIMING
17 15
TRANSMIT TIMING RECEIVE TIMING
24 17
DATA SET READY
6
DATA TERMINAL READY
20
RING INDICATOR
22
DATA SET READY
6
DATA TERMINAL READY
20
22 RING INDICATOR
FEMALE FEMALE
25 PIN "D" 25 PIN "D"
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
1 2
THE SHIELD IN THE CABLE TRANSMIT DATA AND RECEIVE DATA
IS ATTACHED TO PROTECTIVE GROUND ARE PAIRED AND TWISTED WITH THE
(PIN 1) SIGNAL GROUNDWIRES.
SHIELDED BACKSHELL
PES2-546
Figure 5-3. RS-232 (DTE-DTE)
9-5-5
PROTECTIVE GROUND 1 1
PES INDOOR UNIT 1
SIGNAL GROUND
2 2
MODEM
DATA PORT TRANSMIT DATA 2
OR
SIGNAL GROUND DCE COMPUTER*
USER PORT 3 3
RECEIVE DATA 2
FEMALE
FEMALE 25 PIN "D"
7 7
25 PIN "D" CONNECTOR
REQUEST TO SEND
CONNECTOR 4 4
CLEAR TO SEND
5 5
(DCE
(DCE DEVICE) DATA SET READY DEVICE)
6 6
DATA TERMINAL READY 20
20
CARRIER DETECT
8 8
MON A
11 11
SECONDARY TRANSMIT DATA
14 14
TRANSMIT TIMING
15 15
RECEIVE TIMING
17 17
TRANSMIT TIMING
24 24
RING INDICATOR
22 22
MON B
23 23
*HP-3000 FUNCTIONS
NOTE: SIGNAL NAMES ARE ASSIGNED WITH AS A DCE DEVICE
MALE RESPECT TO THE DIU USER PORT. MALE
25 PIN "D" 25 PIN "D"
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
1 2
THE SHIELD IN THE CABLE TRANSMIT DATA AND RECEIVE DATA
(IF APPLICABLE) IS ARE PAIRED AND TWISTED WITH
ATTACHED TO PROTECTIVE GROUND (PIN 1) THE SIGNAL GROUND WIRES.
AND TO THE CONNECTOR SHIELDED
BACKSHELL
DATA PORT CARD ONLY

PES2-547
Figure 5-4. RS-232 (DCE-DCE) Null Modem Cable for Data Port Card Only
9-5-6
RS-232 V.35
INTERFACE CONVERTER
BLACK BOX CORP.
MODEL IC221
PES INDOOR UNIT 2 V.35 USER DEVICE
1 PROTECTIVE GROUND 1 A PROTECTIVE GROUND A
USER PORT RS232 SIDE V.35 SIDE (IBM DEVICE)
SIGNAL GROUND 2 B SIGNAL GROUND
2 B
1 FEMALE
TRANSMIT DATA 34 PIN C REQUEST TO SEND C FEMALE
SIGNAL GROUND 3 M BLOCK CLEAR TO SEND 34 PIN
FEMALE 3 MALE CONNECTOR D D ISO/DIS 2593
25 PIN 'D' RECEIVE DATA 1 25 PIN 'D' E DATA SET READY CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR E
7 7 (DCE DEVICE) F CARRIER DETECT
F
REQUEST TO SEND 4 P TRANSMIT DATA A (DTE TYPE DEVICE)
4 H
(DCE DEVICE) 5 CLEAR TO SEND 5 (DTE DEVICE) R RECEIVE DATA A P
DATA SET READY 6 S TRANSMIT DATA B
6 R
CARRIER DETECT 8 DRIVEN SIGNALS: T RECEIVE DATA B
8 S
TRANSMIT TIMING RECEIVE DATA A PIN R
15 U TERMINAL TIMING A DRIVEN SIGNALS
15 RECEIVE DATA B PIN T T
RECEIVE TIMING 17 CLEAR TO SEND PIN D V RECEIVE TIMING A TRANSMIT DATA A PIN P
DRIVEN SIGNALS: 17
DATA SET READY PIN E
V TRANSMIT DATA B PIN S
RECEIVED DATA - PIN 3 DATA TERMINAL READY 20
DRIVEN SIGNALS:
CARRIER DETECT PIN F TERMINAL TIMING B REQUEST TO SEND PIN C
CLEAR TO SEND - PIN 5 20 TRANSMIT DATA - PIN 2 W X TERMINAL TIMING A PIN U
REQUEST TO SEND - PIN 4 TERMINAL TIMING B PIN W
DATA SET READY - PIN 6 RING INDICATOR 22 TRANSMIT TIMING A PIN Y
X RECEIVE TIMING B
CARRIER DETECT - PIN 8 22 DATA TERMINAL READY - PIN 20
TRANSMIT TIMING B PIN AA Y
TRANSMIT TIMING - PIN 15 24 TRANSMIT TIMING 24 TRANSMIT TIMING - PIN 24 RECEIVE TIMING A PIN V Y TRANSMIT TIMING A AA
RECEIVE TIMING - PIN 17 RECEIVE TIMING B PIN X
RING INDICATOR - PIN 22 TRANSMIT TIMING B
AA
MALE FEMALE
25 PIN 'D' 25 SOCKET 'D'
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR MALE
MALE 34 PIN
25 PIN "D" CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
TRANSMIT DATA AND RECEIVE DATA ARE

1
PAIRED AND TWISTED WITH SIGNAL GROUND
2 THE SHIELD IN THE CABLE IS

PES2-555 ATTACHED TO PROTECTIVE GROUND (PIN 1)
AND TO THE CONNECTOR SHIELDED BACKSHELL
Figure 5-5. RS-232 to V.35 Device Using an RS-232 to V.35 Converter for DP
9-5-7
5.2 CONNECTING TELEPHONES TO THE VP TEL (2-WIRE) CARD

The VP TEL card RJ11 jack connector accepts a standard modular plug of a telephone.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
TURN OFF AC POWER TO PES EQUIPMENT BEFORE DISCON-
NECTING OR CONNECTING TELEPHONE SYSTEM CABLES OR
INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE VP TEL CARD. Failure to
remove power may damage the VP TEL card or open the VP TEL card
fuse.
Plugging a telephone into the VP TEL card of the indoor unit is similar to plugging a telephone into a
normal modular wall jack. In order to operate properly in the satellite system, the telephone must be a
Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF), also known as Touch Tone,10 telephone. VP TEL card RJ11
connector wiring is given in table 5-2. These telephone wires do not require shielding.
The VP TEL card is capable of having multiple telephones connected to it (three telephones is a typical
contractual maximum). This arrangement is similar to a private home with one line but three telephones.
Normally, it is the responsibility of the customer to provide any in-facility wiring to telephones located
more than a few feet from the indoor unit or to multiple telephones. (This responsibility could vary
depending on the terms of a particular contract.)
Another possibility is that the 2-wire satellite phone line from the VP TEL card is connected to an
in-facility Key Set Telephone System. A Key Set Telephone System allows a station set (phone) to be
used to pick up and/or hold one of several lines or trunks. Some phones have only one station (or line)
and others have up to 40 stations (or lines). Most key station sets (phones) are provided with pushbutton
access to 6, 10, or 20 lines. These systems also provide for intercom between stations of the system.
Do not attempt to connect the VP TEL card to a Key Set Telephone System (KTS) or Key Set Unit
(KSU) unless you have been given specific orders and instructions to do so. Normally it is the
responsibility of the customer to provide any desired connection to a Key Telephone System. (Again, this
responsibility can vary depending on the terms of a particular contract.)
Table 5-2. Signals of VP TEL Card RJ11 Connector
Connector Signal
Pin No. Name Description
1 nc not connected
2 T TIP
3 R RING
4 nc not connected
10Touch Tone is a registered trademark of Western Electric.
9-5-8
5.3 CONNECTING A PBX TO THE VP PBX USER PORT

Appendix F of TM 70040B-1 provides cabling and other information needed to connect a PBX to a VP
PBX (4-wire) card.
5.4 CONNECTING USER DEVICES TO THE MULTIPORT CARD (MP) USER PORTS
The multiport card (MP) may have 2, 4, 6 or 8 user data ports. These data ports may have the following
interface standard or capability: RS-232, V.35, RS-422/RS-485, modem backup or other standards or
capabilities as developed. The number of MP user data ports and the interface type are determined by
daughter boards called Port Level Conversion (PLC) modules on the MP. Figure 5-6 gives the possible
locations of PLCs on the MP. Table 5-5 lists the ports provided for each PLC location.
Initially, multiport cards are to be supplied with either two or eight RS-232 ports (one or four
3000066-0001 PLCs).
The number and type of PLCs must be correct for a given site. The software downloaded from the Hub
will configure the MP for the quantity of PLCs planned for that particular site. For instance, if the
software is configured for four PLCs and only one PLC is installed, the indoor unit will continue to reset
and search for the remaining "missing" PLCs.
An HNS-supplied cable with junction box (HNS P/N 3000140) connects to the MP 78-pin connector and
provides four DB-25 connectors (four DCE user ports). Two identical cables with junction boxes can be
connected to the two MP 78 pin connectors. Apply the appropriate adhesive-backed label (enclosed) to
each junction box.
Connect the first junction box to the MP 78-socket connector on your right as you face the rear of the
indoor unit (refer to figure 3-1 on page 2-3-3). Apply the adhesive-backed label for ports 1 through 4 to
this junction box connected to the right hand socket. The port nearest the point where the cable enters the
box is port 1. If a second junction box is provided, connect this second junction box to the socket on the
left and apply the adhesive-backed label for ports 5 through 8 to it. Exercise care. It is possible to
incorrectly connect or label the junction boxes. Use cable ties to make the internal cabling installation
neat and organized.
5.4.1 PIN-OUT FOR 78-PIN CONNECTOR

The MP, TP, CPC, and VDPC circuit cards have 78-pin connectors. The signal on each pin depends upon
the PLC type installed. Table 5-3 lists the mapping of the 78-pin connector to the junction box for the
RS-232, RS-422, and V.35 PLC types. For the TP, CPC, and VDPC, ports 1 and 2 are always RS-232
(built-in PLC).
9-5-9
Table 5-3. 78-Pin Connector/Junction Box Pinout

Junction Box
78-Pin J1 - 25-Pin Female
Connector J2 - 25-Pin Female RS-232 PLC RS-422 PLC V.35 PLC
Labeled J3 - 25-Pin Female Signal Signal Signal
"P1 - P4" J4 - 25-Pin Female Name Name Name
HOUSING SHIELD
1 J1-7 GND GND* GND*
2 J1-3 RXD0 RXDA0* RXDA0*
3 J1-22 RI0 RXDB0* RXDB0*
4 J1-2 TXD0 TXDA0* TXDA0*
21 J1-11 USRMONA0 TXDB0* TXDB0*
22 J1-15 DTETXCLK0 TXCLKA0* TXCLKA0*
23 J1-17 DTERXCLK0 TXCLKB0* TXCLKB0*
24 J1-25 DCERXCLK0 -- UMONA0*
40 J1-24 DCETXCLK0 RXCLKA0* RXCLKA0*
41 J1-18 USRMONB0 RXCLKB0* RXCLKB0*
42 J1-6 DSR0 DSRA0* DSR0*
43 J1-8 CD0 DSRB0* CD0*
60 J1-20 DTR0 DTRA0* DTR0*
61 J1-4 RTS0 DTRB0* RTS0*
62 J1-5 CTS0 -- CTS0*
5 J2-7 GND GND* GND*
6 J2-3 RXD1 RXDA1* RXDA1*
7 J2-22 RI1 RXDB1* RXDB1*
8 J2-2 TXD1 TXDA1* TXDA1*
25 J2-11 USRMONA1 TXDB1* TXDB1*
26 J2-15 DTETXCLK1 TXCLKA1* TXCLKA1*
27 J2-17 DTERXCLK1 TXCLKB1* TXCLKB1*
28 J2-25 DCERXCLK1 -- UMONA1*
44 J2-24 DCETXCLK1 RXCLKA1* RXCLKA1*
45 J2-18 USRMONB1 RXCLKB1* RXCLKB1*
46 J2-6 DSR1 DSRA1* DSR1*
47 J2-8 CD1 DSRB1* CD1*
64 J2-20 DTR1 DTRA1* DTR1*
65 J2-4 RTS1 DTRB1* RTS1*
66 J2-5 CTS1 -- CTS1*
9 J3-7 GND GND GND
10 J3-3 RXD2 RXDA2 RXDA2
11 J3-22 RI2 RXDB2 RXDB2
12 J3-2 TXD2 TXDA2 TXDA2
29 J3-11 USRMONA2 TXDB2 TXDB2
30 J3-15 DTETXCLK2 TXCLKA2 TXCLKA2
31 J3-17 DTERXCLK2 TXCLKB2 TXCLKB2
32 J3-25 DCERXCLK2 -- UMONA2
48 J3-24 DCETXCLK2 RXCLKA2 RXCLKA2
49 J3-18 USRMONB2 RXCLKB2 RXCLKB2
50 J3-6 DSR2 DSRA2 DSR2
51 J3-8 CD2 DSRB2 CD2
68 J3-20 DTR2 DTRA2 DTR2
69 J3-4 RTS2 DTRB2 RTS2
70 J3-5 CTS2 -- CTS2
9-5-10
Table 5-3. 78-Pin Connector/Junction Box Pinout (Continued)

Junction Box
78-Pin J1 - 25-Pin Female
Connector J2 - 25-Pin Female RS-232 PLC RS-422 PLC V.35 PLC
Labeled J3 - 25-Pin Female Signal Signal Signal
"P1 - P4" J4 - 25-Pin Female Name Name Name
13 J4-7 GND GND GND
14 J4-3 RXD3 RXDA3 RXDA3
15 J4-22 RI3 RXDB3 RXDB3
16 J4-2 TXD3 TXDA3 TXDA3
33 J4-11 USRMONA3 TXDB3 TXDB3
34 J4-15 DTETXCLK3 TXCLKA3 TXCLKA3
35 J4-17 DTERXCLK3 TXCLKB3 TXCLKB3
36 J4-25 DCERXCLK3 -- UMONA3
52 J4-24 DCETXCLK3 RXCLKA3 RXCLKA3
53 J4-18 USRMONB3 RXCLKB3 RXCLKB3
54 J4-6 DSR3 DSRA3 DSR3
55 J4-8 CD3 DSRB3 CD3
72 J4-20 DTR3 DTRA3 DTR3
73 J4-4 RTS3 DTRB3 RTS3
74 J4-5 CTS3 -- CTS3
17, 18, 19, Eng. use only
20, 39, 58,
59, 76, 77,
78
NOTE: Above 78-pin connector to junction box pinouts apply to MP, CPC, TP and VDPC.
* = Applicable to MP only. Not applicable to TP, CPC or VDPC because

ports 1 and 2 are always RS-232 for these circuit cards.
5.4.2 RS-232 PLC

Use figure 5-1 to connect an RS-232 DTE user device to the MP DCE user port at the junction box. Any
cables connected to the junction box DB-25 connectors must be shielded and have shielded backshell
connectors.
Use figure 5-7 to connect an RS-232 DCE user device to an MP user port. Figure 5-7 is a special "null
modem cable" for the MP. This cable differs from the null modem cable for a DP user port. When a user
port (MP, DP, TP, CPC, or VDPC) has a null modem cable attached, notify the Hub operator to use the
appropriate VOC screen (such as RDPC BSC, RDPC SDLC or RDPC XPAD) for the protocol in use to
designate the indoor unit user port as "DTE" where required. Table 5-4 lists various example VOC
screens for different data protocols.
Each RS-232 PLC provides two ports. For example, PLC1 provides ports 1 (port A) and 2 (port B).
Table 5-7 lists the restrictions regarding the DTE/DCE configuration for the two ports of a given PLC.
Port A refers to user port 1, 3, 5 or 7 depending upon which PLC location is used. Port B refers to the
corresponding user port 2, 4, 6 or 8 of the same PLC location.
9-5-11
96-PIN
CONNECTOR
(BACKPLANE)
MULTI PORT CARD
VOICE CARD CUT CORNER

CONNECTOR
PLC PART NUMBER 78 - PIN
CONNECTOR
(USER DEVICES)
PORTS 1-4
DIP
SWITCHES PLC 1 PLC 2
PORTS 1-2 PORTS 3-4
78 - PIN
CONNECTOR
(USER DEVICES)
PORTS 5-8
PLC 3 PLC 4
PORTS 5-6 PORTS 7-8
8
PES2-552
Figure 5-6. Multiport Card (MP) Daughter Board Locations
Table 5-4. VOC Screens - Example Data Protocols
RDPC ADB RDPC JPS

RDPC ALPAD RDPC SAMF
RDPC BIT RDPC SBPAD
RDPC BSC RDPC SDLC
RDPC DSPAD RDPC TINET
RDPC FS1 RDPC X25
RDPC HASP RDPC XPAD
9-5-12
Table 5-5. Multiport Card (MP) and Port

Level Conversion (PLC) Module Locations
PLC Location Provides User Ports Total Ports
PLC1 1, 2 2
PLC2 3, 4 4
PLC3 5, 6 6
PLC4 7, 8 8
Table 5-6. PLC Types for Plug-In PLC Location
RS-232 3000066-0001 Provides two RS-232 ports. Refer to table 5-3.
V.35 1013130-0001 Provides two V.35 ports. Refer to table 5-3.
RS-422/RS-485 1012327-0001 Provides two RS-422/RS-485 ports. Refer to table

5-3.
Modem Backup 3000206-0001 Provides one RS-232 port A and one metallically
("Fail Safe PLC") connected backup port B for use during space link
failure. Can be operated to provide two RS-232
ports with special wiring for port B. Refer to
chapter 9, section 5.4.3 on page 9-5-15.
For the RS-232 PLC, ports A and B use the same wiring to connect to RS-232 devices. For the RS-232
PLC ports A or B, refer to figure 5-1 on page 9-5-3 to connect a DTE terminal or computer. For the
RS-232 PLC ports A or B, refer to figure 5-7 on page 9-5-14 to connect a DCE device.
Table 5-7. Multiport Card RS-232 PLC DTE/DCE Restrictions

PLC Port A PLC Port B
1, 3, 5 or 7 2, 4, 6 or 8 DTE/DCE Configuration Constraints
synchronous not used DTE or DCE
synchronous synchronous DTE or DCE but both ports have to be the same
synchronous asynchronous Each port can be either DTE or DCE independent
of the other port
asynchronous not used DTE or DCE
asynchronous asynchronous Each port can be either DTE or DCE independent
of the other port
asynchronous synchronous Each port can be either DTE or DCE independent
of the other port
9-5-13
25-Pin Male 25-Pin Male

(to MPC Junction Box) (to DCE)
PROTECTIVE GROUND 1
1 1
TX DATA TX DATA MODEM
2 2 OR
RX DATA RX DATA DCE
3 3
RTS RTS COMP-
4 4
UTER
CTS CTS
5 5
DSR DSR
6 6
GND GND
7 7
CD CD FEMALE
8 8
25 PIN 'D'
9 9 CONN
10 10
MONA MONA
11 11
12 12 (DCE
DEVICE)
13 13
14 14
DTETXCLK DTETXCLK
15 15
16 16
DTERXCLK DTERXCLK
17 17
MONB
18 18
19 19
DTR DTR
20 20
21 21
RI MONB RI
22 22
23 23
DCETXCLK DCERXCLK
24 24
DCERXCLK DCERXCLK
25 25
MP, TP, CPC, or VDPC CARD ONLY 1 THE SHIELD IN THE CABLE
IS ATTACHED TO PROTECTIVE
(Not applicable to DP card) GROUND
(PIN 1)
SHIELDED BACKSHELL
PES2-661
Figure 5-7. Null Modem Cable for Multiport Card RS-232 Port (for RS-232 PLC Port A
or Port B) (for Modem Backup PLC Port A only)
9-5-14
5.4.3 MODEM BACKUP PLC

The modem backup PLC provides RS-232 user ports and will also provide a backup port. Port A will be
a user port. At installation time, port B can be configured as a user port or as a backup port. As a backup
port, port B is internally connected to port A by metallic relay contacts when power is removed from the
indoor unit, when the RST DIP switch on the MP is set, or by software command (can be triggered by
modem control signals from the modem). This backup capability will be similar to the BYPASS function
on the DP card as described in chapter 13, section 2.5.2 on page 3-2-3. The purpose of the backup PLC is
to provide a rapid and convenient transition to land based communication if the satellite link becomes
inoperable.
For the modem backup PLC, ports A and B use different wiring. Figure 5-8 provides a summary of
modem backup PLC to user device wiring.
Figure 5-8A shows port A connected to a DTE user device and port B connected to a backup modem.
Refer to figure 5-1 on page 9-5-3 to connect a DTE user device to port A only. Refer to figure 5-9 on
page 9-5-17 to connect a backup phone modem to port B of a modem backup PLC.
Figure 5-8B shows DTE user devices connected to both ports A and B of a modem backup PLC. Note
that the wiring is different for port A and B. To connect a DTE user device to port A of a modem backup
PLC, refer to figure 5-1 on page 9-5-3. To connect a DTE user device to port B, refer to figure 5-10 on
page 9-5-18.
Figure 5-8C shows DCE user devices connected to both ports A and B of a modem backup PLC. Note
that the wiring is different for port A and B. To connect a DCE user device to port A of a modem backup
PLC, refer to figure 5-7 on page 9-5-14. To connect a DCE user device to port B, refer to figure 5-9 on
page 9-5-17.
5.4.4 RS-422/RS-485 PLC

If the RS-422/RS-485 PLC is installed, refer to figure 5-11 for cabling to connect a DTE user device and
figure 5-12 for a DCE user device. The DIP switches on the RS-422/RS-485 PLC place a terminating
resistor and capacitor in the cable circuit when in the on position. These terminations are only needed for
high data rates and long cable runs to the user device. For data rates to/from the user device of 64K baud
or less and a cable run length of less than 750 feet, all the DIP switches on the PLC should be in the off
position.
9-5-15
DCE TO DTE PORT A

USER
MODEM PORT A DEVICE
BACKUP (ODD) (DTE)
PLC
(IN BYPASS
SPECIAL CABLE FOR PORT B ONLY
MODE)
PORT B MODEM
(EVEN) (DCE)
MP
JUNCTION
BOX
TO HUB
TELEPHONE
LINE
A) USING PORT B FOR MODEM BACKUP
DCE TO DTE PORT A

USER
MODEM PORT A DEVICE
BACKUP (ODD) (DTE)
PLC
PORT B USER DEVICE

(EVEN) (DTE)
MP
JUNCTION
BOX
B) USING PORT B WITH DTE USER DEVICE
DCE TO DCE PORT A

USER
MODEM PORT A DEVICE
BACKUP (ODD) (DCE)
PLC
USER
PORT B DEVICE
(EVEN) (DCE)
MP
JUNCTION
BOX
C) USING PORT B WITH DCE USER DEVICE

PES2-908
Figure 5-8. Modem Backup PLC to User Device Wiring Summary
9-5-16
RETAINING SCREW
CONNECTOR
SHIELDED
BACKSHELL BACK UP
PHONE
DIU/O MODEM
OR
MULTIPORT CARD PROTECTIVE GROUND 2
1 1 DCE
JUNCTION BOX SIGNAL GROUND USER DEVICE
USER PORT 2 2
TRANSMIT DATA 1
SIGNAL GROUND
FEMALE 3 3 FEMALE
25 PIN 'D' RECEIVE DATA 1 25 SOCKET 'D'
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
7 7
REQUEST TO SEND (RTS)
4 4
CLEAR TO SEND (CTS)
5 5 (DCE DEVICE)
DATA SET READY (DSR)
6 6
CARRIER DETECT (CD)
8 8
TRANSMIT TIMING (DTETXCLK)
15 15
RECEIVE TIMING (DTERXCLK)
17 17
DATA TERMINAL READY (DTR)
20 20
RING INDICATOR (RI)
22 22
TRANSMIT TIMING (DCETXCLK)
24 24
MALE MALE
25 PIN 'D' 25 PIN 'D'
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
MP, TP, CPC, or VDPC CARD ONLY 1 TRANSMIT DATA AND RECEIVE DATA ARE
PAIRED AND TWISTED WITH SIGNAL
MODEM BACKUP PLC 2 THE SHIELD IN THE CABLE IS

ATTACHED TO PROTECTIVE GROUND (PIN 1)
PORT B ONLY AND TO THE CONNECTOR SHIELDED
BACKSHELL.
PS2910.FH3
Figure 5-9. Connecting a Backup Phone Modem or DCE User Device to Port B
of a Modem Backup PLC (DCE to DCE) (Modem Backup PLC Port B only)
9-5-17
25-Pin Male 25-Pin Female

(to MPC Junction Box) (to DTE)
COMPUTER
PROTECTIVE GROUND 1 PORT
1 1
TX DATA OR
TX DATA
2 2 TERMINAL
RX DATA RX DATA
3 3
RTS RTS
4 4
CTS CTS
5 5
DSR DSR
6 6 MALE
GND GND 25 PIN
7 7
CD CD D
8 8 CONN
9 9
FEMALE
10 10
25 PIN 'D' MONA
MONA (DTE
CONN 11 11
DEVICE)
12 12
13 13
14 14
DTETXCLK DTETXCLK
15 15
16 16
DTERXCLK DTERXCLK
17 17
MONB
18 18
19 19
DTR DTR
20 20
21 21
RI MONB RI
22 22
23 23
DCETXCLK DCERXCLK
24 24
DCERXCLK DCERXCLK
25 25
1 THE SHIELD IN THE CABLE

MP, TP, CPC, or VDPC CARD ONLY IS ATTACHED TO PROTECTIVE
(PIN 1)
MODEM BACKUP PLC AND TO THE CONNECTOR
SHIELDED BACKSHELL
PORT B ONLY
PS2909.fh3
Figure 5-10. Connecting a DTE User Device to Port B of a Modem Backup PLC
(DCE to DTE) (Modem Backup PLC Port B only)
9-5-18
25-PIN MALE 37-PIN FEMALE

(TO MP JUNCTION BOX) (TO DTE)
SHIELD 1 1 SHIELD
TXD-A 2 2
BRXD-A 3 3
RTS-A 4 4 TXDATAA
BCTS-A 5 5 DTETXCLKA
BDSR-B 6 6 RXDATAA
GND 7 7 RTSA
BDSR-A 8 8 DTERXCLKA
9 9 CTSA
10 10
TXD-B 11 11
12 12
13 13 DSRA
14 14
TXCLK-A 15 15
16 16
TXCLK-B 17 17
RXCLK-B 18 18
19 19 GND
RTS-B 20 20
21 21
BRXD-B 22 22 TXDATAB
23 23 DTETXCLKB
RXCLK-A 24 24 RXDATAB
BCTS-B 25 25 RTSB
26 DTERXCLKB
27 CTSB
28
29
30
31 DSRB
32
33
34
35
36
37
DCE to DTE Cable Mapping - RS422 / RS485 PLC
PES3-1178
Figure 5-11. DCE to DTE Cable Mapping - RS-422/RS-485 PLC
9-5-19
25-PIN MALE 37-PIN FEMALE

(TO MP JUNCTION BOX) (TO DTE)
SHIELD 1 1 SHIELD
TXD-A 2 2
BRXD-A 3 3
RTS-A 4 4 TXDATAA
BCTS-A 5 5 DTETXCLKA
BDSR-B 6 6 RXDATAA
GND 7 7 RTSA
BDSR-A 8 8 DTERXCLKA
9 9 CTSA
10 10
TXD-B 11 11
12 12 DTR-A
13 13
14 14
TXCLK-A 15 15
16 16
TXCLK-B 17 17
RXCLK-B 18 18
19 19 GND
RTS-B 20 20
21 21
BRXD-B 22 22 TXDATAB
23 23 DTETXCLKB
RXCLK-A 24 24 RXDATAB
BCTS-B 25 25 RTSB
26 DTERXCLKB
27 CTSB
28
29
30 DTR-B
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
DCE to DCE Cable Mapping - RS422 / RS485 PLC
PES3-1179
Figure 5-12. DCE to DCE Cable Mapping - RS-422/RS-485 PLC
9-5-20
5.5 CONNECTING USER DEVICES TO COMPACT PORT CARD (CPC) PORTS

5 The CPC can accommodate the same four-port junction box as used with the multiport card and the
turbo port card. Alternately, the CPC has two DB9 connectors that can eliminate the need for a junction
box in installations that only need one or two ports and only need the signals provided on these two DB9
connectors. One of the connectors, P1 is optimized for asynchronous usage as indicated in figure 5-13 and
table 5-8. The other, P2 is optimized for synchronous applications as shown in table 5-9. However, P2
can also be used in asynchronous applications if it provides the the required signals.
If P1 or P2 do not provide the necessary signals, a junction box must be used. P1 and P2 are connected to
the same internal signals on the CPC as port 1 and port 2 on the junction box are. Therefore, if P1 is used,
port 1 cannot be used and if P2 is used, port 2 cannot be used.
Tables 5-8, 5-9, and 5-3, provide reference information for the signal pinouts for the connectors on the
rear of the CPC.
As indicated in figure 5-13 and table 5-8, the female DB9 connector labeled "P1" can only be used as an
asynchronous RS-232 port connected to the first port of the built-in PLC.
As shown in figure 5-13, the female DB9 connector labeled "P2" is connected to the second port of the
built-in PLC. As indicated in table 5-9, the female DB9 connector labeled "P2" includes clock signals on
pins 1 and 9. Therefore, the female DB9 connector labeled "P2" may be used as a synchronous RS-232
port. This port (DB9 connector) labeled "P2" may also be used as an asynchronous RS-232 port if the
clock signals are ignored and if the required modem control signals are present for your application.
As indicated in figure 5-13 and table 5-3, the female 78-pin connector labeled "P1-P4" has signals for up
to four ports. The first two ports are connected to the built-in RS-232 PLC. The first port has RS-232 data
signals common with the female DB9 connector labeled "P1"; however, at the 78-pin connector the port
may be used in either a synchronous on an asynchronous fashion. If the first port is connected to a user
device via the 78-pin connector/junction box, the female DB9 connector labeled "P1" must not be used.
The second port of the 78-pin connector has RS-232 data signals common with the female DB9 connector
labeled "P2"; however, at the 78-pin connector the port may be used in either a synchronous on an
asynchronous fashion. If the second port is connected to a user device via the 78-pin connector/junction
box, the female DB9 connector labeled "P2" must not be used.
The third and fourth ports of the 78-pin connector are associated with the plug-in PLC. As listed in table
5-3, the signals present on ports 3 and 4 of the junction box are determined by the type of PLC installed at
the plug-in location.
9-5-21
Table 5-8. Asynchronous RS-232 Port,

DB9 Connector Labeled "P1"
Pin Map for

DB9 9 to 25 Pin
Pin Signal Conversion
1 CD0 8
2 RXD0 3
3 TXD0 2
4 DTR0 20
5 GND 7
6 DSR0 6
7 RTS0 4
8 CTS0 5
9 RI0 22
Table 5-9. RS-232 Port, DB9 Connector Labeled

"P2," Synchronous or Asynchronous
Pin Map for

DB9 9 to 25 Pin
Pin Signal Conversion
1 DTETXCLK1 15
2 RXD1 3
3 TXD1 2
4 DTR1 20
5 GND 7
6 DSR1 6
7 RTS1 4
8 CTS1 5
9 DTERXCLK1 17
9-5-22
COMPACT PORT CARD (CPC)
BUILT - IN PLUG - IN
RS-232 PLC
PLC SOCKET
"PORT 1" "PORT 0" "PORT A" "PORT B"
J7 J8
P2 P1 P1 - P4
DB9 PORT "P2" PORT "P1"
RS-232 RS-232
SYNCHRONOUS ASYNCHRONOUS 78-PIN CONNECTOR
OR
ASYNCHRONOUS
PORT
-1-
JI -DB25 FEMALE ALWAYS RS-232 .

SYNCHRONOUS OR ASYNCHRONOUS
PORT
ALWAYS RS-232 .
-2-
J2 SYNCHRONOUS OR ASYNCHRONOUS
PORT
DETERMINED BY
-3-
J3
PLUG-IN PLC TYPE
PORT
DETERMINED BY
-4-
J4
PLUG-IN PLC TYPE
PS31599.FH3 JUNCTION BOX, HNS P/N 3000140-0001
Figure 5-13. Compact Port Card: PLCs, Port Characteristics, and Connectors
9-5-23
5.6 CONNECTING USER DEVICES TO TURBO PORT (TP) USER PORTS

The TP can accommodate PLCs of two different physical sizes, figure 5-14. The PLCs installed affect
the function of the four connectors on the rear of the TP:
• BNC connector - Ethernet 10 base 2.
• RJ-45 8 pin connector - Ethernet 10 base T.
• 9-pin D connector - RS-232 to DUART - used for Token Ring.
• 78-pin connector - port 1 and 2 are RS-232 (always), ports 3 and 4 are according to the small
PLC installed.
Ports 1 and 2 of the 78-pin connector are RS-232 ports of a built-in PLC.
The small size PLC connectors for ports 3 and 4 accommodate the same type PLCs as the multiport card,
table 5-6. The TP also accepts a larger size PLC, a Local Area Network (LAN) PLC as listed in table
5-10. The possible LAN data rates are listed in table 5-11.
Table 5-10. Local Area Network Port Level Conversion (PLC) Modules
Ethernet Local 1012171-0001 Large LAN PLC Position on board jumpers. Special
Area Network - TP only cabling considerations. See page
(ELAN) 9-5-25. May require EMI measures.
See FSB 1130 and table 5-14.
Token-Ring Local 1013061-0001 Large LAN PLC Position on board jumpers. Special
Area Network - TP only cabling considerations. See page
(TLAN) 9-5-34. Requires chassis and
cabling EMI upgrade modifications
(ferrite blocks). See table 5-14 and
FSB 1130.
Table 5-11. Local Area Network Data Rates
Local Area Network Data Rate Comment HNS PLC
Token Ring 4 Mbs TLAN PLC jumper selectable - TLAN

or depends on cabling considerations
16 Mbs
Ethernet 10 Mbs Data rate is applicable for all cable ELAN

types listed in table 5-13
"Fast Ethernet" 100 Mbs Possible future development -
9-5-24
96-PIN
CONNECTOR
(BACKPLANE)
TURBO PORT CARD
DIP
CUT CORNER
SWITCHES
78-PIN CONNECTOR
(USER DEVICES)
PLC 2 PORTS 1-4)
PLC 1 OPTIONAL
DAUGHTER CARD
BUILT IN
( PORTS 3-4)
USER PORTS
(PORTS 1-2)
LAN PLC 9-PIN

DIN
OPTIONAL
DAUGHTER CARD
8-PIN
TELCO
BNC
PES3-1182
Figure 5-14. Placement of PLC on Turbo Port Card
5.6.1 ETHERNET LAN PLC

The Ethernet LAN PLC offers two cabling methods by jumper selection and direct connection, table 5-12
and figure 5-15. In addition, Standard Ethernet (10-BASE-5) and fiber optic cabling are available by
indirect connection, table 5-13.
Table 5-12. Ethernet LAN PLC Jumpers
Ethernet Ethernet Turboport Card Cable Connection

Type PLC Jumpers Connector Type Required
10-BASE-2 Figure 5-15A BNC Coaxial Terminators required

(ThinNet) when PES is connected
to other Ethernet
10-BASE-2 device(s).
See figure 5-17.
10-BASE-T Figure 5-15B RJ-45 Twisted Pair Category 3 unshielded

(Twisted Pair) twisted pair or better.
See table 5-20 on page
9-5-41.
9-5-25
ETHERNET LAN PLC

HUGHES
10 BASE-T ENABLE
10 BASE-2 ENABLE
10 BASE-T ENABLE
10 BASE-2 ENABLE
1012171
A) JUMPER POSITIONS FOR 10 BASE-2 (Thin Net)
ETHERNET LAN PLC

HUGHES
10 BASE-T ENABLE
10 BASE-2 ENABLE
10 BASE-T ENABLE
10 BASE-2 ENABLE
1012171
B) JUMPER POSITIONS FOR 10 BASE-T (Twisted pair)

ETHERNET TOKEN FOR JUNCTION BOX
10 BASE-2 RING FOR PORTS 1-4
ThinNet
COAX

(REAR VIEW)
BNC RJ-45 DB-9 78 PIN
ETHERNET
10 BASE-T
TWISTED PAIR
C) TURBO PORT CARD CONNECTORS

PES3-1390
Figure 5-15. Jumper Locations on Ethernet LAN PLC
9-5-26
Table 5-13. Ethernet Cabling Methods

Distance Devices
per per Connection
Type of Segment Segment Connector to HNS
Cable (max.) (max.) Type ELAN PLC Topology Comment
Thin Ethernet 607 ft 30 BNC Yes, T-connector Bus Uses thin coaxial cable as
(ThinNet) (185 m) BNC "backbone" bus, figure
10 BASE-2 5-16. Devices connect
page 9-5-28 with BNC T-connectors
Twisted 328 ft 2 RJ-45, Yes, direct Star Uses telephone type wire,
Pair UTP, (100 m) Telco see table 5-20 on page
10 BASE-T splice 9-5-41. Requires local
page 9-5-32 block Ethernet hub
Standard 1,640 ft 100 N-type Indirect, requires Bus Uses thick coaxial cable
Ethernet (500 m) Thick/Thin as a backbone "bus."
10 BASE-5 Repeater, figure Requires transceivers to
page 9-5-33 5-21 connect devices to bus,
lower portion of figure
5-21
Fiber-optic . . -- Indirect, requires . There are two versions of
. . . fiber-optic . fiber-optic Ethernet:
FOIRL 0.6 miles 2 transceiver and Star FOIRL (Fiber-Optic
. (1 km) . multiport repeater . Inter-Repeater Link) and
. . . or special . the more recent
10 BASE-FL 1.2 miles 2 Ethernet hub Star 10 Base-FL. Fiber-optic
(2 km) cable does not generate or
receive EMI/RFI
interference
Table 5-14. References for Required EMI Reduction Measures
Topic Reference
EMI Reduction Summary - All PES products and tested combinations FSB 1130
EMI Reduction - TLAN PLCs in PES 8000 FSB 1130, FSB 1117C
EMI Reduction - TLAN PLCs in PES 6000 FSB 1130, FSB 1118A
EMI Reduction - Ethernet (ELAN) PLCs in PES 8000 FSB 1130, FSB 1131
EMI Reduction - Ethernet (ELAN) PLCs in PES 6000 FSB 1130, FSB 1132
EMI Reduction - TLAN PLCs in PES Type 2 DIU/O FSB 1130, FSB 1136
9-5-27
5.6.1.1 Ethernet ThinNet (10 Base-2) Guidelines

• The maximum length of a segment is 185 meters (607 feet), figure 5-16.
• Devices are typically connected with T connectors to a backbone, figure 5-17.
• The minimum distance between T connectors is .5 meters (1.6 feet), figure 5-17.
• Terminate both ends of each segment with 50-ohm resistors, figure 5-17 and table 5-15.
• T connectors must be plugged directly into the Ethernet or TP BNC connector for ELAN
PLC card. No cable is allowed between the T connector and the card unless a BNC
transceiver is provided.
• If a BNC transceiver is used to connect a device, the maximum length of a transceiver cable
is 50 meters (164 feet,) figure 5-18.
• No more than 30 connections are allowed per segment.

• A maximum of 2 InterRepeater Links (IRL) is allowed between devices; the maximum
length of cable with repeators is 4 kilometers (2.5 mi), figure 5-19.
607 FT. MAX

T-Connector directly attached to Ethernet Card
ThinNet - Thin Coax - Backbone
Bus Topology
HU
NETW
ORKGH
ES
SYSTE
MS
PE
ST RS
AT ON
IONAL
EA
RT
H
™
PES INDOOR UNIT
Turbo Port Card with
Up to 30 devices total Ethernet PLC with jumpers
set to 10 BASE-2 enabled
PS31695.fh3 ETHERNET 10 BASE-2

Figure 5-16. For Ethernet 10 Base-2, Devices Connect Directly to ThinNet Bus
with BNC T Connectors
9-5-28
DEVICE WITH
50 OHM ETHERNET
TERMINATOR 10 BASE-2
INTERFACE
"T" CONNECTOR
ThinNet ETHERNET
COAXIAL CABLE
MINIMUM LENGTH
0.5m (1.6FT)
DEVICE WITH
ETHERNET
10 BASE-2
INTERFACE
"T" CONNECTOR
TURBOPORT CARD WITH

ETHERNET LAN PLC
ThinNet ETHERNET INSTALLED. JUMPERS SET
COAXIAL CABLE TO 10-BASE-2 ENABLED
MINIMUM LENGTH
0.5m (1.6FT)
USER PORTS
"T" CONNECTOR
HNS PART # 9002443-0137
TEST CONFIG
AUTO
COMM
IFL VIDEO
TO RF UNIT
ETHERNET 10 BASE-2
50 OHM TERMINATOR
"ThinNet"
HNS PART # 9001142-0051
PS31419.FH3
02/17/94
Figure 5-17. Terminators Required when Ethernet LAN PLC is Configured

for 10-BASE-2 (ThinNet) Coax
9-5-29
Table 5-15. Terminators Required with ELAN PLC Configured for 10-Base-2 (ThinNet)
HNS
Description Part Number Quantity Comment
Terminator 9001142-0051 2 Required on each end of LAN cable

when ELAN PLC is configured for
10-Base-2 (ThinNet) and connected to
other Ethernet devices. See figure 5-17.
"T" Connector BNC 9002443-0137 1 Required to connect Ethernet devices

and terminators to ELAN turboport
card. See figure 5-17.
607 FT. MAX

Bus Topology
HU
NETW
ORKGH
ES
SYST
EMS
PE
ST RS
AT ON
IONAL
EA
RT
H
PES INDOOR UNIT
BNC TRANSCEIVER
™

DB-15 Connector, AUI port Ethernet PLC with jumpers
set to 10 BASE-2 enabled
164 FT. MAX.
PS31696.fh3
Figure 5-18. For Ethernet 10 Base-2, BNC Transceiver is Required

if Device not Directly Connected
9-5-30
4 KM (2.5 mi. ) MAX.
InterRepeater Link (IRL)

REPEATER
Can be fiber-optic cable
REPEATER InterRepeater Link (IRL)
Building A
REPEATER
REPEATER
Building B
Up to two IRLs are permitted
HU
NETW
ORKGH
ES
SYST
EMS
PS31697.fh3
PE
ST RS
AT ON
IO AL
N EA
RT
H
™
Building C
Figure 5-19. For Ethernet 10 Base-2, Inter-Repeater Links (IRL) Extend

Overall Network Distance
9-5-31
5.6.1.2 Ethernet Twisted Pair (10 Base-T) Guideline

• The maximum length of a segment is 100 meters (328 ft).
• The cable used is 22 to 26 American wire gauge (AWG) unshielded, twisted pair cable. An
EIA 568 category 4 or 5 unshielded, twisted pair cable is recommended for best results (table
5-20)
• Devices are connected to a central Ethernet hub11 using a star configuration, figure 5-20.
• Ethernet hubs usually have an Access Unit Interface (AUI) port for standard Ethernet
connections.
• Devices with standard Ethernet cards can be attached using a twisted pair transceiver Media
Access Unit (MAU). Ethernet hubs can be concatenated to create larger networks.
ETHERNET 10 BASE-T "Twisted Pair"
Unshielded Twisted Pair

Level 4 or 5
10 BASE-T
HUB
Star topology - a break in any one link
only disrupts that link.
RJ-45
ETHERNET 10 BASE T
Wall
Plate
HU
NETW
ORKGH
ES
SYSTE
MS
PES INDOOR UNIT with

PE
ST RS
AT ON
IONAL
EA
RT
ELAN PLC jumpers
H
™
set to 10 BASE-T enabled.
PS31699.fh3
Figure 5-20. For Ethernet 10 Base-T Configuration Uses Twisted Pair Cables
to Connect Devices to an Ethernet Hub
11The word hub is used in two different contexts. A Local Area Network (LAN) hub is an electronics box which
communicates with devices in the same building or group of buildings (distances of 1 foot to 2.5 miles). An ISBN hub consists
of a large dish antenna and racks of equipment which, in conjunction with an orbiting satellite, provides communications to
remote sites (distances of a few miles to thousands of miles).
9-5-32
5.6.1.3 Standard Ethernet (10 Base-5) Guidelines

• The maximum length of a segment is 500 meters or 1,640 feet.
• The maximum length of a transceiver cable is 50 meters or 164 feet.
• The minimum distance between transceivers is 2.5 meters or 8.2 feet.
• No more than 100 transceiver connections are allowed per segment.
• Both ends of each segment should be terminated with a 50-ohm resistor.
• Only transceivers without SQE test (Signal Quality Error "heartbeat") should be used with
repeaters.
• A maximum of 2 InterRepeater Links (IRL) is allowed between devices; the maximum
length of cable is 4 kilometers or 2.5 miles.
• Requires Thin/Thick Repeater to connect to HNS ELAN PLC (figure 5-21).
ETHERNET 10 BASE-2 "ThinNet"

Bus Topology
HU
NETWO
RK
GH
ES
SYSTE
MS
PER
STA SO
TIONA
N L EA
RTH
"STANDARD ETHERNET" 10 BASE-5

Thick Ethernet - Coax - Backbone
Bus Topology
THICK / THIN
REPEATER
Transceiver 2 - Port
Transceiver
DB-15 Connector
AUI - Port
PS31698.fh3
Figure 5-21. A Thick/Thin Repeater Provides Interface Between HNS ELAN PLC
10 Base-2 and "Standard Ethernet" 10 Base-5
9-5-33
5.6.2 TOKEN-RING LAN PLC
5.6.2.1 Introduction to Token-Ring - A token-ring LAN allows electronic devices such as computers,
controllers, and printers within a building or group of buildings to communicate electronically. In a
token-ring network, the devices pass data around the functional equivalent of a loop, figure 5-22A. A
"token" message travels around the loop. When one of the devices on the ring has data to send, it appends
its addressed data to the token creating a frame. When the frame travels to the addressed recipient device,
this device removes the data and retransmits the token. The original sending device thus receives
confirmation that the message has been properly received.
To improve the maintainability of the ring and provide better flexibility, a wiring concentrator is placed
in the center of the ring and the devices are attached on lobes, figure 5-22B. This arrangement facilitates
adding new devices, moving devices and bypassing offline devices. Token-ring wiring concentrators are
available in a variety of models and configurations:
• Controlled Access Units (CAUs) with Lobe Attachment Modules (LAMs)
• Multistation Access Units (MAUs)
Multiple wiring concentrators can be linked together to form a larger ring, figure 5-23A. Typically,
wiring concentrators are placed in wiring closets. The allowable ring length can be extended by the use
of repeaters and/or fiber-optic links. Large LANs can be created by using "bridges" to join together
multiple rings, figure 5-23B.
5.6.2.2 Token-Ring Historical Perspective - The token-ring LAN method was developed and
pioneered by IBM Corporation, which offers a variety of products and publications for token-ring
networks. More recently other manufacturers such as Black Box Corporation (412) 746-5500, Hughes
LAN Systems (415) 966-7300, and others have started offering token-ring products. Early token-ring
networks were designed to take advantage of existing unshielded twisted pair, UTP, telephone type wiring
in buildings. Therefore, minimal UTP requirements were made as broad as possible. Subsequent
improvements in cable characteristics for new building provided improved LAN performance but require
more attention to cabling detail by installers.
5.6.2.3 Token-Ring LAN Planning, Design, and HNS Policy - The location of and selection of
token-ring LAN components, cable selection, cabling, and token-ring LAN design can be an involved
process. Maximum cable run lengths depend upon the number and type of wiring concentrators, the
number of wiring closets, the data rate of the LAN, and the type of cable selected. The information and
tables in the IBM document: Token-Ring Network Introduction and Planning Guide, GA27-3677-05,
available from IBM Corporation Publications, 1-800-879-2755 provide guidance. Table 5-16 lists this
and other related documents.
Depending upon the terms of a particular customer contract, the responsibility for token-ring LAN
planning can fall to the customer (normally) or to HNS (unusually). Installers, refer to the appropriate
customer installation specification when you are required to install a token-ring LAN PLC for instructions
regarding any required token-ring cabling. If the installation specification is inadequate, unclear or not
applicable to your situation, install the TLAN PLC only and then inform your HNS installation manager,
who can work with the program manager and HNS engineering to resolve the situation regarding
token-ring cabling instructions (if any cabling is required by HNS).
9-5-34
A) BASIC SERIAL LOOP, INCONVENIENT TO MODIFY
LOBE
LOBE LOBE
RI
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TOKEN-RING RO
WIRING CONCENTRATOR
MULTISTATION ACCESS UNIT (MAU)
LOBE LOBE
LOBE
N
TE
OW
KR
S
SY
ET
SM
EP
SR TS
NOITA
LANO
E
RA
HT
UH
HG
SE
B) TOKEN-RING WIRING CONCENTRATOR

PS31750.fh3
Figure 5-22. Token-Ring Basic Concepts
9-5-35
RI RI
8 RI 8
7 8 7
6 7 6
5 6 5
4 5 4
3 4 3
2 3 2
1 2 1
1
RO RO
RO
B
C
LOBE
LOBE
LOBE LOBE
LOBE
LOBE SM
ET
SYS
KR
OW
TE
N
EP
SR TS
NOITA
LANO
E
RA
HT
UH
HG
SE
MAIN RING LENGTH = A + B + C
A) MULTIPLE MAUs, MAIN RING AND LOBES
MAU
RI
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
RO
LAN 1 -
TOKEN-RING
(LOBES NOT SHOWN)
RI
8
MAU
7
6
5
RI 4
8 3
7 2
6 1
5 RO
4
3
2
1
RO
TOKEN-RING MAU
BRIDGE
MAU LAN 2 - TOKEN-RING

RI
8
3
4
5
6
7
(LOBES NOT SHOWN)
2
1
RO
RI
8
7
FIBER OPTIC LINK 2

3
4
5
6
FIBER RO
MAU
OPTIC FIBER
REPEATER OPTIC
REPEATER
B) TOKEN-RINGS, REPEATERS AND BRIDGES

PS31747.fh3
Figure 5-23. Token-Ring Multiple Wiring Concentrators and Bridges
9-5-36
Table 5-16. Token-Ring Reference Documents
• IBM Introduction to Local Area Networks, GC20-8203

• IBM Cabling System Planning and Installation Guide, GA27-3361
• Using the IBM Cabling System with Communication Products, GA27-3620
• IBM Cabling System Technical Interface Specification, GA27-3773
• IBM Local Area Network Technical Reference, SC30-3383
• IBM Token-Ring Network Architecture Reference, SC30-3374
• Token Ring Access Method and Physical Layer Specification, IEEE Standard 802.5-1989
• IBM Token-Ring Network Guide to Small Networks, SK2T-0300
• IBM Cabling System Optical Fiber Planning and Installation Guide, GA27-3943
• IBM Local Area Network Administrator’s Guide, GA27-3748
• IBM Token-Ring Network Installation Guide, GA27-3678
• IBM Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide, SX27-3710
• IBM Local Area Network Technical Reference, SC30-3383
• IBM Token-Ring Network Architecture Reference, SC30-3374
• IBM Cabling System Technical Interface Specification, GA27-3773
• IBM 8250 Planning and Site Preparation Guide, GA33-0191
• EIA/TIA Commercial Building and Wiring, 568
• EIA/TIA Technical Systems Bulletin, Additional Cable Specifications for Unshielded Twisted Pair
Cables, TSB-36
• EIA/TIA Telecommunications Systems Bulletin, Additional Cable Specifications for Unshielded
Twisted Pair Connecting Hardware, TSB-40.
NOTE 1. IBM documents are available from: IBM Corporation Publications, P.O. Box 9046, Boulder,
Colorado 80301, Ph. 800-879-2755
NOTE 2. EIA/TIA documents are available from: Electronics Industries Association, Engineering
Department, 2001 Pennsylvania Avenue NW, Washington, DC 20006 U.S.A.
or
Global Engineering Documents, Ph. 800-854-7179 U.S.A. and Canada or (714) 261-1455
International
9-5-37
5.6.2.4 Token-Ring LAN PLC Installation - When installing a LAN PLC, verify that the jumpers on
the PLC are correctly positioned for the customer’s application.
For the Token-Ring LAN PLC, figure 5-24, position the three jumpers (W2, W3, W4) for 4 Mbps or 16
Mbps operation according to the customer installation specification or statement of work. (NOTE: If you
are on site, one of the devices on the ring should have the network manager software, which will include a
screen display indicating the speed of operation of the ring: 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps.) For the Token-Ring
PLC, verify that the Turboport Card has EPROM part numbers 1013169/70-0001B (or higher dash
number-letter). Earlier EPROMs will not operate properly with the Token-Ring PLC. Refer to FSB
1099B. The addition of a token ring local area network (TLAN) PLC (HNS P/N 1013061-0001) into a
PES indoor unit requires that Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI) reduction measures be taken in order
to meet FCC emission requirements. The EMI reduction measures include placing ferrite blocks on
cables to/from the indoor unit and possibly changes inside the indoor unit. The EMI reduction measures
differ depending upon the model/type of PES indoor unit. Perform the appropriate EMI upgrade for your
PES indoor unit as indicated in table 5-14 and FSB1130.
W2 W3
JUMPER 16 MBPS
JUMPER 16 MBPS
16 MBPS 4 MBPS
OR
W4 W4
W2 END - SIDE VIEW
16 MBPS 1013061-
W3 W5
HUGHES
TLAN PLC
JUMPER W4
W2
JUMPER
OR
W2
4 MBPS
W3 S/N
TLAN PLC
(TOP VIEW)
PES3-1373
Figure 5-24. Jumper Locations on Token-Ring LAN PLC
5.6.2.5 Token-Ring LAN PLC Cabling - As listed in table 5-17, IBM has specified two cable "media"
types for token-ring LANs:
IBM Type 1 Media Shielded Twisted Pair, "Data Grade Media"
IBM Type 3 Media Unshielded Twisted Pair, UTP, "Telephone Twisted Pair"
In addition to the above copper wire cable types, IBM also specified optical fiber for token-ring
applications for extended distances. See Token-Ring Planning Guide.
Where optical fiber is not required, the IBM Type 1 media, Shielded Twisted Pair, offers longer allowable
wiring distances than UTP. In general, IBM Type 1 media, Data Grade Media, 150-ohm shielded twisted
pair is the recommended copper cable, table 5-18. For data grade media, the 4 Mbps operation option
offers double or more allowable wiring distances than 16-Mbps operation.
9-5-38
Table 5-17. Token-Ring Cabling Methods

Maximum
Type of Cable Number Con-
(IBM Nomenclature of Nodes nector
for Cable Cable Also on Types
"Media" Type) Known As Data Rates Main Ring on TP Comment
Type 1 Shielded Data Grade 4 Mbps - 260 DB-9 Adding a fiber-optic
Twisted Pair (STP) Media greatest run link and repeaters
22 AWG length can expend network
See table 5-18 . to 10,000 ft (3 km)
16 Mbps
Type 3 Unshielded Unshielded twisted 4 Mbps - 72 DB-9 Each network device
Twisted Pair (UTP) pair media, Existing wiring - can require a Type 3
24 AWG telephone twisted UTP category 2 media filter, figure
See tables pair media, or better. 5-25
5-19 and 5-20 telephone wire, New wiring -
telephone media UTP category 3
or better.
Table 5-18. Required Characteristics of Shielded Twisted Pair Cable (STP)

for Token Ring, IBM Type 1 Media, Data Grade Media
Characteristic Impedance 150 ± 15 ohms

from 2 to 20 MHz
Maximum D.C. Resistance 17.4 ohms/1000 ft
(57.1 ohms/km)
Maximum Attenuation per 1000 ft 6.7 dB at 4 MHz
(22 dB/km)
7.6 dB at 16 MHz
(25 dB/km)
Where data grade media is not chosen or where existing UTP cable is already installed, IBM Type 3
media or better, unshielded twisted pair, UTP, may provide satisfactory operation under many
circumstances. As listed in table 5-20, UTP is available in various categories as specified by:
EIA/TIA Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard, ANSI/EIA/TIA 568,
July 1991
Additional Cable Specification for Unshielded Twisted Pair Cables, Telecommunications

Systems Bulletin, TSB-36
Additional Cable Specification for Unshielded Twisted Pair Connecting Hardware, TSB-40
The five categories represent a historical progression of increasingly improved UTP cable characteristics.
In general, a higher category UTP is acceptable for all applications in its own and lower categories.
9-5-39
Table 5-19. Required Characteristics of IBM Type 3 Media, Unshielded Twisted Pair
Wire Size 22 or 24 AWG
Description Solid Copper with a minimum of 2 twists per foot
Maximum D.C. Resistance 28.6 ohms/1000 ft

ohms/305 Km
Characteristic Impedance Nominal = 100 ± 15 ohms

90 to 120 ohms at 256 kHz
87 to 117.5 ohms at 512 kHz
85 to 114 ohms at 772 kHz
84 to 113 ohms at 1 MHz
Maximum Attenuation 4.00 dB at 256 kHz

per 1000 ft (305 Km) 5.66 dB at 512 kHz
6.73 dB at 772 kHz
8.00 dB at 1 MHz
In addition, all Type 3 ANSI/ICEA S-80-576-1983

media must meet at least REA PE-71
one of these industry Bell Systems 48007
specifications: IEC Publication 189-2
ANSI/EIA/TIA 568 Category 2 - Low-speed data

Category closest to
being comparable to
IBM Type 3 media
ANSI/EIA/TIA 568 Category 3, Data through 16 MHz

Categories that meet Category 4, Data through 20 MHz
and exceed IBM Type 3 Category 5, Data through 100 MHz
media requirements
NOTE
Previously, various cable manufacturers and vendors have classified their
UTP and STP products into assorted "levels," "types," and "categories"
which in general were not comparable across different
manufacturers/vendors. Confusion can arise. Only two cable
classification methods are mentioned here: The IBM media types, and
EIA/TIA 568 categories.
Existing installed cable should be marked with manufacturer’s part

number. The manufacturer should be able to tell if that part number
meets a EIA/TIA category specification. Alternately, the cable can be
classified by measuring its electrical characteristics with a hand-held
cable tester.
9-5-40
Table 5-20. Unshielded Twisted Pair, UTP, Cable Categories, EIA/TIA 568
Electrical Electrical
EIA/TIA Specifi- Specification Electrical Electrical
568 cation - Near End Specification Capaci- Specification
Category Frequency Crosstalk (Next) Attenuation tance Impedance Physical Application Comment
Category 1, -- . -- -- -- -- Unshielded Voice tele- May be found in older
Voice1 Twisted Pair phone very low buildings. Used for Plain
22-24 AWG speed data Old Telephone Service
(voice grade (POTS) and Low Speed
modems) Data. Not recommended
for use with HNS LAN
PLCs
Category 2, -- . -- -- -- -- Unshielded Token-Ring IBM Type 3 media meets
Low Speed Twisted Pair 4 Mbps Category 2 (table 5-19)
Data1 22-24 AWG
Category 3, 1 MHz . 41 dB/1000 ft. min. 7.3 dB/1000 ft. max. 18 pF 100 ± 15 ohms Unshielded Token Ring, HNS P/N 9007598-0002
Data thru 4 MHz . 32 dB/1000 ft. min. 16 dB/1000 ft. max. 18 pF 100 ± 15 ohms Twisted Pair 4 Mbps complies
16 MHz 10 MHz . 26 dB/1000 ft. min. 27 dB/1000 ft. max. 18 pF 100 ± 15 ohms 22-24 AWG Ethernet
16 MHz . 23 dB/1000 ft. min. 36 dB/1000 ft. max. 18 pF 100 ± 15 ohms 10 Base-T
Category 4, 1 MHz . 56 dB/1000 ft. min. 6 dB/1000 ft. max. 15 pF 100 ± 15 ohms Unshielded Token Ring,
Data thru 4 MHz . 47 dB/1000 ft. min. 12 dB/1000 ft. max. 15 pF 100 ± 15 ohms Twisted Pair 4 Mbps
20 MHz 10 MHz . 41 dB/1000 ft. min. 20 dB/1000 ft. max. 15 pF 100 ± 15 ohms 22-24 AWG Token-Ring,
16 MHz . 38 dB/1000 ft. min. 25 dB/1000 ft. max. 15 pF 100 ± 15 ohms 16 Mbps
Ethernet
10 Base-T
Category 5, 4 MHz . 53 dB/1000 ft. min. 13 dB/1000 ft. max. 14 pF 100 ± 15 ohms Unshielded Token Ring, Improved characteristics at
Data thru 10 MHz . 47 dB/1000 ft. min. 20 dB/1000 ft. max. 14 pF 100 ± 15 ohms Twisted Pair 4 Mbps increased expense
100 MHz 20 MHz . 42 dB/1000 ft. min. 28 dB/1000 ft. max. 14 pF 100 ± 15 ohms 22-24 AWG Token Ring,

100 MHz . 32 dB/1000 ft. min. 67 dB/1000 ft. max. 14 pF 100 ± 15 ohms 16 Mbps
Ethernet

10 Base-T
NOTE 1. EIA/TIA 568 does not specify electrical characteristics for Categories 1 and 2. The electrical characteristics of IBM Type 3 media, table 5-19, can be
considered sufficient for Category 2.
9-5-41
TURBO PORT CARD

WITH TOKEN-RING LAN PLC
US
MEDIA FILTER ER
PO
RT
(HNS P/N 9200417-0001) S
REQUIRED WHEN
UNSHIELDED
CA TO R IFL
TWISTED PAIR CABLE UT F
IO UN
N: IT
IS USED TU
RN
OF VID TE
(IBM TYPE 3 MEDIA) EO ST

F
PO AU
W COTO CO
NF
ER MM
IG
BE
FO
RE
CO
NN
EC
TI
NG
/D
IS
CO
NN
EC
FERRITE BLOCK TI
NG
IF
LC
REQUIRED FOR EMI AB
LE
0
SUPPRESSION l
UNSHIELDED
TWISTED PAIR CABLE
TO TOKEN-RING WIRING
CONCENTRATOR
PS31748.FH3
Figure 5-25. Token-Ring Unshielded Twisted Pair, UTP,

Requires Media Filter and Ferrite Block
9-5-42
5.7 CONNECTING DEVICES TO THE DUAL VOICE GRADE MODEM CARD (DMC)
Figure 5-26 gives the location of the connectors on the DMC. Connection of the internal DMC modem to
the MP junction box is done with a null modem cable, HNS P/N 1011279-0001 (see note 16 in figure
1-4). This cable has a DB-25 male connector on one end and a 10-pin "RJ" connector on the other, and
will be supplied by HNS. Do not substitute any other cable or attempt to fabricate this cable. For
reference only, the cable connections are shown below.
DMC/J-BOX CABLE ASSY

HNS P/N 1011279-0001
25-Pin ’D’ Male 10-Pin ’RJ’ Male

MP Junction Box Dual Modem Card
P1 P2
Pin 1 (SHIELD) <--------> Pin 1 (SHIELD)

Pin 2 (TX DATA) <--------- Pin 9 (RX DATA)
Pin 3 (RX DATA) ----------> Pin 8 (TX DATA)
Pin 4 (RTS) <--------- Pin 3 (CTS)
Pin 5 (CTS) ----------> Pin 4 (RTS)
Pin 6 (DSR) ----------> Pin 7 (DTR)
Pin 7 (GROUND) <--------> Pin 6 (GROUND)
Pin 11 (MON A) <--------- Pin 10 (DCD)
Pin 18 (MON B) <--------- Pin 2 (RI)
Pin 20 (DTR) <--------- Pin 5 (DSR)
5.7.1 SETUP OF DMC INTERNAL MODEMS

The DMC modem switches (figure 5-26) must be configured for connection method 1 or 2.
a. DMC Modem Self-Test
Apply power to the indoor unit. Note that the DMC successfully passes self test by
observing the DMC LEDs. When power is initially applied, all LED segments briefly light
(less than 1 second), then the patterns F and r may light briefly (1 second). Next, the two
vertical LED segments (modem not ready, figure 5-27) should light for approximately ten
seconds (dial-up) or stay lit until the first connection is made (leased line). The decimal
point should be blinking.
b.
c. Direct Modem-to-Modem Connect (Method 1)
The rear panel DIP switches (figure 5-26) of a DMC modem are set up for
modem-to-modem Method 1 as follows:
LEASED ANSWER AUTO DUMB
LINE MODE ANSWER MODE
closed open open closed
9-5-43
PES2-718
Figure 5-26. Setting DMC Dipswitches
9-5-44
FRONT PANEL STATUS INDICATOR LEGEND
MODEM 2
AUTO ANSWER
INDICATOR
MODEM 2 "NOT READY" LIGHT

BLANK INDICATES MODEM READY
MODEM 1 "NOT READY" LIGHT

BLANK INDICATES MODEM READY
MODEM 1
AUTO ANSWER SYSTEM STATUS INDICATOR
INDICATOR BLINKING = SYSTEM OK
PES2-794.FH3
Figure 5-27. DMC LED Indications
d. Dial-up via Telephone Line (Method 2)
The rear panel DIP switches (figure 5-26) of a DMC modem are set up for Method 2 as
follows:
open open closed closed
e. Nothing Connected to DMC Modem
When there is nothing connected to the DMC modem, place the switches as follows:
open open open closed
5.7.2 CONNECTING PHONE LINES OR EXTENSIONS TO DMC MODEM

Perform the steps below to connect a phone line or extension to the DMC modem. These connections are
referenced as note 17 on figure 1-4, page 9-1-5.
STEP 1. If an RJ-11 telephone connector is present, plug it into the appropriate jack on the DMC. If a
wall jack is provided, fabricate a short cross-pinned RJ-11 to RJ-11 cable or, if possible, use
the cable supplied with the modem.
9-5-45
STEP 2. Check that the DMC modem switches (figure 5-26) are set for dial-up.

open open closed closed
STEP 3. Label the cable near the modem with the phone or extension number, the words "PHONE
LINE," and an indication of the corresponding MP port.
STEP 4. Make an appropriate entry in the site configuration checklist.
STEP 5. Write the phone number or extension on all the dial-up inquiry device stickers used.
STEP 6. After you have connected all of the modems for dial up connection, place the appropriate
sticker on the dial up inquiry devices.
STEP 7. Request the modem telephone numbers or extensions be loaded into any dial-up inquiry
devices that have special communications software. (Not appropriate for dial TI-707 or DEC
writer.)
Table 5-21. DMC Connector Pinouts

Designator Function Pin # Signal
J1, J2 DTE RS-232 Connector 1 Shield
(RJ-10 Jack) 2 Ring Indicator (RI)
3 Clear To Send (CTS)
4 Request To Send (RTS)
5 Data Set Ready (DSR)
6 Signal Ground
7 Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
8 Transmitted Data (TXD)
9 Received Data (RXD)
10
9-5-46
4-20-94
4-20-94
SECTION 6 - CABLING VIDEO EQUIPMENT
Section 6
CABLING VIDEO EQUIPMENT
6.1 OVERVIEW
This section provides video cabling information from Ku-band only PES X000 series indoor units to
satellite video integrated receiver/descramblers (IRD). The permissible cable run lengths and the number,
placement, and type of amplifiers required (if any) depend upon:
A. The signal frequencies: "L-Band" or "VHF"
B. The type of IRD: Compression Labs Incorporated (CLI) or Scientific Atlanta (SA)/General
Instrument (GI)
C. The type of cable: non-plenum or plenum (required for fire safety in certain applications)
6.2 MATERIAL REQUIRED

Tables 6-1 and 6-2 list the recommended cable types and amplifiers. Using any other product than that
recommended may result in an output that was not confirmed, verified or acceptable. HNS field quality
assurance (FQA) cannot be responsible for the results. The products listed in the tables are available from
Anixter (Ph 800-323-8166) or Crescom Engineering (Ph 502-781-9454).
Table 6-1. Recommended Cables for PES Video
MFG Part Number Comment
Non-Plenum
CommScope 0136 PVC RG-6 cable with footage marks. Has passed
frequency sweep test. (CommScope 5298 has
passed frequency sweep test but does not have
footage marks.)
or
CommScope 5730 PVC RG-6 has not passed frequency sweep test.
Plenum
CommScope 2275 Kynar RG-6 meets fire safety requirements. (Is a
satisfactory and lower-cost substitute for
G.I./CommScope 0132 Teflon.)
9-6-1
Table 6-2. Recommended Amplifiers and Associated Equipment for PES Video Cabling
MFG Model Number Description Comment
Blonder-Tongue MVB-35 VHF Distribution Used when PES indoor unit and IRD are
(Stock No. 1450) Amplifier collocated to feed VHF ch 3/4 signal to
remote TVs. See figures 6-2 and 6-3.
DX Antenna ES-25 Line Amplifier "L-Band" line amplifier, figure 6-5.

Required by HNS with associated DC
Power Block (CP-7) and DC Power
Supply (PS-208). An acceptable
interchangeable substitute line amplifier
(for use with CP-7 and PS-208) is DX
Antenna US-3S, a discontinued
predecessor. The previously specified
Pico Macom LA-915 line amplifiers are
not acceptable for new installations.
DX Antenna CP-7 DC Power Block Blocks undesired DC and couples

desired signal and desired DC from
power supply to ES-25 amplifier.
Figures 6-7 and 6-8.
DX Antenna PS-208 DC Power Supply Provides DC power to operate ES-25

line amplifier. Figure 6-7.
6.3 VHF SIGNAL RUN

The IRD VHF channel 3/channel 4 output signal can be fed to a TV or VCR some distance away.
Typically, the IRD and PES X000 series indoor units are placed at the same location for this arrangement.
As shown in figure 6-1, the CLI or SA IRDs can supply a signal to a TV up to 750 feet away without an
external amplifier. This limitation is applicable for both plenum and non-plenum RG-6 cables, table 6-1.
For distances from 750 feet to 2000 feet (figure 6-2) or for supplying a signal to multiple TVs at various
distances, add the Blonder-Tongue MVB-35 VHF distribution amplifier, figure 6-3. When installing the
MVB-35 VHF distribution amplifier, adjust the low band gain potentiometer (channels 2 thru 6) to the
maximum position (full clockwise). Adjust the high band gain potentiometer (channels 7 thru 13) to the
minimum position (full counterclockwise). Place the FLAT/FM TRAP switch in the FM TRAP position.
If a VCR is connected in either of the above situations (with or without VHF distribution amplifier), the
VCR must be powered on so that the VCR modulator is assisting signal development.
6.4 COMPRESSION LABS INC. NOW APPROVED FOR BOTH RF UNIT & RF UNIT-LS
At the present time, the digital IRDs such as the Compression Labs Incorporated (CLI) IRD are now
recommended for use in conjunction with the RF Unit (RFU) or with the RF Unit-LS (RFU-LS). Figure
4-3 on page 2-4-4 provides visual identification for these items. (Previously, special authorization was
required from your HNS installation manager before a digital IRD could be installed with the RFU-LS).
9-6-2
NO AMPLIFIER, VHF RUN

INTEGRATED
PES X000 RECEIVER
SERIES DESCRAMBLER
INDOOR UNIT (IRD)
- CLI
IFM - SCIENTIFIC UP TO 750 FEET

ATLANTA TV
VIDEO
RG-6, APPROVED CABLE PRODUCTS ONLY - SEE TABLE 6-1
PS31721.FH3
CO-LOCATED
Figure 6-1. VHF Ch 3/4 Signal Run, No Amplifier - Plenum or Non-Plenum
VHF AMPLIFIER, VHF RUN

INTEGRATED BLONDER-TONGUE
PES X000 RECEIVER MVB-35, VHF DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
SERIES DESCRAMBLER
INDOOR UNIT (IRD)
- CLI
IFM - SCIENTIFIC UP TO 2000 FEET

ATLANTA TV
VIDEO
RG-6
APPROVED CABLE PRODUCTS ONLY
- SEE TABLE 6-1
PS31722.FH3
CO-LOCATED
Figure 6-2. VHF Ch 3/4 Signal Run with VHF Distribution Amplifier - Plenum or Non-Plenum
MVB -35
ADJUST HIGH BAND GAIN
(CHANNELS 7 TO 13) TO
MINIMUM - FULL
COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
-CCW
5 7/32"
PLACE SWITCH IN HIGH BAND GAIN
FM TRAP POSITION VHF INPUT
FLAT
OUTPUT
FM TRAP
ADJUST LOW BAND GAIN
(CHANNELS 2 TO 6) TO LOW BAND GAIN
MAXIMUM -
FULL CLOCKWISE - CW
115 VAC
PS31726.FH3 11 7/8"
Figure 6-3. Blonder-Tongue MVB-35 VHF Distribution Amplifier
9-6-3
6.5 L-BAND RUN, NO AMPLIFIER

As listed below and as shown in figure 6-4, the maximum distance between the PES X000 series indoor
unit and the IRD without using a line amplifier depends upon the IRD type and whether non-plenum or
plenum cable is required:
CLI non-plenum - up to 600 feet, figure 6-4A
CLI plenum - up to 500 feet, figure 6-4B
SA or GI non-plenum - up to 260 feet, figure 6-4C
SA or GI plenum - up to 190 feet, figure 6-4D
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A) NO AMPLIFIER, "L- BAND" RUN, NON-PLENUM, CLI

INTEGRATED
PES X000 RECEIVER
SERIES DESCRAMBLER
INDOOR UNIT (IRD)
COMPRESSION
IFM
UP TO 600 FEET LABS INC.
(CLI) ONLY TV
VIDEO
RG-6, CommScope 0136 PVC
B) NO AMPLIFIER, "L- BAND" RUN, PLENUM, CLI

INTEGRATED
PES X000 RECEIVER
SERIES DESCRAMBLER
INDOOR UNIT (IRD)
COMPRESSION
IFM
UP TO 500 FEET LABS INC.
(CLI) ONLY TV
VIDEO
RG-6, CommScope 2275K Kynar
C) NO AMPLIFIER, "L- BAND" RUN, NON-PLENUM, SA or GI

INTEGRATED
PES X000 RECEIVER
SERIES DESCRAMBLER
INDOOR UNIT (IRD)
SCIENTIFIC
ATLANTA (SA)
IFM UP TO 260 FEET
GENERAL TV
VIDEO
RG-6, CommScope 0136 PVC INSTRUMENT
(GI)
D) NO AMPLIFIER, "L- BAND" RUN, PLENUM, SA or GI

INTEGRATED
PES X000 RECEIVER
SERIES DESCRAMBLER
INDOOR UNIT (IRD)
SCIENTIFIC
ATLANTA (SA)
IFM UP TO 190 FEET
TV
VIDEO GENERAL
RG-6, CommScope 2275K Kynar INSTRUMENT
(GI)
PS31723.FH3
Figure 6-4. "L-Band" Run, No Amplifier Required
9-6-4
6.6 LINE AMPLIFIER FOR L-BAND

The HNS/FQA approved L-band line amplifier, DX Antenna ES-25, is shown in figure 6-5. When this
line amplifier is used, a CP-7 DC power block and PS-208 power supply are also required. The DC
power from the IRD is either switched off or blocked when the ES-25 is used. When an L-band line
amplifier is used, the cable run length depends upon the IRD type and whether plenum or non-plenum
cable is required. Table 6-3 provides a summary of indoor unit to IRD distances and length of cable and
number of ES-25 line amplifiers required. When using a line amplifier, use the entire length of cable
specified for each segment even though the actual distance may be less. Coil up the excess. This
precaution should prevent supplying too large a signal to the IRD.
NOTE: Prior experience with line amplifiers powered from the IRD has on occasion been
unsatisfactory. Inadequate DC power for the line amplifier has caused undesired harmonics, an
overdriving signal to the IRD, and poor signal quality.
3.75"
POWER PASS POWER PASS
GAIN +20 dB
LINE AMPLIFIER
2" INPUT DX FREQ 0.9~1.45 GHz OUTPUT
(+15 - +24VDC) ANTENNA MODEL
ES-25 (+15 - +24VDC)
MADE IN JAPAN
DX ANTENNA CO, LTD.
PS31724.FH3
Figure 6-5. DX Antenna ES-25, L-Band, Line Amplifier
Table 6-3. PES X000 Indoor Unit to IRD Cabling Summary

Distance from Length Number of Figure Reference
X000 Indoor of Cable ES-25 Line and
Unit to IRD Required Cable Type IRD Amplifiers Page Number
1 to 600 ft 1 to 600 ft Non-Plenum CommScope 0136 CLI None Fig. 6-4A, page 9-6-4
600 to 1000 ft 1000 ft Non-Plenum CommScope 0136 CLI 1 Fig. 6-7A, page 9-6-7
1000 to 1500 ft 1500 ft Non-Plenum CommScope 0136 CLI 2 Part of Fig. 6-8A, page 9-6-8
1500 to 2000 ft 2000 ft Non-Plenum CommScope 0136 CLI 3 Fig. 6-8A, page 9-6-8
1 to 500 ft 1 to 500 ft Plenum CommScope 2275K CLI None Fig. 6-4B, page 9-6-4
500 to 800 ft 800 ft Plenum CommScope 2275K CLI 1 Fig. 6-7B, page 9-6-7
800 to 1200 ft 1200 ft Plenum CommScope 2275K CLI 2 Part of Fig. 6-8B, page 9-6-8
1200 to 1600 ft 1600 ft Plenum CommScope 2275K CLI 3 Part of Fig. 6-8B, page 9-6-8
1600 to 2000 ft 2000 ft Plenum CommScope 2275K CLI 4 Fig. 6-8B, page 9-6-8
1 to 260 ft 1 to 260 ft Non-Plenum CommScope 0136 SA/GI None Fig. 6-4C, page 9-6-4
260 to 475 ft 475 ft Non-Plenum CommScope 0136 SA/GI 1 Fig. 6-9A, page 9-6-9
475 to 715 ft 715 ft Non-Plenum CommScope 0136 SA/GI 2 Top of Fig. 6-10A, p 9-6-10
715 to 955 ft 915 ft Non-Plenum CommScope 0136 SA/GI 3 Bottom of Fig. 6-10A, p 9-6-10
1 to 190 ft 1 to 190 ft Plenum CommScope 2275K SA/GI None Fig. 6-4D, page 9-6-4
190 to 370 ft 370 ft Plenum CommScope 2275K SA/GI 1 Fig. 6-9B, page 9-6-9
370 to 555 ft 555 ft Plenum CommScope 2275K SA/GI 2 Fig. 6-10B, page 9-6-10
9-6-5
6.6.1 COMPRESSION LABS INCORPORATED (CLI)

For a CLI IRD with non-plenum cable, refer to figure 6-7A. Place the CP-7 DC Block so that the DC
power from the PS-208 power supply reaches the ES-25 line amplifier (blocking capacitor is away from
ES-25). On the CLI IRD rear panel, figure 6-6, place the LNB DC switch to the off position (alternate
labeling: LNB). You may need to test the DISH input F connector with a voltmeter if the OFF position
is not labeled (some units). As shown in figure 6-7A, the run length for CLI one amplifier non-plenum is
1000 feet. Use the full 1000 feet in the run. Excess cable in the run should be coiled and secured in
inconspicuous location such as above the false ceiling if available.
For CLI one amplifier plenum, cable the run length is 800 feet, figure 6-7B. Again use the entire 800 feet
in the run.
If the distance between the the PES X000 series indoor unit and the CLI IRD exceeds 1000 feet for
non-plenum cable (or 800 feet for plenum cable), you will need to add a second or third ES-25 line
amplifier. Refer to figure 6-8A for non-plenum cable runs up to 2000 feet total (three line amplifiers) and
figure 6-8B for plenum runs up to 2000 feet total (four line amplifiers).
SpectrumSaver
SELECT
CLI IRD FRONT PANEL
CH3 LNB DC
DISH RCVR
CH4
SAT
TV ANT
TV OUT
AUDIO
DATA
VIDEO LEFT RIGHT
CLI IRD REAR PANEL

VCR-CNRL
LNB-POL
OPPOR
RS-232
AUDIO
DATA EXPANSION UNIT (DEU)

PS31727.FH3
Figure 6-6. Compression Labs Incorporated (CLI) IRD
9-6-6
A) ONE AMPLIFIER, "L- BAND" RUN, NON-PLENUM, CLI

INTEGRATED
PES X000 RECEIVER
SERIES DESCRAMBLER
INDOOR UNIT (IRD)
DC Power Block 1000 FEET COMPRESSION
LABS INC.
IFM ES-25 (CLI) ONLY TV
VIDEO Line Amp. DISH
CP-7
RG-6
CommScope 0136 PVC
GND (For distances from 600 to 1000 ft, NOTE

always use 1000 ft of cable in run. Place CLI LNB switch
+24 V DC Coil up any excess cable.) in off position.
ANTENNA
DX
DX ANTENNA
DC Power Supply
PS-208
+20V DC GND
120 VAC
B) ONE AMPLIFIER, "L- BAND" RUN, PLENUM, CLI

INTEGRATED
PES X000 RECEIVER
SERIES DESCRAMBLER
INDOOR UNIT (IRD)
DC Power Block 800 FEET COMPRESSION
LABS INC.
IFM ES-25 (CLI) ONLY TV
VIDEO CP-7 Line Amp. DISH
RG-6
CommScope 2275K Kynar
(For distances from 500 to 800 ft, NOTE
always use 800 ft of cable in run. Place CLI LNB switch
120 VAC PS-208 Coil up any excess cable.) in off position.
PS31725.FH3
Figure 6-7. Using One ES-25 Line Amplifier, "L-Band" Run, CLI IRD
9-6-7
A) UP TO THREE AMPLIFIERS, "L- BAND" RUN, NON-PLENUM, CLI
PES X000 INTEGRATED

SERIES RECEIVER
INDOOR UNIT DESCRAMBLER
ES-25 ES-25 ES-25 (IRD)
1000 FT 500 FT 500 FT
COMPRESSION
IFM 2nd 3rd LABS INC.
Line (CLI) ONLY
VIDEO CP-7 Amp. Line Line
RG-6 Amp. 0136 PVC Amp. 0136 PVC DISH
CommScope
0136 PVC
(For distances from 1000 (For distances from 1500
120 VAC PS-208 to 1500 ft, always use to 2000 ft, always use
500 ft of cable in run after 500 ft of cable in run after
2nd amplifier. Coil up any 3rd amplifier. Coil up any
excess cable.) excess cable.)
TV
B) UP TO FOUR AMPLIFIERS, "L- BAND" RUN, PLENUM, CLI

INTEGRATED
PES X000 RECEIVER
SERIES DESCRAMBLER
INDOOR UNIT ES-25 ES-25 ES-25 ES-25 (IRD)
800 FT 400 FT 400 FT 400 FT
COMPRESSION
LABS INC.
IFM 2nd 3rd 4th (CLI) ONLY
Line Line Line
VIDEO CP-7 Amp. Line
Amp. Amp. DISH
RG-6 Amp. 2275K Kynar 2275K Kynar 2275K Kynar
CommScope
2275K Kynar
120 VAC PS-208
(For distances from (For distances from (For distances from
800 to 1200 ft, always 1200 to 1600 ft, always 1600 to 2000 ft, always
use 400 ft of cable in use 400 ft of cable in use 400 ft of cable in
PS31728.FH3 run after 2nd amplifier. run after 3rd amplifier. run after 4th amplifier.
Coil up any excess Coil up any excess Coil up any excess
cable.) cable.) cable.)
TV
Figure 6-8. Using Multiple ES-25 Line Amplifiers, "L-Band" Run, CLI IRD
9-6-8
6.6.2 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA (SA) OR GENERAL INSTRUMENT (GI)

For a GI or SA IRD for non-plenum cable, refer to figure 6-9A. Place the CP-7 DC block between the
last ES-25 line amplifier and the IRD. Position the CP-7 so that the blocking capacitor is closest to the
IRD and so that the DC from the PS-208 power supply reaches the ES-25 line amplifier. For the SA and
GI IRDs there is no switch to turn off the DC on the input connector; therefore, the CP-7 must be placed
as shown between the last line amplifier and the IRD.
As shown in figure 6-9A, the run length for SA or GI one-amplifier non-plenum is 475 feet. Use the full
475 feet in the two segments as shown: 120 ft and 355 ft. Excess cable in a segment should be coiled and
secured in an inconspicuous location such as above the false ceiling if available.
For SA or GI one-amplifier plenum cable the run length is 370 feet, figure 6-9B. Again, use the entire
370 feet in the segments as shown.
If the distance between the PES X000 series indoor unit and the SA or GI IRD exceeds 475 feet for
non-plenum cable (or 370 feet for plenum cable), you will need to add a second or third ES-25 line
amplifier. Refer to figure 6-10A for non-plenum cable runs up to 955 feet total (three line amplifiers) and
figure 6-10B for plenum runs up to 555 feet total.
A) ONE AMPLIFIER, "L- BAND" RUN, NON-PLENUM, SA & GI

475 FT INTEGRATED
PES X000
SERIES 120 FT 355 FT RECEIVER
DESCRAMBLER
INDOOR UNIT (IRD)
DC Power
Block SCIENTIFIC
ATLANTA (SA)
IFM ES-25 GENERAL TV
VIDEO INSTRUMENT
Line Amp.
ANTENNA
DX
Always use the entire RG-6 CommScope (GI)

run length for each 0136 PVC
cable segment. Coil
+24 V DC
up any excess cable
in a segment.
GND
CP-7
DX ANTENNA
+20V DC
DC Power Supply GND
PS-208
120 VAC
B) ONE AMPLIFIER, "L- BAND" RUN, PLENUM, SA & GI
PES X000 370 FT INTEGRATED

RECEIVER
SERIES 95 FT 275 FT DESCRAMBLER
INDOOR UNIT (IRD)
DC Power SCIENTIFIC
Block ATLANTA (SA)
IFM ES-25 GENERAL TV
VIDEO Line Amp. CP-7 INSTRUMENT
RG-6 CommScope (GI)
2275K Kynar
Always use the entire

run length for each 120 VAC PS-208
cable segment. Coil
up any excess cable
PS31729.FH3 in a segment.
Figure 6-9. Using One ES-25 Line Amplifier, "L-Band" Run, SA or GI IRD
9-6-9
A) UP TO THREE AMPLIFIERS, "L- BAND" RUN, NON-PLENUM, SA & GI
PES X000 715 FT

SERIES INTEGRATED
RECEIVER
INDOOR UNIT 120 FT 240 FT 355 FT DESCRAMBLER
ES-25 ES-25 (IRD)
2nd SCIENTIFIC
IFM Line ATLANTA (SA)
VIDEO Line CP-7 GENERAL
Amp. Amp. 0136 PVC
RG-6 INSTRUMENT
CommScope (GI)
0136 PVC Always use the entire
run length for each 120 VAC PS-208
cable segment. Coil
up any excess cable
in a segment.
TV
PES X000 955 FT INTEGRATED

SERIES RECEIVER
INDOOR UNIT 120 FT 240 FT 240 FT 355 FT DESCRAMBLER
ES-25 ES-25 ES-25 (IRD)
SCIENTIFIC
IFM 2nd 3rd ATLANTA (SA)
VIDEO Line Line Line CP-7
Amp. GENERAL
Amp. 0136 PVC Amp. INSTRUMENT
RG-6 (GI)
CommScope
0136 PVC
120 VAC PS-208

run length for each
cable segment. Coil
up any excess cable TV
in a segment.
B) UP TO TWO AMPLIFIERS, "L- BAND" RUN, PLENUM, SA & GI
PES X000 555 FT

SERIES INTEGRATED
RECEIVER
INDOOR UNIT 95 FT 190 FT 275 FT DESCRAMBLER
ES-25 ES-25 (IRD)
2nd SCIENTIFIC
IFM Line ATLANTA (SA)
VIDEO Line CP-7 GENERAL
Amp. Amp.
RG-6 RG-6 INSTRUMENT
CommScope CommScope (GI)
2275K Kynar 2275K Kynar
120 VAC PS-208
run length for each
cable segment. Coil
up any excess cable
in a segment.
PS31730.FH3 TV
Figure 6-10. Using Multiple ES-25 Line Amplifiers, "L-Band" Run, SA or GI IRD
9-6-10
9-16-94
Section 7
HNS PREFABRICATED CABLES AND RELATED ITEMS
7.1 INTRODUCTION
This section lists HNS part numbers for cables and related items. The first subsection lists HNS
prefabricated cables in ascending HNS part number order with connector types and pinouts. Customer
names are given for reference to the appropriate installation specification only. Cables are not specific to
a given customer. When the pinout is appropriate, a cable may be used by any customer. When a cable is
needed, check this list to see if an HNS prefabricated cable already exists as required.
Part numbers are also listed for:

Cable Kits page 9-7-17
Miscellaneous Related Items page 9-7-20
IFL Cables page 9-7-21
7.2 HNS PREFABRICATED PES CABLES

Data Cables
______________________________________________________________________________
1008383-2253 See cable P/N 1011689-0001
______________________________________________________________________________
1010490-0001 Male DB-25 10 Pin RJ-45 Plug
12 ft. 3-----------------------2
2-----------------------3
GM-ADP 4-----------------------4
5-----------------------5
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
20-----------------------9
22----------------------10
______________________________________________________________________________
1010490-0002 Female DB-25 10 Pin RJ-45 Plug
12 ft. 3-----------------------2
2-----------------------3
GM-ADP 4-----------------------4
5-----------------------5
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
20-----------------------9
22----------------------10
9-7-1
______________________________________________________________________________
1010491-0001 Male DB-25 Male DB-25
12 ft. 3-----------------------2
2-----------------------3
GM-ADP 4-----------------------4
5-----------------------5
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
20----------------------20
22----------------------22
______________________________________________________________________________
1010491-0002 Male DB-25 Female DB-25
12 ft. 3-----------------------2
2-----------------------3
GM-ADP 4-----------------------4
5-----------------------5
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
20----------------------20
22----------------------22
______________________________________________________________________________
1011116-0002 4 Pin RJ-11 Plug 4 Pin RJ-11 Plug
6 ft. 2-----------------------5
3-----------------------4
Chrysler 4-----------------------3
Eddie Bauer 5-----------------------2
Sterling
______________________________________________________________________________
12 ft. 1-----------------------1
2-----------------------9
Chrysler 3-----------------------8
4-----------------------3
5-----------------------4
6-----------------------7
7-----------------------6
11----------------------10
18----------------------2
20----------------------5
______________________________________________________________________________
1011681-0001 Male DB-25 Female DB-9
12 ft. 2-----------------------3
3-----------------------2
Chrysler 4-----------------------7
Sterling 5-----------------------8
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------5
8-----------------------1
20----------------------4
9-7-2
SECTION 7 - HNS PREFABRICATED CABLES AND RELATED ITEMS
______________________________________________________________________________
1011682-0001 Male DB-25 Male DB-25
12 ft. 1-----------------------1
13-----------------------2
Chrysler 12-----------------------3
7-----------------------7
______________________________________________________________________________
12 ft. 1-----------------------8
2-----------------------7
Chrysler 3-----------------------6
4-----------------------5
5-----------------------4
6-----------------------3
7-----------------------2
8-----------------------1
______________________________________________________________________________
12 ft. 2-----------------------6
3-----------------------7
Chrysler 4-----------------------2
5-----------------------1
6-----------------------3
7-----------------------4
8-----------------------8
20----------------------5
______________________________________________________________________________
12 ft. 1-----------------------2
2-----------------------3
Chrysler 3-----------------------4
7-----------------------5
______________________________________________________________________________
12 ft. 1-----------------------5
7-----------------------2
Chrysler 12-----------------------3
13-----------------------4
9-7-3
______________________________________________________________________________
1011689-0001 Male DB-25 Male DB-25
and
1008383-2253 1-----------------------1
2-----------------------3
Chrysler 3-----------------------2
Cracker Barrel 4-----------------------5
5-----------------------4
6-----------------------20
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------11
11----------------------8
15----------------------25
17----------------------24
18----------------------22
20----------------------6
22----------------------18
24----------------------17
25----------------------15
______________________________________________________________________________
1012694-0001 Male DB-25 Male DB-25
12 ft. 2-----------------------2
3-----------------------3
GM-ADP 4-----------------------4
Texaco 5-----------------------5
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
20---------------------20
22---------------------22
______________________________________________________________________________
1012694-0002 Male DB-25 Female DB-25
12 ft. 2-----------------------2
3-----------------------3
GM-ADP/ATS/COIN/DPC/ 4-----------------------4
DYC/EDS/REY 5-----------------------5
Texaco 6-----------------------6
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
20---------------------20
22---------------------22
______________________________________________________________________________
1012695-0001 Male DB-25 Male DB-25
12 ft. 2-----------------------2
3-----------------------3
GM-COIN 4-----------------------4
5-----------------------5
7-----------------------7
6---|
8---|-------------------8
20---------------------20
22---------------------22
9-7-4
______________________________________________________________________________
12 ft. 2-----------------------1
3-----------------------6
GM-REY 4-----------------------2
5-----------------------7
6-----------------------3
7-----------------------8
8-----------------------4
20----------------------9
22----------------------5
______________________________________________________________________________
12 ft. 2-----------------------2
3-----------------------3
Ford 4-----------------------4
DYC/EDS/REY/UCS 6-----------------------6
Texaco 7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
20----------------------9
22---------------------10
______________________________________________________________________________
12 ft. 2-----------------------2
3-----------------------3
DYC/EDS/REY 5-----------------------5
Texaco 6-----------------------6
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
20----------------------9
22---------------------10
______________________________________________________________________________
12 ft. 2-----------------------2
3-----------------------3
GM-COIN/REY 4-----------------------4
5-----------------------5
7-----------------------7
6---|
8---|-------------------8
20----------------------9
22---------------------10
9-7-5
______________________________________________________________________________
12 ft. 1-----------------------2
2-----------------------4
GM-REY 3-----------------------6
4-----------------------8
5----------------------10
6-----------------------3
7-----------------------5
8-----------------------7
9-----------------------9
______________________________________________________________________________
1012700-0001 Male DB-25 Male DB-25
12 ft. 2-----------------------2
3-----------------------3
GM-ADP/UCS 4-----------------------4
5-----------------------5
6----------------------22
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
20---------------------20
______________________________________________________________________________
12 ft. 2-----------------------2
3-----------------------3
GM-ADP/UCS 4-----------------------4
5-----------------------5
6----------------------10
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
20----------------------9
______________________________________________________________________________
1012702-0001 Male DB-25 Female DB-25
12 ft. 2-----------------------3
3-----------------------2
GM-ATS 4-----------------------8
7-----------------------7
8-------------------|---4
|--20
20----------------------6
______________________________________________________________________________
12 ft. 3-----------------------2
2-----------------------3
GM-ATS 8-----------------------4
5
6
7-----------------------7
4---|-------------------8
20---|
6-----------------------9
9-7-6
______________________________________________________________________________
1014226-0001 Male DB-25 8 Pin RJ-45 and 4 Pin RJ-11
12 ft. 1-----------------------1 This cable has one

2-----------------------2 DB-25 connector,
CVS/PEOPLES 3-----------------------3 and branches into
Safeway 4-----------------------4 RJ-45 and RJ-11
Eddie Bauer 5-----------------------5 connectors.
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
15----------------------1
17----------------------2
20----------------------3
22----------------------4
______________________________________________________________________________
1014226-0002 Female DB-25 8 Pin RJ-45 and 4 Pin RJ-11
12 ft. 1-----------------------1 This cable has one

2-----------------------2 DB-25 connector,
CVS/PEOPLES 3-----------------------3 and branches into
Safeway 4-----------------------4 RJ-45 and RJ-11
5-----------------------5 connectors.
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
15----------------------1
17----------------------2
20----------------------3
22----------------------4
______________________________________________________________________________
20 ft. 2-----------------------3
3-----------------------2
4-----------------------7
CVS/PEOPLES 5-----------------------8
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------5
8-----------------------1
20----------------------4
22----------------------9
______________________________________________________________________________
1014228-0001 Male DB-25 Female DB-25
20 ft. 1-----------------------1
2-----------------------2
3-----------------------3
CVS 4-----------------------4
Safeway 5-----------------------5
Texaco 6-----------------------6
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
15---------------------15
17---------------------17
20---------------------20
22---------------------22
9-7-7
______________________________________________________________________________
1014229-0001 Male DB-25 Male DB-25
6 ft. 1-----------------------1
2-----------------------2
CVS 3-----------------------3
Texaco 4-----------------------4
5-----------------------5
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
15---------------------15
17---------------------17
20---------------------20
22---------------------22
______________________________________________________________________________
1014921-0001 Male DB-25 Male DB-25
MPC Junction Box LDM
6 ft. 1-----------------------1
2-----------------------3
Eddie Bauer 3-----------------------2
Sterling 4-----------------------5
5-----------------------4
6----------------------20
7-----------------------7
8----------------------18
11----------------------8
16---------------------25
17---------------------24
20----------------------6
22---------------------21
24---------------------17
25---------------------15
9-7-8
______________________________________________________________________________
1015744-0001 Male DB-25 Female DB-25
4 ft. 1-----------------------1
2-----------------------2
3-----------------------3
Merrill Lynch 4-----------------------4
ADP - Market Data 5-----------------------5
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
9-----------------------9
10---------------------10
11---------------------11
12---------------------12
13---------------------13
14---------------------14
15---------------------15
16---------------------16
17---------------------17
18---------------------18
19---------------------19
20---------------------20
21---------------------21
22---------------------22
23---------------------23
24---------------------24
25---------------------25
______________________________________________________________________________
1015744-0002 Male DB-25 Female DB-25
20 ft. 1-----------------------1
2-----------------------2
3-----------------------3
Merrill Lynch 4-----------------------4
ADP - Market Data 5-----------------------5
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
9-----------------------9
10---------------------10
11---------------------11
12---------------------12
13---------------------13
14---------------------14
15---------------------15
16---------------------16
17---------------------17
18---------------------18
19---------------------19
20---------------------20
21---------------------21
22---------------------22
23---------------------23
24---------------------24
25---------------------25
9-7-9
______________________________________________________________________________
4 ft. 3-----------------------4
7-----------------------5
Merrill Lynch
Page Pool
______________________________________________________________________________
20 ft. 3-----------------------4
7-----------------------5
Merrill Lynch
Page Pool
______________________________________________________________________________
1015746-0001 Male DB-25 Two wires
4 ft. 3-----------------------X
7-----------------------X
Merrill Lynch
NYSE Ticker
______________________________________________________________________________
20 ft. 3-----------------------X
7-----------------------X
Merrill Lynch
NYSE Ticker
______________________________________________________________________________
1015747-0001 RCA Jack Two wires
4 ft. Center conductor (red)--X

Ground (BLK)------------X
Merrill Lynch
Squawk
______________________________________________________________________________
1015747-0002 RCA Jack Two wires
20 ft. Center conductor (red)--X

Ground (BLK)------------X
Merrill Lynch
Squawk
______________________________________________________________________________
1015797-0001 Female DB-25 Two wires
4 ft. 3-----------------------X
7-----------------------X
Merrill Lynch
Secondary NYSE
9-7-10
______________________________________________________________________________
20 ft. 3-----------------------X
7-----------------------X
Merrill Lynch
Secondary NYSE
______________________________________________________________________________
25 ft. 2-----------------------3
3-----------------------2
Texaco 4-----------------------7
5-----------------------8
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------5
8-----------------------1
20----------------------4
22----------------------9
______________________________________________________________________________
25 ft. 1-----------------------8
2-----------------------3
Texaco 3-----------------------2
4-----------------------9
5-----------------------7
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------4
8-----------------------5
9----------------------10
______________________________________________________________________________
1018457-0001 Male DB-25 Female DB-25
12 ft. 2-----------------------2
3-----------------------3
Ford 4-----------------------4
5-----------------------5
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------7
8-----------------------8
15---------------------15
17---------------------17
20---------------------20
______________________________________________________________________________
1018548-0001 Male DB-25 RJ-45 Plug
__ ft. 2-----------------------1
3-----------------------2
Ford 4-----------------------3
5-----------------------4
6-----------------------5
7-----------------------6
8-----------------------7
15----------------------8
17----------------------9
20---------------------10
9-7-11
______________________________________________________________________________
1018549-0001 Female DB-25 RJ-45 Plug
__ ft. 2-----------------------1
3-----------------------2
Ford 4-----------------------3
5-----------------------4
6-----------------------5
7-----------------------6
8-----------------------7
15----------------------8
17----------------------9
20---------------------10
______________________________________________________________________________
12 ft. 2-----------------------3
3-----------------------2
Ford 4-----------------------7
5-----------------------8
6-----------------------6
7-----------------------5
8-----------------------1
20----------------------4
22----------------------9
______________________________________________________________________________
1018556-0001 Female DB-9 RJ-45 Plug
__ ft. 3-----------------------2
2-----------------------3
Ford 7-----------------------4
8-----------------------5
6-----------------------6
5-----------------------7
1-----------------------8
4-----------------------9
9----------------------10
______________________________________________________________________________
3001464-0001
Loopback Connector
Amoco Male DB-25
2-|
3-|
9-7-12
______________________________________________________________________________
3001484-0001 Male DB-25 Female DB-25
20 ft. Shield/Shell--1
2_____ _______ _____2 Shielded
Amoco \ / \ / Twisted
X X Pair
7_____/ \_______/ \_____7
7_____ _______ _____7
\ / \ /
X X
3_____/ \_______/ \_____3
4_____ _______ _____4
\ / \ /
X X
5_____/ \_______/ \_____5
6_____ _______ _____6
\ / \ /
X X
8_____/ \_______/ \_____8
15_____ _______ _____15
\ / \ /
X X
17_____/ \_______/ \_____17
20_______________________20
______________________________________________________________________________
6 ft. 2-----------------------5
3-----------------------4
Chrysler 4-----------------------3
5-----------------------2
______________________________________________________________________________
9007172-0001 Male DB-9 MAU connector

Cracker Barrel/
Merrill Lynch 1----------Green--------4
5----------Black--------1
Black Box Cable 6----------Red----------3
EVNTRD-0030 9----------Orange-------2
30 ft.
______________________________________________________________________________
Cracker Barrel 2-----------------------1

Waldenbooks 3-----------------------2
4-----------------------3
5-----------------------4
6-----------------------5
7-----------------------6
9-7-13
______________________________________________________________________________
Cracker Barrel 3-----------------------1

Waldenbooks 2-----------------------2
20----------------------3
7-----------------------4
6-----------------------5
8-----------------------6
______________________________________________________________________________
6 ft., Grey 1-----------------------1

2-----------------------2
A. G. Edwards 3-----------------------3
4-----------------------4
5-----------------------5
6-----------------------6
______________________________________________________________________________
6 ft., Beige 1-----------------------1

2-----------------------2
A. G. Edwards 3-----------------------3
4-----------------------4
5-----------------------5
6-----------------------6
______________________________________________________________________________
15 ft. 2-----------------------5
3-----------------------4
Galaxy Classroom 4-----------------------3
[22,23] 5-----------------------2
______________________________________________________________________________
(RJ-12) (RJ-12)
15 ft. 1-----------------------6
2-----------------------5
[21] 4-----------------------3
5-----------------------2
6-----------------------1
______________________________________________________________________________
(RJ-12) (RJ-12)
6 ft. 1-----------------------6
2-----------------------5
[1] 4-----------------------3
5-----------------------2
6-----------------------1
9-7-14
______________________________________________________________________________
9200292-0001 50 Pin Telco Connector 6 Pin RJ-11 Plugs (RJ-12)
(RJ-21)
Pin No. Plug No.
5 ft. 50----------------------x This cable has
49----------------------x one 50 pin
Galaxy Classroom 48----------------------6 connector, and
[8,9,13] 47----------------------1 8 branches into
46----------------------5 8 RJ-11 plugs,
45----------------------2 numbered 1 thru 8
44----------------------3
43----------------------4
42----------------------6
41----------------------1
40----------------------5 7
39----------------------2
38----------------------3
37----------------------4
36----------------------6
35----------------------1
34----------------------5 6
33----------------------2
32----------------------3
31----------------------4
30----------------------6
29----------------------1
28----------------------5 5
27----------------------2
26----------------------3
25----------------------4
24----------------------6
23----------------------1
22----------------------5 4
21----------------------2
20----------------------3
19----------------------4
18----------------------6
17----------------------1
16----------------------5 3
15----------------------2
14----------------------3
13----------------------4
12----------------------6
11----------------------1
10----------------------5 2
9-----------------------2
8-----------------------3
7-----------------------4
6-----------------------6
5-----------------------1
4-----------------------5 1
3-----------------------2
2-----------------------3
1-----------------------4
9-7-15
______________________________________________________________________
9200301-0001 Male DB-9 (DA-9) 6 Pin RJ-11 Jack (RJ-12)
Adapter 1-----------------------1
(Mod-Tap) 2-----------------------3
[32] 4-----------------------2
5-----------------------5
9-----------------------6
______________________________________________________________________________
7 ft. 2-----------------------5
3-----------------------4
[10] 5-----------------------2
______________________________________________________________________________
9200350-0001 Male DB-25 User Device V.35
7---GND -------------B GND

4---RTS -------------C RTS
Safeway 5---CTS -------------D CTS
Bed, Bath & Beyond 6---DSR -------------E DSR
SHIELD -------------A PGND
8---CD -------------F CD
20---DTR -------------H DTR
24---RCLK- -------------V SCR(A)
18---RCLK+ -------------X SCR(B)
15---TCLK- -------------Y SCT(A)
17---TCLK+ -------------a SCT(B)
3---RXDAT- -------------R RD(A)
22---RXDAT+ -------------T RD(B)
2---TDAT- -------------P SD(A)
11---TDAT+ -------------S SD(B)
(DCE) (DTE)
______________________________________________________________________________
9200393-0001 Cross-over, twisted pair
(Anixter P/N XANBR14-6) shielded
RJ-45 Plug RJ-45 Plug
12 ft. 1_____ _______ _____3

\ / \ /
X X
2_____/ \_______/ \_____6
Northern Automotive 3_____ _______ _____1
\ / \ /
X X
6_____/ \_______/ \_____2
9-7-16
______________________________________________________________________________
9200393-0002 Straight-thru, twisted pair
(Anixter P/N XANBR14-5) shielded
RJ-45 Plug RJ-45 Plug
12 ft. 1_____ _______ _____1

\ / \ /
X X
2_____/ \_______/ \_____2
Northern Automotive 3_____ _______ _____3
\ / \ /
X X
6_____/ \_______/ \_____6
______________________________________________________________________________
Cable Kits
______________________________________________________________________________
1015832-0001 Cable Kit includes:
Part Qty
Merrill Lynch 1015747-0001 1
1015744-0001 1
1015745-0001 1
1015746-0001 1
1015797-0001 1
9007172-0001 1
______________________________________________________________________________
1015832-0002 Cable Kit includes:
Part Qty
Merrill Lynch 1015747-0002 1
1015744-0002 1
1015745-0002 1
1015746-0002 1
9007172-0001 1
______________________________________________________________________________
1014567-0001 Wall Plate Kit includes:
Part Qty
CVS 9006982-0003 2 Wallplates
Safeway 9006982-0002 2 RJ-45 connectors
Eddie Bauer 9006982-0001 2 RJ-11 connectors
Texaco
Northern Automotive
______________________________________________________________________________
1011383-0002 Cable Kit includes: (Primary install kit)
Part Qty
Chrysler 1011681-0001 1
1011685-0001 1
1011685-0002 2
9006396-0001 2
9-7-17
______________________________________________________________________________
1011383-0003 Cable Kit includes: (Secondary Tandon /TI707 kit)
Part Qty
Chrysler 1011683-0001 1
1011684-0001 1
9006396-0003 2
9006396-0001 2
9006301-0002 1
______________________________________________________________________________
1011383-0004 Cable Kit includes: (IRD Cable kit)
Part Qty
Chrysler 1011685-0001 1
1011685-0002 1
9006396-0001 2
______________________________________________________________________________
1011383-0005 Cable Kit includes: (Secondary Tandon kit)
Part Qty
Chrysler 1011683-0001 1
1011684-0001 1
9006396-0003 21
______________________________________________________________________________
1011383-0006 Cable Kit includes: (TI707 kit)
Part Qty
Chrysler 9006396-0001 2
9006301-0002 2
______________________________________________________________________________
3001060-0001 Cable Kit includes: (School Office Cable Kit)
Part Qty
Galaxy Classroom 9200290-0001 1
9200293-0001 1
9200292-0001 1
9200302-0001 1
9200291-0001 1
9200301-0001 1
9202443-0138 2
9201142-0117 2
9200286-0001 1
9200283-0001 1
9200283-0002 1
9200301-0001 1
______________________________________________________________________________
3001061-0012 Cable Kit includes: (Classroom Kit)
Part Qty
Galaxy Classroom 9200288-0001 3
9200287-0001 4
9200284-0001 6
9200283-0002 1
______________________________________________________________________________
3003501-0001 Installation Kit:
Part Qty
AGE Voice Equipment 3000343-0001 Interface box 1
9200202-0001 Cable 1
9200202-0002 Cable 1
3000342-0001 Cable 1
32673-3,-4 Velcro Strip Set 1
3000341 Install Instructions1
9-7-18
______________________________________________________________________________
9007477-0001 Kit, install 10 Base-T LAN
EIA Category 5
Capital Holding
Part Number Mfg. Description Qty.

----------- ---- ----------- ----
MT-17-0121-01 MODTAP Single-gang wallplate 2
MT-17-121D-01 MODTAP Double-gang wallplate 1
MT-17-51-YY-01 MODTAP Dual port module: RJ-45, EIA 568B 5
MT-17-51-YO-01 MODTAP Single port module: RJ-45, EIA 568B 2
MT-17-0433-01 MODTAP Blanking module 5
CEC 1780 CRES Cable RJ-45 male to RJ-45, 7 feet, 7
Category 5
______________________________________________________________________________
Miscellaneous Related Items
1015233-0001, Modem, limited distance - Eddie Bauer
1015434-0001, EMI upgrade kit for model 8000 or 6000 DIU
1006976-0021, Fiber Optic Cable, Vendor P/N: LITE, JMP-200,

UL plenum rated, 200 ft
100697609922, Fiber Optic Cable, Vendor P/N: LITE, JMP-400,

UL plenum rated, 400 ft
9001142-0117, BNC 50 Ohm Terminator, AMP 221629-9 - Galaxy Classroom [34]
9001142-9951, BNC 50 ohm terminator
9002443-0137, BNC "T" connector
9002443-0138, BNC "T", Connector, AMP 413592-2 - Galaxy Classroom [33]
9006247-0001, Telco cable, 8 wire - Chrysler
9006247-0002, Telco cable, 4 wire - Chrysler
9006396-0001, Wall Plate, RJ11, 4 conductor, Terminal lug - Chrysler
9006396-0003, Wall Plate, RJ45, 8 conductor, Terminal lug - Chrysler
9006582-0001, Wall Plates, Krone Punchdown, 10 wire, kit contains two

wallplates - GM/Texaco/Ford
9006583-0001, Telco, Unshielded Twisted Pair, 12 wire - GM/Capital Holding/

Cracker Barrel/CVS/Ford/Peoples/Eddie Bauer/Safeway/Texaco
9006982-0003, Wall Plates, double gang RJ-45 and RJ-11, 12 wire - CVS/
Northern Automotive/Peoples/Safeway/Texaco/Eddie Bauer
9007477-0002, Tool, 110 punch down disposable - Capital Holding
9007598-0002, Unshielded Twisted Pair Cable, UTP - 6 pair (12 wire)

Plenum complies with EIA/TIA 568, Category 3 - Northern
Automotive, Eddie Bauer
9-7-19
9100286-0001, Star Jumper, ISG P/N CC-599 - Galaxy Classroom [2.10.2]
9200283-0001, 6 outlet strip with surge suppressor, 15 ft. cord - Galaxy

Classroom [2.13.1]
9200283-0002, 6 outlet strip with surge suppressor, 6 ft. cord - Galaxy

Classroom [2.13.2]
9200284-0001, Wall Plate, three RJ45 jacks, Video ’F’ bulkhead, 110 punchdown
- Galaxy Classroom [3.7]
9200285-0001, Wiring block, ISG P/N CC110-CFG - Galaxy Classroom [2.14]
9200300-0001, Telco cable, 8 wire - Galaxy Classroom

______________________________________________________________________________
INSTALLER SUPPLIED :
Anixter part #106711, RJ45 wall plate, 8 conductor, Terminal Lug - Cracker
Barrel
Radio Shack #26-1388, DB-25 to DB-9 adapter - GM/Cracker Barrel/CVS

______________________________________________________________________________
IFL Cables*
______________________________________________________________________________
Type 1 IFL Cable
Cable Connector Kit
71289-1, shielded, 9 pair 24 AWG PVC cable 70331-1, Installation Kit

71289-2, shielded, 9 pair 24 AWG Teflon cable for AWG 24 cable
71289-3, shielded, 9 pair 22 AWG PVC cable 70331-3, Installation Kit

71289-4, shielded, 9 pair 22 AWG Teflon cable for AWG 22 cable
______________________________________________________________________________
Type 2/X000 IFL Cable
Cable Connector Kit
1010810-0001, coaxial cable, PVC 9006284-0003

1010807-0001, coaxial cable, Teflon 9006284-0003
______________________________________________________________________________
Heliax Cable, 3/8"
Andrew P/N Description

----------- -----------
No HNS number LDF2RN-50 Riser-rated coax 3/8"
No HNS number L42N Connector male N for 3/8"
No HNS number L42W Connector female N for 3/8"
______________________________________________________________________________
*Refer to HNS-VSAT INFORMATION BULLETIN 090 for Underwriters Laboratories ratings of IFL cables.
9-7-20
______________________________________________________________________________
Heliax Cable, 1/2"

----------- -----------
9001684-0016 LDF4-50A Non-plenum coax 1/2"
9001684-0005 FT4-50T Plenum coax 1/2"
9001683-0003 L44AW Connector male N for 1/2"
9001683-0001 L44PW Connector male N for 1/2" -
silver plated body, gold plated
inner connector
9001683-0002 L44PN Connector female N for 1/2" -
inner connector
9001683-0005 43716-7 Connector right-angle male N for 1/2"
______________________________________________________________________________
Heliax Cable, 7/8"

----------- -----------
9001684-0006 FT5-50T Plenum coax 7/8"
9001683-0006 L45W Connector male N for 7/8"
______________________________________________________________________________

----------- -----------
No HNS number LDF6-50 Non-plenum coax 1 1/4"
9001684-0003 LDF6RN-50 Riser-rated coax 1 1/4"
9001683-0008 L46PW Connector male N for 1 1/4"
inner connector
9001683-0009 L46PN Connector female N for 1 1/4" -
inner connector
______________________________________________________________________________

----------- -----------
No HNS number LDF7-50A Non-plenum coax 1 5/8"
9001684-0004 LDF7RN-50A Riser-rated coax 1 5/8"
9001683-0011 L47PN Connector female N for 1 5/8" -
inner connector
______________________________________________________________________________
9001684-0001 39818A-240 Cable jumper assembly male N to male N
______________________________________________________________________________
9-7-21
11-27-91
CHAPTER 10
SITE COMMISSIONING
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL
This section describes the Site Commissioning parameters for PES Model X000 series and explains how
to enter these parameters. The Site Commissioning parameters must be correctly entered before the PES
can achieve sync on the outroute. Thus, antenna aiming cannot be completed until the correct Site
Commissioning parameters have been entered into the PES indoor unit.
1.2 QUICK REFERENCE

For quick reference, consult the appropriate paragraph or summary:
• Determining the Site Commissioning Parameters - page 10-2-1, summary page 10-2-6.
• Entering Site Commissioning Parameters - DIALOG - page 10-3-1, summary page 10-3-13.
• Fine-adjusting the Timing and Power Offsets - Ranging - page 10-4-1, summary page
10-4-10.
1.3 USING THE DIU CONFIGURATION EDITOR

The DIU Configuration Editor (version 3.0) is a group of computer programs that reside in a site
commissioning computer such as the TRS-80 Model 102 portable computer, or an IBM PC compatible
such as a SHARP PC-7000. These programs provide and load the proper parameters into a PES indoor
unit for installation and commissioning. The TRS-80 Model 102 requires at least 32k of memory
(increased from 24k) for use with a DIU Configuration Editor version 3.0 or higher. In addition, an
interface cable is also required to connect the site commissioning computer to the PES indoor unit. The
DIU Configuration Editor version v3.0 is identified by the name "M300.BA"; however, it is a suggested
name only and could differ at your location.
1.4 APPLICABILITY (V3.0)

DIU Configuration Editor version v3.0 is applicable to PES Types 1 (DIU) and 2 (DIU/O) and the PES
Model X000 series indoor units. The DIU Configuration Editor version number is indicated in the upper
right-hand corner of the menu display.
The introduction of PES model X000 series requires version v3.0 (or higher) of the DIU Configuration
Editor. Version v3.0 is applicable to minimum boot ROM (MBR) circuit cards.
10-1-1
1.5 PREPARATION
For PES Model X000 series, the installation organization should have access to an IBM PC compatible
computer with enough memory to load and run DIU Configuration Editor version v3.0. Those service
offices having a TRS-80 model 102 with 24k of memory should have the memory expanded to 32k to run
DIU Configuration Editor version v3.0. Refer to chapter 16 for TRS-80 memory expansion information.
The TRS-80 Model 102 with 32k of memory cannot load version v3.0 from diskette; however, it can
receive the v3.0 program via a direct RS-232 wire connection from another computer (refer to chapter
16).
Next, connect the site commissioning computer to the PES indoor unit. For PES model X000 series
indoor units, refer to figure 1-1B. The site commissioning computer connects to the IFM RJ-11 service
connector (marked "CONFIG") on the rear of the indoor unit.
1.6 DATA STORAGE

The DIU Configuration Editor programs transfer data between the site commissioning computer and the
PES indoor unit. To use these programs effectively, you should be aware of the different types of data
storage that the program uses. Figure 1-2 shows the location of the types of data storage. These types
are:
EEPROM: An EEPROM is an Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. This is a
type of computer memory which retains its content even when the power is off. (This
feature is called "non-volatile.") The site commissioning computer can examine, clear or
change the contents of the EEPROM on the IFM.
The EEPROM in the IFM contains the permanent commissioning parameters. Only the
SWITCH, RANGE, CLEAR, and WRITE functions alter the contents of the EEPROM.
The RANGE function alters the PES performance and the EEPROM immediately; the
WRITE and CLEAR functions only alter the EEPROM immediately. After the WRITE
or CLEAR function changes the contents of EEPROM, you must reset the indoor unit to
invoke the new parameters.
The IFM EEPROM memory is divided into two pages. Page one starts at location 2000,
the other at 2100. Each page can contain a set of site commissioning parameters. The
Hub can cause the remote’s IFM to change the active page. Page one at 2000 is the
default active page. At the remote, it is only necessary (and possible) to enter site
commissioning parameters into the single active page.
DATABASE: The database in the site commissioning computer is an area of RAM used for temporary
changes. The database is erased every time the program is restarted.
FILES: Files are database images that have been permanently stored in the site commissioning
computer non-volatile memory. These files can be transferred on and off of floppy disks,
thus allowing long-term archiving of parameter sets.
10-1-2
CHAPTER 10 - SITE COMMISSIONING
IFM
25 PIN MALE SERVICE
RJ-11 CONNECTOR
RS-232
PORT
CONFIG
PES
IN D OOR
SITE COMMISSIONING UNIT
COMPUTER
SITE
COMMISSIONING
COMPUTER
25 PIN MALE
1 PES MODEL
1 IFM
TRS-80 2 X000
2 3 RJ-11 JACK
WITH SERIES SERVICE
3 N.C. 4
32K IFM CONNECTOR
7 5
6 CONFIG
1 6
RS-232 RJ-11
PORT PLUG
25 PIN FEMALE
1 1 PES MODEL
IBM 2 2 X000
PC 3 3 SERIES
N.C. 4
TYPE 7 IFM
5
(MS-DOS) 6 CONFIG
6
20
RJ-11 65 4 3 21
COM 1 PLUG
PORT
9 PIN FEMALE
2 1 PES MODEL RJ-11

2 X000 PLUG
3
TOSHIBA 3 SERIES END
5 4
N.C.
IFM
VIEW
5
6 CONFIG
RJ-11
PLUG
PES3-1132
3/7
Figure 1-1. Connecting Site Commissioning Computer to PES Indoor Unit
10-1-3
WRITE
READ
RANGE and
TERMINAL
IFM SERVICE
CONNECTOR
CONFIG
FILE GET
DATABASE
SAVE REGISTERS
FILE
DIALOG CHANGE
PWR or TMG
RESET
DISPLAY EEPROM
IFM
SITE COMMISIONING COMPUTER

(TRS-80 Model 102 with 32k or other computer) INDOOR UNIT
ABBREVIATIONS
EEPROM ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE

PROGRAMMABLE
READ ONLY MEMORY
IFM INTERMEDIATE
FREQUENCY MODULE
PWR or RANGE FUNCTION CHANGE

TMG OF POWER OR TIMING
UPDATES EEPROM
TRS-80 A MODEL NUMBER OF A

MODEL 102 PORTABLE COMPUTER
PES3-1133
Figure 1-2. Data Storage and Transfer
10-1-4
1.7 DIU CONFIGURATION EDITOR V3.0 FUNCTIONS

The operation of each function is as follows:
SWITCH The SWITCH function allows the site commissioning computer to select the PES Model
X000 series diagnose (DIAG), normal (NORMAL), ranging/commissioning (COMM), or
installation (INSTALL) modes (PES Model X000 series units do not have physical
switches for all of these modes).
CLEAR The CLEAR function erases (writes zeroes into) the EEPROM in the IFM and the
database in the site commissioning computer. Because of the effect of this function, use
it only at the beginning of the site commissioning process. The CLEAR function has no
effect on the files stored in the site commissioning computer.
READ The READ function copies the configuration parameters stored on the active page of the
IFM EEPROM into the database. The database becomes an image of the EEPROM page.
The READ function has no effect on the EEPROM or the files.
WRITE The WRITE function copies the database into the active page of the IFM EEPROM. This
function alters the contents of the IFM EEPROM, although the PES does not use the new
parameters until the indoor unit has been reset.
DIALOG The DIALOG function allows you to change the values of the commissioning
parameters. This function makes the change to the database; you must use the WRITE
function to copy these changes into the IFM EEPROM. For each parameter, the
DIALOG function prompts you for an update. You can input a new value or press
<ENTER>. After you have edited the last parameter, the function returns to the Main
Menu. The DIALOG function affects only the database; the files and the EEPROM
remain unchanged.
The site commissioning parameters, which you can update with the DIALOG function,
are in four groups: Space link modem parameters, port card parameters, ranging
parameters, and network parameters. Each group can be selected for modification
individually. The site commissioning parameters of each group are described in chapter
10, section 1.8, page 10-1- 7.
GET The GET function reads a file from the site commissioning computer into the database.
This function prompts you for the name of the file. Note that files appear with a "DO"
extension, which the program adds, when viewing the site commissioning computer
menu. Do not type the extension as part of the name. The GET function does not affect
the EEPROM.
SAVE The SAVE function writes the database into a site commissioning computer file. The
function prompts you for the name of the file. File names are up to six characters long.
Note that files appear with a "DO" extension, which the program adds, when viewing the
site commissioning computer menu. (Sharp or Zenith computers add a "DIU" extension.)
The SAVE function does not affect the EEPROM or the database.
RANGE The RANGE function is generally only used for sites that are on a Hub that does not have
autocommissioning. The RANGE function displays and changes (in real time) the timing
offset and the power level of the PES. The RANGE function deals with internal IFM
hardware registers.
10-1-5
The RANGE function displays the current values of the two parameters, and either one or
both values can be changed. To change the timing offset, enter a plus sign or minus sign
followed by the number of microseconds. To change the power level, enter a plus or
minus sign followed by the number of decibels in one tenth (.1) decibel increments. The
Hub operator will verify that the timing and power values are correct. If no change is
required, press <ENTER>. When the adjustments are final, record the values on the
Installation Data Sheet (chapter 11). For DIU Configuration Editor version 3.0, each
adjustment to power or timing results in an update of the ranged values in the active page
of EEPROM. For PES model X000 series, the next time the indoor unit is reset and the
unit is in normal mode, the final ranged timing and power values are used.
NOTE
Because RANGE alters the EEPROM, do not do a WRITE into
the EEPROM before doing a READ. Otherwise, the results of
the ranging procedure will be overwritten.
TERMINAL The TERMINAL function converts the site commissioning computer into a dumb,
asynchronous terminal. On MS-DOS type site commissioning computers, typing
COMMSERVER <ENTER> at the TERMINAL "command:" prompt starts a
commserver terminal emulator program that is functionally equivalent to the TRS-80
TELCOM function.
LATLONG The LATLONG function is a utility to help point the antenna and estimate the initial
timing offset. This function does not affect the indoor unit or the site commissioning
computer; it accepts input, calculates some values, and displays the results.
The LATLONG function prompts you for the satellite longitude and the PES longitude
and latitude. Enter the satellite longitude exactly as the FCC orbital assignment indicates
(usually specified to the nearest 0.5 degree). Enter the PES position using the most
accurate information, as accurate values ensure accurate estimates in pointing angles and
initial timing offset. Also, note that you specify the PES position in degrees and minutes,
and both numbers can be fractional. For example, 35 degrees and 45 minutes is identical
to 35.75 degrees and 0 minutes; you can use either value when entering the PES position.
The LATLONG function provides the following values:
Timing offset (ticks), Elevation angle (degs), Azimuth angle (degs), and Polarization
angle (degs).
FREQCVT The FREQCVT function is a conversion utility that provides frequency codes, which you
use during site commissioning, from the actual frequencies. This function prompts you
for the outroute downlink and inroute uplink frequencies. Enter these frequencies to the
nearest one tenth (.1) MHz. The FREQCVT function displays the outroute downlink and
inroute uplink frequency codes. Ordinarily, it should not be necessary to use FREQCVT
in the field because the Hub operator or the Network Frequency Plans booklet (or
database) provides the proper frequency codes.
10-1-6
NOTE
The special hexadecimal codes that the FREQCVT program
provides are the exact codes that should be entered in the
DIALOG program. However, these codes are special and cannot
be obtained by the direct decimal to hexadecimal conversion
because there is a rearrangement of digit locations.
MONITOR The MONITOR function allows the site commissioning computer to monitor the
performance of the PES by displaying a special signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No), the channel
error rate (CER) in one of four ranges, the inroute status (power, timing, and frequency),
and the status of eighteen state variables which control the receive
acquisition/transmission control process.
BALLAST The BALLAST function calculates the minimum ballast weight to be added to a
non-penetrating mast mount (NPMM) in order to hold the antenna in place with an
adequate safety factor against the maximal wind anticipated at that location. Refer to
chapter 6, section 4 for the information needed to use the BALLAST function.
1.8 SITE COMMISSIONING PARAMETERS

There are four groups of site commissioning parameters: space link modem parameters, port card
parameters, ranging parameters, and network parameters. You must load these parameters into a PES
before it can successfully communicate within a network.
Space Link Modem Parameters: These parameters are determined by the Hub setup for your remote site.
These parameters in DIALOG are applicable to the PES model X000 series only and are not applicable to
PES Type 1 or Type 2. The parameters are:
Outroute Spectral Spreading

Two hexadecimal digits that enable/disable the internal space link modem to receive an outroute
that has spectral spreading. (Unless you are notified otherwise, PES model 6000 and model 6000
only should have spectral spreading enabled.)
Receive Only IFM

Two hexadecimal digits that set the IFM for receive only operation (01) as indicated in
appendix B or for transmit-receive operation (00).
Outroute Data Rate

Two hexadecimal digits that set the internal space link modem to receive an outroute at the
following data rate:
01 = 512 kbps
00 = 128 kbps
(Unless you have been notified otherwise, PES model 6000 should be set for a 128 kbps outroute
and models 8000 and 9000 should be set for a 512 kbps outroute.)
10-1-7
Inroute Data Rate

Two hexadecimal digits that set the internal space link modem for the data rate this remote PES
transmits to the Hub are as follows:
02 = 256 kbps
01 = 128 kbps
00 = 64 kbps
NOTE
For PES Type 1, the outroute and inroute data rates (all unspread) are
specific for the AEU part number ordered (refer to FSB 1042). For PES
Type 2, the outroute data rate is fixed at 512 kbps unspread. For PES
Type 2, the inroute data rate may be set to 64 kbps, 128 kbps (factory
setting), or 256 kbps using the site commissioning computer
TERMINAL function and the IDM diagnostic port (refer to appendix C
of the PES Type 2 Installation Manual).
Port Card Parameters: These parameters are used to specify which slots in the indoor unit are occupied,
and what their addresses are. Generally, these parameters will always have to be edited (via DIALOG
mode) whenever a remote is commissioned, or a port card is added, removed, or exchanged.
The port card parameters are:

Remote Base Address MSB:
The most significant byte (MSB) of the address of the port cards. The remote base address MSB
is a two-digit hexadecimal number. This byte is shared by all addresses at each PES site and is
determined from the network configuration information. The Hub operator can provide the
correct remote base address MSB for a given PES site.
SLOT_ Base Address LSB:

The least significant byte (LSB) of the address of each port card. This byte is unique for each
port card within an indoor unit. The Hub operator can provide the correct base address LSB for
each port card present at a given PES. The base address is a two-digit hexadecimal number
which is a multiple of four. The port cards are identified by the slot they occupy in the indoor
unit. Slot 1 refers to the top slot. Slot 2 refers to the slot below that.
Type (00np 01tr 02ro):

Port card type for each of sixteen port card slot designations. The Hub operator can provide the
port card types for each PES. The port card type is a two-digit indicator that may take on several
values including:
00 = not present (also used for slots occupied by a
dual voice modem - DMC, a VP TEL, or a VP PBX card)
01 = transmit/receive port card (MP, TP, DP or VDP)
02 = receive only port card
Two digits must be entered for each selection.

In addition, as shown in figure 1-3, the two port card type hexadecimal digits determine:
1. Whether the port card is to receive a standard or test version of RAM based boot code.
10-1-8
2. What RS-232 modem control lines (if any) from the backup telephone modem cause the
data port card USER PORT and DIAG port to be electrically connected (as in the bypass
function) while the switch remains in the NORM position.
During site commissioning only enter one of the three codes listed above (00, 01, or 02). These codes
configure the port card to receive the standard version of RAM based boot code and specify that the
modem control lines are to be ignored.
In future applications the modem control lines may be used. However, during site commissioning only
one of the three codes listed above (00, 01, or 02) should be entered. The modem control line
configurations will be downloaded from the Hub "over-the-air," so the hexadecimal digits for port card
type may change between the time you initially use the WRITE function and the time you later use the
READ function after the PES begins normal operation.
Figure 1-3A provides reference information showing the bit codes (or "bit mask") for the two
hexadecimal digits of the port card type. Identify the modem control line(s) to be configured. Place a 1
in the corresponding box and the appropriate 0 or 1 in the other boxes. Then, perform a binary to
hexadecimal conversion. As shown, there are four binary digits (bits) per hexadecimal digit.
Figure 1-3B is an example hexadecimal port type (09) for a transmit/receive port card (B0=1) that is to
receive the standard version of RAM based boot code (B6=0) and is to shift to the bypass function when
the CARRIER DETECT (CD) signal from the telephone modem is active (B3=1).
Ranging Parameters: These parameters are used to specify the initial values to be used in the ranging
procedure. Note that they are not necessarily the final values. The final values will be established by the
autocommissioning process or by the RANGE function in cooperation with the Hub operator. Generally,
these parameters will always have to be edited (via DIALOG mode) whenever a remote is commissioned,
or moved.
The ranging parameters are:

Initial Power Level:
A two-digit hexadecimal value which determines the initial transmit power level of the PES when
the indoor unit is reset and is in the mode designated as COMM. The initial power level should
be set according to the transmit power of the RF Unit for PES Model X000 series (0.5W - 96,
1.0W - B4, or 2.0W - D2). Later, after the PES acquires receive sync, power is changed under
the autocommissioning process or under directions from the Hub operator (RANGE program).
Initial Timing Offset:

A hexadecimal value based on the distance between the PES and the satellite. Obtain the initial
value from the LATLONG program. The initial timing offset is used when the indoor unit is
reset and is in the mode designated as COMM. Later, you will use the autocommissioning
process or the RANGE program in cooperation with the Hub operator to refine timing offset.
Network Parameters: These parameters are used to specify values that all of the remote Personal Earth
Stations within a network share. They must all be entered (via DIALOG) for the first remote
commissioned within a network, but can then be archived and restored (via GET and SAVE) so they
don’t have to be completely re-entered for subsequent installations.
10-1-9
0 = Receive STD version of RAM boot code

1 = Receive TST version of RAM boot code
0 = Port card is not transmit/receive

1 = Configure data set ready (DSR)
1 = Configure clear to send (CTS)
1 = Configure carrier detect (CD)
1 = Port card is transmit/receive

0 = Ignore data set ready (DSR)
0 = Port card is not receive only

1 = Configure ring indicator (RI)
0 = Ignore clear to send (CTS)
0 = Ignore carrier detect (CD)

BINARY HEXADECIMAL
1 = Port card is receive only

0 = Ignore ring indicator (RI)
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
0011 3
0100 4
Must Be 0
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
BIT LOCATION B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 1001 9
1010 A
BINARY 0 1011 B
VALUE 1100 C
1101 D
1110 E
1111 F
HEXADECIMAL
PORT CARD TYPE
A) BIT CODES
BIT LOCATION B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
BINARY
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
VALUE
HEXADECIMAL
PORT CARD TYPE 0 9
Port Card Type 09 designates a transmit/receive port card that is to receive

the standard version of RAM based boot code and is to shift to the bypass
function when the carrier detect (CD) signal from the telephone modem
is active.
B) EXAMPLE
PES-389
Figure 1-3. Reference Information. Port Card Type Bit Codes
10-1-10
The network parameters are:

Outroute Carrier ID:
A four-digit hexadecimal identifier that uniquely labels each possible PES network. An ID is
never repeated, even across customers. Obtain the outroute carrier ID from the Hub operator.
Primary Frequency:
A hexadecimal code that determines the center frequency at which the PES receives outroute
signals from the Hub. (This is the same parameter as outroute frequency code of release 1.)
Obtain from Hub operator or Network Frequency Plans booklet.
Backup Frequency:
A hexadecimal code that determines the secondary frequency at which the PES might receive
outroute signals from the Hub in the event of a failure of the primary frequency. Obtain from
Hub operator or Network Frequency Plans booklet.
Inroute _ Frequency:
A hexadecimal code that determines the frequency at which the PES transmits inroute signals to
the Hub for each of 32 possible preselected inroute frequencies (Inroute 1 Frequency, Inroute 2
Frequency, . . . etc.). Obtain from Hub operator or Network Frequency Plans booklet.
Use the DIU Configuration Editor to enter the site commissioning parameters. Also, the DIU
Configuration Editor is useful in determining some of the site commissioning parameters.
1.8.1 PARAMETERS IN BYTE-REVERSED NOTATION

Certain site commissioning parameters (such as timing offset, primary frequency, backup frequency, and
inroute _ frequency) used by the site commissioning computer and IFM are expressed in a hexadecimal
byte reversed notation (means that the four digit value 1234 is expressed as 3412). Byte reversed
numbers are used consistently between different programs of the site commissioning computer. Do not
change the order of the digits between different programs of the site commissioning computer.
10-1-11
3-5-91
Section 2
DETERMINING THE SITE COMMISSIONING PARAMETERS
The site commissioning parameter values must first be determined and placed on the Installation Data
Sheet form before they are entered in the site commissioning computer.
To determine the site commissioning parameters, perform the following steps:

STEP 1. Obtain the following information:
Satellite longitude.
PES longitude and latitude.
Space Link Modem Parameters

Outroute Spectral Spreading (Enabled/Disabled)
Outroute Data Rate
Inroute Data Rate
Port Card Parameters

Remote base address most significant byte (MSB).
Port card base address least significant byte (LSB) for each of 16 possible port
card designations.
Port card type for each of 16 possible port card designations.
Network Parameters or Site Commissioning Computer File Name for the Network
Outroute Carrier ID
Primary Frequency
Backup Frequency
Inroute Frequency for each of 32 possible inroute frequencies.
If you have not done so already, telephone the appropriate Hub operator to obtain the satellite
longitude, space link modem parameters, the port card parameters, and the site
commissioning computer file name for the network. Write the information received from the
Hub operator in the appropriate blanks on the Installation Data Sheet. These forms are not
required by HNS but may assist you in the commissioning process. Write port card
parameters in the initial dialog values section.
If a site commissioning computer file has not yet been created for your network, obtain the
network parameters from the Hub operator. Write the outroute carrier ID in the appropriate
blank under network parameters in the initial dialog values sections of the Installation Data
Sheet. The Hub Operator should give you the primary, backup, and inroute frequencies in the
proper hex codes (byte reversed) exactly as you will enter them under network parameters in
the initial dialog values section.
Use a reference book, map, atlas, or navigation system (such as LORAN) to determine the
PES longitude and latitude. Refer to chapter 11, section 1.7. The more accurate the PES
longitude and latitude values, the more nearly correct the initial timing offset value.
10-2-1
STEP 2. Connect the site commissioning computer to PES indoor unit (refer to figure 1-1). Power on
the site commissioning computer.
After powering on the site commissioning computer, one of the following displays may
appear on the screen:
1. The site commissioning computer Menu, which is a list of programs and files
that are on the computer, with BASIC selected by the blinking block cursor.
2. A BASIC error message, followed by the BASIC prompt "OK".
In the first case, use the arrow keys to move the cursor over M300.BA, then press
<ENTER>.
In the second case (OK prompt), press the small key labeled F8 (TRS-80), which will return
the computer to the site commissioning Menu. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor over
M300.BA, then press <ENTER>.
STEP 3. The following display appears on the site commissioning computer screen:
--------------------------------------------------------------
Enter Config Editor Mode
1) Type 1/Type 2 (IOC) mode

2) Model X000 series (IFM) mode
3) Exit
Enter choice (1, 2, or 3) ?
--------------------------------------------------------------
For Model X000 series type 2 and then press <ENTER>. Make the appropriate selection and
then press <ENTER>. Refer to figure 3-8 on page 2-3-14 to identify the PES type.
STEP 4. A DIU Configuration Editor main menu similar to the following should appear in the display.
__DIU CONFIGURATION EDITOR__ __ v3.0H__ IFM __
Modes: read write dialog monitor

get clear latlong terminal
save range freqcvt ballast
switch
Selection or exit >
10-2-2
SECTION 2 - DETERMINING THE SITE COMMISSIONING PARAMETERS
STEP 5. Use the LATLONG function to determine the initial timing offset. To use the LATLONG
function, enter latlong <ENTER> or just enter L <ENTER> at the Main Menu. (You may
use upper case letters, lower case letters, or just the first letter(s) to enter a program.) The
screen then appears as follows:
Geography Help
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Satellite information
East or West Longitude (E/W)? __
Enter E or W <ENTER> for the appropriate longitude. Over the United States, the satellite longitude is
always W.
Geography Help
----------------------------------------------------------------------
East or West Longitude (E/W)? W
Satellite longitude (degs)? __
NOTE
In the examples, an underline (__) indicates the position of the cursor.
Enter the longitude in degrees of the satellite, such as 99, then press <ENTER>. The screen then appears
as follows:
Geography Help
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Satellite longitude (degs)? 99
Remote site information
East or West Longitude (E/W)? __
Enter E or W <ENTER> for the appropriate remote site longitude. In the United States, the remote site
longitude is always W.
Geography Help
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Northern or Southern Hemisphere (N/S)? __
10-2-3
Enter N or S <ENTER> for the remote site hemisphere. In the United States, the remote site latitude
(hemisphere) is always N.
Geography Help
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Northern or Southern Hemisphere (N/S)? N
PES longitude (degs, mins)? __
Enter the PES longitude in degrees and minutes, then press <ENTER>. Use a comma to separate the
degrees and the minutes. For example, to enter 117 degrees, 13.3 minutes, enter 117, 13.3. (Also, both
degrees and minutes can be fractional. For example, 35 degrees and 45 minutes can be entered either as
35, 45 or 35.75, 0.) The screen then appears as follows:
Geography Help
----------------------------------------------------------------------
PES longitude (degs, mins)? 117, 13.3

PES latitude (degs, mins)? __
Enter the PES latitude in degrees and minutes, then press <ENTER>. The screen then appears as
follows:
Geography Help
----------------------------------------------------------------------

PES latitude (degs, mins)? 32, 53.86
10-2-4
The LATLONG function then uses the values you have entered to compute the information explained in
the following paragraphs, and the screen appears as follows:
( 99 ) ( 117, 13.3 ) ( 32 , 53.86 )

----------------------------------------------------------------------
Timing offset (ticks): A340

Elevation angle (degs): 47
Azimuth angle (degs): 148.8
Polarization angle (degs): 25.8
ENTER, or / to quit:
The numbers in parentheses at the top of the display represent the values that you have entered: the
satellite longitude is 99 degrees, the PES longitude is 117 degrees and 13.86 minutes, and the PES
latitude is 32 degrees and 53.86 minutes. Following the values you entered, the TRS-80 displays the
following computed values:
Timing offset (ticks):
This is the estimated initial timing offset value. Record this value on the Installation Data Sheet.
(One tick is approximately 600 ns.)
Elevation angle (degs):

This value is the angle that the beam axis should be elevated when pointing the antenna. If you
have not already done so, record this value on the Installation Data Sheet for use when pointing
the antenna.
Azimuth angle (degs):

This value is the azimuth angle to which the antenna should be set when pointing the antenna. If
you have not already done so, record this value on the Installation Data Sheet for use when
pointing the antenna.
Polarization angle (degs):

This value is the polarization angle of the RF Unit or reflector that should be used when pointing
the antenna at satellites. The LATLONG function assumes a horizontal downlink transponder.
(Corrections to this value may be required for vertical downlink transponders and for satellite tilt;
see chapter 11, section 2.) If you have not already done so, record this value on the Installation
Data Sheet for use when pointing the antenna. Be sure to include the correct plus or minus sign
(+ or -) when recording polarization.
Write the results of the LATLONG program in the appropriate blanks on the Installation Data Sheet.
After recording the necessary values, press <ENTER> to run the LATLONG function again, or press
/<ENTER> to stop the LATLONG function and return to the Main Menu.
STEP 6. If the Hub operator has given you a site commissioning computer file name for your network,
press /<ENTER> to quit the LATLONG program. At the DIU Configuration Editor menu,
enter exit <ENTER> to return to the site commissioning computer main menu. Verify that
the file name the Hub operator has given you is present in your site commissioning computer
main menu. The site commissioning computer main menu shows file name with the
extension ".DO" as the example FILENAME.DO illustrates. Next, move the cursor over
M300.BA and press <ENTER>.
10-2-5
Use the GET function to transfer the contents of the filename received from the Hub operator
into the site commissioning computer database. At the DIU Configuration Editor menu, enter
get <ENTER>. The screen should then appear as follows:
Name of parameter file to load:
Enter the name of the file and press <ENTER>. Do not include the ".DO" extension with the
file name. The screen then returns to the DIU Configuration Editor to indicate that the
parameter contents of the file have been successfully loaded into the database. This step
completes determining site commission parameters when a parameter file is specified by the
Hub operator.
If the GET function returns an error message, such as:

?FF Error in 5020 or ?NM Error in 5020 or INCORRECT FILE TYPE
OK OK OK
it means that the file was not present (?FF) or that the ".DO" extension was inadvertently
added (?NM). The file type must match the DIU Configuration Editor mode selected for
Type 1 and Type 2 remote or for PES model X000 series. If it does not, the "INCORRECT
FILE TYPE" message appears. Press the F8 key to return to the site commissioning
computer main menu.
STEP 7. If this is the first installation of a PES in a network or if a parameter file is not available, use
DIALOG to enter the information. Obtain the information from the Hub operator or the
Network Frequency Plans booklet.
SUMMARY - DETERMINING THE SITE COMMISSIONING PARAMETERS - In summary, the

procedure to determine the site commissioning parameters is as follows:
STEP 1. Obtain the following information:
Satellite longitude.
PES longitude and latitude.
Space link modem parameters.
Port Card Parameters.
Network Parameters or site commissioning computer File Name for the Network.
STEP 2. Connect the site commissioning computer to the PES indoor unit. Power on the site
commissioning computer.
STEP 3. View the DIU Configuration Editor menu.
STEP 4. Run the site commissioning computer LATLONG function to determine the value of the
initial timing offset and antenna pointing information. Record these values on the Installation
Data Sheet.
STEP 5. If a parameter file is present for your network, use the GET function to place the contents of
the file into the database.
STEP 6. If the correct parameter file is not present, obtain the information from the Hub operator or
the Network Frequency Plan booklet.
10-2-6
11150A
Figure 2-1. Example of PES Frequencies
10-2-7
6-28-95
6-28-95
SECTION 3 - ENTERING THE SITE COMMISSIONING PARAMETERS - DIALOG
Section 3
ENTERING THE SITE COMMISSIONING PARAMETERS - DIALOG
After determining the site commissioning parameters, enter these values into the site commissioning
computer database, then transfer the contents of the database into the IPC or IFM EEPROM using the site
commissioning computer programs. An EEPROM is an Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memory. This is a type of computer memory which retains its content even when power is off. (This
feature is called "non-volatile.") The site commissioning computer can examine (READ), clear, or
change (WRITE) the contents of the EEPROM on the IPC, IFM, or IOC. Figure 1-2 shows the site
commissioning computer/indoor unit data storage and transfer.
Use the DIALOG function to enter site commissioning parameters into site commissioning computer
database. For DIU Configuration Editor v4.0, the parameters are divided into four groups: Space link
modem parameters, port card parameters, ranging parameters, and network parameters. The DIALOG
function allows the operator to skip over parameter groups that do not need to be changed. The design
characteristics of PES 5000 dictate certain site commissioning parameters. Refer to Appendix E Section 4
if you are working with PES 5000.
To enter the site commissioning parameters into the IPC/IFM EEPROM, perform the following steps:
STEP 1. Connect the site commissioning computer to PES indoor unit (refer to figure 1-1). Power on
the site commissioning computer and power on the PES indoor unit.
STEP 2. The following display appears on the site commissioning computer screen:
--------------------------------------------------------------

3) Exit
--------------------------------------------------------------
Select Model X000 series. Model X000 means PES 5000, PES model 6000, PES model 8000
or PES model 9000. Refer to figure 3-8 on page 2-3-14 to identify the PES type or model
series.
When you select 2 (PES model X000 series), the following main menu appears:
__DIU CONFIGURATION EDITOR__ __ v4.04C__ IFM __
Modes: read write dialog monitor

get clear latlong terminal
save range freqcvt ballast
switch
Selection or exit >
10-3-1
When you are commissioning a PES model X000 series unit, enter SWITCH <ENTER>. A
display similar to the following appears:
--------------------------------------------------------------
Serial No. XXXXXXXXXX Rev Lev. XXXX
DIAG-----NORMAL-----COMM-----INSTALL
X
Use ’<’ and ’>’ keys to move switch
Hit <ENT> to exit.
--------------------------------------------------------------
Use the shift and "<" key to change the mode to DIAG to prevent the PES from transmitting.
Then, exit the SWITCH function. Wait approximately 15 seconds for the main menu to
return. Within three minutes, diagnose mode should be successfully completed with all port
cards displaying [2]/[3.] and the IF or IFM LED displaying either [d]/[E.] or [d]/[F.] if an
external test jumper is in place, or [-]/[E.] or [-]/[F.] if the external test jumper was not used.
STEP 3. If this PES indoor unit is being commissioned for the first time, enter clear<ENTER> at the
Main Menu. This command causes the site commissioning computer to perform the CLEAR
function, which initializes the IPC/IFM EEPROM. Any data that may be on the IPC/IFM
EEPROM is removed.
STEP 4. If an archived file within the site commissioning computer contains the desired network
parameters, use the GET function to transfer the contents of the file into the site
commissioning computer database. Use the file name provided by the Hub operator, and at
the DIU Configuration Editor menu enter get<ENTER>. The screen should then appear as
follows:
Name of parameter file to load:
Enter the name of the file and press <ENTER>. Do not include the ".DIU" extension with
the file name. The screen then returns to the DIU Configuration Editor menu to indicate that
parameter contents of the file have been successfully loaded into the database.
STEP 5. If this is a modification of a configured indoor unit, use the READ function to transfer the
current configuration from the indoor unit into the site commissioning computer database.
Enter read<ENTER> at the Main Menu. This command copies the contents of the
EEPROM into the database. The read function may require about 20 seconds to complete.
During this time, the site commissioning computer displays the following message, then
displays 16 small dots while the information is being transferred from the IPC/IFM EEPROM
into the site commissioning computer database.
Reading IFM parameters into computer
Using Active Page 2000
The current active page for your IPC/IFM may differ.
10-3-2
STEP 6. Enter dialog<ENTER> at the Main Menu. This command causes the site commissioning
computer to invoke the DIALOG function which can display and alter the contents of the site
commissioning computer database.
When the DIALOG function is first initiated, the database contains the parameters that were
last obtained (either from a file by the GET function or from the IPC/IFM by the READ
function). For PES model X000 series, the DIALOG function displays:
Enter updated values or <ENT>.
--------------------------------------------------------------
Modify space link modem parameters (y/n):_
To enter, modify or view the space link modem parameters, answer the above question by
entering y<ENTER>. The display then adds one line to appear as:
--------------------------------------------------------------
Modify space link modem parameters (y/n):y
--------------------------------------------------------------
Outroute spectral spreading
(01=enable, 00=disable): 00 ??>
The current value is displayed after the colon. For PES model 6000, enter 01<ENTER> to
enable spectral spreading (unless you have been given specific instructions otherwise). For
PES 5000, PES model 8000 or model 9000, enter 00<ENTER> to disable spectral spreading
(unless you have been given specific instructions otherwise).
The display adds three lines as shown below:

--------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------
Receive Only IFM (RO=01, TR=00): 00 ??>
Unless you are installing a receive only PES as described in appendix B, enter 00 <ENTER>
for transmit-receive (TR). The display then adds:

--------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------
Receive Only IFM
(RO=01, TR=00): 00 ??>
Spectral Inversion
10-3-3
Enter the spectral inversion value according to the PES product type as listed below:
PES Product Type Spectral Inversion Reference
Ku-band transmit/receive 00=disable PES Gen. Ref. Manual

C-band transmit/receive 00=disable PES Gen. Ref. Appendix C
Ku-band receive only 00=disable PES Gen. Ref. Appendix B
C-band receive only 01=enable Pending
If you have DIU Configuration Editor version 4.02b or higher, the display adds the line
below. (Note: Version 4.0 which does not have the line below is the current version in
distribution in the United States. Version 4.0 is adequate and currrent for the United States.)
R/O Ku Band Low Stability Radio
If your site is a receive-only site with an "LS" receiver (smaller size), enter 01 <ENTER>. If
your site is transmit/receive or has a standard receive-only radio as pictured in appendix B,
enter 01 <ENTER>.
The display then adds:

Data Rates (kbps)
NOTE: THESE MUST BE ENTERED CORRECTLY
Outr (02=1664, 01=512, 00=128): 00 ??>
For PES model 6000, enter 00<ENTER> for 128 kbps outroute (unless you have been given
specific instructions otherwise). For PES 5000, PES model 8000 or model 9000, enter
01<ENTER> for a 512 kbps outroute (unless you have been given specific instructions
otherwise). In summary,
Outroute Outroute Inroute

Spectral Spreading Data Rate Data Rate Application
01 = enabled 00 = 128 00 = 64 PES model 6000

00 = disabled 01 = 512 01 = 128 PES model 8000 or 9000
00 = disabled 01 = 512 02 = 256 PES model 8000 or 9000
00 = disabled 01 = 512 00 or 01 PES 5000
00 = disabled 00 = 128 -- Special applications
01 = enabled 01 = 512 -- Invalid combination
10-3-4
The display adds a line requesting the inroute data rate:

--------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------
Receive Only IFM (RO=01, TR=00): 00 ??>
Spectral Inversion
R/O Ku Band Low Stability Radio
Data Rates (kbps)
Outr (02=1664, 01=512, 00=128): 00 ??>
Inr (02=256, 01=128, 00=64): 00 ??>
Unless you are otherwise instructed, for PES Model 6000 enter 00 for a 64-kbps inroute data
rate, and for PES Model 8000 or 9000 enter 01 for a 128-kbps inroute data rate. Enter the
appropriate code and press <ENTER>. For PES 5000, the inroute data rate selections are:
64-kbps, and 128-kbps. The modulation method for the PES 5000 differs from other PES
X000 series products and the inroute spacing differs also. Refer to Appendix E for PES 5000
information. The display adds the line:
--------------------------------------------------------------
Modify port card parameters? (y/n):
--------------------------------------------------------------
10-3-5
STEP 7. To enter, modify, or view the port card parameters, answer the above question by entering
y<ENTER>. The display then adds one line so that the bottom lines now appear as:
--------------------------------------------------------------
Modify port card parameters? (y/n):y
Is this an EDIU? (y/n):
An EDIU is an extended digital interface unit which provides multiple port card slots as listed
below. The number of slots that the DIU Configuration Editor will ask for parameters on is
determined by 1) whether the chassis is Type I/II or PES model X000 series and 2) whether
or not the chassis is an EDIU. For PES X000 series, the EDIU-like product is called the High
Density Chassis (HDC), as described in FSB 1138. The maximum number of slots is as
follows:
N Type I/II non-EDIU 5 slots

Y Type I/II EDIU 16 slots
N X000 series non-EDIU 4 slots
Y X000 series EDIU (HDC) 13 slots
If you are not installing an EDIU, enter n<ENTER> or just press <ENTER>. The default
value is (n). The display adds one line:
--------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Base Address MSB: 00-- ??>
The current value in the site commissioning computer database for the remote base address
most significant byte (MSB) is displayed (in this case, 00) after the colon.
If you have received a different remote base address MSB from the Hub operator, enter the
two-digit hexadecimal number and press <ENTER>. For example, if the Hub operator has
told you that the remote base address MSB for the PES site is F9, you would enter
F9<ENTER>. The display would then appear as:
--------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Base Address MSB: 00-- ??> F9
SLOT 1 Base Address LSB: --01 ??>
As shown above, the DIALOG function displays your updated value for remote base address
MSB and then adds another line. This added line displays the base address least significant
byte (LSB) for slot 1. Slot 1 is the top slot. (In the case of PES model 9000, slot 1 is the left
most slot viewing the unit from the front. This is the slot in the PES area furthest from the
IFM.) Tables 3-1 and 3-2 give example slot numbering. Although the PES 5000 does not
have physical port card slots, its integrated port card (IPC) is considered to occupy "slot 1."
If the displayed SLOT 1 Base Address LSB is correct, press the <ENTER> key to call the
next line. If the displayed SLOT 1 Base Address LSB is not correct, enter the correct two
digit hexadecimal number SLOT 1 Base Address LSB provided by the Hub operator and
recorded on the installation data sheet, then press <ENTER>.
10-3-6
The correct port card base address least significant byte, LSB, must be entered for each
multiport card (MP), data port card (DP), turbo port card (TP), voice data port (VDP),
compact port card (CPC), and voice data port card (VDPC) present in the PES indoor unit.
Slots occupied by a dual voice modem card (DMC) do not have base address LSBs, nor slots
occupied by a VP TEL card or VP PBX card because these cards are peripherals of the
associated VDP cards. Use 00 as a base address LSB for voice modem, VP TEL and VP PBX
cards. The DIU Configuration Editor ignores physical slot locations that cannot accept a port
card. (For PES X000 series the slot for the IFM is ignored.)
If the present SLOT 1 Base Address LSB is correct, accept it by pressing the <ENTER> key;
the display next requests the port card type as shown below:
--------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Base Address MSB: F9-- ??>

Type (00np 01tr 02ro): 01 ??>
The display requests a choice of one of three possibilities:

00 - not present - there is no port card present in the slot, or the slot is occupied by
a dual voice grade modem card DMC, a VP TEL or a VP PBX card.
01 - transmit/receive port card is present (MP, DP, TP, VDP, VDPC, CPC, or IPC).
02 - receive only port card is present.
If the port card type (for slot 1) provided by the Hub operator differs from the port card type
displayed (for slot 1), enter the two digit port card type. (Be sure to enter two hexadecimal
digits when entering the port card type; entering only one digital causes an error in most
cases.) For example, if the port card type is transmit/receive, enter 01<ENTER>. The
display would then show your entry, and request the base address LSB for port card two:

--------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Base Address MSB: F9-- ??>

Type (00np 01tr 02ro): 00 ??> 01
Enter the base address least significant byte (LSB) for the card in slot 2 that was provided by
the Hub operator. The port card type for slot 2 is then requested. The display continues
scrolling in this fashion after each entry, requesting a port card base address LSB and the port
card type until all slot designations are entered.
For PES Model X000 series, port card base address LSBs and types are requested for four
port card slots. Table 3-1 shows an example PES model 8000 containing an empty slot 1, a
voice data port (VDP) in slot 2, a VP TEL in slot 3, and a multiport card (MP) in slot 4. Note
that the port card type for the empty slot and for the VP TEL is 00. Physical slot location 5
(IFM) is ignored by the DIU Configuration Editor.
10-3-7
Table 3-1. Example PES Model 8000 Port Card Type Designations
Physical DIU Config. Occupied Enter
Location Editor Slot By PC Type Explanation
Slot 1 (top) Slot 1 <empty> 00 Slot not occupied
Slot 2 Slot 2 VDP 01 Transmit/receive port card
Slot 3 Slot 3 VP TEL 00 VP TEL present
Slot 4 Slot 4 MP 01 Transmit/receive port card
Slot 5 (bottom) -- IFM -- Ignored by DIU Config. Editor
Table 3-2 shows an example PES Model 6000 containing a multiport card (MP) in slot 1.
Physical slot location 2 (IFM) is ignored by the DIU Configuration Editor. DIU
Configuration Editor slots 2 through 4 are designated as not present. You must provide
information to the DIU Configuration Editor for slots one through four even though there is
only one port card slot in the PES Model 6000.
Table 3-2. Example PES Model 6000 Port Card Type Designations
Slot 1 (top) Slot 1 MP 01 Transmit/receive port card
Slot 2 (bottom) -- IFM -- Ignored by DIU Config. Editor
-- "Slot 2" Not present 00 Not present
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
"Slot 4" Not present 00 Not present
Table 3-3. Example PES 5000 Port Card Type Designations

No physical Slot 1 IPC 01 Transmit/receive port card
slots. No
backplane or
card guides.
-- -- TRM -- Ignored by DIU Config. Editor
-- "Slot 2" Not present 00 Not present
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
"Slot 4" Not present 00 Not present
The port card type hexadecimal digits not only designate the slot contents (00=not present,
01=transmit/receive port card, or 02=receive only port card) but also contain bits which affect
the types of software loaded and modem control line configuration as shown in figure 1-3.
During site commissioning only codes (00, 01, or 02) should be entered. Parameters
downloaded from the Hub can change the port card type if required for configuration
purposes. Entering a question mark, ?<ENTER>, at the port card type prompt causes the
display to show the "bit mask." These bit designations correspond to figure 1-3. The display
then repeats the port card type prompt.
10-3-8

Type (00np 01tr 02ro): 01 ??> ?
BIT MASK:
B7 must always be 0.
Rambsw Code:B6=1 for Tst,0 for Std.
Modem Leads:cts=B5,dsr=B4,cd=B3,ri=B2.
PC Type:B1=ro,B0=tr.
??>
Table 3-4 provides reference information indicating how the "slot numbers" seen on the
System Operator Console (SOC) at the Hub correspond to the site commissioning computer
slot numbers. The port cards internally read their port card numbers from the chassis
backplane in a manner that differs from the site commissioning computer slot numbers. The
number that the port card reads is determined by the chassis slot into which it is plugged.
Table 3-4 is reference information only.
Table 3-4. Reference Information - Indoor Unit Slot Numbering

"Slot Number" Port Card Number
Location Seen on SOC Screen Read from Chassis Comment
Slot 1 (top) 1 F --
Slot 2 2 0 --
Slot 3 3 1 --
Slot 4 4 2 --
STEP 8. After the port card type for last slot is entered, the display is cleared and the following
question appears:
Modify ranging parameters? (y/n):
Enter y<ENTER> at this point (unless you are certain the correct ranging parameters have
already been entered and ranging has been accomplished). The display should now be similar
to the following:
Modify ranging parameters? (y/n): y
--------------------------------------------------------------
Ranged Power Level: 00
Ranged Timing Offset: F664
--------------------------------------------------------------
Initial Power Level: 00 ??>
The ranged power level and ranged timing offset values given above are values that will be
used to control PES transmission when in the NORMAL mode. The autocommissioning
process or the RANGE function supplies these values when ranging is completed. If these
values in your database were retrieved by the GET function from a file created at another
PES site, they will not be correct for your PES until ranging is performed.
The initial power level offset is used when the PES first enters COMM (ranging) mode.
When a new PES site is first being commissioned, the initial power level offset should be set
according to the transmit power of the RF Unit for PES Model X000 series other than PES
10-3-9
5000 (0.5W - 96, 1.0W - B4, or 2.0W - D2).12 The RF Unit transmit power appears on a
nameplate as shown in figure 4-1 on page 2-4-1. For example, if your site has a 0.5W RF
Unit, enter 96 <ENTER> to set the value to 96.
--------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------
Initial Power Level: 00 ??>96
Initial Timing Offset: 0000 ??>
The initial timing offset is also used when the PES first enters COMM (ranging) mode. For
the initial timing offset, enter the "timing offset (ticks):" value from the LATLONG function
and recorded on the Installation Data Sheet, then press <ENTER>.
For example, if the "timing offset (ticks):" value from the LATLONG function is A340, enter
A340 <ENTER>. The display would appear as:

--------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------
Initial Power Level: 00 ??> 96
Initial Timing Offset: 0000 ??> A340
Table 3-5 provides a summary of DIALOG function ranging parameter values.
Table 3-5. Dialog Ranging Parameter Summary for PES X000 Series RF Units
0.5W or 1.0W
PES 5000 0.5W 1.0W 2.0W
Parameter Outdoor Unit RF Unit RF Unit RF Unit
Initial Power Level 00 96 B4 D2
(Hexadecimal)
Initial Timing "Timing offset "Timing offset "Timing offset "Timing offset
Offset (ticks)" from (ticks)" from (ticks)" from (ticks)" from
LATLONG LATLONG LATLONG LATLONG
STEP 9. The display clears and presents the question:
Modify network parameters? (y/n):
If you have used the GET function to retrieve a file for this network, and you know that the
information in the database is correct for this network, enter n<ENTER>.
12For PES Type 1 and Type 2, the initial power level setting is 50. For PES 5000 the initial power level is ignored; enter 00.
See appendix E Section 4 for PES 5000
10-3-10
If you need to view or modify the network parameters, enter y<ENTER>. The display
appears as:
Modify network parameters? (y/n): y
--------------------------------------------------------------
Outroute Carrier ID: 0000 ??>
Enter the four-digit outroute carrier ID provided by the Hub operator, and press <ENTER>.
If the example outroute carrier ID, 9F74, is entered, the display would appear as:
--------------------------------------------------------------
Outroute Carrier ID: 0000 ??> 9F74
Primary Frequency: 31E104 ??>
Next, enter the primary frequency hexadecimal code provided by the Hub and press
<ENTER>. See the frequency worksheet portion of the Installation Data Sheet. For
example, you might have a hexdecimal number such as 736903<ENTER>. This is an
example frequency only; do not enter it. The display would appear as:

--------------------------------------------------------------
Primary Frequency: 31E104 ??> 736903
Backup Frequency: 31E104 ??>
Enter the backup frequency hexadecimal code and press <ENTER>. Next, the display
requests the first inroute (PES transmit) frequency.

--------------------------------------------------------------
Primary Frequency: 31E104 ??> 736903
Backup Frequency: 31E104 ??>
Inroute 1 Frequency: 3E2C ??>
Enter the Hub-supplied hexadecimal code for the first inroute frequency if available and press
<ENTER>. Ensure that only the inroute frequencies are entered on which this PES is
authorized to transmit. The display continues scrolling in this fashion until 32 inroute
frequency codes have been entered (or verified). If you have no more entries, you may enter /
to end the sequence before all 32 are requested. After the last inroute frequency code is
entered, a complete cycle of the DIALOG function has completed, the display is cleared, and
the main menu appears.
The DIALOG function requires about 30 seconds to compute the checksum. Then, the
display returns to the DIU Configuration Editor menu.
STEP 10. Enter dialog<ENTER> at the Main Menu. Step through the DIALOG function again to
ensure that the parameters have been correctly entered.
10-3-11
STEP 11. Run the WRITE function, which writes these DIALOG database values into the IPC/IFM
EEPROM. (Entering the values in the DIALOG program does not enter the values into the
IPC/IFM EEPROM.) To write the values into the EEPROM, you must enter
write<ENTER> at the Main Menu. Writing the commissioning parameter values into the
EEPROM takes approximately 30 seconds. During this time, the service computer/laptop
displays the following message, then displays 16 small boxes while the information is being
written into the EEPROM:
Writing IFM parameters from computer
Using Active Page 2000
NOTE
If there is a problem with the write operation or configuration
parameters, the following IF or IFM LED codes could appear:
[5]/[4.] = parameters not written (active page not found)

[5]/[5.] = incorrect checksum
[5]/[8.] = configuration was not good
[6]/[3.] = invalid mode byte (PES 5000 only)
Double-check procedures, then call field assistance if problems persist.

For PES model X000 series, use the SWITCH function to set the PES mode to NORMAL.
Exit the SWITCH function to cause the mode change to take place. Changing the mode
causes the PES indoor unit to reset and allows the new parameters to take effect. Allow 30
seconds for the indoor unit to recover from reset. Then, use the SWITCH function to again
set the PES mode to DIAG. Exit the SWITCH function to cause the mode change to take
effect. The SWITCH function screen appears as follows:
--------------------------------------------------------------
X
Hit <ENT> to exit.
--------------------------------------------------------------
STEP 12. Observe the LED displays. Within three minutes, diagnose mode should be successfully
completed with all port cards displaying [2]/[3.] and the IF or IFM card displaying either
[d]/[E.] or [d]/[F.] if the external test jumper is in place, or [-]/[E.] or [-]/[F.] if the external
test jumper was not used.
STEP 13. Enter read<ENTER> at the Main Menu. This command copies the contents of the IOC
EEPROM into the database of the site commissioning computer.
STEP 14. Enter dialog<ENTER> at the Main Menu. The site commissioning computer should display
the values you have entered.
STEP 15. If it is desired to archive these parameters, enter save<ENTER> and record the file name
given to this parameter set.
10-3-12
SUMMARY - ENTERING SITE COMMISSIONING PARAMETERS - In summary, the procedure

to enter the commissioning parameters is as follows:
STEP 1. Connect the site commissioning computer to the PES indoor unit. Apply power. Set PES to
DIAG mode.
STEP 2. If this is a first time commissioning, run the CLEAR function.
STEP 3. Run the GET function to retrieve an archived parameter file if a proper network file is
available.
STEP 4. If a proper network file is not available, run the READ function.
STEP 5. Run DIALOG function. Select PES model X000 series.
STEP 6. For PES model X000 series, enter the proper space link modem parameters from the Hub
operator/Installation Data Sheet.
STEP 7. Enter the proper port card parameters from the Hub operator/Installation Data Sheet.
STEP 8. Enter the proper ranging parameters from the Hub operator/Installation Data Sheet and the
LATLONG program.
STEP 9. If the proper network parameters have not been loaded by either the GET or READ functions,
enter the proper network parameters from the Hub operator/Installation Data Sheet.
STEP 10. Rerun the DIALOG function to check the commissioning parameters.
STEP 11. Run the WRITE function, which writes these values into the IPC/IFM EEPROM.
STEP 12. Use the SWITCH function to set the PES mode to NORMAL. Return the unit to DIAG
mode.
STEP 13. Run the READ function, which copies the contents of the EEPROM into the database.
STEP 14. Run the DIALOG function, which displays the contents of the database.
STEP 15. Run the SAVE function if you desire to archive this parameter set. Record the file name.
10-3-13
6-28-95
Section 4
FINE-ADJUSTING THE TIMING AND POWER OFFSETS - RANGING
Ranging is performed after the remote PES has acquired receive synchronization on the outroute signal
from the Hub, and the antenna aiming adjustment has been refined for the strongest received signal.
Ranging is the process of fine-adjusting a PES remote’s transmit timing and power offsets, and is required
when a new PES site is installed or when an RF Unit is replaced. This section is applicable to PES
X000 series other than PES 5000. To perform ranging on PES 5000 products, refer to appendix E
page E-5-3.
There are two major methods of performing ranging:

• Autocommissioning (automatic ranging) - for Hub software release 6.2 or higher - page
10-4-1.
• Manual Ranging (using the RANGE function) - for hub-initiated session with automatic
adjustment disabled (HISAD) or for Hub software release prior to 6.2 - page 10-4-4.
As indicated, the selection of a ranging method depends on the network software release installed at the
Hub. Determine the network software release from the Hub operator, then refer to the appropriate
section.
4.1 AUTOCOMMISSIONING (AUTOMATIC RANGING)

Autocommissioning (automatic ranging) allows software at the Hub to automatically adjust the remote’s
transmit timing and power offsets based upon the reception of ranging pulses transmitted from the remote.
The RANGE function of a site commissioning computer is not used for these adjustments. Once the PES
indoor unit is placed in the COMM (ranging) mode, the ranging process progresses by itself. When a port
card (DP, VDP, TP, or MP) LED display shows [3]/[b.], the ranging process has been successfully
completed. At this point, the remote is placed in the NORMAL mode to begin normal operation.
The automatic ranging process may include a "Link Quality Test" (LQT) at the Hub operator’s option.
The LQT verifies that the remote receives and transmits with acceptable quality. The duration of the
automatic ranging process from the start until a port card displays [3]/[b.] is approximately:
Automatic Ranging (without LQT) 10 minutes or less
Automatic Ranging (with LQT) 30 minutes or less
Perform the following steps to perform autocommissioning (auto ranging):
STEP 1. Configure the PES indoor unit with the proper parameters, as previously described. The
initial power level offset should be set according to the transmit power of the RF Unit for
PES Model X000 series other than PES 5000 (0.5W - 96, 1.0W - B4, or 2.0W - D2). Note
that the parameters must include an initial estimate at timing (initial timing offset), computed
by the LATLONG function based on the site latitude and longitude.
10-4-1
STEP 2. Determine if the Hub for your site has network software release 6.2, and if the Hub operator
has authorized your site for remote-initiated auto commissioning (automatic ranging). If so,
proceed to step 4.
If the Hub for your site has a software release prior to 6.2, telephone the Hub operator and
request manual ranging (refer to page 10-4-4).
If in doubt, telephone the Hub operator.
STEP 3. Start the auto commissioning process (automatic ranging) by placing the PES indoor unit in
the COMM (ranging) mode.
For PES model X000 series, use the site commissioning computer SWITCH function to place
the PES indoor unit in the COMM (ranging) mode.
--------------------------------------------------------------
X
Hit <ENT> to exit.
--------------------------------------------------------------
Exit the SWITCH function to cause the mode change to take effect.
NOTE: Although not recommended, the COMM (ranging) mode may be entered by using a
toothpick or similar object to press the recessed AUTO COMM switch on the rear of the
IFM.
The IFM LED should progress to displaying [r]/[BLANK.] indicating that ranging is in
effect and that the IOC is in receive sync.
The IFM polls the port cards and selects a port card to perform ranging. Figure 4-1 gives the
progression of the ranging port card LED displays during auto commissioning.
STEP 4. After approximately 30 minutes, if Link Quality Test (LQT) is enabled (or after 10 minutes if
the LQT is disabled), the port card selected for ranging should display [3]/[b.], indicating that
ranging has been successfully completed.
STEP 5. At the site commissioning computer enter read<ENTER>.
10-4-2
SECTION 4 - FINE-ADJUSTING THE TIMING AND POWER OFFSETS - RANGING
LED test LED spinning pattern.

[1]/[2.] Port card is waiting for a poll from the IFM.
[8]/[2.] : [8]/[4.] Port card is waiting to get into outroute synchronization. [8]/[4.] indicates that a
superframe header is being received, and regression to [8]/[2.] indicates that that
superframe header did not have the right carrier ID number.
[8]/[E.] Port card is waiting for a broadcast of the RAM boot code. This is a receive-only
download.
[8]/[F.] Port card is receiving RAM boot code packets. This broadcast lasts about 15-20
seconds.
[8]/[BLANK.] Port card received some RAM boot code packets but then quit receiving them. This
appears only if a packet was missed during the broadcast or the remote just got in
sync during a broadcast and missed some of the first packets.
[5]/[h.] Remote waits here until an RRD is received confirming the RAM boot code version.
[7]/[1.] Port card waits in this state for the network parameters.
[3]/[6.] Port card is initializing local copy of the inroutes’ auto commission burst statistics
(ACBS) fields.
[3]/[7.] Port card is waiting for an inroute to become available on which to either range or to
request allocation.
[3]/[9.] Port card is waiting for TX PLL to become locked.
[3]/[C.] The port card is requesting allocation on an open inroute.
The next four states will sequence through a number of times until the ranging adjustment process is
completed.
[3]/[d.] Port card is commanding the Burst Channel Demodulator (BCD) at the Hub to begin
statistics collection.
[3]/[A.] Port card is transmitting bursts for the BCD statistics collection.
[3]/[F.] Port card is commanding the BCD to complete statistics collection.
[3]/[c.] Port card is computing new adjusted values to try. This state will not usually be
seen.
[3]/[H.] IFM is storing the newly adjusted burst timing offset and power level.
[3]/[h.] Link Quality Test running.
[3]/[P.] The port card is requesting to be removed as session owner for the ranging inroute.
[3]/[b.] RANGING SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED. For PES model X000 series, use
site commissioning computer SWITCH function to return to NORMAL mode.
Figure 4-1. Port Card LED Sequence During Remote Initiated Auto Commissioning
10-4-3
STEP 6. Use the DIALOG function to verify that the final ranged values have been stored correctly.
Enter dialog<ENTER>. At the "Modify ranging parameters? (y/n):" prompt,
answer yes by entering y<ENTER> to view the parameters. The display is in the following
format:

--------------------------------------------------------------
Ranged Timing Offset: A240
--------------------------------------------------------------
Initial Timing Offset: A340 ??> A240
Note the values for ranged power level and ranged timing offset. Refer to appendix E if
ranging a PES 5000.
At this point, edit the initial values to be equal to the final ranged values (unless you have
been given specific instructions to the contrary). Issue a site commissioning computer
WRITE command to transfer the contents of the site commissioning computer database to
the IFM EEPROM.
STEP 7.
Return the PES to NORMAL mode. For PES model X000 series, use the SWITCH function.
NOTE
If the port card display does not progress to [3]/[b.] within the allotted
time, refer to troubleshooting.
If the port card display shows [3]/[U.] for a prolonged period (longer
than 20 minutes), call the Hub operator and confirm that the REM DEF
screen on the SOC has the HARDWARE INSTALLED field set to Y for
automatic ranging to work.
4.2 MANUAL RANGING - HUB-INITIATED SESSION WITH AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT

DISABLED (HISAD)
If a Hub has network software release 6.2 or higher and automatic ranging is unsuccessful or is not
functioning, you and the Hub operator may decide to use a Hub-initiated ranging session with automatic
adjustments disabled (HISAD). This session is similar to conventional manual ranging in that a telephone
call and the site commission computer RANGE function is used. This session differs from conventional
manual ranging in that it must be restarted after a period of time (usually about 20 minutes).
For HISAD or for Hubs having network software prior to release 6.2, ranging requires telephone
communication between the Hub operator and an installer or service representative at the remote site.
Under the verbal direction from the Hub operator, the installer or service representative at the remote site
uses the RANGE function of a site commissioning computer to adjust the remote’s timing and power
offsets.
The RANGE function displays and changes (in real time) the timing offset and the power level of the
PES. The RANGE function deals with internal IFM hardware registers. Therefore, changes take place
immediately.
10-4-4
Perform the following steps to use the RANGE function to fine-adjust the timing and power offsets:
STEP 1. Configure the PES indoor unit with the proper parameters, as previously described. The
initial power level offset should be set according to the transmit power of the RF Unit for
PES Model X000 series other than PES 5000 (0.5W - 96, 1.0W - B4, or 2.0W - D2). Note
that the parameters must include an initial estimate at timing (initial timing offset), computed
by the LATLONG function based on a best estimate of installation site latitude and longitude.
STEP 2. Place a terrestrial telephone call to the Hub operator. A terrestrial telephone call means a
phone call over a land based telephone system (and not over the PES space link). Notify the
Hub operator that you need to perform manual ranging. Tell the Hub operator your PES
model number or type.
STEP 3. For network software release 6.2 or higher, observe that the Hub operator has initiated
ranging by noting the changes in the IFM LED following the reset:
1. lamp test
2. reset cause
3. h/F. or E. - the IFM is scanning for a configured port card that can perform the
ranging
4. r/F. or E. - the IOC is attempting to acquire the outroute
5. r/blank. - the IOC is in receive sync
For network software release 6.2 or higher, the person at the remote leaves the SWITCH
function in the NORMAL position during manual ranging (HISAD). Skip to step 4.
NOTE
If the transition from h to r does not occur, the port card configuration is
incorrect (e.g., all port cards designated not present, IFM LED code [P],
all port cards designated receive only [O]. Try again with the DIALOG
function.
If the transition to r/blank. does not occur (i.e., sync is not obtained),
check the Outroute Frequency and Carrier ID parameters via DIALOG.
Also, the state variable display in MONITOR is very helpful in
diagnosing sync states. If partial sync is indicated, call the Hub to verify
it is completely operational.
10-4-5
STEP 3A. For network software release prior to 6.2, do not change the PES mode to begin ranging until
permission is received from the Hub operator. When you receive authorization from the Hub
operator, put the PES indoor unit in the COMM (ranging) mode.
For PES model X000 series, use the site commissioning computer SWITCH function to place
the PES indoor unit in the COMM (ranging) mode.
--------------------------------------------------------------
X
Hit <ENT> to exit.
--------------------------------------------------------------
Exit the SWITCH function to cause the mode change to take effect.
Changing the mode resets the PES indoor unit. When the COMM (ranging) mode starts, the
ranging parameters "Initial Power Level" and "Initial Timing Offset" are put into effect and
become the current values.
Observe the IFM LED pattern described in step 3.
STEP 4. The port card closest to the IFM which is not receive only will be selected by the IFM to
perform the ranging burst transmission. Observe the following LED displays on the selected
port card (all other port cards will generally be displaying 1/2.). The port card sequence
differs depending on the amount of boot code that needs to be downloaded.
1. 1/2. - Port card waiting to talk to IFM.
2. 8/0. thru 8/E. thru 8/BLANK. thru 8/F. - Port card downloading RAM boot
code (may be skipped if code already present).
3. 5/0. thru 5/5. and 5/h. - Port card selected to range, waiting to get into sync.
4. 3/6. to 7. - Port card waiting for Hub to support ranging.
5. 3/9. - Port card waiting for IFM to switch to correct frequency and stabilize.
6. 3/5. - Port card is transmitting range bursts (HISAD - release 6.2 or higher). Or,
3/A. - port card is transmitting range burst ( manual ranging for release prior to
6.2)
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Use the RANGE function only when the PES is in the ranging mode and
when you are in communication with the Hub operator. Using the
RANGE function while the PES is in NORMAL mode could cause
network interference.
10-4-6
STEP 5. Enter range<ENTER> at the Main Menu. This command causes the site commissioning
computer to invoke the RANGE function, and the screen appears as follows:
--------------------------------------------------------------
Current Power Level: 96
Current Timing Offset: A340
--------------------------------------------------------------
ENTER, or / to quit:
Power Correction (+- .1 dBs)?
Timing Correction (+- usecs)?__
NOTE
The current power level displayed by the RANGE program is a
hexadecimal number proportional to PES model X000 series transmit
power (for X000 series products other than PES 5000). The current
power level can be converted to output power expressed in dBm as
indicated in table 4-1. The Hub operator determines when the power
level from a given PES is correct by actually monitoring the satellite
signal.
STEP 6. The Hub operator observes changes in the power level and timing of the transmission and
gives you directions to fine-adjust the offsets. Let the Hub operator know the current power
level at your PES. If your current power level is too low, the Hub operator will ask you to
increase it.
STEP 7. Enter the power offset correction as instructed by the Hub operator and press <ENTER>. To
enter a power offset correction, enter a plus sign (+) or minus sign (-) followed by the number
of one-tenth decibel increments to change the Power Offset. If no correction is desired, press
<ENTER>. The site commissioning computer then redisplays the screen with the new offset
values (hexadecimal).
STEP 8. Ask the Hub operator to verify that burst detects are occurring within the ranging aperture.
NOTE
If burst detects are not occurring within the ranging aperture, recheck all
parameters and procedures with the Hub operator. If these are OK,
isolate the problem to the remote or to the Hub burst demodulator. The
problem is probably the remote PES burst demodulator if a test PES
co-located at the Hub can properly range, and if no other remote bursts
are being detected. Verify timing offset is correct.
STEP 9. Enter the timing offset correction as instructed by the Hub operator and press <ENTER>. If
entering a timing offset correction, enter a plus sign (+) or minus sign (-) followed by the
number of microseconds to change the timing offset. If no correction is desired, press
<ENTER>. The site commissioning computer display blanks for a few seconds and then is
rewritten, indicating the new values written to the IOC EEPROM.
10-4-7
Table 4-1. PES Model X000 Series (Other than PES 5000) Output Power Level
Site Commissioning
Computer Power Level Resultant Applicable
(Hexadecimal) Output Power RF Unit
14 12 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W

1E 13 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
28 14 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
32 15 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
3C 16 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
46 17 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
50 18 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
5A 19 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
64 20 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
6E 21 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
78 22 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
82 23 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
8C 24 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
96 25 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
A0 26 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
AA 27 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
B4 28 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
BE 29 dBm 0.5W, 1.0W, 2.0W
C8 30 dBm -- , 1.0W, 2.0W
D2 31 dBm -- , 1.0W, 2.0W
DC 32 dBm -- , 1.0W, 2.0W
E6 33 dBm -- , -- , 2.0W
E0 34 dBm -- , -- , 2.0W
FA 35 dBm -- , -- , 2.0W
NOTE
If current timing offset is 0000, the site commissioning computer will not
accept changes to increase it because the current timing offset value
displayed is a byte-reversed, twos-complement number. The value 0000
represents the largest possible delay (the appropriate number for a remote
PES located on the equator exactly under the satellite). Use negative
changes to reduce the delay.
STEP 10. Continue to refine timing offset and power offset according to the Hub operator’s instructions
until the offsets are fine-adjusted. (At this point, the readings at the Hub burst demodulator
are correctly aligned.)
STEP 11. Record the final ranged offset values on the Installation Data Sheet.
10-4-8
STEP 12. When the offsets are fine-adjusted, enter /<ENTER> at the site commissioning computer to
exit the RANGE function. For version v3.0, when you make a change or press <ENTER> at
the timing correction or power prompt, the final "ranged power level" and "ranged power
offset" values are written into the IFM EEPROM.
STEP 13. At the site commissioning computer, enter read<ENTER>.
Enter dialog<ENTER>. At the
"Modify ranging parameters? (y/n):"
prompt, answer yes by entering y<ENTER> to view the parameters. The display is in the
following format:
--------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------
The values for ranged power level and ranged timing offset should agree with the final values
obtained using the RANGE function. (Note that the last two digits of the initial timing offset
and ranged timing offset are the two most significant digits. This rearrangement of digit
locations is called "byte reversing.")
At this point, edit the initial values to be equal to the final ranged values (unless you have
been given specific instructions to the contrary). Issue a site commissioning computer write
command to transfer the contents of the site commissioning computer database to the IOC
EEPROM.
Tell the Hub operator your ranged power level. The Hub operator may compare your actual
ranged power with a predicted power for your site if sufficient information is available.
STEP 15. For network software release 6.2 or higher (HISAD), the Hub operator or an approximately
20 minute timeout will return the remote to normal mode. Skip to step 16.
STEP 15A. For network software release prior to 6.2 (manual ranging), return the PES to NORMAL
mode. For PES model X000 series, use the SWITCH function. Exit the SWITCH function to
cause the change to take effect. This causes a reset, followed by normal online operation.
The final ranged values are put into effect when the PES is in NORMAL mode. Note that
several minutes may be required for initialization, downloading, etc., before all displays are
blank/blank..
STEP 16. If appropriate for this network, use the SAVE function to store the final DIALOG site
commissioning parameters as a file in the site commissioning computer. Write the name of
the file in the blank provided on the Installation Data Sheet.
10-4-9
SUMMARY - FINE-ADJUSTING THE TIMING AND POWER OFFSETS - In summary, the

procedure to fine-adjust the timing and power offsets is as follows:
STEP 1. Configure the PES indoor unit with the proper initial parameters.
STEP 2. Determine if your Hub can perform autocommissioning. (Hub has network software release
6.2 or higher.) If so, set PES mode to COMM (ranging). Wait for port card LED display to
become [3]/[b.]. Skip to step 14.
STEP 3. If your Hub cannot perform autocommissioning, call the Hub operator. Tell the Hub operator
you have PES model X000 series PES to range.
STEP 4. Allow Hub operator to initiate session with automatic adjustments disabled (HISAD).
Observe that the IFM LED display progresses to [r]/[blank.].
STEP 5. Observe that a port card display progresses to [3]/[5.]. (Port card is transmitting ranging
bursts.)
STEP 6. At site commissioning computer, enter range<ENTER>.
STEP 7. Hub operator begins observing your ranging signal.
STEP 8. Increase or decrease power if instructed by Hub operator.
STEP 9. Have Hub operator verify that burst detects are occurring within range aperture.
STEP 10. Correct timing offset as instructed by Hub operator.
STEP 11. Fine-tune power and timing as instructed by Hub operator.
STEP 12. Record the final values.
STEP 13. Exit the RANGE function.
STEP 14. Enter read<ENTER>.
STEP 15. Enter dialog<ENTER>. Check that final ranged values agree with the results obtained with
the RANGE function. Edit the initial values to match the final ranged values and enter
write<ENTER>. Tell the Hub operator what your ranged power level is.
STEP 16. Use the SAVE function to store the parameter file and record the name of the parameter file.
10-4-10
4.3 EXPLANATION OF INITIAL, RANGED, AND CURRENT VALUES

The IFM uses three sets of power and timing offset parameters, the INITIAL VALUES, the RANGED
VALUES, and the CURRENT VALUES. These are dealt with by the IFM and the site commissioning
computer in different ways, as follows:
• The CURRENT VALUES are the numbers actually in use, i.e., the numbers in the IFM
hardware registers that are actively counting off the time delay and telling the RF Unit what
power to use. The site commissioning computer MONITOR program and the RANGE
program display the current values.
• The CURRENT VALUES are initialized once by the IFM every time it is reset. If the IFM is
started up in the COMMISSION mode, the IFM sets the CURRENT VALUE equal to the
INITIAL VALUES (which are just a set of numbers stored in the EEPROM). If the IFM is
started up in the NORMAL mode, the IFM sets the CURRENT VALUE equal to the
RANGED VALUES (which are also just another set of numbers stored in the EEPROM).
Before the IFM can do something useful in the COMMISSION mode, the INITIAL
VALUES must be reasonable; and before the IFM can do something useful in the NORMAL
mode, the RANGED VALUES must be reasonable.
• The only way to set or change the INITIAL VALUES is via the DIALOG, followed by a
WRITE into the EEPROM. Note that the DIALOG also displays the set of RANGED
VALUES for informational purposes but does not let you change them. The INITIAL
VALUES must be accurate enough for the remote ranging bursts to land in the ranging
aperture at the Hub. This is why the LATLONG function is provided.
• The two approved ways to set or change the RANGED VALUES or the CURRENT
VALUES in a new site are by autocommissioning or by the site commissioning computer
RANGE function. When it is started, the RANGE function displays the CURRENT
VALUES (i.e., it reads them out of the registers) and asks if corrections are desired. If they
are, the corrections are applied to the CURRENT VALUES, and the resulting new numbers
are written back into the hardware register CURRENT VALUES and the EEPROM
RANGED VALUES. In this way, desired changes take place immediately because the
registers are updated immediately and will last indefinitely, because the most recent values
are saved in the EEPROM. (NOTE: It is possible to change the RANGED VALUES in a
PES indoor unit by using the get and write functions to transfer a file saved from another PES
indoor unit. However, this method is not appropriate when commissioning a new site.)
• Note that the RANGE function does not write updated RANGED VALUES to the site
commissioning computer database. This is why step 13 of the previous paragraph requests a
READ before doing any further parameter changes if desired. Also note that because of the
way the RANGE loop works, it is necessary to do at least one correction (even if it is by 0s)
in order to write the RANGED VALUES into the EEPROM.
The sequence described in chapter 10, section 4 is the only method to range a remote that cannot use
autocommissioning. Performing any other steps may produce unexpected behavior. If in doubt, do a
READ and a DIALOG. The numbers displayed for the RANGED VALUES and INITIAL VALUES will
be used when the IFM is started up in the NORMAL or COMMISSION modes, respectively, and will be
initially displayed once the RANGE function is invoked after startup.
10-4-11
4.4 SCENARIOS
The following are sample scenarios for using the DIU Configuration Editor.
4.4.1 CONFIGURING A PES FROM SCRATCH

STEP 1. After determining the satellite longitude and the PES longitude and latitude, run LATLONG
to obtain pointing and timing information.
STEP 2. After determining frequencies, run FREQCVT to obtain frequency codes.
STEP 3. Set PES to DIAG mode. Apply power to the PES indoor unit.
STEP 4. Run CLEAR, which erases the IFM EEPROM.
STEP 5. Run DIALOG to enter the commissioning parameters into the site commissioning computer
database.
STEP 6. Run WRITE to write the commissioning parameters into the IFM EEPROM.
STEP 7. Reset the indoor unit, which invokes the commissioning parameters stored in EEPROM.
STEP 8. Point the antenna as described in the antenna aiming section (chapter 11). Determine if your
site can use autocommissioning.
STEP 9. Perform autocommissioning or run RANGE to determine the correct power and timing
values.
STEP 10. Run SAVE if you want to archive these parameters.
STEP 11. Reset the PES indoor unit.
4.4.2 UPDATING A PES CONFIGURATION

STEP 1. If the configuration is archived, run GET.
STEP 2. If the configuration is not archived, run READ.
STEP 3. Run DIALOG to make the desired changes.
STEP 4. Run WRITE.
STEP 5. Run SAVE if you want to archive these parameters.
STEP 6. Reset the PES indoor unit.
4.4.3 DUPLICATING INDOOR UNIT PARAMETERS

STEP 1. Connect the site commissioning computer to the first indoor unit.
STEP 2. Run READ.
STEP 3. Connect the site commissioning computer to the second indoor unit.
STEP 4. Run WRITE.
STEP 5. Reset the second indoor unit.
10-4-12
4.5 ERROR MESSAGES

The following are error messages that the site commissioning computer displays:
No response from IFM
The cable is not plugged in, the indoor unit is off, or the IFM/site commissioning
cable is broken.
Incorrect read response from IFM

The site commissioning computer communicated with the IFM, but the message was
corrupted. Reset the indoor unit and the site commissioning computer. Try again.
Inspect the cable.
Incorrect write response from IFM

The site commissioning computer communicated with the IFM, but the message was
corrupted. Reset the indoor unit and the site commissioning computer. Try again.
Inspect the cable.
Null response This message is not an error. A blank response was received from the IFM, which is
acceptable when using the TERMINAL function.
! Timing Offset Undefined !

The site commissioning computer cannot compute a valid timing offset. Recheck the
longitudes and latitude.
10-4-13
11-27-91
CHAPTER 11
ANTENNA AIMING
This chapter is divided into five sections:

Section 1 - Overview and Preparation
Section 2 - Setting Polarization
Section 3 - Setting Antenna Elevation to Computed Elevation Value
Section 4 - Setting Antenna Azimuth to Computed Azimuth Value
Section 5 - Using Install Mode to Refine Antenna Aiming
Section 1
OVERVIEW AND PREPARATION
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides instructions for aiming the PES antenna to the correct satellite. Figure 1-1 shows
that, as viewed from North America, geosynchronous satellites over the equator appear in an arc in the
Southern sky. After correct reception is optimized, this section references instructions to adjust the power
and timing of the signals the PES transmits. An Installation Data Sheet, figure 1-2, accompanies this
section and serves as a guide as you progress through the antenna aiming procedure. The installation data
sheets are for your own use and are not required by HNS.
This section provides one set of antenna aiming instructions for the Prodelin 1.8M Quick Repoint
antenna. These instructions are also generally applicable to other Prodelin Quick Repoint antennas;
however, mechanical differences of the other antennas must be taken into account. These instructions are
valid only for the PES Model X000 series.
In the paragraphs which follow, for all antennas you are given specific instructions to:
• First, telephone the Hub operator to report that you are starting antenna aiming and to request
input value information.
• Next, verify that the PES is properly configured and that the proper Site Commissioning
parameters are loaded into the PES indoor unit.
• Place the PES indoor unit in Install mode.

• Then, obtain computed (expected) antenna aiming values for azimuth, elevation, and
polarization.
• Next, adjust the antenna to these values as a coarse approximation in acquiring the satellite.
• Attach a voltmeter to the RF Unit antenna pointing output.
• Refine the antenna pointing in Install mode for the strongest received signal (lowest meter
indication).
11-1-1
• Perform automated ranging (for Hub software release 6.2 or higher) or manual ranging (for
Hub software releases prior to 6.2).
• Record and store final antenna aiming values and parameters.
GSTAR-2
105°
SBS-4 SBS-6
99° GSTAR-1
91° 103°
SBS-5
123°
SOUTH
EAST MEXICO
CONTINENTAL U.S.
CANADA
PES3-1235
Figure 1-1. Finding PES Ku-band Satellites
11-1-2
CHAPTER 11 - ANTENNA AIMING
SECTION 1 - OVERVIEW AND PREPARATION
SITE NUMBER _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _
DATE _____________________________
INSTALLER _______________________
INPUT VALUES
PERSONAL EARTH STATION (PES) NAME: ____________________________
Network Name: _______________________________________________________
Network operating using software release number: _________________________
Primary Backup
*SATELLITE NAME ________ _______
Transponder: ________ _______
*Satellite longitude (degs): ________ _______
*PES longitude (degs, mins): _______________, _______________
*PES latitude (degs, mins): _______________, _______________
Hub operator ph # (______) ________-______________
SITE COMMISSIONING COMPUTER FILE NAME FOR NETWORK ___________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
COMPUTED ANTENNA AIMING VALUES FROM LATLONG PROGRAM
Primary Satellite Backup Satellite

Timing offset (ticks): ______________ ____________
*Elevation angle (degs): ______________ ____________
*Azimuth angle (degs): ______________ ____________
*Polarization angle (degs): ______________ ____________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
*Write these values onto the back of the antenna reflector.
Figure 1-2. Installation Data Sheet

(Sheet 1 of 5)
11-1-3
SITE NUMBER _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _
INITIAL SITE COMMISSIONING PARAMETERS -
INITIAL DIALOG VALUES
Port Card Parameters
Remote Base Address MSB: ________________ Obtain from Hub operator.
Slot 1 Base Address LSB: ________________ Obtain from Hub operator.

Type (00np 01tr 02ro): ________________ Enter type code as follows:
Slot 2 Base Address LSB: ________________ 00 = not present, VP TEL,

Type (00np 01tr 02ro): ________________ VP PBX, or DMC
01 = transmit/receive
Slot 3 Base Address LSB: ________________ 02 = receive only
Type (00np 01tr 02ro): ________________
Two digits must be entered
Slot 4 Base Address LSB: ________________ for each selection.
Type (00np 01tr 02ro): ________________
PC = port card
MSB = most significant byte
LSB = least significant byte
Space Link Modem Parameters
Outroute Spectral Spreading: ________________ Obtain from Hub operator.

(00-disable 01-enable):
Receive Only IFM: ________________ Based on PES type. See

(00-transmit/receive 01-receive only): appendix B and chapter 2 section 4
Outroute Data Rate (kbps):_________________ Obtain from Hub operator.

(00-128 01-512):
Inroute Data Rate (kbps):_________________ Obtain from Hub operator.

(00-64 01-128 02-256):
OUTROUTE OUTROUTE INROUTE

SPECTRAL DATA DATA
SPREADING RATE RATE APPLICATION
01 = enabled 00 = 128 00 = 64 PES Model 6000

00 = disabled 01 = 512 01 = 128 PES Model 8000 or 9000
00 = disabled 00 = 128 -- Special applications
01 = enabled 01 = 512 -- Invalid combination
Figure 1-2. Installation Data Sheet (Sheet 2 of 5)
11-1-4
SITE NUMBER _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _
Ranging Parameters
Initial Power Level: __________________ Initial value. For PES X000 series,
set according to RF Unit power
(0.5W - 96, 1.0W - B4, or 2.0W - D2).
For PES Type 1 or Type 2 set to 50.
This value will probably be changed
after ranging is completed.
Initial Timing Offset: ________________ Obtain initial value from LATLONG

program output named "Timing Offset
(ticks)." This is computed based on
the site latitude and longitude.
This value will probably be changed
after ranging is completed.
Network Parameters
Outroute Carrier ID: ________________ A four digit hex identifier that

uniquely labels each possible PES
network. Obtain from Hub operator.
Primary Frequency: _________________ A hexadecimal code that determines

the center frequency at which the
PES receives outroute signals from
the Hub. Obtain from Hub operator.
Backup Frequency: __________________ Backup outroute frequency code.

Obtain from Hub operator.
Inroute 1 Frequency: _________________ A hexadecimal code that determines

one of the possible frequencies on
which the PES may transmit. Obtain
from Hub operator.
11-1-5
SITE NUMBER _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _
Network Parameters (Continued)
HEX CODE
Inroute 2 Frequency: _______________________ Obtain from Hub operator.
Inroute10 Frequency: ______________________ Obtain from Hub operator.
11-1-6
SITE NUMBER _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _
_____________________________________________________________________________________
APPLYING DECLINATION (DEC) FROM FIGURE 4-1
AZIMUTH (TRUE) ___________________ AZIMUTH (TRUE) ________________
SUBTRACT EASTERLY DEC - ________ OR ADD WESTERLY DEC + __________

_______________________________________ ___________________________________
= AZIMUTH (MAGNETIC) ____________ = AZIMUTH (MAGNETIC) ________

_____________________________________________________________________________________
MEASURED RESULTS FOR BEST RECEPTION
Eb/No voltage _________________________ Vdc RF Unit antenna pointing output

Eb/No _______________________________ dB from site commissioning computer
MONITOR function
CER ________________________________
WEATHER AT PES:
____Clear ____Partly Cloudy ____Cloudy ____Light Rain ____Heavy Rain ____Snow
WEATHER AT HUB:
____Clear ____Partly Cloudy ____Cloudy ____Light Rain ____Heavy Rain ____Snow
FINAL RESULTS FROM AUTOCOMMISSIONING OR RANGE PROGRAM
Final Ranged Power Level: ___________________ dB Predicted Power Level ________dB

Final Ranged Timing Offset: __________________
Used READ and DIALOG to verify final results in IFM: ______YES

Used SAVE to store final site commissioning parameters (DIALOG values)
in site commissioning computer as a file named:
*Write these values onto the back of the antenna reflector.
11-1-7
1.2 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR ANTENNA AIMING

The antenna aiming procedure requires the following items:
• A standard installation/troubleshooting tool kit (hand tools, wrenches, screwdrivers, phillips
screwdrivers, etc.).
• Site commissioning computer loaded with the correct DIU Configuration Editor (program
name M100.BA) for the network release software in use. Version v3.0 or higher is required
for PES model X000 series.
• An RS-232 cable for the site commissioning computer and the IFM CONFIG port.
• Analog Voltmeter (Radio Shack Micronta 22-212 or equivalent). Meter leads 12-feet long
with male F-type connector.
• Digital Voltmeter (Radio Shack Micronta 22-191 or equivalent).

• Inclinometer (INOGON, P/N 3253, SYLVAX CORP. NY, NY, MBS or equivalent) or angle
indicator (MOAGON model AH+M3 manufactured by MOAGON AB, P.O. Box 53232,
S-400 16 GOTEBORG, SWEDEN).
• Magnetic Compass (handheld).

• Indelible water-proof marker (such as Sanford Sharpie Permanent Marker).
• Safety Harness - McMaster-Carr part number 7942T14 or equivalent.
• Lanyard - McMaster-Carr shock absorber with lanyard part number 8168Y14 or equivalent.
1.3 TELEPHONING THE HUB OPERATOR

Telephone the appropriate Hub operator when you are ready to begin antenna aiming. There can be a
different Hub for each customer network. The telephone number for the Hub operator should be provided
by your supervisor and recorded in the input values section of the Installation Data Sheet. Notify the Hub
operator that you are on location at a particular site and that you are ready to begin the antenna aiming
procedure. Give the Hub operator the telephone number of the PES site. If the input values section of
your Installation Data Sheet has already been completed, have the Hub operator verify that the following
information is correct: site number, network name, software release number in effect for the network,
satellite name, satellite polarization correction, satellite longitude, and site commissioning computer file
name for the network. Then ask the Hub operator to verify the following information from the initial
dialog values section of the Installation Data Sheet: port card parameters (remote base address MSB, port
card base address LSB, and port card type for the 4 port card designations). If the Hub operator has not
given you a file name for the network, ask the Hub operator to verify the network parameters (outroute
carrier ID, primary frequency, backup frequency, and 32 inroute frequencies).
If the above information has not already been entered into the Installation Data Sheet, ask the Hub
operator to supply the information and write it into the Installation Data Sheet. If the Hub operator gives
you the primary, backup, and inroute frequencies in a special hexadecimal code, write the values in the
initial dialog values section network parameters. If the Hub operator gives you the frequencies in MHz,
write the numbers in the MHz column of the frequency worksheet section. Ask the Hub operator to make
certain that there will be an active outroute signal for the next few hours for the correct network for your
11-1-8
PES. Ask the Hub operator if his Hub is equipped for autoranging (has network software release 6.2 or
higher). If so, notify the Hub operator that you plan on ranging from this site. If not, notify the Hub
operator that you will need to call again later in the antenna aiming procedure in order to do ranging.
Conclude the telephone call.
1.4 VERIFYING THAT PES IS PROPERLY CONFIGURED

Before attempting antenna aiming, verify that the PES is properly configured with a PES indoor unit
(with correct Site Commissioning Parameters), RF Unit, and interface cabling. If the PES equipment is
not functional or not interconnected properly, considerable time can be wasted in futile attempts to
acquire the satellite.
NOTE
Antenna aiming cannot be completed until the correct site commis-
sioning parameters have been entered into the PES indoor unit.
Complete the initial dialog values portion of the Installation Data Sheet. Use the FREQCVT program to
convert frequencies expressed in MHz into special hexadecimal codes (chapter 10). The Hub operator
provides the frequencies. Make certain you understand which units the operator gives for each frequency
(MHz or a special hexadecimal code).
Check that the correct initial site commissioning parameters have been entered into the PES indoor unit
(see chapter 10) and agree with those marked on the initial site commissioning parameters section of the
Installation Data Sheet.
To check the current initial site commissioning parameters, connect the site commissioning computer to
the PES indoor unit and apply power. Use the DIU Configuration Editor to set the PES to DIAG mode,
which prevents the PES from transmitting until the proper parameters are entered. Use the READ and
DIALOG programs to view the site commissioning parameters. If the correct initial site commissioning
parameters are not already stored, use the DIALOG and WRITE programs to transfer the values from the
Installation Data Sheet. Make sure that the ranging parameter "Initial Power Level" is set to 50 at this
time.
11-1-9
1.5 OBTAINING COMPUTED ANTENNA AIMING VALUES

To obtain antenna aiming values, you need the following input value information:
a. The longitude of the satellite to be used.
b. The latitude and longitude of the Personal Earth Station site.
Figure 1-2 provides a sample Installation Data Sheet for recording the above input values.
Perform the following steps to obtain the computed (expected) antenna aiming values:
STEP 1. Determine the satellite to be used and its longitude. Write down the name and the longitude
of the satellite on a copy of figure 1-2, Installation Data Sheet. Table 2-1 on page 11-2-1 lists
the longitudes for some of the satellites used for PES.
STEP 2. Determine the latitude and longitude of the Personal Earth Station. Use a map (chapter 11,
section 1.7), atlas, reference book (chapter 11, section 1.8), or navigation system (such as
LORAN) to determine these values. Enter this information on a copy of figure 1-2.
NOTE
Alternate methods of determining the PES station latitude and longitude
include calling the nearest local airport or nearest radio broadcasting
station and asking for the latitude and longitude indicated on the station
license. Extrapolate these values to the PES station location.
STEP 3. Use the LATLONG utility program on the site commissioning computer to determine the
expected antenna aiming values of elevation, azimuth, and polarization (see chapter 10).
Write these values in the blanks for computed antenna aiming values on the copy of figure
1-2, Installation Data Sheet. The LATLONG utility program calculates the azimuth relative
to true North. Write the azimuth calculated by the LATLONG in the blank marked
AZIMUTH (TRUE) on the copy of figure 1-2. Later paragraphs explain the use of the
compass and magnetic declination compensation.
Be sure to include the correct sign (plus sign or minus sign) when recording the polarization.
Also record the initial timing estimate.
The LATLONG program first requests the satellite longitude, PES longitude, and PES
latitude in a display titled "Geography Help." For the United States, the satellite longitude is
always W, the remote site longitude is always W, and the remote site latitude is always N
(figure 1-3. The LATLONG program displays these input values across the top line and gives
computed timing offset, elevation angle, azimuth angle, and polarization angle. The example
of figure 1-4 is for a satellite at 99°W as viewed from a PES site at San Diego, California.
11-1-10
PES3-1245
Figure 1-3. Identifying North & South Latitude and West & East Longitude
Geography Help
_______________________________________________
Satellite longitude (degs) ? 99
East or West longitude (E/W) ? W

PES latitude (degs, mins) ? 32, 53.86
( 99 ) ( 117, 13.3 ) ( 32, 53.86 )

_______________________________________________
Timing offset (ticks): A340

Elevation angle (degs): 47
Azimuth angle (degs): 148.8
Polarization angle (degs): 25.8
ENTER, or / to quit: #
Figure 1-4. Example of LATLONG Program Calculation
11-1-11
1.6 LATLONG CALCULATIONS FOR BACKUP SATELLITES

If you are installing a Prodelin quick repoint antenna, make LATLONG calculations for all proposed
backup satellites and the primary satellite. Compare the azimuth results for the primary satellite and all
backup satellites. If the azimuth results all fall within a 90°range, you will be able to position the canister
so that signals from all satellites can be acquired without changing the canister position (quick
repointing).
The canister should be initially positioned on the mast pipe so that the entire range will be covered. Make
sure that the canister is level.
1.7 USING A ROAD MAP TO DETERMINE PES LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE

Regional, state, and county road maps often provide indications of latitude and longitude in whole degree,
thirty-minute, or fifteen-minute increments. You may not have noticed such indications before because
rather than showing grid lines across the map, typically there are only small tick mark indications on the
edge of the map. Also, the type size of latitude and longitude numbers can be quite small. Using an
appropriate road map with latitude and longitude marks, a ruler capable of measuring in millimeters, a
calculator and the process of interpolation (described below), you can determine PES site latitude and
longitude with sufficient accuracy to begin the ranging process (to within about 5 minutes or better,
depending on the map scale).
Select your road atlas carefully. Some atlases have longitude/latitude marks; some do not. The Rand
McNally road atlas does have longitude/latitude marks.
1.7.1 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR FINDING SITE LONGITUDE AND LATITUDE

As shown in figure 1-5A, the procedure entails measuring the distance, in millimeters, between each
whole latitude and longitude mark, then measuring the distance, in millimeters, from the lowest whole
latitude and longitude mark to the location or city in question. These measurements will calculate ratios
which may be translated to minutes or may be used directly in the site commissioning computer
LATLONG Program.
D1 = Distance in millimeters between Lat A and Lat B.
D2 = Distance in millimeters between Long A and Long B.
C1 = Distance in millimeters between Lat A and intersection of latitude

intersection of site.
C2 = Distance in millimeters between Long A and intersection of longitude

intersection of site.
Minutes of longitude = (C2/D2) times 60.
Minutes of latitude = (C1/D1) times 60.
Site location longitude = Long A + calculated longitude (minutes).
Site location latitude = Lat A + calculated latitude (minutes).
If your map does not span one whole degree of latitude or longitude marks, change the times 60
accordingly (30 for 30 minutes, 15 for 15 minutes, etc.).
11-1-12
PES-371
Figure 1-5. Using a Road Map to Determine PES Latitude and Longitude
11-1-13
1.7.2 EXAMPLE OF FINDING SITE LONGITUDE AND LATITUDE

Figure 1-5B shows a specific example for finding the longitude and latitude of Nowata, Oklahoma:
Distance in millimeters between 95 and 96 degrees longitude = D2 = 57.0.
Distance in millimeters between 36 and 37 degrees latitude = D1 = 71.5.
Distance in millimeters from 95 degrees to intersect = C2 = 34.0.
Distance in millimeters from 36 degrees to intersect = C1 = 46.0.
Longitude (minutes) = (C2/D2) times 60 = (34/57) x 60 = 35.8 minutes.
Latitude (minutes) = (C1/D1) times 60 = (47.5/71.5) x 60 = 39.9 minutes.
Therefore, Nowata, Oklahoma is located at 95 degrees 35.8 minutes longitude W,

36 degrees 39.9 minutes latitude N.
(The actual millimeter measurements from the figure may be proportionately larger or smaller because
there may be size changes in the printing process.)
1.8 OBTAINING SITE LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE FROM REFERENCE BOOKS

World atlases (such as the Readers Digest Wide World Atlas) often list the latitude and longitude of
indicated cities in tabular form.
The book "AOPA’s Airports USA" gives the latitude and longitude of airports in the United States to the
nearest tenth of a minute of arc. This book lists over 8,600 public airports. This book is available from
Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association, 421 Aviation Way, Frederick, Maryland 21701 (telephone:
301/695-2044).
You may use figure 2-2 to check that any latitude/longitude obtained for a site is in the proper range and
seems reasonable.
11-1-14
3-5-91
3-5-91
SECTION 2 - SETTING POLARIZATION
Section 2
SETTING POLARIZATION
2.1 POLARIZATION GENERAL

The polarization adjustment geometrically aligns the PES receiver to the orientation of the outroute signal
received from the satellite. There are two basic orientations of the PES received outroute downlink
signal: horizontal and vertical. The choice of a horizontal or vertical downlink polarization is determined
by the selection of satellite transponder. See table 2-1.
Table 2-1. Satellites Currently Used - PES Ku-Band - United States
Satellite GSTAR-1 GSTAR-2 SBS-4 SBS-5 SBS-6
Tilt Correction +26° +26° 0 0 0
Longitude 103° 105° 91° 123° 99°
Transponder 1-H 1-H 1-H 1-H 1-H

- Downlink 2-H 2-H 2-H 2-H 2-V
Polarization 3-H 3-H 3-H 3-H 3-H
(PES Receive) 4-H 4-H 4-H 4-H 4-V
5-H 5-H 5-H 5-H 5-H
6-H 6-H 6-H 6-H 6-V
7-H 7-H 7-H 7-H 7-H
8-H 8-H 8-H 8-H 8-V
9-V 9-V 9-H 9-H 9-H
10 - V 10 - V 10 - H 10 - H 10 - V
11 - V 11 - V 11* - V 11 - H
12 - V 12 - V 12* - V 12 - V
13 - V 13 - V 13* - V 13 - H
14 - V 14 - V 14* - V 14 - V
15 - V 15 - V 15 - H
16 - V 16 - V 16 - V
17 - H
18 - V
19 - H
* = Wideband transponder, not presently used for PES.
HORIZONTAL DOWNLINK: For a nonfrequency reuse satellite, such as SBS-4, all transponders
provide a horizontal downlink signal and the polarization calculations of the LATLONG function assume
a horizontal downlink signal. Therefore, the LATLONG polarization value can be used directly for a
horizontal downlink transponder (unless there is an additional correction for satellite tilt). See table 2-2.
VERTICAL DOWNLINK: For a frequency reuse satellite, such as GSTAR-2 or SBS-6, there are both
horizontal and vertical downlink transponders. For a vertical downlink transponder, the polarization
setting is modified to correct the horizontal downlink assumption of the LATLONG function. The
modification steps are different for rectangular and circular antennas even though the effective result of
aligning the receiver to the outroute downlink signal is the same. See table 2-2.
11-2-1
A vertical downlink transponder has a corresponding horizontal uplink signal. The horizontal uplink
transponder correction described in previous PES manuals applies to circular antennas only and is the
same as the vertical downlink correction.
RECTANGULAR ANTENNAS: As shown in figure 2-1A for rectangular antennas, the entire reflector
and RF Unit rotate together for polarization adjustment. The polarization adjustment is made setting a
scale on the rear of the reflector to the polarization value given by the LATLONG function. The
orientation of the feedhorn to reflector must remain fixed as the two are rotated together (figure 1-8 on
page 7-1-13, long side of feedhorn parallel to short side of reflector). The setting of the polarization scale
on the rear of the RF Unit remains fixed at its current value (zero degrees for a horizontal downlink
transponder or ninety degrees for vertical downlink transponder). The rectangular feedhorn is attached to
the RF Unit according to downlink orientation: horizontal (page 7-1-14) or vertical (page 7-1-15).
CIRCULAR ANTENNAS: As shown in figure 2-1B for circular antennas, the polarization adjustment
is set by rotating the RF Unit so that the polarization scale on the rear of the RF Unit indicates the
polarization value. For a horizontal downlink transponder, set the RF unit polarization to the value
provided by the LATLONG function. For a vertical downlink transponder, set the RF unit polarization to
a value ninety degrees away from the number provided by the LATLONG function.
Table 2-2. Setting Polarization Summary
Horizontal Downlink Vertical Downlink

Transponder Transponder
Rectangular Antenna Set RF Unit to 0° Set RF Unit to 90°

(0.75M, 1.0M)
Set reflector to value Set reflector to value
from LATLONG* from LATLONG*
Circular Antenna Set RF Unit to value Set RF Unit 90° away from
(1.2M, 1.8M, 2.44M) from LATLONG* value from LATLONG*
*Correct for satellite tilt if necessary.
11-2-2
RF Unit Remains at:
0 degrees (horizontal downlink transponder)

Reflector rotated or
in polarization 90 degrees (vertical downlink transponder)
A) RECTANGULAR ANTENNA (0.75M and 1.0M)
+ — + —
100
100
100
100
IF
LNC
90
90
90
90
IF LNC
80
80
80
80
G
70
70
70
70
G
60
60
60
60
POI
TING NTI
POIN NG
50
50
50
50
40 40
40 40
30 30 30 30
20 20 20 20
10 0 10 10 0 10
WARNING WARNING
-11 degrees Remove MAIN POWER
before disconnecting cable +20 degrees Remove MAIN POWER
before disconnecting cable
HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
Personal Personal
Earth Station Earth Station
B) CIRCULAR ANTENNAS (1.2M, 1.8M, 2.44M)

PES3-1234A
Figure 2-1. Setting Polarization - Rectangular and Circular Antennas
11-2-3
POLARIZATION AND SITE LOCATION: As shown in figure 2-2, the amount of polarization
depends on the site location. Figure 2-2 provides example data for horizontal downlink transponders on a
satellite at longitude 99 degrees West. The bottom number of each group of the three numbers represents
the polarization angle from the map location to acquire the example satellite. The heavy black line in
figure 2-2 represents the longitude of example satellite (99 degrees). Note that for this satellite and sites
at this longitude, the polarization angle is zero. The required polarization angle is larger for sites further
away from the sub-satellite longitude. In North America, the uncorrected polarization value is positive if
the PES longitude is West of the satellite’s longitude. If the PES longitude is East of the satellite, the
polarization value is negative. Use this relationship as a check that your polarization value seems
reasonable for horizontal downlink transponders.
2.2 POLARIZATION PROCEDURE - RECTANGULAR ANTENNAS

Perform the following steps to set the polarization for a rectangular antenna:
STEP 1. Determine the satellite transponder and its downlink polarization (horizontal or vertical).
Refer to the appropriate customer "Installation Specification" and table 2-1. If you are still
not sure, contact your designated "HNS Installation Manager."
STEP 2. Verify that the rectangular feedhorn is properly attached to the RF Unit according to the
downlink polarization:
For a horizontal downlink transponder, the scale on the rear of the RF Unit indicates zero
degrees when the long side of the feedhorn is parallel to the short side of the antenna (page
7-1-14).
For a vertical downlink transponder, the scale on the rear of the RF Unit indicates ninety
degrees when the long side of the feedhorn is parallel to the short side of the antenna (page
7-1-15).
If necessary, remove the feedhorn from the RF Unit, reconnect it in the proper orientation,
and adjust the RF Unit rotation. Failure to have the feedhorn and RF Unit in the proper
orientation will prevent receiving the outroute and finding the satellite.
STEP 3 Loosen the polarization locking bolt at the rear of the reflector. Rotate the reflector until the
polarization scale on the rear of the reflector indicates the value from LATLONG. Observe
the proper plus (+) or minus (-) value. Tighten the polarization locking bolt. The
polarization setting on the rear of the RF Unit should be left at its current value (0 degrees -
horizontal downlink, or 90 degrees - vertical downlink).
2.3 POLARIZATION PROCEDURE - CIRCULAR ANTENNAS

Perform the following steps to set the polarization for a circular antenna:
STEP 1. Determine the satellite transponder and its downlink polarization (horizontal or vertical).
Refer to the appropriate customer "Installation Specification" and table 2-1. If you are still
not sure, contact your designated "HNS Installation Manager."
STEP 2. Locate the polarization adjustment area on the back of the RF Unit. Figure 2-1B shows two
example polarization settings. Loosen the polarization clamping screw on the rear of the RF
Unit.
11-2-4
Figure 2-2. Polarization and Site Location
10661
11-2-5
For a horizontal downlink transponder, rotate the RF Unit to the polarization value computed
by the LATLONG function. Observe the proper plus (+) or minus (-) value.
For a vertical downlink transponder, rotate the RF Unit to a polarization value ninety degrees
away from the value computed by the LATLONG function. Add (or subtract to stay on scale
- both are correct) 90 degrees to (from) the polarization value provided by the LATLONG
program. Observe the proper plus (+) or minus (-) value.
STEP 3. Tighten the polarization locking screw.
2.4 GSTAR-1 SATELLITE TILT - EXAMPLE CORRECTIONS

Normally, the polarization of the antenna on board the satellite is aligned with the earth’s axis at the
subsatellite point (the satellite’s longitude). When the satellite polarization is aligned with the axis of the
earth (along the satellite’s longitude) and when the downlink signal is horizontally polarized, the
computed polarization value from the site commissioning computer LATLONG utility program can be
used directly (figure 2-3A). Satellites GSTAR-2, SBS-4, -5, and -6 are aligned with the earth’s axis along
each satellite’s longitude and therefore do not need tilt correction.
If the satellite polarization is not aligned with the axis of the earth, the polarization value from the
LATLONG program must be corrected (figure 2-3B). For example, the GSTAR-1 satellite antenna on
board the satellite is tilted with respect to the earth. At the present time, GSTAR-1 is the only U.S.
satellite used for PES that is tilted. Only a small portion of PES customers use GSTAR-1. It is expected
that future satellites will not be tilted.
The GSTAR-1 satellite antenna on board the satellite is rotated 26 degrees counterclockwise when
viewing the satellite from earth. Therefore, polarization values for earth stations using GSTAR-1 must be
corrected.
For rectangular antennas, add +26 degrees to the value provided by the LATLONG function. Use this
sum (LATLONG value + 26 degrees) when setting the reflector polarization position for GSTAR-1. This
action rotates the reflector as viewed from the rear an additional 26 degrees counterclockwise. For
rectangular antennas, the reflector polarization position is the same for both horizontal and vertical
downlink transponders. The setting on the rear or the RF Unit remains at zero degrees or ninety degrees.
For circular antennas, polarization values for earth stations using GSTAR-1 must be corrected 26 degrees
clockwise as viewed looking at the dial on the RF Unit (corresponds to 26 degrees counterclockwise
when looking at the satellite). This correction is made by adding +26 degrees to the value from
LATLONG for horizontal downlink transponders (table 2-3). For vertical downlink transponders, add +
26 degrees to a value ninety degrees away from the value from LATLONG (table 2-4). This table is valid
only for circular antennas.
Table 2-5 provides the combined corrections for GSTAR-1 vertical downlink transponders 9 through 16
for circular antennas. Use the computed polarization value from the LATLONG program to enter the
table in the "computed" column. Use the corresponding value from the "actual" column to set the
polarization on the rear of the RF Unit. The "actual" value includes the 90° correction for vertical
downlink and the +26° correction satellite tilt. Therefore, table 2-5 is only applicable to GSTAR-1
transponders 9 through 16 and only to circular antennas.
11-2-6
SUB SATELLITE LONGITUDE
A) NO CORRECTION TO COMPUTED POLARIZATION REQUIRED
N 26
(FOR EXAMPLE:
GSTAR-1 ROTATED 26°)
SUB SATELLITE LONGITUDE
B) CORRECTION TO COMPUTED POLARIZATION REQUIRED

M11169
Figure 2-3. Satellite Antenna Orientation and Tilt Correction

to Calculated Polarization
11-2-7
Table 2-3. Example Polarization Corrections for GSTAR1 Horizontal Downlink

Transponders 1 through 8 for Circular Antennas
STATE CALIF. UTAH COLO. INDIANA N.J.

PES LONG 117.2°W 110°W 103°W 85°W 75°W
LOCATION LAT 32.9°N 40°N 40°N 40°N 40°N
Computed Polarization +21° +8° 0° -20° -29°

Angle from LATLONG
Program
Downlink Orientation- 0° 0° 0° 0° 0°
Horizontal
Example Satellite Tilt +26° +26° +26° +26° +26°

Correction (GSTAR)
Corrected Computed +47° +34° +26° +6° -3°

Polarization (using
GSTAR1 Transponders
1 through 8)
Table 2-4. Example Polarization Corrections for GSTAR1 Vertical Downlink

Transponders 9 through 16 for Circular Antennas
STATE CALIF. UTAH COLO. INDIANA N.J.

PES LONG 117.2°W 110°W 103°W 85°W 75°W
LOCATION LAT 32.9°N 40°N 40°N 40°N 40°N
Computed Polarization +21° +8° 0° -20° -29°

Angle from LATLONG
Program
Downlink Orientation- -90° -90° -90° -90° +90°

Vertical
Example Satellite Tilt +26° +26° +26° +26° +26°

Correction (GSTAR)
Corrected Computed -43° -56° -64° -84° +87°

Polarization (using
GSTAR1 Transponders
9 through 16)
11-2-8
Table 2-5. Combined Polarization Corrections for GSTAR1 Vertical

Downlink Transponders 9 through 16 for Circular Antennas
Computed Actual Computed Actual Computed Actual Computed Actual
-90 +26 -45 +71 ±00 -64 +45 -19
-89 +27 -44 +72 +01 -63 +46 -18
-88 +28 -43 +73 +02 -62 +47 -17
-87 +29 -42 +74 +03 -61 +48 -16
-86 +30 -41 +75 +04 -60 +49 -15
-85 +31 -40 +76 +05 -59 +50 -14
-84 +32 -39 +77 +06 -58 +51 -13
-83 +33 -38 +78 +07 -57 +52 -12
-82 +34 -37 +79 +08 -56 +53 -11
-81 +35 -36 +80 +09 -55 +54 -10
-80 +36 -35 +81 +10 -54 +55 -09
-79 +37 -34 +82 +11 -53 +56 -08
-78 +38 -33 +83 +12 -52 +57 -07
-77 +39 -32 +84 +13 -51 +58 -06
-76 +40 -31 +85 +14 -50 +59 -05
-75 +41 -30 +86 +15 -49 +60 -04
-74 +42 -29 +87 +16 -48 +61 -03
-73 +43 -28 +88 +17 -47 +62 -02
-72 +44 -27 +89 +18 -46 +63 -01
-71 +45 -26 ±90 +19 -45 +64 -00
-70 +46 -25 -89 +20 -44 +65 +01
-69 +47 -24 -88 +21 -43 +66 +02
-68 +48 -23 -87 +22 -42 +67 +03
-67 +49 -22 -86 +23 -41 +68 +04
-66 +50 -21 -85 +24 -40 +69 +05
-65 +51 -20 -84 +25 -39 +70 +06
-64 +52 -19 -83 +26 -38 +71 +07
-63 +53 -18 -82 +27 -37 +72 +08
-62 +54 -17 -81 +28 -36 +73 +09
-61 +55 -16 -80 +29 -35 +74 +10
-60 +56 -15 -79 +30 -34 +75 +11
-59 +57 -14 -78 +31 -33 +76 +12
-58 +58 -13 -77 +32 -32 +77 +13
-57 +59 -12 -76 +33 -31 +78 +14
-56 +60 -11 -75 +34 -30 +79 +15
-55 +61 -10 -74 +35 -29 +80 +16
-54 +62 -09 -73 +36 -28 +81 +17
-53 +63 -08 -72 +37 -27 +82 +18
-52 +64 -07 -71 +38 -26 +83 +19
-51 +65 -06 -70 +39 -25 +84 +20
-50 +66 -05 -69 +40 -24 +85 +21
-49 +67 -04 -68 +41 -23 +86 +22
-48 +68 -03 -67 +42 -22 +87 +23
-47 +69 -02 -66 +43 -21 +88 +24
-46 +70 -01 -65 +44 -20 +89 +25
11-2-9
3-5-91
3-5-91
SECTION 3 - SETTING ANTENNA ELEVATION TO COMPUTED ELEVATION VALUE
Section 3
SETTING ANTENNA ELEVATION TO COMPUTED ELEVATION VALUE
Perform the following steps to set the antenna to the computed elevation value. This computed value is
an approximate starting point in the antenna aiming process. Actual satellite signal reception will be used
to refine the elevation adjustment.
STEP 1. Check present antenna elevation to determine if the antenna has already been set to the
computed elevation value. Place the Inogon inclinometer on the proper location on the
antenna according to size and style antenna being installed: For 0.75M and 1.0M antennas,
there are special tabs for the inclinometer on the side of the reflector support assembly (figure
1-1 on page 7-1-3); for the 1.2M and 1.8M antennas, position the inclinometer as shown in
figure 3-1 on page 11-3-2 (this is the only location that provides a direct elevation reading).
For the 2.4M antenna, position the inclinometer as shown in figure 5-15 on page 7-5-20. Use
the Inogon inclinometer assembled in the vertical position shown in figure 3-2.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
If the Inogon inclinometer is assembled in horizontal position, it gives an
inappropriate reading (complement of angle). Always use the Inogon
inclinometer assembled in the vertical position. Figure 3-3 shows how to
convert the inclinometer from the incorrect horizontal position to the
correct vertical position for antenna aiming.
NOTE
For the 0.75M, 1.0M, 1.2M and 1.8M antennas, the inclinometer, when
properly positioned, reads the antenna elevation directly (already
corrected for antenna offset). For the 2.4M antenna, the inclinometer
must be corrected for antenna offset by subtracting 22.3° from the
LATLONG elevation value to get the desired inclinometer reading.
Use the adjusting knob on the inclinometer to make the grating pattern show parallel lines.
Read the elevation angle from the movable scale at the point it aligns with the center 0° mark
on the fixed scale. If the elevation reading agrees with the computed elevation value from
LATLONG, go to the paragraph on setting azimuth. If the elevation does not agree with the
computed elevation value, go to step 2.
STEP 2. Locate the top and bottom elevation adjustment nuts on the Prodelin Quick Repoint antenna,,
figure 3-4.
STEP 3. Turn the Inogon inclinometer adjusting knob until the computed elevation angle (obtained
from Installation Data Sheets) on the movable scale lines up with the center 0° mark on the
fixed scale. The grating may show a crossing pattern or a pattern of arrows at this time.
STEP 4. Turn the elevation adjust nuts on the Prodelin Quick Repoint antenna (figure 3-4) until the
grating on the inclinometer shows a pattern of parallel lines. When the grating begins to
show arrows, you are getting close to the desired value. Each arrow represents 0.5°. If the
present antenna elevation (from step 1) is lower than the computed elevation, the antenna
11-3-1
PES3-1236
Figure 3-1. Placement of Inogon Inclinometer on Prodelin 1.2M Antenna

(Location is similar on the Prodelin Quick Repoint 1.8M antenna)
11-3-2
10663
Figure 3-2. Inogon Inclinometer Correctly Assembled in Vertical Position
11-3-3
10664
Figure 3-3. Converting Inogon Inclinometer to Correct Vertical Position
11-3-4
PES-538
Figure 3-4. Prodelin Quick Repoint Antenna Mount Detail
11-3-5
needs to be pointed higher. Turn the bottom elevation adjust nut tighter to raise the antenna
while loosening the top elevation nut.
STEP 5. When inclinometer grating shows parallel lines with the computed elevation angle on the
movable scale aligned with the fixed scale 0° index mark, the antenna is set to the computed
elevation angle. The elevation adjustment will be refined later in the antenna aiming
procedure.
11-3-6
3-5-91
3-5-91
SECTION 4 - SETTING ANTENNA AZIMUTH TO COMPUTED AZIMUTH VALUE
Section 4
SETTING ANTENNA AZIMUTH TO COMPUTED AZIMUTH VALUE
Perform the following steps to set the antenna to the computed azimuth value. This computed value is an
approximate starting point in the antenna aiming process. Actual satellite signal reception will be used to
refine the azimuth adjustment. This section describes using a magnetic compass to locate the satellite.
You may not need to use a magnetic compass if you know the general direction of the satellite from your
site.
STEP 1. Calculate the magnetic azimuth to the satellite. The LATLONG utility program calculates
the azimuth relative to true North. The needle of a magnetic compass does not point to true
North, rather it points to magnetic North. Use the correction factor, declination, to convert
the true azimuth from the LATLONG program to a magnetic azimuth which can be used with
the magnetic compass. (Some compasses have a declination adjustment which can be set so
that true azimuth can be read from an adjustable azimuth ring. If you are using the
declination adjust feature of such a compass, refer to instructions accompanying the compass,
adjust the compass for declination, and proceed to step 3.)
Figure 4-1 shows the declination value at different locations. If the PES location is in the
region to the right of the 0° line (Eastern United States), then the declination is westerly. Add
westerly declination to the true azimuth to obtain magnetic azimuth.
If the PES location is to the left of the 0° line, then the declination is easterly. Subtract
easterly declination from true azimuth to obtain the magnetic azimuth.
Table 4-1 gives example declination corrections.
Use figure 4-1 to obtain the declination at your PES location and enter this value in the
appropriate (SUBTRACT EASTERLY DEC or ADD WESTERLY DEC) blank on your copy
of the Installation Data Sheet, figure 1-2. Use true azimuth and declination to calculate
magnetic azimuth and enter the result on the blank labeled AZIMUTH (MAGNETIC) on the
Installation Data Sheet.
11-4-1
10666A
Figure 4-1. Declination Map
11-4-2
SECTION 4 - SETTING ANTENNA AZIMUTH TO COMPUTED AZIMUTH VALUE
Table 4-1. Example Declination Corrections
PES LOCATION PES LOCATION

Seattle, Washington Central Pennsylvania
Satellite Longitude 99°W Satellite Longitude 99°W
AZIMUTH (TRUE) 149° AZIMUTH (TRUE) 211°

SUBTRACT EASTERLY DEC -22° ADD WESTERLY DEC +10°
= AZIMUTH (MAGNETIC) 127° = AZIMUTH (MAGNETIC) 221°
STEP 2. The magnetic compass should be at least 20 feet away from the antenna and other steel
objects to reduce the effects of steel on the compass needle. Align the 0° point on the
compass ring with the North seeking end of the compass needle. Use the magnetic azimuth,
obtained in step 1, to determine the direction toward the satellite. A distant object (such as a
building, tree, or rock) on the bearing toward the satellite can be used for sighting the antenna
azimuth.
If there is no distant object that can be used as a reference, locate a position 20 feet or more
away from the antenna and on a line between the antenna and the satellite. See figure 4-2
(effectively this is the same as sighting back to the antenna at an angle equal to magnetic
azimuth plus 180°). Place a marker, such as a stake or rock on the line at the selected
position. String can then be attached between the antenna mounting mast pipe and this
marker, or the marker itself can be used for sighting the antenna azimuth. Then a string and
"plumb bob" can be hung from the RF Unit to align the antenna to the azimuth string.
STEP 3. See figure 3-4 in chapter 11, section 3. On the Prodelin Quick Repoint antenna, use the
azimuth adjust nuts to turn the antenna in azimuth until it points toward the reference object
or marker established in step 2.
NOTE
A compass gives erroneous readings when it is near metal objects
including buildings with steel beams, air conditioners and other objects
often located at PES sites.
11-4-3
MOUNTING MAST PIPE
ANTENNA
PLACE MARKER HERE

MAGNETIC
NORTH
0°
N
140° + 180° = 320°
W E
COMPASS S
AZIMUTH (MAGNETIC) = 140°
TO SATELLITE
TOP VIEW
M10667
Figure 4-2. Using a Magnetic Compass to Find the Line

Between the Antenna and the Satellite
11-4-4
6-28-95
Section 5
USING INSTALL MODE TO REFINE ANTENNA AIMING
In the steps below, you will use the meter indications provided by the INSTALL mode to point the
antenna so the outroute is acquired and then refine the antenna aiming. For proper operation, the remote’s
antenna must be pointed precisely at the satellite (within ±0.1 deg). In INSTALL mode, the PES Model
X000 series goes through startup initialization and sets its spacelink receive equipment to receive on the
programmed primary outroute frequency previously configured. The PES Model X000 series provides a
dc indication on the antenna pointing output which, when read by a voltmeter, summarizes receive status.
Lower readings on the voltmeter indicate a strongly received signal. Specifically, a reading of:
• 5.0 to 10.0 volts for PES X000 series other than PES 5000 (5.0 to approx 9 volts for PES
5000) indicates that the demodulator has not acquired the outroute. The voltage reading
corresponds to the overall receive signal strength and is a function of the receive
demodulator’s AGC value. A larger value indicates a higher AGC level, indicating a weaker
outroute signal.
• 0.0 to 5.0 volts indicates that the demodulator has acquired the outroute. The voltage reading
corresponds basically to the receive signal strength and is a function of the Eb/No (energy per
bit to noise energy ratio). An Eb/No of 5.0 dB or less indicates a mediocre signal which is
displayed as a 5.0 volt reading. An Eb/No of 12.0 dB (or higher) indicates a high quality
signal. The AGC value never actually reaches a 5.0 volt reading; the meter will jump when
the demodulator acquires the signal, providing a clear indication of the remote’s receive
status. The antenna pointing output is decreased about 0.4 volts per dB of signal strength. An
antenna pointing output reading of 2.2 volts, for instance, indicates an Eb/No of 12 dB.

STEP 1. Make certain that there is an active outroute signal for your PES. If necessary, telephone the
Hub operator to verify.
STEP 2. On the rear of the PES indoor unit, place all the data port card (DP) ALT/BYPASS/NORM
switches in the NORM position.
STEP 3. Use the DIU Configuration Editor SWITCH function to place the PES in INSTALL mode:
--------------------------------------------------------------
X
Hit <ENT> to exit.
--------------------------------------------------------------
Exit the SWITCH function, which causes the mode change to take effect.
STEP 4. Connect a voltmeter to the RF Unit POINTING output. (marked "AP" for Antenna Pointing
in the case of PES 5000 ODU).
STEP 5. Slowly move the antenna in azimuth (approximately ±20 degrees from calculated value).
The antenna must be swept slowly in azimuth to give the AGC time to perform a full sweep
and provide a voltage indication on the meter. When the antenna is not pointed at a satellite,
there is no received signal and the meter is high (up to 10 volts). When the antenna is pointed
11-5-1
toward, or nearly toward, a satellite, it begins dipping downward. See figure 5-2. If no signal
is detected, repeat this operation and alter the elevation angle of the antenna in 1/2 degree
elevation steps. The satellite should be found within one or two degrees of the calculated
elevation value. Note that iron and other magnetic forces can cause the compass to read
inaccurately, requiring the wide searching pattern (±20°) in azimuth to compensate for the
possibly large errors.
STEP 6. When the meter reading goes below 5 volts, you have acquired an outroute with the proper
outroute carrier ID. Use fine azimuth and elevation adjustments to minimize the meter
indication.
NOTE
The refining of the antenna aiming adjustment is easiest to accomplish
during constant fair weather. During ideal conditions it might take 15
minutes or less. If conditions are less than ideal, the refining of the
aiming adjustment may take longer. High winds aloft, blowing dense
clouds into and out of transmission path between the satellite and the
PES, can cause the reading to change rapidly. However, it is important
to achieve the best possible refinement of the antenna aiming adjustment.
PES service and customer satisfaction or dissatisfaction over time may
depend on the quality of the refinement of the antenna aiming
adjustment. Your persistence and patience in achieving the best
possible refinement of the antenna aiming adjustment is essential.
STEP 7. After the minimum indication is obtained, lock the elevation and azimuth adjustments in
place. Record the meter indication (Eb/No) on the Installation Data Sheet and where required
on other paperwork.
STEP 8. After the meter indication is minimized, the Prodelin Quick Repoint antenna can be
calibrated. On the Prodelin Quick Repoint antenna, adjust the azimuth ring and elevation
scale pointer to read the site commissioning computer calculated (LATLONG) values for the
satellite as viewed from the site. The azimuth ring should be set to the azimuth number as
calculated from the site commissioning computer using the recorded latitude and longitude
values. This is the TRUE (not magnetic) azimuth. The indicating pointers should be
adjusted as close as possible to the scales without interfering with or scratching the scale if
repointing is required. (Installation contracts may require you to photograph the correctly
adjusted scales.)
Once the azimuth ring is adjusted, it serves as a very accurate compass and the elevation scale
as an accurate elevation angle indicator.
STEP 9. For the Prodelin Quick Repoint antenna, verify that the antenna can swing to the backup
satellite azimuth location without hitting the azimuth adjustment rod limits. If necessary,
reposition the canister assembly so that both the primary and backup satellite are within the
adjustment range of the azimuth adjustment rod. Make sure the canister is leveled at the new
position. Again, peak the adjustment on the primary satellite. If it was necessary to move the
canister assembly, readjust the azimuth collar and elevation scale and photograph as required.
11-5-2
SECTION 5 - USING INSTALL MODE TO REFINE ANTENNA AIMING
110
100
ELEVATION
90
80
SCALE
70
60
50
40
ELEVATION
ELEVATION 30 PIVOT
ADJUSTMENT 20 BOLT
ROD
10
0
TOP
ELEVATION
NUT
BOTTOM
ELEVATION
NUT
STRUT ARM
PS31805.FH3
Figure 5-1. Elevation Scale on Prodelin Quick Repoint Antenna

STEP 10. Use the site commissioning computer to read Eb/No and Channel Error Rate (CER). On the
site commissioning computer, enter monitor<ENTER>. Then record the values on
Installation Data Sheet. At this point, all seven receive side state variables (CIDok, SYNlk,
BITlk, AFClk, Track, DEClk, and SFHlk) should be TRUE (have dark boxes above them).
The CIDok variable means that the outroute carrier ID matches, verifying that you are
pointed at the correct satellite.
STEP 11. Check the appropriate blank for the weather conditions at the PES.
11-5-3
PES2-524
Figure 5-2. Installation Mode - Meter Indications
11-5-4
SECTION 5 - USING INSTALL MODE TO REFINE ANTENNA AIMING
STEP 12. If the hub for your site is equipped for automatic ranging (has network software release 6.2 or
higher), use the DIU Configuration Editor SWITCH function to start the ranging process by
moving the X to the COMM (ranging) position:
--------------------------------------------------------------
X
Hit <ENT> to exit.
--------------------------------------------------------------
Then, exit the SWITCH function, which causes the mode change to take effect. Refer to
chapter 10, section 4.1 on page 10-4-1 for the steps of the automatic ranging process. Within
30 minutes, a port card LED should display [3]/[b.] indicating successful completion of the
automatic ranging process. Use DIALOG to view the ranged power level and ranged timing
offset and edit the initial values to be equal to the ranged values. Issue a WRITE command,
then proceed to step 14.
STEP 13. If the hub for your site is not equipped for automatic ranging, first telephone the Hub
operator for permission to begin ranging. Then use the DIU Configuration Editor SWITCH
function to start the ranging process by moving the X to the COMM (ranging) position:
--------------------------------------------------------------
X
Hit <ENT> to exit.
--------------------------------------------------------------
Then, exit the SWITCH function, which causes the mode change to take effect. Refer to
chapter 10, section 4.2 on page 10-4-4 for the manual ranging process steps. Fine-adjust the
timing and power offset values using the site commissioning computer RANGE function and
verbal instructions from the hub operator. When the final ranged power level and final
ranged timing offset levels are established, exit the RANGE function. (Exiting the range
function stores the final ranged values in the indoor unit EEPROM.) Use DIALOG to view
the ranged power level and ranged timing offset and edit the initial values to be equal to the
ranged values. Issue a WRITE command.
STEP 14. Use the DIU Configuration Editor SWITCH function to set the PES mode to NORMAL.
This action resets the PES indoor unit and restarts the receive acquisition/transmit process
using the final ranged power level and ranged timing offset.
The IFM LED displays:
1. lamp test
2. [BLANK] for four seconds
3. reset cause ([y] = toggle switch change)
4. [F]/[E.] or [F]/[F.] - IFM attempting to acquire receive sync
11-5-5
[F] = IFM not in sync on outroute

[E.] = Eb/No is low, signal not yet acquired
[F.] = Transmit recovery loop not locked, no received signal yet
5. [BLANK]/[BLANK.] - normal operation
[BLANK] = IFM in sync on correct outroute
[BLANK.] = outdoor equipment is OK
Any port cards present in the PES indoor unit must also go through an acquisition/
initialization process before they are ready to transmit and receive data or voice traffic.
During this process, the port cards may display the following codes:
[1]/[2.] - waiting for first IOC poll
[8]/[0.] thru [8]/[BLANK.] - downloading RAM boot code

(may be skipped if code already present)
[5]/[0.] thru [5]/[h.] - downloading port card parameters
[7]/[0.] thru [7]/[4.] - downloading network parameters/code

The time required to complete this process is variable, depending on the activity in the
network. It could take from 30 seconds to ten minutes to complete. When the port card
acquisition/initialization process is complete, the port card LED display is
[BLANK]/[BLANK.].
STEP 15. Use the information collected on the Installation Data Sheet to fill in the appropriate sections
of the Finished Installation Report (if required).
STEP 16. Write the values marked with an asterisk (*) on the Installation Data Sheet onto Az/El
information label on the back of the antenna reflector Be sure to mark the site Lat. and Long.
used for antenna aiming. On a quick repoint antenna these same values must be used to
calculate the correct pointing angles to any future satellite. This will make it easier for future
service and repair personnel to re-aim or check the antenna if necessary. When the label is
complete, cover it with the clear plastic material provided.
STEP 17. On the Prodelin antenna, remove the antenna alignment tool and rods if they have been left in
place.
STEP 18. Touch up the paint or spray touch-up zinc enriched paint (see list of suggested zinc paint
sources in chapter 7, section 6) on the antenna mount in any areas that may have been
scratched or where bare metal has been exposed through cutting or where rust is showing.
The use of zinc enriched touch-up paint is recommended on any galvanized surface. On
badly rusted areas the surface should be cleaned using a wire brush, steel wool, or wet/dry
sandpaper prior to touch-up.
11-5-6
6-28-95
CHAPTER 12
VIDEO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
TBD
This chapter is reserved for future use.
Information concerning cabling video equipment is provided in Chapter 9 Section 6.
12-1-1
6-28-95
CHAPTER 13
OPERATION
This chapter contains two sections: normal operation and operating modes/special functions.
Section 1
NORMAL OPERATION
1.1 GENERAL
The PES is designed for unattended operation, and once installed, tested, and initially started, no operator
action is required under normal conditions. Except for servicing, indoor power should remain on at all
times.
1.2 NORMAL SWITCH POSITIONS AND INDICATIONS

Table 1-1 is a summary of the PES Model X000 series indoor unit switch positions and indications under
normal operating conditions.
The RF Unit has no controls or indicators. The RF Unit health and status is displayed on the indoor unit
LEDs. The PES Model X000 series indoor unit does have controls and indicators, but these do not
require attention during normal operation.
1.2.1 INDOOR UNIT SWITCHES AND INDICATORS

The indoor unit power switch should remain on at all times during normal operation. The power
switch/circuit breaker for the PES Model 8000 indoor unit is on the front panel, and on the rear panel for
Models 6000 and 9000. On the High Density Chassis (PES 8013), the power switch is on the rear of unit.
The PES model 5000 does not have a power switch. Figure 1-1 shows the PES Model 5000 indoor unit
LED indications for normal operation. Figure 1-2 shows the PES Model 6000 indoor unit LED
indications for normal operation. Figure 1-3 shows the normal indications for PES Model 8000. For PES
Model 9000, figure 1-4, the VSAT section normal LED indications are similar. These VSAT section
LEDs on the Model 9000 may be located behind a door or panel.
Each PES Model X000 series indoor unit other than PES 5000 has an IFM. The PES 5000 indoor unit
has an IF LED display. If the system is fully operational and running without any errors, the IFM (or the
IF LED for PES 5000) displays an alternating BLANK/BLANK. ([ ]/[ .]) status (looks like a flashing
decimal point).
The other 7-segment displays are for Multiport (MP), dual voice grade modem (DMC), Data Port (DP),
Turbo Port (TP), Voice Port (VDP/VP PBX or VDP/VP TEL), Voice Data Port Card (VDPC), Compact
Port Card (CPC), or Integrated Port Card (IPC) cards. The card type must be known for each occupied
slot to check these displays, and may be identified by looking at the rear view of the indoor unit. Refer to
figure 3-1 on page 2-3-3 in chapter 2, section 3. The multiport card (MP) has two 78-pin connectors. The
dual voice grade modem card (DMC) has two modular telephone jacks, RJ11, and two 10-pin RJ
connectors. A data port card (DP) has two 25-pin DB25 connectors and a switch labeled
ALT/BYPASS/NORM. A voice port requires two cards - a VDP and a VP PBX or a VDP and a VP TEL.
A voice data port card (VDP) has only one 25-pin DB25 connector and no switch. A 4-wire voice port
13-1-1
Table 1-1. Normal Operation for PES Model X000 Series Switches and Indicators
Switch/Indicator Normal Abnormal
Indoor Unit Power Switch ON OFF

IFM LED Display [ ] and [ .] Any Alphanumeric Display*
IF LED Display, PES 5000 [ ] and [ .] Any Alphanumeric Display*
DP LED Display [ ] and [ .] Any Alphanumeric Display*
MP LED Display [ ] and [ .] Any Alphanumeric Display*
TP LED Display [ ] and [ .] Any Alphanumeric Display*
CPC LED Display [ ] and [ .] Any Alphanumeric Display*
VDPC LED Display [ ] and [ .] Any Alphanumeric Display*
IPC LED Display, PES 5000 [ ] and [ .] Any Alphanumeric Display*
DMC LED Display see p. 9-5-45 see p. 9-5-45
VDP LED Display [ ] and [ .] Any Alphanumeric Display*
VP PBX LED Display (4-wire) [| ], [ _ ] and [ .] (See Note 1 and figure 1-1)
VP TEL LED Display (2-wire) [ ] or [ .] (See Note 2)
DP Rear Panel Switch NORM position (right) ALT or BYPASS Position
DMC Rear Panel Switches see p. 9-5-44 see p. 9-5-44
* See the appropriate LED chart to determine the meaning of the alphanumeric display,
PES General Reference Manual, chapter 14.
Note 1: The 4-wire VP PBX (associated with a PBX) - the bottom left segment indicates that
the M lead is active (customer/PBX is off-hook) while the bottom center segment
indicates the E lead is active (the DIU side of the trunk is off-hook). These segments
are only lit during a telephone call. For later versions of this card, the steady decimal
point indicates the presence of +5V power on the card.
Note 2: The 2-wire VP TEL (associated with a telephone instrument) - steady decimal point
indicates the presence of +5V power on the card and indicates normal operation.
NOTE
Upon power-up the LED displays may initially appear in an
indeterminate state. When power is restored to the PES, a self-test is
first performed, then sync must be reacquired on the outroute signal from
the Hub. This process may take up to five minutes before the normal
indications of table 1-1 appear.
13-1-2
CHAPTER 13 - OPERATION
SECTION 1 - NORMAL OPERATION
RIGHT-HAND LED (IPC)

BLINKING DOT
INDICATES
NORMAL
HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
Subsidiary of
Personal Earth Station 2000 OPERATION
LEFT-HAND LED (IF)

BLINKING DOT
INDICATES
NORMAL
OPERATION
PS31741.FH3
Figure 1-1. PES 5000 Normal LED Indications
SLOT 1
MULTIPORT CARD (MP)
Blinking dot indicates normal operation
SLOT 2
PERSONAL EARTH STATION  MODULE (IFM)
PES3-1247
Figure 1-2. PES Model 6000 LED Indications During Normal Operation
card (VP PBX) has a 9-pin DB9 connector. A 2-wire voice port (VP TEL) card has a modular telephone
jack. The Turbo Port (TP) has a BNC connector, an RJ-45 jack, a 9-pin D-type connector, and a 78-pin
D-type connector. During normal operation for network software, the indications are as shown in table
1-1.
The normal indication for a data port (DP), a multiport card (MP), turbo port (TP), compact port card
(CPC), voice data port card (VDPC), integrated port card (IPC) or voice data port (VDP) (top card of a
two-card set) card is a blank alternating with a decimal point.
If the bottom card of a two-card voice port set is a VP TEL (connects to a telephone instrument), the
normal indication is blank ([ ]) for early units or a steady decimal point ([ .]) for later units.
If the bottom card of a two-card voice port set is a VP PBX (connects to a PBX), the normal indication
during a call resembles a short "L" (bottom LED and lower left LED segments are illuminated). If there
is no call (VP PBX idle), a steady decimal appears ([ .]), indicating that +5V is present, a normal
condition.
13-1-3
SLOT 1 (NOTE 1)
SLOT 2 (NOTE 1)
SLOT 3 (NOTE 1)
DATA PORT CARD (DP)
Blinking dot indicates normal operation.
SLOT 4 (NOTE 1)
MULTIPORT CARD (MP)
Blinking dot indicates normal operation.
THIS SPACE VACANT

(No card slot here)
SLOT 5
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY MODULE (IFM)
TM
STATION
NOTE 1 SLOTS 1 THRU 4 MAY CONTAIN:
DATA PORT CARDS (DP) 2 WIRE VOICE PORT (VDP and VP TEL)
COMPACT PORT CARDS (CPC) 4 WIRE VOICE PORT (VDP and VP PBX)
MULTIPORT CARDS (MP) DUAL VOICE GRADE MODEM CARDS (DMC)
TURBO PORT CARDS (TP) VOICE DATA PORT CARDS (VDPC)
OR, SELECTED COMBINATIONS OF ABOVE
PS31246.FH3
Figure 1-3. Example Model 8000 LED Indicators During Normal Operation
For normal data communications operation under network software, the data port (DP) card rear panel
switch (labeled "ALT/BYPASS/NORM") should be in the right position (labeled "NORM").
1.3 SENDING AND RECEIVING DATA

Data is transmitted and received without the need for local operator control. Data port card operation can
be changed, however, through special control signals transmitted by the Hub. The Hub might, for
example, command the PES to perform loopback tests to verify correct operation. Voice Port cards can
also be tested in this way. Because control signals can be received at any time, PES power should
normally remain on.
13-1-4
COMM - SERVER SECTION

Computing Element Display (CED)
VSAT SECTION
PORT CARD 1 LED
PORT CARD 2 LED

IFM LED
HU
NE
N
E
T
W
TW GH
OR
O
R
K
K
SY ES
ST
EM
S
ED
S
PES3-1255
Figure 1-4. PES Model 9000 LED Displays
13-1-5
1.4 HNS OFFERS TWO VOICE CARD TYPES: VDP AND VDPC
As detailed in chapter 2, section 3.2.5 on page 2-3-8, HNS now offers two different voice card types: the
VDP and the VDPC. The remainder of this section applies to the VDP. Refer to FSB 1128 for
information concerning making voice calls using a VDPC.
1.5 MAKING VOICE CALLS USING VDP

Before voice calls can be made, the PES must be in sync on the outroute from the Hub, with the voice
data port card (VDP) LED displaying ([BLANK]/[BLANK.]).
A Touch Tone*13 (DTMF) telephone must be used to make voice calls; a rotary dial telephone cannot be
used. Calls are dialed on the satellite system (ISBN) in a manner similar to calls dialed on a standard
telephone. Standard call progress tones (dial, audible ring, busy, etc.) are used, including some tones that
have special meanings for the ISBN (reorder tone, vacant code). Refer to table 1-2 for a summary of call
progress tones for voice calls. In table 1-2, dial tone is a continuous tone made by the combination of the
frequency 350 Hz and the frequency 440 Hz.
The actions taken to make a voice call at a remote site vary slightly depending on the telephone
equipment connected to the PES at that site:
• DTMF phones (1 to 3) connected directly to PES
• Key Set Telephone connected to PES
• PBX connected to PES
1.5.1 DTMF PHONES CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO PES

To place a voice call from a phone connected directly to the PES, pick up the receiver and listen for a dial
tone. This first dial tone is generated by the PES indicating that the space link to the Hub is operational.
Dial the desired ISBN phone number (usually this is the ISBN phone number for the Hub). You should
now hear a second dial tone. This second dial tone is generated at the destination PBX (usually the PBX
at the Hub). Dial the extension number desired at the destination PBX.
NOTE
The ISBN phone number may be from one to fourteen digits long,
depending on a parameter set by the Hub operator. Make sure that you
dial the number of digits set by the Hub operator’s parameter, OR, dial a
"#" to signify the end of the number.
1.5.2 KEY SET TELEPHONE SYSTEM CONNECTED TO PES

A key set telephone is provided with pushbuttons for functions such as intercom, holding, signalling
and/or pickup of additional telephone lines. The satellite phone line from the PES may be connected to a
key set telephone as one of the additional lines. To place a voice call over the satellite from such a key
set telephone, press the pushbutton corresponding to the satellite line and lift the receiver. In a manner
similar to the previous paragraph, you should hear a first dial tone generated by the PES. Dial the desired
ISBN phone number. You should now hear a second dial tone, which is generated by the destination
PBX. Dial the extension number desired at the destination PBX.
13Touch Tone* is a registered trademark of Western Electric.
13-1-6
Table 1-2. Call Progress Tones for Voice Calls
Frequency On Off (Timing Pattern)

Tone (Hz) Time Time Description
Dial Tone 350 + 440 Continuous (Continuous)

Returned to the caller after circuit has
been seized. The tone is discontinued
after the first digit is dialed.
Audible 440 + 480 2 sec 4 sec (Repeating)

Ring Returned to the caller after the terminating
circuit has been seized, if the destination
is a telephone set. The tone is discon-
tinued when the telephone goes offhook.
Busy 480 + 620 0.5 sec 0.5 sec (Repeating) "slow busy"
Returned to the caller if there is no idle
terminating circuit.
Reorder 480 + 620 0.25 sec 0.25 sec (Repeating) "fast busy"
("Fast Busy") Returned to the caller if there is no
inroute or outroute bandwidth available.
Vacant 480 + 620 0.5 sec, 0.5 sec, (Repeating pattern, 0.5 sec on, 0.5 sec off,
Code 0.5 sec 1.5 sec 0.5 sec on, 1.5 sec off) "double busy"
Returned to the caller if the dialed ISBN
phone number (location code) does not exist.
Trouble 480 + 620 Continuous (Continuous) "high dial tone"

Tone Returned to user, when a call cannot be
made at this time. (IOC not in sync, etc.)
Confirma- 350 + 440 0.1 sec 0.1 sec (Three bursts)

tion Tone Returned to note that a special mode has
been successfully selected by the user.
Intercept 440 0.25 sec (Two frequencies alternating, repeating)

Tone 620 0.25 sec "siren"
An error in dialing has been detected.
Recall 350 + 440 0.1 sec 0.1 sec (Three bursts, then steady on)
Dial Tone Returned to note that a special mode has
been successfully selected by the user,
and that additional digits are expected.
Permanent 480 Continuous Returned to the caller when he has gone

Signal offhook, but has not dialed a digit within
16 seconds. This signal is also used if the
user does not go onhook within 10
seconds after the other user has gone onhook.
13-1-7
NOTE
Certain key set telephones may be restricted from dialing. A restricted
phone which cannot dial out on a local telephone company central office
line, should not be able to dial out on the satellite phone line either. On a
phone which is restricted, you can hear a dial tone; however, when you
press the keys on the Touch Tone keypad, no tones are generated.
1.5.3 PBX CONNECTED TO PES

When a PBX is connected to the local PES, three steps are required to place a call over the satellite from
one of the phones on the PBX. First, pick up the receiver and listen for the dial tone generated by the
local PBX. Dial the ISBN trunk access code. On hearing a second dial tone, dial the ISBN phone
number. On hearing a third dial tone, dial the extension number desired at the destination PBX.
1.5.4 USING SPECIAL VOICE CALL MODES

The PES voice system includes special modes for facsimile transmission, using a voice grade modem,
using a voice scrambling device, group access, calling a maintenance number, and voice port testing.
Refer to table 1-3 and the paragraphs below.
1.5.5 USING VOICE CALLS FOR FACSIMILE TRANSMISSION

To use an ISBN voice call for facsimile (FAX) transmission requires using a special mode voice call, as
listed in table 1-3. These special modes are only available at specific remotes as designated by the Hub
operator. If you need to send or receive FAX from a given remote, contact the Hub operator to make sure
that the Hub operator has authorized your remote for the higher sampling rate required for facsimile. To
place a voice call for facsimile transmission, perform the following steps:
STEP 1. Verify that your remote is authorized for the higher data required by facsimile. Contact the
Hub operator if necessary.
STEP 2. Lift the receiver and obtain the dial tone generated by the PES (the first dial tone when the
phones are connected directly to the PES or when a key set is connected to the PES; the
second dial tone when a PBX is connected to the local PES).
STEP 3. If your voice port defaults to the normal voice mode (all voice ports prior to release 4 and
most after 4), use the telephone keypad pushbutton marked with a pound sign (#) (also called
an octothorpe), followed by the number 2, to select the "No ECM-64 kbps" mode for FAX
transmission. At this point you should hear the recall dial tone. The recall dial tone consists
of three short bursts (confirmation tone) followed by a steady dial tone. The recall dial tone
indicates that the special mode has been successfully selected.
NOTE
If you hear the intercept tone (two alternating tones) at this point, it
indicates either that there has been a dialing error or that your remote is
not authorized for the special mode.
If your PES is operating under a network software release of 4 or later and the Hub operator
has designated your port for a "No ECM-64 kbps" default, your telephone is in the special
mode whenever the receiver is lifted.
13-1-8
STEP 4. On hearing the recall tone, dial the ISBN phone number and listen for the next dial tone.
Then, dial the destination PBX extension number.
STEP 5. Take whatever actions are required to make sure the FAX machines at both ends of the call
are connected and started.
STEP 6. For release 4 or later when the call ends, the next call will automatically select "No ECM-64
kbps" if the Hub operator has designated your voice port for that default condition. If you
desire to select the normal voice mode, dial "#3 + ISBN phone number."
1.5.6 USING VOICE CALLS FOR A VOICE GRADE MODEM

If your voice port defaults to normal voice mode (ECM-16 kbps) and is authorized for the higher
sampling rate, and if you intend to use a voice call for data transmission with a voice grade modem, dial:
#2 + ISBN phone number at the dial tone generated by the PES indoor unit. This action should select the
"no ECM-64 kbps" mode required when using a voice grade modem over a space link voice call. The
tones and required conditions are described in chapter 13, section 1.5.5.
1.5.7 USING VOICE SCRAMBLING DEVICES ON A VOICE CALL

If your voice port defaults to normal voice mode (ECM-16 kbps) and is authorized for the higher
sampling rate, and if you intend to use voice scrambling devices on a voice call, dial #2 + ISBN phone
number at the dial tone generated by the PES indoor unit. This action should select the "no ECM-64
kbps" mode which will enhance the voice quality when using voice scrambling devices over a space link
voice call. The tones and required conditions are described in chapter 13, section 1.5.5.
1.5.8 PLACING A CALL TO MAINTENANCE

After release 4, dialing the pound sign followed by the digits five zero zero (#500) connects the caller to a
designated maintenance person provided for all users of a given Hub.
1.5.9 CALLING BETWEEN CUSTOMER GROUPS (SUBSCRIBERS) WITHIN A SHARED HUB

Certain Hubs may be "shared" in the respect that they carry traffic for different customers (subscribers).
Normally, these customers cannot contact one another through the satellite. Their communications
appear to them as a private system.
However, there is a need for a supervisory maintenance person to have access to all customers. After
release 4, supervisory maintenance may place a call to a given customer by dialing #5 + a two-digit group
number for that customer + the ISBN phone number.
The voice port(s) which have the authorization to call different customer groups are configured by the
Hub operator. Such a voice port may be referred to as a "super user."
1.5.10 MAKING A VOICE CALL FROM THE HUB TO A REMOTE

To make a voice call from the Hub PBX to a remote, dial the ISBN trunk access code at the first dial tone.
At the second dial tone, dial the ISBN phone number for the desired remote. If there is a third dial tone
(from a PBX at the remote), dial the desired extension number.
13-1-9
Table 1-3. Special Voice Call Mode Selection
Dial Code Mode (Use) Description
#1 + ISBN phone number ECM-64 kbps (used for In this mode user voice data is
testing only) exchanged with the far end at 64 kbps,
instead of the normal 16 kbps. The echo
canceller (ECM) is enabled in this
mode. Dial #1 followed by the ISBN
phone number.
#2 + ISBN phone number No ECM-64 kbps [used on In this mode user voice data is
ports that default to normal exchanged with the far end at 64 kbps,
voice (ECM-16 kbps) to instead of the normal 16 kbps. The echo
select special mode for FAX canceller (ECM) is disabled in this
transmission, for voice mode. Dial #2 followed by the ISBN
grade modem data phone number.
transmission, and for voice
scrambling]
#3 + physical address Physical Address (seldom, If the user is trying to dial a specific port
(prior to release 4) if ever, used) in a hunt group, the address must be the
physical address. In this mode the digits
dialed after #3 are interpreted as a
physical address, instead of as an ISBN
phone number. Dial #3 followed by
physical address.
#3 + ISBN phone number Select ECM-16 kbps (used This is the normal voice mode for the
(release 4 and later) on ports that default to no ISBN. Voice data is exchanged with the
ECM-64 kbps to select far end at 16 kbps. The echo canceller
normal voice mode) (ECM) is enabled.
#5 + group number Group Access Used in shared Hub situations to permit

+ ISBN phone number access (where authorized) between
(release 4 and later) different groups. Typically used by
maintenance person only.
#500 (release 4 and later) Call to Maintenance Permits any voice port using a given
Hub to call a maintenance number
provided for all users of that Hub. (Can
be to Hub to operator.)
#9 + test designator Test (voice port testing) In this mode, various tests and
loopbacks for testing the voice port are
available. Refer to chapter 15, voice
port troubleshooting, for more
information.
13-1-10
3-5-91
Section 2
OPERATING MODES AND SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
2.1 GENERAL
The site commissioning computer DIU Configuration Editor SWITCH function controls most operational
modes for PES Model X000 series. (Refer to chapter 10.) The DP and DMC also have rear panel
switches which affect their operation. The DP and VDP each have a "DIAG(nostic)" port. The DP
"DIAG(nostic)" port serves two functions: 1) connection to a software debugger, or 2) connection to a
backup phone modem.
2.2 OPERATIONAL MODES

The operational modes are: normal mode, installation mode, (COMM) ranging mode, and diagnose
mode.
2.2.1 NORMAL MODE

In normal mode, the PES goes through the steps necessary so that the remote may carry traffic across the
spacelink. Those steps are as follows:
• Startup Initialization - the PES performs startup self tests, initializes hardware and
communications links.
• Outroute Acquisition - PES performs the processing required to find and begin receiving the
outroute.
• Transmit Frequency Lock - the PES performs the processing required to precisely tune the
transmit frequency. The PES does not allow port card transmission until frequency lock is
obtained.
• Outroute Tracking - the PES receives the outroute and transmits inroute bursts on port card
command. The PES transmits overhead and traffic bursts set at a "Ranged Power Level" and
a "Ranged Timing Offset."
2.2.2 INSTALLATION MODE

In INSTALLATION mode, the PES goes through startup initialization and sets its spacelink receive
equipment to receive on the programmed primary outroute frequency previously configured into the
indoor unit. During installation mode the IFM LED state code is [1]. Installation mode provides an
antenna pointing signal (10 volts to 0 volts) at the RF Unit. An installer uses a voltmeter to observe this
signal while refining the antenna aiming adjustment. Lower readings on the voltmeter indicate a strongly
received signal. Specifically, a reading of:
• 5.0 to 10.0 volts indicates that the demodulator has not acquired the outroute. The voltage
reading corresponds to the overall receive signal strength and is a function of the receive
demodulator’s AGC value. A larger value indicates a higher AGC level, indicating a weaker
outroute signal.
• 0.0 to 5.0 volts indicates that the demodulator has acquired the outroute. The voltage reading
corresponds basically to the receive signal strength and is a function of the Eb/No (energy per
bit to noise energy ratio). An Eb/No of 5.0 dB or less indicates a mediocre signal which is
13-2-1
displayed as a 5.0-volt reading. An Eb/No of 12.0 dB (or higher) indicates a high quality
signal. The AGC value never actually reaches a 5.0-volt reading; the meter will jump when
the demodulator acquires the signal, providing a clear indication of the remote’s receive
status. The antenna pointing output is decreased about 0.4 volts per dB of signal strength (an
antenna pointing output reading of 2.2 volts, for instance, indicates an Eb/No of 12 dB).
When the antenna pointing is refined so that the signal is minimized (less than 3 volts, for example), it
indicates that:
• The PES receiver has locked onto an outroute.
• The Eb/No reading is at the highest value that can be attained by adjusting antenna pointing.
2.2.3 COMM (RANGING) MODE

The COMM (ranging) mode causes the PES to transmit ranging bursts which start at an "Initial Power
Level" and an "Initial Timing Offset." An automatic process (automated ranging) or the Hub operator
(manual ranging) measures the power and timing of these bursts as they arrive at the Hub. During
ranging, adjustments are made to the transmit burst power and timing. Refer to chapter 10, section 4, page
10-4-1 for details.
2.2.4 DIAGNOSE MODE

In the diagnose mode, a remote runs through an expanded set of self tests once and displays the results on
the IFM seven segment LED. An installer typically puts a remote in diagnose mode to enter the site
commissioning parameters with the portable computer, because a remote does not transmit while in
diagnose mode. For a detailed description of diagnose mode refer to chapter 15, troubleshooting.
2.3 IFM AUTO COMM - RECESSED SWITCH

The recessed AUTO COMM switch on the rear of the IFM is for customer use immediately after the
antenna is repointed to a new satellite in an emergency repoint situation. Pressing the recessed switch
using a toothpick or similar object interrupts data traffic and places the PES in COMM (ranging) mode,
initiating a 10- to 30-minute autocommissioning ranging session which adjusts the site’s PES transmit
power and timing for the new satellite. When the adjustments are finished, the port card display is
[3]/[b.]. Pressing the recessed switch again returns the PES to normal mode. Do not press the recessed
switch during normal installation commissioning. Instead, use the DIU Configuration Editor
SWITCH function to select the desired PES mode including COMM (ranging) mode when needed.
2.4 DATA PORT CARD - SWITCHES

Looking from the rear of the indoor unit toward the back of the data port (DP) card, the three switch
positions are:
Right NORM - The data port card performs its normal space link communication function with the
switch in this position. Always leave the switch in this right position (labeled NORM) for
regular data communications operation. A backup telephone modem may remain
connected to the DIAG port while normal space link communications are in effect. An MBR
data port card can be configured so that modem control signals from the backup telephone
modem cause the port card USER PORT and DIAG port to be electrically connected (as in
the bypass function) while the switch remains in the NORM position. Refer to chapter 13,
section 2.5.3.
13-2-2
SECTION 2 - OPERATING MODES AND SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
Center BYPASS - Relays on the port card metallically connect the two rear connectors together,
permitting the user device to be cabled directly to a terrestrial modem without port card
interference (this is also the way the connectors are configured with the power off). The
required cabling is shown in figure 2-1. The purpose of the BYPASS position is to permit
land based communication if the satellite link becomes inoperable.
Left ALT - The port card functions normally, with one rear connector (USER PORT) dedicated to
the user device, and the other dedicated to the diagnostic (DIAG) port. When the switch is in
the ALT position, the data port card interprets input from the DIAG port as diagnostic port
commands. Therefore, disconnect (or remove power from) any backup telephone modem
from the DIAG port before placing the switch in the ALT position. You may connect an
IBM PC debugger (directly or via modem) to the port card DIAG port.
2.5 PORT CARD DIAG CONNECTION

In addition to USER PORT connections, the port cards (DP and VDP) have a 25-pin type "D" male
connector labeled DIAG(nostic). On the DP and VDP cards the DIAG connector can be used to connect
a software debugger. On the DP card only, the DIAG connector can also be used to connect a backup
terrestrial modem.
2.5.1 DIAG CONNECTION FOR DEBUGGER

The DIAG(nostic) port on a data port card or voice data port card (DP or VDP) can be used to connect to
an IBM PC-based debugger. The IBM PC debugger can be connected directly using a male-female
RS-232 cable (or can be remotely connected via modems). The debugger is used primarily during the
development of software and firmware on the port card and is not intended for installers and field service
technicians.
On the Data Port card, the function of the DIAG connector depends on the position of the
ALT/BYPASS/NORM switch (see table 2-1). To use the DIAG with an IBM PC debugger, place the
switch in the ALT position.
2.5.2 DIAG CONNECTION FOR BACKUP PHONE MODEM

When the PES indoor unit power is off or when a data port card has its ALT/BYPASS/NORM switch in
the BYPASS position, relays on the data port card metallically connect the DIAG port to the USER port.
This feature permits a backup phone modem connected to the DIAG port to carry the user device data
communications traffic. The purpose of the BYPASS position is to permit land based communication if
the satellite link becomes inoperable.
2.5.3 BACKUP PHONE MODEM CONTROL OF DATA PORT CARD FUNCTION - MBR
DATA PORT CARD
The Minimum Boot ROM (MBR) data port card can be configured so modem control signals from the
backup telephone modem cause the data port card to switch between the norm function (data
communication over the space link) and the bypass function (data communication over backup terrestrial
lines) while the switch remains in the NORM position. The USER PORT is electrically connected to the
DIAG port during the bypass function. The modem control signals have no effect when the MBR data
port card switch is in the BYPASS or ALT position. Table 2-2 lists the possible modem control signal
configurations. Table 2-3 shows how the status of the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) and Request to Send
(RTS) signals, asserted by a Minimum Boot ROM DP, varies with the position of ALT/BYPASS/NORM
switch.
13-2-3
PES INDOOR UNIT
DATA PORT CARD (DP)
BYPASS
ALT NORM
USER PORT DIAG PORT
RS-232 RS-232
CABLE CABLE
USER DEVICE
BACKUP TELEPHONE
MODEM
(TERRESTRIAL MODEM)
TELEPHONE LINES
TO
HUB
M10209
Figure 2-1. Data Port Card Modem Backup Configuration
13-2-4
Table 2-1. Data Port Card DIAG Port Function

Switch Position MBR Data Port Card
NORM Debugger is inactive.
When DP so configured, modem control signals

can activate/deactivate BYPASS mode.
Backup phone modem may be connected with

the power on.
BYPASS DIAG port connected to USER port (for backup modem).
Upon switch change, DP resets, initializes,

enters network, downloads, goes to maintenance
state but continues internal processing.
LED displays progression:
[8]/[0.] thru [8.]/[BLANK.] - download boot code
[5]/[0.] thru [5]/[h.] - initialize
[7]/[0.], [1.], [2.], [3.], [4.] - download
[6]/[BLANK.] - maintenance state

ALT DIAG port/debugger communication is active.
Disconnect backup phone modem.
Connect IBM PC debugger.

PES POWER OFF DIAG port connected to USER port by relay contacts
so backup phone modem can carry USER port traffic.
Table 2-2. Modem Control Signals That Can Be Configured

to Control DP Function (Bypass or Normal)
DIAG Connector Pin Signal Function Name Bit
5 CTS Clear to Send 5
6 DSR Data Set Ready 4
8 CD Carrier Detect 3
22 RI Ring Indicator 2
The DIU Configuration Editor version v3.0 can be used to configure which modem control line(s) is(are)
designated to control data port card function. The modem control lines should be configured so they are
ignored; bits 2 through 5 should be set to 0. This configuration can be modified from the Hub
"over-the-air" when the feature is desired.
13-2-5
Table 2-3. Minimum Boot ROM DP DIAG Port DTR and RTS Signals
DTR RTS
Switch DIAG Port Data Terminal Ready Request to Send
Position Function Pin 20 Pin 4
NORM normal (debugger asserted LOW asserted LOW
is inactive)
bypass (modem not asserted not asserted

leads active) (connected to pin 20 (connected to pin 4
of user port) of user port)
BYPASS bypass not asserted not asserted
(connected to pin 20 (connected to pin 4
ALT alt (debugger asserted HIGH asserted HIGH
communication
is active)
PES POWER bypass not asserted not asserted
OFF (connected to pin 20 (connected to pin 4
Each MBR data port card of a PES indoor unit is controlled independently.
2.6 VOICE DATA PORT, VP TEL AND VP PBX CARDS

The Voice Data Port (VDP) card does not have the three position toggle switch - it is configured by
internal jumpers installed at the factory. The DIAG port on the VDP always has its debugger activated.
(This is similar to a DP with the switch in the ALT position.)
The 2-wire analog voice card (VP TEL) contains no switches or jumpers other than those installed at the
factory.
The 4-wire analog voice card (VP PBX) contains jumpers which must be set to enable it for type I or type
II E&M operation. See appendix F of TM 70040B-1.
Refer to normal operation, chapter 13, section 1.5, page 3-1-6 for information about making voice calls.
2.7 MULTIPORT CARD

The multiport card (MP) does not have any external switches. Internally, the number of ports, the port
interface types, and special functions are determined by the presence of daughter boards called Port Level
Conversion modules (PLCs). Refer to chapter 9, section 5.4 on page 9-5-9.
The modem backup PLC operates in a manner similar to the bypass function of DP card previously
described in this section.
13-2-6
2.8 DUAL VOICE GRADE MODEM CARD

The dual voice grade modem card (DMC) has two rear panel switches as shown in chapter 9, section 5.7
on page 9-5-43. These switches select the dial-up or leased line mode of operation for each modem. In
the dial-up mode, the DMC is set to communicate with another modem through a telephone system. In
the leased line mode, the DMC is set to communicate with another modem via 4-wire telephone cable
without a PBX or telephone exchange in between.
13-2-7
6-28-95
CHAPTER 14
LED DISPLAY LIST
This chapter is divided into four sections:
Section 1 - Introduction to PES LED Displays
Section 2 - IFM LED Code Lists (All PES X000 Series other than PES 5000)
Section 3 - Port Card LED List
Section 4 - IF LED Code Lists (Applicable to PES 5000 only)
Section 1
INTRODUCTION TO PES LED DISPLAYS
1.1 GENERAL
During normal operation for PES model X000 series, the indoor unit LED indication for the IFM, and
port cards is a blank alternating with a blank dot. This indication looks like blinking decimal points,
[BLANK]/[BLANK.]. When these normal indications are present, the PES is receiving the proper
outroute signal from the Hub and is ready to transmit (or is transmitting) inroute signals to the Hub.
When the PES is in other than normal operation (such as being reset, under self-test, in diagnose mode, in
installation mode, in alarm mode, or other states and conditions), the LED displays change from
[BLANK]/[BLANK.] to an alphanumeric code. These alphanumeric codes are indicative of PES and
network conditions, and thus provide troubleshooting information.
The IFM and IF LEDs can display either a state/status or reset code display. Most of the time they will
display two LED codes that alternate at one second intervals. These codes indicate the current condition
(state/status) of the card (figure 1-1).
The state and status can be distinguished by the fact that:

• The state code is a single character without a decimal point.
• The status code is a single character followed by a decimal point. The status codes are
interpreted differently in the alarm and the non-alarm states.
- For the IFM, the alarm status codes are preceded with a 5 state code as shown in table
2-4 on page 14-2-7. For the PES 5000 IF, the alarm status codes are preceded with a 5
or a 6 state code as shown in table 4-3 on page 14-4-4 or in table 4-4 on page 14-4-5
- For the IFM, the non-alarm status codes are preceeded with a state code other than 5.
Table 2-2 on page 14-2-4 lists the IFM non-alarm status codes. For the PES 5000 IF,
the non-alarm status codes are preceeded with a state code other than 5 or 6. Table
4-2 on page 14-4-3 lists the PES 5000 IF non-alarm status codes.
14-1-1
LED alternates with . . .
State Status
(No Dot) (With Dot)
PS31828.FH3
Figure 1-1. LED State/Status Display
Throughout this manual, the alternating display is indicated by the state and status codes separated by a
slash(/). In some cases, the state and status codes are in brackets:
State/Status [State]/[Status]
For example, 5/7. represents a state code of 5 alternating with a status code of 7. in an LED display.
As shown in figure 1-2, both capital and small letters are represented for certain letters (such as C and c,
H and h, or U and u). Be sure to note whether a capital or small letter is displayed because they have
different meanings.
Section 3 of this chapter lists the port card LED codes for the physical port cards of PES X000 series and
the integrated port card (IPC) of PES 5000. The codes differ depending on port card type and the
operating status. Figures 1-2, 1-3, and 1-4 in chapter 13 section 1 give the location of port cards, and IFM
LEDs in the various PES model X000 series indoor units other than PES 5000. To identify the circuit
card type in the port card slots, check the rear connectors (refer to figure 3-1 in chapter 2, section 3, page
2-3-3). Figure 1-1 in chapter 13 section 1, gives the identification of the PES 5000 indoor unit LEDs.
14-1-2
CHAPTER 14 - LED DISPLAY LIST
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION TO PES LED DISPLAYS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A b C c d E e F H h
i J L n o P r U u y
P10135.FH3
Figure 1-2. LED Seven-Segment Characters
14-1-3
6-28-95
6-28-95
SECTION 2 - IFM LED CODE LISTS
Section 2
IFM LED CODE LISTS
This section is applicable to PES X000 series products other than PES 5000. This section lists the
following codes:
• IFM state codes (no decimal point), table 2-1, page 14-2-1
• IFM non-alarm status codes (with decimal point), table 2-2, page 14-2-4
• IFM alarm state 5 status codes (with decimal point), table 2-4, page 14-2-7
• IFM Restart LED codes, table 2-3, page 14-2-5
2.1 STATE CODES (WITHOUT DECIMAL POINT)

The operational mode of the IFM can be determined by observing the values it displays on its front-panel
LED display. Once an IFM is up and running, these values are displayed in alternating "state code/status
code" form. State codes are the LED values which do not have the decimal point illuminated while they
are displayed. Status codes are the LED values which do have the decimal point illuminated. The
following table describes the nature of the state codes for the IFM. Wherever possible, the codes have
been grouped into sections based on the current operational mode of the IFM.
Table 2-1. IFM LED State Codes
LED Interpretation
BLANK Normal operation. Normal operation. The IFM is in sync on the right network.
There is no max time in this state.
E Find Network. The IFM demodulator is now locked and the IFM is checking for the
correct network. The DECODER and SFH lock now must be found.
F Demodulator unlocked. Either the PES remote is not receiving anything, or the
signal-to-noise ratio is very bad. If the PES is not receiving, it cannot transmit
either.
H CER too high. Displayed if the Channel Error Rate is greater than 1 x 10-4.
P Indicates that there are no Port Cards configured as on-line. To fix this, use the DIU
Configuration Editor program to be certain all Port Cards in the chassis are properly
defined.
5 Alarm mode LED. This code will alternate with a status code that denotes the
condition causing the alarm. See table 2-4, IFM Alarm Codes, for more
information.
14-2-1
Table 2-1. IFM LED State Codes (Continued)
LED Interpretation
Installation Mode "State" LED Display
1 This code indicates that the remote is in installation mode. In this mode the IFM
will supply the pointing signal necessary to properly point the remote’s antenna.
While in installation mode, the remote will not be able to transmit, but it will attempt
to receive data as an aid in pointing.
Ranging Mode "State" LED Displays
h Indicates that the IFM is searching for a Port Card to range with. This LED changes
to an "r" assuming that a transmit-capable Port Card to range with is in the chassis.
O Indicates attempting to range but all Port Cards are configured as receive-only. At
least one transmit-capable Port Card must be defined (using the Configuration Editor
program) in order for the IFM to attempt ranging.
r Indicates that a ranging-capable Port Card has been found, and that the ranging
operation is in progress.
14-2-2
Table 2-1. IFM LED State Codes (Continued)
LED Interpretation
Diagnose Mode "State" LED Displays

(Refer to chapter 15, Troubleshooting, for more information regarding diagnose mode.)
A Diagnose Mode IFM Loopback CER (Channel Error Rate) error.

b Diagnose Mode IFM Loopback "no sync loss" error.
c Diagnose Mode "bad diagnose response" error.
C Diagnose Mode "Sync loss in Port Card Loopback" error.
d In Diagnose Mode with loopback test jumper installed. This is the normal
(expected) display seen when in diagnose mode while the loopback test jumper is
installed on the back of the IFM.
L Diagnose Mode Port Card Loopback Test "retry exhausted" error.
U Diagnose Mode "no Port Cards responding" error.
4 C-band only, outroute & inroute frequencies are more that 10 MHz away from each
other. Check frequencies and re-enter into EEPROM.
9 Diagnose Mode IFM Loopback "no sync" error.
- In Diagnose Mode without loopback test jumper present. This is the normal
(expected) display seen when in diagnose mode while the loopback test jumper is
NOT installed on the back of the IFM.
14-2-3
2.2 STATUS CODES (WITH DECIMAL POINT)
Status Codes are displayed alternately with the State Codes by the IFM LED display, and indicate the
status of the system. Status codes are the LED values which have the decimal point illuminated. The
following table describes the nature of the status codes for the IFM. Wherever possible, the codes have
been grouped into sections based on the current operational mode of the IFM.
Table 2-2. IFM LED Status Codes
LED Interpretation
BLANK. Normal operation.

E. Low EBNO. The signal-to-noise ratio on the outroute is unusually low. The PES
may be experiencing a fade locally or at the hub.
F. Transmit Mode Disabled. The IFM is unable to transmit while this code is
displayed.
O. RF Unit Communication failure. The RF Unit failed to give a proper response to a
serial interface command within the retry limit. Either the RF Unit is not connected
by the IFL cable, or the RF Unit is not functioning.
P. Bad Primary Frequency. The currently-configured frequency is in an invalid. Either
the frequency range is invalid, or the IFM has revision E or earlier firmware and is
configured for a spread spectrum outroute and the frequency is not on a 500 kHz
boundary (which applies to spread spectrum outroute only). Use the DIU
Configuration Editor program to fix the frequency data.
y. Bad Secondary Frequency. The currently-configured frequency is invalid. Either
the frequency range is invalid, or the IFM has revision E or earlier firmware and is
configured for a spread spectrum outroute and the frequency is not on a 500 kHz
boundary (applies to spread spectrum outroute only). Use the DIU Configuration
Editor program to fix the frequency data.
14-2-4
2.3 RESTART LED CODES

One of the following LED codes is displayed on the IFM LED every time the board starts up. Besides
starting up caused by turning the remote on, the IFM may from time-to-time restart itself for the reasons
described below. Keep in mind that the restart code itself only remains on the LED for a few seconds
after restart, and then the state/status codes begin alternating on the display.
Table 2-3. IFM Restart LED Codes
LED Interpretation
blank Normal IFM power-up (when you first turn the remote on).
b Hardware mode switch change. The IFM momentary pushbutton (labeled "AUTO
COMM" on the back of the IFM) used to select between ranging and normal modes
was pressed. If the IFM was in normal mode when this button was pressed, it will
come up in ranging mode after restart. If the IFM was in ranging mode when the
button was pressed, it will come up in normal mode after restart.
c Port Card commanded reset. This restart cause is used if the IFM was commanded
to reset by a message from a Port Card.
F Firmware fault. The IFM experienced an internally-monitored fault which should
not normally occur.
J Debugger reset command was issued. The Configuration Editor computer or
debugger terminal user sent a soft reset command to the IFM via a serial interface
command.
o RF Unit reset unexpectedly.
O RF Unit did not reset. RF Unit did not reset after being sent an RF Unit reset
command.
U Port Card delayed in responding to a request by the IFM for config data. A Port
Card told the IFM to ask it for configuration data, then the Port Card failed to deliver
the data when the IFM asked.
y Debugger wrote to the IFM’s internal mode switch. The Configuration Editor
computer or debugger terminal user sent a "switch operational mode" command to
the IFM via the serial interface. The IFM will come up from reset in the operational
mode specified in the command.
- Hardware mode switch change failure. The IFM momentary pushbutton (labeled
"AUTO COMM" on the back of the IFM) to select between ranging and normal
modes was pressed, but the mode change was not successful. The IFM will come up
in the same operational mode it was in before the button was pressed (or it will come
up in diagnose mode if the problem was serious enough).
14-2-5
Table 2-3. IFM Restart LED Codes (Continued)
LED Interpretation
1 Completed uploading config data from a Port Card. This restart cause is used if the
IFM has finished receiving new configuration parameters from a Port Card in the
chassis.
2 Stream request timeout. The allotted time for a Port Card to complete a stream
request to the hub has expired.
3 IFM Watchdog Expired. The IFM internal watchdog timer expired. This code
should not normally occur.
6 IFM A/D failure. The IFM’s A-to-D converter failed to provide a reading within the
timeout interval.
7 IFM synthesizer failure. One of the IFM synthesizers dropped out of lock
unexpectedly. There could be a problem with the IFM analog circuitry.
8 IFM self-test failure. Some type of IFM board-related failure occurred during the
IFM’s startup self-tests. Diagnose mode should probably be run on the IFM to
confirm the presence of a problem.
9 IFM LCA load failure. The IFM Logic Cell Arrays did not load properly during
startup.
Ranging Mode Restart Code LED Displays
C Port Card commanded reset in ranging mode. This restart cause is used if the IFM
was commanded to reset by a message from a Port Card while the IFM was in
ranging mode.
h Lost authorization to range. A Port Card commanded the IFM to range, then a later
message from the Port Card to the IFM indicated that ranging was not authorized
anymore.
4 Ranging finished. The ranging operation has completed.
5 Quit answering range polls. A Port Card responded to a ranging poll from the IFM
at least once, then the Port Card failed to respond to a subsequent poll.
2.4 ALARM CODES (WITH DECIMAL POINT)

These codes only appear when the IFM is in ALARM MODE. In alarm mode, the "state" LED display is
always a "5".
14-2-6
Table 2-4. IFM Alarm Codes
LED Interpretation Action
5/A. The RF Unit detected a hardware fault Replace RF Unit.

involving the PLL reference.
5/b. Could not obtain sync in IOC ASIC Replace IFM. If still occurs, replace
Sync Test. backplane. If this corrects problem,
check original IFM for proper operation.
5/C. The RF Unit has detected that the unit is Replace RF Unit, then IFM.
streaming (carrier is continuously on).
5/d. The symbol rate obtained from the Reprogram the EEPROM via dialog
IFM’s EEPROM was invalid. mode on site commissioning computer.
If still fails, then replace IFM.
5/F. Factory-specified parameters are cor- Replace IFM.

rupted.
5/i. CER > 0 in IOC Sync Test. Replace IFM. If still occurs, replace
backplane. If this corrects problem,
5/J. IFM detected power overflow in normal Re-run dialog mode on site commis-
mode. sioning computer.
5/n. Could not lose sync in IOC ASIC Sync Replace IFM. If still occurs replace
Test. backplane. If this corrects the problem,
check the original IFM for proper
operation.
5/o. RF Unit serial communication will not Check cable. Replace RF Unit. Replace
come up. IFM.
5/O. The RF Unit has detected a hardware Replace RF Unit, then IFM.
problem involving frequency reference.
5/P. The RF Unit detected that transmit was Replace RF Unit, then cable, then IFM.
at least 3 dB off when automatic level
control was enabled.
5/r. The RF Unit has detected a hardware Replace RF Unit.

problem with the Receive Synthesizer.
For the Type III C-Band RF unit, this
alarm indicates a problem with the
transmit/ receive synthesizer (it is a
single synthesizer for both tx and rx for
this RF unit). Replace the RF unit in
this case as well.
14-2-7
Table 2-4. IFM Alarm Codes (Continued)
5/U. Power Supply alarm generated by RF Check cable, check backplane (replace
Unit, tells IFM that input was not chassis if bad), replace RF Unit, then
acceptable. IFM. Check for original version CPC.
See FSB1127B.
5/y. IFM EEPROM failed to show ready. Power off for 1 minute, reapply power
and rerun dialog mode on site
commissioning computer. If error
remains, replace IFM.
5/1. RF Unit failure - used when Automatic No actual failure. Run chassis in non-
Dial Backup (ADB) takes over. ADB mode to confirm.
5/2. IFM failure - used when ADB has taken No actual failure. Run chassis in non-
over. ADB mode to confirm.
5/3. IFM Power Supply failure - used when No actual failure. Run chassis in non-
ADB has taken over. ADB mode to confirm.
5/4. No active EEPROM page was found in Rerun dialog mode on site commis-
the EEPROM self-test. sioning computer. If test still fails,
replace IFM card.
5/5. The EEPROM self-test determined that Rerun dialog mode on the site
the EEPROM checksum was incorrect. commissioning computer. If test still
fails, replace IFM card.
5/6. The dash number of the RF Unit part Replace RF Unit, check cable.
number returned in RF Unit query
response was not a valid decimal
number, or the encoded status bits were
not valid hexidecimal characteristics.
5/7. Could not obtain sync in IOC Sync Test. Replace IFM. If still occurs, replace
5/8. Bad PC base address, configuration, or Re-run dialog mode on site commis-
data rate bytes were found in the sioning computer.
EEPROM.
5/9. From RF Unit status, the IFM found that Replace RF Unit.
the RF Unit’s self-tests failed.
5/-. Could not lose sync in IOC Sync Test. Replace IFM. If still occurs, replace
14-2-8
6-28-95
6-28-95
SECTION 3 - REMOTE PORT CARD LED CODES
Section 3
REMOTE PORT CARD LED CODES
3.1 PORT CARD LED OVERVIEW

This section describes the LED codes for remote port cards.
The port card will flash two codes alternately at one second intervals, indicating the current condition
(state/status) of the card. The state code contains NO decimal point (e.g., 5), and the status code is
FOLLOWED BY a decimal point (5.).
The LED codes identify the status of the port card as it performs the following functions:
1. At startup, the port card operates out of ROM. The ROM code’s objective is to download
the appropriate RAM boot code from the hub, then start the RAM boot code running. LED
codes 8/E. - 8/F. indicate the actual download. If the RAM boot code is already present in
port card memory (from a previous download), then the RAM boot code starts running
almost immediately after the port card starts up from reset (no download occurs).
2. Once the RAM boot code is running, the port card transmits a HIAM ("Here-I-Am")
message to the hub and requests/downloads the desired user (or "protocol") code from the
hub. LED codes 7/2. - 7/4. indicate the request/download. Once the user code is present on
the port card, the RAM boot code starts it running. As with the RAM boot code, if the user
code is already present in port card memory (from a previous download), then the user code
starts running almost immediately after the RAM boot code starts running (no download
occurs).
3. Once the user code is running, the protocol-specific functions become available (user ports
can now communicate over the spacelink, etc.), and the port card should normally display
blank/blank. on its LED.
Refer to chapter 14, section 3.5 for additional information on the normal LED code sequences.
3.2 REMOTE DATA PORT CARD TYPES

There are several different types of port cards used in remotes, including Remote Data Port Cards (DPs,
"RDPCs"), Remote Voice Port Cards (VDPs, "RVPCs"), Multiport Cards (MPs), Turbo Port Cards (TPs),
Compact Port Cards (CPCs), Voice/Data Port Cards (VDPCs), and a functional port card portion of the
PES 5000 designated Integrated Port Card (IPC).
NOTE
Unless otherwise indicated, the LED codes described in this chapter
pertain to all remote port card types (DPs, VDPs, MPs, TPs, CPCs,
VDPCs, IPCs). Where there are differences among the card types, the
information is broken down into subsections that distinguish between the
card types.
14-3-1
3.3 SECTION ORGANIZATION

This section is organized in the following manner:
• Differences in ROM versions/boot types - Describes the differences in interpretations due
to the use of different ROM versions/boot types. See chapter 14, section 3.4 beginning on
page 14-3-3.
• Normal LED Sequences - Describes the normal sequences of LED codes that can be
expected during different modes of operation. See chapter 14, section 3.5 beginning on page
14-3-3.
• LED State/Substate Code Descriptions: - detailed descriptions for each substate associated
with a given LED state. See chapter 14, section 3.6 beginning on page 14-3-8. States
include:
o State 0 - Port Card Shutdown, page 14-3-9
o State 1 - Port Card ROM Initialization, page 14-3-15
o State 2 - Diagnose Mode, page 14-3-16
o State 3 - Ranging Mode, page 14-3-21
o State 4 - Standby Mode, page 14-3-25
o State 5 - RAM Boot Code Initialization, page 14-3-26
o State 6 - Maintenance, page 14-3-31
o State 7 - Download User Code, page 14-3-33
o State 8 - Receive RAM Boot Code, page 14-3-34
o State 9 - Transient Sync Loss, page 14-3-38
o State A - ADB (Automatic Dial Backup) Client Initiated Automatically, page 14-3-38
o State C - ADB Server, page 14-3-39
o State F - ADB Client Initiated by Hub, page 14-3-39
o State H - ADB Client Initiated by HW Failure, page 14-3-39
o State blank - Online Mode, page 14-3-39
• Alternate State Codes - For MPs/TPs/CPCs/VDPCs only, if dipswitch 3 (labeled SW2 on

MP) is flipped down, the LED will flash alternate displays that are useful in diagnosing
problems. See chapter 14, section 3.7 beginning on page 14-3-41. See figure 3-1 on page
14-3-42.
14-3-2
3.4 ROM VERSIONS AND BOOT TYPES
NOTE
Refer to FSB 1099B for information on how to determine the ROM
version using the REM MEM VOC screen. The "ISBN Remote
Troubleshooting Guide" (HNS Doc. # 8019080) contains LED code and
ROM information, much of which is duplicated here.
Throughout this document, there may be different interpretations for the same LED code due to different
ROM version numbers/boot types:
• Different ROM Version Numbers - If the LED code is followed by a dash number shown
in brackets (for example [-00]), this indicates that the code applies only to the identified
revision number of the remote port card boot ROM. The ROMs are numbered 200054-00,
200054-01, etc. Dash numbers -00, -01, -02, -03, and -04 apply to DPs/VDPs
(RDPCs/RVPCs) only. If no dash number appears in brackets after the LED code, then the
interpretation of the LED code is the same for all ROM versions.
• Different ROM Boot Types - There are two ROM boot types: Minimum Boot ROM
(MBR) and non-MBR.
o MBR ROMs - MBR is the newest boot type that uses ROM (with minimal functions
that load the RAM boot code and get it running), along with RAM-based boot code.
All Multiport Card (MP), Turbo Port Card (TP), Compact Port Card (CPC), and
Voice/Data Port Card (VDPC) ROMs, as well as the newer DP/VDP, "RDPC/RVPC"
ROMs (200054-04 and later), are MBR ROMs.
o Non-MBR ROMs - Older, non-MBR cards don’t load RAM boot code, rather they
combine the ROM/RAM boot code entirely in the ROM. Only DP/VDP,
"RDPC/RVPC" ROMs 200054-00 through -03 are non-MBR ROMs.
3.5 NORMAL SEQUENCES OF LED CODES

This section lists the normal sequences of codes displayed when no problems are encountered. The
subsections below provide sequences for:
• Startup (which varies depending on which ROM release is being used: Release 3 non-MBR,
Release 4 MBR, or Releases 5 MBR and later).
• Diagnose mode.
• Ranging mode.
Detailed descriptions of the LED codes that are displayed during these sequences are located in the State
sections that follow.
14-3-3
3.5.1 NORMAL STARTUP SEQUENCE FOR RELEASE 3

Release 3 ROMs are the non-MBR ROMs, i.e. remote port card ROMs 200054-00 through 200054-03.
The list below details the main state/status codes encountered on a normal run through the Release 3 boot
code, assuming that no RAM-based code is present or valid before the power-up.
• LED spinning pattern - LED test.
• 1/2. - Port card is waiting for a poll from the IOC
• 5/2. - 5/4. - Port card is waiting to get into outroute sync. 5/4. indicates that a superframe
header is being received. Regression to 5/2. indicates that the superframe header did not
have the right carrier ID number.
• 5/6. - Remote may wait here for a minute or so to wait for the transmit phase lock loop to
lock up.
• 5/8. - 5/9. - Port card waits here to transmit HIAM messages to the hub.
• 7/0. - Port card waits up to about 15 seconds for an RRD (Remote Reconciliation Descriptor)
broadcast.
• 7/1. - When a HIAM response is received, the port card progresses to this state and waits for
15 seconds or until network parameters are received. The network parameters broadcast
occurs automatically (at time intervals configurable from the hub), or it can be forced via the
VOC DLL CNTRL screen.
• 7/2. - 7/3. - Port card is transmitting a code request to the hub.

• 7/4. - Port card is receiving user code packets. If not all are received, the port card will
eventually go back to 7/2.
• 7/0. - This lasts for about 2 seconds before going to online.

• blank/blank. - Online state, user code is running
If the user code is already present and valid in port card RAM at power-up, the card will spend very little
time is states 7/2. through 7/4. (about 1 or 2 seconds).
If the card was in sync before a reset the card may come into sync immediately and appear to skip all
states up until 5/8.
A receive-only card will skip the 5/8.-5/9. state and will wait in 5/b. for its RSD to be broadcast from the
hub. It will then wait in 7/1. for netparms and 7/4. for its code to be broadcast from the hub. If the RSD,
netparms, and code are present in memory already, the wait will be skipped (except in ROM 200054-00)
and the present RSD, netparms, and code will be used.
Other states are possible under non-standard conditions.
14-3-4
3.5.2 NORMAL STARTUP SEQUENCE FOR RELEASE 4 MBR

The Release 4 MBR version is 200054-04.
The following list details the main state/status codes encountered on a normal run through the Release 4
boot code assuming that no RAM-based code is present or valid before the power-up.
• 1/2. - Port card is waiting for a poll from the IOC
header is being received, and regression to 8/2. indicates that the superframe header did not
• 8/E. - Port card is waiting for a broadcast of the RAM boot code from the hub. The
broadcast occurs automatically (at time intervals configurable from the hub), or it can be
forced via the VOC DLL CNTRL screen.
• 8/F. - Port card is receiving RAM boot code packets. This broadcast lasts about 15-20
seconds.
• 8/blank. - Port card received some RAM boot code packets but then quit receiving them. This
comes up only if a packet was missed during the broadcast or the remote just got in sync
during a broadcast and so missed some of the first packets. The card will wait for the
broadcast again, and then will transition to 8/F. to receive the missed packets before
proceeding to 5/h.
• 5/h. - Remote waits here until an RRD is received confirming the RAM boot code version.
• 5/6. - Remote may wait here for a minute or so for the transmit phase lock loop to lock up.
• 5/8. - 5/9. - Card waits here to transmit HIAM messages to the hub.

• 5/H. - Five seconds here allows the inroute to settle after an RSD is received. This 5 seconds
includes the time spent in State 7, so 5/H. is generally not seen if State 7 is needed to
download code.
If RAM boot code is already present and valid at power-up, State 8 is skipped altogether and the remote
will come up in 5/2.-5/4. during sync scanning.
If the user code is already present and valid at power-up, the card will spend very little time in State 7
(about 1 or 2 seconds).
14-3-5
states up until 8/E. (if RAM boot code was not present or valid) or 5/8. (if RAM boot code was present
and valid).
netparms, and code are present in memory already, the wait will be skipped (except in ROM 200054-00)
and the present RSD, netparms, and code will be used.
3.5.3 NORMAL STARTUP SEQUENCE FOR RELEASES 5 MBR AND LATER

The following list details the main state/status codes encountered on a normal run through the boot code
in Releases 5 and later, assuming that no RAM-based code is present or valid before the power-up.
• 1/2. - Port card is waiting for a poll from the IOC/IFM
header is being received, and regression to 8/2. indicates that the superframe header did not
• 8/E. - Port card is waiting for a broadcast of the RAM boot code from the hub. The
broadcast occurs automatically (at time intervals configurable from the hub), or it can be
forced via the VOC DLL CNTRL screen.
• 8/F. - Port card is receiving RAM boot code packets. This broadcast lasts about 15-20
seconds.
• 8/blank. - Port card received some RAM boot code packets but then quit receiving them. This
comes up only if a packet was missed during the broadcast or the remote just got in sync
during a broadcast and so missed some of the first packets. The card will wait for the
broadcast again, and then will transition to 8/F. to receive the missed packets before
proceeding to 5/h.
• 5/h. - Remote waits here until an RRD is received confirming the RAM boot code version.
• 5/6. - Remote may wait here for a minute or so for the transmit phase lock loop to lock up.
• 5/8. - 5/9. - Card waits here to transmit HIAM messages to the hub.
14-3-6
If RAM boot code is already present and valid at power-up, State 8 is skipped altogether and the remote
will come up in 5/2.-5/4. during sync scanning.
If the network parameters are already present and valid at power-up, the card will not go to 7/1.
If the user code is already present and valid at power-up, the card will spend very little time in State 7
(about 1 or 2 seconds).
states up until 8/E. (if RAM boot code was not present or valid) or 5/8. (if RAM boot code was present
and valid).
netparms, and code are present in memory already, the wait will be skipped and the present RSD,
netparms, and code will be used.
3.5.4 NORMAL SEQUENCE FOR THE DIAGNOSE MODE

The LED display for diagnose mode is covered in detail for PES X000 series other than PES 5000 in
chapter 15, section 1.3. The LED display for diagnose mode is covered in detail for PES 5000 in
appendix E, section 7.
3.5.5 NORMAL SEQUENCE FOR THE RANGING MODE

The LED code sequence depends on whether manual or autocommissioning is being performed.
3.5.5.1 Normal Sequence for Autocommissioning. The LED display sequence for ranging mode is
the same as the normal startup sequence up until state 5/6. is entered. Instead of entering 5/6., the ranging
port card will do the following:
• For Releases 6 and later:
o 3/6. - Port card is initializing a local copy of the inroutes’ Autocommissioning Burst
Statistics (ACBS) fields.
o 3/7. - Port card is waiting for an inroute to become available on which to either range
or to request allocation.
o 3/9. - The IOC/IFM/IPC is adjusting its frequency to a ranging inroute, then waits for
Transmit Phase-Locked Loop (TX PLL) to be locked.
o 3/C. - For remote-initiated ranging only, the port card is requesting allocation on an
open inroute from the Demand Assignment Processor (DAP).
14-3-7
NOTE
The next 5 states will occur only if adjustments have
been enabled. The first 4 of these states will sequence
through a number of times until the adjustment
process is completed.
o 3/d. - Port card is commanding the Burst Channel Demodulator (BCD) to begin
statistics collection.
o 3/A. - Port card is transmitting bursts for the BCD statistics collection.
o 3/F. - Port card is commanding the BCD to complete statistics collection.
o 3/c. - Port card is computing new adjusted values to try. This state will not usually be
seen.
o 3/H. - IOC/IFM/IPC is storing the newly adjusted burst timing offset and power level.
o 3/h. - If the link quality test has been enabled, the port card will remain in this state for
a while as the test operates (typically this takes about 20 minutes).
o 3/P. - For remote-initiated ranging only, the port card is requesting to be removed as
session owner for the ranging inroute.
o 3/b. - The port card has completed ranging successfully.
• For Release 4 and Release 5:

o 3/9. - Port card waits for about a minute for the TX PLL to become locked.
o 3/A. - Port card remains here transmitting ranging bursts until it is reset.
3.5.5.2 Normal Sequence for Manual Commissioning. For manual commissioning, the LED code
sequence is as follows:
• 3/6. - Port card is initializing a local copy of the inroutes’ ACBS fields.
• 3/7. - Port card is waiting for an inroute to become available on which to either range or to
request allocation.
• 3/9. - The IOC is adjusting its frequency to a ranging inroute, then waits for TX PLL to be
locked.
• 3/5. - Port card performing manual ranging session.
3.6 LED STATE/SUBSTATE CODE DESCRIPTIONS

The subsections below provide state and substate code descriptions for all modes of the port card.
14-3-8
3.6.1 STATE 0 - PORT CARD SHUTDOWN

This state is commonly entered when the port card fails a powerup or diagnostic self-test. This state
should never be seen unless there is a failure of the port card. If this state occurs, report the condition to
Field Service.
The port card remains in this state until it is reset, doing nothing except flashing the LED. It does not
communicate with the IOC/IFM in any way and does not listen to the outroute. The backup relay(s), if
present, are put in backup position, connecting the user and diagnostic ports directly in hardware.
NOTE
In ROM 200054-00 (DPs only), this state is also entered when the rear
3-position switch is in middle position. (The rear switch position is
monitored, and the card will reset if it is moved.)
In all later ROMs, the switch is not monitored and the only way to exit
shutdown is by hardware reset. However, in IPC ROMs, there are two
ways to exit shutdown. One is by hardware reset, as usual, the other way
is let the one-minute shutdown timeout expire in order to generate a
warm reset after shutdown. Note that the IPC does not communicate
with the DIU Configuration Editor during shutdown state.
The meaning of the State 0 LED code depends on whether the card is an DP/VDP/MP or a
TP/CPC/VDPC/IPC. Refer to the appropriate subsection below.
• If the port card is a MP, DP, or VDP, use the codes beginning below on this page
• If the port card is a TP, CPC, VDPC or IPC, use the codes beginning on page 14-3-12.
NOTE
For Alternate State 0 codes (for MPs/TPs/CPCs/VDPCs), refer to Section
3.6.1.1 DP, VDP, MP State 0. This subsection describes the State 0 LED codes applicable to DPs,
VDPs, and MPs.
NOTE
Code Description
0/0. ROM Checksum has failed.

The board’s two byte ROM checksum checked at power-up has failed.
0/1. CPU test failure.

One of the series of tests run by the ROM to exercise most of the instruction set has
failed.
14-3-9
0/2. Internal timer test failure

First, the internal CPU timer is measured against instruction cycles. This does not
test crystal rate, since both are tied to the CPU crystal. Next, the internal timer is
timed against the 3.6864 MHz crystal. Both tests return this same fail code.
0/3. Non-Destructive RAM test failure

At power-up, a non-destructive test (one byte at a time) is performed over the range of
the RAM. This test will test faulty locations, stuck data bits, chips missing, etc., but
will not detect addressing faults.
0/4. Duart self test failure

This power-up self-test tests the 2681 duart used for the IOC/IFM message bus and
the diagnostic port.
0/5. Internal PIC test failure

The CPU’s internal Programmable Interrupt Controller (PIC) is tested using an
interrupt from the internal T2 timer.
0/6. External PIC test failure

The external 8259A PIC is tested by sending and receiving a few characters through
the previously-tested duart. An interrupt-driven tx/rx test is used here.
0/7. Internal DMA test failure

This tests the CPU’s internal Direct Memory Address (DMA) controller.
0/9. Address RAM test failure

This tests the 1K by 1 bit address RAM used in filtering outroute data packets.
0/A. STC self test failure

This tests the 9513 System Timing Counter
0/b. Destructive RAM test failure

During diagnose mode (while LED is flashing 2/0.), a destructive RAM test is run.
This fills the entire contents of RAM with a non-repeating pattern, so it is more
extensive than the power-up RAM test.
0/c. PLC number 1 failed

Applies to MPCs only. These faults appear on the MPC if it fails one of the Port
Level Conversion (PLC) card self-tests. The PLC card is a small circuit card which
plugs onto the top of an MPC in one of four PLC mounting locations. To find out
more specific information about the failure, it is necessary to look at the Alternate
LED display. Alternate display is triggered by dipswitch 3 on the MPC.
0/C. Three position switch in bypass [-00]

Applies to ROM 200054-00 only. The port card goes into shutdown when the rear
switch is in the "Bypass" position. Unlike later ROMs, this ROM resets and exits
shutdown when the switch position is changed.
0/d. MPSC self test failure [non-MBR]

Applies to RDPCs/RVPCs only. At power-up, a register read/write test is performed
on the Multi-Protocol Serial Controller (MPSC). No data is passed.
14-3-10
0/E. Bad Configuration Parms [-03, all MBR ROMs]

The configuration message passed from the IOC/IFM is range checked for parameter
errors. This range checking confirms the following:
• Outroute frequencies have upper 4 bits zeroed (i.e., their MSBs (Most
Significant Bytes) are <= 0FH). Note: if using international KU-band
outroute frequencies, this check does not occur.
• Remote Optimum Data Link Control (ODLC) base address (MSB) is

non-zero
• Lower 2 pc_config bits are legal (not "11" binary)

• No undefined pc_config bits are set (all undefined bits should be zero).
• ODLC address is on appropriate boundary:
o For tx-capable cards, ODLC Least Significant Bytes (LSBs) must
be a multiple of 4.
o For receive-only cards, ODLC LSBs must be a multiple of 2.
• For tx-capable cards, their ODLC LSBs must be <= 7CH

• No special ODLC addresses (FFFC-FFFF and 035C-035F are not
allowed as ODLC addresses).
0/F. Illegal board type [-03, all MBR ROMs]

Jumpers W87, W88, W89, and W90 determine the board type (DP vs VDP). Board
type is not controlled via jumpers on the MP. The only legal board types for
DPs/VDPs are 0 (all jumpers present) for a 256K DP, and F (all jumpers removed) for
a 96K/32K VDP. The MP displays this code when there is a discrepancy between the
card type ID stored in RAM and the RAM boot code currently running on the card.
0/H. PLC number 2 failed

0/h. PLC number 3 failed

0/J. PLC number 4 failed

14-3-11
0/blank. MPSC self test failure [DP/VDP MBR]

Applies to DP/VDP only. At power-up, a register read/write test is performed on the
MPSC. No data is passed.
0/o. RAM Boot Code Build Too Large

The RAM boot code build is bigger than the space allocated for it.
3.6.1.2 TP/CPC/VDPC/IPC State 0. This subsection describes the State 0 LED codes for TPs, CPCs,
VDPCs, and IPCs. Some of the codes apply to just one of these cards; if this is the case, it will be
indicated in the description.
NOTE
Code Description
0/0. ROM checksum has failed

There is a two byte checksum stored in the boot ROM which is checked at power-up.
If this fails, the card enters 0/0.
0/1. CPU test failure

The ROM runs a series of tests exercising most of the instruction set. If any fail, state
0/1. is entered. Also, the TP’s 386 stores an internal self test result in a register on
power-up, and if this indicates a fault that is also cause to enter state 0/1.
0/2. Internal timer test failure (CPC/VDPC/IPC only)

The timers on the CPC’s/VDPC’s/IPC’s 80C186 are tested to verify register and
counting functions. If any of these tests fail, the card enters 0/2.
0/3. Non-Destructive RAM test failure

At power-up a non-destructive test (one byte at a time) is performed over the range of
the RAM. This test will test faulty locations, stuck data bits, chips missing, etc., but
0/4. DMAC read/write register test failure

At startup a register read/write test of the external DMAC used for inroute/outroute is
performed. No actual DMA transfers take place during the test. It just reads and
writes registers.
0/5. 8254 PIT test failed (TP only)

This is the startup test of the 8254 PIT, which includes a register test, plus some
minimal testing of the counting ability of all three counters.
0/5. Crystals test failed (CPC/VDPC only)

This startup test verifies that the CPU and DUART crystal rates are in some
acceptable known proportion to each other.
14-3-12
0/6. 36864 and refresh clock via PIT test failed (TP only)
Both the 3.6864 MHz duart clock and the refresh clock (which is derived from this
duart clock) go into the 8254 PIT. This test verifies that the two inputs are at one of
two known ratios (for fast or slow refresh). It cannot verify the speed of either clock -
just the ratio of the two speeds.
0/7. DUART self test fail

This power-up self test tests the 2681 DUART which is used for the IOC/IFM
message bus and for the diagnostic port. On the IPC this indicates a self-test failure
of the UART used for the debug/config port.
0/8. Address RAM test fail

This tests the 1K by 1 bit address RAM used in filtering outroute data packets.
0/9. Master PIC test

This tests the master PIC (PIC 0 on the TP, or the 80C186 internal interrupt logic for
the CPC/VDPC/IPC) by generating an interrupt and verifying several status items
during and after the ISR.
0/A. Slave PIC interrupt test failure

This tests the slave PIC (an external 82C59A PIC is used for the TP, CPC, VDPC and
IPC). First a register read/write test is done. Then interrupts from the duart (TP, CPC,
VDPC and IPC) and from both lines on the 8254 counter (TP only) are generated and
checked.
0/b. Destructive RAM test failure (TP/CPC/VDPC only)

During diagnose mode (while LED is flashing 2/0.) a destructive RAM test is run.
This fills the entire contents of RAM with a non-repeating pattern and so is more
extensive than the power-up RAM test.
0/C. Illegal board type (TP/CPC/VDPC only)

The TP/CPC/VDPC display this shutdown code when there is a discrepancy between
the card type ID stored in RAM and the RAM boot code currently running on the
card. This could mean that the RAM boot code on the System Control Processor
(SCP) was for another type of card but the file was misnamed as the TP RAM boot
code. It is also possible that the configuration information for the DIU is incorrect
(i.e., there are slots configured as containing a port card but "FF" is the configured
ODLC LSB, or the IOC’s/IFM’s slot is configured incorrectly - both of these
problems should only be possible when manually configuring a chassis with the
Configuration Editor).
0/c. PLC number 1 failed

These faults appear on the TP/CPC/VDPC/IPC if it fails one of the PLC (Port Level
Conversion) cards’ self tests. For all three port cards, PLC 1 is built into the
motherboard and PLC 2 mounts on top of the motherboard. For the TP only, PLC 3
is the large PLC socket presently used for the Ethernet and Token Ring LAN PLCs.
To find out more specific information about PLC failures, it is necessary to look at
the "alternate" LED display. Alternate display is triggered by DIP switch 3 on the
TP/CPC/VDPC. However, the alternate display is not supported on the IPC.
14-3-13
0/d. Parity NMI test fail (TP/CPC/VDPC only)

This test is run only at the end of diagnose mode and tests the RAM parity bits. At
any other time, the parity Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI) causes a reset, but during
diagnose mode it causes this shutdown code.
0/E. Bad configuration Parms

The configuration message passed from the IOC/IFM is range checked for parameter
errors. This range checking confirms the following:
• Outroute frequencies have their upper 4 bits zeroed (i.e., their Most
Significant Bytes (MSBs) are <= 0FH). Note: if using international
KU-band outroute frequencies, this check does not occur.
• Remote Optimum Data Link Control (ODLC) base address (MSB) is

non-zero
• Lower 2 pc_config bits are legal (not "11" binary)

• No undefined pc_config bits are set (all undefined bits should be zero).
• ODLC address is on an appropriate boundary:
o For tx-capable cards, ODLC LSBs (Least Significant Bytes) must
be a multiple of 4.
o For receive-only cards, ODLC LSBs must be a multiple of 2.
• For tx-capable cards, their ODLC LSBs must be <= 7CH

• No special ODLC addresses (FFFC-FFFF and 035C-035F are not
allowed as ODLC addresses).
0/F. Illegal board type

The TP/CPC/VDPC/IPC display this shutdown code when there is a discrepancy
between the card type ID stored in RAM and the RAM boot code currently running
on the card. This could mean that the RAM boot code on the SCP was for another
type of card but the file was misnamed as TP RAM boot code. It is also possible that
the configuration information for the DIU is incorrect (i.e., there are slots configured
as containing a port card but "FF" is the configured ODLC LSB, or the IOC’s/IFM’s
slot is configured incorrectly - both of these problems should only occur when
manually configuring a chassis with the Configuration Editor). Note that if it occurs
on the IPC RAM boot code, the only way to exit this shutdown is hardware reset.
The IPC RAM boot code does not support the one-minute shutdown reset and the IF
LED will stop flashing.
0/H. PLC number 2 failed

These faults appear on the TPC/CPC/VDPC/IPC if it fails one of the PLC (Port Level
Conversion) cards’ self tests. For all four port cards, PLC 1 is built into the
motherboard and PLC 2 mounts on top of the motherboard. For the TPC only, PLC 3
is the large PLC socket presently used for the Ethernet and Token Ring LAN PLCs.
To find out more specific information about PLC failures, it is necessary to look at
the Alternate LED display. Alternate display is triggered by dipswitch 3 on the
TPC/CPC/VDPC. However, the alternate display is not supported on the IPC.
14-3-14
0/h. PLC number 3 failed (TPC/IPC only)

These faults appear on the TPC if it fails one of the PLC (Port Level Conversion)
cards’ self tests. For the TPC only, PLC 3 is the large PLC socket presently used for
the Ethernet and Token Ring LAN PLCs. To find out more specific information
about PLC failures, it is necessary to look at the Alternate LED display. Alternate
display is triggered by dipswitch 3 on the TPC/CPC/VDPC. For the IPC only, PLC 3
means the expansion card. This fault occurs when an unknown expansion card ID is
detected.
0/o. RAM Boot Code Build Too Large

The RAM boot code build is bigger than the space allocated for it.
0/L. Undefined IDU Configuration (IPC only)

These faults appear on IPC if the ROM boot code detects an unknown receive tuner
type, IPC ID, 225 ASIC version or TRM ID.
0/P. No Half Frame Interrupt (IPC only)

These faults appear on IPC if half frame interrupt does not happen within a certain
period of time.
3.6.2 STATE 1 - PORT CARD ROM INITIALIZATION

This state is entered normally immediately after power-up. However, this section does not apply to
IPC ROMs.
Code Description
1/0. Common self tests

Common power-up self tests are performed immediately after power-up. This self
test condition passes before the LED is written, so a 1/0. condition is never seen on
the LED. Common tests include:
• LED test
• CPU test
• ROM checksum test
• Non-destructive RAM test
• Timer/crystal test
• STC test (where applicable)
• Duart polling test
• Internal PIC test
• External PIC test
• Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) test
• Address RAM test
1/1. Application self test
After all common (meaning common to all port cards) tests pass, port card-specific
tests are run. There are currently no VDP specific power-up tests. The only DP
specific power-up tests is the MPSC test. As with 1/0., this display is not seen on the
LED. The MP/TP/CPC/VDPC-specific tests include testing each of the PLCs that are
present.
14-3-15
1/2. Waiting for IOC/IFM poll

The port card transitions to this state after 1/1. It is normally the first LED display
seen after power-up. The port card in this state is waiting for a poll over the IOC/IFM
message bus. The IOC/IFM polls all configured port cards continuously. A port card
should only wait here for at most 10 seconds if it is configured. If it waits for more
than 10 seconds, it is probably not configured and must be configured. The IOC/IFM
keeps (in its EEPROM configuration parameters) a list of which slots in the chassis
have port cards plugged in. Only those slots are polled.
To add a card to this list when using Releases 5 and later software (and MBR ROMs),
it is necessary to add the port card on the VOC RDPC DEF or RVPC DEF screen. A
port must also be defined (using RDPC SDLC, RDPC BITT, etc. screens). It is not
necessary to define a session. If there are other working port cards in the chassis, they
will notice the configuration change and upload it to the IOC/IFM. In Release 4
software or earlier, it is necessary to use the DIU (Digital Interface Unit)
Configuration Editor program to alter the IOC EEPROM contents. The DP will reset
after 10 minutes in the 1/2. state. Note that when the IOC/IFM is in ranging or
diagnose modes, it does not poll all configured port cards immediately. So in these
cases, a 1/2. on a port card is nothing to worry about.
3.6.3 STATE 2 - DIAGNOSE MODE

Diagnose mode is entered after state 1/2. when a poll from the IOC/IFM tells the port card that the IOC’s
rear switch/IFM’s software mode switch is in the DIAG position. The port cards then perform a set of
diagnostic tests with the IOC/IFM. The LED display for diagnose mode is covered in detail in other PES
documentation. For IPCs, diagnose mode is entered after a mode change command is made from the
configuration editor. Refer to chapter 15, section 1.3 for diagnose mode details for PES 4000, 6000,
8000. For PES 5000, refer to appendix E, section 7. For PES 9000, refer to "Personal Earth Station
Model 9000 Indoor Unit Installation and Maintenance Manual", HNS document number 8020624.
A short list of the codes is shown below. Note that the LED codes have different meanings, depending on
the type of card.
NOTE: For Alternate State 2 codes (for MPs/TPs/CPCs/VDPCs), refer to Section

chapter 14, section 3.7.2.
3.6.3.1 DP State 2. This subsection describes the State 2 codes applicable to DPs.
Code Description
2/0. Test in progress

Diagnose tests in progress, no failures yet.
2/1. Diagnostic tests passed

No failures yet, waiting to perform loopback
2/2. Loopback in progress

Port Card-to-IOC/IFM-to-Port Card loopback test (inroute-to-outroute loopback) in
progress
2/3. All tests passed

All diagnose tests, including loopback, passed
14-3-16
2/4. Idling
No failures yet, port card commanded by IOC/IFM to idle
2/5. RAM test fail

RAM test failed
2/6. External DMA test failure

External DMA test failure
2/7. Outroute test failed

IOC/IFM-generated outroute data not right pattern
2/8. Loopback test failed

Inroute-to-outroute loopback data not right pattern
2/9. Message error

Port card received out of order messages from IOC/IFM in diagnose mode
3.6.3.2 Diagnose Codes Specific to MPs. This subsection describes LED State 2 codes for MPs:
Code Description


No failures yet, waiting to perform loopback.

progress

All diagnose tests, including loopback, passed.
2/4. Idling
No failures yet, port card commanded by IOC/IFM to idle.
2/5. RAM test fail

RAM test failed.

External DMA test failure.

IOC/IFM-generated outroute data not right pattern.

Inroute-to-outroute loopback data not right pattern.
2/9. Message error

Port card received out of order messages from IOC/IFM in diagnose mode.
2/A. PLL test failed

Phase lock loop frequency off when compared to processor clock
14-3-17
2/b. PIC 0 test failed

PIC 0 failed to get RXSOF interrupt
2/d. PLC 1 test failed.
2/E. PLC 2 test failed.
2/F. PLC 3 test failed.
2/blank. PLC 4 test failed.
3.6.3.3 Diagnose Codes Specific to VDPs, "RVPCs." This subsection describes LED State 2 codes
for VDPs:
Code Description



progress

2/4. Idling
2/5. RAM test fail

RAM test failed.



2/9. Message error

2/A. ECM failure

The ECM has failed to respond to a poll
2/b. VCM CRC error

The Voice Codec Module is detecting Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) errors in its
received data
14-3-18
2/C. VCM DMA timeout

The Voice Codec Module is either not receiving or not sending its data
2/c. Buffer pool too small

The Num_1K_Bytes received from the exec is too small
2/d. VCM RAM Failure

The Voice Codec Module has a defective RAM
2/E. VCM No 8Hz clock

The Voice Codec Module is not receiving its byte clock
2/F. VCM PROM failure

The Voice Codec Module has detected a checksum error in its ROM.
2/H. VCM not toggling

The VCM is not toggling its "I’m alive" bit
2/h. Voice packet timeout

No voice packet from the hub has arrived in time n
2/J. Offhook detect failure

Unable to detect offhook in the analog circuit
2/L. VCM loopback failure

VCM loopback failed
2/o. ECM loopback failure

Echo Canceller Module (ECM) loopback failed
2/P. CCM loopback failure

Channel Control Module (CCM) loopback failed
2/r. Digital MWatt failure

Looped Digital Milliwatt Test failed
2/U. Idle channel noise failure

Idle Channel Noise Test failed
2/blank. No outroute packets received

No Outroute packets have been received for time period x
3.6.3.4 Diagnose Codes Specific to TPs, CPCs, and VDPCs. This subsection describes additional
LED State 2 codes for TPs, CPCs, and VDPCs:
Code Description


14-3-19

progress

2/4. Idling
2/5. RAM test fail

RAM test failed (RDPC/RVPC/MPC only).



2/9. Message error

2/5. Slave PIC failure

Test for presence of interrupts on PIC 1 failed
2/A. PLL test failure

Test of rate multiplier using 8530 on PLC1 failed
2/d. PLC 1 failed a diagnostic self test
2/E. PLC 2 failed a diagnostic self test
2/F. PLC 3 failed a diagnostic self test (TP only)
3.6.3.5 Diagnose Codes Specific to IPC

Code Description

Destructive RAM test in progress, no failures yet. Note that this state/status. display
is in sync with the IF LED display.
2/2. IF Loopback Test in progress

Baseband loopback test (inroute-to-outroute loopback on the IPC only) in progress.
This test only exercises the baseband receive and transmit logic.

2/8. IF Loopback test failed

Failure probable on IPC circuit card.
14-3-20
2/A. PLL test failure

Test of rate multiplier using 8530 on PLC1 failed.
2/d. PLC 1 failed a diagnostic self test

PLC 1 is built-in PLC on IPC, ports 1 and 2.
2/E. PLC 2 failed a diagnostic self test

PLC 2 is plug-in PLC, ports 3 and 4.
2/J. IFL loopback test failed

If IFL cable connected, disconnect IFL cable, then run PES 5000 diagnose mode
again. If IFL cable disconnected, indicates probable failure on TRM.
2/L. IFL Loopback test in progress

Inroute-to-outroute loopback on the IPC and TRM is in progress. This test exercises
both digital and analog receive and transmit logic.
2/r. Diagnose Destructive RAM test failed

During diagnose mode (while IPC LED is flashing 2/0.), a destructive RAM test is
run. This fills the entire contents of RAM with a nonrepeating pattern and so is more
extensive than a power-up RAM test.
3.6.4 STATE 3 - RANGING MODE

The port card enters the ranging (commissioning) state in one of several ways. The VOC operator
determines which of these features will be used by configuring a ranging session.
The following alternatives are available when commissioning a remote:

• Hub Initiated
o Adjustments enabled
- Link Quality Test enabled
- Link Quality Test disabled
o Adjustments disabled
- Manual Commissioning
• Remote Initiated
o Adjustments enabled
- Link Quality Test enabled
- Link Quality Test disabled
Commissioning procedures are described in detail in the ISBN Network Configuration Guide. The LED
codes that may be observed during the commissioning process are described below:
Code Description
3/4. Calculated power level slightly out-of-bounds

Once ranging is completed the port card will display this status instead of 3/b. if the
power level is adjusted to within ±2.5 dB but outside of ±1.0 dB. This is not exactly
an error condition but indicates the power level is slightly off from the desired.
14-3-21
Note that this state is not applicable to IPC.
3/5. Performing manual ranging session

When the port card is configured for a manual ranging session, this code is displayed
while the port card is transmitting packets. The port card will remain in this state until
the remote port card is removed as session owner for the inroute on the INRT DEF
screen.
3/6. Waiting for init of inroutes’ ACBS fields

When ranging first starts up, the port card initializes a table containing the ranging
fields from the superframe header for each configured inroute. This state may last up
to 3 minutes before ranging aborts, which may occur if initialization is disrupted by a
sufficient loss of superframe headers over the outroute. If this happens, check the
outroute connection through the AEU (Auxiliary Electronics Unit) and the RF head
(Type I), the RFB (Radio Frequency Board) and the ODU (Type II), or the IFM and
the RF Unit (Type III) or the PES 5000 outdoor unit and the TRM (PES 5000).
3/7. Waiting for an available inroute

The port card is waiting for an inroute to either be commanded into hub-initiated
ranging with the port card as session owner or become open for a remote-initiated
ranging session. The port card can wait indefinitely in this state. To exit this state, an
inroute at the correct data rate and with a valid ranging stream size must become
available. This can be changed on the INRT DEF screen.
3/8. Inroute lost configuration for the port card

This state is strictly an aborted state. This state indicates that the ranging fields in the
superframe header for the ranging inroute are invalid or incompatible with previous
postings. This could mean that the ranging stream size, the session owner or data rate
for the inroute has changed.
3/9. Waiting for the IOC/IFM/IF to switch to the ranging inroute

After the ranging inroute is available, the port card waits in this state for the
IOC/IFM/IF to tune to this inroute and the transmit phase lock loop to become ready
for transmission. It is usual to wait in this state for about a minute for the TX PLL to
lock.
3/A. Waiting for the BCD to collect stats

In this state, the port card is waiting to transmit enough packets over the inroute for
the BCD to gather statistics. Once it has determined that it has sent enough packets, it
will exit this state.
3/b. Ranging complete

Once this state is reached, ranging has successfully been completed. If the session is
hub-initiated, the port card is waiting for the hub to end the session. This can be
accomplished by removing the remote as session owner for the inroute on the INRT
DEF VOC screen. If the session is remote-initiated, the port card has already been
removed as session owner for the inroute and is waiting for the IOC’s rear-edge
3-position switch/IFM’s/IF’s software mode switch to be taken out of COMM.
3/C. Requesting session ownership from the DAP

At this time, the port card has found an open inroute on which to request allocation
for a remote-initiated ranging session. It will constantly request allocation until either
14-3-22
it receives session ownership or it loses compatability with the inroute. Session

ownership for an inroute may be specified on the INRT DEF VOC screen.
3/c. Adjusting parameters to desired values

After receiving the results of the BCD statistics collection, the port card will stay in
this state while it computes whether or not it achieved the desired burst timing offset
and power level values, and, if not, what new values to try. It is unusual for this state
to appear on the LED at all since the computation period is so short. If the desired
burst timing offset is beyond the range of the port card, it will abort. To alter the
desired burst timing offset, proportionately alter the ranging stream size on the INRT
DEF VOC screen.
3/d. Commanding the BCD to begin stats collection

The port card waits in this state for the BCD to respond to the command to begin
gathering statistics. It will continually send out this command until either it receives a
response or it aborts when the 3-minute timeout for ranging expires. If the BCD is
unable to hear or communicate to the port card, check that the BCD is operational.
3/E. Standby due to hub command

This indicates that the port card received an "Out of Service" command from the hub.
This happens if the hub operator sends the command from the VOC RDPC CNTRL
screen. The port card will wait in this state indefinitely (i.e. until it is reset). The
main purpose of this state is to allow the hub operator to disable a remote which was
mistakenly left in ranging mode by an installer.
3/F. Commanding the BCD to return stats results

The port card waits in this state for the BCD to respond to the command to complete
gathering statistics. It will continually send out this command until either it receives a
response or it aborts when the 3-minute timeout for ranging expires. If the BCD is
unable to hear or communicate to the port card, check that the BCD is operational.
3/H. Waiting for IOC/IFM/IF to store adjusted parameters

Once the port card has come as close to the desired burst timing offset and power
level values as it can, it tells the IOC/IFM/IF to store the final values into the
IOC/IFM/IF EEPROM and waits in 3/H..
3/h. Performing link quality test

In this state "In Progress" messages are constantly sent to the hub to determine the
packet loss rates of both the inroute and outroute. The port card will stay in this state
for about 20 minutes. It will exit when either the test has been completed
successfully or the inroute or outroute Packet Loss Rate (PLR) has exceeded the
allowable threshold. The link quality test can be enabled/disabled from the NET
GENRL VOC screen.
3/i. Tmax unspecified in a remote-initiated session

This state indicates that the session is remote-initiated and is on Type I radio, but does
not have Tmax specified. It will not continue with the ranging session until either
Tmax is specified or until the port card is commanded into hub-initiated ranging. This
state may appear indefinitely.
14-3-23
3/J. Link quality test inroute PLR failed

Once ranging is completed, the port card will display this status instead of 3/b. if the
inroute PLR exceeded the failure threshold during link quality testing. In all other
respects, it follows the description for the 3/b. case.
3/L. Link quality test outroute PLR failed

outroute PLR exceeded the failure threshold during link quality testing. In all other
respects, it follows the description for the 3/b. case.
3/o. Link quality test inroute and outroute PLR failed

Once ranging is completed, the port card will display this status instead of 3/b. if both
the inroute and outroute PLRs exceeded their failure thresholds during link quality
testing. In all other respects, it follows the description for the 3/b. case.
3/P. Requesting deallocation of the session from the DAP

At this time, the port card is ready to end a remote-initiated session and is requesting
to be removed as session owner for the ranging inroute. It will constantly request
deallocation until the port card is removed as session owner for the ranging inroute.
Session ownership for an inroute may be specified on the INRT DEF VOC screen.
3/r. Lost transmission phase loop lock

Once the port card has received transmission phase loop lock once, it is an abort
condition if it ever loses it after that. If this happens, check the connection from the
Digital Interface Unit (DIU) to the radio.
3/U. Ranging process exceeded timeout period

If the entire ranging process, not including requesting allocation for a remote-initiated
session, takes longer than 3 minutes, the port card will abort the session. This state is
strictly an aborted state.
3/u. Lost at least 4 SFH in a row

If the port card lost at least 4 superframe headers (SFHs) in a row over the outroute, it
will have potentially lost information posted in the ranging fields and will abort the
session. If this happens, check the outroute connection from the Digital Interface
Unit (DIU) to the radio.
3/Y. Lost in an invalid internal state

The port card’s ranging software contains many internal states that determine its
progress through the ranging process. If the software becomes lost within itself, the
session is aborted. If this happens, attempt to range again by resetting the port card.
If it still occurs, then the port card RAM boot software is faulty.
3/blank. Tracked AGC exceeded boundary values

Once ranging has completed, the port card will display this status instead of 3/b. if the
tracked AGC value from the last burst statistics collection exceeded acceptable
boundary values. This indicates that the power level is at a value beyond the
acceptable range of ±6 dB for the other than PES 5000 BCD or ±14 dB for the PES
5000 BCD, where normally this value should be within ±4 dB. In all other respects, it
follows the description of the 3/b. case. If 3/blank. occurs, check the antenna or the
BCD.
14-3-24
3/-. Tmax reached, unable to achieve value

Tmax value was reached while attempting to adjust to the desired power level. This
indicates that both the resulting burst timing offset and power level of the port card
may be invalid since the power level in the adjustment was bounded by Tmax. In all
other respects, it follows the description for the 3/b. case.
3.6.5 STATE 4 - STANDBY MODE

The standby state is entered either when the hub fails to respond to port card transmissions or upon hub
command. The port card can listen to the outroute in this case, but cannot transmit anything. The hub
operator actions that are are recognized in standby are:
• Reset DP via the VOC RDPC CNTRL screen "Reset" command. Resets this port card only.
• Reset remote site via the VOC RDPC CNTRL screen "Site Reset" command. Resets
IOC/IFM/IF and all port cards.
• Global clear standby via the VOC GENRL CNTRL screen "Reset OOS" command. This is
only looked at while in 4/3.
• Go to standby via VOC RDPC CNTRL screen "Out of Service" command. Card is already in
standby state, but could change status (i.e. reason for being in standby) if this command
arrives.
The port card remains in standby indefinitely. The only way out of standby is through a reset, but not all
resets cause the port card to leave standby. The only things which cause the port card to reset and come
out of standby are:
• Global clear standby via the VOC GENRL CNTRL screen "Reset OOS" command while in
4/3.
• Reset DP via the VOC RDPC CNTRL screen "Reset" command from hub.
• Reset site via the VOC RDPC CNTRL screen "Site Reset" command, or by turning the
remote hardware off and on.
• Switch the port card to an AC HUB or MAN HUB ranging session on the VOC INRT DEF
screen. This resets the port card from the IOC/IFM/IF.
• Change the position of the DP’s rear switch, or flip the MP’s/TP’s/CPC’s/VDPC’s debugger
DIP switch (SW 1), (not applicable for PES 5000)
Code Description
4/0. Not in standby (not used)

This is not a possible LED display, although it is listed in some documents.
4/1. Hub command while in boot code

The port card resets and enters 4/1. when the hub sends a standby command to the
port card while it is executing boot code. This most commonly occurs when a remote
transmits in a HIAM message with an ODLC address which is not shown as
configured at the hub. The solutions are to change the remote’s ODLC address to a
14-3-25
valid one (through the DIU Configuration Editor), or to make sure the remote is
configured at the VOC. It is necessary to define both the card and a remote port for
this purpose. It is not necessary to define a session.
4/2. Hub command while in operating code

This is in response to the same command as 4/1., but 4/2. is displayed when the
command arrives while the card was running its user (as opposed to boot) code. This
most commonly occurs when the operator puts a remote Out of Service from the VOC
RDPC CNTRL screen. This may also happen during a change of configuration, when
the remote is being deleted from the database.
4/3. No response to HIAM

The remote resets and enters this state when it transmits HIAMs for a timeout period
without getting any response from the Hub. The timeout is 20 minutes in
RDPC/RVPC ROMs 200054-03 and earlier (i.e., all non-MBR ROMs). In later
ROMs, the BCD in lock bits in the SFH are also used. If a BCD is locked, the card
resets and goes to 4/3. after 15 minutes of unsuccessful HIAMs. If the BCD is not
locked, the card resets after 21 minutes of unsuccessful HIAMs but does not go into
the standby state. This often happens when there is an inroute problem. Re-ranging
the remote often corrects the problem. This is discussed in more detail under 5/8..
3.6.6 STATE 5 - RAM BOOT CODE INITIALIZATION

The RAM boot code initialization state is entered when outroute sync is acquired and the RAM boot code
is present and valid in port card memory. During this state, initial communication with the hub is
performed in the form of HIAM messages transmitted to the hub from the remote. This is the first state in
the normal port card startup sequence in which transmissions from the remote occur.
Code Description
5/0. Wait for config

A port card enters this state after receiving the first poll from the IOC/IFM/IF. It exits
the state upon receiving a configuration message from the IOC/IFM/IF. The
configuration is requested by the port card in its first poll response, so the time spent
in 5/0. is extremely small. Normally the display flashes once if at all. The card resets
after 20 sec in this state. If a card stays in this state for a visible amount of time, then
something is usually wrong with the message bus side (card can get poll but cannot
request configuration). This is usually due to the presence of another port card in the
chassis which is not running. A port card without a processor or halted by an
emulator can drive the message bus transmit side so that no other card can transmit on
it.
5/1. Wait for status

The port card enters this immediately after 5/0. It is waiting for its first status
broadcast from the IOC/IFM/IF. This comes out over the IOC/IFM/IF message bus
once per polling cycle (less than a second). So this display normally flashes once if at
all. The port card will reset after 20 seconds in the 5/1. state. If a port card sticks in
this state for a noticeable amount of time, then it is usually because of an IOC-port
card ROM mismatch. Pre-MBR (200056-02 and earlier) IOCs do not send a
checksum after the status broadcast. MBR port cards expect this checksum, and will
stick in 5/1. if it is not provided. Change the IOC ROM to correct this.
14-3-26
5/2. Wait for outroute sync

A port card enters this state after 5/1. In this state, the card is waiting for the
IOC/IFM/IF to indicate that it is in sync on an ISBN network. This is signaled from
the IOC/IFM/IF to all cards by a single hardware line. With a properly configured
IOC/IFM/IF, the port card should exit this state well within about three minutes. The
port cards will reset after 1 hour in this state. If the cards spend more than about 3
minutes in this state, then something may be wrong. Although there are many
reasons for not gaining proper outroute sync, here is a list of some common causes:
• IOC/IFM/IF has wrong outroute frequency in its EEPROM
configuration.
• IOC/IFM/IF has wrong outroute carrier ID in its EEPROM configuration.
• Antenna not pointed correctly.
• Radio equipment not properly cabled and connected.
• Hub not sending outroute signal.
• Cannot receive outroute due to bad weather.
5/3. Waiting for SFH
This state is entered from 5/2. when the IOC/IFM/IF indicates that it is in sync. In
this state, the port card is waiting to receive a superframe header (SFH) over the
outroute. The card resets after 10 minutes in this state. Since a SFH comes every
360ms, this state is normally exited within about 1/3 of a second, so this display
normally flashes once if at all. If this display is seen for a long period of time, then
something may be wrong with the port card outroute hardware. This could be detected
by running diagnose mode.
5/4. Wait for correct outroute carrier ID

The port card enters this state after 5/3. when it receives its first superframe header. If
the card is in sync on the right network, the time spent in this state is very slight.
However, the card waits in this state if the carrier ID of the SFH just received does
not match the carrier ID in the IOC/IFM/IF configuration message. This is indicated
to the IOC/IFM/IF by the port card in its IOC/IFM/IF poll response. The IOC/IFM/IF
has a timeout of 5 seconds in this state. If the IOC/IFM/IF does not see the card
indicate correct network in its poll response within 5 seconds of asserting the sync
signal to the port cards, the IOC/IFM/IF assumes that it is in sync on an incorrect PES
network, and because of this, resumes outroute scanning. This rapidly causes loss of
sync on the incorrect network, which causes the port cards to return to the 5/2. state.
It is not unusual for the port card to pass through several of these five-second 5/4.
periods while searching for sync on the correct network, but if the port card stays in
5/2. through 5/4. indefinitely, then something is usually wrong. See 5/2. for a list of
the common reasons for inability to gain outroute sync.
5/5. Wait for "network online bit"

The port card enters this state after 5/4. If the network online bit in the SFH is on, the
time spent in this state is very slight. The card waits in this state if the online bit is
down. The port card resets after a total of 10 minutes in 5/5. and 5/6. [pre-MBR], or
10 minutes in 5/5., 5/6., and 5/h. [MBR]. The network online bit is controlled by the
Network Control Cluster (NCC) and may be down during NCC initialization (after an
NCC reset or redundancy switchover). Normally this lasts at most 5 minutes. If the
card remains in this state for longer, the problem may be:
14-3-27
• System Interface Cluster (SIC) not running

• System Control Processor (SCP) not running
• Network status (controlled by NET START screen on VOC) set too low.
5/6. Wait for IOC/IFM/IF inroute
This state is entered after 5/5. when the network online bit is on (or after 5/h. on an
MBR ROM). A transmit/receive port card waits in this state for the IOC/IFM/IF to
tune to an inroute and for the transmit phase lock loops to become locked. A wait of
60-180 seconds in this state is normal since the TX PLL 1 takes about that long to
become locked. The port card resets after a total of 10 minutes in 5/5. and 5/6.
[pre-MBR], or 10 minutes in 5/5., 5/6., and 5/h. [MBR]. If this condition persists for
more than about 180 seconds, it is probably not caused by the TX PLL, but rather by
the IOC/IFM/IF not tuning to any inroute. This usually happens when there is no
enabled inroute available to tune to at this remote’s data rate. The available inroutes
are indicated in the SFH in service inroutes bits for each data rate. If none is online,
then either no BCDs are configured at the remote’s data rate, or the BCDs are not
responding to SIC polls. Most common solutions are:
1. Check the transmit data rate of the remote to make sure it is correct.
2. Check that the BCDs are configured and plugged in at the hub.
5/8. and 5/9. Wait to transmit a HIAM to hub, Wait for response to HIAM
The port card transitions to this state from 5/6.. In state 5/8., the remote is waiting a
random amount of time (0 to 8 seconds) to transmit a HIAM message. At the end of
the time, the card transmits the message and goes to 5/9.. The card remains in 5/9. for
one second, then goes back to 5/8.. This process continues until a timeout expires or
a response is received. If a card is transmitting to a locked BCD, the HIAM is usually
heard within a few transmissions. When transmitting to an unlocked BCD, the card
may wait in the 5/8. and 5/9. states for up to 21 minutes.
For an explanation of the timeouts, see the 4/3. state. If HIAMs are not received by
the hub within a reasonable amount of time, something is probably wrong with the
inroute side of the port card. Explaining how to diagnose this is beyond the scope of
this section, but here are the most common causes:
• Timing Offset in the IOC/IFM/IF configuration is incorrect. Remote
needs to be ranged. This is the most common reason.
• Power level in the IOC/IFM/IF is too low (so remote bursts cannot be
heard). Remote needs to be ranged.
• Inroute frequencies in IOC/IFM/IF config data are not correct. This is

automatically corrected by Releases 5 and later code, but must be
manually checked in previous releases.
• The remote’s inroute logic may be broken. This can partially be checked
by running diagnose mode.
5/A. Waiting for SCP to acknowledge NSP’s RSD request

The port card enters this state from 5/8. or 5/9. when a HIAM response is received
from the NSP. This state is only entered if the HIAM response indicates that the card
needs an RSD. When the NSP sends a HIAM response saying that the card needs an
14-3-28
RSD, it sends an RSD request to the SCP at the same time. The SCP sends an
acknowledge to the remote in response to this. This normally arrives quickly so 5/A.
flashes on the LED once if at all. If it takes longer, a problem may exist at the hub.
Often this will occur if the SCP is not running or not communicating with the SIC.
It is also possible for the port card to stick in this state if the ack is not seen due to an
outroute error, but this is unlikely. The port card will timeout eventually and return to
the 5/8. state. The timeout is initially 45 seconds and is set to 135 seconds after the
10th try.
5/b. Waiting for RSD

A transmit/receive port card enters this state after 5/A. when it receives an SCP ack to
an RSD request. A receive-only card enters this state directly after 5/5.. In either case
the card is waiting for its RSD to arrive over the outroute from the SCP. For a
transmit-capable port card, the RSD is about to be sent from the hub when this state is
entered, so this state should not last very long (unless the card missed the RSD for
some reason).
For receive-only port cards, the wait in this state may be a long time because their
RSDs are only periodically broadcast; therefore, the cards must simply wait in this
state until their RSDs arrive. The RSD broadcast period is controlled by the NET
GENRL screen on the VOC, so receive-only port cards should not have to wait in 5/b.
any longer than the time specified on this screen.
After 21 minutes in 5/b., the port card will timeout and reset. If a receive-only card
continues to stick in 5/b., check to see that its ODLC address is correct, that the card
and the card’s port are defined at the hub, and that the card is configured as
receive-only. Also, the operator may specifically request that an RSD be sent out to a
receive-only port card via the DLL CNTRL screen on the VOC.
5/C. Wait after SCP NACK to RSD request

A port card enters this state from 5/A. if instead of receiving an ACK from the SCP,
the card receives a NACK message. This may happen if the SCP is overloaded. The
card waits for a timeout period, then goes back to the 5/8. state. The timeout is
initially 45 seconds and is increased to 135 seconds after the 10th try. This LED code
is rare.
5/c. Waiting to HIAM after event-causing reset [MBR]

This state is entered just before 5/8. if the last two resets in a row were event-causing
and occurred within the last 10 minutes. This is a safeguard to put a maximum on the
rate of HIAMs to the NSP from a port card which is in a reset loop. The card will wait
in this state for 2 minutes before continuing on to 5/8..
5/d. Waiting after a No Such File message from SCP

The port card enters this state from 5/A. if, instead of receiving an ACK from the
SCP, the card receives a No Such File message from the SCP. This indicates a
discrepancy between the NSP and SCP databases. This condition may exist
temporarily after database changes. In this state the remote is waiting for a timeout
period to pass before it returns to the 5/8. state. The timeout is initially 45 seconds
and is increased to 135 seconds after the 10th try. This LED code is rare.
14-3-29
5/H. Wait for IOC/IFM/IF to tune to inroute in group [MBR]

This state is entered just before the online state. In Release 4 MBR code, this state
ends at most 5 seconds after state 7 (i.e. 7/0., 7/1. etc.) is entered. So if state 7 takes
longer than 5 seconds, 5/H. is not seen at all. If state 7 executes quickly, 5/H. may be
seen briefly before the transition to online. The purpose is to allow adequate time
after RSD reception for the IOC/IFM/IF inroute to change. In Releases 5 and later
MBR code, this state is entered if the IOC/IFM/IF is tuned to an inroute out of this
port card’s inroute group. The IOC/IFM/IF will switch to an inroute in the remote’s
group if one is enabled, so this condition does not last for more than a fraction of a
second unless none of the inroutes in this group is enabled in the superframe header.
The inroute group of the remote is taken to be the inroute group of the remote’s home
inroute (on the VOC REM DEF screen). The inroutes in this group are listed on the
VOC INGRP LIST screen. If none of these inroutes are enabled at the remote’s data
rate (determined by the inroute in-service bits in the SFH), the remote will wait in
5/H. until this condition changes. Inroute in-service bits are discussed under the 5/6.
state. There is no timeout on this state. To get out of this state, either make the
remote’s home inroute available or change the remote’s home inroute to one which is
available.
5/h. Wait for RRD [MBR]

This state is entered after 5/5.. In this state the port card is waiting for the Remote
Reconciliation Descriptor (RRD) to be broadcast. The RRD tells the current version
number of all remote software. The port card uses this to determine whether it has the
most current downloaded software. The RRD is broadcast every 12 seconds so the
card should not wait much longer than that (it is possible for outroute data to be
corrupted occasionally so a wait of > 15 seconds is not impossible). The port card
resets after a timeout of 5 minutes in this state.
5/J. Waiting for IOC/IFM/IF to load configuration parameters (Releases 5 and later)
The port card enters this state either after receiving an RSD (in 5/b.) or after receiving
network parameters (in 7/1.). This is done only if the parameters in the
newly-received RSD or netparms did not match the IOC/IFM/IF configuration
message (which contains the parameters in IOC/IFM/IF EEPROM). During this state,
the remote is attempting to load these new parameters into the IOC/IFM/IF
EEPROM. At the end of this process the IOC/IFM/IF will reset (and will reset all
port cards) and will come up using the new configuration parameters. The exchange
of messages is rapid so the 5/J. display is seen only briefly. The port card normally
exits this state through a hard reset provided by the IOC/IFM/IF. If this does not
happen within 5 seconds the port card times out and resets. New IOC/IFM/IF
parameters must be loaded when any of the following items are changed at the VOC
screen:
• Any card’s ODLC address in this remote
• Any inroute/outroute frequency for this network
• Modem Control Signals enabled for any card in this remote
• IOC/IFM/IF ODLC base address for remote
• Outroute carrier ID
• Boot code subtype for any card in this remote
• Addition/deletion of any card in this remote
• Transmit/receive or receive-only status for any card in this remote
14-3-30
5/L. Invalid upload parameters

This state is entered instead of 5/J. if the parameters received in the RSD or netparms
do not pass range checking. This is the same range checking described in detail under
0/E.. The RSD and netparms are supposed to be range-checked at the hub, so this is a
sanity check. If it fails, the remote displays 5/L. for five seconds, then resets.
3.6.7 STATE 6 - MAINTENANCE

In State 6 the remote is running the downloaded user code. Outroute commands are heard and obeyed.
Hub polls over the outroute are heard and responded to. No data is passed or seen over the user port.
The port card remains in this state indefinitely; there is no expected timeout period. The port card can
only exit the maintenance state through a reset. If the maintenance state was caused by a parameter
controlled from the VOC, changing that parameter will cause the remote to receive a new RSD or
network parameters and reset to get out of maintenance.
Code Description
6/0. Not used
6/1. Board type not correct

This state is entered when the board type is not correct for the type of user code
downloaded. Board type is discussed under 0/F. (for all port cards) and 0/C.
(TP/CPC/VDPC). The type of downloaded code is determined on the RDPC DEF
screen on the VOC. This LED code is most commonly caused by attempting to load
data code to an VDP or voice code to a DP. There is no timeout while in this state.
6/2. Tx/Rx type not OK for user code

This state is entered when the user code which needs to be downloaded to a
transmit-capable port card is loaded to a card which is configured as receive-only.
The transmit capability of a port card is determined on the RDPC DEF screen on the
VOC (hardware type field).
6/3. RSD parameter out of range

This state is entered when the downloaded user code notices that one of its RSD
parameters is out of range. Most of the RSD parameters are set by the port definition
screens on the VOC, e.g. RDPC SDLC, RDPC BITT, etc., along with on the RDPC
DEF and REM DEF screens. These should all be range-checked at the hub so the
remote check is a sanity check.
6/4. Netparms parameter out of range

Similar to 6/3. but checks network parameters instead of RSD parameters. Most of the
network parameters are on the NET GENRL, OUTRT DEF, INRT DEF, and INGRP
DEF screens on the VOC.
6/5. Not enough RAM

This state is entered when the user code determines that it needs more RAM to run
than is provided by the port card. RAM size can be determined by following the
procedure "How to Determine the Memory Size of a Port Card" (section 8.2 of ISBN
Remote Troubleshooting Guide).
6/6. Error during port card hardware initialization
14-3-31
This state is entered when the user code encounters a hardware error while
initializing. This should only happen when the port card contains defective hardware.
6/7. Unable to obtain connection memory for a configured port or session

There is insufficient system memory to support the number of ports and sessions in
this download.
6/8. Rear switch in BYPASS position

This state is entered when the DP rear switch is in the bypass position. For
MPs/TPs/CPCs/VDPCs, this state is entered when at least one Modem Backup PLC is
installed on the card, and the MP DIP switch 4 is in the down position or the
TP/CPC/VDPC DIP switch 8 is in the down position. During this state, the modem
backup feature is active (i.e., data passes straight from the user port to the modem port
without port card processing/intervention). Change the switch to exit the 6/8. state
and return to normal LED displays. A minor alarm is posted in this state.
6/9. Modem leads active

The VOC supports the use of the DSR, CTS, CD, and RI leads. This is controlled by
the Modem Control Signals field of the RDPC DEF screen on the VOC. For RDPCs,
when the rear switch is in the normal position, the software monitors the status of all
four of these pins on the diagnostic port. When the same pins specified on the DP
DEF screen for that card all become asserted, the port card will reset and proceed to
the 6/9. state. This state will persist as long as the modem leads are held active. A
minor alarm is posted in this state. For MPs/TPs/CPCs/VDPCs, the case is similar as
long as a modem backup PLC is installed and the switch (mentioned above under the
6/8. state) is in the up position. If the switch is switched down, 6/8. will be displayed.
If all configured lines go active, then 6/9. will be displayed. If only some configured
lines go active (and the switch is up), 6/9. will not be displayed.
During this state, the modem backup feature is active (i.e., data passes straight from
the user port to the modem port without port card processing/intervention). This state
will persist on a DP as long as the appropriate modem leads(s) are asserted on the
diagnostic port, and will persist on an MP/TP/CPC/VDPC as long as the appropriate
modem lead(s) are asserted on at least one of the Modem Backup PLCs.
6/A. IOC/IFM/IF not on inroute in group at user code init

The port card enters this state when the IOC/IFM/IF is not tuned to an inroute in its
inroute group at power-up. With MBR ROMs, this condition is detected by the boot
code, which waits in state 5/H., so this should only happen with older ROMs. It
persists as long as no inroute in this remote’s inroute group is in service. This was
discussed in more detail under 5/H..
6/b. Debug Port Unavailable

Applies to MPs only. The ODLC environment goes to standby if it receives an RSD
indicating that port number 9 is to be used, but port 9 is already being used as a
debugger port. Releases 5.4 and later do not support the use of port 9, so this code
should never occur with them.
6/C. Alarm status state on ADB server or client

ADB does a validation of parameters and has determined that a/some parameters are
invalid. This state can occur if an ADB port is defined without a phone number. It can
also occur if ADB is enabled but ADB parameters don’t exist or are incorrect.
14-3-32
6/blank. Normal
This state is entered when the port card "desired state" parameter is set to
"maintenance" instead of "in-service" on the RDPC DEF screen. This state may also
occur if the port card is configured with no ports (even if the RDPC DEF "desired
state" is not "maintenance"). A minor alarm is posted in this state.
3.6.8 STATE 7 - DOWNLOAD USER CODE

During this state the RAM boot code is still running. It attempts to download network parameters and/or
user code while in this state.
There is a 20 minute timeout on the entire state 7 (excluding 7/0., which has a separate 15 minute
timeout). If the timeout occurs, the port card resets.
Code Description
7/0. Wait for RRD

For MBR ROMs, this state is very brief and is rarely seen. For earlier (non-MBR)
ROMs, this state is entered after an RSD is received. During this state the port card is
waiting for an RRD (RRD reception is discussed under 5/h.). There is a 15 minute
timeout on this state, after which the port card resets.
7/1. Wait for Network Parameters (Netparms) or user code

This state is entered at different times in Release 4 and Releases 5 and later. This is
discussed where the startup sequence is described. During this state, a
transmit-capable port card is waiting for the network parameters to be broadcast from
the hub. The broadcast period is controlled by the NET GENRL screen on the VOC.
The network parameters themselves can also be sent manually via the DLL CNTRL
screen on the VOC.
Once the network parameters have been received, a receive-only card will accept user
code packets while in this state (states 7/2. and 7/3. do not appear on a receive-only
card). If any code packets are received once the network parameters have been
received, the receive-only card will go to the 7/4. state. A transmit-capable port card
will proceed to the 7/2. state once netparms are received (and if user code is needed).
7/2. Request for user code

This state is entered by a transmit-capable port card when it needs to transmit a code
request to the hub. In this state the card is waiting for a timeout to pass. The timeout
period is influenced by many factors but has a maximum of about 135 seconds. At the
end of this timeout, the card transmits the code request on the inroute. In the event
that the code is not completely downloaded successfully after the first request, state
7/2. may be re-entered any number of times (subject to the 20 minute total time in
state 7). User code may be sent to receive-only port cards via the DLL CNTRL
screen on the VOC. If all cards in a remote go between 7/2. and 7/4. many times and
do not progress to the online state, this may indicate a noisy or low level outroute
signal.
14-3-33
7/3. Wait to re-request

This state is entered after state 7/2. after the user code request is sent. This state has a
timeout which varies but has a maximum of 135 seconds. At the end of this timeout
the card returns to 7/2. In this state the port card is waiting for any of the following
from the hub:
• User code packet
• No such file message
• Wait command
• ACK from SCP
• NACK from SCP
7/4. Receiving user code packets
The port card (transmit-capable or receive-only) enters this state when it receives a
user code packet over the outroute. In this state, the card waits for more user code
packets until all are received. If no packets arrive for a timeout period (about 30
seconds), a transmit-capable card will return to 7/2., and a receive-only card will
return to 7/1.. State 7/4. may persist for several minutes, depending on the size of the
file being downloaded. There is no timeout on this state as long as packets are being
received (other than the overall 20 minute timer).
7/5. Received NACK from SCP

The port card enters this state from 7/3. when it receives a NACK from the SCP in
response to a user code request. This happens only rarely when the SCP is
overloaded. In this state the card is waiting for a timeout to expire. The timeout is
initially 45 seconds and is increased to 135 seconds after several tries. When the
timeout expires, the port card returns to the 7/2. state.
7/6. Received NSF from SCP

The port card enters this state from 7/3. when it receives a No Such File message
from the SCP in response to a user code request. This happens only rarely when the
SCP and NSP databases do not match. This situation can persist for a short time
during changes to the database. In this state the card is waiting for a timeout to expire.
The timeout is initially 45 seconds and is increased to 135 seconds after several tries.
When the timeout expires, the port card returns to the 7/2. state.
3.6.9 STATE 8 - RECEIVE RAM BOOT CODE

State 8 only appears in MBR ROMs (DP/VDP, "RDPC/RVPC" 200054-04 and later ROMs, and all
MP/TP/CPC/VDPC/IPC ROMs).
This state is analogous to State 5 and uses roughly the same status codes. A state code of 8 is displayed
when the code is running out of ROM on the port card, whereas a state code of 5 is displayed when the
code is running out of the downloaded RAM boot code. The purpose of the ROM code running during
state 8 is to load the RAM boot code and transfer control to it.
14-3-34
3.6.9.1 DP, VDP, MPC, TPC, CPC, VDPC. This subsection describes the State 8 LED codes for DPs,
VDPs, MPCs, TPCs, CPCs, and VDPCs.
Code Description
8/0., 8/1., 8/2. Init codes
8/3., 8/4., and 8/5. These are analogous to State 5 codes (i.e. 5/0. through 5/5.). The only difference is
that the code is running from ROM when the 8 state is displayed and running from
RAM when the 5 state is displayed.
8/E. Wait for RAM boot code

The port card enters this state after state 8/5.. In this state the card is waiting for the
RAM boot code to arrive over the outroute. The broadcast period for the RAM boot
code is determined by the NET GENRL screen on the VOC. RAM boot code can
also be sent by the operator from the DLL CNTRL screen on the VOC (Releases 5
and later). Sending this code should quickly cause the remote to go to 8/F.. The type
of boot code sent (STD or TST) must match the RDPC DEF Remote boot code
subtype screen parameter. The port card resets after a 20 minute timeout in states 8/E.
through 8/blank..
8/F. Receiving RAM boot code packets

This state is entered from state 8/E. when the first boot code packet arrives. In this
state the port card is waiting for more boot code packets. If no packets arrive for a 5
second period, state 8/blank. is entered. As long as boot code packets come in there is
no timeout in state 8/F. other than the overall 20 minute timeout. The 8/F. state
should normally persist for about 30 seconds to download the entire RAM boot code.
When all packets are in, state 5/5. is entered.
8/blank. Stopped getting RAM boot code

The port card enters this state from 8/F. when boot code packets stop arriving for a 5
second period (and not all packets are in). In this state the card is waiting for more
boot code packets. There is no timeout on this state other than the overall 20 minute
timer. This state most commonly occurs when either:
• An outroute packet was missed during the RAM boot code loading
• The remote came in sync part way through a RAM boot code broadcast
and therefore missed the first packets
The next boot code broadcast should occur before the timeout, so the port card will
usually receive the missed packet(s) and then proceed out of this state.
3.6.9.2 IPC. This subsection describes the State 8 LED codes for IPCs. Note that there is a 6-hour
timeout for the IPCs to receive all the RAM boot code, in the other words, the remote has 6 hours to stay
in state 8, a reset occurs when the timeout expires.
Code Description
8/2. Wait for outroute sync

IPCs enter this state after sync lost or after power up if RAM is incorrect. In this
state, the card is waiting for the IOC ASIC to indicate that it is in sync on an ISBN
network. This is signaled from the IOC ASIC by a single hardware line. With a
14-3-35
properly configured IOC ASIC and IPC, the IPCs should exit this state well within
about three minutes. If the cards spend more than about 3 minutes in this state, then
something may be wrong. Although there are many reasons for not gaining proper
outroute sync, here is a list of some common causes.
• Wrong outroute frequency is stored in the EEPROM.
• Wrong outroute carrier ID is stored in the EEPROM.
• Antenna not pointed correctly.
• Radio equipment not properly cabled and connected.
• Hub not sending outroute signal.
• Cannot receive outroute due to bad weather.
• No active port cards configured or installed.
Note that if sync lost happens, the IPCs will not reset like the previous cards, instead,
it will recover and resynchronize to the outroute and go back to 8/2. state.
8/3. Waiting for SFH

This state is entered from 8/2. when the IOC ASIC indicates that it is in sync. In this
state, the IPC is waiting to receive a superframe header (SFH) over the outroute.
Since a SFH comes every 360 ms, this state is normally exited within about 1/3 of a
second, so this display normally flashes once if at all. If this display is seen for a long
period of time, then something may be wrong with the port card outroute hardware.
This could be detected by running diagnose mode.
8/4. Wait for correct outroute carrier ID

IPCs enter this state after 8/3. when it receives its first superframe header. If the card
is in sync on the right network, the time spent in this state is very slight. However,
the card waits in this state if the carrier ID of the SFH just received does not match
the carrier ID in the EEPROM configuration. This is indicated to the IOC/IFM/IF by
the port card in its IOC/IFM/IF poll response. If the IPC does not see the card
indicate correct network in its poll response, the IOC/IFM/IF assumes that it is in
sync on an incorrect PES network, and because of this, resumes outroute scanning.
This rapidly causes loss of sync on the incorrect network, which causes the port cards
to return to the 8/2. state.
It is not unusual for the IPC to pass through several of these 8/4. periods while
searching for sync on the correct network, but if the port card stays in 8/2. through
8/4. indefinitely, then something is usually wrong. See 8/2. for a list of the common
reasons for inability to gain outroute sync.
8/5. Wait for "network online bit"

IPCs enter this state after any state 8 except 8/2., 8/3. and 8/4.. If the network online
bit in the SFH is on, the time spent in this state is very slight. The card waits in this
state if the online bit is down. The network online bit is controlled by the Network
Control Cluster (NCC) and may be down during NCC initialization (after an NCC
reset or redundancy switchover). Normally this lasts at most 5 minutes. If the card
remains in this state for longer, the problem may be:
• System Interface Cluster (SIC) not running
• System Control Processor (SCP) not running
• Network status (controlled by NET START screen on VOC) set too low
14-3-36
8/d. In transmit test mode

The remote enters this state after 8/5. in transmit test mode. In this mode, the remote
listens to the outroute but does not download any RAM boot code.
8/E. Wait for RAM boot code

IPCs enter this state after state 8/4. or 8/5.. In this state the card is waiting for the
RAM boot code to arrive over the outroute. The broadcast period for the RAM boot
code is determined by the NET GENRL screen on the VOC. RAM boot code can
also be sent by the operator from the DLL CNTRL screen on the VOC (Releases 5
and later). Sending this code should quickly cause the remote to go to 8/F.. The type
of boot code sent (STD or TST) must match the RDPC DEF Remote boot code
subtype screen parameter.
8/F. Receiving RAM boot code packets

This state is entered from state 8/E. normally when the first boot code packet arrives.
It is possible to enter this state from state 8/blank. when the download process
resumes from the last incomplete download. In this state the port card is waiting for
more boot code packets. If no packets arrive for a 4-second period, state 8/blank. is
entered. As long as boot code packets come in there is no timeout in state 8/F. other
than the overall 6-hour timeout. The 8/F. state should normally persist for about 30
seconds to download the entire RAM boot code. When all packets are in, state 5 is
entered.
8/blank. Stopped getting RAM boot code while downloading or achieved sync after sync
lost from the previous incomplete download.
IPCs enter this state either from 8/F. or 8/2.. Normally, the port card enters this state
from 8/F. if when boot code packets stop arriving for a 4-second period (and not all
packets are in). In this state, the card is waiting for more boot code packets. This
state most commonly occurs when either:
• An outroute packet was missed during the RAM boot code loading
• The remote came in sync part way through a RAM boot code broadcast
and therefore missed the first packets
The next boot code broadcast should occur before the 6-hour timeout, so the port card
will usually receive the missed packet(s) and then proceed out of this state.
Another way to get into this state is when sync is lost while 8/blank. is flashing.
IPCs will do a warm start of the outroute (note that this is not a reset), start from 8/2.
again and then stay in 8/blank. to wait for the next boot code broadcast. When the
boot code packets come in, 8/F. will be displayed.
8/H. RAM boot code is present in installation mode

This state only occurs in installation mode. It occurs after the RAM boot code is
downloaded successfully or the RAM boot code is already present since power up.
The IPCs will just sit in this state unless sync is lost or until switched out of
installation mode.
14-3-37
3.6.10 STATE 9 - TRANSIENT SYNC LOSS

This state is entered when a loss of outroute superframe synchronization is seen after the remote port card
had been executing the downloaded user code.
This state is limited by the transient sync loss timeout, controlled by the NET GENRL screen on the
VOC. If this timeout expires, the port card resets, comes back up, and attempts to regain outroute sync.
Code Description
9/0. In sync, verifying carrier ID

This state is exactly analogous to 5/4. and the same timeouts apply. However, 9/0. is
not as common since the port card was in sync on the correct network before losing
sync. To get in sync on an incorrect network (which could be the case when this code
appears) requires a sync loss of sufficient length to allow the receive hardware to drift
off the outroute frequency and to have the IOC/IFM/IF resume outroute frequency
scanning (about 10 minutes).
9/1. In sync, waiting for TX PLL

This state is entered after 9/0. after the carrier ID is verified. A transmit/receive port
card waits in this state for the transmit phase lock loops to become locked. A wait of
60-180 seconds in this state is normal since the TX PLL 1 takes about that long to
become locked.
9/blank. Transient sync loss

This state is entered when the downloaded user code loses outroute sync. In this state
the port card is looking for the sync signal from the IOC/IFM/IF. When this signal
goes active, the card goes to 9/0.. The timeout on this state is the transient sync loss
timeout, which can be set on the VOC NET GENRL screen.
3.6.11 STATE A - ADB CLIENT INITIATED AUTOMATICALLY

State A codes pertain to client-initiated Automatic Dial Backup (ADB). (Otherwise, the client and server
port cards will remain in blank/blank..)
Code Description
A/C. ADB Client initiated automatically by space link monitor software.

ADB session is active.
A/L. ADB Client initiated automatically by space link monitor software.

ADB link setup in progress.
14-3-38
3.6.12 STATE C - ADB SERVER

State C codes pertain to the Automatic Dial Backup (ADB) server. (Otherwise, the client and server port
cards will remain in blank/blank..)
Code Description
C/C. The ADB Server has an active ADB session with a client.
3.6.13 STATE F - ADB CLIENT INITIATED BY HUB

State F codes pertain to the ADB client when ADB is initiated by the hub. (Otherwise, the client and
server port cards will remain in blank/blank..)
Code Description
F/C. ADB Client initiated by hub operator command.

F/L. ADB Client initiated by hub operator command.

3.6.14 STATE H - ADB CLIENT INITIATED BY HW FAILURE

State H indicates an ADB client state initiated by a hardware failure.
Code Description
H/C. ADB Client initiated by hardware failure

H/L. ADB Client initiated by hardware failure

3.6.15 STATE blank - ONLINE

State blank is the normal operating state of the remote. In this state, the downloaded user code is running
and performing its protocol-specific functions with the user equipment. Minor alarms14 are posted by all
blank states except
• blank/0. and
• blank/blank.
An event is posted with each minor alarm.
Code Description
blank/0. Waiting for SFH sync

The port card enters this state when it initially begins running the downloaded user
code. In this state the card must wait for a superframe header for internal timing
14The remotes do not post PES system major alarms. If a remote has not responded to several polls, it is declared "Not
Responding" and becomes purple (default color) on the map. If a remote does not respond for 5 minutes (default time), it is
declared "Dead" and becomes red (default color) on the map.
14-3-39
reasons. Since a SFH arrives every 360ms, this state is very short. If this state persists
for more than 3 seconds, the port card resets.
blank/1. Ethernet self test failure

The TP, while attempting to run the hardware self test on the Ethernet PLC, either
experienced a failure or failed to detect self test completion in the allotted time.
FIM Download
The FIM is downloaded by the remote (or hub) after the remote 186 processor (or hub
processor) has been downloaded and completed initialization. The FIM is
downloaded only at initial power-up or when new FIM code is part of a build that is
downloaded over the spacelink. If the remote is just reset, the FIM will keep its code
and no download is necessary.
If a FIM download is necessary: The remote will download from the spacelink
("7/4."), then go to "blank/blank.", for approximately 8 seconds to run through its
initialization. Then it will download the FIM and show "blank/1." on the led display.
When the download is complete, "blank/blank." will again appear.15
blank/2. Comm-server not responding

The comm-server connected to the Ethernet PLC of the TP has ceased responding. A
minor alarm has been reported to the hub.
blank/3. Comm-server reporting a minor alarm

The Comm-server connected to the Ethernet PLC of the TP is reporting a minor alarm
due to some malfunction of itself or its clients. A minor alarm has been reported to
the hub.
blank/4. Token-Ring minor alarm

The Token-Ring driver on the Token-Ring PLC attached to the TP has detected a
cabling or ring failure at the remote site which requires user intervention. Various
problems can result in this minor alarm. A "minor-alarm" event is reported to the
hub, identifying the nature of the problem. Refer to the ISBN Event Messages Guide
for a description of the particular problem.
blank/b. No response from user device

The user device is not responding. (currently only implemented for EJPS.)
blank/C. Configuration problem

Remote sanity check failed on RSD configuration. (Only implemented by some
protocols that can continue some operations or other ports on the remote card can
continue, in spite of the mismatch. Other protocols cause a remote reset because of
the severity of the configuration mismatch.) Examples:
• Mismatch between LAN PLC type installed on TP and software
configuration.
• No port or session memory available for LANs.
15Likewise, the hub will get downloaded and the LED will show "2." The hub will run through initialization and then
download the FIM by displaying "1" during the download. When the download is complete the LED will return to "2."
14-3-40
blank/d. Internal hardware problem

There is a problem with the remote hardware that prevents implementing the current
configuration. Examples:
• LAN PLC not present.
• Insufficient LAN RAM.
blank/E. External hardware fault
The user device is not connected to the remote or has a problem. (currently only
implemented for EJPS - DTR not asserted)
blank/blank. Online
The blank LED code state is entered when all code is in memory; no alarms have
occurred; and outroute and SFH sync are attained. This is the normal operating state
of the remote, during which it can pass user data. There is no maximum time in this
state. In ADB, this means the Server/Client is ready, but no ADB Session is active.
3.7 ALTERNATE DISPLAY MODE ON THE MP, TP, CPC, AND VDPC
The MP, TP, CPC, and VDPC are capable of displaying a different set of LED codes that provide
additional information if the alternate display switch (dipswitch 3, labeled SW2 on MP, SW3 on TP,
CPC, or VDPC) is flipped down. When the switch is in the up position, normal LED displays will be
shown; when it is in the down position, the alternate display mode will be activated (figure 3-1).
In alternate display mode, the card cycles through a series of LED codes. At the beginning of each cycle,
a special delimiter character is displayed (three horizontal bars).
NOTE
Before throwing the dipswitch, be sure to record the "normal" LED
display being shown. The meaning of the alternate display also depends
on which normal code was displayed BEFORE dipswitch 3 was flipped
down.
3.7.1 ALTERNATE STATE 0 LED CODES

In State 0 (port card in shutdown), "0/<something>." appears as the normal LED display. Additional self
test information appears in the alternate display mode. The following are displayed at one second
intervals while in the alternate display mode:
• Three bars
• PLC type code with no dot. (Refer to PLC Types in table 3-1.)
• Fault code with a dot. (Refer to Fault Types below.)
14-3-41
SW0
SW1
SW2
RST
SW0 UP = normal mode, software debugger is disabled and diagnostic
port modem control lines de-asserted.
SW0 DOWN = alternate mode, software debugger is enabled and the modem
control lines are asserted. If the RTS and DTR lines are looped (pins 6 and 20
on the DB25 diagnostic port) then the start up breakpoint is encountered.
SW1 UP = voice port diagnostics not run (no VP PBX or VP TEL connected)
SW1 DOWN = voice port diagnostics run (VP PBX or VP TEL connected)
SW2 UP = normal LED display mode
SW2 DOWN = alternate LED display mode, a special delimiter (3 horizontal bars)
indicates the beginning of a cycle of alternate MP LED codes. The meaning of the
alternate display varies depending on the normal LED state and status.
RST = reset
PES2-569
Figure 3-1. Multiport Card (MP) DIP Switch
14-3-42
3.7.1.1 PLC Types. The PLC type is the type of PLC board that failed the test. If not indicated in table
3-1, the PLC types apply to all four types of port cards (MP/TP/CPC/VDPC).
Table 3-1. PLC Types
Code Description
0 RS232 PLC type

1 RS422/485 PLC type
2 V.35 PLC
3 Modem Backup PLC
4 RS232-compatible PLC
5 RS232-compatible PLC
6 Unknown
7 Unknown
8 Unknown
9 Unknown
A Unknown
B Not assigned
C Not assigned
D Not assigned
E Not assigned
F This fault is not associated with a PLC. This code
means that the current failure is not PLC-related.
H (TP only) Ethernet PLC 10BASE2 with Address Filtering
h (TP only) Ethernet PLC 10BASET with Address Filtering
r (TP only) Token Ring PLC without Source Routing Accelerator
U (TP only) Token Ring PLC with Source Routing Accelerator
blank (TP only) Ethernet PLC 10BASE2 without Address Filtering
3.7.1.2 Fault Types. The fault type depends on the type of port card (MP, TP, CPC, or VDPC) and
what the port card was displaying before dipswitch 3 was flipped down, as shown below.
14-3-43
3.7.1.2.1 MP State 0 Alternate Displays. This subsection describes the State 0 alternate display codes
for MPs.
Normal Alternate
Display Display Description
------- --------- -----------
0/0. No meaning associated with the alternate display
0/1. No meaning associated with the alternate display
0/2. F/1. Internal timer crystals test failed

F/2. Internal timer t2 test failed
0/3. F/0. Nondestructive RAM test failure

Memory configuration type 0: 256K/128K
F/1. Nondestructive RAM test failure
0/4. F/1. Duart Ch A status error

F/2. Duart Ch A data compare error
F/3. Duart Ch B status error
F/4. Duart Ch B data compare error
0/5. F/1. Internal PIC read/write registers error

F/2. Internal PIC no internal interrupt request error
F/3. Internal PIC no internal interrupt occurred error
0/6. F/1. External PIC 0 register error

F/2. External PIC 1 interrupt generation for Duart error
0/7. F/1. Internal DMAC register error

F/2. Internal DMAC mem-to-mem move error
0/9. F/1. Address filter RAM error: a 1 was written, 0 was read back
F/2. Address filter RAM error: a 0 was written, 1 was read back
0/A. F/1. STC register error

F/2. STC decrement test error
F/3. STC countdown test error
F/4. STC countup test error
F/5. STC set toggle output test error
F/6. STC toggle count error
14-3-44
0/b. F/0. Diagnose mode RAM test failure

F/1. Diagnose mode RAM test failure
0/E. No meaning associated with alternate display
0/F. No meaning associated with alternate display
0/c., 0/h., PLC error.

0/H., 0/J. (<type> is described in a previous section):
<PLC type>/1. Illegal PLC type (undefined)
<PLC type>/2. RS232 DMA register error
<PLC type>/3. RS232 SCC register error
<PLC type>/4. RS232 SDLC SCC interrupt error
<PLC type>/5. RS232 SDLC DMA count error
<PLC type>/6. RS232 SDLC DMA interrupt error
<PLC type>/7. RS232 SDLC data error
3.7.1.2.2 TP/CPC/VDPC State 0 Alternate Displays. This subsection describes the State 0 alternate
display codes for TPs, CPCs, and VDPCs. The codes have been separated based on card type, where
applicable.
Normal Alternate
------- --------- -----------
0/0. No meaning associated with alternate display
0/1. F/1. 386 failed on-board test (TP only)

F/2. CPU instruction test failed
0/2. F/1. Register read/write test failed (CPC/VDPC only)

F/2. Timer count test failed (CPC/VDPC only)
0/3. F/0. Nondestructive RAM test failure (TP only)

Memory configuration type 0: 1Meg-64K
F/1. Nondestructive RAM test failure (TP only)
14-3-45

F/7. Nondestructive RAM test failure (TP/CPC/VDPC)
0/4. F/1. External DMAC status registers not correct

F/2. External DMAC register write/read-back test error
TP only:
0/5. F/1. Programmable Interval Timer (PIT) status
register test error
F/2. PIT status null count test error
F/3. PIT count comparison test error
F/4. PIT timer1 count test error
CPC/VDPC only:
0/5. F/1. DUART safety stop occurred
F/2. CPU clock too fast
F/3. CPU clock in middle
F/4. CPU clock too slow
TP only:
0/6. F/1. Refresh test status error
F/2. Refresh test T0/T2 consistency error
F/3. Refresh test clock rate error
0/7. F/1. Duart Ch A status error

F/2. Duart Ch A data compare error
F/3. Duart Ch B status error
F/4. Duart Ch B data compare error
0/8. F/1. Address filter RAM error: a 0 was written,

a 1 was read back
F/2. Address filter RAM error: a 1 was written,
a 0 was read back
TP only:
0/9. F/1. Master PIC register error
F/2. Master PIC IRR fault
F/3. Master PIC mask fault
F/4. Master PIC ISR0 fault
F/5. Master PIC ISR1 fault
F/6. Master PIC int7 fault
CPC/VDPC only:
0/9. F/1. Register read/write test error
F/2. No internal request occurred
F/3. No internal interrupt occurred
TP only:
0/A. F/1. Slave PIC register error
F/2. Slave PIC duart test error
F/3. Slave PIC no IRR set for timer1 error
F/4. Slave PIC IRR not cleared for timer1 error
F/5. Slave PIC masking error
F/6. Slave PIC ISR set fault
F/7. Slave PIC ISR clear fault
F/8. Slave PIC no timer1 interrupt error
F/9. Slave PIC no IRR set for timer2 error
14-3-46
F/A. Slave PIC IRR not cleared for timer2 error

F/b. Slave PIC no timer2 interrupt error
CPC/VDPC only:
0/A. F/1. Slave PIC register test failure
F/2. Slave PIC DUART interrupt failure
0/b. F/0. Diagnose mode RAM test failure (TP only)

F/1. Diagnose mode RAM test failure (TP only)
F/7. Diagnose mode RAM test failure (TP/CPC/VDPC)
0/d. No meaning associated with alternate display
0/E. F/0. One of the following errors has occurred:

ODLC base address 0
bad otrt freq data
b7 set in one of PC #1-7’s configuration bytes
illegal b0-b1 settings for PC config bytes
illegal ODLC PC address
Note: on CPC/VDPC, no alternate display appears, but these
reasons still apply.
0/c., 0/H., PLC error (0/c. and 0/H. apply to TP/CPC/VDPC; 0/h. to TP)
or 0/h. (<PLC type> is in a previous section):
3.7.2 ALTERNATE STATE 2 LED CODES

In State 2, the port card is in diagnose mode. Additional diagnostic information for MPs/TPs/
CPCs/VDPCs appears in the alternate display mode (i.e., when DIP switch 3 is in the down position).
The following are displayed at one second intervals while in the alternate display mode:
• Three bars
• PLC type code with no dot. (See PLC Types in table 3-1.)
• Fault code with a dot. (See Fault Types below).
14-3-47
3.7.2.1 PLC Types. The PLC type is the type of PLC board that failed the test. If not indicated in table
3-1, the PLC types apply to all four types of port cards (MP/TP/CPC/VDPC).
3.7.2.2 Fault Types. The fault type depends on the diagnose code. The type of fault depends on the
type of port card and what the normal display was before the dipswitch was flipped down:
3.7.2.2.1 MP State 2 Alternate Displays. This subsection describes the State 2 alternate display codes
for MPs.
Normal Alternate
------- --------- -----------
2/0., 2/1., No meaning is associated with alternate display
2/2., 2/3.,
2/4., 2/5.,
and 2/9.
2/6. F/1. External DMAC status register error

F/2. External DMAC register read/write error
2/7. F/1. Diagnose mode outroute test indicates:

No outroute sync error
F/2. Diagnose mode outroute test indicates:
Test allowing all outroute packets
into card failed
Test allowing all but group address packets failed
Test allowing all but data packets failed
Test for outroute packet miss indication failed
Test for outroute fault indication failed
2/8. F/1. Diagnose mode loopback test (PC to

inroute to outroute to PC) indicates:
Inroute-to-outroute data comparison failed
F/2. Diagnose mode loopback test (PC to
CRC error(s) found while running test
Inroute or outroute interrupt stayed
pending after service
2/A. F/1. PLL test (sysclk vs PLL clk) indicates PLL

clock too fast
F/2. PLL test (sysclk vs PLL clk) indicates PLL
clock too slow
2/b. F/1. RXSOF test saw PIC0 ISR bit stuck

F/2. RXSOF test generated no interrupt on PIC0
2/C. F/1. The ECM has failed to respond to a poll

F/2. The Voice Codec Module is detecting CRC
14-3-48
errors in its received data

F/3. The Voice Codec Module is either not
receiving or not sending its data
F/4. The Voice Codec Module has defective RAM
F/5. The Voice Codec Module is not receiving
its byte clock
F/6. The Voice Codec Module has detected a
checksum error in its prom
F/7. No Outroute packets have been received
for time period x
F/8. The Num_1K_Bytes received from the exec
is too small
F/9. The VCM is not toggling its "I’m alive" bit
F/A. No voice packet from the hub has arrived in time n
F/b. Unable to detect offhook in the analog circuit
F/C. VCM loopback failed
F/d. ECM loopback failed
F/E. CCM loopback failed
F/F. Looped digital milliwatt test failed
F/blank. Idle channel noise test failed
2/d., 2/E.,
2/F., or 2/blank
3.7.2.2.2 TP, CPC, and VDPC State 2 Alternate Displays. This subsection describes the State 2
alternate display codes for TPs, CPCs, and VDPCs.
Normal Alternate
------- --------- -----------
2/0., 2/1., No meaning associated with alternate display
2/2., 2/3.,
2/4., and
2/9.
2/5. F/2. Test of slave PIC’s half frame interrupt source failed
2/7. F/1. Diagnose mode outroute test indicates:

No outroute sync error
Test allowing all outroute packets into card failed
Test allowing all but group address packets failed
Test allowing all but data packets failed
Test for outroute short packet fault indication failed
Test for outroute overrun fault indication failed
Internal data buffers for outroute test overflowed
14-3-49
2/8. F/1. Diagnose mode loopback test (PC to

Inroute-to-outroute data comparison failed
CRC error(s) found while running test
Outroute overrun fault occurred during test
Outroute short packet fault occurred during test
DMA EOP or packet length error occurred
Inroute FSM indicated an inroute fault during test
TXSOF service period was exceeded during test
2/A. F/1. PLL test (using 8530 on PLC1) indicates PLL

clock too fast
F/2. PLL test (using 8530 on PLC1) indicates PLL
clock too slow
2/d., 2/E.,
or 2/F. <PLC type>/1. Illegal PLC type (undefined)
3.7.3 Alternate States 6, 9 and blank LED Codes

When an MP, TP, CPC, or VDPC LED displays a state of 6, 9, or blank, the alternate display shows
port-specific information. The following are displayed at one second intervals:
• Three bars
• First port number with non-zero status, without a decimal.
• Status of first port, with a decimal.
• Second port number with non-zero status, without a decimal.
• Status of second port, with a decimal.
This sequence repeats for all ports with non-zero status.
NOTE
Currently, there are no port-specific status codes defined.
14-3-50
6-28-95
6-28-95
SECTION 4 - IF LED CODE LISTS - PES 5000
Section 4
IF LED CODE LISTS - PES 5000
This section is applicable to PES 5000 only. The IF LED is the left-hand LED on the PES 5000 indoor
unit. The IF LED is located on the IPC circuit card and reports the conditon of various PES 5000
functions. This section lists the following codes:
• IF state codes (no decimal point), table 4-1, page 14-4-2
• IF non-alarm status codes (with decimal point), table 4-2, page 14-4-3
• IF alarm state 5 status codes (with decimal point), table 4-3, page 14-4-4
• IF alarm state 6 status codes (with decimal point), table 4-4, page 14-4-5
• IF Reset LED codes, table 4-5, page 14-4-6
BLINKING DOT
INDICATES
NORMAL
HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
Subsidiary of
LEFT-HAND LED (IF)

BLINKING DOT
INDICATES
NORMAL
OPERATION
PS31741.FH3
4.1 STATE CODES (WITHOUT DECIMAL POINT)

The operational mode of the PES 5000 can be determined by observing the values it displays on its
front-panel IF LED display. Once a PES 5000 is up and running, these IF LED values are displayed in
alternating "state code/status code" form. State codes are the LED values which do not have the decimal
point illuminated while they are displayed. Status codes are the LED values which do have the decimal
point illuminated. The following table describes the nature of the state codes for the PES 5000 IF LED.
14-4-1
Table 4-1. PES 5000 IF LED State Codes
LED Interpretation
BLANK Normal operation. Normal operation. The PES 5000 is in sync on the right network.
There is no max time in this state.
1 This code indicates that the remote is in installation mode. In this mode the PES
5000 indoor unit will supply the pointing signal necessary to properly point the
remote’s antenna. While in installation mode, the remote will not be able to
transmit, but it will attempt to receive data as an aid in pointing.
condition causing the alarm. See table 4-3 on page 14-4-4 for the status codes that
alternate with the alarm code.
condition causing the alarm. See table 4-4 on page 14-4-5 for the status codes that
alternate with the alarm code.
d In Diagnose Mode. This is the normal (expected) display seen when in diagnose
mode.
E Find Network. The PES 5000 demodulator is now locked and the PES 5000 is
checking for the correct network. The DECODER and SFH lock are true.
F Demodulator unlocked. Either the PES remote is not receiving anything, or the
signal-to-noise ratio is very bad. If the PES is not receiving, it cannot transmit
either.
H CER too high. Displayed if the Channel Error Rate is greater than 1 x 10-4.
r Ranging mode. A ranging-capable port card has been found. Ranging operation is
in progress.
u Ranging in DMBU mode. Ranging is being attempted while DMBU is connected.
This is an invalid configuration.
≡ Transmit Test Mode. This code indicates the remote is in transmit test mode.
14-4-2
4.2 STATUS CODES (WITH DECIMAL POINT)

Status Codes are displayed alternately with the State Codes by the PES 5000 IF LED display, and indicate
the status of the system. Status codes are the LED values which have the decimal point illuminated.
The status codes in the subsection apply only to nonalarm states. If alarm status code 5 or 6 is displayed,
refer instead to the status codes beginning on page 14-4-4.
Table 4-2. PES 5000 IF LED Status Codes
LED Interpretation
BLANK. Normal operation.

6. DMBU Mode. The PES 5000 is connected to the DMBU rather than the spacelink.
E. Low EBNO. The signal-to-noise ratio on the outroute is unusually low. The PES
may be experiencing a fade locally or at the hub. Eb/No is less than 5.5 dB.
F. Transmit Mode Disabled. The PES 5000 is unable to transmit while this code is
displayed.
P. Bad Primary Frequency. The currently-configured frequency is invalid. Use the
DIU Configuration Editor program to correct the frequency data in EEPROM.
y. Bad Secondary Frequency. The currently-configured frequency is invalid. Use the
DIU Configuration Editor program to correct the frequency data in EEPROM.
4.3 ALARM CODES (WITH DECIMAL POINT)

These codes only appear when the PES 5000 is in ALARM MODE. In alarm mode, the "state" LED
display is always a "5" or a "6". Table 4-3 lists the alarm status codes when the state code is "5". Table
4-4 lists the alarm status codes when the state code is "6".
Where the corrective action is "Replace Internal Plate Assembly", refer to Appendix E.
14-4-3
Table 4-3. PES 5000 IF LED State 5 Alarm Status Codes
5/4. No active EEPROM page was found in Re-run dialog mode on the DIU
the EEPROM self-test. Configuration Editor computer and
write the configuration data to the
remote. If this alarm still occurs,
replace the Internal Plate Assembly.
5/5. The EEPROM self-test determined that Verify configuration information.

the EEPROM checksum was incorrect. Re-run dialog mode on the DIU
Configuration Editor computer and
write the configuration data to the
5/8. Invalid PC base address or configuration Re-run dialog mode on the DIU
bytes were found in the PES 5000 Configuration Editor computer and
EEPROM. write the configuration data to the
5/b. Could not obtain sync in IOC ASIC Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
Sync Test.
5/C. It has been detected that the PES 5000 is Could be outdoor unit or indoor unit.
streaming (carrier is continuously on). Replace Internal Plate Assembly first.
5/d. The symbol rate obtained from the Reprogram the EEPROM via dialog
EEPROM was invalid. mode on site commissioning computer.
If still fails, then replace Internal Plate
Assembly.
5/F. Factory-specified parameters are cor- Replace Internal Plate Assembly.

rupted.
5/n. Could not lose sync in IOC ASIC Sync Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
startup test.
5/r. A hardware problem has been detected Replace Internal Plate Assembly. This
with the Receive Synthesizer. alarm only appears when ADB is
enabled. Otherwise, this condition
produces a PES 5000 reset.
5/y. EEPROM failed to respond properly to Power off for 1 minute, reapply power
an access request. and rerun dialog mode on site
commissioning computer. If error
remains, replace Internal Plate
Assembly.
14-4-4
Table 4-4. PES 5000 IF LED State 6 Alarm Status Codes
6/1. Shutdown Alarm. This status code appears on the IF LED when an
IPC shutdown has occurred. Refer to the LED
codes starting on page 14-3-12 for more
information on the specific shutdown reason
which is displayed on the IPC LED. This LED
code only appears if another alarm has NOT
occurred prior to the shutdown.
6/2. Diagnostic Test Failure. A diagnostic test has failed. The IPC LED
display indicates a more detailed failure reason.
Refer to the LED codes starting on page 14-3-20
for more information on the specific diagnostic
test failure indicated on the IPC LED. This LED
code only appears if another alarm has NOT
occurred prior to the diagnose failure.
6/3. Invalid Mode Byte stored in The byte read from the EEPROM which
EEPROM. indicates the current operational mode of the
PES 5000 does not contain a valid value. Use
the DIU Configuration Editor SWITCH function
to place the PES 5000 in the desired mode. If
this does not work, replace Internal Plate
Assembly.
6/4. No Port Card configured in The port card configuration byte stored in the
EEPROM. EEPROM indicates the port card is NOT
configured. Use the DIU Configuration Editor
to correct the problem, write to EEPROM, and
then reset the PES 5000. If this does not correct
the problem, replace Internal Plate Assembly.
6/5. Attempting to range a RX only PES 5000 is configured in commissioning

port card or remote. (ranging) mode but either the port card and/or
the remote is configured as receive only in the
EEPROM. Use the DIU Configuration Editor to
change the port card or remote configuration to
TxRx. If commissioning (ranging) is not
desired, then use the SWITCH screen to take the
PES 5000 out of commissioning (ranging)
mode.
6/7. A problem has been detected with A problem has been detected with the transmit
the Transmit Synthesizer. synthesizer hardware. This alarm only appears
when ADB is enabled. Otherwise, this condition
produces a PES 5000 reset.
14-4-5
4.4 RESET LED CODES

One of the following LED codes is displayed on the IF LED every time the board starts up. Besides
starting up caused by turning the remote on, the PES 5000 may from time-to-time restart itself for the
reasons described below. Keep in mind that the restart code itself only remains on the LED for a few
seconds after restart, and then the state/status codes begin alternating on the display.
Table 4-5. PES 5000 Reset IF LED Codes
LED Interpretation
blank Normal PES 5000 power-up (when you first plug in the indoor unit power cord)
- Pushbutton mode switch change failure. The PES 5000 momentary pushbutton
(labeled "AUTO COMM" on the back of the PES 5000) to select between ranging
and normal modes was pressed, but the mode change was not successful. The PES
5000 will come up in the same operational mode it was in before the button was
pressed.
1 Completed uploading EEPROM configuration data. This restart cause is used if the
PES 5000 has finished updating configuration parameters.
2 Stream request timeout. The allotted time for a port card to complete a stream
request to the hub has expired.
3 PES 5000 Watchdog Expired. The PES 5000 internal watchdog timer expired. This
code should not normally occur unless an emulator is used instead of a real CPU.
This will be the reset reason on initial start if an emulator is used.
4 Lost Authorization to Range after Ranging Complete. After the ranging operation
was complete, a message from the port card software was received which indicated
that ranging was not authorized anymore.
7 Receive synthesizer failure. The IF Receive synthesizer dropped out of lock
unexpectedly. There could be a problem with the IF analog circuitry. This reset
only occurs if ADB is disabled.
A FLL Sampling. Maximum delay between frequency error samples has been reached.
The length of the delay is based on the outroute rate. This reset only occurs if ADB
is disabled.
b Hardware mode switch change. The IF momentary pushbutton (labeled "AUTO
COMM" on the back of the IPC) used to select between commissioning (ranging)
and normal modes was pressed. If the IF was in normal mode when this button was
pressed, it will come up in commissioning (ranging) mode after restart. If the IF was
in commissioning (ranging) mode when the button was pressed, it will come up in
normal mode after restart.
c Port Card commanded reset. This restart cause is used if the IF section was
commanded to reset by a message from the IPC section.
14-4-6
Table 4-5. PES 5000 Reset IF LED Codes (Continued)
LED Interpretation
C Reset Command while in Commissioning (Ranging) mode. This restart cause is

used if a reset is commanded by the port card software while the PES 5000 is in
commissioning (ranging) mode.
d Bad Inroute Switch. This reset indicates an inroute switch request in an invalid
state.
E Bad Inroute Frequency. This reset occurs when attempting to use an invalid inroute
frequency.
h Lost Authorization to Range. Port card software commanded the PES 5000 to
range, then while the PES 5000 was ranging, a message from the port card software
was received which indicated that ranging was not authorized anymore.
i Transmit Test Timeout. This reset indicates the transmit test mode timeout has
expired. The PES 5000 is only allowed to be in transmit test mode for a maximum
of one hour.
J Config Reset command was issued. A soft reset configuration command ("Z") was
received by the PES 5000 through the serial debug/config (MAINTENANCE) port.
L Transmit Synthesizer Failure. The IF Transmit synthesizer dropped out of lock
unexpectedly. There could be a problem with the IF analog circuitry. This reset
only occurs if ADB is disabled.
n EEPROM Did Not Respond. The EEPROM device did not respond properly to an
access request.
P Port Card Software Reset. The PES 5000 has reset due to a port card software
related reason. The port card reset reason memory location is A64. This location
may be examined and its numeric contents decoded by the Remote Troubleshooting
Guide to reveal the port card reset reason.
r Hub Commanded Commissioning (Ranging) requested. A request for hub-initiated
commissioning (ranging) was received. The PES 5000 will start commissioning
(ranging) when operational. Note that the mode stored in the EEPROM does not
change when the hub initiates commissioning (ranging).
U Checksum error in configuration data prior to EEPROM upload. A checksum error
was detected in the data to be uploaded to the EEPROM before the device was
actually written. No modifications were made to the data stored in the EEPROM.
y Operational Mode Switch Change was requested. A "switch operational mode"
configuration command ("W") was received by the PES 5000 through the
debug/config (MAINTENANCE) port. The PES 5000 will come up from reset in
the operational mode specified in the command.
|| Transmit Test Mode Entered. This reset indicates the PES 5000 is entering transmit
test mode.
14-4-7
6-28-95
CHAPTER 15
TROUBLESHOOTING
Section 1
OVERVIEW
1.1 GENERAL
Effective troubleshooting involves a thorough inspection of the unit, interpreting alarm LED codes, and
running the Diagnose Mode tests when necessary to isolate the faulty component. This chapter describes
Diagnose Mode for PES X000 series other than PES 5000. For Diagnose Mode for PES 5000, refer to
Appendix E, Section 7.
1.2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

Early problems experienced in the field with installations of this and other products have shown that a
thorough inspection of the equipment, connectors, and cables can save a lot of time, and prevent
occurrences of functional equipment being shipped back to HNS as faulty.
1.2.1 INSPECTION OF INDOOR EQUIPMENT

When a fault is indicated either on the terminal or by an alarm LED code, the operator or technician
should make an initial inspection to ensure that all interconnecting cables are in place and properly
connected. Cables should be in good condition with no chaffing or visible cuts. All connectors should be
examined for a secure fit, and inspected for bent, broken, or missing pins. Table 1-1 lists replacement
power supplies.
Table 1-1. Replacement Power Supplies
Model HNS Part Number
PES 6000 120 Vac 60 Hz 1011485-0001
PES 8000 120 Vac 60 Hz 1011667-0001
PES 9000 120 Vac 60 Hz 1012191-0001
If unsatisfactory IFM operation is suspected, remove the IFM board and check for loose connections at
the locations indicated in figure 1-1.
1.2.2 INSPECTION OF OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT

If the nature of the fault points to the outdoor equipment (such as poor or degraded signal transmission, or
loss of signal), the cable and connectors should be thoroughly inspected. In addition to the inspections
outlined in the paragraph above, the connectors must be inspected for possible corrosion caused by
exposure to the elements.
15-1-1
J1
P1
J2
TXBB
J2 J3 DATA
J1 J5 26
J6 MHz
J4
ODU
CONT
PES3-1174
Figure 1-1. Checking Connections on IFM Circuit Card
15-1-2
CHAPTER 15 - TROUBLESHOOTING
1.3 DIAGNOSE MODE

In the PES Model X000 systems, the diagnose mode can be used to assist in locating faults and at
installation to verify proper operation. To run diagnose mode, first remove power from the PES indoor
unit. To run the comprehensive test of the PES indoor unit, temporarily disconnect the IFL cable from
the rear of the IFM and connect a external test jumper between the N-type IFL connector on the rear of
the IFM and the SMB connector marked TEST on the rear of the IFM (see figure 1-2). The external test
jumper is HNS P/N 1012855-0001. (It is possible to run diagnose mode without the external test jumper
in place, but the space link modem portion of the IFM is not tested.) With or without the external test
jumper in place, the PES cannot transmit during diagnose mode.
Connect a site commissioning computer to the IFM service connector marked CONFIG. Apply power to
the site commissioning computer and the PES indoor unit. Select 2 for PES Model X000 when the screen
displays:
----------------------------------------------------------------------

3) Exit

----------------------------------------------------------------------
At the main menu, enter SWITCH <ENTER> to select the SWITCH function. Use the < key to move
the X under DIAG so the display shows:
----------------------------------------------------------------------
X
Hit <ENT> to exit.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Exit the switch function. The PES indoor unit resets, performs self-test, and begins a diagnose mode test.
Within three minutes, the diagnose mode should be successfully completed with all port cards displaying
[2]/[3.] and the IFM card displaying either [d]/[E.] or [d]/[F.] if the external test jumper is in place, or
[-]/[E.] or [-]/[F.] if the external test jumper was not used. Table 1-2 lists these successful indications.
Table 1-2. Indications Upon Successful Completion of Diagnose Mode
Card Type LED Codes
All Port Card LEDs [2]/[3.]

IFM Card
Complete test with loopback test jumper installed. [d]/[E.] or [d]/[F.]
Test without loopback test jumper. [-]/[E.] or [-]/[F.]
15-1-3
LNC (RECEIVE)
O
M
T
MUX./
LNC DEMUX. TRANSMIT
IF
MONITOR &
CONTROL
RF UNIT
POINTING
RECEIVE RXD
HF MUX. DOWN DESPREAD SFH
CONVERTER DEMODULATE SYNC
IFL DECODE
PATH C PATH B PATH A
VIDEO
TXD
TRANSMIT
SELF
MODULATOR TIMING
TEST
FILTERING
ROM
MONITOR & CPU

TEST LF MUX. CONTROL
IOC
CHIP
IFM
CONFIG
MESSAGE BUS
CONTROL & Rx/Tx DATA BUS

USER PORT
DATA PORT CARD *
DIAGNOSTIC/BACKUP PORT ARBITRATION BUS
PLC
UP
TO PLC
8
USER MULTIPORT CARD *
PORTS PLC
PLC BACKPLANE
MODEL XOOO SERIES INDOOR UNIT POWER

SUPPLY
* From One To Four Port Cards
PES3-1173
Figure 1-2. Simplified Functional Diagram - Diagnose Mode Loopbacks
15-1-4
The diagnose mode sequence of tests follows. Refer to the indicated table for the appropriate corrective
action for LED failure codes.
1. Upon receiving the DIAG switch command, the IFM resets, thereby bringing the IFM board
up in diagnose mode and resetting the port cards.
2. Following reset, each port card performs its standard complement of power-up self tests. If
any of these tests fail, the port card enters a shutdown state and displays a code on its LED
display. If all port card power-up tests pass, the port card software waits for the IFM to poll
the card (indicated by the port card’s LED displaying [1]/[2.]).
3. The IFM also performs its self tests at startup; these are the regular self tests that the IFM
performs in all operational modes. The self-tests at start up include a loopback (path A of
figure 1-2) of a sequence of test data on the IOC chip on the backplane. The data flow is
from the self test ROM to the superframe header sync lock circuitry (SHF SYNC). This test
is called the IOC ASIC Sync Test. The failure codes (table 2-4 on page 14-2- 7) are:
[5]/[b.] - could not obtain sync.
[5]/[n.] - could not lose sync.
Another self-test loopback is the IOC Sync Test. The data flow is from the self test ROM to
the IFM and then via path B of figure 1-2 back to the SFH sync circuitry on the IOC chip.
The failure codes (table 2-4 on page 14-2-7) are:
[5]/[7.] - could not obtain sync.
[5]/[-.] - could not lose sync.
[5]/[i.] - CER > 0.
4. After the IFM power-up self tests have been successfully run, the IFM Loopback test is
performed. This is a special test that is run only when the IFM is in diagnose mode. For the
IFM Loopback Test, if the external test jumper is present, the data path is from the self-test
ROM on the IOC chip to the IFM and IFM modulator, then via path C to the IFM
downconverter and thru the receive functions of the IFM back to SFH sync circuitry on the
IOC chip. The LED failure codes (table 1-4 on page 15-1- 8) are:
[9]/[F.] - could not obtain sync.
[b]/[F.] - could not lose sync.
[A]/[F.] - CER > 0.
Note: If the external test jumper is not present, the IFM Loopback Test data flow is via path
B. This is the same path as the IOC Sync Test self-test. Use the test jumper for a more
complete test of the IFM.
5. Finally, the IFM begins to poll the port cards. The IFM first commands each port card to
perform its respective internal diagnostic tests, and then to perform the diagnose mode Port
Card Loopback Test with the IFM. The port cards are tested one by one, with each port
card completing all of the tests that it can successfully perform before the IFM addresses the
next port card.
6. The current port card to be tested receives the IFM poll command message and checks the
poll’s "diagnose" bits. When the card receives the proper bits, it transitions to "Diagnose"
state and begins performing its internal diagnostic tests. At this point its LED will change
from [1]/[2.] to [2]/[0.], with the [2] and [0.] codes alternating much slower than usual.
7. Assuming the IFM Loopback test passes, the IFM’s LED display at this time will indicate a
"non-dot" code of [d], which signifies the "diagnose" state. However, if the external test
15-1-5
jumper is not present, the IFM will display a "non-dot" code of [-] instead. Refer to table
1-2 for a list of normal LED codes displayed during diagnose mode.
8. If a port card diagnostic test fails, the port card remains in "Diagnose" mode until reset, and
the "status" indication on its LED display signifies which test failed. The port card informs
the IFM of the failure, and the IFM skips to the next port card.
9. As another means of diagnosing, if a port card sends a bad response message, or fails to
send a message after initial message exchanges have been established with the IFM, the
IFM displays a "non-dot" [c] code on the IFM’s LED, and then goes on to the next port card
to be tested. (Refer to table 1-4 on page 15-1-8 for a list of fault indications).
10. Once a port card successfully completes its internal diagnostic tests, but before it performs
the Port Card Loopback test, the IFM tests the port card’s ability to receive IOC self-test
ROM generated test packets over the backplane without error. If the port card indicates to
the IFM that an error has occurred, the IFM goes on to test the next port card, and the failed
port card displays the failure code [2]/[7.] on its LED.
11. If the port card indicates that it properly received the test packets over the backplane, then
the IFM commands the port card to start the Port Card Loopback test. In this test, the port
card sends test packets to the IFM via the inroute data path on the backplane, and the IFM
loops the data back (via path B) to the port card via the outroute data path.
12. If, during the course of the loopback test, the port card indicates to the IFM that an error has
occurred, the IFM goes on to test the next port card, and the failed port card displays the
failure [2]/[8.] on its LED.
13. While the IFM is performing the loopback test with a port card, the IOC may be unable to
achieve sync with the port card-generated test packets. If this occurs, the IFM breaks the
loop, reforms it, and again attempts to establish sync. This process is repeated until either
sync is established or the number of allowed break/sync attempts (currently 32) have been
exhausted. In the case of the latter event, the IFM commands all port cards to stop all tests
and it displays the code [L] on its LED.
14. Each time the IFM breaks the loop, it also performs a "mini sync test" of its own to ensure
that the backplane IOC ASIC is capable of acheiving sync to self-test ROM generated data.
If this test fails, the IFM displays a "non-dot" fault code of [C], and then it attempts to
complete diagnostic testing of the port cards as best it can. (Refer to table 1-4 for a list of
fault indications.)
15. If all tests pass, including the Port Card Loopback test, the port card stays in diagnose state
until reset. The port card’s LED display will indicate all tests have passed ([2]/[3.]). Note
that in the case of an MPC, the [2]/[3.] indication may not appear until a [2]/[0.] code is first
displayed for up to 20 seconds. Once the port card indicates to the IFM that all tests have
passed, the IFM goes on to the next card.
16. Eventually, all port cards (whether shown as being configured or not) will have been tested
(or have attempted to be tested) by the IFM. At this point, the IFM continues polling the
port cards with commands to stop all tests and idle. The LEDs display the diagnose mode
successful indications of table 1-2. An installer may use this "idle" time to load
configuration parameters into the IFM EEPROM via the IFM service connector labeled
"CONFIG."
15-1-6
Table 1-3. Port Card LED Progression During Diagnose Mode
Lamp Test Power-up or Preset Self-test
[1]/[2.] Port card waiting to hear from IOC.
[2]/[0.] Port card is starting internal test, "diagnose test in progress," (IFM loopback has
been completed at this point). This code appears one time for DP card, two times
for MP.
[2]/[1.] These codes are interspersed with an LED segment rotating patterns during port
or card loopback test. Codes may appear many times during multiple entries (up to
[2]/[2.] 32).
or
[2]/[4.]
[2]/[4.] Port card command by IFM to idle. During testing, this code will be normally
displayed for up to five minutes; however, if this code is constantly displayed, it
is a fault indication.
[2]/[3.] This port card has successfully completed diagnose mode test. The next port
card begins testing.
1.4 IFM ALARM CODES [5]/[ANYTHING.]

IFM alarm codes are displayed when a fault occurs, and are interpreted to help isolate the malfunctioning
component. An IFM alarm code consists of a "non dot" code of [5] alternating with a decimal point code
(code with a dot). Refer to table 2-4 on page 14-2- 7 for a list of IFM LED fault codes.
15-1-7
Table 1-4. LED Fault Codes in Diagnose Mode
[9]/[F.] Could not obtain sync in IFM Replace IFM. If still fails, replace
(IFM) Loopback Test. backplane.
[A]/[F.] Non-zero CER in IFM Loopback Replace IFM. If still fails, replace
(IFM) Test. backplane.
[b]/[F.] Could not lose sync in IFM Replace IFM. If still fails, replace
(IFM) Loopback. backplane.
[L]/[F.] Failed to successfully perform the Try again with a known good port card
(IFM) PC Loopback Test with a port card. to see if test passes. If not, replace IFM.
If still fails, replace backplane.
[c]/[F.] Bad diagnose response from a port Try with a known good port card. If
(IFM) card. still fails, replace IFM. If still fails,
replace backplane.
[C]/[F.] Unable to obtain sync during "mini Replace IFM. If still fails, replace
(IFM) sync test" of Port Card Loopback backplane.
Test.
[2]/[4.] Failure of PC Loopback Test. (This Try again with a known good port card.
(Port Card) is a fault indication only if it persists If still fails, replace IFM. If still fails
for more than five minutes or if IFM replace backplane.
progresses to another port card.
Indicated by another port card
changing from [1]/[2.] to [2]/[0.].
IFM displays [L].)
15-1-8
Table 1-5. Abbreviations
ADB Automatic Dial Backup

ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
CER Channel Error Rate
CPU Central Processing Unit
DP Data Port Card
EEPROM Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory
HF - MUX High Frequency Multiplexer
IFL Interfacility Link Cable
IFM Intermediate Frequency Module
IOC ASIC Inroute/Outroute Controller ASIC
(IOC Chip)
LNC Low noise amplifier and downconverter
MP Multiport Card
OMT Ortho Mode Transponder - Separates/Combines
Receive and Transmit Signals
PC Port card
PLC Port Level Conversion Module
PLL Phase Locked Loop
ROM Read Only Memory
SFH SYNC Superframe Header Sync Lock Circuitry
15-1-9
1.5 TROUBLESHOOTING USING THE SITE CONFIGURATION COMPUTER

If a PES remote is experiencing outages in moderate rain showers or in temperature extremes, the
problem may be a low "signal-to-noise" ratio (Eb/No) and/or a high Channel Error Rate (CER).
The Eb/No measurements are continuously taken by the PES and are stored in data registers in the indoor
unit. These registers can be read by connecting a correctly programmed site commissioning computers to
the CONFIG port of the IFM. This information can be used to compare the current performance of the
PES with the performance at the time of the installation. Any significant decrease in the Eb/No and a rise
in the CER usually indicates the misalignment of the antenna or a gradual degradation of a component in
the RF Unit, given equivalent space link conditions.
The site configuration computer monitor function can be used with type 1, type 2, and Model X000 series
remote Personal Earth Stations to monitor and debug the outroute acquisition performance of the outdoor
and indoor units. It is most useful when fine tuning the remote pointing, or when attempting to isolate the
cause of a remote dropping sync.
Connect the site configuration computer to the IFM. Select the DIU Configuration Editor by moving the
cursor over M300.BA. Next, enter monitor <ENTER> using lower case letters.
The monitor function provides the display shown in the box at the top of figure 1-3. When the monitor
function starts, it defaults to continuous update mode, in which the indoor unit is polled and the screen
display is updated as quickly as possible (about every second). The monitor function of DIU
Configuration Editor v3.0 displays:
OUTROUTE STATUS
Eb/No
CER - Channel Error Rate
INROUTE
pwr - current transmit power level
tmng - current timing offset
freq - current inroute hexadecimal code
State Variables
1.5.1 MONITOR DISPLAY OF Eb/No

The monitor function displays an Eb/No estimate with a resolution of 0.1 dB, as calculated by the indoor
unit. In clear-sky conditions for 1.8M and larger antennas, it should be 10.0 dB or above. The theoretical
Eb/No ratio represents the strength of the transmitted downlink signal as received by the PES remote
relative to the background noise, independent of data rate. A high Eb/No ratio is desirable (e.g., a ratio of
12 dB) and represents a very strong clear signal. An Eb/No ratio of 8 dB indicates a satisfactory signal
while operation at an Eb/No ratio of 5 dB or below may become marginal.
1.5.2 MONITOR DISPLAY OF CER

The monitor function displays channel error rate in four ranges as shown in table 1-6. Operation can be
satisfactory when the CER is best, good, or fair (CER is less than 0.04). The sequential decoder within
the IOC is correcting the errors and is used to estimate the CER.
15-1-10
OUTROUTE STATUS Eb/No: 11.5 CER: best

INROUTE pwr: 50 tmng: D5CB freq: BC27
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
B R T T A P R B T I R C S B A T D S
B F X X L A F E e n e I Y I F r E F
s s 1 2 C e s s s s s D N T C a C H
t t l l o n m m t t e o l l l c l l
r r k k k b p p l t k k k k k k k
STATE VARIABLES
BBstr - Baseband Streaming has occurred (FALSE)

RFstr - RF Streaming has occurred (FALSE)
TX1lk - Transmit Recovered Reference PLL is locked (TRUE)
TX2lk - Transmit Synthesizer PLL is locked (TRUE)
ALCok - ALC alarm is ok (TRUE)
PAenb - Power Amp is enabled (TRUE)
RFsmp - RF power detected sample (occasionally TRUE, when remote is transmitting)
BEsmp - Burst Enable sample (occasionally TRUE, when remote is transmitting)
Test - PES in ?___ mode

Instl - PES in install mode
(FALSE if PES in NORMAL mode, TRUE if INSTALL mode)
Reset - PES was reset (FALSE, except at init time)
CIDok - Outroute Carrier ID matches (TRUE)

SYNlk - Receiver Synthesizer PLL is locked (TRUE)
BITlk - Modem Bit Timing is locked (TRUE)
AFClk - Modem AFC is locked (TRUE)
Track - Modem is tracking (TRUE)
DEClk - Decoder is locked (TRUE)
SFHlk - Superframe header sync has been obtained (TRUE)
Figure 1-3. Monitor Display of PES Performance
15-1-11
Table 1-6. Channel Error Rate Range Values

Monitor Equivalent
Indication IFM LED IOC LED CER Range Eb/No Range
poor (> 4e-2) H o CER > 0.04 5 dB > Eb/No
fair (< 4e-2) blank blank 0.04 > CER > 0.006 8 dB > Eb/No > 5 dB
good (< 6e-3) blank blank 0.006 > CER > 0.0002 11 dB > Eb/No > 8 dB
best (< 2e-4) blank blank 0.0002 > CER Eb/No > 11 dB
1.5.3 MONITOR DISPLAY OF INROUTE STATUS

The monitor function displays the inroute status current values of the numbers actually in use when the
remote PES transmits; that is, the numbers in the IFM hardware registers that are telling the RF Unit what
power to use, that are actively counting off the time delay for timing offset, and that are determining the
inroute transmit frequency. The remote PES transmits in bursts, and the RFsmp and BEsmp state
variables provide an indication of when the PES is transmitting.
The current power level displayed by the MONITOR program is a hexadecimal number which is
proportional to PES transmit power. For Model X000 series PES, the current power level can be directly
converted to an absolute power level in dBm (refer to table 4-1 in chapter 10, section 4, page 10-4-8). An
automated process (automatic ranging) or the Hub operator (manual ranging) determines when the power
level from a given PES is correct in a process called RANGING.
The current timing offset is a hexadecimal number which the PES uses in determining when to transmit
relative to the outroute from the Hub. It is based on the distance between the PES and the satellite. When
the PES is in the COMM (ranging) mode, the Initial Timing Offset from the DIALOG program is used
and displayed (refer to chapter 10). When the PES is in the NORMAL mode, the Ranged Timing Offset
from the RANGE program is used and displayed (refer to chapter 10).
The frequency value is the special hexadecimal code for the inroute frequency on which the PES
transmits. If you need to convert this frequency to MHz, use a repetitive process on the FREQCVT
function to find the value (remember, byte-reversing is in effect).
1.5.4 MONITOR DISPLAY OF STATE VARIABLES

The monitor function displays a total of 18 PES binary state variables across the screen. Abbreviations
for the state variable are written vertically in the display. The lower portion of figure 1-3 expands the
abbreviation for each state variable. The presence of a particular state variable is indicated by a dark box
in the display above the corresponding abbreviation. (The TRUE/FALSE value of each variable is
distinguished by a solid indicator being ON/OFF on the screen.) The variables, with desired values in ( ),
are shown in the lower portion of figure 1-3.
The state variables are arranged in three groups. The first group, which has eight variables, is concerned
with the PES transmit function. The second group, which has three variables, concerns PES status. The
third group, which has seven variables, is concerned with the PES receive function. All of these last
seven state variables should be true (have dark boxes) during normal PES operation.
When all state variables are in the desired state for normal PES operation, the IFM LED display should be
BLANK/BLANK. ([ ]/[ .]).
15-1-12
1.5.4.1 Receive Function State Variables - In order for a PES to be considered properly receiving and
in sync on the outroute from the Hub, many conditions must be true. The seven receive state variables
correspond to the following sequence of conditions:
• The receive side of the RF Unit and IFM must be working, the receive synthesizer must be
locked (SYNlk), and using the correct outroute frequency codes (primary and backup
outroute frequencies in DIALOG).
• The receive side of the modem (on the IFM circuit card) must be working, locked onto the
carrier frequency (AFClk), and the data bit rate (BITlk), and tracking the signal (Track).
Also, the sequential decoder indicating that it is properly synchronized to the stream it is to
decode (DEClk), and the superframe timing logic indicating that it is correctly locked onto
the data framing (SFHlk).
• At least one port card must be running, verifying that the superframe header packets it is
receiving from the Hub indicate the remote is on the correct carrier (CIDok). The port card
must be supplied the correct carrier ID code from the IFM, entered via the DIALOG.
1.5.5 MONITOR DISPLAY SPECIAL CONTROLS

Once the continuous monitor display function has been invoked, it can be altered by typing one of several
keys:
/ - Stop continuous display and exit to the main menu.
p - Enter print mode. If the state variables change, they are printed on a printer, along with the
time of day. The screen continues to update continuously. If a printer is not connected, the
program will loop and wait.
f - Enter freeze mode. If the state variables change, the screen freezes, displaying the previous
values, and an audible alarm goes off. Typing any key then displays the new state. The next time
a state change occurs, the same thing happens all over again.
Any other key re-enters the normal continuous display mode.
1.6 TROUBLESHOOTING VOICE PORTS

When looking at a voice problem, it is important to distinguish between a connection protocol problem
where you cannot reliably establish a connection with the other end, and a quality problem where you
can, but the audio sounds bad when you talk or listen.
1.6.1 VOICE CONNECTION PROBLEMS

In order to isolate a connection related problem, perform the following steps:
1. Perform the General Checkout to verify power, cables, Diagnose Mode, and Configuration
Parameters. If a voice data port (VDP) card does not successfully complete diagnose mode,
refer to the diagnose state [2/_] code for VDP failure in chapter 14, section 3.6.3.3 on page
14-3-18 and take the appropriate corrective action(s).
2. Ask the Hub operator if any data circuits at this remote are experiencing CRC problems.
(The Hub operator can determine if there are CRC errors by viewing the Sessions Detailed
Status, SESSN DETLD screen, on the SOC.) If there are CRC errors, refer to paragraph
chapter 15, section 1.7.2, instructions for dealing with Link CRC Errors.
15-1-13
3. If the port card is displaying a [ ]/[.], and a "Trouble Tone" is always returned when you lift
the telephone receiver ("go offhook"), contact the Hub operator and verify that user traffic is
enabled on the network. The "Trouble Tone" is an obnoxious, high pitched, continuously
on tone (made by the combination of 480 Hz and 620 Hz). If the trouble is not with the
Hub, replace the VP TEL or VP PBX first and then the VDP.
4. If dial tone is not consistently returned when the caller goes offhook, replace the VP TEL or
VP PBX card first, then the VDP. If the dial tone is not discontinued after the first digit is
dialed, replace the cards in the same order.
5. Dial a complete ISBN phone number. If the next tone heard is a "permanent signal" starting
16 seconds after the last digit is dialed, the remote voice port is indicating that it has not
received a complete ISBN phone number. (A permanent signal is a single frequency tone
just slightly higher pitched than a dial tone, on continuously.) Make sure that a "#" is dialed
to signify the end of the number, OR make sure that you have dialed in the maximum
number of digits (in which case the # is not required). The maximum number of digits is
specified at the System Operator Console (SOC) and can be as large as 14. If the remote
voice port is incorrectly issuing the "permanent signal" when it has received a complete
ISBN phone number, first replace the VP TEL or VP PBX, then the VDP.
6. If the next tone heard is a normal busy signal, it signifies the target address is busy. Call the
Hub operator and ask for a specific phone number, not a hunt group number, that you can
use. If this comes up busy and you suspect the busy indication may be false, ask the Hub
operator to make a call from another remote into that Hub number to verify that it and the
Call Connection Cluster are operational. If that call succeeds and you have confirmed that
the busy indication was false, replace the VDP card first and then the VP TEL or VP PBX
card.
7. If the next tone heard is a "reorder tone" (also known as fast busy), it signifies that there is
no available inroute or outroute bandwidth for the call. This is almost certainly a Hub
parameter or equipment problem, or there is just no bandwidth available.
8. If the next tone heard is a "vacant code," it signifies that the dialed address does not exist.
(A vacant code sounds like a busy signal except, rather than going on/off/on/off. . ., it goes
on/off/on/off/wait, i.e., 2 on, 1 off.) Follow the troubleshooting steps given above for the
busy signal.
9. If the next tone heard is an "intercept tone," it signifies that an incorrect key has been dialed,
usually happening only when you’re trying to dial in one of the special modes. (An
intercept tone is a wailing tone, continuously on but alternating between two frequencies.)
Redial. If the problem persists, replace the remote cards in the same order.
10. If the next tone heard is a dial tone from the far end, the connection protocol is working
correctly.
11. Repeat the above steps to make sure that connections can be made reliably.
15-1-14
1.6.2 TROUBLESHOOTING VOICE QUALITY PROBLEMS

In order to isolate a voice quality problem, perform the following steps at the remote PES site:
1. Startup a Voice Codec Module (VCM) Loopback: go offhook, hear dial tone, enter #90007,
hear confirmation tone (beep beep beep). Talk to yourself. It should sound clear and
distinct because this loopback is right at the codec (i.e., no RELP encoding or decoding is
being performed). Refer to figure 1-4A. If you speak softly and your speech is drowned
out in background noise or "static," check out the telephone you are using and the
connection to the port card. If the problem persists, replace the VP TEL or VP PBX. If you
speak loudly and your speech comes back very distorted or "broken up," replace the VP
TEL or VP PBX with one that has the latest revisions on it. Go back onhook.
NOTE
The PES circuit cards are marked with a part number followed by a
revision letter, slash, and parts list revision letter. For example, 71283-5
REV C/E indicates a VP TEL card revision C with parts list revision /E.
For the VP TEL card, parts list revisions E and higher (later - for
example, /F . . or /G . . or /H . .) have the change to prevent loud speech
from being broken up. For a VP PBX card (71283-4), the parts list
revision letter should be /B or higher.
2. Startup a User Test Loopback. Refer to figure 1-4B. Perform the same steps as above
except use #90001 and perform the same tests. The same results should be obtained except
the voice should come back with a slightly more detectable distortion, since RELP16
encoding and decoding is taking place. Replace the VP TEL or VP PBX if necessary, and,
if the problem persists, the VDP.
3. Startup a Far End Analog Loopback (figure 1-5): go offhook, hear dial tone, enter #90004,
hear confirmation tone, then a second dial tone, and enter Hub address (e.g., 0123#). Talk
to yourself with a round trip space delay. The perceived quality of this test should be the
same as the user test loopback, just with a longer delay.
4. If the user test loopback sounds good, the Remote Voice Port works fine in diagnose mode,
the VDP came up to [ ]/[.] with no major problems, and few link CRC errors are noticed for
data port cards in this remote; this remote voice port is not likely to be the cause of a voice
quality problem. If the call sounds bad, ask the operator for a different Hub address, one
which is not a hunt group, and try a far end loopback with it. If the problem persists, try a
call to that Hub address from a different remote. If that connection from a different remote
sounds good, try replacing the VDP card, then the VP TEL or VP PBX at your remote.
5. Have a normal conversation over the space link with a Hub operator. If it sounds
significantly worse than with the far end loopback, suspect the connection from the Hub
VPC into the PBX.
Figure 1-6 shows the data flow through the remote voice port during normal operation. A portion of the
received voice data is used for echo cancellation.
16RELP: Abbreviation for Residual Exciter Linear Predictive vocoder algorithm - a method of reducing and reconstructing a
speech waveform so that a minimum number of bits may be transmitted between stations.
15-1-15
REMOTE VOICE PORT
ECM
Digital Analog
CCM VCM CODEC
Loopback Relay
VDP DTMF
VP TEL or VP PBX TELEPHONE
-DIAL #90007
A) VCM LOOPBACK
REMOTE VOICE PORT
ECM
Digital Analog
CCM VCM CODEC
Loopback Relay
DTMF
VDP VP TEL or VP PBX TELEPHONE
-DIAL #90001
KEY ABBREVIATIONS
CCM Channel Control Module

ACTIVE FUNCTION DTMF Dual Tone Multifrequency
ECM Echo Canceller Module
INACTIVE FUNCTION VCM Voice Codec Module
B) USER TEST LOOPBACK

PES3-1250
Figure 1-4. Two Voice Port Loopbacks Useful in Voice Quality Troubleshooting
15-1-16
REMOTE VOICE PORT
ECM
Hub
VPC
Analog Space Digital Analog

CCM VCM CODEC
Relay Link Loopback Relay
DTMF Telephone
-DIAL #90004
Followed By HUB
Address
PES3-1251
Figure 1-5. Far End Loopback
REMOTE VOICE PORT
ECM
Space Digital Analog

CCM VCM CODEC
Loopback Relay
Link
VDP VP TEL or VP PBX
ABBREVIATIONS
CCM Channel Control Module

DTMF Dual Tone Multifrequency
VCM Voice Codec Module
PES3-1252
Figure 1-6. Normal Remote Voice Port Data Flow
15-1-17
1.6.3 HUB ORIGINATED REMOTE ANALOG VOICE LOOPBACK

The Hub operator may test the voice circuits at a remote PES by performing a remote analog loopback as
shown in figure 1-7. To initiate this test, Hub operator dials #90004 followed by the RVPC access code.
An analog relay on the remote VP TEL or VP PBX card closes directing the voice information received
from the Hub back for processing and retransmission to the Hub.
During the time the loopback is in effect, a person at the remote who picks up the receiver of a telephone
connected to a VP TEL card would only hear noise and would find the phone inoperable. A remote user
who dials the PES extension from a PBX telephone (VP PBX card) while the remote analog loopback is
in effect would have his own voice looped back to him.
ECM REMOTE VOICE PORT (RVPC)

Hub
VPC
VIM & Space Digital Analog

CCM VCM CODEC
VIM I/O Link Loopback Relay
HUB
OPERATOR
Dials
#90004
Followed By ABBREVIATIONS
RVPC Access
Number CCM Channel Control Module
DTMF Dual Tone Multifrequency
RVPC Remote Voice Port Card (s)
VCM Voice Codec Module
VIM Voice Interface Module
VIM I/O Voice Interface Input/
Output Module
VPC Voice port Cluster
PES3-1253
Figure 1-7. Hub Originated Remote Analog Voice Loopback
1.7 HUB OPERATOR ASSISTANCE IN TROUBLESHOOTING REMOTE

The Hub operator, in addition to providing normal assistance, can also command data loopbacks or can
help solve link CRC error problems.
1.7.1 DATA LOOPBACKS

The Hub operator can command a remote PES to perform data loopbacks as shown in figure 1-8A and
B. In addition, bit transparent mode and analog voice loopbacks are available. Loopbacks permit the Hub
operator to verify that PES remotes are operating correctly.
15-1-18
SPACE
LINK
X000 SERIES INDOOR UNIT
RF IFM IOC DP
UNIT
HUB
REMOTE
A) ODLC LOOPBACK
X000 SERIES INDOOR UNIT USER

PORT
RF IFM IOC DP USER

UNIT EQUIPMENT
HUB
REMOTE
B) SDLC LOOPBACK
X000 SERIES INDOOR UNIT

USER
PORT
BIT 3 3 PHYSICAL
ERROR JUMPER
RF IFM IOC DP
RATE ON
TESTER UNIT CONNECTOR
2 2
HUB
REMOTE
C) BIT TRANSPARENT MODE LOOPBACK

PES3-1248
Figure 1-8. Hub Operator Commanded Remote Data Loopbacks
15-1-19
1.7.1.1 ODLC Loopback - The ODLC loopback shown in figure 1-8A causes a remote port card to
return the data from the Hub. At the Hub, the returned data is checked against what was sent. The Hub
operator can command an ODLC loopback without the assistance of anyone at the PES remote. A Model
X000 series remote which successfully passes an ODLC loopback probably has a good RF Unit, IFM,
backplane,and at least one good DP or port on an MP. The Hub operator can test each of the DPs or ports
on an MP in a remote in turn.
1.7.1.2 SDLC Loopback - The data path for the SDLC data loopback, shown in figure 1-8B, is the same
as for the ODLC loopback. However, the data is not returned until the SDLC protocol of the user
equipment permits. The SDLC loopback gives the Hub operator a measure of how efficiently the SDLC
protocol is working. In the case where a DP passes ODLC loopback but does not pass SDLC loopback,
suspect the DP, connections to the user equipment, or the user equipment itself.
1.7.1.3 Bit Transparent Mode Loopback - The bit transparent mode (BITT) loopback, shown in figure
1-8C, provides an overall end-to-end test of an entire link through the HNS ISBN system. To perform a
bit transparent mode loopback the Hub operator needs to:
1. Connect a Bit Error Rate Tester
2. Get the assistance of a person at the remote to place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 of the remote
DP or MP user port.
3. Start the remote DP or MP user port in bit transparent (BITT) mode.
1.7.1.4 Remote Analog Voice Loopback - As described in chapter 15, section 1.6.3 and figure 1-7, a
Hub operator can command a voice loopback at a remote by using a telephone and dialing #90004 and the
RVPC access code.
1.7.2 LINK CRC ERRORS

When a particular link is suspected of having high CRC errors or other transmission problems, and the
remote displays are all correct, i.e., [ ]/[.], first verify that:
1. The parameters are correct at both the Hub and remote ends of the link. In particular, if
remote port card and IOC addresses are duplicated or LIM sessions are not correctly
defined, strange things can happen.
2. There is not a common equipment problem at the Hub. As a minimum, verify that the Hub
DPC and LIM supporting the link in question are successfully supporting other links, that
the inroute in question is successfully supporting other remotes, etc. If possible, power off
the remote in question and configure another one, e.g., one co-located at the Hub identically
and see if the problem still persists.
3. The error statistics are reliable. The best statistics to use are the ODLC CRC error counts
since these are generated internally inside the ISBN equipment. (The Hub operator can
determine if there are ODLC CRC errors by viewing the Sessions Detailed Status, SESSN
DETLD screen, on the SOC.) If you are depending on external statistics (e.g., fireberds or
user device protocol statistics), ensure that those devices are working and that the
interconnections to them are solid.
When the remote has a transmission problem, try to determine if the statistics point at inroute problems
versus outroute problems, and whether all of the port cards are affected, or just individual ones.
15-1-20
3-5-91
CHAPTER 16
SPECIAL OPERATIONS FOR TRS-80, MODEL 102
Section 1
MEMORY SIZE/LOADING FROM DISK
1.1 GENERAL
The TRS-80 laptop computer has served as a site commissioning computer for previous PES products.
Although installation subcontractors are now required to have improved site commissioning computers,
some TRS-80 Model 102 computers may be in use (most in customer service).
This appendix describes the special operations for the TRS-80 Model 102 computer which is used to
install the Site Commissioning parameters.
1.2 DETERMINING MEMORY SIZE

The Model 102 is a general purpose computer that comes with 24k of memory that must be expanded to
32k in order to run DIU Configuration version 3.0, a requirement for PES X000 series. The TRS-80
Model 102 even with its memory fully expanded to 32k has insufficient memory to load version v3.0
from diskette. However, it can receive the v3.0 program via a direct RS-232 wire connection from
another computer. Thus, the diskettes sent for version v3.0 cannot be read by the TRS-80 floppy disk
drive (differing from previous versions of the DIU Configuration Editor).
To determine if your Model 102 has 32k of RAM, turn the power off and turn the unit over. Use a coin or
similar instrument to remove the cover to the lower right of the serial tag nameplate.
If the unit is a 32k machine, the socket labeled M6 should have an 8k by 8 RAM chip, such as a Hitachi
HM6264LP-15 or equivalent, with pin 1 pointed toward the top of the machine. This chip must be an LP
part, i.e., with LP in its number, as this stands for low power. Because this is an MOS device, do not
touch the pins without proper grounding.
If there is no device in socket M6, your machine only has 24k of RAM and must be upgraded. Ignore
socket M11, which can be left empty.
1.3 DOWNLOADING V3.0 INTO TRS-80 MODEL 102

The TRS-80 cannot read DIU Configuration Editor v3.0 from diskette, but can receive the v3.0 program
by direct RS-232 wire transfer from another computer (either an MS-DOS computer or another TRS-80).
STEP 1. Verify that the TRS-80 Model 102 has the 32k of memory required for DIU Configuration
Editor v3.0. To determine if your Model 102 has 32k of RAM, turn the power off and turn
the unit over. Use a coin or similar instrument to remove the cover to the lower right of the
serial tag nameplate.
If the unit is a 32k machine, the socket labeled M6 should have an 8k by 8 RAM chip (such
as a Hitachi HM6264LP-15). If there is no device in socket M6, your machine only has 24k
of RAM and must be upgraded. Ignore socket M11, which can be left empty.
16-1-1
NOTE
The TRS-80 Model 100, as purchased for PES, has insufficient memory
to run DIU Configuration Editor v3.0 and, as a practical matter, the
memory size cannot be increased. Likewise, as a practical matter, the
TRS-80 Model 200, as used with the PES, has 24k of memory. Although
the Model 200 memory can be expanded to 72k, each 24k bank of
memory operates as a separate entity and cannot be used for DIU
Configuration Editor v3.0 either.
STEP 2. If your TRS-80 Model 102 has 24k, install the required integrated circuit in socket M6 to
upgrade the memory to 32k. Radio Shack offers a memory upgrade kit to increase the
TRS-80 Model 102 from 24k to 32k. The kit is available from Radio Shack national parts,
part number AX-2603817 (cost recently quoted as $14.95).
STEP 3. To transfer the v3.0 program from one TRS-80 to another, refer to "Loading the M300
Program Directly from One TRS-80 to Another," page 16-1-5. To transfer the v3.0 program
from an MS-DOS (IBM PC type) computer to the TRS-80, connect the two computers with a
null modem cable (pins 2 and 3 swapped) as shown in figure 1-1.
25 PIN
25 PIN FEMALE MALE
1 1
IBM 2 2
3 3
TRS-80
PC
WITH
TYPE 7 7
32K
(MS-DOS) 6
20
COM 1 RS-232
PORT PORT
SOURCE DESTINATION
PES3-1273
Figure 1-1. Cable for IBM PC Type to TRS-80 Transfer
STEP 4. First, ensure the MS-DOS computer power is off. Insert the v3.0 diskette into the MS-DOS
computer. Then, apply power to the MS-DOS computer. When the large letters "DIU"
appear, type B <ENTER> to exit to the system.
STEP 5. At the A:\> prompt, type cd TRS80 <ENTER>. The following prompt then appears:
A:\TRS80>.
STEP 6. At the A:\TRS80> prompt type COPYTRS <ENTER>. This action starts the screen
messages shown in figure 1-2 to guide you through the copying process. Press <ENTER> to
progress to the next message.
16-1-2
CHAPTER 16 - SPECIAL OPERATIONS FOR TRS-80, MODEL 102
SECTION 1 - MEMORY SIZE/LOADING FROM DISK
STEP 7. When you reach the message that says

"Now we need to clear out the TRS80’s
memory. The quick way to do this is
to hold down the CTRL, SHIFT and BREAK
keys while turning on the power . . . . ,"
hold down the <CTRL>, <SHIFT>, and <BREAK> keys at the same time while turning the
TRS-80 power off and back on again.
STEP 8. Press <ENTER> on the MS-DOS computer. As instructed on the screen, place the TRS-80
cursor over the file BASIC and press <ENTER> on the TRS-80.
STEP 9. Press enter on the MS-DOS computer. As instructed on the screen, type the following on the
TRS-80: LOAD "COM:58N1D" and then press <ENTER>.
STEP 10. Press <ENTER> on the MS-DOS computer. The screen message indicates that the transfer
process is in progress. Wait four minutes. When the transfer process is complete, the
TRS-80 should display the error message "?DS error" and the MS-DOS computer screen
should say "OK, I’m done sending the code. . . ."
STEP 11. On the TRS-80 computer, press <SHIFT> and <BREAK> to return to the BASIC prompt. At
the basic prompt type: SAVE "M300.BA", then press <ENTER>. This completes the
transfer process.
16-1-3
This batch file will walk you through the Now we need to clear out the TRS-80’s
process of copying the DIU Configuration memory. The quick way to do this is to hold
Editor from an IBM PC type computer to a down the CTRL, SHIFT, and BREAK keys
TRS-80 Model 102. But first there are a while turning on the power. NOTE: This
couple of basic assumptions we are making will erase all of the files from the TRS-80’s
that we need to go over. memory. It will also reset the time and date.
First, I am assuming that the PC you are Now you need to connect the cable. It goes
using has a serial port that is configured as from the PC serial port to the TRS-80 serial
COM1. If you use this PC as a port.
Configuration Editor, then this will work
fine. If not, then you may need to ask Now run the BASIC program on the TRS-80
someone or consult the manual. by placing the cursor over the file BASIC
and pressing ENTER.
The other assumption is that the TRS-80 you
are using has 32k RAM. To determine if Now type the following on the TRS-80:
your TRS-80 Model 102 has 32k of RAM, LOAD "COM:58N1D," then press
turn the power off, turn the Model 102 over, <ENTER>. This gets the TRS-80 ready to
and use a coin or similar instrument to receive the Configuration Editor program.
remove the cover to the lower right of the
serial tag nameplate. I am now transferring the Configuration
Editor program over to the TRS-80. This
In a 32k machine, the socket labeled M6 will take about 4 minutes.
should have an 8k by 8 RAM chip (such as a
Hitachi HM6264LP-15). If there is no OK, I’m done sending the code. The
device in socket M6, your machine only has TRS-80 should be displaying the error
24k of RAM and must be upgraded. Ignore message "?DS error." Press <SHIFT> +
socket M11, which can be left empty. <BREAK> to get back to the basic prompt.
If the TRS-80 DID NOT display the "?DS
OK. Now we can get to work. First we error," then hit <CTRL> + <C> to stop this
need to make sure we have the proper cable. program.
It should be a Null Modem cable (pins 2 and
3 swapped, pins 6 and 20 tied together on Save the program on the TRS-80. Type:
the PC end, and pins 1 and 7 straight SAVE "M300.BA," then press
through) and should go from the PC serial <RETURN>.
port to the TRS-80 serial port.
That’s it! We’re done! That wasn’t so bad,
now was it?
Figure 1-2. Screen Displays of TRSCOPY Program on MS-DOS Computer
16-1-4
CHAPTER 16 - SPECIAL OPERATIONS FOR TRS-80, MODEL 102
SECTION 1 - MEMORY SIZE/LOADING FROM DISK
1.4 LOADING THE M300 PROGRAM DIRECTLY FROM ONE TRS-80 TO ANOTHER
Perform the steps below to copy the DIU Configuration Editor v3.0 (also called "the M300 program")
from one TRS-80 to another. The TRS-80 that already has the program is called the source computer.
The TRS-80 that is to receive the program is called the destination computer.
STEP 1. Turn on the source computer and verify that DIU Configuration Editor v3.0 is present by
selecting M300.BA and observing the designation v3.0 in the upper right-hand corner of the
display. Turn off the source computer.
STEP 2. Turn on the destination computer. Clear the destination computer’s Random Access Memory
(RAM) of unnecessary files. You can clear all unnecessary files in one action by pressing
and holding <SHIFT>, <CTRL>, and <BREAK> at the same time while turning the
TRS-80 power off and back on again.
STEP 3. Connect the RS-232 ports of the source and destination computers with a cable configured as
figure 1-3 shows. The cable should have male DB-25 connectors on both ends.
25 PIN MALE 25 PIN MALE

RS-232 RS-232
PORT PORT
TRS - 80 TRS - 80
SOURCE DESTINATION
CABLE PIN-OUT:
1 1
2 2
3 3
7 7
25 PIN D MALE 25 PIN D MALE
PES-395
Figure 1-3. Cable to Connect Source and Destination TRS-80 Computers
16-1-5
STEP 4. Turn on the source computer. Move the cursor over BASIC and press <ENTER>.
STEP 5. On the source computer, enter LOAD "M300.BA" and press <ENTER>. The source
computer responds by displaying the letters Ok and the flashing cursor prompt.
STEP 6. On the destination computer, move the cursor over BASIC and press <ENTER>.
STEP 7. On the destination computer, enter LOAD "com:58n1d" and press <ENTER>. This
command readies the destination computer to load the program from the RS-232
communications port.
STEP 8. On the source computer enter SAVE "com:58n1d" and press <ENTER>. This command
causes the source computer to start sending the program on the RS-232 communications port.
During the transfer process, there is no indication on either computer that the transfer is in
progress. The transfer takes about four minutes. When the source computer completes
sending the program, it displays the letters Ok and the flashing cursor prompt. At the same
time, the destination computer should also display the letters Ok and the flashing cursor
prompt indicating that it has received the program.
STEP 9. On the destination computer, enter SAVE "M300" and press <ENTER>. This command
causes the destination computer to save the program with the name M300.
STEP 10. On the destination computer, press <F8> to return to the top menu, then select M300.BA by
moving the cursor to the word M300.BA and pressing <ENTER>. Observe the designation
v3.0 in the upper right-hand corner of the display, verifying that DIU Configuration Editor
version 3.0 has been transferred.
16-1-6
6-28-95
APPENDIX A
PES REMOTE ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A An abbreviation for amperes.
AC/ac An abbreviation for alternating current.
ACBS Autocommissioning Burst Statistics
ACK Acknowledge.
Actuator A motorized, mechanical arm that is used to change the direction of the
satellite receiving antenna for satellite tracking purposes.
ADB Automatic Dial Backup.
AEU An abbreviation for the Auxiliary Electronics Unit, part of PES Type 1 remote
equipment. The AEU is mounted on the antenna mast and performs digital to
analog conversions and modulation/demodulation functions.
AFC An abbreviation for Automatic Frequency Control. An electronic circuit that

is used to keep the receiver locked onto the selected channel. Whenever the
circuit senses that the receiver is drifting out of tune, the AFC automatically
readjusts the receiver back to the channel’s center frequency.
AGC An abbreviation for Automatic Gain Control. An electronic circuit that is

used to monitor the output signal strength, with respect to the input signal
strength, in order to maintain a constant level of output strength despite input
signal amplitude fluctuations.
ALC An abbreviation for Automatic Level Control. Maintains constant output

power from the RF Unit, as indicated by the power level setting.
ALOHA A method of "random" Time-Division Multiplex Access (TDMA) in which a

channel request signal is sent from a remote site to a Hub (via a satellite) prior
to actual data transmission. The Hub receives the request signal and then
calculates a time-slot in a given frequency band during which the remote PES
can perform data transmission.
Amp An abbreviation for amperes or amplifier.
ANSI An abbreviation for American National Standards Institute.
Antenna A device that couples radio energy within a waveguide or wire to open space
(or vice versa). In the remote PES, the antenna is the RF Head feedhorn and
the parabolic reflector.
Aperture The diameter of the main reflector of an antenna.
ARM Attached Roof Mount.
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit.
A-1-1
Asynch An Abbreviation for asynchronous.
Audio Subcarrier A separate frequency, offset from the satellite channel’s main carrier, that is
used to transmit the sound portion of a TV program. Subcarriers are also used
to transmit radio station signals.
AWG American Wire Gauge.
AZ/EL An abbreviation for Azimuth/Elevation.
Azimuth One of two coordinates used to align a dish onto a satellite. The azimuth is
expressed in degrees and indicates the angular difference between North and
the beam axis.
Band A group of adjacent frequencies that can contain a number of separate radio
and/or TV signals.
Baseband The combined video and audio signals prior to processing.
Baud The basic unit of modulation rate or signaling speed. The "speed" in baud is
always the shortest discrete conditions or signal events per second. The baud
rate does not always correlate directly to the "bit" rate since several signal
elements may be required to represent a bit.
BCD Burst Channel Demodulator. A specialized frequency agile demodulator

located at the Hub which demodulates inroute signals received from the PES
remotes.
Beacon A satellite signal that is not relayed but originates at the satellite. It is
intended for reception by the operating engineers; it lets them get a fix on the
satellite’s position as well as the status of the equipment onboard.
Bit Binary digit. Can be either a 1 or a 0.
B-MAC 17
TM
A method of video encryption/decryption employed by Scientific Atlanta
video IRDs.
BNC An abbreviation for bayonet Neill-Concelman. A type of connector

commonly used for UHF and VHF radio communications that is named after
the inventor.
BPS An abbreviation for bits-per-second.
BPSK An abbreviation for Binary Phase Shift Keying. A method of representing

bits by shifting (with respect to reference) the "phase" of an electromagnetic
carrier wave.
Burst In a TDMA network, a burst is RF energy emitted by one of the transmitters

in the network during its assigned time slot. Burst types include Reference,
Communications, and Traffic Bursts.
17B-MAC is a registered trademark of Scientific Atlanta, Inc.
A-2
APPENDIX A - PES REMOTE ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
Byte Eight bits. The contents of a byte are conveniently represented as two
hexadecimal digits.
C.B. Circuit breaker.
C Band A range of frequencies between 3.7 and 4.2 GigaHertz that has been assigned
to both satellite and terrestrial communications.
Cable TV A video distribution system that uses coaxial cable to transmit TV signals into
the homes of subscribers.
Carrier The center frequency of any satellite signal.
CAU Controlled Access Unit. Part of Token-Ring LAN.
CCA An abbreviation for Circuit Card Assembly. An HNS term for a fully
assembled, field-replaceable module (e.g., the IFM module).
CCM Channel Control Module.
CCIR An abbreviation for the Consultive Committee for International Radio. An

internationally-recognized body that has set the standards for radio and
television transmission and reception.
CCRM Cushioned Cross Roof Mount. See CMM.
CCW An abbreviation for counterclockwise. Used to specify a direction with

respect to a circular motion.
CD Carrier Detect - RS-232 modem control signal.
CELP Code Excited Linear Predictive - the method used by the VDPC and EVIM to
encode and decode voice signals.
CER An Abbreviation for Channel Error Rate.
Channel (1) A logical link between two stations that allows data to pass between them.
Routing details need not be specified (see Path). (2) A region in space
between a transmitter and a receiver.
Clarke Belt A circular orbit used by communications satellites that is located 22,300 miles
above the equator. Only within the Clarke Belt can a satellite achieve a
geosynchronous (stationary) orbit where its location (relative to the earth)
does not change.
CLK Clock Signal.
CMM Cross Mast Mount. A non-penetrating mast mount with integral concrete
block ballast arranged in a cross pattern.
C/N An abbreviation for Carrier-to-Noise. A commonly encountered ratio that is

expressed in decibels or dBs; the C/N ratio expresses the relationship between
the level of incoming signal and the amount of noise that is received along
with it. The higher the C/N ratio of any incoming signal, the better.
A-3
CODEC Coder/decoder - a device which digitizes a waveform employing a data

reduction technique and reconstructs waveforms from digital data employing
the same technique.
Coaxial Cable A type of shielded wire cable that has two concentric conducting surfaces and
is used for connecting high frequency communications components together.
COLC Central Office Line Card - a daughter card used on a VDPC for a 2-wire
connector to a telephone.
Continuous Wave Radio energy being emitted at a single frequency at constant amplitude.
CONUS Acronym for Continental United States (all states except Alaska and Hawaii).
Couple A method of allowing a signal to pass from one piece of equipment to

another, ideally with a minimum of distortion and attenuation.
CPC Compact Port Card. One of the plug-in modules that may be contained in the
PES indoor unit. Provides up to four data ports using one built-in PLC and
one plug-in PLC.
CPU An abbreviation for Central Processing Unit.
CRC An abbreviation for Cyclic Redundancy Check. Two bytes of checking

information embedded in the transmitted information used to detect link level
errors.
CTS Clear To Send - RS-232 modem control signal.
CW An abbreviation for clockwise. Used to specify a direction for a circular

motion.
DAP Demand Assignment Processor.
dB An abbreviation for decibel. A unit of measurement that expresses the gain or

attenuation factor (as 10 times the logarithm to the base 10 of a power ratio)
between two signals in the form of a ratio; where, the denominator consists of
a reference value and the numerator consists of the value to be measured.
dBm An abbreviation for "decibels referred to 1 milliwatt."
DBS An abbreviation for Direct Broadcast Satellites operating in the 12.2 to 12.7
GHz frequency band that has been set aside for use by services which intend
to directly supply the consumer with satellite TV programming.
dBW An abbreviation for "decibels referred to 1 watt."
DC/dc An abbreviation for direct current.
DCE An abbreviation for Data Communications Equipment as specified in RS-232.

The interface equipment (e.g., a modem) that couples data terminal equipment
(DTE) to a transmission circuit or channel. A DCE device outputs (drives) a
signal named "Received data" on pin 3 and accepts an input signal named
"Transmitted data" on pin 2.
A-4
DCI Digital Control Interface. A circuit card within the AEU.
Decoder A device that allows reception of encoded programs.
Degrees Kelvin A unit of measurement used to express the noise temperature of a LNA.
DEGS An abbreviation for degrees.
Demodulation The process retrieving information from a modulated (analog) carrier voltage.
Demodulator A device or circuit that performs the process of demodulation.
Descrambler A device used to decode scrambled TV signals.
Direct Stereo A method of transmitting stereo sound via satellite whereby the left and right
stereo sound channels are each given a separate audio subcarrier to use.
Dish A satellite receiving antenna.
DIU An abbreviation for Digital Interface Unit, a PES Type 1 indoor unit. The
DIU is a part of the indoor equipment where it provides processing and
transmission of port-specific, group-specific, or global control data packets.
DIU/O An abbreviation for Digital Interface Unit/O. A PES Type 2 indoor unit or
C-band indoor unit.
DMA Direct Memory Access.
DMAC Direct Memory Access Controller.
DMBU Dial Modem Backup Unit system. The DMBU allows a PES Hub to
communicate with co-located EDIUs without using a space link. The
co-located EDIUs connected to the DMBU are equipped with phone modems
and provide a backup capability to the remote population at large. The Hub
operator can connect remote site equipment to one of the Hub co-located
EDIU ports via phone modem upon remote PES failure or satellite outage.
(The DMBU feature and equipment are in the developmental stage at this
writing.)
DMC Dual Voice Grade Modem Card. A PES circuit card that provides the
functions of two modems.
Downconverter A device that translates the frequency of the incoming satellite signals down
to a lower band of IF frequencies without distorting the spectrum.
Downlink The RF signals beamed from a satellite to the earth.
DP An abbreviation for Data Port card. One of the plug-in modules contained
within the PES indoor unit. This abbreviation is used on the card ejector
handle and throughout this book to refer to a remote data port card.
Elsewhere, in the PES system a remote data port card may be referred to as a
RDPC. DP and RDPC are synonymous.
DPC These letters refer to a Hub data port cluster. A Hub data port cluster, DPC, is
different than a remote data port card, DP or RDPC.
A-5
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory.
DSR Data Set Ready - RS-232 modem control signal.
DTE An abbreviation for Data Terminal Equipment as specified in RS-232. The

equipment that comprises the data source (i.e. terminal, or computer). A DTE
device accepts as input a signal named "Received data" on pin 3 and outputs
(drives) a signal named "Transmitted data" on pin 2.
DTMF An abbreviation for Dual Tone Multifrequency. A method of signaling which

employs fixed combinations of two specific voice frequencies to indicate
telephone address digits (i.e., pushbutton phone).
DTR Data Terminal Ready - a modem control signal used in the RS-232
communications specification system.
Dual Feed A type of feedhorn that allows two LNAs - one set to each polarity - to be
installed on a single dish. Used by cable TV operators who need
simultaneous access to both horizontally and vertically polarized channels
from a given satellite.
DUART An abbreviation for Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver/ Transmitter. A

full-duplex circuit or device that can receive data in a serial fashion and
transmit the same data in a parallel fashion, and vice versa.
DVM Digital Voltmeter.
E & M Signaling A telephone signaling technique in which the communication between a

portion of a circuit and a separate signaling unit is accomplished using the "E"
and the "M" leads present in a 4-wire telephone circuit. The E lead rEceives
open or ground signals from the signaling unit and the M lead transMits
battery or ground signals to the signaling unit.
Earth station A complete satellite receiving system.
Eb/No A mathematical expression for the theoretical "signal-to-noise" ratio present

on a digital communications channel.
ECM Echo Canceller Module.
EDIU An abbreviation for Expanded Digital Interface Unit. The EDIU is an indoor
unit chassis that can accommodate up to 15 port cards. The EDIU is
applicable to PES type 1 and PES type 2.
EEPROM An abbreviation for Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory.

This type of computer memory retains its content when the power is removed
from the circuit (non-volatile memory) but can be changed from time to time.
EIA Electronics Industries Association.
EIRP An abbreviation for Effective Isotropic Radiated Power - A measurement of

the amount of power transmitted that is usually expressed in dBW (decibels
referred to one watt).
A-6
ELAN Ethernet Local Area Network PLC, which installs on TP. Requires
supplemental EMI devices when installed in Europe.
EOP End of Program
Elevation One of two coordinates used in the alignment of a dish onto a satellite, it is the
angle between the beam axis and the horizon.
ESD An abbreviation for Electrostatic Discharge.
EVIM Enhanced Voice Interface Module (Hub companion circuit card required for
VDPC and CELP).
EVIM I/O Enhanced Voice Interface Module Input/Output Card. The EVIM I/O is a
new board, similar to the VIM I/O, but with the capability to mount two FIM
daughter cards. It also provides capability for E&M types 1 thru 5 telco
interfaces, whereas the VIM I/O only has types 1 and 2.
F Connector A type of coaxial cable connector used in cable TV and satellite systems.
Fade The reduction in received signal strength, usually due to atmospheric

moisture.
FCC An abbreviation for Federal Communications Commission. An official body

of the United States government that regulates communications technologies.
FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface. A high-performance, general-purpose,

multistation network designed for efficient operation with a peak data transfer
rate of 100 Mbps. It uses token-ring architecture with optical fiber as the
transmission medium over distances of several kilometers.
FDMA An abbreviation for Frequency-Division Multiple Access. A method used in

satellite systems which provides multiple and simultaneous transmission to a
single transponder using various frequencies within a given frequency
bandwidth.
Feedhorn One of the main components in any satellite receiving system, the feedhorn
collects the satellite signals that are reflected to the focal point of the dish and
feeds them to the system’s LNA (e.g., RF Unit).
FIM Fax Interface Module - a daughter card for VDPC providing facsimile
transmission over the space link using much less bandwidth than would be
required without it.
FIR Finished Installation Report.
FLL Frequency Locked Loop.
Focal Distance The distance between the vertex of the dish and the focal point of the antenna.
Focal Length Same as focal distance.
Focal Point As the satellite signals reflect off the surface of the dish, they are focused onto
A-7
a common point - called the focal point - that is located to the front and center
of the antenna.
Footprint The portion of the earth’s surface that is illuminated by the beam of a satellite
transmitter.
FRU Field Replaceable Unit.
FSB Field Service Bulletin.
FSM Finite State Machine
Geosynchronous Orbit An orbit located 22,300 miles above the equator at which a satellite can
maintain stationary position relative to positions on the earth’s surface.
GFI Ground Fault Interrupter. A type of circuit breaker or receptacle with circuit
breaker that opens when excessive ground current is sensed.
GHz An abbreviation for GigaHertz. A frequency of one billion cycles per second.
GI An abbreviation for General Instruments, Cable Home Group. A

manufacturer and supplier for PES video equipment.
HDC An abbreviation for High Density Chassis. The HDC is an indoor unit chassis
that can accommodate up to 13 port cards. The HDC is applicable to PES
X000 series.
HDLC An abbreviation for High-level Data Link Control. A bit synchronous

communications protocol with sliding window automatic recovery quotient
(ARQ).
HEX An abbreviation for hexadecimal. A method of notation that uses a base (or
radix) of 16. Digits are: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,A,B,C,D,E,F. Two hexadecimal
characters are often used to represent one byte (8 bits) of information.
HIAM Here I Am Message.
HNS Hughes Network Systems. The manufacturer of the PES (formerly

M/A-COM Telecommunications, Inc.).
Hz An abbreviation for Hertz. A measurement of frequency in cycles per second,

named after the German scientist Heinrich Hertz who discovered the
properties of radio waves.
IC An abbreviation for Integrated Circuit.
IDM Indoor Demodulator. A circuit card required in PES Type 2 indoor units.
IF An abbreviation for Intermediate frequency. The input signal to the

upconverter and the output signal from the downconverter; also, the input
signal to the video satellite receiver.
IFL An abbreviation for Interfacility Link Cable. The interface cable between the
outdoor equipment and the indoor equipment.
A-8
IFM Intermediate Frequency Module. An essential circuit card for PES X000
series remotes.
IFM+ Intermediate Frequency Module Plus. A circuit card used in PES 6000, 8000,
and 9000 which provides the interface to the RF Unit-LS (RFU-LS) or to the
RF Unit (RFU).
IFR An abbreviation for Initial Fault Report.
Inclinometer A measuring device that can be used to determine the elevation angle of the
antenna.
INIT Initialization.
IOC An abbreviation for Inroute-Outroute Controller card. One of the plug-in

modules contained within the PES Type 1 DIU, PES Type 1 EDIU, or PES
Type 2 DIU/O.
IOC ASIC Inroute/Outroute Controller Application Specific Integrated Circuit. An

integrated circuit which is part of the backplane of PES X000 other than PES
5000 series indoor units (IOC chip). For PES 5000, it is located on the
integrated port card (IPC).
IPC Integrated Port Card - an essential circuit card of the PES 5000 indoor unit.
The IPC is the upper circuit card in the unit.
IRD Integrated Receiver Decoder. A receiver for satellite video signals that also
can decode scrambled signals.
IRR Interrupt Request Register bit
ISBN An abbreviation for Integrated Satellite Business Networks.
Isotropic Antenna An imaginary antenna conceived by engineers that is used for gain
measurement purposes.
ISR Interrupt Service Request
kbps An abbreviation for kilobits per second.
Key Set A pushbutton telephone wherein the buttons are used for intercom, holding,
signaling, and/or pickup of additional telephone lines.
kHz An abbreviation for kilohertz. A frequency of one thousand cycles per

second.
KSU Key Set Unit. An essential component of a key telephone system.
KTS Key Telephone System. A key telephone system allows a station set to be
used to pick up and/or hold one of several lines or trunks. Some have only
one station or line and others have up to 40 stations or lines. Most key station
sets are provided with pushbutton access to 6, 10, or 20 lines. These systems
also provide for intercom between stations of the system. The circuits that
A-9
terminate at a key telephone set may be PBX station lines or any of a number
of central office connections including loops, private lines, foreign exchange
(FX) lines, wide area telecommunications service (WATS) lines, long
distance (LD) lines, or 2-wire satellite phone lines.
Ku Band A range of frequencies between 11.7 and 12.7 GigaHertz that has been set
aside for use by communications satellites.
LAM Lobe Attachment Module. Part of a Token-Ring LAN.
LAN Local Area Network.
LAN PLC A special purpose Port Level Conversion module daughter card that can be
placed on a turbo port card to provide an interface to a Local Area Network.
Presently two types of LAN PLCs are available: the token-ring LAN PLC,
the TLAN; and the ethernet LAN PLC, the ELAN.
LAT or Latitude One of the two basic coordinates used for determining locations on earth.
Latitude lines are circles parallel to the equator.
LED An abbreviation for Light Emitting Diode.
LHCP Left-Hand Circular Polarization.
LIM Line Interface Module. Used at the Hub.
Linear Polarization The polarization format used by North America’s domestic satellites.
LNA An abbreviation for Low Noise Amplifier.
LNB An abbreviation for Low Noise Block downconverter.
LNC An abbreviation for Low Noise amplifier and downconverter. As used in the
context of PES X000 series, LNB and LNC mean the same thing.
LONG. or Longitude One of the two basic coordinates used to establish the position of any location
on earth. Longitude lines are great circles that pass through the North and
South Poles.
Look angle The angle between a direction of sight and a reference direction.
LOS An abbreviation for line-of-sight.
LRV Low Rate Voice - voice system employing CELP by the VDPC and EVIM
circuit cards.
LSB An abbreviation for Least Significant Bit. However, in the PES application
program DIALOG, LSB stands for Least Significant Byte (8 bits).
M Meter. Used in conjunction with antenna size.
MAC An abbreviation for M/A-COM Communications, manufacturer of one type of

PES Type 1 RF Heads.
A-10
Magnetic Declination The angle between magnetic north and true north.
MAU Multistation Access Unit. Part of Token-Ring LAN.
MBR Minimum Boot ROM. Refers to a type of IOC, DP, or VDP circuit card.
MBR circuit cards can only operate in a release 4 or higher network. Only
MBR circuit cards take full advantage of the features of release 5. MBR
circuit cards cannot operate in the same PES indoor unit with non-MBR
circuit cards.
MHz An abbreviation for MegaHertz. A frequency of one million cycles per

second.
Microprocessor A usually single-chip computer element that contains the control unit, central
processing circuitry, and arithmetic and logic functions suitable for use in
microcomputer system.
Microwave Interference Interference caused to satellite receiving systems by terrestial users of

microwave frequencies.
Microwaves Super high frequencies RF energy that can be used for communications
purposes.
MINS An abbreviation for minutes.
Modem A circuit or device that can perform both MODulation and DEModulation
functions.
Modulation The process of changing a carrier signal to represent video, audio, or digital
information.
Modulator A device or circuit that produces a modulated (analog) signal.
MP Multiport Card. One of the plug-in modules that may be contained in the PES
indoor unit. Provides up to eight data ports using up to 4 PLCs.
MSB An abbreviation for Most Significant Bit. However, in the PES applications
program DIALOG, MSB stands for Most Significant Byte (8 bits of
information).
MS-DOS The disk operating system of IBM-PC or compatible type computers.

Commonly used to signify an IBM-PC or compatible computer.
MTEL An abbreviation for M/A-COM Telecommunications, now Hughes Network

Systems.
NACK Negative acknowledge.
NC An abbreviation for "no connection."
NMI Non-maskable Interrupt
NPMM Non-Penetration Mast Mount.
A-11
NPRM Non-Penetration Roof Mount.
NSF No such file message.
NSP Network Supervisory Processor - equipment at Hub.
NTSC An abbreviation for National Television Systems Committee, but commonly

used to define the 525-line video standard that is used by the U.S., Canada,
Japan, the Philippines, and most of Central and South America with the
exception of Brazil and Argentina.
OBW An alternate designation for the Integrated Port Card (IPC) - an essential
circuit card of the PES 5000 indoor unit. The IPC is the upper circuit card in
the unit.
O.D. An abbreviation for Outside Diameter. Used in cable specification

documents.
ODE The PES Type 2 based C-Band Outdoor Equipment including the RF Head,
voltage regulator, feedhorn, transmit/receive interface adapter, and low noise
amplifier.
ODLC An abbreviation for Omnisat Data Link Control. A protocol for space link
communications between the data port cards.
ODU The PES Type 2 Ku-Band Outdoor Unit including a two-way radio with
attached feedhorn.
Offset Focus A type of antenna feed where the feedhorn and LNA are positioned "offset"
with respect to the center of the dish (e.g., the 1.2M or 1.8M antenna’s RF
Unit location relative to the dish).
Ohms The basic unit of resistance, reactance, or impedance.
OOS Out of Service
OMT Orthomode Transducer.
Orbital Location The position over the equator that is occupied by a geosynchronous
communications satellite.
PABX An abbreviation for Private Automatic Branch Exchange. A Private Branch

Exchange (PBX) in which connections are made automatically and there is no
operator intervention.
Packet A unit of data transferred over the satellite link. Called a "frame" in HDLC
and SDLC protocol definitions. Called a packet in the ODLC to avoid
confusion with the outroute frame.
PAD Packet Assembler/Disassembler.
Parabolic Antenna An antenna with a surface that conforms to the shape of a parabola.
A-12
Path A logical link specifying the routing between two stations allowing them to
exchange data.
PBX Private Branch Exchange. For purposes of this book and in general usage,
PBX should be taken to mean a private automated branch exchange.
PC 1. An abbreviation for a personal computer, usually meaning an IBM Personal

Computer used to run the diagnostic debugger software.
2. An abbreviation for port card(s), meaning the data port cards (DP),
multiport (MP), turbo port (TP), and voice data port cards (VDP) used in the
PES indoor unit.
PCM Pulse Code Modulation.
PES An abbreviation for Personal Earth Station.
PIC Programmable Interrupt Controller.
PLC Port Level Conversion Module. A daughter circuit card which can be placed
on a multiport card or turbo port card to provide a specific interface standard
or function.
PLCC Plastic Leaded Chip Carrier - a particular type of package for an integrated
circuit.
Plenum Cable A type of cable that is placed in the air conditioning ducts and "plenum" in a
building. It has a teflon shield that resists high temperatures and burning
during a fire.
PLL Phase Locked Loop.
PLR Packet Loss Rate.
Plumb Bob A metal weight attached to a line which indicates a vertical direction.
PMM Plate Mast Mount.
P/N An abbreviation for Part Number.
Polarization The orientation of an RF signal in space.
Prime focus The type of antenna feed where the feedhorn and LNA are positioned to the
front and center of the dish (e.g., the 2.44M antenna’s RF Head location
relative to the dish).
PROM An acronym for Programmable Read-Only Memory. Used in a computer, a

ROM which contains programs stored by the use of a PROM programmer.
PVC Cable A type of cable that has a polyvinyl chloride jacket.
R An abbreviation for "Ring" which, in a telephone circuit, indicates the receive

side of the circuit.
A-13
RAM An acronym for Random Access Memory. A volatile storage memory that
provides extremely fast access to any memory location within the memory
"map" regardless of the address.
RDPC Remote Data Port Card. One of the plug-in modules contained within the
PES indoor unit. An RDPC has the letters DP on its card ejector handles.
RDPC and DP are synonymous.
RELP An acronym for Residual Exciter Linear Predictive vocoder algorithm. A

method of reducing and reconstructing a speech waveform so that a minimum
number of bits may be transmitted between stations. The RELP algorithm
permits good voice quality at a medium data rate of 8 to 16 kbps, where a data
rate of 64 kbps would be required without RELP.
RF An abbreviation for Radio Frequency. Modulated signals that are radiated

and received by the antenna.
RFB Radio Frequency Board. An essential circuit card in PES Type 2 indoor units
and C-band indoor units based on PES Type 2.
RFH An abbreviation for the RF Head in a PES system. The box-shaped PES Type
1 RF Head is mounted on the feed support arm of the antenna and provides
analog receive and transmit functions.
RFT An abbreviation for a Radio Frequency Transceiver. The RFT in a PES

system includes the audio and antenna.
RF Unit or RFU The radio for PES X000 series remote terminals. The RF Unit is mounted on
the feed support arm of the antenna and provides analog receive and transmit
functions.
RFU-LS The radio for PES X000+ remote terminals. The RFU-LS must operate in
conjunction with an IFM+.
RG-11 A coax cable type or specification.
RG-59 A coax cable type or specification.
RHCP Right-Hand Circular Polarization.
RI Ring Indicator - RS-232 Modem Control Signal.
RJ-11 A modular, plug-in, telephone cable connector.
ROM An acronym for Read-Only Memory. A nonvolatile memory in which

instructions or data are permanently stored. The stored information is "read
out" nondestructively. No subsequent information can be written into the
memory in the field.
RRD Remote Reconciliation Descriptor.
RS-232-C An abbreviation or notation for Electronic Industries Association (EIA)
A-14
Recommended Standard number 232, revision C. A document that describes

the interface specifications and characteristics between a DTE device and a
DCE device for the transfer of serial data.
RSD Remote Specific Descriptor.
RVPC Remote Voice Port Card. Usually taken to mean a two-card voice port set -
either a VDP/VP TEL or VDP/VP PBX combination.
Rx An abbreviation for "Receive."
RXSOF Receive start of frame signal
SB An abbreviation for Signal Battery.
SBS An abbreviation for Satellite Business Systems.
SCC System Control Center or Serial Communications Controller, depending upon

context.
SCP System Control Processor - equipment at Hub.
SCPC An abbreviation for Single Channel Per Carrier. An alternate means of

transmitting audio signals that is used in certain instances by INTELSAT in
lieu of a standard audio subcarrier.
Scrambler An electronic component that alters television signals, preventing their

unauthorized reception.
Scrambling The process of encrypting a TV signal so that unauthorized reception cannot

take place.
SFH Superframe Header. A major marking point in the outroute signal.
SG An abbreviation for Signal Ground.
SHF An abbreviation for Super High Frequency. Frequencies within the 3- to

30-GHz range.
Sidelobe A portion of an antenna’s radiated beam which is radiated at an angle other

than the antenna’s main beam axis.
Signal Splitter A device that divides a single input signal into two or more outputs of equal
power.
Skew Adjust A control on many receivers which allows you to fine tune the polarization of
the system.
SO Cable A power cable type or specification.
SOC An acronym for System Operator’s Console. A terminal used by the Hub
operator during the operation of the PES network.
STC System Timing Counter.
A-15
STD Standard
STP Shielded Twisted Pair cable.
Subcarrier A separate frequency offset from the satellite channel’s main carrier that is
used to transmit the sound portion of a TV program. Subcarriers are also used
to transmit radio station signals.
Synchronization The process of becoming correctly aligned in time. In a TDMA subnetwork,

all stations must be correctly synchronized so that the transmitted bursts from
different stations do not occur simultaneously and interfere with one another.
SYSCLK System Clock signal.
T An abbreviation for "Tip." In a telephone circuit, usually indicates the

"transmit" side of the circuit.
TBD To be determined. Information not presently available.
TDM An abbreviation for Time-Division Multiplexing. In the case of the PES

outroute, the Hub is transmitting a continuous stream of data packets to the
remotes. Each packet in the bit stream is assigned a non-fixed time slot and is
addressed to a specific remote. The PES remote "looks" at the continuous
stream of packets (via the address) in order to "pick out" the information that
would pertain to the individual remote.
TDMA An abbreviation for Time-Division Multiple Access. A method in which

multiple, but not simultaneous, inroute information is transmitted to the
satellite from the PES remotes via the allocation of a specific "time slots."
TI An abbreviation for Terrestial Interference. Locally-based microwave signals

which interfere with satellite TV reception.
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association.
Ticks Used in reference to timing offset, 1 "tick" is approximately equal to 600

nanoseconds.
TLAN Token-Ring Local Area Network PLC which installs on the TP.
TM An abbreviation for Technical Manual.
Tmax A designation for the maximum transmit power value for a particular PES
type 1 RF Head.
TP Turbo Port card. One of the plug-in modules that may be contained in the
PES indoor unit. Also identified as "TPC." The TPC can accommodate LAN
PLCs such as the ELAN or TLAN.
Translation The process by which the satellite transponder changes the frequencies
received on the uplink and retransmits the information contained in those
signals on different downlink frequencies.
A-16
Transponder An acronym for TRANSmitter and reSPONDER. A radio transmitter-

receiver that automatically transmits when the proper signals are received.
Triaxial Cable A cable with three concentric conducting surfaces.
TRM Transmit Receive Module - an essential circuit card of the PES 5000 indoor
unit. The TRM is the lower circuit card in the unit.
TST Test
TTLC Tie Trunk Line Card - a daughter card for VDPC providing a "4-wire"
connection to a PBX.
TVRO An abbreviation for Television Receive-Only - Satellite TV receiving system.
TWT An abbreviation for Traveling Wave Tube - A microwave tube that uses a
special process to obtain a power gain in order to transmit a microwave
signal.
TWTA An abbreviation for Traveling Wave Tube Amplifier. An amplifier using a

Traveling Wave Tube (TWT).
Tx An abbreviation for "transmit."
UART An abbreviation for Universal Asynchronous Receiver/ Transmitter. A

full-duplex circuit or device that can receive data in a serial fashion and
transmit the same data in a parallel fashion, and vice versa.
UHF An abbreviation for Ultra High Frequency. A frequency between 300 MHz
and 3 GHz.
Uplink The RF signals beamed from the earth to the satellite.
UTM Universal Tripod Mount.
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair cable.
Vac/VAC An abbreviation for Volts, Alternating Current.
VCM Voice Codec Module.
VCR An abbreviation for Video Cassette Recorder. A machine that can record
video programs on magnetic tape.
A-17
VDP An abbreviation for Voice Data Port. One of the plug-in modules located
within the PES indoor unit used for voice applications (RELP voice
algorithm).
VDPC Voice Data Port Card - a PES remote circuit card that operates in conjunction
with Hub EVIM to provide CELP voice encoding/decoding and other
features. Distinguished from VDP, an earlier and incompatible remote voice
circuit card.
VHF An abbreviation for Very High Frequency. A frequency within the 30- to
300-MHz range.
VHS One of two video cassette tape formats; also refers to a specific type of video
cassette recorder.
Video Electronically-encoded visual information.
VOC Virtual Operator Console - a terminal used by the Hub operator during the
operation of the PES network.
VP PBX An abbreviation for Voice Port, Private Branch Exchange card. One of the
plug-in modules located in the DIU used for voice and telephone applications
which require a PBX.
VP TEL An abbreviation for Voice Port, Telephone card. One of the plug-in modules
located in the DIU used for applications which require a push button (or
DTMF) telephone.
Waveguide A carefully dimensioned, hollow, metal pipe through which microwave

energy is transmitted. Waveguides are usually, but not always, rectangular.
Weather Margin The amount of power, in excess of the minimum, required for operation under
ideal conditions in order to continue operating during periods of signal loss or
bad weather.
WM Wall Mount.
X000 Series A PES remote product that has a PES indoor unit which includes an IFM and
TM
outdoor equipment which includes an RF Unit (for example, PES 6000 , PES
TM TM
8000 , or PES 9000 ).
A-18
4-3-92
APPENDIX B
INSTALLING PES MODEL 4000 (RECEIVE-ONLY) OUTDOOR
EQUIPMENT
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
The PES Model 4000 (receive-only) outdoor equipment, figure 1-1 for the 0.75M and 1.0M rectangular
antennas and figure 1-2 for 1.2M, 1.8M, 2.4M, and 3.8M circular antennas, connects via the IFL cable to
PES Model 4000 Indoor Unit. (Refer to document number 802079102, "Personal Earth Station Model
4000 Indoor Unit Installation and Maintenance Manual.") The IFL cable is the same length and type as
for other PES Model X000 series products. Section 2 provides outdoor equipment assembly instructions
for rectangular antennas, section 3 for circular antennas, and section 4 has special antenna aiming
information for receive only PES.
PES3-1315
Figure 1-1. PES Receive-Only Equipment for Rectangular Antennas
B-1-1
PES3-1367
Figure 1-2. PES Receive-Only Equipment for Circular Antennas
B-1-2
4-3-92
4-3-92
APPENDIX B - INSTALLING PES MODEL 4000 (RECEIVE-ONLY) OUTDOOR
EQUIPMENT
SECTION 2 - ASSEMBLING RECEIVE-ONLY OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT - RECTANGULAR ANTENNAS
Section 2
ASSEMBLING RECEIVE-ONLY OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT - RECTANGULAR ANTENNAS
The PES Model 4000 receive-only outdoor equipment for rectangular antennas (figure 2-1) consists of a
rectangular feedhorn coupled to an LNB by a special machined disk called a "transition." A receive-only
mounting bracket holds the assembly in the proper position on the radio support. Table 2-1 lists the parts
of the receive-only outdoor equipment. Table 2-1 lists four different receive-only kits based upon the
LNB receive frequency bands. Make sure you have the correct LNB for your site. Perform the following
steps:
STEP 1. Locate the 0198-125 (1.112 ID x 0.103) O-ring. (Note: There are two different size O-rings,
figures 2-2 and 2-3. The 0198-125 is the thicker one, figure 2-2.) Apply silicone grease from
the pink capsule to the 0198-125 O-ring and place it in the groove in the end of the LNB,
figure 2-4. Then, attach the transition to the LNB using four screws in the counter sunk
holes. The holes in LNB are arranged so that the transition will attach in the correct
orientation.
STEP 2. Locate the 0198-120 (0.926 x 0.070) O-ring (figure 2-3), apply silicone grease to it and place
it in the groove in the feedhorn. Determine if the satellite transponder for this site provides a
horizontally or vertically polarized downlink signal. (Refer to chapter 11, section 2, Antenna
Aiming, Setting Polarization.) Attach the feedhorn to the transition in the appropriate
horizontal or vertical downlink position as shown in figure 2-4.
STEP 3. Attach the feedhorn to the receive-only mounting bracket, sliding the feedhorn back until the
angled portion is against the clamp as shown in figure 2-1.
STEP 4. Attach the receive-only mounting bracket to the radio support.
STEP 5. Attach the F-to-N adapter to the rear of the LNB.
B-2-1
INSTALLATION OF RECTANGLE FEEDHORN

FOR RECEIVE-ONLY APPLICATIONS
13 FEED CLAMP
TOP BRACKET 7
5/16-18 X .75" BOLT
6
#6-32 X .50" SCREW (6)
5
#6 LOCKWASHER (6)
SLIDE FEEDHORN
BACK TO THIS POINT 3
O-RING (0198-121)
17
LNB MOUNTING SCREW (4)
2
FEEDHORN TRANSITION 0202-068 11
O-RING (0198-125) 16
LNB 1
7 7 14
F/N ADAPTER
10 5/16-18 X .75" BOLT
5/16" LOCKWASHER
& HEX NUT 8 5/16" FLATWASHER
9 9
12
RECEIVE-ONLY
MOUNTING BRACKET
(0211-448)
9 9
5/16" FLATWASHER
10 10
RADIO SUPPORT 5/16" LOCKWASHER
8 8
5/16-18 HEX NUT
NOTE: ATTACH TRANSITION TO LNB BEFORE ATTACHING FEEDHORN
PES3-1313
Figure 2-1. Receive-Only Outdoor Equipment for Rectangular Antennas
B-2-2
EQUIPMENT
Table 2-1. PES Receive-Only Rectangular Antenna Parts List
Item HNS Prodelin Quantity

Number Part No. Part No. Description Required
-- 1013502-0001 -- 11.70-12.20 Rx Only Kit, U.S. & Canada 1

1 1011836-0017 -- LNB (11.70-12.20 GHz) 1
14 9003769-0002 -- F-to-N Connector Adapter 1
or or or
-- 1013502-0002 -- 12.25-12.75 Rx Only Kit, European Intl 1
1 1011836-0018 -- LNB (12.25-12.75 GHz) 1
or or or
-- 1013502-0003 -- 10.95-11.70 Rx Only Kit, Asian Intl 1
1 1011836-0019 -- LNB (10.95-11.70 GHz) 1
or or or
1 1011836-0020 -- LNB (11.45-11.70 GHz) 1
2 3000172-0002 0800-107 Rectangular Feedhorn 1*
-- -- 0200-604 Rectangular Feedhorn Assembly 1*
Kit, Hardware
3 -- 0198-120 O-ring (0.926 ID x 0.067) 1*
-- -- 0268-003 Allen Wrench, 7/64 Short Arm 1*
4 -- 0432-036 Grease, Sil. #3P. PILL 1/2 FIL 1*
5 -- 8200-010 Lockwasher, #6 Internal Tooth 6*
6 -- 8300-002 Screw, SH, #6-32 x .50 S.S. 6*
-- 3000352-0001 0800-056 Rect. Rx/O Feed Mounting Bracket
(includes items 7 thru 13, and 16 and 17)
-- N/A 0200-032 Kit, Hardware, Rx/Mounting Bracket 1
7 N/A 8031-006 Bolt, HHCS 5/16-18 x 3/4 4
8 N/A 8101-009 Nut, Hex 5/16-18 4
9 N/A 8201-041 Flatwasher, 5/16 4
10 N/A 8202-041 Lockwasher, 5/16 4
11 N/A 0202-068 Transition, WC75 to WR75 1
12 N/A 0211-448 Bracket, Rectangular Feedhorn 1
Mounting, Receive-Only
13 N/A 0211-449 Bracket, Feed Clamp-Top 1
-- N/A 0200-037 Kit Hardware - LNB MTG --
16 0198-125 O-ring (1.112 ID x 0.103) 1
17 8308-021 Screw, M4 x 0.7, 12mm Long 4
Filister Hd Slotted S.S.
-- 0432-036 Grease, Sil. #3P. PILL, 1/2 FIL 1
15 1013142-0001 N/A RO Alignment Unit used during
install process
only
*Supplied as part of antenna.
B-2-3
.103 + .003
1.112 + .006
(1.318)
NOTE:
1. MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE FLASH: .003" HIGH X .005" THICK.
PES3-1317
Figure 2-2. O-ring for Rx/O LNB (Prodelin P/N 0198-125)
.070 + .003
.926 + .006
(1.06)
NOTE:
1. MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE FLASH: .003" HIGH X .005" THICK.
PES3-1316
Figure 2-3. O-ring for Rectangular Feedhorn (Prodelin P/N 0198-120)
B-2-4
EQUIPMENT
GROOVE
FOR O-RING (0198-125)
ATTACH
TRANSITION
TO LNB
LNB
END VIEW
THREADED HOLES
(6 PLCS)
SCREWS IN
COUNTER SUNK
HOLES (4 PLCS)
ATTACH FEEDHORN TO TRANSITION
FEEDHORN
OPENING
IN TRANSITION
(Long side
parallel to
long side
of feedhorn)
OPENING IN TRANSITION
(Short side parallel
to long side of feedhorn)
FOR HORIZONTAL FOR VERTICAL

DOWNLINK TRANSPONDER DOWNLINK TRANSPONDER
PES3-1308
Figure 2-4. Receive-Only Outdoor Equipment - Assembly Details
B-2-5
4-3-92
4-3-92
EQUIPMENT
SECTION 3 - ASSEMBLING RECEIVE-ONLY OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT - CIRCULAR ANTENNAS
Section 3
ASSEMBLING RECEIVE-ONLY OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT - CIRCULAR ANTENNAS
The receive-only outdoor equipment for circular antennas is applicable to the 1.2 M, 1.8 M, 2.4 M or 3.8
M antennas. The PES Model 4000 receive-only outdoor equipment for circular antennas (figure 3-1)
consists of a conical feedhorn coupled to an LNB by a special machined disk called a "transition." A
receive-only mounting bracket holds the assembly in the proper position on the radio support. Table 3-1
lists the parts of the receive-only outdoor equipment. Table 3-1 lists four different receive-only kits based
upon the LNB receive frequency bands. Make sure you have the correct LNB for your site. Perform the
following steps:
STEP 1. Locate the 0198-125 (1.112 ID x 0.103) O-ring. (Note: There are two different size O-rings,
figures 2-2 and 2-3. The 0198-125 is the thicker one, figure 2-2.) Apply silicone grease from
the pink capsule to the 0198-125 O-ring and place it in the groove in the end of the LNB,
figure 2-4. Then, attach the transition to the LNB using four screws in the counter sunk
holes. The holes in LNB are arranged so that the transition will attach in the correct
orientation. As shown in figure 3-2A, verify that the transition disk has a reference mark on
its outer edge aligned with the center of the long side of the rectangular hole. Check both
sides. If there is no reference mark, make one.
STEP 2. Locate the 0198-120 (0.926 x 0.070) O-ring (figure 2-3), apply silicone grease to it and place
it in the groove in the feedhorn. Attach the conical feedhorn to the transition.
STEP 3. Attach the receive-only mounting bracket to the radio support/feed support.
STEP 4. Attach the LNB feedhorn assembly to the receive-only mounting bracket. Adjust the
feedhorn position toward and away from the reflector so that the distance from the front of
the feedhorn support plate (item 2) to the back of the feedhorn flange is 1.50 inches as
indicated in figure 3-1.
STEP 5. Attach the F-to-N adapter to the rear of the LNB.
STEP 6. Use figures 3-2 thru 3-5 as an aid in rotating the LNB/feedhorn assembly to the correct
polarization. If your assembly does not have a polarization scale, set the antenna elevation to
22.3 degrees so that the LNB is in a level horizontal position. Determine if the satellite
transponder for this site provides a vertically or horizontally polarized downlink signal.
Refer to chapter 11, section 2, Antenna Aiming, Setting Polarization for the downlink
polarization. The network frequency plan and the customers’ installation specification should
also provide the downlink polarization: vertical or horizontal. If necessary, contact your
installation manager for the downlink polarization.
For a vertically polarized downlink signal, perform STEP 6A on page B-3-5 to set
polarization.
For a horizontally polarized downlink signal, perform STEP 6B on page B-3-7 to set
polarization.
B-3-1
PES3-1368
Figure 3-1. Receive-Only Outdoor Equipment for Circular Antennas
B-3-2
EQUIPMENT
Table 3-1. PES Receive-Only Circular Antenna Parts List
Item HNS Prodelin Quantity

Number Part No. Part No. Description Required
-- 1013502-0001 -- 11.70-12.20 Rx Only Kit, U.S. & Canada 1

18 1011836-0017 -- LNB (11.70-12.20 GHz) 1
or or or
-- 1013502-0002 -- 12.25-12.75 Rx Only Kit, European Intl 1
18 1011836-0018 -- LNB (12.25-12.75 GHz) 1
or or or
18 1011836-0019 -- LNB (10.95-11.70 GHz) 1
or or or
18 1011836-0020 -- LNB (11.45-11.70 GHz) 1
-- -- 0800-656 51 Degree Rx/O Mounting Bracket 1
-- -- 0181-280 Assembly, Rx/O Feed Mtg Bracket 1
(includes items 1 thru 6 preassembled)
1 -- 0156-570 Feed Mounting Plate 1
2 -- 0156-575 Feedhorn Support Plate 1
3 -- 0211-400 Feedhorn Bracket Top 1
4 -- 8322-004 Screw 1/4-20 x .75" C’SK 2
5 -- 8023-008 Bolt 1/4-20 x 1" 2
6 -- 8202-031 Lockwasher, 1/4" 2
-- -- 0200-124 Kit, Hardware Rx/O Feed Mounting 1
(includes items 7 thru 10)
7 -- 8031-008 Bolt, 5/16-18 x 1.00" 2
8 -- 8201-041 Flatwasher, 5/16" 2
9 -- 8202-041 Lockwasher, 5/16" 2
10 -- 8101-009 Hex Nut, 5/16-18 2
11 N/A 0202-068 Transition, WC75 to WR75 1
-- N/A 0200-037 Kit, Hardware - LNB MTG 1
12 0198-125 O-ring (1.112 ID x 0.103) 1
13 8308-021 Screw, M4 x 0.7, 12mm long 4
Filister Hd Slotted S.S.
0432-036 Grease, Sil. #3P. PILL 1/2 FIL 1
-- -- 0800-309 Feedhorn Package 1*
14 -- 0183-256 Conical Feedhorn, 51 degree 1*
0200-599 Kit, Hardware Feedhorn 1*
15 -- 0198-120 O-ring (0.926 ID x 0.067) 1*
-- -- 0268-003 Allen Wrench, 7/64 Short Arm 1*
-- -- 0432-036 Grease, Sil. #3P. PILL 1/2 FIL 1*
16 -- 8300-002 Screw, SH, #6-32 x .50 S.S. 6*
17 -- 8200-010 Lockwasher, #6 Internal Tooth 6*
20 1013142-0001 N/A RO Alignment Unit used during

install process
only
*Supplied as part of antenna.
B-3-3
FEEDHORN
(Rear View)
TRANSITION
REFERENCE MARK
0
REFERENCE MARK
A) TRANSITION REFERENCE MARK
B) REAR VIEW -
ZERO DEGREES POLARIZATION
(Vertical Downlink Transponder)
+90 -90
80 80
70 70
IMAGINARY
POINTER 60 IMAGINARY
60
50 SCALE
50 (FIXED
40 POSITION)
40
30
30
20 10 20
10
(+) 0 (-)
C) REAR VIEW - POLARIZATION ORIENTATION

(Vertical Downlink Transponder)
PES3-1384
Figure 3-2. Vertical Downlink Transponder - Polarization Reference for Circular Antennas
B-3-4
EQUIPMENT
STEP 6A. For a vertically polarization downlink signal, note that reference mark on the transition
disk points straight downward for the zero degree position as shown in figure 3-2B.
Visualize an imaginary pointer extending from the transition reference mark to a fixed scale
as shown in figure 3-2C. The pointer would move as the LNB feedhorn assembly rotates.
Use an inclinometer to set the polarization value given by the LATLONG program, as shown
in figure 3-3A. Place the inclinometer against the side of the LNB that is 90 degrees away
from the transition reference mark. Observe the correct sign (+ or -) of the polarization value
(figure 3-2C). Rotate the LNB/feedhorn assembly to the correct polarization. You may need
to find the center between two inclinometer readings because the side of the LNB has a ridge.
Check that the 1.50-inch distance between the front of the feedhorn support plate and the
back of the feedhorn flange is still correct. Tighten the feedhorn clamping bolts.
20
INCLINOMETER
TRANSITION REFERENCE MARK
A) POLARIZATION = +20
(Vertical Downlink Transponders)
B) POLARIZATION = -10
(Vertical Downlink Transponders)
PES3-1385
Figure 3-3. Setting Polarization for Vertical Downlink - Circular Antennas
B-3-5
FEEDHORN
(Rear View)
TRANSITION
REFERENCE
MARK
TRANSITION
REFERENCE
MARK
A) TRANSITION REFERENCE MARK
B) REAR VIEW -
ZERO DEGREES POLARIZATION
(Horizontal Downlink Transponder)
+90 -90
80 80
70 70
IMAGINARY
POINTER 60
60 IMAGINARY
50 SCALE
50 (FIXED POSITION)
40
40
30
30
20 10 20
0 10
(+) (-)
C) REAR VIEW - POLARIZATION ORIENTATION

(Horizontal Downlink Transponder)
PES3-1386
Figure 3-4. Horizontal Downlink Transponder - Polarization Reference for Circular Antennas
B-3-6
EQUIPMENT
STEP 6B. For a horizontally polarization downlink signal, note that reference mark on the transition
disk points directly to the side for the zero degree position as shown in figure 3-4B.
Visualize an imaginary pointer extending downward 90 degrees from the transition reference
mark to a fixed scale as shown in figure 3-4C. The pointer would move as the LNB feedhorn
assembly rotates. Use an inclinometer to set the polarization value given by the LATLONG
program, as shown in figure 3-5A. Place the inclinometer against the side of the LNB that is
180 degrees away from the transition reference mark. Observe the correct sign (+ or -) of the
polarization value (figure 3-4C). Rotate the LNB/feedhorn assembly to the correct
polarization. You may need to find the center between two inclinometer readings because the
side of the LNB has a ridge. Check that the 1.50-inch distance between the front of the
feedhorn support plate and the back of the feedhorn flange is still correct. Tighten the
feedhorn clamping bolts.
20
INCLINOMETER
IMAGINARY POINTER
A) POLARIZATION = +20
(Horizontal Downlink Transponders)
IMAGINARY POINTER
B) POLARIZATION = -10
(Horizontal Downlink Transponders)
PES3-1387
Figure 3-5. Setting Polarization for Horizontal Downlink - Circular Antennas
B-3-7
PES3-1389
Figure 3-6. Feedhorn Support Plate Dimensions, Item Number 2
9.50
5.91 2.33 .31
.375 STK
4.46
1.00
.625
.625 2.00
2X .343-.350 (11/32)
4X .265-.272 (17/64)
W/ .499-.506 (1/2) X 82 C'SINK
PES3-1388
Figure 3-7. Feedhorn Mounting Plate Dimensions, Item Number 1
B-3-8
4-3-92
4-3-92
EQUIPMENT
SECTION 4 - ANTENNA AIMING FOR RECEIVE-ONLY EQUIPMENT
Section 4
ANTENNA AIMING FOR RECEIVE-ONLY EQUIPMENT
The receive-only antenna is aimed by temporarily placing an RO Alignment Unit (HNS P/N
1013142-0001, figure 4-1) between the LNB and the IFL cable and following a procedure similar to the
normal transmit/receive alignment. Perform the following steps:
STEP 1. Remove ac power from the PES Model 4000 indoor unit.
STEP 2. At the antenna, place the RO Alignment Unit between the end of the IFL cable and the
F-to-N adapter on the LNB. Connect a voltmeter to the F-connector on the RO Alignment
Unit. As a first approximation, adjust the antenna to the pointing values provided by
LATLONG.
STEP 3. Apply ac power to the PES Model 4000 indoor unit. Use DIU Configuration Editor version
3.0L or higher to load the site commissioning parameters with DIALOG mode. Under the
spacelink modem parameters, designate the site as receive-only (01). Under the port card
parameters, designate the port card type as receive-only (02). Issue the write command and
then select SWITCH mode. Use SWITCH mode to set the unit to INSTALL mode.
STEP 4. At the antenna, refine the antenna aiming adjustments for the minimum pointing voltage as
indicated by the meter. When the minimum is reached, tighten the adjustment hardware. Set
the azimuth ring to indicate the true azimuth from LATLONG. Set the elevation pointer to
indicate the elevation angle from LATLONG.
STEP 5. At the PES Model 4000 indoor unit, observe the IFM LED display is [1]/[ .]. At the site
commissioning computer, observe that values displayed by the MONITOR function are
satisfactory. Remove ac power from the PES Model 4000 indoor unit.
STEP 6. At the antenna, remove the RO Alignment Unit and attach the end of the IFL cable to the
F-to-N adapter on the LNB. Apply vapor-wrap tape to these connectors. Locate the Az/El
information label affixed to the rear of the reflector. Enter the required information on the
label. Locate the envelope taped to the rear of the reflector and the clear plastic material
enclosed. Peel off the protective paper and apply the clear plastic self stick material (P/N
4090-034) over the completed Az/El information label. If anti-icing is added, affix a
completed Az/El information label on the rear of the anti-icing panel and cover with clear
plastic.
STEP 7. Apply ac power to the PES Model 4000 indoor unit. Use the SWITCH mode on the site
commissioning computer to set the unit to NORMAL mode. Observe that the IFM acquires
the outroute as indicated by its LED displaying [ ]/[ .]. Use the MONITOR function to
check that the values remain the same as when the RO Alignment Unit was connected.
NOTE
If an RO Alignment Unit (HNS P/N 1013142-0001) is not available, the
antenna may be aimed by temporarily placing a receive/transmit RF Unit
on the antenna. Aim the antenna for the best signal reception (minimum
pointing voltage). Then replace the RF Unit with the receive only
LNB/feedhorn assembly without moving the antenna.
B-4-1
PES3-1314
Figure 4-1. Using PES Model 4000 RO Alignment Unit

(Item Numbers from Table 2-1)
B-4-2
12-14-92
APPENDIX C
C-BAND FOR X000 SERIES
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
The C-band equipment for PES Model X000 series is shown in figure 1-1. The PES C-band equipment
permits the use of PES communications in the many regions of the world served by C-band satellites.
FEED ROD
FEED SUBSYSTEM
FEED SUPPORT
RF HEAD FOR X000 C-BAND

(ALSO DESIGNATED AS "HPC/DC")
S5-01-PES3-1524
Figure 1-1. C-Band PES Antenna 1.8M Linear Polarization
1.1 IDENTIFICATION OF C-BAND FOR X000 SERIES

Table 1-1 lists part numbers for C-band equipment for X000 series.
C-1-1
Table 1-1. C-Band for X000 Series Summary
HNS Manufacturer’s
Item - Description Part Number Part Number
INDOOR UNITS
International PES Model 6000, 115 to 240 Vac 1016258-XXXX --
International PES Model 8000, 115 to 240 Vac 1016180-XXXX --
IFL CABLE
(Note: Run Lengths Apply to C-Band Only)
Nonplenum Type I 30 ft to 120 ft 1010810-0001 --
Nonplenum Type III 115 ft to 325 ft 1010812-0001 --
Plenum Type I 30 ft to 120 ft 1010807-0001 --
Plenum Type III 85 ft to 295 ft 1010809-0001 --
IFL Extended Run, 1/2" Heliax, 190 ft to 925 ft -- (Andrew)
Standard Jacket LDF4-50A
Fire-Retardant, Non-Halogenated Jacket 9001684-0017 LDF4RN-50A
RF Head
RF Head, C-Band for X000 Series, 5 W (Saturated) 1012383-0001 --
(also known as HPC/DC)
Low Noise Amplifier (LNA), C-Band for X000 Series 1012383-0002 --
ANTENNAS
1.8M (Prodelin)
Quick Repoint - Linear Co-polarized 1011822-0001 1184-263
Quick Repoint - Linear Cross-polarized* 1011823-0001 1184-273
Quick Repoint - Circular Tx-Right at Feed System 1011200-0001 1184-283-R
Quick Repoint - Circular Tx-Left at Feed System* 1011200-0003 1184-283-L
2.4M (Prodelin)
Quick Repoint - Linear Co-polarized 1011822-0002 1245-263
Quick Repoint - Linear Cross-polarized* 1011823-0002 1245-273
Quick Repoint - Circular Tx-Right at Feed System 1011200-0002 1245-283-R
Quick Repoint - Circular Tx-Left at Feed System* 1011200-0004 1245-283-L
OPTIONAL VIDEO RECEPTION

C-Band Video Reception Kit 1015874-0001 --
(includes Hardware, Cable, LNB,
Waveguide to "N" Transition, and Mounting Bracket)
* = Commonly stocked antenna configuration. Cross-pol can be field converted to co-pol.

Tx-Left can be field converted to Tx-Right.
C-1-2
APPENDIX C - C-BAND FOR X000 SERIES
NOTE
The circular polarizations for antennas listed in table 1-1 above refer to
the sense of polarization for the feed system as a stand-alone item. The
actual radiated signal from the complete antenna system to the satellite is
the reverse of the feed sense. A polarization reversal occurs when the
signal from the feed system is reflected off of the antenna reflector
surface.
It should be noted that the polarization sense of the signal received from
the satellite by the antenna system is the opposite of that which is
radiated from the antenna system to the satellite.
Therefore, a P/N 1011200-0001 (1184-283-R) or -0002 (1245-283-R)
antenna system will actually radiate a left-hand circularly polarized
uplink signal to the satellite. Conversely, these antenna systems will
receive a right-hand circularly polarized downlink signal from the
satellite.
Likewise, P/N 1011200-0003 (1184-283-L) and -0004 (1245-283-L) will
radiate a right-hand circularly polarized uplink signal to the satellite.
These antenna systems will receive a left-hand circularly downlink
polarized signal from the satellite.
INDOOR UNITS
For C-band for X000 series, the indoor units are the same PES Model 6000 or PES Model 8000 units as
are used for Ku-band. As listed in table 1-1, the international indoor units, PES Model 6000 and PES
Model 8000, have a power supply that senses the line voltage and automatically adjusts its operation over
a range of line voltages from 110 to 240 Vac.
The indoor unit must contain an IFM that is applicable for C-band. All IFMs with REV G or higher
EPROMs, part number 1012676-0001G, are applicable for both C-band and Ku-band. Any IFMs with
REV D, E or F EPROMs are applicable to Ku-band only, but may be upgraded by changing the EPROM.
The IFM EPROM is a four-sided plastic leaded chip carrier (PLCC) integrated circuit, as shown in figure
1-2. The original release EPROM part number is 1012676-0001D. The label on the IFM EPROM omits
the -0001 portion of the part number. Thus, the labels appear as follows:
REV D REV E REV F REV G
-------- -------- -------- --------
/ ------ | / ------ | / ------ | / ------ |
| | 101 | | | | 101 | | | | 101 | | | | 101 | |
| | 2676 | | | | 2676 | | | | 2676 | | | | 2676 | |
| | D * | | | | E * | | | | F * | | | | G * | |
| | 9410 | | | | 98BE | | | | E070 | | | | NNNN | |
| ------ | | ------ | | ------ | | ------ |
---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
Domestic Domestic Domestic Domestic
Ku-Band Ku-Band Ku-Band & Ku-Band,
Only Only
International International
Ku-Band Ku-Band &
C-Band
For Rev. G above, the letters NNNN represent some four-digit hexadecimal number for the current
version memory checksum.
C-1-3
McKENZIE TECHNOLOGY PLCC

EXTRACTION TOOL
McKENZIE PART NO. TOL
PLCC-XT-2
THUMB
POSITION
AREA
FINGER
POSITION
AREA
EXTRACTION
TONGS
SIDE VIEW
IFM CIRCUIT CARD

(TOP VIEW)
SLOT FOR
EXTRACTION TONG
PLCC
EPROM
G *
101
2676
NNNN
SLOT TO EXTRACT PLCC

FOR
U23
EXTRAC-
TION 1 SPREAD TOOL TO FIT SOCKET SLOTS.
TONG
2 INSERT TONGS IN SOCKET SLOTS.
CUT CORNER
3 SQUEEZE TOOL TO LIFT PLASTIC
LEADED CHIP CARRIER (PLCC).
DO NOT TRY TO PULL OUT PLCC.
TOP VIEW LET TOOL ACTION LIFT IT.
S1-09-PES3-1382
Figure 1-2. Identifying IFM EPROM for C-Band
C-1-4
IFL CABLES
The Interfacility Link (IFL) cable types for C-band are the same as are used for Ku-band; however, the
minimum and maximum run lengths for a given cable type for C-band differ from the Ku-band. See table
1-1 for the C-band IFL cable run lengths.
RF HEAD AND OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT
The RF head (RFH) for C-band for X000 series, figure 1-3, connects via the IFL cable to a PES Model
X000 series indoor unit only. This PES X000 C-band RF head is also known as an "HPC/DC" - High
Power Converter/Down Converter.
This RFH (HNS part number 1012383-0001) is not compatible with PES Type 2 C-band DIU/O indoor
units; nor is the PES Type 2 C-band RF Head (HNS part number 1011506-0001 with voltage regulator
1011506-0003) compatible with X000 series indoor units.
Nameplate
TVRO RX
Barcode
150 mm
TX
310 mm 190 mm
180 mm
Pointing
IFL
Ground
GND
Screw
Location
114 ±0.8 mm
(4.49″)
56884 PC5
5/16″ -24 THREAD SIZE 10/06/92
Figure 1-3. RF Head for C-Band for X000 Series
C-1-5
LINEAR FEED SYSTEM
TRANSMIT RF CABLE
(1013313-0001)
LNA
RECEIVE RF CABLE
RF HEAD (1013313-0001)
("HPC/DC")
LINEAR POLARIZATION
CIRCULAR FEED SYSTEM
TRANSMIT RF CABLE
(1013313-0001)
RF HEAD
("HPC/DC")
RECEIVE RF CABLE
(1013313-0001) LNA
CIRCULAR POLARIZATION
S5-03-PES3-1448
Figure 1-4. Outdoor Equipment (ODE)
C-1-6
As shown in figure 1-4 and listed in table 1-2, the RFH for C-band connects to a feed system which
differs depending on the polarization method: linear or circular. The RFH and the feed system
components together comprise the outdoor equipment, ODE. The feed system components are included
as part of the antenna; thus, it is necessary to specify the correct linear or circular polarization antenna.
Table 1-2. Outdoor Equipment (ODE) Field Replaceable Unit Part Numbers
HNS Manufacturer’s
Part Description Part Number Manufacturer Part Number
Feed System - including Feedhorn, . . .

Orthomode Transducer (OMT),
and Polarizer
Linear Cross-Polarization -- Prodelin 0800-227
Linear Co-Polarization -- Prodelin 0800-226
Circular Polarization - Right-Hand -- Prodelin 0800-229
Circular Polarization - Left-Hand -- Prodelin 0800-228
Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) 1012383-0002 HNS --
RF Head 1012383-0001 HNS --
(RFH for X000 Series C-Band
also called "HPC/DC")
Feed System to RFH Cable 1013313-0001 HNS --
(2 required)
C-1-7
The linear polarization method has two subcategories: cross-pol and co-pol. As shown in the lower
portion of figure 1-5, for the cross-pol configuration (horizontal downlink with vertical uplink or vertical
downlink with horizontal uplink), the Orthomode Transducer (OMT) has the Tx port connector pointed in
the same direction as the waveguide to the Rx LNA.
The difference between the cross-pol and co-pol OMT configurations is that the Tx port is rotated 90°
with respect to the Rx port. For the co-pol configuration (horizontal downlink with horizontal uplink or
vertical downlink with vertical uplink), the Tx port connector is pointed 90° from the waveguide to the
Rx LNA, upper portion of figure 1-5.
CO - POL CONFIGURED OMT
(I.E. HORIZONTAL UPLINK & DOWNLINK
OR VERTICAL UPLINK & DOWNLINK)
TX PORT
C - BAND ¥ ¥
FEED
HORN
¥ ¥
CO - POL
OMT
CROSS - POL
TX PORT CONNECTOR
RX LNA ATACHES HERE
CROSS - POL CONFIGURED OMT
(I.E. HORIZONTAL DOWNLINK & VERTICAL UPLINK
OR
S1-09-PES3-1449
11/11/92 VERTICAL DOWNLINK & HORIZONTAL UPLINK)
Figure 1-5. Cross-Pol and Co-Pol OMT Configurations of Linear Feed System
C-1-8
The circular polarization method also has two subcategories: left and right, as indicated for the feed
system as a stand-alone item. A polarization reversal occurs when the signal from the feed system is
reflected by the antenna, as indicated in figure 1-6 and table 1-3. A feed system that transmits with right
circular polarization receives on left circular polarization and vice versa.
SA
TE
LL
IT
E
DOWNLINK
TX - LEFT
UPLINK
RX - RIGHT
REFLECTOR
REVERSES
CIRCULAR
POLARIZATION
ANTENNA
UPLINK
TX - RIGHT
TX - LEFT FEED SYSTEM
LHC
P
CIRCULAR
POLARIZER
OMT
S-09-PES3-1450
Figure 1-6. Circular Polarization - Feed System, Reflector Reversal and Satellite Sense
Table 1-3. Circular Polarization Summary

Polarization
Antenna Antenna OMT Polarization Sense of Polarization
HNS Prodelin Arrow Sense at Entire Sense of
Part Part Points Feedhorn Antenna Satellite
Antenna Number Number to (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3) Link
1.8M 1011200-0001 1184-283-R RHCP Tx Right-Hand Tx Left-Hand Rx Left-Hand Uplink
Self Align Rx Left-Hand Rx Right-Hand Tx Right-Hand Downlink
1.8M 1011200-0003* 1184-283-L LHCP Tx Left-Hand Tx Right-Hand Rx Right-Hand Uplink
Self Align Rx Right-Hand Rx Left-Hand Tx Left-Hand Downlink
2.4M 1011200-0002 1245-283-R RHCP Tx Right-Hand Tx Left-Hand Rx Left-Hand Uplink
Quick Repoint Rx Left-Hand Rx Right-Hand Tx Right-Hand Downlink
2.4M 1011200-0004* 1245-283-L LHCP Tx Left-Hand Tx Right-Hand Rx Right-Hand Uplink
Quick Repoint Rx Right-Hand Rx Left-Hand Tx Left-Hand Downlink
* = Commonly stocked antenna configuration. Tx-Left can be field converted to Tx-Right.
C-1-9
NOTES FOR TABLE 1-3

1. The circular polarizations listed in this column refer to the sense of polarization for the feed
system as a stand-alone item. A circular polarization reversal occurs when the signal from
the feed system is reflected off of the antenna reflector surface. The actual radiated signal
from the complete antenna system to the satellite is the reverse of the feed sense as shown in
the next column to the right and explained in Note 2.
2. The circular polarization sense listed in this column refers to the transmit uplink signal
radiated from the complete antenna. It is the reverse of the signal radiated from the feed
system.
3. The circular polarizations listed in this column refer to the sense of polarization for the
transmit downlink signal radiated from the satellite and uplink received by the satellite. The
actual circular polarization sense received from the satellite at the ground antenna feed
system has undergone a circular polarized sense reversal as explained in Note 1.
4. The circular polarization sense of the signal received from the satellite by the antenna
system is the opposite of that which is radiated from the antenna and received by the
satellite. That is, if the feed system receives on right-hand circular polarization, it will
transmit on left-hand circular polarization, and, conversely, if it is configured to receive on
left-hand circular polarization, it will transmit on right-hand circular polarization. For
example, P/N 1011200-0001 antenna system will radiate a left-hand circularly polarized
uplink signal to the satellite and receive a right-hand circularly polarized signal from the
satellite. P/N 1011200-0003 will radiate a right-hand circularly downlink polarized signal
to the satellite and receive a left-hand circularly polarized signal from the satellite.
5. The circular polarization configuration can be easily converted to the opposite polarization
sense by rotating the polarizer with respect to the OMT as described on page C-2-6.
ANTENNAS
Table 1-1 lists the various antennas for C-band for X000 series. For the 1.8M and 2.4M size antennas,
many parts of the antenna (canister, reflector support and reflector) are the same for both Ku- and C-band.
The 1.8M C-band antennas listed in table 1-1 are most similar to the self-aligning 1.8M Ku-band antenna
(chapter 7, section 4). For the 1.8M and 2.4M antenna sizes, the C-band antennas differ from the
Ku-band antennas by having different feed rods, feed support, and the distinctive outdoor equipment
shown in figure 1-4.
The antenna must be ordered for either linear or circular polarization. Field modifications permit
converting a linear pol antenna between cross-pol and co-pol. Field modifications also permit converting
a circular pol antenna between right and left circular polarization. The most commonly stocked antenna
configurations are indicated with an asterisk in table 1-1. Table 1-4 lists some example C-band satellites
used for PES and gives the downlink polarization method and orientation for example transponders. Table
1-4 provides examples for configuring C-band antennas and for selecting the method of setting the
polarization adjustment (linear polarization).
For example, INTELSAT VI zone beam transponders from table 1-4 transmit a left-hand circularly
polarized (LHCP) downlink signal; therefore, the proper 1.8M antenna to receive this signal is HNS P/N
1011200-0003 (Prodelin 1184-283-L) because this antenna reflector radiates the corresponding right-hand
circularly polarized uplink (reflection of left-hand Tx signal from feedhorn).
C-1-10
Refer to the appropriate hub, for the polarization type for your site: linear cross-pol H or V, linear co-pol
H or V, LHCP, or RHCP. The large number of C-band satellites and the probability of change make it
impractical to list all of them here.
Table 1-4. Example C-Band Satellite Transponders
ANIK PANAMSAT
E-1 PAS-1 INTELSAT VI
Satellite (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3)
Longitude 107.6°W 45°W 24.5°W
Transponder - 1 (1A) Linear Cross-Pol H 1 Linear Co-Pol V Hemi Beam (West - 6 transponders) - RHCP
Downlink 2 (1B) Linear Cross-Pol V 2 Linear Co-Pol V Hemi Beam (East - 6 transponders) - RHCP
Polarization 3 (2A) Linear Cross-Pol H 3 Linear Co-Pol V Zone Beam (NW[Z1] - 5 transponders) - LHCP
(PES Entire 4 (2B) Linear Cross-Pol V 4 Linear Co-Pol V Zone Beam (NE[Z3] - 5 transponders) - LHCP
Antenna 5 (3A) Linear Cross-Pol H 5 Linear Co-Pol V Zone Beam (SW[Z2] - 5 transponders) - LHCP
Receive) 6 (3B) Linear Cross-Pol V 6 Linear Co-Pol V Zone Beam (SE[Z4] - 5 transponders) - LHCP
7 (4A) Linear Cross-Pol H 7 Linear Co-Pol H Global A (4 transponders) - RHCP
8 (4B) Linear Cross-Pol V 8 Linear Co-Pol H Global B (4 transponders) - LHCP
9 (5A) Linear Cross-Pol H 9 Linear Co-Pol H
10 (5B) Linear Cross-Pol V 10 Linear Co-Pol H
13 (7A) Linear Cross-Pol H 13 Linear Co-Pol V
14 (7B) Linear Cross-Pol V 14 Linear Co-Pol V
15 (8A) Linear Cross-Pol H 15 Linear Co-Pol V
19 (10A) Linear Cross-Pol H
20 (10B) Linear Cross-Pol V
Note 1. The linear cross-pol (uplink and downlink on different horizontal/vertical polarizations) method
on a satellite carrying 24 C-band transponders is a standard for such satellites as PALAPA,
ANIK E, ASIASAT, BRAZILSAT, GALAXY-CBAND and others.
Note 2. The C-band transponders on this satellite use the same polarization sense for both the uplink and
downlink (both horizontal or both vertical). This method is called linear co-polarization or as
indicated on the OMT "parallel polarization."
Note 3. Refer to INTELSAT VI information for details on the many features and capabilities of this
satellite.
RHCP = Right-hand Circular Polarization
LHCP = Left-hand Circular Polarization
Circular polarization has also been used on satellites such as the Raduga series or the Gorizont
series.
C-1-11
OPTIONAL VIDEO RECEPTION KIT
As an option, the PES C-band equipment may include video reception with the installation of an external
LNB on the outdoor equipment, as shown in figure 1-7. A separate cable feeds the L-band video signal
from the LNB to the indoor satellite video receiver. (The video connector on the rear of the PES indoor
unit IFM is not applicable for C-band.)
57270 PC5
10/13/92
Figure 1-7. PES X000 C-Band with Optional C-Band Video Reception Kit
C-1-12
OPTIONAL ANTI-ICING
Anti-icing for C-band is identical to Ku-band anti-icing and is available to operate on 120 Vac only.
Where the site power differs from 120 Vac, a step-down isolation transformer is required. A special
clamp is required to attach the feedhorn heater to the C-band feedhorn.
1.2 SITE CONSIDERATIONS

For satisfactory PES C-band performance, the PES remote site must be free from excessive C-band
interference and must have satisfactory ac power.
1.2.1 CHECKING C-BAND INTERFERENCE

Interference problems on C-band have been more prevalent than on Ku-band. One reason for C-band
interference can be local line-of-sight microwave use. Where possible, check with the appropriate
authorities for the presence of microwave equipment before selecting the antenna location. During the
site survey, attempt to locate microwave communication equipment transmitters in the region. In cases
where a local transmitter frequency is close to the PES receive frequency, plan the PES antenna location
so that the antenna does not face local transmitters or their sidelobes. Alternately, the PES customer
might consider shifting the outroute frequency away from the interfering signal.
Refer to the "Check for C-band Interference" section of table 5-1 on page C-5-4 when C-band
interference is a suspected problem at an installed C-band site.
1.2.2 CHECKING AC POWER

At sites where ac power line fluctuations or outages are suspected, you may use a power line monitor to
assess the situation before installation. Where appropriate, the customer may choose to install an
Uninterruptible Power Source in order to eliminate (or minimize) communications disturbances caused by
ac power line problems. Table 3-1 in chapter 5, section 3 dated 12-14-92 or later lists corrected
maximum PES ac power requirements. These values may be useful in selecting the appropriate capacity
Uninterruptible Power Source.
Refer to table 5-1 when ac power is a suspected problem at an installed C-band site.
C-1-13
12-14-92
12-14-92
SECTION 2 - ASSEMBLING ANTENNAS AND INSTALLING C-BAND OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT
Section 2
ASSEMBLING ANTENNAS AND INSTALLING C-BAND OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT
2.1 ASSEMBLING 1.8M ANTENNA FOR C-BAND

Refer to chapter 7, section 4 dated 12-14-92 or later. Use the C-band components where instructed. Once
you have completed step 9 on page 7-4-15, return to appendix C, section 2.3, "Installing C-band Outdoor
Equipment" below.
2.2 ASSEMBLING 2.4M ANTENNA FOR C-BAND

Refer to chapter 7, section 5 dated 12-14-92 or later. Use the C-band components where instructed. Once
you have completed step 4 on page 7-5-14, return to appendix C, section 2.3, "Installing C-band Outdoor
Equipment" below.
2.3 INSTALLING C-BAND OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT

Outdoor equipment installation differs depending upon polarization type: linear or circular.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Perform any assembly or modification of feed system waveguide
components in a dry environment. Feedhorn/polarizer/OMT/LNA
internal watertightness must be ensured.
Indications that the feed system has been penetrated by water are any
visible condensation on the feedhorn window, or a level of water seen in
the feed window. Water can cause severe degradation of the signal as
well as damage the interior by corrosion after time.
2.3.1 INSTALLING LNA ON OMT

As shown in figure 2-2, the low noise amplifier (LNA) is shipped separately from the feed subsystem.
Figure 2-2 shows the feed subsystem for linear polarization. Installing the LNA on the feed subsystem
for circular polarization is identical.

STEP 1. Locate the feed subsystem and the LNA. The LNA is shipped in a box labeled "C-BAND
LNA."
The LNA box also contains a gasket, silicone grease lubricant for the gasket, type N
right-angle connector, and three spare bolts.
C-2-1
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
The feed subsystem is shipped with a blank panel covering the opening
for the LNA. The PES will not operate unless this blank panel is
removed before installing the LNA.
STEP 2. Loosen the nuts and remove the blank panel covering the OMT opening for the LNA. (Save
the blank panel for possible reuse on returned items.)
STEP 3. Apply liberal amounts of silicone grease to the LNA gasket, then place the gasket in the
groove on the LNA with the flat side of the gasket in the groove.
STEP 4. Carefully position the LNA on OMT opening making sure that the gasket seats properly and
is not pinched (Note the LNA will operate correctly in either of the two orientations in which
it fits on the OMT).
STEP 5. Install, but do not tighten, the ten bolts, flatwasher, lockwasher and nuts.
STEP 6. Using the star pattern shown in figure 2-1, tighten the bolts to secure the LNA to the feed
subsystem.
STEP 7. Once all ten bolts have been tightened, repeat the procedure in step 6 to ensure uniform
torque.
3 1 5
8 7
10 9
4 2 6
S-09-PES2-1002
Figure 2-1. LNA Bolt Tightening Sequence
C-2-2
FEED SUB-SYSTEM
(SHIPPED WITH ANTENNA)
C-BAND FEEDHORN
ORTHO-MODE TRANSDUCER (OMT)
TYPE "N" CONNECTOR

(TRANSMIT)
BLANK PANEL
- REMOVE BEFORE
ATTACHING LNA
LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER (LNA)

- SHIPPED SEPARATELY
FROM ANTENNA
REAR VIEW
LNA ATTACHED TO OMT
TYPE "N" CONNECTOR
(RECEIVE)
S5-02-PES3-1544
Figure 2-2. Feed Subsystem and LNA
C-2-3
2.3.2 LINEAR POLARIZATION - FIELD CONVERSION BETWEEN CROSS-POL AND

CO-POL
Contact your Hub operator to determine the required cross-pol or co-pol orientation for your site.
Compare your OMT to the required orientation using figure 2-3 below and figure 1-5 on page C-1-8. If
your OMT differs and the correct orientation is not available, use wrenches to remove the Tx port portion
of the OMT and reattach it in the proper orientation. As shown in the left portion of figure 2-3, the word
"PARALLEL" aligns with the word "POLARIZATION" for the co-pol orientation. For cross-pol, the
word "CROSS" aligns with the word "POLARIZATION." Be sure to properly seat the O-ring.
POLARIZATION
POLARIZATION
PARALLEL
CROSS
TX PORT
(Contains harmonic filter
and receive band reject filter)
CO-POLARIZATION CROSS POLARIZATION

S5-02-PES3-1529
Figure 2-3. Field Conversion Co-Pol to/from Cross-Pol
2.3.3 INSTALLING LINEAR FEED SYSTEM - CROSS-POL OR CO-POL

Refer to table 2-1 and figure 2-4.
STEP 1. Apply silicone grease to the O-ring (6) and place it in the groove in the OMT to be used.
Mount the feedhorn (1) to the cross-pol OMT (2) or co-pol OMT (3) with eight #10-24 x 1.25
screws, sixteen #10 flatwashers, eight #10 lockwashers, and eight #10-24 hex nuts (7, 8, 9,
10). Tighten securely. NOTE: The screws should be inserted from the feedhorn side to
prevent any interference.
STEP 2. Attach the bottom feed mounting bracket (4) to the feed support tube with four 3/8-16 x 1.25"
bolts, four lockwashers, and four 3/8-16 hex nuts (11, 12, 13). Tighten securely.
STEP 3. Place the neck of the feedhorn/OMT assembly from step #1 into the feed mounting bracket
and secure with the top feed mounting bracket (5) using two 5/16-18 x 1.00" bolts, two
lockwashers, and two 5/16-18 hex nuts (14, 15, 16).
STEP 4. For the 1.8M or 2.4M antenna, verify that the reflector-to-feedhorn distances are correct for
C-band as shown in figure 2-6 or 2-7. The actual measurements should be within 1/4-inch of
the values given in the figure. Also, measure the distance from each side of the feedhorn to
the corresponding side of the reflector at the height of the feed rod attachment. These
side-to-side dimensions should be within 1/4-inch of each other to be acceptable. If the
measurements are out of tolerance, find and correct the cause of the misalignment.
C-2-4
7 10
8 9 10
14
¥ ¥
¥ ¥
4 2
15 16
11 12 13
FEED SUPPORT
S1-09-PES3-1452
11/11/92
Figure 2-4. Installing Linear Feed System
Table 2-1. Linear Feed System Parts List

Item # Part # Description Quantity
1 0183-317 Feedhorn, 41 Degree C-Band 1
2 0183-340 Cross-pol OMT 1
3 0183-341 Co-Pol OMT 1
4 0211-420 Feed Mounting Bracket 2
5 0211-419 Feed Mounting Bracket-Top 2
6 0198-124 O-ring 2
7 8302-007 #10-24 x 1.25 Screw 8
8 8202-032 #10 Lockwasher 8
9 8111-005 #10-24 Hex Nut 8
10 8201-037 #10 Flatwasher 16
11 8032-010 3/8-16 x 1.25" Bolt 4
12 8202-042 3/8" Lockwasher 4
13 8102-007 3/8-16 Hex Nut 4
14 8031-008 5/16-18 x 1.00" Bolt 2
15 8202-041 5/16" Lockwasher 2
16 8101-009 5/16-18 Hex Nut 2
C-2-5
2.3.4 INSTALLING CIRCULARLY POLARIZED FEED SYSTEM

Refer to table 2-2 and figure 2-5. Perform the steps below.
CIRCULAR POLARIZATION
STEP 1. Apply silicone grease to two O-rings (7) and place one in the O-ring groove in the circular
polarizer (3). Attach the feedhorn (1) to the circular polarizer (end with O-ring) with eight
#10-24 x 1.25" screws, sixteen flatwashers, eight lockwashers, and eight #10-24 hex nuts (8,
9, 10, 11). Tighten securely. NOTE: The screws should be inserted from the feedhorn
side to prevent any interference.
STEP 2. If your site is to receive a left-hand circularly polarized downlink signal from the satellite,
align the arrow on the OMT flange with the letters "LHCP" on the flange of the circular
polarizer as shown in the top portion of figure 2-5. The OMT side port (receive) aligns with
the letters "LHCP" as shown.
For a right-hand circularly polarized downlink signal, align the OMT arrow to RHCP. Refer
to appendix C, section 1 on pages C-1-9 thru C-1-10 for more details regarding the selection
of right or left circular polarization.
Check that the OMT is set to the cross-pol configuration (Tx connector points same direction
as the Rx pol waveguide). Bolt the OMT (2) to the circular polarizer by placing the
remaining O-ring in the groove of the OMT and fastening it to the circular polarizer with
eight #10-24 x 1.25" screws, sixteen flatwashers, eight lockwashers, and eight #10-24 hex
nuts (8, 9, 10, 11). NOTE: The screws should be inserted from the circular polarizer
side to prevent interference.
STEP 3. Attach one bottom feed mounting bracket (4) and the circular polarizer bracket (6) to the feed
support tube plate with four 3/8-16 x 1.25" bolts, four lockwashers, and four hex nuts (13, 14,
15) through the feed mounting bracket, circular polarizer and feed support, as shown, and one
5/16-18 x 3.25" bolt, one lockwasher, and one hex nut (18, 29, 20) through the circular
polarizer bracket and feed support tube only. Tighten securely.
STEP 4. Attach the remaining bottom feed mounting bracket to the circular polarizer bracket with four
3/8-16 x 1.00" bolts, four lockwashers, and four 3/8-16 hex nuts (12, 14, 15). Do not tighten.
NOTE: Refer to figure 2-5 to ensure that the brackets are oriented correctly.
STEP 5. Place the feed assembly from step 1 into the brackets and secure by fastening one top feed
mounting bracket (5) over the neck of the feedhorn with two 5/16-18 x 1.00" bolts, two
lockwashers, and two hex nuts (16, 19, 20). Fasten the remaining top feed mounting bracket
over the neck of the circular polarizer with two 5/16-18 x 1.50" bolts, two lockwashers, and
two hex nuts (17, 19, 20). Tighten the feed mounting bracket (from step 4) to the circular
polarizer bracket. The antenna system is now ready to be aligned to the satellite.
STEP 6. For the 1.8M or 2.4M antenna, verify that the reflector-to-feedhorn distances are correct for
C-band as shown in figure 2-6 or 2-7. The actual measurements should be within 1/4-inch of
the values given in the figure. Also, measure the distance from each side of the feedhorn to
the corresponding side of the reflector at the height of the feed rod attachment. These
side-to-side dimensions should be within 1/4-inch of each other to be acceptable. If the
measurements are out of tolerance, find and correct the cause of the misalignment.
C-2-6
PES3-1453
Figure 2-5. Installing Circular Polarized Feed System
C-2-7
Table 2-2. Circularly Polarized Feed System Parts List
1 0183-317 Feedhorn, 41 Degree C-Band 1
2 0183-341 Cross-pol OMT 1
3 0182-191 Circular Polarizer 1
4 0211-420 Feed Mounting Bracket 2
5 0211-419 Feed Mounting Bracket-Top 2
6 0211-482 Circular Polarizer Bracket 1
7 0198-124 O-ring 2
8 8302-007 #10-24 x 1.25" Screw 16
9 8202-032 #10 Lockwasher 16
10 8111-005 #10-24 Hex Nut 16
11 8201-037 #10 Flatwasher 32
12 8032-008 3/8-16 x 1.00" Bolt 4
13 8202-010 3/8-16 x 1.25" Bolt 4
14 8202-042 3/8" Lockwasher 8
15 8102-007 3/8-16 Hex Nut 8
16 8031-008 5/16-18 x 1.00" Bolt 2
17 8031-012 5/16-18 x 1.50" Bolt 2
18 8101-009 5/16-18 x 3.25" Bolt 1
19 8202-009 5/16" Lockwasher 5
20 8101-009 5/16-18 Hex Nut 5
C-2-8
1.8 METER, 41 DEGREE C-BAND RECEIVE/TRANSMIT

FEED LOCATION

A = 38.19"
B = 44.12"
C = 71.63"
D = 67.75"
D
B A
S-09-PES3-1471
Figure 2-6. Reflector to Feedhorn Measurements for 1.8M Antennas

for C-Band Receive/Transmit Only
C-2-9
2.4 METER, 41 DEGREE C-BAND RECEIVE/TRANSMIT

FEED LOCATION
INCHES CENTIMETERS
A = 53.51 135.9
B = 58.93 149.7
C = 96.62 245.4
D = 92.13 234.0
A
B
S-09-PES3-1485
Figure 2-7. Reflector to Feedhorn Measurements for 2.4M Antennas

for C-Band Receive/Transmit Only
C-2-10
2.3.5 INSTALLING RFH FOR X000 SERIES C-BAND

Refer to table 2-3 and figure 2-8 to install the C-band for X000 series RF Head (RFH). The RF Head is
shipped in a box labeled "C-BAND RF HEAD." The actual RF Head has the words "C-BAND HPC/DC
5 WATT" embossed on its label.
For linear polarization, perform the following:
STEP 1. Mount the RF Head to the transmitter mounting bracket with hardware provided with the RF
Head, as shown in figure 2-8A. Tighten securely.
STEP 2. Attach the transmitter mounting bracket (1) to the feed support with two 5/16-18 x 3.25"
bolts, four flatwashers, two lockwashers and two hex nuts (2, 4, 6, 8). Mount the RF head on
the lower set of holes in the feed support as shown. (If you use the upper set of holes, the RF
head and feed system do not fit at certain polarization angles.) Tighten securely.
Table 2-3. RF Head Installation Parts List

1 0211-421 C-band Transmitter Mounting Bracket 1
2 8031-026 Bolt, 5/16-18 x 3.25" 2
3 8202-041 Lockwasher, 5/16" 2
4 8101-009 Nut, Hex, 5/16-18 2
For circular polarization:

STEP 1. Mount the RF Head to the bottom of the circular polarizer bracket with hardware provided
with the RF Head, as shown in figure 2-8B.
C-2-11
HARDWARE SUPPLIED WITH RF HEAD
1
2 3 4
GROUND WIRE
IFL CABLE
A) LINEAR POLARIZATION
HARDWARE SUPPLIED WITH RF HEAD
CIRCULAR POLARIZER BRACKET
B) CIRCULAR POLARIZATION
S5-03-PES3-1454
Figure 2-8. RFH Installation
C-2-12
12-14-92
12-14-92
SECTION 3 - CABLING FOR C-BAND FOR X000 SERIES
Section 3
CABLING FOR C-BAND FOR X000 SERIES
OVERVIEW
Figure 3-1 and table 3-1 provide an overview of cabling for C-band for X000 series.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Turn off ac power to PES equipment before disconnecting or connecting
cables.
3.1 IFL CABLING

For C-band for X000 series, the same cable IFL types are used as for Ku-band; however, the maximum
and minimum run lengths for C-band are different than for Ku-band.
Refer to table 1-1 on page C-1-2 for C-band IFL cable lengths. Refer to chapter 9, section 2 for
detailed procedures for IFL cable installation.
There have been many intermittent and performance failure related problems that were determined to be
the direct result of water penetration into the IFL cables. To ensure that there are no problems, observe
the following precautions.
The unterminated cut cable should never be exposed to rain or left unterminated or uncapped in storage.
Any amount of water entering the unterminated end of the cable can wick its way through several tens of
feet of the cable causing performance degradation in the future. Even after terminating the cable, it
should be connected to an RF Head or sealed if left exposed to the elements.
A properly terminated IFL cable should have the center pin flush (within 1/64" maximum) with the
connector housing and straight as shown in figure 3-2. If the center conductor is recessed or not straight,
it could make intermittent connections or damage the mating connector.
After the connector is installed on the IFL cable, carefully inspect the connector to verify the installation
was done properly. Then, attach the connector to the IFL port on the RF Head making sure that the
connector is tight (approximately 1/4 turn with a set of channel locks).
Promptly complete the remaining cabling tasks, commission the system, verify it is operating properly,
and then apply "Vapor Wrap" to the connector over the strain relief sleeving that comes with the
connector. This gives additional watertightness to the connection, especially in wet and rainy tropical
environments.
3.2 RF HEAD CABLING

The two RF cables, item 4 on figure 3-1, are identical, each 27 inches long. One connects the "TX" signal
of the RF Head to the Tx port of the OMT; the other connects the LNA received signal to the "RX"
connector on the RF Head. The RF cable installation varies slightly for linear and circular feeds;
nevertheless, in all cases the LNA should be pointed generally downward to protect against water
penetration.
C-3-1
PES INDOOR UNIT

MODEL X000 SERIES
C-Band RF Head PORT

FEEDHORN (RFH) for X000 Series CARD(S)
OMT 4 POINTING
TX 2
INTERMEDIATE
FREQUENCY
MODULE CONFIG
LNA 4 1
(IFM)
TEST
IFL Not Used
RX IFL
for C-Band
3 VIDEO
TVRO BOTTOM SLOT 5
TO RF UNIT 120 VAC or

220 VAC
Depending on
Unit Ordered
4 6 7 Customer
Reflector Optional Satellite Supplied
Optional Video Receiver Television,
Optional Anti-Icing LNB Decoder (IRD) VCR, or
System 9 Monitor
8
Optional Site Power Circuit
Step Down Breaker for Optional
Transformer Anti-Icing System
S1-09-PES3-1455
11/11/92
Figure 3-1. C-Band for X000 Series Cabling Overview
3.2.1 LINEAR CROSS- AND CO-POLARIZED FEED

Position the feedhorn assembly to the correct polarization for the site and satellite before bending and
shaping the RF cables. Because polarization angles 180° apart are effectively equivalent, the LNA should
be able to be oriented in the lower 180° of the rotation for any polarization angle given by the site
commissioning computer.
Refer to appendix C, section 4.2.1 on page C-4-1 for instructions on setting polarization for linear feeds.
3.2.2 CIRCULAR POLARIZED FEEDS

Position feedhorn assembly (feedhorn, circular polarizer and OMT) as shown in figure 3-4 before bending
and shaping the RF cables. In figure 3-4 the LNA is positioned at approximately the 5 o’clock position as
one looks directly into the reflector. This position has been chosen to provide maximum weather
protection and minimal cable bending.
3.2.3 RF CABLE FORMING

Remove the two identical 27-inch RF cables from the indoor unit packing container. Inspect the cables.
Ensure cables are:
1. Straight and there are no kinks or bends at the connectors.
2. Round along the entire length, with no dents or flat spots.
If no damage is observed, proceed with the installation. Do not attempt to use damaged cables.
C-3-2
Table 3-1. PES C-Band Model X000 Series Cabling Part Numbers and References
Fig. 3-1
(Triangle) Part Number Mfg. Comment/Reference
1 1010807-0001 HNS IFL Standard Run
thru Description -
1010812-0001 Procedure - chapter 9, section 2.2 on page 9-2-2
NOTE: C-band IFL cable run lengths differ from
Ku-band run lengths. See table 1-1 on page C-1-2 for
C-band IFL cable run lengths.
1 LDF4-50A Andrew IFL Extended Run - Standard Jacket*
or
LDF4RN-50A Andrew IFL Extended Run - Fire Retardant, Non-Halogenated
9001684-0017 HNS Jacket
Procedure - chapter 9, section 3 on page 9-3-1
NOTE: C-band extended run IFL cable run length
differs from Ku-band run length. See table 1-1
2 -- -- IFM CONFIG Port Cable - see chapter 10,
figure 1-1 on page 10-1-3
3 -- -- RF Head Earth Ground
Description - appendix C, section 3.4 on page C-3-6
and chapter 9, section 4 on page 9-4-1
4 1013313-0001 HNS Feed System to RFH RF Cables
Procedure - appendix C, section 3.2 on page C-3-1
4 1013313-0001 HNS Connection to Optional LNB for Video
5 Varies - see HNS Indoor Unit Power Cord
reference Description - appendix C, section 3.5 on page C-3-9
(supplied with indoor unit)
6 - - Connection - Optional LNB "F" connector to Optional
Satellite Video Receiver/Decoder (IRD). 75 Ohm
Coaxial Cable. Installer Supplied.
7 -- -- Connections for Optional Video
Coaxial Cable RG59 75 ohm
8 -- -- 120 Vac Power Wiring for Optional Anti-Icing
Procedure - chapter 8
9 -- -- Power Wiring for Optional Anti-Icing
* HNS no longer requires Andrew P/N 202071, a MIL-SPEC version of LDF4-50A.
C-3-3
CONNECTOR BODY
FERRULE
CENTER PIN
GROUND SKT.
PES2-712
1/64" MAX
Figure 3-2. IFL Center Pin - Proper Installation Critical
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
RF cable bend radius must not be less than 5 inches. Do not start a bend
within 2 inches of a connector. Do not crush or twist the cables.
Damage to either cable will disable the system. Do not attempt to repair
a damaged cable. Replace only with a direct HNS replacement.
Gently bend one cable so that it will fit between the "TX" connector on the RFH and the far end of the
OMT. Bend the cable so that the bends start at least 2 inches from each connector. Thus, the cable is
straight as it enters each connector.
In a similar manner bend the other cable so that it will fit between "RX" connector on the RFH and the
LNA.
Attach one end of the first cable to the "TX" connector on the RFH, and the other end of the cable to the
connector located at the far end of the OMT. See figure 3-3. Initially, hand-tighten both ends, then
tighten securely using pliers.
Connect one end of the second cable to the "RX" connector on the RFH, and the other end of the cable to
the connector on the LNA. If necessary to accommodate the required polarization angle, only a single
right-angle connector may be used outdoors. This connector, if needed, is placed at the LNA. Any
additional right-angle connectors could cause reliability problems. This right-angle connector must be a
special sealed version provided by Prodelin with the antenna (C-Band) in the box with the LNA. See
figure 3-3. Initially, hand-tighten both ends, then tighten securely using pliers.
3.3 OUTDOOR CABLE WATERPROOFING

As soon as the site is successfully commissioned, seal all five outdoor RF connections (IFL cable at RF
Head, (RFH), RFH "TX" connector, OMT Tx port, LNA connector and RFH "RX" connector) with a
weatherproofing compound such as "Electroseal," "Vapor-Wrap18," or similar material to ensure that
moisture does not penetrate the connection.
18Vapor-Wrap (Part #11316, 3in. x 50 ft roll) is manufactured by Decibel Products, P.O. Box 569610, Dallas, Texas
75356-9610, (214) 634-8502.
C-3-4
57265 PC5
10/13/92
Figure 3-3. RF Cables - Linear Feed
C-3-5
TX
RX TVRO
S5-02-PES3-1457
Figure 3-4. Circular Feed - Position LNA to "5 o’clock"
Open the sealed package and remove the protective paper wrapping from Vapor-Wrap. Start at the
connector end and wrap the tape around the connectors and cables, pushing and working the compound
into all joints and cracks that water could enter. Smooth the compound onto the cable jackets. When
complete, the joint should have a smooth tapered appearance.
NOTE
Outdoor connectors at the antenna are exposed to the elements and are
subject to moisture contamination. Minute amounts of water vapor can
enter the connectors and cable and condense into water. This will cause
a partial or complete short circuit between the cable and connector
conductors, and have a detrimental effect on system performance.
3.4 GROUNDING ANTENNA STRUCTURE

For sites with a three-wire ac power distribution system with a third-wire safety ground wire, refer to
chapter 9, section 4.2 on page 9-4-1.
For sites with ac power distribution systems that do not have a safety ground wire and do not have a
method of grounding the indoor unit chassis, the resistance test (steps 3 and 4) of chapter 9, section 4.2 on
page 9-4-1 is not applicable. Nevertheless, at all sites provide the ground connections to the canister
assembly and RFH. NOTE: The RFH and the canister must be grounded even if the ac distribution
system only has two wires.
Figure 3-5 shows the ground connections for C-band for X000 series. Table 3-2 lists the required
terminal lug sizes and gives the part numbers of some recommended terminal lugs. Table 3-3 converts
American Wire Gauge (AWG) to metric.
C-3-6
GROUNDING BOLT
TO CANISTER GND
IFL
STAR WASHER (2 PLCS)
Pointing TO RF HEAD
TERMINAL LUG CANISTER

(Supplied by HNS installer) TERMINAL LUG (Supplied by HNS installer)
GROUNDING BOLT (1/4 - 20)
TERMINAL LUG (Supplied by HNS installer)
MAST
ENLARGED SIDE VIEW
-CROSS SECTION
TO EARTH GROUND
HEX NUTS ( 2 PLCS)
S5-04-PES3-1458
Figure 3-5. Grounding Connections C-Band
C-3-7
Table 3-2. Terminal Lug Sizes
Recommended
Attaching Point Screw Size Terminal Lug Mfg. and P/N
RFH Ground Screw M5 Ring Tongue AMP Corp.

P/N 35109
Antenna Canister 1/4"-20 Ring Tongue AMP Corp.

(all antenna sizes) P/N 322155
Table 3-3. Wire Gauge Conversion - Solid Conductor
American Closest
Wire Gauge Diameter Diameter Metric
(AWG) Inches Millimeter Wire Gauge
10 AWG - 0.102 in. 2.59mm 25

Solid Conductor
6 AWG - 0.162 in. 4.11mm 45

Solid Conductor
Table 3-4. Wire Gauge Conversion - Stranded Conductors
AWG - Stranded Wire METRIC-

Stranded Wire
Number of Area - Area - Number of
American Area - Strands X
Strands / Square In. Square mm Square mm
Wire Diameter of
Guage (AWG) AWG of each each Strand
Strand in mm
10 37/26 0.0074 4.77 -- --

10 49/27 0.0078 5.03 5.16 73 X 0.30
10 105/30 0.0083 5.37 5.30 75 X 0.30
6 133/27 0.0212 13.67 -- --
6 259/30 0.0205 13.20 -- --
6 1050/36 0.0208 13.38 -- --
s5-04-PES3-1547
C-3-8
3.5 INDOOR UNIT POWER CORD

Normally, the PES indoor unit is preconfigured with the United States power cord. Table 3-5 provides
reference information for the various PES indoor unit power cords available. These may be ordered
through your HNS Program Manager.
Table 3-5. Indoor Unit Power Cords
Corresponding
Input Voltage Indoor Unit Power Cord
Current Sample Countries HNS Part Number
125 Vac 10 amps Canada, United States 9003024-0013
250 Vac 10 amps Austria, Belgium, 9005627-0004

Finland, France,
Germany, Netherlands,
Norway, Sweden
240 Vac 10 amps Australia 9005627-0005
250 Vac 10 amps United Kingdom 9005627-0006
250 Vac 10 amps Denmark 9005627-0007
250 Vac 10 amps India 9005627-0008
250 Vac 10 amps Israel 9005627-0009
250 Vac 10 amps Italy 9005627-0011
250 Vac 10 amps Switzerland 9005627-0012
125 Vac 15 amps Japan 9005627-0013
C-3-9
3.6 INSTALLING OPTIONAL VIDEO LNB

Mount the optional video LNB as shown in figure 1-7 on page C-1-12. The mounting hardware is
included in the video installation kit, table 3-6. Gently bend the RF cable so that it fits between the
TVRO "N" connector on the RF head and the "N" connector on the transition/LNB, figure 3-6. Bend the
cable so that the bend starts at least two inches from each connector. Initially hand tighten both ends,
then securely tighten using pliers. Run a 75-ohm cable from the "F" connector on the transition/LNB to
the satellite video integrated receiver decoder (IRD). The maximum cable length from the LNB to the
IRD depends on the specific satellite, Hub power, site locations, antenna size, cable type and other factors
included in the overall link budget. When proper video reception is verified, apply "vapor wrap" material
to the outdoor connectors for video (one "F" type and two "N" types). The video connector on the rear of
the PES indoor unit is not applicable to C-band.
WR299-N TRANSITION LNB
MODEL No. BCH025
L-BAND VIDEO OUT

TYPE "N" CONNECTOR INPUT. TYPE "F" CONNECTOR.
CONNECT VIA RF CABLE TO CONNECT TO IRD WITH
TVRO OUTPUT OF RF HEAD. INSTALLER SUPPLIED 75 OHM
S5-03-PES3-1460 CABLE.
Figure 3-6. Installing Optional Video Transition/LNB
Table 3-6. C-Band Video Reception Kit (HNS P/N 1015874-0001) Parts List
Item HNS Vendor
Number Part Number Part Number Description Qty.
1 9007181-0001 -- Kit, C-Band Video Installation 1
LCT-21SC-1B1 Waveguide to "N" Adapter 1
Waveguide Gasket 1
Silicone Grease 1
Screws 10
Nuts 10
Flat Washers 10
Split-Lock Washers 10
Mounting Kit w/Hardware - TBD 1
2 9007182-0001 MIL-BCH025 LNB, C-Band Video G=65 dB 1
3 1013313-0001 Cable, RFH to LNB 1
3.7 OPTIONAL ANTI-ICING TRANSFORMER CABLING

For the 1.8M and smaller anti-icing antennas, you may install a 115-Vac Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI)
socket within 25 feet of the antenna wired to the low side of the transformer. The 2.4M antenna requires
a direct connection. Select an appropriate size transformer for the required load. Connect the high side of
the transformer to the 230-Vac line using adequately rated wire for the load.
C-3-10
12-14-92
12-14-92
SECTION 4 - ANTENNA AIMING FOR C-BAND FOR X000 SERIES
Section 4
ANTENNA AIMING FOR C-BAND FOR X000 SERIES
4.1 OVERVIEW
In general, antenna aiming for C-band is similar to Ku-band. Be sure to correctly take in account East or
West longitude and North or South latitude. Special considerations apply to setting polarization for
C-band.
4.2 SETTING POLARIZATION

Setting polarization for C-band differs from Ku-band and differs between linear and circular polarization.
There is no polarization scale marked on the C-band RFH; instead, use the figures of this section to
provide a frame of reference. For linear polarization, set the feed system to the correct polarization angle
before forming and shaping the RF cables. In figure 4-1 and 4-2, the feedhorn is viewed from the rear
looking directly into the reflector. The center of the Rx port waveguide serves a movable pointer against
the imaginary fixed scales shown in the figures. Note that scale numbering for C-band differs from
Ku-band.
Note that receive port/LNA should always be in the lower half of the circle in order to protect the
LNA/connections from weather and to allow the RF cables to/from the RFH to reach.
4.2.1 LINEAR CROSS-POL AND CO-POL

Figure 4-1 shows an imaginary polarization scale for a horizontal downlink signal. Refer to table 1-4 on
page C-1-11 or contact your Hub operator to determine if the satellite transponder for your site is
transmitting a horizontally or vertically polarized downlink signal. The polarization angle from the
LATLONG program of DIU Configuration Editor version 3.0L or higher is directly applicable for both
cross-pol or co-pol. Be sure to observe the correct plus (+) or minus (-) sign as given by the program.
The program adjusts for Northern and Southern Hemisphere so that figure 4-1 is applicable worldwide.
Figure 4-2 shows an imaginary polarization scale for a vertical downlink transponder. Again the
polarization value from the LATLONG program is directly applicable. The scale has been renumbered so
that it is applicable for a vertical downlink signal.
Refer to appendix C, section 4.5 on page C-4-5 to minimize cross-polarization interference where
required by the satellite operator or where appropriate.
C-4-1
HORIZONTAL DOWNLINK
FREEHORN REAR VIEW
0
LN
-
A
30
30
+
-
60 + 60
90
FEED SUPPORT
S1-09-PES3-1468
Figure 4-1. Setting C-band Linear Polarization - Horizontal Downlink Only
VERTICAL DOWNLINK
FREEHORN REAR VIEW

90
90
+
LN
A
60
60
-
+ 30 - 30
0
FEED SUPPORT
S1-09-PES3-1469
Figure 4-2. Setting C-band Linear Polarization - Vertical Downlink Only
C-4-2
4.2.2 CIRCULAR POLARIZATION

For circular polarization, make sure that the arrow on the OMT is aligned to the correct LHCP or RHCP
indicator on the circular polarizer as described in appendix C, section 1, pages C-1-1 thru C-1-3 and
appendix C, section 2, pages C-2-6 thru C-2-8. For a site with the entire antenna receiving a left-hand
circular polarized downlink signal from the satellite, the OMT arrow should point to LHCP. Once the
OMT arrow is correctly positioned, the circular polarization adjustment is complete.
4.3 SETTING ELEVATION

Setting elevation for C-band is identical to Ku-band. Sites for C-band may be in regions close enough to
the equator to require high elevation angles that would cause the antenna to hold rain water. For high
antenna elevation angles, prevent rain water accumulation and the resulting signal degradation and
antenna pattern distortion by drilling four 1/2-inch holes, six inches apart in the bottom cup of the
reflector. Do not drill the holes if the antenna is equipped with anti-icing.
4.4 SETTING AZIMUTH

Setting azimuth for C-band is identical to Ku-band. Figure 4-4 gives the magnetic declination in South
America. As shown in figure 4-3, magnetic declination is low (less than 5 degrees) in the region of
Indonesia.
ON 4° W
ATI
ARI
NOV
1° W
1° W
NO VARIATION 1° E
3°
E
W
5°
E°
10
S5-05-PES3-1554
Figure 4-3. Declination Map - Indonesian Region
C-4-3
PES2-868
Figure 4-4. Declination Map - South America
C-4-4
4.5 MINIMIZING CROSS-POLARIZATION INTERFERENCE

Some linear polarization satellites adopt frequency reuse, which means the same frequency band is used
for both horizontal and vertical polarizations. In this case, if you don’t set correctly the polarization
adjustment of the PES transmission system (feedhorn for the C-band PES), you may interfere in the
opposite polarization (cross-transponder). Your signal may have components being transmitted in both
polarizations.
Usually, for most applications, following the instructions of chapter 11, sections 1 thru 5 and pages C-4-1
to C-4-4 is sufficient to aim the antenna and achieve a good polarization adjustment for your transmission
system. However, some satellite operators (owners) demand you to check and adjust this setting to ensure
that your signal won’t interfere with the cross-transponder users. Some operators ask you to check this
isolation in some sample units. Others ask you to check all units that transmit to their satellites. If you
are in one of these cases, we suggest the following two methods for this measurement.
4.5.1 METHOD 1: REMOTE PES TRANSMISSION CHECK

This is the best method to ensure the cross-polarization interference is the lowest possible. However,
some conditions must be met, as follows:
a) A free frequency slot in the polarization you are supposed to transmit (preferably in the
same transponder), and the same free frequency slot in the opposite polarization. This slot
must have enough bandwidth to carry a small CW carrier;
b) Authorization from the satellite operator (owner) to transmit a low-level CW carrier (some
administrations do not allow CW carriers in their satellites);
c) A second earth station with a large antenna and the ability to receive signals in both
polarizations (may be the Hub station if it has a four-port feed installed);
d) A spectrum analyzer connected to the LNA of the second earth station;
e) Telephone or other voice communication between this second earth station and the PES
remote antenna under adjustment.
After aiming and adjusting the antenna and RF unit as described in chapter 11, sections 1 thru 5 and pages
C-4-1 to C-4-4, you should have the PES locked to the outroute signal. Do not tighten the feed mounting
brackets as you are going to optimize the polarization adjustment. Ask the satellite operator permission to
transmit the CW carrier in the frequency slot previously assigned for this test.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
You are going to transmit a CW carrier to the satellite. Be sure you are
transmitting at the correct frequency and you won’t cause interference
for other carriers.
C-4-5
Using the frequency conversion (FREQCVT) program in the PES installation personal computer, get the
four-digits code for the frequency you are entitled to transmit the CW carrier. Type, in terminal mode,
the following commands to the PES:
X5 (reset and enter TX test mode -- you should first see two parallel vertical lines [| |] in the indoor
unit IFM LED display, then [F]/[E.] while the unit trys to reacquire outroute sync, then three
horizontal lines alternating with [F.])
Qxxxx (xxxx is the TX frequency code given by the FREQCVT program)
SWA0 (max. TX power)
X1 (turn TX on in CW mode; IFM display shows three horizontal lines alternating with [BLANK.]
while CW is being transmitted)
The support earth station should now be able to see the CW carrier in the spectrum analyzer screen, with
the LNA connected to the correct receive port (co-pol). Ask the operator to switch the LNA to the
opposite polarization port (cross-pol). The same signal will be seen in the instrument screen, but with a
much lower level. The goal is to reduce this last signal (the cross-pol interference) to the minimum
possible.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Do not stay in front of the feedhorn as there is RF signal being
transmitted at this time.
By the command of the earth station operator, rotate the feedhorn in very small steps. The signal strength
in the spectrum analyzer is going to increase or decrease. Keep turning in the same direction while the
level decreases. Invert the direction you’re turning if it increases. When you reach the lowest possible
level, tighten the bolts of the feed mounting brackets. Ask the operator to ensure that the minimum level
didn’t change with the tightening procedure. Now you can ask the support earth station to measure again
both signals, co-pol and cross-pol and the difference between them is the cross-polarization isolation.
To restart the PES for normal operation, reset the unit by turning the power off and back on again.
NOTE 1
If the CW carrier to noise ratio (C/N) being received at the support earth station is too
low (below 40 dB), you probably won’t be able to see the cross-pol signal on the
spectrum analyzer screen, as it’s going to be covered by the noise floor of the system and
the instrument. Try reducing the analyzer resolution bandwidth. If the expected C/N
ratio still can’t be met, you’ll need to use a larger antenna or a less noisy LNA in the
support earth station. If you don’t have this facility, use method 2.
C-4-6
NOTE 2
A variant for this method is to use a modulated carrier instead of the CW signal.
Although the precision is lower, this can be a solution if the satellite operator does not
allow the use of CW carriers in the satellite. In this case, change the last command sent
to the PES to X3 (instead of X5) what will turn TX on but with a pseudo-random 2047
pattern.
NOTE 3
When the PES is commanded to transmit CW in TX test mode, it will transmit for one
hour as long as the PES remains in sync on the outroute. If the PES stops transmitting
CW, it can be because the one hour has expired or because the feed system has been
rotated so far that sync was lost on the outroute. Enter the terminal node commands
again to restart CW transmission if necessary.
4.5.2 METHOD 2: REMOTE PES RECEPTION CHECK

This method does not allow the actual measurement of the transmit cross-polarization isolation of the PES
nor is it the best way to ensure minimum cross-pol interference. However, if the satellite operator is not
satisfied with the isolation results achieved by the normal aiming and adjusting of the polarization
described in chapter 11, sections 1 thru 5 and pages C-4-1 to C-4-4, and you cannot use the method 1
described above, you can fine adjust polarization by checking the received signal at the PES.
A spectrum analyzer connected to the PES LNA output can give you a high sensitivity level measurement
of any downlink signal from the satellite. By ensuring the maximum level for a chosen received carrier of
the proper polarization, you are also ensuring a good polarization isolation for the PES transmit uplink
signal.
Aim and adjust the antenna and RF unit as described in chapter 11, sections 1 thru 5 and pages C-4-1 to
C-4-4. Do not tighten the feed mounting brackets as you are going to optimize the polarization
adjustment.
Turn the IDU power off every time you connect or disconnect cables and test equipment. Return the
power on only after all cables are hooked up correctly. The Receive RF Cable connecting the RF Head
and the LNA cannot be removed because it carries dc voltage supply to the LNA. So, disconnect this
cable end at the RF Head side and insert a T-adaptor with N connectors between the end of the RF cable
and the RF Unit. CAUTION: DO NOT CONNECT THE SPECTRUM ANALYZER TO THE THIRD
CONNECTOR YET. There is dc voltage on this cable which can damage the spectrum analyzer input.
Install a dc-block in the third connector of the T-adapter and then connect the analyzer to the dc-block
output. See figure 4-5.
Choose a carrier to use for this adjustment. Do not use TV-FM, FDM-FM, SCPC, CDMA or TDMA
carriers as they don’t have a steady peak level characteristic. The outroute carrier is a good choice for this
purpose.
After setting the analyzer accordingly to the chosen carrier, rotate the feedhorn in small steps. Notice a
slight change in the received level of the carrier seen in the spectrum analyzer screen. Keep turning in the
same direction while the level increases. Invert the direction you’re turning if it decreases. The goal is to
get the highest possible level for this carrier, which means the best receive polarization adjustment. After
C-4-7
reaching the highest level, tighten the feed mounting bracket bolts. Ensure that the maximum level didn’t
change with the tightening procedure.
TX
RX
T - Adapter
DC -
BLOCK SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
S5-05-PES3-1553
Figure 4-5. Minimizing Cross-Polarization Interference Method 2,

Remote PES Reception Check
4.5.3 SPECTRUM ANALYZER MEASUREMENTS

In order to achieve the expected results in the two previously explained methods, the following techniques
should be used with the spectrum analyzer:
- Do not try to see the whole carrier in the analyzer screen. As you are only concerned with
the peak changes, use 1 dB/div to ensure maximum sensitivity to any movement in the
polarization adjustment;
- Do not use video average as it would corrupt the measurement accuracy. If you need to filter
the signal, use a lower video bandwidth instead;
- Wait for a complete trace sweep before each movement in the polarization adjustment;
- If the carrier is too close to the analyzer noise floor, reduce the resolution bandwidth;
- Be careful when using manual settings for sweep time, resolution and video bandwidth not to
incur in an uncalibrated situation. Usually spectrum analyzer users tend to reduce the sweep
time to compensate the delay caused by low resolution and video bandwidths, sometimes not
noticing that a conflict occurred and the measurement is not valid.
C-4-8
12-14-92
12-14-92
SECTION 5 - TROUBLESHOOTING C-BAND FOR X000 SERIES
Section 5
TROUBLESHOOTING C-BAND FOR X000 SERIES
5.1 GENERAL
In general, the LED codes and troubleshooting techniques of chapters 14 and 15 are not only applicable to
Ku-band but also to C-band for X000 series. Table 5-1 lists C-band quick troubleshooting measures.
Table 5-1. C-Band Quick Troubleshooting Measures
Symptom Action
Failure to properly transmit the STEP 1) Remove ac power from the PES indoor unit. Examine
inroute to the Hub, as indicated the feed system for intrusion of moisture or water by looking at
by properly acquired outroute at the feed window for drops of water clinging to the INSIDE of
the site without proper reception the window. This indicates water in the feed, and this requires
of the inroute back at the Hub. further examination. Remove the feed system from the cradle
and tilt it so that the feed window points downward. Shake the
feed system to ensure that any water trapped inside it falls to the
feed window. If water is observed collecting in a small pool on
the INSIDE of the window, replace the entire feed system and
attempt to recommission the station. If no water collects, move
on to step 2.
NOTE: When replacing the feed system, follow the steps

outlined in step 2 below for connector tightening and resealing.
STEP 2) Do this ONLY if you have already tried step 1. Identify

the transmit RF cable. The RF Head will be marked "TX" where
this cable connects, and the other end goes to the far end of the
OMT, not the LNA. Remove the coating (be prepared to replace
this coating) around both connectors and unscrew them. Check
for water in the connectors, especially around the center pins. If
water is observed, replace the cables with new cables, being sure
to tighten the connectors approximately 20 degrees with pliers
AFTER they have been hand-tightened. Reseal the connections
with HNS-approved sealant. If no water is observed, put the
original connectors back following the above steps.
NOTE: Failure to tighten and seal these connectors will result in

failure of the station during the next rainstorm.
Now try to recommission the station. If these steps fail, proceed

with the remainder of the troubleshooting indoors, concentrating
on the indoor unit and the circuit cards.
C-5-1
Table 5-1. C-Band Quick Troubleshooting Measures (Continued)
Symptom Action
The outroute is no longer STEP 1) Remove ac power from the PES indoor unit. Examine
acquired, and trying to the feed system for intrusion of moisture or water by looking at
recommission the station fails. the feed window for drops of water clinging to the INSIDE of
Until recently the station was the window. This indicates water in the feed, and this requires
operational, and a recent further examination. Remove the feed system from the cradle
rainstorm or snowstorm has and tilt it so that the feed window points downward. Shake the
occurred followed by the station feed system to ensure that any water trapped inside it falls to the
failing. feed window. If water is observed collecting in a small pool on
the INSIDE of the window, replace the entire feed system and
attempt to recommission the station. If no water collects, move
on to step 2.
NOTE: When replacing the feed system, follow the steps

outlined in step 2 below for connector tightening and resealing.
STEP 2) Do this ONLY if you have already tried step 1. Identify

the receive RF cable. The RF Head will be marked "RX" where
this cable connects, and the other end goes to the far end of the
LNA, not the OMT. Remove the coating (be prepared to replace
this coating) around both connectors and unscrew them. Check
for water in the connectors, especially around the center pins. If
water is observed, replace the cables with new cables, being sure
to tighten the connectors approximately 20 degrees with pliers
AFTER they have been hand-tightened. Reseal the connections
with HNS-approved sealant. If no water is observed, put the
original connectors back following the above steps.

failure of the station during the next rainstorm.
Now try to recommission the station. If these steps fail, proceed

with the remainder of the troubleshooting indoors, concentrating
on the indoor unit and the circuit cards.
C-5-2
Symptom Action
All operation of the PES has Try to replace the LNA first, leaving the RF head in place.
failed following a nearby Carefully remove the bolts holding the LNA to the OMT and
lightning strike. Evidence of replace with a new LNA (including a new gasket coated with
this occurring includes burn Silicone grease), again carefully tightening all the bolts in a "Star
marks near the site, other pattern." A Star pattern means after tightening the first bolt,
electrical equipment that has tighten a bolt on the opposite side of the flange, not the bolt next
failed during the storm that is to the one you just tightened. Keep going to a bolt on the
near the site, and obvious opposite side of the flange until you have tightened all the bolts,
damage to the outdoor then start over again. You must start over because the process of
equipment. tightening all the bolts loosens up the first few you tightened.
Attach the RF cable to the LNA, following the tightening and

sealing steps detailed in step 2 of the above procedure.

failure of the station during the next rainstorm. Using regular
petroleum grease will cause the gasket to fail and allow water to
damage the feed system.
Then try to recommission the station. If the station fails to

operate properly, replace the RF Head, being sure to properly
seal the connections where they have to be redone.
Try to recommission the station. If these steps fail, proceed with

the remainder of the troubleshooting indoors, concentrating on
the indoor unit and the circuit cards.
C-5-3
Symptom Action
Disrupted Communications Check for C-band Interference.

- Remote not responding
messages. 1) Verify that the polarization value for this site has been
- More CRCs received than correctly set (see page C-4-1).
normal.
- Packet retransmitted C2 times. 2) Check for the presence of other users of this satellite who are
- Packets missed on session on the same (or nearby) frequency and are supposed to be on the
detailed SOC screen. opposite polarization channel, but may have sites with
- User data response time incorrectly adjusted polarization. The interferer should be on
degradation. another transponder (cross-pol), but the misadjustment causes
energy to be dispersed into your transponder.
Typically, these interference sources can be identified by setting

up a spectrum analyzer at either the remote TVRO port
(950-1450 MHz) or at the hub and monitoring the 70 MHz input
to the BCD. The hub can monitor the cross-pol transponder and
your transponder. Several approaches can be taken: one is to
monitor with "max hold" on the spectrum analyzer; the second
method is to set up a video camera to monitor and review the
tape after a possible occurrence.
Once an interferer is identified, notify the satellite vendor and

send a fax which indicates the own polarization angle
interference max hold plot and a signature from the cross-pol
(available at the hub) of the pattern of the interferer. The
satellite vendor should take action to see that offending sites are
readjusted. As an interim measure, the HNS customer may
choose to shift frequency to the least disturbed part of his leased
transponder.
3) Check for Local Interference

Obtain a spectral signature for the transponder at a reliable site.
At the site under evaluation, connect a spectrum analyzer to the
TVRO output of the RF head. When there are communication
difficulties, obtain a spectral plot for this site. Differences from
the reliable site may indicate the frequency of a local source of
interference. You may change the antenna azimuth and
elevation away from the satellite and maximize the undesired
signal to identify the direction to the source of local interference.
Possible solutions to local interference are better placement of
the antenna, revising the frequency plan, and requesting the
responsible party to eliminate any undesired unintended spurious
signals from the local source of interference.
C-5-4
Symptom Action
Intermittent operation or poor 1) Verify that ac wiring and ground connections are correct.
performance
2) Check for ac power line fluctuations caused by poor power or
excessive load on the circuit. Install an ac line monitor and
allow it to record events for several days. Try to time align the
occurrence of ac disturbances and sags with poor performance of
the PES.
If a correlation can be found with the heavy load associated with

the startup of large motors, air conditioners, refrigerators, etc.,
move the PES to a circuit isolated from them. Where applicable,
have an electrician correct the problem with added circuits,
improved wiring or other measures. The customer may choose
to install an uninterruptible power source (UPS).
3) Check for ac power failures. The customer may choose to

install an uninterruptible power source.
4) Verify that the IFL connectors have been properly installed

and have not been penetrated by water. IFL water penetrating
has caused many intermittent failures and performance
degradation problems. Remove ac power from the PES indoor
unit. At the PES indoor unit, temporarily remove IFL cable from
the indoor unit and inspect the connectors. A properly
terminated IFL cable should have its center pin flush (within
1/64" maximum) with the connector housing and should be
straight as shown in figure 3-2 on page C-3-4. Replace the IFL
connector if improperly installed. At the RF head, remove the
vapor wrap covering (have new vapor wrap material available)
from the IFL connector. Temporarily remove the IFL cable from
the RF head. Inspect the IFL connector for proper installation
and water penetration. Replace the IFL connector if improperly
installed or if there is evidence of water penetration. If IFL cable
shows water penetration and has adequate length, shorten to
remove damaged portion. Reconnect IFL, tighten 1/4 turn with
pliers, and apply "vapor wrap."
Site located at low latitude Check that the reflector does not hold water. Water in the
(high elevation angle) has reflector can cause severe performance degradation and distort
communication failure during the pattern of the antenna. Drill four 1/2" holes six inches apart
and soon after rain storm. at the bottom cup of the antenna reflector.
Communication disruption Check with hub operator for predicted dates/times of sun outage
lasting 1 to 10 minutes during for your site. No corrective action, just distinguish this problem
the day for up to 5 days in from other undesired failures.
spring or fall.
C-5-5
12-14-92
12-14-92
SECTION 6 - REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT C-BAND OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT
Section 6
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT C-BAND OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT
6.1 RF HEAD, (RFH) REPLACEMENT GENERAL

The removal and replacement procedure for the C-band differs somewhat depending on the polarization
type:
• Linear (Cross-pol and Co-pol)
• Circular
The replaceable parts are listed in table 1-2 on page C-1-7 and pictured in figure 1-4 on page C-1-6.
In all cases, remove power from the indoor unit before beginning work on the RFH. Place a tag on the
indoor unit so that power is not applied during RFH replacement. Turning off the indoor unit removes
power from the IFL cable.
If your site has anti-icing with a feedhorn heater, remove power from the anti-icing system also.
Normally there is a circuit breaker or switch for the anti-icing system within six feet of the antenna.
6.2 RFH (LINEAR CROSS- AND CO-POLARIZED) REPLACEMENT (PRODELIN 1.8M AND
2.4M ANTENNA)
STEP 1. Turn off the indoor unit and the anti-icing system (if supplied), and place warning tags on the
power switches to ensure that power is not accidentally applied while performing
maintenance.
STEP 2. Peel the Vaporwrap sealant away from the RFH connectors and cables.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Use care. Do not damage cables or connectors while removing
Vaporwrap sealant.
STEP 3. At the RFH, remove the two cable connectors between the RFH and the feed system (ref.
figure 3-3 on page C-3-5).
STEP 4. Remove the IFL cable connectors from the RFH.
STEP 5. Remove the two bolts securing the transmitter bracket (1) the Feed Support (ref. figure 2-8A
on page C-2-12), then remove the RFH from the antenna.
STEP 6. Remove and keep as spare parts, the two bolts securing the RFH to the bracket, and place the
RFH in a safe location.
STEP 7. Using the supplied bolts, and lockwashers, attach the replacement RFH to the bracket.
STEP 8. Fasten the replacement RFH and bracket to the Feed Support. The RFH must be oriented
with the two type "N" connectors, labeled "TX" and "RX" facing the feed system, and the
type "N" connector labeled "IFL" facing the antenna.
C-6-1
STEP 9. Attach the two Feed System RF cable connectors (TX and RX) and the IFL cable connectors
to the RFH. First hand-tighten the connectors, then, using pliers, turn each connector an
additional 20 to 40 degrees to ensure a tight connection.
STEP 10. Apply a weatherproof sealant, such as "Vaporwrap" to the connectors.
NOTE
Connectors must be properly tightened and sealed to ensure good
electrical connections and avoid moisture penetration. Failure to tighten
and seal connectors will lead to a system malfunction.
STEP 11. Recommission the PES.
6.3 RFH (CIRCULAR POLARIZED) REPLACEMENT (PRODELIN 1.8M AND 2.4M

ANTENNA)
maintenance.
STEP 2. Peel the Vaporwrap sealant away from the RFH connectors and cables.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Vaporwrap sealant.
STEP 3. At the RFH, remove the two cable connectors between the RFH and the feed system (ref.
figure 3-4 on page C-3-6).
STEP 4. Remove the IFL cable from the RFH.
STEP 5. Remove the two bolts securing the RFH to the circular polarizer bracket, then remove the
RFH from the antenna. (ref. figure 2-8B on page C-2-12).
STEP 6. Using the supplied bolts, nuts, and lockwashers, attach the replacement RFH to the circular
polarizer bracket. The RFH must be oriented with the two type "N" connectors, labeled "TX"
and "RX" facing the feed system, and the type "N" connector labeled "IFL" facing the
antenna.
STEP 7. Attach the two Feed System RF cable connectors (TX and RX) and the IFL cable connector
to the RFH. First hand-tighten the connectors, then, using pliers, turn each connector an
additional 20 to 40 degrees to insure a tight connection.
C-6-2
NOTE
STEP 9. Recommission the PES.
6.4 LNA REPLACEMENT (PRODELIN 1.8M AND 2.4M ANTENNA)

maintenance.
STEP 2. Peel the Vaporwrap sealant away from the LNA connector and cable.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Use care. Do not damage cable or connector while removing Vaporwrap
sealant.
STEP 3. At the LNA, remove the cable connector between the RFH and the LNA (ref. figure 3-3 on
page C-3-5).
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
STEP 4. Remove and retain all ten bolts securing the LNA to the Feed System (ref. figure 2-2 on page
C-2-3). Your feed system will not have the blank panel shown in figure 2-2. Note LNA to
OMT Feed System orientation, then place the LNA in a safe location.
STEP 5. Apply liberal amounts of silicone grease to the new LNA gasket, then place the gasket in the
groove on the LNA with the flat side of the gasket in the groove.
STEP 6. Position the new LNA on the Feed System, noting that orientation with the Feed System can
be the same as the old unit (will work in either orientation).
STEP 7. Reinstall, but do not tighten, the ten bolts removed in step 4.
STEP 8. Using the star pattern shown in figure 2-1 on page C-2-2, tighten the bolts to secure the LNA
to the Feed System.
C-6-3
STEP 9. Once all ten bolts have been tightened, repeat the procedure in step 8 to ensure uniform
torque.
STEP 10. Attach the RFH cable connector to the LNA. First hand-tighten the connector, then, using
pliers, turn the connector an additional 20 to 40 degrees to ensure a tight connection.
STEP 11. Apply a weatherproof sealant, such as "Vaporwrap" to the connector.
NOTE
Connector must be properly tightened and sealed to ensure good
electrical connection and avoid moisture penetration. Failure to tighten
and seal connector will lead to a system malfunction.
STEP 12. Realign the feed system to the antenna for optimal signal reception. Readjust polarization to
the correct setting. Repoint the antenna, refining azimuth and elevation for optimal signal
reception. Recommission the PES.
6.5 FEED SYSTEM REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (PRODELIN 1.8M AND 2.4M
ANTENNA)
maintenance.
STEP 2. Peel the Vaporwrap sealant away from the Feed system connectors and cables.
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
Vaporwrap sealant.
STEP 3. At the Feed System, remove the two cable connectors between the RFH and the feed system
(ref. figure 3-3 on page C-3-5).
STEP 4. Note the Feed System/LNA angular orientation, and place an identifying mark on the
mounting bracket to ensure new Feed System is placed in the same angular orientation when
installed.
STEP 5. Supporting the Feed System, remove the single bracket (Linear Polarization System) or the
two brackets (Circular Polarization System) securing the Feed System to the Feed Support
(ref. figures 2-4 on page C-2-5 and 2-5 on page C-2-7) as follows:
a. Linear polarization
Refer to figure 2-4 on page C-2-5. Remove two bolts (14), nuts (16), and washers (15).
The Feed System can now be removed from the Feed Support.
b. Circular Polarization
Refer to figure 2-5 on page C-2-7. Remove four bolts (16 and 17), nuts (20), and washers
(19). The Feed System can now be removed from the Feed Support.
C-6-4
************
* *
* CAUTION *
* *
************
STEP 6. Remove the LNA from the defective feed system. The replacement feed system may have a
blank panel over the OMT opening as shown in figure 2-2 on page C-2-3. If so, remove the
blank panel. Then, install the LNA onto the replacement feed system.
STEP 7. Install the new Feed System, noting angular orientation. Ensure groove behind feedhorn fits
into Feed System bracket. Tighten all mounting hardware.
STEP 8. Attach the two RFH cable connectors (TX and RX) to the Feed System. First hand-tighten
the connectors, then, using pliers, turn each connector an additional 20 to 40 degrees to
ensure a tight connection.
NOTE
STEP 10. Realign the feed system to the antenna for optimal signal reception. Readjust
polarization to the correct setting. Repoint the antenna, refining azimuth and elevation
for optimal signal reception. Recommission the PES.
6.6 HNS RETURN POLICY

Before returning material to Hughes Network Systems for repair (in or out of warranty), a Return
Material Authorization (RMA) number must be obtained from the HNS Customer Service Department.
We can be reached by:
Telephone: 301-428-5862
Fax: 301-428-2803
Telex: 710-828-0541
NOTE: The HNS authorized service provider in the U.S. will follow the established procedure for
obtaining RMAs by calling T.P.M. central dispatch.
When returning equipment that is both in and out of warranty, separate RMA numbers will be issued.
C-6-5
The following information is required from the party returning material:

A. Company Name and Address
B. Company representative, phone number and fax or telex numbers
C. Complete part number, nomenclature, serial number and a description of failure symptoms
for each item being returned
D. Customer Purchase Order number (required for items out of warranty period only)
E. To avoid possible damage, material should be packed in the original container or equivalent
protective container
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR INTERNATIONAL RETURNS:

A. Each return must be accompanied by a Proforma Invoice listing:
1. Part number, serial number and nomenclature
2. Country of Origin (as marked on the hardware)
3. Value for Insurance
4. Failure symptom report/reason for return
B. Notification of shipment via Fax including, a copy of the Proforma Invoice and airwaybill.
Ship to address:
Hughes Network Systems
11717 Exploration Lane
Germantown, MD 20876
Attn: Custom Service/RMA #______________
For International returns:

C/O: Air Express International
Dulles International Airport
13968 Park Center Road
Herndon, VA 22071
Attn: Rassoul Teimouri/RMA #______________
Note that equipment received "damaged" at HNS is NOT covered by warranty, and the customer will
have to pay for repairs.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair the equipment yourself. Removal of screws,
covers, connectors, etc. voids the HNS warranty, and the customer will
have to pay for repairs.
C-6-6
6.7 RETURNING EQUIPMENT FOR REPAIR

Use the original shipping boxes and protective shipping material when returning PES equipment for depot
repair. If the original Hughes Network Systems boxes are not available, pack the equipment using
equivalent quality boxes and protective material. Carefully evaluate nonstandard packing materials to
ensure that they provide at least the same level of protection as the original packing materials provided.
Ensure that all equipment returned for depot repair is accompanied by a properly affixed tag or data sheet.
Ensure that the tag or data sheet has the proper RMA number annotated upon it.
C-6-7
4-20-94
APPENDIX D
PES X000+ PRODUCT SERIES
Section 1
OVERVIEW
1.1 INTRODUCTION
HNS has added PES model X000+ series to its PES product lines as depicted in figure 1-1. PES X000+
series offers advantages in more efficient production and testing over the PES X000 series. PES X000+
series consists of a new Intermediate Frequency Module called the IFM Plus (IFM+) and a new Ku-band
receive/transmit Radio Frequency Unit called the Radio Frequency Unit-LS (RFU-LS). The IFM+
operates within the same type indoor unit chassis (PES 6000, 8000, 9000) and with the same type port
cards as the X000 products. The RFU-LS operates in conjunction with the IFM+. Initial X000+ products
are Ku-band receive-transmit.
1.2 IDENTIFICATION
PES X000+ series products are visually similar to the PES X000 series. Pay close attention during
installation and service calls that the proper products are selected/replaced.
1.2.1 INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY MODULE PLUS (IFM+)

The IFM+ when installed can be visually distinguished from the IFM by its notches above IFL and
VIDEO connectors, panel markings, part number, and its recessed test connector as shown in figure 1-2C.
Table 1-2 compares IFM and IFM+ characteristics.
1.2.2 INDOOR UNITS CONTAINING INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY MODULE PLUS (IFM+)

X000+ indoor units contain intermediate frequency module plus (IFM+) circuit cards. These X000+
indoor units are distinguished from X000 indoor units, which contain the intermediate frequency module
(IFM), by their configuration part numbers as listed in table 1-1. In most cases, indoor units are shipped
containing only an IFM+ or an IFM. The installation subcontractor adds the required port cards and
PLCs as specified by HNS work order for a given customer site.
Table 1-1. Configuration Numbers - Ku Band 110 Vac Chassis
HNS HNS Input

Configuration Chassis Assy Voltage Port Card Bottom
Model No. No. (Vac) Slot(s) Slot Comment
PES 6000 1012639-0010 1011872-0010 110 <empty> IFM Ku Band
PES 6000 1017220-0010 1011872-0010 110 <empty> IFM+ Ku Band
for X000+
PES 8000 1012638-0010 1012068-0010 110 <empty> IFM Ku Band
PES 8000 1017221-0010 1012068-0010 110 <empty> IFM+ Ku Band
for X000+
D-1-1
TYPE 1 RF HEAD
DIU
PORT IOC AEU

CARDS CARD IFL 9 TWISTED PAIR
BOX
BACKPLANE
OUTDOOR
TYPE 2 UNIT
DIU/O (ODU)
PORT IOC IDM RFB COAX IFL

CARDS CARD CARD CARD
BACKPLANE
PES MODEL X000 SERIES

MODEL 8000
RF UNIT
PORT IFM COAX IFL

CARDS CARD
IOC
CHIP
BACKPLANE
PES MODEL X000+ SERIES

MODEL 8000
IFM PLUS RF UNIT-LS

PORT
(IFM+) COAX IFL (RFU-LS)
CARDS
CARD
IOC OR
CHIP
BACKPLANE
ABBREVIATIONS RF UNIT
AEU - AUXILIARY ELECTRONICS UNIT (RFU)
DIU - DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT, PES TYPE 1 INDOOR UNIT
DIU/O - DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT/O, PES TYPE 2 INDOOR UNIT
IDM - INDOOR DEMODULATOR
IFL - INTERFACILITY LINK CABLE
IFM - INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY MODULE
IOC - INROUTE OUTROUTE CONTROLLER
ODU - OUTDOOR UNIT
RF - RADIO FREQUENCY
RFB - RADIO FREQUENCY BOARD
RFU - RADIO FREQUENCY UNIT
PES3-1116
D-1-2 Figure 1-1. PES Types and Models

APPENDIX D - PES X000+ PRODUCT SERIES
NORMAL
NORMAL
DIAG COMM DIAG COMM IOC
A) IOC INDICATES PES TYPE 1/TYPE 2
PROTRUDING SMB
CONNECTOR
TEST
CONFIG
P/N 3000290-0001
AUTO
IFM
VIDEO COMM
IFL
CONNECT TO RF UNIT (RFU) ONLY
B) IFM INDICATES MODEL X000 SERIES
RECESSED SMB
CONNECTOR
TEST
IFL P/N 1016174-0001 VIDEO CONFIG IFM+

AUTO
COMM
CONNECT TO RF UNIT (RFU) OR RF UNIT-LS (RFU-LS)
C) IFM+ FOR MODEL X000+ SERIES

PES3-1271
Figure 1-2. Rear View Identification of IFM and IFM+
D-1-3
Table 1-2. IFM and IFM+ Characteristics
Characteristic IFM IFM+
Part Number 3000290-0001 1016174-0001
Identifying Features Protruding SMB Recessed SMB

test connector test connector
Flat rear panel near Notches in rear panel

IFL "N" connector and above IFL "N" connector
VIDEO "F" connector and VIDEO "F" connector
Later units only,

rear panel marked "IFM+"
Receives Outroute 128 Kbps 128 Kbps

Data Rates 128 Kbps spread spectrum 512 Kbps
512 Kbps
Cannot receive spread
spectrum outroute
Transmits Inroute 64 Kbps 64 Kbps

Data Rates 128 Kbps 128 Kbps
256 Kbps 256 Kbps
Compatible Outdoor Unit RF Unit (RFU) RF Unit-LS (RFU-LS)

(Ku Receive/Transmit) or
RF Unit (RFU)
Compatible Outdoor Unit R/O Under Development

(Ku Receive Only) (see appendix B)
Compatible Outdoor Unit RF Head for C-band Under Development

(C-band Receive/Transmit) for X000 series
(see appendix C)
Compatible Outdoor Unit Available from HNS Under Development

(C-band Receive Only)
D-1-4
Table 1-3. RFU and RFU-LS Characteristics
Characteristics RF Unit (RFU) RF Unit-LS (RFU-LS)
Part Number 1011836 -0001, -0003, -0005, 1011836 -0002, -0004, -0006,
-0007, -0009, -0011, -0013, -0010, -0012, -0014
-0015, -0017, -0018, -0019,
-0020 -0025, -0027, -0029,
-0031
Identifying Features Large size LNC (5.5-inch long, Smaller size LNC (3.75-inch
ref. figure 1-3A) long, ref. figure 1-3B)
Operates in IFM (can receive spread IFM+ only (cannot receive

Conjunction with spectrum) spread spectrum)
or
IFM+ (cannot receive spread
spectrum)
Receives Outroute 128 Kbps 512 Kbps

Data Rates 128 Kbps spread spectrum
512 Kbps Cannot receive 128 Kbps
outroute
Cannot receive spread spectrum

outroute
Antenna Aiming Acquires outroute signal rapidly Acquires outroute signal rapidly
(Install Mode) so that antenna may be slowly so that antenna may be slowly
adjusted in azimuth/elevation adjusted in azimuth/elevation
until outroute is found. until outroute is found.
Pointing voltage transition to Pointing voltage transition to

under 5 volts is relatively rapid. under 5 volts can take up to five
minutes.
Video Reception Compatible with all approved Compatible with all approved
video integrated receiver/ video integrated receiver/
decoders (IRDs). decoders (IRDs).
D-1-5
1.2.3 RADIO FREQUENCY UNIT-LS (RFU-LS)

The RFU-LS can be visually distinguished from the RFU by its smaller Low Noise Converter (LNC) as
shown in figure 1-3B. Refer to table 1-4 for RFU and RFU-LS part number identification. Part number
markings are present on the front and bottom of the RFU or RFU-LS. Table 1-3 compares the RFU and
RFU-LS characteristics.
5.5 IN.
LNC
A) RF UNIT (RFU) HAS LARGER SIZE LNC
3.75 IN.
LNC
PES3-1642 B) RF UNIT-LS (RFU-LS) HAS SMALLER SIZE LNC
Figure 1-3. Using LNC Sizes for RFU-LS Visual Identification
D-1-6
Table 1-4. Ku-Band RF Units for PES Model X000 and Model X000+ Series
Downlink
RFU 1011836-0005 10.95-11.70 GHz 0.5 Watt Asian Intl IFM or IFM+
RFU-LS 1011836-0006 10.95-11.70 GHz 0.5 Watt Asian Intl1 IFM+ only
RFU-LS 1011836-0014 10.95-11.70 GHz 1.0 Watt Asian Intl1 IFM+ only
R/O 1011836-0017 11.70-12.20 GHz Receive Only U.S. Ku band IFM or IFM+
R/O 1011836-0018 12.25-12.75 GHz Receive Only European Intl IFM or IFM+
R/O 1011836-0019 10.95-11.70 GHz Receive Only Asian Intl IFM or IFM+
R/O 1011836-0020 11.45-11.70 GHz Receive Only Asian Intl IFM or IFM+
R/O-LS TBD TBD Receive Only IFM+ only
RFU 1011836-0025 11.70-12.20 GHz 2.0 Watts U.S. Ku band IFM or IFM+
RFU 1011836-0027 12.25-12.75 GHz 2.0 Watts European Intl IFM or IFM+
RFU 1011836-0029 10.95-11.70 GHz 2.0 Watts Asian Intl IFM or IFM+
RFU 1011836-0031 11.45-11.70 GHz 2.0 Watts Asian Intl IFM or IFM+
NOTE 1. RFU-LS is unable to receive spread spectrum outroute. For spread spectrum
outroute, use RFU with IFM.
RFU-LS is unable to receive 128 Kbps outroute. For 128 Kbps outroute, use RFU.
D-1-7
1.3 COMPATIBILITY
As illustrated in figure 1-4A, the IFM operates in conjunction with the RF Unit (RFU). For spread
spectrum outroute signal reception, an IFM/RFU combination is required.
The IFM+ may operate in conjunction with an RF Unit (RFU) or an RF Unit-LS (RFU-LS) as shown in
figure 1-4B. When the IFM+ is connected to an RFU, outroute signal acquisition is identical to the the
IFM/RFU combination.
HNS policy does not permit an RFU-LS to be connected to an IFM at a customer site, because these units
are not designed to operate together.
REQUIRED FOR SPREAD

SPECTRUM OUTROUTE LOCKING APPROX.
LNC 12 GHz
(Receive)
PES MODEL X000
SERIES INDOOR UNIT
IFL CABLE
IFM
APPROX.
High Power 14 GHz
Converter (HPC)
(Transmit) RF UNIT (RFU)
A) IFM OPERATES WITH RFU ONLY
LOCKING
LNC
(Receive)
PES MODEL X000 RF UNIT (RFU)

SERIES INDOOR UNIT
IFL CABLE
IFM+ OR OR
LNC
RF UNIT-LS (RFU-LS)
B) IFM PLUS (IFM+) OPERATES WITH RFU OR RFU-LS

PES3-1657
9/23/93
Figure 1-4. Compatibility - IFM+ with RFU-LS or RFU
D-1-8
1.4 SITE COMMISSIONING
NOTE
During site commissioning, make sure that the IFL cable is connected to
the IFM+ and RFU-LS. Having this connection in place during site
commissioning will give the RFU-LS the a warm-up period before
antenna aiming.
Site Commissioning for PES X000+ series is very similar to site commissioning for PES X000 series.
Refer to chapter 10, section 1 thru chapter 10, section 4. When dialog program prompts for spacelink
modem parameters, remember that the X000+ series may not be set for the 128K spread spectrum
outroute.
--------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------
(01=enable, 00=disable): 00 ??> ← must be 00 for X000+
Receive Only IFM
(RO=01, TR=00): 00 ??>
Spectral Inversion
(01=enable, 00=disable): 00 ??> ← NOTE 1
Data Rates (kbps)
Outr (02=1664, 01=512, 00=128): 00 ??> ← must be 01 or 02
Inr (02=256, 01=128, 00=64): 00 ??> for RFU-LS
NOTE 1: Spectral inversion must be set to 00 unless the site is C-band receive only. C-band receive
only is not presently available for X000+. For X000+ series, spectral inversion should be set to 00.
1.5 CABLING
The IFL cable types and cable length requirement are identical for the PES X000+ product series and the
PES X000 product series. Refer to chapter 9, section 2 and chapter 9, section 3.
1.6 IFM+ DIAGNOSE MODE AND LOOPBACK

The IFM+ diagnose mode and loopback procedures are identical to the procedures for the IFM. Refer to
chapter 15, section 1.3. If your loopback cable has a right-angle SMB connector that does not make good
contact with the recessed SMB connector on the IFM+, obtain a loopback cable with a straight SMB
connector.
D-1-9
4-20-94
4-20-94
SECTION 2 - ANTENNA AIMING FOR X000+ SERIES
Section 2
ANTENNA AIMING FOR X000+ SERIES
2.1 INTRODUCTION
In general, antenna aiming is similar for PES X000+ series and for PES X000 series. Refer to chapter 11.
However, because the receive circuits of PES X000+ RFU-LS must sweep over a wider frequency band
(4 MHz vs 0.4 MHz) than the RFU, the outroute acquisition process in install mode can be slower for the
X000+ series.
2.2 ANTENNA AIMING ANGLES

Perform the steps of chapter 11 sections 1 thru 4 to obtain and preset the polarization, elevation, and
azimuth antenna aiming angles. Exercise care when leveling the canister, setting elevation and
determining azimuth. With X000+ series, a good first approximation in locating the satellite can save a
lot of time spent looking for the satellite.
2.3 RFU-LS WARM-UP

The RFU-LS requires a brief warm-up period before the antenna aiming receive tuning circuits are stable.
If you have not allowed the RFU-LS to warm up during site commissioning, apply power to the indoor
unit (and RFU-LS) and wait a few minutes before attempting antenna aiming.
2.4 REFINING ANTENNA AIMING - X000+ SERIES

In the steps below, you will use the meter indications provided by the INSTALL mode to point the
antenna so the outroute is acquired and then refine the antenna aiming. For proper operation, the remote’s
antenna must be pointed precisely at the satellite (within ±0.1 deg). The PES model X000 and X000+
series provide a dc indication on the antenna pointing output which, when read by a voltmeter,
summarizes receive status. Lower readings on the voltmeter indicate a strongly received signal.
As indicated in table 2-1 the INSTALL mode antenna pointing voltage indications are very similar
between X000 series and X000+ series. In both cases, the objective is to minimize the meter indication
which in turn represents the best received signal.
Perform the following steps for X000+ series:

STEP 1. Make certain that there is an active outroute signal for your PES. If necessary, telephone the
Hub operator to verify.
STEP 2. On the rear of the PES indoor unit, place all the data port card (DP) ALT/BYPASS/NORM
switches in the NORM position.
D-2-1
STEP 3. Use the DIU Configuration Editor SWITCH function to place the PES in INSTALL mode:
--------------------------------------------------------------
X
Hit <ENT> to exit.
--------------------------------------------------------------
Exit the SWITCH function, which causes the mode change to take effect.
STEP 4. At the antenna, perform the steps of chapter 11 sections 1 thru 4 to obtain and preset the
polarization elevation and azimuth antenna aiming angles. of you are aiming an antenna at a
new site that has never acquired a satellite signal, it is very unlikely that the antenna will just
happen to be pointed at the satellite because azimuth is set according to an imprecise compass
reading.
If you are at a site where the antenna is presently pointed at a satellite, move the antenna so
that it is not pointed at a satellite before resetting the indoor unit. See Antenna Aiming
note, page D-2-3.
Reset the indoor unit by turning the power off and on again. Wait for the port cards to
become active, LED display [5]/[2.] or [8]/[2.]. The IFM+ LED should progress to
displaying [I]/[E.].
STEP 5. Connect a voltmeter to the RF Unit-LS (RFU-LS) POINTING output. Start the the aiming
process using an analog meter, if available. If you are using a digital meter, be aware that the
meter sampling rate may cause you to fail to observe the lowered AGC caused by the satellite
signal if you move the antenna too rapidly. If you observe the meter during the indoor unit
reset, you should see the meter go from 0 to a maximum value (approximately 10 volts to 8.5
volts).
STEP 6. Check that the polarization and elevation setting are at the proper expected values. Slowly
move the antenna azimuth setting thru an approximate 40 degree arc centered on the expected
azimuth value while observing the voltmeter. If you see the meter needle deflect below 8.5
volts down toward 5 volts, note the position where the deflection occurs and continue the
azimuth sweep. If only one deflection occurs, return to that azimuth position. Fine adjust for
minimum indication. Wait up to five minutes for the the meter indication to go below 5
volts. When the meter indication goes below 5 volts, you have found the correct outroute.
You may choose to use a digital meter at this point. Fine adjust the azimuth and elevation
settings for the minimum meter indication.
If during the azimuth sweep you see a pattern of small deflection, large deflection, small
deflection, return to the center large deflection position. If you see a mixed pattern of
deflections, return to each and determine which provides the lowest meter indication below
5.0 volts. Refine antenna aiming at that azimuth.
If you fail to observe a meter deflection below 8.5 volts while moving the antenna through
the azimuth arc, repeat the process several times moving the antenna more slowly. (There is
some chance that the receive circuits could have been off frequency during their seven second
overlapping sweep, while you had the antenna pointed at the satellite.)
If you still fail to observe a meter deflection below 8.5 volts, increase the width of the
azimuth arc to 80 degrees centered on the expected value. Repeat the process.
D-2-2
SECTION 2 - ANTENNA AIMING FOR X000+ SERIES
If you still fail to observe a meter deflection below 8.5 volts, increase and decrease the
elevation angle in 1/2 degree increments and repeat the slow azimuth swing at each
increment. Try increments up to two degrees above and below the expected elevation value.
If you still do not see any meter deflection below 8.5 volts, try resetting the indoor unit while
the antenna is aimed in a direction where you are sure there are no signals. (See Antenna
Aiming note below.)
If the meter indications stay near 5 volts but will not go below 5 volts for more than five
minutes, either you are on the wrong outroute or the wrong carrier ID has been entered.
STEP 7. When the meter reading goes below 5.0 volts, you have acquired the correct outroute with the
proper carrier ID. Use fine azimuth and elevation adjustment to minimize the meter
indication. Proceed to step 7 in chapter 11, section 5.
ANTENNA AIMING NOTE

When the indoor unit is reset in INSTALL mode, the IFM+ rescales the
antenna pointing voltage based on the received signal strength. During
the reset process, the pointing voltage is set to 10 volts to correspond to
an assumed background noise level (no received signal). If the antenna
is, in fact, receiving an outroute signal when the indoor unit is reset, the
pointing voltage is clamped at a misleading 10-volt indication. In this
situation the AGC already corresponds to a strong received signal (not
background noise); therefore, the pointing voltage of 10 volts improperly
corresponds to the AGC of a strong signal. When the antenna is moved
to a weak signal, the indication stays at 10 volts, the highest value that
the RFU-LS is able to provide. In this situation, the pointing voltage will
drop to less than 5 volts, if you are fortunate enough to find the correct
outroute and hold the antenna pointed in the correct direction for a
sufficient period of time without the benefit of an AGC indication. If
you are attempting antenna aiming and the meter indication stays at a
high value (approx. 8.5 to 10 volts) while the antenna is moved in
azimuth, try pointing the antenna in a direction where you know there are
no signals and then resetting the indoor unit in order to properly rescale
the pointing voltage indication. Then, resume antenna aiming.
D-2-3
Table 2-1. Meter Indications During Install Mode
PES X000 PES X000+

RFU with IFM RFU-LS with IFM+
or RFU with IFM+
Approx. 10.0 to 8.5 volts* Approx. 10.0 to 8.5 volts*

Receiver ACG circuits not detecting a received Receiver ACG circuits not detecting a received
signal (or a very weak signal). signal (or a very weak signal) if reset scaling
properly occurred when no signal was present.
Normal frequency sweep time: 0.2 seconds --
Approx. 10.0 volts to 5.0 volts Approx. 10.0 volts to 5.0 volts
Indication related to receiver ACG. A lower Indication related to receiver ACG. A lower
voltage indicates a smaller AGC level, voltage indicates a smaller AGC level,
indicating a stronger outroute signal. indicating a stronger outroute signal.
Adjust antenna for minimum indication. Allow Adjust antenna for minimum indication. Allow
time for meter to go below 5.0 volts (AGC range five minutes for meter to go below 5.0 volts
to Eb/No range). (AGC range to Eb/No range).
If meter stays slightly above 5.0 volts for more If meter stays slightly above 5.0 volts for more
than three minutes, either: than five minutes, either:
antenna is pointed at wrong outroute antenna is pointed at wrong outroute
OR OR
wrong carrier ID entered in indoor unit. wrong carrier ID entered in indoor unit.
5.0 volts to 0.0 volts 5.0 volts to 0.0 volts

Indication related to Eb/No with a decrease of Indication related to Eb/No.
approximately 0.4 volts per dB where:
Indication Eb/No Signal Quality
5.0v 5 dB poor
less than 2.2v >12 dB good
When indication goes below 5.0 volts, IFM has When indication goes below 5.0 volts, IFM+ has
detected SHF for ISBN outroute with the correct detected SHF for ISBN outroute with the correct
carrier ID for the customer for this site. carrier ID for the customer for this site.
POINT ANTENNA FOR MINIMUM POINT ANTENNA FOR MINIMUM
INDICATION INDICATION
AGC = Automatic Gain Control

Eb/No = A theoretical signal-to-noise ratio
ISBN = Integrated Satellite Business Network
SFH = Superframe Header
* All pointing voltage values are approximate. The maximum pointing voltage actually observed is
variable.
D-2-4
4-20-94
4-20-94
SECTION 3 - HNS SERVICE REPLACEMENT/SUBSTITUTION POLICY - IFM/IFM+, RFU/RFU-LS
Section 3
HNS SERVICE REPLACEMENT/SUBSTITUTION POLICY - IFM/IFM+, RFU/RFU-LS
3.1 GENERAL GUIDELINES

This section is intended for customer service representatives providing repair service at previously
installed sites. In general, if a component has failed, the failed component should be replaced with an
identical type component (IFM for failed IFM, IFM+ for failed IFM+, RFU for failed RFU, and RFU-LS
for failed RFU-LS). In cases where an identical type component is not available, certain substitutions are
permissible depending upon the site’s operating characteristics (table 3-1). The preferred replacement
part is listed first.
Table 3-1. Compatibility and Replacement Components
Configuration/Characteristics Failed Suitable

before Failure Component Replacement
IFM and RFU IFM IFM only

spread spectrum outroute
IFM and RFU RFU RFU only
spread spectrum outroute
IFM and RFU IFM 1) IFM
not spread spectrum outroute 2) IFM+
IFM and RFU RFU RFU only
not spread spectrum outroute
IFM+ and RFU-LS RFU-LS RFU-LS
IFM+ and RFU-LS IFM+ IFM+ only
IFM+ and RFU RFU RFU
3.2 INSTALLING IFM+ IN PES 6000 CHASSIS

If you are required to install an IFM+ in a replacement PES 6000 chassis, you may find that the IFM+
does not seat properly in the circuit card slot. If you encounter this difficulty, loosen the backplane
support screws, seat the IFM+ and retighten the backplane screws.
Chassis that are originally shipped with the IFM+ should accept the IFM+ without difficulty.
D-3-1
6-28-95
APPENDIX E
PES 5000
This appendix includes the following sections:

Section 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1-1
Section 2. Upgrading PES 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2-1
Section 3. Cabling for PES 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3-1
Section 4. PES 5000 Site Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4-1
Section 5. PES 5000 Antenna Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5-1
Section 6. PES 5000 LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6-1
Section 7. PES 5000 Diagnose Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7-1
Section 8. PES 5000 Power Supply Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8-1
Section 9. Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9-1
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
The PES 5000 system is an addition to the PES product line offering customers digital satellite
communications with a more compact indoor unit, figure 1-1.
HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
Subsidiary of
PS31739.FH3
Figure 1-1. PES 5000 Indoor Unit
1.1 PES 5000 AND OTHER PES X000 SERIES - COMPARISON

Table 1-1 provides a summary comparison between PES 5000 and other PES X000 series products (such
as PES 6000, PES 8000, and the High Density Chassis, HDC). PES 5000 provides data communications,
but not voice. The PES 5000 indoor unit has its own built-in port card functions provided by the
integrated port card (IPC). Thus, the PES 5000 indoor unit does not accept the physical port cards
common to other PES X000 series products. As shown in figure 1-3, the PES 5000 indoor unit has a
built-in PLC which provides two RS-232 data ports. In addition, an optional plug-in PLC can be added to
provide two MORE data ports for a total of four. As listed in table 2-1, these are the same small PLC
circuit cards as accepted by the MP, TP, VDPC, and CPC port cards.
E-1-1
PES 5000
OUTDOOR UNIT
CONNECT TO PES 5000

INDOOR UNIT ONLY
5/16"-18 MOUNTING
HARDWARE
HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
Subsidiary of

PORT 3 PORT 1
AUTO
CAUTION: DISCONNET POWER

BEFORE CONNECTING OR
DISCONNECTING IFL CABLE
TVRO OUT
IFL
IFL CONNECTOR.
CONNECT TO PES 5000
OUTDOOR UNIT ONLY
PS31834.fh3
Figure 1-2. PES 5000 Outdoor Unit and PES 5000 Indoor Unit Must Operate Together
E-1-2
APPENDIX E - PES 5000
The PES 5000 is capable of accepting an optional Local Area Network (LAN) interface circuit card for
Ethernet or for Token-Ring. The LAN interface cards for PES 5000 are physically different from the
LAN PLCs used on the PES X000 series turboport card.
Pictured in figure 1-2, the PES 5000 indoor unit and PES 5000 outdoor unit are designed to operate
together and cannot be connected to other PES X000 series indoor or outdoor units. The PES 5000
outdoor unit has a fixed output power of 0.5 Watts or 1.0 Watt, depending upon the unit ordered (table
1-3). The fixed output power of PES 5000 requires slightly different ranging procedures than the
adjustable output power of other PES X000 series products.
The PES 5000 system is capable of receiving both analog and digital TVRO satellite video broadcast
signals.
The PES 5000 inroute modulation technique differs from all other PES products. Therefore, PES 5000
inroutes must operate on a separate frequency than other PES inroutes and must have the appropriate
demodulation equipment at the Hub. If the proper demodulation equipment and separate inroute
frequencies are provided, a PES customer can operate a mix of PES 5000 remotes and other PES X000
series remotes.
PES 5000
PES 5000 INDOOR UNIT
OPTIONAL LAN
PES 5000
INTERFACE OUTDOOR UNIT
IPC TRM COAX IFL
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
PLUG - IN CARD CARD
PLC
BUILT - IN
PLC
PS31832.fh3
Figure 1-3. PES 5000 - Simplified Diagram
E-1-3
Table 1-1. Comparison - PES 5000 and Other PES X000 Series (PES 6000, PES 8000, HDC)
PES 5000 PES 6000, PES 8000, HDC

Frequency Bands Supported Ku-Band Only Ku-Band, options
C-Band (various options)
Port Card Functions Provided by built-in integrated Provided by plug-in port cards
port card (IPC). PES 5000 does such as: DP, MP, TP, VDPC and
not accept plug-in port cards. CPC
Local Area Network (LAN) Provided by optional LAN Provided by LAN PLC on turbo
Functions interface module (future product) port card (TP)
IDU Chassis Options 2 EIA-232 ports standard; 1 1 slot, 4 slot, 13 slot including
optional EIA-232, EIA-422, V.35 LAN, voice ports and
or relay-backup PLCs; new non-EIA-232 (EIA-422, V.35,
field-installable Ethernet or token relay-backup) serial ports
ring LAN card
Outroute Bit Rates 512 kbps 512 kbps, 128 kbps, 128 kbps
spread
TVRO Support Digital, Analog with larger Digital, Analog with larger
dishes. dishes.
VSAT Transmit Power .5w or 1.0w (Note: equivalent to .5w, 1.0w or 2.0w
.32 or .63w for antenna sizing - adjustable transmit power
purposes) - fixed transmit power
Outdoor Unit No status communication Digital communication between
- Monitor and Control between Outdoor Unit and Indoor Outdoor Unit Status/Power
Unit indicators and Indoor Unit
Inroute Compatability Not compatible with X000 or Compatible with all earlier PESs
other earlier generation PES
Inroute Bit Rates 64 kbps, or 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps, 256 kbps
Inroute Spacing 260 kHz @ 64 kbps* 200 kHz @ 64 kbps
(Min. spacing required) 460 kHz @128 kbps* 400 kHz @ 128 kbps
800 kHz @ 256 kbps
Minimum Antenna Size 1.0m or 0.75m .75m with 128 kbps spread
Link Budget Dependent outroute
Dial Backup Support Automatic Dial Backup (ADB, ADB and Fail-Safe (Relay)
ports 1-2, 3-4) and Fail-Safe Backup
(Relay) Backup (ports 3-4 only)
* Minimum inroute spacing for PES 5000 depends on the satellite used and the service provided.
Networks configured for ALOHA-only inroute access can tolerate closer spacing. The spacings shown
above are adequate for typical domestic applications.
E-1-4
Table 1-1. Comparison - PES 5000 and Other PES X000 Series
(PES 6000, PES 8000, HDC) (Continued)
PES 5000 PES 6000, PES 8000, HDC
64 kbps Inroute Burst 2 slots per burst, 7 bytes/slot 1 slot per burst, 6 bytes/slot
Overhead
128 kbps Inroute Burst 1 slot per burst, 8 bytes/slot 1 slot per burst, 8 bytes/slot
Overhead
IFL Same cable and connectors, slope Custom 50 ohm
compensation increases
maximum length (see tables 3-1
and 3-2)
Fiber MUX (mall Not supported - requires Supported
applications) nonexistent debug port modem
control signals
DRAM Holdup Time 10 minutes 10 minutes
Satellite Shift May waste transponder power Adjustable transmit power
(e.g., SBS IV to Galaxy VII) resulting in higher expense prevents transponder power waste
IFM IF Loopback Mode Initiated on installer command. Supported, requires external
IFL cable must be disconnected loopback cable
Front Panel LED Values In some cases not identical. See No change from X000 to X000+
chapter 14
1.2 PES 5000 SPECIFICATIONS

Figure 1-4 gives the PES 5000 indoor unit dimensions. Table 1-2 lists the PES 5000 power consumption.
Note that the current is very nonsinusoidal for a switching type power supply as used in the PES 5000
(this is a consideration when selecting the capacity of an Uninterruptible Power Supply, UPS, to operate
the PES).
E-1-5
ALLOW 6" BEHIND UNIT

FOR MINIMUM IFL CABLE BEND
RADIUS OR USE RIGHT ANGLE
"N" CONNECTOR.
12"
25" 11.5"
16.
4.25"
5000
tation
th S
Ear
onal
ES
Pers
GH
HU
PS31836.FH3
Figure 1-4. PES 5000 Indoor Unit Dimensions
Table 1-2. PES 5000 Power Consumption, Domestic Power Supply
Parameter Measured* Max Possible
Current 1.4 A rms 3.0 A rms

Voltage 116 Vac 90-130 Vac
VA 162 V-A 270 V-A (estimated)
Power 103W 160W
Frequency 60 Hz 47-63 Hz
*Measured for typical configuration

(0.5W Outdoor Unit, Plug-in RS-232 PLC present,
LAN expansion dummy board present)
E-1-6
1.3 PES 5000 MAJOR ASSEMBLIES

Table 1-3 lists the part numbers for the PES 5000 outdoor units. Note the location on the PES 5000
Outdoor Unit of the part number markings as shown in figure 1-5. Ignore part number markings in other
locations. Table 1-4 lists the part numbers of the assemblies of the PES 5000 indoor units. Figure 1-7
identifies the assemblies of the PES 5000 indoor unit.
Table 1-3. PES 5000 Outdoor Units (PES 5000 ODUs)
Downlink
(+)
90 10 0
100 90
80
80 7
70
0
60
60
50
50
40
40
30
20 30
10 20
10
PART NUMBER IDENTIFICATION IGNORE POLARIZATION SCALE MARKINGS

FOR PES 5000 OUTDOOR UNIT ON FRONT BRACKET.
(IGNORE OTHER P/N MARKINGS) (USE MARKINGS ON REAR BRACKET)
PS31865.FH3
POLARIZATION LOCKING SCREWS
PS31820B.FH3
Figure 1-5. PES 5000 Outdoor Unit: Rear, Perspective and Side Views
E-1-7
Table 1-4. Part Numbers for PES 5000 Indoor Unit - Replacement Parts
Item HNS
Number Part Number Description
-- 1017512-0001 Complete PES 5000 Indoor Unit (includes items 1 and 2 below), 110 vac
1 1020002-0001 PES 5000 Domestic Power Supply, 110 Vac, field replaceable unit kit
2 1020003-0001 Internal Plate Assembly (Includes IPC and TRM Circuit Cards) with
label for 110 Vac operation.
-- 1017512-0002 Complete PES 5000 Indoor Unit (includes items 1A and 2A below)
110 - 240 vac, International Applications
1A 1020002-0002 PES 5000 Universal Power Supply, 110 - 240 Vac, field replaceable
unit kit
2A 1020003-0002 Internal Plate Assembly (Includes IPC and TRM Circuit Cards) with
label for 110 - 240 Vac, international operation
3 TBD Optional Ethernet LAN Interface Circuit Card

4 TBD Optional Token Ring LAN Interface Circuit Card
1 TRO
P
3 TROP
IPC CIRCUIT CARD

PS31883.FH3
TRM CIRCUIT CARD
Figure 1-6. PES 5000 Internal Plate Assembly
E-1-8
TOP VIEW, COVER REMOVED
INTEGRATED PORT CARD (IPC)

CIRCUIT CARD
INTERNAL PLATE ASSEMBLY 2

(INCLUDES IPC AND TRM)
1 PES 5000
POWER SUPPLY

PORT 3 PORT 1
4 AUTO
TVRO OUT
IFL
SLOT FOR
REAR VIEW OPTIONAL LAN TRANSMIT/RECEIVE MODULE (TRM)
INTERFACE CIRCUIT CARD
CIRCUIT CARD
PS31746.FH3
Figure 1-7. PES 5000 Indoor Unit Major Assemblies
E-1-9
PES GENERAL REFERENCE MANUAL 6-28-95
Section 2
UPGRADING PES 5000
2.1 INSTALLING PLUG-IN PLC

Any of the small PLCs listed in table 2-1 may be installed in the PES 5000 plug-in PLC socket. Refer to
figure 2-1 to gain access to the interior of the PES 5000 indoor unit. Remove power from the unit by
unplugging the power cord before beginning disassembly. Remove the two screws (3/4" long) from the
upper corners of the rear of the indoor unit. Remove the two screws (1/2" long) from the bottom front
area of the indoor unit. Lift the cover off of the indoor unit.
PORT 3 PORT 1
AUTO
REMOVE SCREWS FROM CAUTION: DISCONNET POWER
UPPER REAR CORNERS

TVRO OUT
IFL
REAR VIEW
REMOVE SCREWS FROM

BOTTOM FRONT CORNERS
BOTTOM VIEW
LIFT COVER OFF
000
on 5
Stati
rth
l Ea
ona
ES
Pers
GH
PS31835.FH3 HU
Figure 2-1. Gaining Access to PES 5000 Indoor Unit Interior
As shown in figure 2-2, orient the cut corner of the PLC toward the front of the unit. Use the minimum
force necessary to properly seat the PLC, because the IPC card will flex.
E-2-1
CUT CORNER
OF PLC OUTLINE
PS31833.FH3
TOP VIEW, COVER REMOVED
Figure 2-2. Orient PLC Cut Corner toward Front
Table 2-1. Port Level Conversion (PLC) Modules for PES 5000
RS-232 3000066-0001 Small - MP, TP, Provides two RS-232 ports

CPC, VDPC or IPC
RS-422/RS-485 1012327-0001 Small - MP, TP, Provides two RS-422/

CPC, VDPC or IPC RS-485 ports
Modem Backup 3000206-0001 Small - MP, TP, Provides one RS-232 port A
("Fail Safe PLC") CPC, VDPC or IPC and one metallically connected
backup port B for use during
space link failure.
Can be operated to provide
two RS-232 ports with
special wiring for port B
V.35 1013130-0001 Small - MP, TP, Provides two V.35 ports

CPC, VDPC or IPC
E-2-2
6-28-95
6-28-95
SECTION 3 - CABLING FOR PES 5000
Section 3
CABLING FOR PES 5000
3.1 PES 5000 IFL CABLING

PES 5000 IFL cabling is similar to IFL cabling for other PES X000 series products. The same connectors
and cable types are used. The required cable standard run lengths for PES 5000 (table 3-1) are different
than for other PES X000 series products. Likewise, the required cable extended run lengths for PES 5000
(table 3-2) are different than for other PES X000 series products.
Table 3-1. PES 5000 IFL Cable Types - Ku Band Standard Run Lengths
IFL HNS Part Cable Outside
Cable Run Number for Diameter
Length Cable Type (inches - max) Cable Type*
Non-Plenum
(Standard Run)
30 to 180 ft 1010810-0001 .220 Type I
105 to 860 ft 1010812-0001 .412 Type III
Plenum
25 to 180 ft 1010807-0001 .202 Type I
75 to 590 ft 1010809-0001 .362 Type III
*Note: Type I and Type III refer to types of coaxial IFL cable, not to
the PES type. Incidently, PES Type I uses a 9-twisted pair IFL cable.
Table 3-2. PES 5000 IFL Extended Cable Run Lengths

Min. Max.
HNS Andrew TX Atten Length Length
Cable Type Part Number Part Number (dB/ft) (ft) (ft)
3/8" Heliax Non-Plenum -- LDF2-50 .0420 61 980
3/8" Heliax Riser-Rated -- LDF2RN-50 .0420 61 980
1/2" Heliax, Non-Plenum 9001684-0016 LDF4-50A .0282 180 1560
1/2" Heliax, Riser-Rated 9001684-0017 LDF4RN-50A .0282 180 1560
1/2" Heliax, MIL-SPEC -- 202071-1 .0282 180 1560
7/8" Heliax -- LDF5-50 -- -- --
7/8" Heliax, Non-Plenum -- LDF5-50A .0159 315 2770
7/8" Heliax, Riser-Rated 9001684-0002 LDRF5RN-50A .0159 315 2770
1 1/4" Heliax, Non-Plenum -- LDF6-50 .0117 430 3710
1 1/4" Heliax, Riser-Rated 9001684-0003 LDF6RN-50 .0117 430 3710
1 5/8" Heliax, Non-Plenum -- LDF7-50A .0101 500 4370
1 5/8" Heliax, Riser-Rated 9001684-0004 LDF7RN-50A .0101 500 4370
E-3-1
3.2 PES 5000 VIDEO CABLING

Refer to Chapter 9 Section 6 for PES video cabling procedures and cable run lengths. For all practical
purposes, PES 5000 video run lengths are the same as other PES X000 series products.
E-3-2
Section 4
PES 5000 SITE COMMISSIONING PARAMETERS - DIALOG
4.1 OVERVIEW
Using the dialog function to enter site commissioning parameters for PES 5000 is quite similar to the
process used for other PES X000 series products. The same DIU Configuration Editor program is used
on the service computer. As listed in table 4-1, the design characteristics of PES 5000 define certain
parameter selections for PES 5000.
When the site commissioning computer shows the following display, enter 2 to select X000 series for
PES 5000 (even though the PES 5000 does not have an IFM as indicated in the display).
----------------------------------------------------------------------

3) Exit
----------------------------------------------------------------------
After you complete the dialog entries of table 4-1, enter the network parameters for the PES 5000. The
network parameters are similar to other PES X000 series products. Refer to step 9 in Chapter 10 Section
3, page 10-3-10.
E-4-1
Table 4-1. Dialog Selections for PES 5000

PES 5000
Screen Display Selection Comment/Explanation
Modify space link modem parameters (y/n): y
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Outroute spectral spreading 00 PES 5000 does not operate with spectral
(01=enable, 00=disable): 00 ??> spreading.
Receive Only IFM 00 PES 5000 is always transmit/receive.
(RO=01, TR=00): 00 ??>
Spectral Inversion 00 PES 5000 is not spectral inversion.
Data Rates (kbps)
Outr (02=1664, 01=512, 00=128): 00 ??> 01 Outroute for PES 5000 is always 512 kbps.
Inr (02=256, 01=128, 00=64): 00 ??> 01 or 00 As assigned.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Modify port card parameters? (y/n): y
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Is this an EDIU? (y/n): n PES 5000 is not an EDIU or HDC.
Remote Base Address MSB: XX-- assigned
value
SLOT 1 Base Address LSB: --XX ??> assigned
value
Type (00np 01tr 02ro): 00 ??> 01 The integrated port card (IPC) is considered
to occupy "slot 1" even though PES 5000
does not have physical port card slots. PES
5000 is always transmit/receive.
SLOT 2 Base Address LSB: --XX ??> FF
Type (00np 01tr 02ro) ??> 00 Slots 2 thru 4 must be 00, not present, for
PES 5000.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ranged Power Level: 00 For PES 5000, this value does not represent
Ranged Timing Offset: F664 "ranged power level" because PES 5000
outdoor units have a fixed power level.
Rather, after ranging is completed, this value
indicates the remote’s signal strength as it is
received at the hub. See page E-5-3.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial Power Level: 00 ??> 00 Initial power level is not meaningful for the
fixed (nonadjustable) output power of the
PES 5000 outdoor units (0.5W or 1.0W).
PES 5000 power is not adjusted during
ranging.
Initial Timing Offset: 0000 ??> "Timing PES 5000 timing offset is adjusted during
offset ranging.
(ticks)"
from
LATLONG
E-4-2
Section 5
PES 5000 ANTENNA AIMING
5.1 ANTENNA AIMING, SETTING POLARIZATION ON CIRCULAR ANTENNAS

Antenna aiming for PES 5000 is similar to other PES X000 products. Exercise care when setting PES
5000 polarization on a circular antenna. Your PES 5000 outdoor unit may have two polarization scales:
one on the front bracket and one on the rear bracket. Only the polarization scale on the rear bracket,
figure 5-1, is valid. Also note that the polarization scale on the PES 5000 outdoor unit is marked in 2
degree increments (as opposed to 0.5 degree increments on the light weight 1.0 M antenna polarization
scale, or 1 degree increments on the RF Unit). The PES 5000 outdoor unit has two polarization clamping
screws, as shown in figure 1-5 on page E-1-7.
CLAMPING SCREW
(+)
90 10 0
100 90
80
80 7
70
0
60
60
50
50
40
40
30
20 30
10 20
10
PART NUMBER IDENTIFICATION

FOR PES5000 OUTDOOR UNIT
(IGNORE OTHER P/N MARKINGS)
PES31864.DRW
Figure 5-1. PES 5000 Outdoor Unit Rear Polarization Scale
E-5-1
5.2 INSTALL MODE ANTENNA AIMING INDICATION

As indicated in table 5-1, the meter indications during INSTALL mode for PES 5000 differ slightly from
other PES X000 products.
Table 5-1. Voltmeter Indications During Install Mode

PES X000 Other Than PES 5000 PES 5000
Approx. 10.0 to 8.5 volts* Approx. 9 volts to 8.5 volts
Receiver ACG circuits not detecting a received Receiver ACG circuits not detecting a received
signal (or a very weak signal). signal (or a very weak signal).
Normal frequency sweep time: 0.2 seconds Normal frequency sweep time: 0.2 seconds
Approx. 10.0 volts to 5.0 volts Approx. 9 volts to 5 volts
Indication related to receiver ACG. A lower Indication related to receiver ACG. A lower
voltage indicates a smaller AGC level, voltage indicates a smaller AGC level,
indicating a stronger outroute signal. indicating a stronger outroute signal.
Adjust antenna for minimum indication. Allow Adjust antenna for minimum indication. Allow
time for meter to go below 5.0 volts (AGC range time for meter to go below 5.0 volts (AGC range
to Eb/No range). to Eb/No range).
If meter stays slightly above 5.0 volts for more If meter stays slightly above 5.0 volts for more
than three minutes, either: than three minutes, either:
antenna is pointed at wrong satellite OR antenna is pointed at wrong satellite OR
wrong carrier ID entered in indoor unit OR wrong carrier ID entered in indoor unit OR
no active port card configured. no active port card configured.
5.0 volts to 0.0 volts 5.0 volts to 0.0 volts
Indication related to Eb/No with a decrease of Indication related to Eb/No with a decrease of
approximately 0.4 volts per dB where: approximately 0.4 volts per dB where:
Indication Eb/No Signal Quality Indication Eb/No Signal Quality
5.0v 5 dB poor 5.0v 5 dB poor
less than 2.2v >12 dB good less than 2.2v >12 dB good
When indication goes below 5.0 volts, IFM has When indication goes below 5.0 volts, IPC has
detected SHF for ISBN outroute with the correct detected SHF for ISBN outroute with the correct
carrier ID for the customer for this site. carrier ID for the customer for this site.
POINT ANTENNA FOR MINIMUM POINT ANTENNA FOR MINIMUM
INDICATION INDICATION
AGC = Automatic Gain Control

Eb/No = A measured approximation of signal-to-noise ratio
ISBN = Integrated Satellite Business Network
SFH = Superframe Header
* All pointing voltage values are approximate. The maximum pointing voltage actually observed is variable.
E-5-2
SECTION 5 - PES 5000 ANTENNA AIMING
5.3 PES 5000 RANGING AND RECEIVED SIGNAL STRENGTH AT HUB

The ranging process for PES 5000 differs from the ranging process for other PES X000 series products
because the PES 5000 outdoor units have a fixed output power of 0.5W or 1.0W rather than the adjustable
output power of the RF Unit used with other X000 series products. At the remote, transmit power is not
adjusted. Nevertheless, the ranging process is still very important because the timing offset value is
adjusted and because the remote is checked for the correct transmit signal strength.
The initial power lever entered into the dialog program is not meaningful for PES 5000 and is ignored by
the ranging process for PES 5000. Entering 00 for this value may serve as a reminder that it is ignored.
For PES 5000, the "ranged power level" represents the signal strength of the remote’s transmission as it is
received by the hub (differs from other X000 series where it represents setting of remotes adjustable
transmit power). For PES 5000, the hexadecimal value corresponds to the Automatic Gain Control
(AGC) setting of the hub’s receiver for this remote, as listed below and summarized in table 5-2. The
"ranged power level" hexadecimal value may be observed by performing a read and using the dialog
function after the ranging process has been completed. Also, the hexadecimal value may be observed as
"INROUTE pwr: NN" in the monitor function display on the service computer.
• Each hex increment equals 0.2 dB of AGC
• 80 hex corresponds to 0 dB AGC
• Values greater than 80 hex are positive AGC values. The more positive the AGC value, the
stronger the remote’s transmission was received at the hub.
• Values less than 80 hex are negative AGC values. The more negative the AGC value, the
weaker the received signal.
• The acceptable range is from 1C hex (-14 dB) to E4 hex (+14 dB).
• Values outside the acceptable range cause the IPC LED code 3/blank. to be displayed
indicating AGC value outside boundary once the ranging process is complete.
E-5-3
Table 5-2. Using Ranging to Verify Correct PES 5000 Inroute Power
"Ranged Power Level"
or
Monitor INROUTE pwr: AGC Level
Hex Value at Hub INTERPRETATION CORRECTIVE ACTION
00 . ↑ 1. Improve antenna aiming.
. . Remote’s signal 2. Check IFL cable length and
. . too weak, type. Check IFL connectors
. . IPC displays 3. If above OK and using 0.5W
. . 3/BLANK. outdoor unit, try substituting
. . | 1.0W outdoor unit. Repeat
1A . | ranging.
1B -14.2 dB ↓ 4. Use larger antenna
1C -14 dB ↑ ↑
1D -13.8 dB | |
. . | |
. . | |
. . | |
7F -0.2 dB Acceptable range. |
80 0 dB IPC displays 3/b. None required
81 +0.2 dB | |
. . | |
. . | |
. . | |
E3 +13.8 dB | |
E4 +14 dB ↓ ↓
E5 +14.2 dB ↑ If using 1.0W outdoor unit, try

. . Remote’s signal substituting 0.5W outdoor unit.
. . too strong, Repeat ranging.
. . IPC displays
. . 3/BLANK.
FF . ↓
For PES 5000, it is assumed that the remote is being installed on a hub that has autocommissioning.
Perform the following steps to perform autocommissioning (auto ranging) for PES 5000:
STEP 1. Configure the PES 5000 indoor unit with the proper parameters, as previously described. The
initial power level offset should be set to 00 for PES 5000 (differs from other PES X000
products). Note that the parameters must include an initial estimate at timing (initial timing
offset), computed by the LATLONG function based on the site latitude and longitude.
STEP 2. Start the auto commissioning process (automatic ranging) by placing the PES 5000 indoor
unit in the COMM (ranging) mode.
E-5-4
SECTION 5 - PES 5000 ANTENNA AIMING
Use the site commissioning computer SWITCH function to place the PES indoor unit in the
COMM (ranging) mode.
--------------------------------------------------------------
X
Hit <ENT> to exit.
--------------------------------------------------------------
Exit the SWITCH function to cause the mode change to take effect. Observe reset on LED.
NOTE: Although not recommended, the COMM (ranging) mode may be entered by using a
toothpick or similar object to press the recessed AUTO COMM switch on the rear of the IPC.
The switch is effective only if the unit is in NORMAL mode.
The IF LED should reset and progress to displaying [r]/[BLANK.] indicating that ranging is
in effect and that the IOC is in receive sync. The IPC LED sequence during ranging is
similar to the sequence shown on page 10-4-3 except the IPC does not display [1]/[2.]
STEP 3. After approximately 30 minutes, if Link Quality Test (LQT) is enabled (or after 10 minutes if
the LQT is disabled), the integrated port card (IPC) LED should display [3]/[b.] or
[3]/[BLANK.] indicating that ranging has been completed. If the display is [3]/[b.], the
remote’s signal as received at the Hub falls within the acceptable signal strength range. If the
display is [3]/[BLANK.], the signal is outside the acceptable range.
STEP 4. At the site commissioning computer enter read<ENTER>.
Enter dialog<ENTER>. At the "Modify ranging parameters? (y/n):" prompt,
answer yes by entering y<ENTER> to view the parameters. The display is in the following
format:

--------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------
Note the values for ranged power level and ranged timing offset. If the IPC display is
[3]/[b.], the remote’s signal as received at the Hub falls within the acceptable signal strength
range and the "ranged power level" value falls between 1C and E4 inclusive (table 5-2).
Proceed to step 6.
If the IPC display is [3]/[BLANK.], skip to step 7.
STEP 6. At this point, edit the initial values to be equal to the final ranged values (unless you have
been given specific instructions to the contrary). Issue a site commissioning computer
WRITE command to transfer the contents of the site commissioning computer database to
the PES 5000 EEPROM.
E-5-5
Return the PES to NORMAL mode, using the SWITCH function. The ranging process has
now been successfully completed.
STEP 7. When IPC display is [3]/[BLANK.], check the "Ranged Power Level" value to determine if
the remote’s signal is too weak or too strong (table 5-2).
If the "Ranged Power Level" value is between 00 and 1B, the remote’s signal is too weak.
a. Improve the antenna aiming.
b. Check IFL cable length, type, and connectors.
c. If above are OK and using 0.5W PES 5000 outdoor unit, try substituting a 1.0W
PES 5000 outdoor unit. Repeat ranging.
d. Verify the antenna is sized appropriately for the location.
If the "Ranged Power Level" value is between E5 and FF, the remote’s signal is too strong. If
using 1.0W PES 5000 outdoor unit, try substituting a 0.5W PES 5000 outdoor unit. Repeat
ranging. If using 0.5W PES 5000 outdoor unit and the remote’s signal is still too strong,
check that to see if too large an antenna has been assigned for your site.
E-5-6
Section 6
PES 5000 LED INDICATIONS
6.1 NORMAL OPERATION

During normal operation, the PES 5000 indoor unit Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) (figure 6-1) indicate a
flashing decimal ([BLANK]/[BLANK.]) on both LEDs. This indication means that the PES 5000 is
receiving the proper spacelink signal and is transmitting (or is capable of transmitting) a spacelink signal.
Both LEDs are physically located on the IPC circuit card. The left-hand LED, designated the IF LED,
indicates the status of the indoor and outdoor equipment. The right-hand LED, designated the IPC LED
(integrated port card), indicates the status of the areas of the IPC circuit card that provide the port card
functions.

BLINKING DOT
INDICATES
NORMAL
HUGHES
NETWORK SYSTEMS
Subsidiary of
LEFT-HAND LED (IF)

BLINKING DOT
INDICATES
NORMAL
OPERATION
PS31741.FH3
6.2 LEFT-HAND LED, IF LED, INDICATIONS

The left-hand LED, the IF LED, indications for PES 5000 are listed in Chapter 14 Section 4.
6.3 RIGHT-HAND LED, IPC LED, INDICATIONS

The right-hand LED, designated the IPC LED (integrated port card), are listed in Chapter 14 Section 3
along with the other PES port card indications. Where the IPC indications differ from the other port
cards, separate subsections are labeled "IPC."
E-6-1
6-28-95
6-28-95
SECTION 7 - PES 5000 DIAGNOSE MODE
Section 7
PES 5000 DIAGNOSE MODE
In the PES Model 5000 systems, the diagnose mode can be used to assist in locating faults and at
installation to verify proper operation. Diagnose mode tests and power-up self-tests may indicate that a
particular circuit card (IPC, TRM, Plug-In PLC, or LAN Interface circuit card) in the PES 5000 indoor
unit is defective. In a given situation, the most practical repair may be to replace the internal plate
assembly or to replace the entire PES 5000 indoor unit. Check with your appropriate HNS installation or
HNS service manager for the current policy in effect.
To run diagnose mode, first remove power from the PES indoor unit and DISCONNECT THE IFL
CABLE FROM THE REAR OF THE PES 5000. Note that the IFL cable has to be disconnected in
order to run the diagnostic IFL loopback test successfully.
Connect a site commissioning computer to the PES 5000 service connector marked MAINTENANCE.
Apply power to the site commissioning computer and the PES indoor unit. Select 2 for PES Model X000
when the screen displays:
----------------------------------------------------------------------

3) Exit

----------------------------------------------------------------------
At the main menu, enter SWITCH <ENTER> to select the SWITCH function. Use the < key to move
the X under DIAG so the display shows:
----------------------------------------------------------------------
X
Hit <ENT> to exit.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Exit the switch function. The PES 5000 resets, performs self-tests and begins a series of diagnose mode
tests. Within a few minutes, the diagnose mode should be successfully completed with the IPC LED
displaying 2/3. and the IF LED displaying d/E. Table 7-1 lists these successful indications.
Table 7-1. Indications Upon Successful Completion of PES 5000 Diagnose Mode
LED Indicator LED Codes
IF LED [d]/[E.]
IPC LED [2]/[3.]
E-7-1
Note that if one of the diagnostic tests fails, the PES 5000 enters a diagnose failure state where the IF
LED displays 6/2. if no alarm is present and the IPC LED displays the corresponding failure code for the
test (table 7-2). If an alarm is posted before the board enters the diagnose failure state, then the IF LED
displays the corresponding alarm codes rather than 6/2. (see pages 14-4-4 and 14-4-5). Note that if a
diagnostic test fails, no further tests are performed, the LED displays will continue to display their failure
codes.
The diagnose mode sequence of tests follows. Refer to the indicated table for appropriate corrective
action.
1. Upon receiving the DIAG switch command, the PES 5000 resets.
2. Following reset, the PES 5000 performs its standard self tests. If any of these tests fail, the PES 5000
enters shutdown state and displays the corresponding code on its LED display on the IPC LED (table
7-3). If no alarm is present before the shutdown, then the IF LED displays 6/1. Otherwise, the IF
LED displays the appropriate alarm code (see pages 14-4-4 and 14-4-5).
3. Then, the PES 5000 runs a destructive RAM test while it is in progress, the IPC LED displays 2/0.
and the IF LED shows d/blank. Note that the state and status codes of the two LEDs are displayed in
sync. The failure codes are:
IF LED 6/2.
IPC LED 2/r.
4. After the RAM test, the PES 5000 initiates a standard complement of power-up self tests. Again, if
any of these tests fail, the PES 5000 enters shutdown state and displays the corresponding code on its
LED display on the IPC LED (table 7-3). If no alarm is present before the shutdown, then the IF
LED shows 6/1. In addition to these tests, the PLL test is executed. The PLL failure codes are:
IF LED 6/2.
IPC LED 2/A.
5. If all the power-up self tests have been successfully run, the SDLC loopback test is performed. This is
a special test that is run only in diagnose mode. Basically, it is a loopback test performed on each port
on the PLCs - the built-in PLC and the external PLC if available. It loops back some data packets on
the PLC in order to verify the SCC and DMA transfer logic. Note that there is no LED code to
indicate that the test is in progress.
The failure codes are:
PLC 1 PLC 2 (if available)
IF LED 6/2. IF LED 6/2.

IPC LED 2/d. IPC LED 2/E.
6. Following the SDLC loopback test, the IF and IFL loopback tests are performed. These loopback tests
verify the ability to receive and transmit. The IF loopback consists of a smaller loop than the IFL
loopback. It just tests the baseband transmission logic on the IPC (figure 7-1).
The following LED codes indicate that the IF loopback test is in progress:
IF LED d/F. or d/E.
IPC LED 2/2.
E-7-2
The failure LED codes are:

IF LED 6/2.
IPC LED 2/8.
7. If the IF loopback passes, then the IFL loopback test begins (figure 7-1). This test verifies all the
transmit and receive logic on both IPC and TRM. Note that the IFL cable has to be disconnected in
order to make the test work.
The following LED codes indicate that the IFL loopback is in progress:
IF LED d/E. or d/F.
IPC LED 2/L.
The LED failure codes for the IFL loopback test are:
IF LED 6/2.
IPC LED 2/J.
8. Eventually, if all tests pass, the PES 5000 stays in diagnose state until reset and displays the following
LED codes:
IF LED d/E.
IPC LED 2/3.
NOTE
If the IFL cable and outdoor unit are attached, diagnose mode should fail
with the IPC LED indicating 2/J.. If diagnose passes when the IFL cable
and outdoor unit are connected, it is an indication that IFL cable or the
outdoor unit is defective.
For PES 5000, there is no monitor and status communication from the
outdoor unit to the indoor unit (differs from other PES X000 series
products).
E-7-3
LNB (RECEIVE)
O
M
T
MUX./
LNB DEMUX. TRANSMIT
IFL
PES 5000
MONITOR OUTDOOR
POINTING
UNIT
CONNECTOR
IFL CABLE
OPTIONAL LAN INTERFACE IPC

CIRCUIT CARD
CIRCUIT CARD
PLUG-IN SOFTWARE
PLC
DIAGNOSE MODE
TEST DATA SDI DEMOD
IF LOOPBACK
ASIC ASIC
BUILT-IN PCI IOC 225 OBW

ANALOG
PLC ASIC ASIC ASIC
TRM
ANALOG
PES 5000 TRM

INDOOR UNIT CIRCUIT CARD IFL
IFL LOOPBACK
ABBREVIATIONS IFL CABLE

MUST BE DISCONNECTED
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit TO RUN DIAGNOSE
IF Intermediate Frequency
IFL Interfacility Link
IPC Integrated Port Card
LAN Local Area Network
OMT Orthomode Transducer
PCI Port Card Interface
PLC Port Level Conversion Module
SDI Satellite Data Interface
TRM Transmit/Receive Module
TR2 Tx/Rx 5000 Unit
PS31837.FH3
Figure 7-1. PES 5000 Simplified Functional Diagram - Diagnose Mode Loopback
E-7-4
Table 7-2. Diagnose Mode LED Codes
IF LED IPC LED Description Corrective Action
d/BLANK. 2/0. Test in progress None required.

Destructive RAM test in progress,
no failures yet. Note that this
state/status. display is in sync with
the IF LED display.
6/2. 2/r. Diagnose Destructive RAM test Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
failed
During diagnose mode (while IPC
LED is flashing 2/0.), a destructive
RAM test is run. This fills the
entire contents of RAM with a
nonrepeating pattern and so is more
extensive than a power-up RAM
test.
6/2. 2/A. PLL test failure Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
Test of rate multiplier using 8530 on
PLC 1 failed.
6/2. 2/d. PLC 1 failed a diagnostic self test Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
6/2. 2/E. PLC 2 failed a diagnostic self test Replace PLC 2.
d/E. or 2/2. IF Loopback Test in progress None required.
d/F. Baseband loopback test
(inroute-to-outroute loopback on the
IPC only) in progress. This test
only exercises the baseband receive
and transmit logic.
6/2. 2/8. IF Loopback test failed Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
Failure probable on IPC circuit card.
d/E. or d/F. 2/L. IFL Loopback test in progress None required.
Inroute-to-outroute loopback on the
IPC and TRM is in progress. This
test exercises both digital and
analog receive and transmit logic.
6/2. 2/J. IFL loopback test failed. If IFL cable connected, disconnect
IFL cable, then run PES 5000
diagnose mode again. If IFL cable
disconnected and this code appears,
replace Internal Plate Assembly.
d/E. 2/3. All tests passed --
All diagnose tests, including
loopback, passed.
E-7-5
Table 7-3. PES 5000 Shutdown State LED Codes
6/1. 0/0. ROM checksum has failed Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
There is a two byte checksum stored
in the boot ROM which is checked
at power-up. If this fails, the card
enters 0/0.
6/1. 0/1. CPU test failure Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
The ROM runs a series of tests
exercising most of the instruction
set. If any fail, state 0/1. is entered.
6/1. 0/2. Internal timer test failure Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
The timers on the IPC’s 80C186 are
tested to verify register and counting
functions. If any of these tests fail,
the card enters 0/2.
6/1. 0/3. Non-Destructive RAM test failure Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
At power-up a non-destructive test
(one byte at a time) is performed
over the range of the RAM. This
test will test faulty locations, stuck
data bits, chips missing, etc., but
6/1. 0/4. DMAC read/write register test Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
failure
At startup a register read/write test
of the external DMAC used for
inroute/outroute is performed. No
actual DMA transfers take place
during the test. It just reads and
writes registers.
6/1. 0/7. UART self test fail Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
On the IPC this indicates a self-test
failure of the UART used for the
debug/config port.
6/1. 0/8. Address RAM test fail Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
This tests the 1K by 1 bit address
RAM used in filtering outroute data
packets.
6/1. 0/9. Master PIC test Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
This tests the 80C186 internal
interrupt logic for the IPC by
generating an interrupt and verifying
several status items during and after
the ISR.
E-7-6
Table 7-3. PES 5000 Shutdown State LED Codes (Continued)
6/1. 0/A. Slave PIC interrupt test failure Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
This tests the slave PIC. First a
register read/write test is done. Then
interrupts from the duart are
generated and checked.
6/1. 0/c. PLC number 1 failed Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
This fault appears on the IPC if it
fails one of the PLC (Port Level
Conversion) cards’ self tests. PLC 1
is built into the motherboard and
PLC 2 mounts on top of the
motherboard.
6/1. 0/E. Bad configuration Parms Check DIU Configuration
The configuration message passed Parameters. See page 14-3-13.
from the IOC/IFM is range checked
for parameter errors.
6/1. 0/F. Illegal port card board type See page 14-3-13.
6/1. 0/H. PLC number 2 failed Replace plug-in PLC.
6/1. 0/h. PLC number 3 failed (optional Replace LAN interface circuit card.
LAN interface circuit card).
6/1. 0/o. RAM Boot Code Build Too Large Should not be seen in released
The RAM boot code build is bigger product. If seen in released product,
than the space allocated for it. contact HNS PES engineering.
6/1. 0/L. Undefined IDU Configuration Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
(IPC only)
These faults appear on IPC if the
ROM boot code detects an unknown
receive tuner type, IPC ID, 225
ASIC version or TRM ID.
6/1. 0/P. No Half Frame Interrupt Replace Internal Plate Assembly.
These faults appear on IPC if half
frame interrupt does not happen
within a certain period of time.
E-7-7
Section 8
PES 5000 POWER SUPPLY TEST
8.1 INTRODUCTION
The PES 5000 power supply may be tested quickly and conveniently by temporarily connecting a power
supply which is known to be good in place of the power supply which is suspected to be defective.
KNOWN-GOOD
POWER SUPPLY
5000
ion
Stat
rth
na l Ea
o
S Pers
HE
PS31885.FH3 HU
G
SUSPECTED - BAD
POWER SUPPLY
Figure 8-1. PES 5000 Power Supply Test
8.2 PROCEDURE
STEP 1. Remove the line power cord from the rear of the indoor unit. Remove top lid from chassis as
shown in figure 2-1 on page E-2-1. Remove the two screws located at the top/rear of chassis.
Remove the two recessed screws near the front/bottom of chassis. Remove top lid.
STEP 2. Remove power connector from the IPC card. Use a screwdriver to release the plastic latch
located underneath the wires on the connector (figure 9-2).
STEP 3. Remove green wire ground from internal unit plate. Note that there is a lockwasher
underneath the terminal lug.
STEP 4. Place the known-good power supply on top of the suspected-bad power supply. Attach the
power connector from the known-good power supply to the IPC card. Attach the green
ground wire from the known-good power supply to the stud on the internal plate. Attach the
line power cord to the rear of the known-good power supply.
STEP 5. Observe PES operation. If the undesired symptoms have been corrected, remove the
temporary connections and replace the suspected-bad power supply as described in section
E-8-1
9.2. If the undesired symptoms are still present, it is unlikely that the power supply is the
cause.
E-8-2
Section 9
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
Table 9-1 lists tools required for PES 5000 indoor unit component removal and replacement.
The PES 5000 indoor unit is constructed with a metal internal plate which can be removed from the metal
housing. The power supply, IPC, TRM, and metal rear panel are all attached to this internal plate. The
power supply is a field replaceable unit (FRU). The internal plate assembly, consisting of the IPC, TRM,
rear panel and internal metal (figure 1-6), is also a field replaceable unit (FRU). The PLCC ROM would
be replaced in the case of a firmware upgrade.
Table 9-1. PES 5000, Tools Required for Component Removal and Replacement
Required Tools:
Part Number Description Purpose
General reference manual, Model 5000 documentation Model 5000 information,

3000367, or 8020814 with package Appendix E for Diagnostic,
package update #8 LED codes and debug
practices
1/4 inch nutdriver Internal plate
Medium and large screw various

drivers, phillips
Medium and large flat blade various

screwdrivers
9004248-0134 PLCC chip extraction tool ROM replacement
NOTE
The internal plate with power supply attached must be removed from the
housing before the power supply or internal plate assembly can be
accessed. The internal plate assembly is is replaced as a unit in the field.
The IPC and TRM are not replaceable individually in the field.
E-9-1
9.1 DISMANTLING CHASSIS
9.1.1 REMOVING INTERNAL PLATE

Remove top lid from chassis as shown in figure 2-1 on page E-2-1. Remove the two screws located at the
top/rear of chassis. Remove the two recessed screws near the front/bottom of chassis. Remove top lid.
Internal Plate Unit Removal. As shown in figure 9-1, remove two screws located at the rear bottom of the
chassis. Use a flat blade screwdriver or a 1/4" nutdriver to remove three hex-head screws from internal
plate, opposite the power supply. Remove internal plate from chassis body.
REAR VIEW
PORT 3 PORT 1
AUTO
CAUTION: DISCONNET POWER

TVRO OUT
IFL
REMOVE TWO REAR SCREWS
REMOVE
THREE
SCREWS
(1/4" NUTDRIVER)
GND. DC POWER
PS31857.FH3 TOP VIEW, COVER REMOVED
Figure 9-1. Removing Internal Unit Plate
E-9-2
SECTION 9 - REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
9.1.2 INSTALLING METAL PLATE AND REASSEMBLING UNIT

Place internal plate into chassis body. Install three hex-head screws, opposite the power supply. Install
two screws into the rear panel at the bottom. Install chassis lid. Install rear panel screws at the top.
Install two screws from the bottom front area.
9.2 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT

Domestic Power Supply, 110 Vac, field replacement unit kit , P/N 1020002-0001
or
International Power Supply, 110-240 Vac, field replacement unit kit , P/N 1020002-0002
Remove the internal unit from the chassis as described in section 9.1.
STEP 1. With the internal unit removed, disconnect power supply.
STEP 2. Remove power connector from the IPC card. Use a screwdriver to release the plastic latch
located underneath the wires on the connector (figure 9-2).
STEP 3. Remove green wire ground from internal unit plate. Note that there is a lockwasher
underneath the terminal lug.
STEP 4. Turn power supply over to access power supply screws, figure 9-3. Remove four screws; the
power supply should be free.
STEP 5. Configure new power supply with the rubber bumper, cable tie mount and cable tie from the
FRU kit, as shown in the instruction sheet on page E-9-5
STEP 6. Position replacement power supply onto internal unit plate, install four screws.
STEP 7. Turn over the internal unit, connect power supply. Install green wire ground. Ensure that the
lockwasher is in place. Install power supply cable to the IPC.
STEP 8. Install internal unit into chassis as in section 9.1.2.
STEP 9. Connect power cord, IFL cable, and data connections. Verify proper operation.
E-9-3
SIDE VIEW TOP VIEW
1 2
POWER
SUPPLY
PRESS
TO
RELEASE
IPC
GND
PS31858.FH3
Figure 9-2. Power Supply Connector Detail
POWER
SUPPLY
SCREWS
PS31884.FH3
Figure 9-3. Internal Plate Assembly, Bottom View
E-9-4
Hughes Network Systems

Document # 8051946
INSTRUCTION SHEET
PES 5000 POWER SUPPLY
C PREPARATION
RUBBER
BUMPER TOP
VIEW
0.5 IN.
1 IN. RUBBER BUMPER
1) Remove backing and install rubber bumper

as indicated above. Position rubber
bumper so that it's center is one inch
from the side of the power supply.
APPROX. 1/8 IN.
2) Remove backing and install cable tie mount
as indicated.
APPROX. 1/8 IN.
3) Insert cable tie thru holes in cable tie

mount with the rough side of the
cable tie to the front.
CABLE TIE
MOUNT
4) Form the wires as shown, close cable tie,
cinch and clip off excess length of cable tie.
5) Install power supply in PES 5000 chassis.
CABLE TIE
HNS P/N DESCRIPTION

1020002-0001 Domestic Power Supply FRU kit OR
1020002-0002 International Power Supply FRU kit
1017132-0001 Domestic Power Supply OR

1016875-0001 International Power Supply
9001627-0001 Cable tie mount
9001323-0012 Cable tie
9006374-0002 Rubber Bumper
8051946 Instruction sheet
PS31887.FH3
E-9-5
9.3 INTERNAL PLATE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT

Domestic Internal Plate Assembly P/N 1020003-0001
International Internal Plate Assembly P/N 1020003-0002
STEP 1. Connect the service computer to the internal plate assembly to be replaced. Read the site
commissioning parameters into the service computer, if possible. Disconnect the service
computer. Remove power from the PES 5000. Remove the optional LAN interface circuit
card (if present) from the internal plate assembly to be replaced. Remove the internal unit
from the chassis as described in section 9.1.
STEP 2. Remove the power supply from the internal plate assembly to be replaced as described in
section 9.2 steps 1 thru 4.
STEP 3. Install the power supply on the internal plate assembly to be installed. Position power supply
onto internal unit plate, install four screws. Turn over the internal unit, connect power
supply. Install green wire ground. Ensure that the lockwasher is in place. Install power
supply cable to the IPC.
STEP 4. Remove the plug-in PLC (if present) from the internal plate assembly to be replaced and
install it on the replacement internal plate assembly.
STEP 5. Install internal unit inside the chassis as described in section 9.1.2.
STEP 6. If an optional LAN interface circuit card was present on the internal plate assembly to be
replaced, install it on the replacement internal plate assembly.
STEP 7. Connect power cord, IFL cable, and data connections. Connect service computer and load
site commission parameters. Verify proper operation.
9.4 REPLACING OR INSTALLING PLC 2

Remove chassis lid as in section 9.1.1.
Remove or install PLC 2 onto IPC. Use caution to position PLC correctly. Place cut corner closest to the
power supply, as shown in figure 2-2. Use the minimum force necessary to properly seat the PLC,
because the IPC card will flex.
Reinstall chassis lid.
E-9-6
9.5 IPC ROM REPLACEMENT

Remove chassis lid.
Locate IPC ROM, U15 near the front of the module, figure 9-4. ROM, 3001614-0001, is in the U15
socket. With extraction tool, HNS P/N 9004248-0134, remove the current ROM from U15. Install new
ROM into socket observing cut corner and Pin 1 designation.
Reinstall chassis lid.
U15
30016
14-00 CUT
01 A CORNER
0170c8ba
U15
PLCC
ROM
PS31861.FH3
Figure 9-4. IPC ROM Location
E-9-7

VSAT PES General Reference Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

VSAT PES General Reference Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

HUGHES

A Hughes Electronics Company

Installation and Service Manual

Personal Earth Station TM

1 INTRODUCTION TO MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-1

2 INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL EARTH STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-1

3 PES DOCUMENT LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-1

4 COMMUNICATIONS SATELLITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-1

5 SITE PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-1

6 ANTENNA MOUNTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-1

7 ANTENNA ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-0-1

8 ANTENNA ANTI-ICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-1

9 PES MODEL X000 SERIES CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-1

10 SITE COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-1

11 ANTENNA AIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1-1

12 VIDEO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1-1

14 LED DISPLAY LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1-1

16 SPECIAL OPERATIONS FOR TRS-80, MODEL 102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1-1

APPENDIX A - PES REMOTE ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1-1

APPENDIX B - INSTALLING PES MODEL 4000 (RECEIVE ONLY)

APPENDIX C - C-BAND FOR X000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1-1

APPENDIX D - PES X000+ PRODUCT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1-1

APPENDIX E - PES 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1-1

It is the installation subcontractor’s responsibility to develop a specific

1.3 UPDATES TO MANUAL

1.4 PAGE NUMBERING

Table 1-1. List of Effective Manual Sections as of June 28, 1995

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION TO MANUAL

CHAPTER 2. INTRODUCTION TO PERSONAL EARTH STATION

1 Integrated Satellite Business Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91

CHAPTER 3. PES DOCUMENT LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95

CHAPTER 4. COMMUNICATIONS SATELLITES

CHAPTER 5. SITE PREPARATION

CHAPTER 6. ANTENNA MOUNTS

1 Antenna Mount Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91

CHAPTER 7. ANTENNA ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95

1 0.75M and 1.0M Rectangular Antenna Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91

CHAPTER 8. ANTENNA ANTI-ICING

1 Anti-Icing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95

CHAPTER 9. PES MODEL X000 SERIES CABLING

1 Cabling Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91

CHAPTER 10. SITE COMMISSIONING

CHAPTER 11. ANTENNA AIMING

1 Overview and Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27-91

CHAPTER 12. VIDEO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TBD

CHAPTER 13. OPERATION

1 Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95

CHAPTER 14. LED DISPLAY LIST

1 Introduction to PES LED Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95

CHAPTER 15. TROUBLESHOOTING

CHAPTER 16. SPECIAL OPERATIONS FOR TRS-80, MODEL 102 . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5-91

APPENDIX A - PES REMOTE ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95

APPENDIX B - INSTALLING PES MODEL 4000 (RECEIVE ONLY)

APPENDIX C - C-BAND FOR X000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14-92

APPENDIX D - PES X000+ PRODUCT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20-93

APPENDIX E - PES 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28-95

1.2 INTEGRATED SATELLITE BUSINESS NETWORK SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

is a trademark of Hughes Network Systems, Inc.

2.1 PES MODELS AND TYPES

Table 2-1. PES Types and Models

PORT IOC AEU

PORT IOC IDM RFB COAX IFL

PES MODEL X000 SERIES

PORT IFM COAX IFL